Ir - 346-348CL - 23e Win 7

FCR XG-1/CR CL
CR-IR346/348CL
Service Manual
Document No. 010-054-23E

First Edition : Oct. 20, 2000
23rd Edition : Aug. 31, 2011
Printed in Japan
Export Restrictions Applying to this Equipment
Japanese export restrictions and foreign exchange regulations apply to
this equipment. Therefore, government approval obtained through due
procedure is required in order to export or otherwise remove such
equipment from Japan.
Note that the same restrictions and regulations apply not only to the
main unit but also to after-sale parts, service manuals and service
training (for exporting or transferring technology) when such items are
dispatched or shipped to foreign countries and when service training is
given for trainees from foreign countries.
Precautions in Using the Service Manual

This manual should not be used by anyone other than the servicing staff
members qualified through the training specified by our company. Since
this manual contains confidential information including engineering know-
how related to product development, it is prohibited to distribute the manual
to users or to allow them free access to the manual without obtaining prior
permission from FUJIFILM Corporation.
This manual is intended to assist the service person in the safe and efficient
servicing of the equipment described.
The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures contained in this
manual and must not be used for purposes other than those which are described
herein.
The equipment should only be used by persons having recognized qualifications

and, if relevant, having adequate training on this equipment, especially regarding
protective measure such as laser radiation protection.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that existing legal regulations regarding
installation of the building with respect to the equipment are observed. Moreover
the legal regulations regarding the operation of the equipment are to be observed.
Incorrect operation, or failure of the user to maintain the equipment in accordance

with the schedule of maintenance, relieves the manufacturer or his agent from all
responsibility for consequent non-compliance, damage, injury, defects and/or other
malfunction.
FCR is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Copyright 2000-2011 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted

in any form or by means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
010-054-23E
CR-IR348CL Service Manual 08.31.2011 FM5893
WARNING
This manual is written for International distribution (including
distribution in the U.S.) and therefore may contain references to
Important Notice Concerning this Manual

mammography related options.
Mammography functionality for this product is not commercially
available in the US, pending FDA Approval.
This functionality must not be activated on US models, the only
breast related functionality available in the U.S. is the Specimen
Imaging Application.
010-054-14
CR-IR348CL Service Manual 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
CR-IR348CL Service Manual 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual) MD: Machine Description....................................... 2
MT: Machine Troubleshooting........................... 3

Introduction.............................................................................. 37
RI: Reinstalling the Software........................... 5
Safety Precautions.................................................................. 41
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility........... 42 MU: Maintenance Utility......................................... 8

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)..................................... 42
FR: Function-specific Reference.................... 10
Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001............................ 43
Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:................................ 47 SP: Service Parts........................................................ 12

Name of the Target Product of This Manual:........................ 47 PM: Preventive Maintenance.............................. 13
Caution for Handling Personal Information.......................... 48
IN: Installation
IN-A: Installation Connection to

One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357.... 14
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or
More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372.... 16
IN-C: Installation
Connection to 9000 Series Equipment.... 18
Appx IN: Installation Appendix.................... 19
OE: Connecting
the CL to Other Equipment........................ 21
PC: Performance Check......................................... 35
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual 1
MD: Machine Description
1. System Configuration....................................................... 1 2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF................................................ 28

1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection.................. 2 2.21 Dell OptiPlex 780.......................................................... 29
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or 2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF............................................ 30
CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection..... 3
3. System Connection Examples......................................... 31
2. Connectors and Slots....................................................... 5
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110..................................................... 6 4. Software Function Overview............................................ 33
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60.......................................... 7 5. Relationship between RU and CL.................................... 41
2.3 Dell OptiPlex GX260..................................................... 8 5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow............................. 41
2.4 Dell Precision WS340................................................... 9 5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE.......... 43
2.5 Dell Precision WS330................................................... 10
6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview.................... 45
2.6 Dell OptiPlex GX270..................................................... 11
7. Ordering Function Overview............................................ 46
2.7 NEC PC....................................................................... 12
2.8 Dell OptiPlex GX280..................................................... 13 8. Cluster Connection Function Overview.......................... 47
2.11 Dell OptiPlex GX620..................................................... 17
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745.......................................................... 19
2.15 Dell OptiPlex 755.......................................................... 22
2.16 Dell Precision T3400..................................................... 24
2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF................................................ 25
2.18 Dell OptiPlex 760.......................................................... 26
2.19 Dell OptiPlex 960.......................................................... 27
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT: Machine Troubleshooting
1. Error Code Table............................................................... 1 4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/
Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only)......... 30
1.1 Referring to Error Messages.......................................... 1
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency.................................. 31
1.2 Precautions.................................................................. 4
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound................................. 33
1.3 Error Message.............................................................. 4
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/
2. Using the Event Viewer.................................................... 5 Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software.......................... 35
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer........................................ 5 4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver...................................... 42
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer.............................................. 5 4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)............... 49
2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer........... 7 5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)......................................... 52
2.4 Details of Events........................................................... 8 5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)......................................... 54
2.5 Saving the Event Log.................................................... 9 5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and
Shutdown Procedures........................................... 54
2.6 Deleting the Event Log.................................................. 10
5.1.2 Device Test Procedures........................................ 55
2.7 Quitting the Event Viewer.............................................. 10 5.1.3 Log Save Procedure............................................. 56
3. Information Useful for Error Recovery............................ 11 5.2 Service Parts Replacement........................................... 57

3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to 5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement......................... 57
be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization.................. 11 5.2.2 Covers................................................................ 58
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an 5.2.3 CPU Fan............................................................. 58
LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure................ 19 5.2.4 Hard Disk............................................................ 59
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config 5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Drive................................. 60
Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)....................... 21 5.2.6 CPU................................................................... 61
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During 5.2.7 Housing Fan........................................................ 62
the Use of Output Options............................................. 23 5.2.8 Power Supply Unit................................................ 62
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)....................................... 24 5.2.9 Memory.............................................................. 63

5.2.10 Motherboard........................................................ 64
4.1 Checking the Memory................................................... 26
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization.......... 65
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk................................................ 29
5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps Sound at PC Startup.... 67
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table

(A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to V8.3(B)).................... Appx1MT-1
Appendix 2 Cooper Application
Error Message Table...................................... Appx2MT-1
Appendix 3 Precise Enlargement Function
Appendix 4 QA ROI Measurement
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI: Reinstalling the Software
1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC).................................... 1 4.1 For Windows 2000/XP.................................................. 128

4.2 For Windows Vista/7..................................................... 130
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS..................................... 3
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000.............................. 4 5. Installing the CL-AP.......................................................... 131
2.1.1 Installing Windows 2000........................................ 4 5.1 Installing the CL-AP...................................................... 131
2.1.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 14
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database....................................... 135
2.1.3 Setting the OS..................................................... 17
5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP................................. 22 (for the Japanese OS)........................................... 135
2.2.1 Installing and Setting Windows XP.......................... 22 5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database
2.2.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 30 (for an OS other than Japanese)............................. 139
2.2.3 Setting the OS..................................................... 36
6. Installing the Screen Saver.............................................. 142
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista.............................. 42
2.3.1 Installing and Setting Windows Vista....................... 42 7. Installing the CL Components......................................... 143
2.3.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 55 7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later)........................................ 143
2.3.3 Installing Windows Vista SP2................................. 61
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later).......................................... 144
2.3.4 Setting the OS..................................................... 62
2.4 Installing and Setting Windows 7................................... 82 8. Installing the Standard Key.............................................. 146
2.4.1 Installing and Setting Windows 7............................ 82 8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key................................... 146
2.4.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 97
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key................................... 147
2.4.3 Setting the OS..................................................... 102
8.3 Installing the Standard Key............................................ 148
3. Setting Up the Monitor...................................................... 126
9. ****BLANK****.................................................................... 149
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel.............................................. 126
3.2 17" CRT Monitor........................................................... 127 10. Option Key Installation..................................................... 150
3.3 Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300....................... 127 11. AP Key Installation............................................................ 152
3.4 LCD Monitor SL-IC200.................................................. 127
12. Initializing the Image Database........................................ 153
3.5 Ikegami 1k Landscape Monitor...................................... 127
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)......................... 155
4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System
and Its Service Pack......................................................... 128 14. Restoring the CL-Config................................................... 156
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)......... 159 5. Option Keys.................................................... Appx RI A-8
6. Touch Panel Driver......................................... Appx RI A-9
16. CR-IR346RU Settings........................................................ 161
7. Console Software (Built_inConsole)............... Appx RI A-13
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility.............................................. 161
8. FRIS Modules [Applicable only in Japan]....... Appx RI A-14
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server............................................ 162
9. DVD-RAM Driver [Applicable only in Japan].... Appx RI A-15
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config......... 164
10. POCKET id Console-AP................................. Appx RI A-16
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings.............................................. 167
11. ActiveSync...................................................... Appx RI A-20
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]................................. 168 12. Synapse Client Software
(Synapse Workstation)................................... Appx RI A-21
19. IIS Network Virus Protection............................................ 171
13. Exposure Guidance
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP [Applicable only in Japan]............................... Appx RI A-23
Service Pack 2................................................................... 175 14. Precise Enlargement Software....................... Appx RI A-24
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size.................................. 181 15. Windows Mobile Device Center
[Applicable only in Japan]............................... Appx RI A-27
22. Setting the Event Log....................................................... 183 16. QA ROI Measurement Software..................... Appx RI A-28
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista/7 only)........ 186 Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name........... Appx RI B-1
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista/7 only)........................ 187 Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board
(PEI/PSI)............................................. Appx RI C-1
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs......................... Appx RI A-1
1. CL-AP............................................................. Appx RI A-2 Appendix D Upgrading the AP............................. Appx RI D-1
2. MSDE (SQL SP Included) / SQL Server......... Appx RI A-3 Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement.... Appx RI E-1
2.1 For Windows 2000/XP................................ Appx RI A-3
1. For Windows 2000/XP.................................... Appx RI E-1
2.2 For Windows Vista/7................................... Appx RI A-4
2. For Windows Vista/7....................................... Appx RI E-4
3. RU-AP............................................................. Appx RI A-6
4. RU M-Utility..................................................... Appx RI A-7 Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver.... Appx RI F-1
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software 21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size..................... Appx RI G-17
(NEC PC)............................................ Appx RI G-1
22. Setting the Event Log..................................... Appx RI G-17
1. Installation Flow.............................................. Appx RI G-1
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS..................... Appx RI G-3 Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1....................... Appx RI H-1
3. Setting Up the Monitor.................................... Appx RI G-14 Appendix I RAID-related Settings....................... Appx RI I-1
4. Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack............ Appx RI G-14 1. Setting to Enable the RAID Mode................... Appx RI I-1
5. Installing the CL-AP........................................ Appx RI G-14 2. Creating a RAID Level-1 Configuration.......... Appx RI I-2
5.1 Installing the CL-AP.................................... Appx RI G-14
3. Creating an Intel SATA Driver FD and
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database..................... Appx RI G-14
Installing the RAID Driver............................... Appx RI I-4
6. Installing the Screen Saver............................. Appx RI G-14
4. RAID Structure Confirmation
7. Installing the CL Components......................... Appx RI G-14 (only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)......... Appx RI I-7
8. Installing the Standard Key............................. Appx RI G-14 5. Replacement Procedure of
9. ****BLANK****................................................. Appx RI G-14 Damaged RAID Configuration HDD
(only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)......... Appx RI I-8
10. Installing the Option Key................................. Appx RI G-14
5.1 Confirmimg which HDD is damaged.............. Appx RI I-8
11. Installing the AP Key and Setting
5.2 Replacing HDD.......................................... Appx RI I-10
the User Interface........................................... Appx RI G-14
5.3 Rebuilding RAID........................................ Appx RI I-10
12. Initializing the Image Database....................... Appx RI G-15
5.4 Verification................................................ Appx RI I-12
13. Optimizing the Screen Display
(Setting the LUT file)....................................... Appx RI G-15 6. Setting the RAID Status Display Tool
(Windows XP / Vista / 7 only )........................ Appx RI I-13
14. Restoring the CL-Config................................. Appx RI G-15
6.1 Installing the RAID Status Display Tool......... Appx RI I-13
15. Creating the FTP Server................................. Appx RI G-15 6.2 Setting the operation of
16. CR-IR346RU Settings..................................... Appx RI G-17 RAID Status Display Tool............................ Appx RI I-15
6.3 Settings Necessary for Dell Precision WS370
17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings............. Appx RI G-17
(Intel Application Accelerator).................... Appx RI I-16
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]................ Appx RI G-17 6.4 Disabling RAID Status Display Tool.............. Appx RI I-16
19. IIS Network Virus Protection........................... Appx RI G-17
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC)
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of
[Applicable only in Japan]............... Appx RI J-1
Windows XP Service Pack 2.......................... Appx RI G-17
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
MU: Maintenance Utility
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility.................................. 1 7. Verifying the Connection to

Other Connected Equipment Verify Connection....... 72
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions............................. 4
8. Management of Various Databases
3. Various Configuration Settings DataBase Utility............................................................ 74
Setup Configuration Item............................................. 8
8.1 Initializing the Image Database...................................... 74
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items................................. 8
8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue......... 75
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items............................ 10
8.3 Initializing the Patient Database..................................... 76
3.3 Saving the Configuration Data....................................... 11
8.4 Initializing the Study Reservation Database
3.4 Configuration Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY............... 12 (Only for B version)....................................................... 77
3.5 Configuration Details 3. QA FUNCTION.................... 24
9. Setting the Magnetic Card Magnetic Card Setting.... 78
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION............ 28 9.1 Setting the Hospital Card Data Format........................... 78
3.7 Configuration Details 7. CONFIG OPTION................. 55 9.2 Defining the ISO Card Character Read Code................. 78
3.8 Configuration Details 8. CONFIG QC........................ 57
10. Setting the Barcode Barcode Setting......................... 79
3.9 Configuration Details 9. CONFIG PDA....................... 58
3.10 Configuration Details 10. CONFIG QR....................... 59 11. Customizing the QA Items Customized QA Item....... 81
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection........ 60 12. Setting the Selectors Selector Setting....................... 83
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function.......... 61
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files
3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup................... 64 Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool.................. 84
3.14 MAC Address Manual Input........................................... 65 13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier........................ 85
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup........................ 66 13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later.......................... 86
4. Display Optimization LUT............................................ 68 14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags
DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting................................ 88
5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File
Configuration Restore/Backup.................................... 69
6. Retrieving EDR Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data...... 70

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
15. Setting the POCKET id Console

P-Console Setting......................................................... 89
15.1 Transferring the Configuration Data............................... 89
15.2 Registering the Device ID.............................................. 90
15.3 Checking Version of
the POCKET id Console Application.............................. 91
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR: Function-specific Reference
Print Output Function................................................... 1-1 Display Gradation Correction Setup....................... 5-1
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP................. 1-2 1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool............................................... 5-3
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit Conversion
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Tool.......................................................................... 5-3
Character Format........................................................... 1-4
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit Conversion Tool............... 5-4
2.1 Setup Items Table...................................................... 1-4
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File..................................... 5-4
2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation Character Format.... 1-28
3. Film Annotation Character Setup

DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens)......... 6-1
(Direct Editing of FilmStrFmt)....................................... 1-29
3.1 Procedure for Directly Editing the FilmStrFmt File........ 1-29 Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure
3.2 FilmStrFmt File Description Format............................. 1-30 Result Log Function...................................................... 7-1
3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters................... 1-32
3.4 Format Descriptors.................................................... 1-36
Wake-on-LAN Setup....................................................... 8-1
3.5 Attribute Descriptors.................................................. 1-41
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup...... 9-1
3.6 Film Annotation Character Verification Procedure........ 1-46
4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions................ 1-47 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters
to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]......................... 10-1
DICOM Tag Mapping Function................................... 2-1
Setup of Rules Applied for

Creating/Deleting Markers........................................... 3-1 Automatic Patient ID Issuance.................................. 11-1
Using the DICOM Log Mode....................................... 4-1 Setup of Exposure Guidance

[Applicable only in Japan]........................................... 12-1
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing..................... 13-1 1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board......................................... 20-8
1.3.1 Setting the DIP Switch (CP-112UL only)............... 20-8
1.3.2 Installing the MOXA Board Class Driver
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing... 14-1 (for Windows XP only)........................................ 20-9
1.3.3 Mounting the MOXA Board................................. 20-10
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons
2. Installing the Driver........................................................ 20-11
2.1 Installing the PSI04A Board Driver.............................. 20-11
Accession Number Data Truncation Function.... 16-1 2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver............................... 20-12
2.2.1 Installing the MOXA Board Driver
(For Windows XP)............................................. 20-12
Installation of Standard Markers 2.2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver
[Applicable only in Japan]........................................... 17-1 (For Windows VIsta).......................................... 20-16
2.2.3 Installing the MOXA Board Driver
(For Windows 7)................................................ 20-18
Setup of Date and Time Display................................ 18-1 2.2.4 Confirming Installation of the MOXA Board Driver.... 20-21
3. Port and Service Utility Settings................................... 20-23

Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and
Windows Vista / 7 Coexistent Environment 3.1 The Case Where the PC-standard Serial Connector
and an Add-in Serial Connector are Used................... 20-23
3.2 The Case Where a MOXA Board is Used.................... 20-26
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector............. 20-1 Setting the Exposure Index Function..................... 21-1
1. Adding a Serial Connector............................................ 20-1 Accession Number Character String Adding

1.1 Mounting the PSI04A Board....................................... 20-2 Function.............................................................................. 22-1
1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from
the Mother Board....................................................... 20-5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
SP: Service Parts
1. Service Parts List.............................................................. 1

1.1 How to Use Service Parts List....................................... 1
1.2 Service Parts List.......................................................... 3
1.3 Service Parts List
(NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)................ 8
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)...... 10
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PM: Preventive Maintenance
1. Preventive Maintenance Items......................................... 1
2. Checking for a Fatal Error................................................ 2

2.1 Confirming the Event Log.............................................. 2
3. Safety................................................................................. 2
3.1 Service Voltage............................................................ 2
3.2 Power Plug................................................................... 2
4. Hardware Cleaning............................................................ 3
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning..................................................... 3
4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning...................................... 3
4.3 LCD Cleaning............................................................... 4
4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning.................................................. 4
5. Executing the Error Analysis........................................... 5

5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk............................. 5
6. Functional Checks............................................................ 5
6.1 Confirmation of Image Input to Storage onto HDD.......... 5
6.2 Image Output to Film.................................................... 5
6.3 Image Transfer............................................................. 5
7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of

Date and Time.................................................................... 6
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files.............................. 6
7.2 Verification of Date and Time........................................ 6
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-A: Installation Connection to One XG-1

RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
5.1.2 OS Setups.......................................................... A18
1. CL Installation Conditions................................................ A1 5.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this procedure
if the 15" monitor with a touch panel is provided.]...... A19
1.1 Dimensions and Weight................................................ A1 5.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt
1.2 Temperature and Humidity............................................ A1 When Exiting the Suspend Mode............................ A22
5.1.5 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons
1.3 Places of Installation..................................................... A1
[applicable only in Japan]...................................... A23
1.4 Power Requirements.................................................... A1 5.1.6 Option Key Installation.......................................... A23
1.5 Network Cable.............................................................. A1 5.1.7 AP Key Installation............................................... A24
5.1.8 CL Startup Verification.......................................... A25
2. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility.................................. A2
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection......................................... A25
3. Installation Procedure Overview..................................... A5 5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility...................................... A26
5.2.2 Installing the RU-AP............................................. A27
4. CL Hardware Setup........................................................... A6
5.3 Setup with Service Utility............................................... A30
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking............................................. A6
5.3.1 Starting the Service Utility...................................... A30
4.2 Checking the Component Items..................................... A7 5.3.2 CL System Information Setup................................. A31
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items................. A9 5.3.3 Setting the LP Information..................................... A34
4.3.1 PC Boards.......................................................... A10 5.3.4 Optimizing the Monitor Display............................... A35
4.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required only 5.3.5 Exiting the Service Utility....................................... A36
for units used in Japan)......................................... A12
5.3.6 Changing the Menu Database
4.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable....................... A12 (for non-Japanese versions only)............................ A37
4.3.4 Monitor............................................................... A13 5.4 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses.... A40
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU........................... A15 5.5 Procedures for Changing the CL Host Name.................. A40
4.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP............................ A15 5.6 CL Setup for Connection to Other Equipment................. A40
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment............................... A16 5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection...... A40
5. Software Setup.................................................................. A17
5.1 CL-AP Startup.............................................................. A17
5.1.1 OS Startup.......................................................... A18
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6. Checkout Procedures....................................................... A41

6.1 Checking the Connection between the CL and RU......... A41
6.2 Checking the Connection between the CL and Other
Equipment.................................................................... A43
6.3 Checking the Output Image........................................... A43
7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log

Verification/Deletion.......................................................... A46
7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File........................................ A46
7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File....................................... A47
7.3 Verifying and Deleting the RU Error Log........................ A49
7.3.1 Verifying the RU Error Log..................................... A49
7.3.2 Deleting the RU Error Log..................................... A50
7.4 Turning OFF the CL and RU.......................................... A50
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and

CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
4.1.6 Option Key Installation.......................................... B27
1. CL Installation Conditions................................................ B1 4.1.7 AP Key Installation............................................... B29
4.1.8 CL Startup Verification.......................................... B29
2. Installation Workflow........................................................ B2
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility......................... B31
3. CL Hardware Setup........................................................... B6 4.2.1 Starting the Service Utility...................................... B31
3.1 Unloading and Unpacking............................................. B6 4.2.2 CL System Information Setup................................. B32
4.2.3 Optimizing the Monitor Display............................... B34
3.2 Checking the Component Items..................................... B7
4.2.4 Changing the Menu Database................................ B35
3.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items................. B10
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP Connection....................... B40
3.3.1 PC Boards.......................................................... B11
3.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required 4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other Equipment............. B40
only for units used in Japan).................................. B13 4.5 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection...... B41
3.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable....................... B13
4.6 Configuration Settings for IR (5000plus series)
3.3.4 Monitor............................................................... B14 Connection................................................................... B42
3.3.5 Remote Power Control Box.................................... B16 4.6.1 Starting CL Service Utility...................................... B42
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment............ B16 4.6.2 Setups Necessary for the CL................................. B42
3.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP............................ B17 4.6.3 Setups Necessary for the IR.................................. B44
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID Information...... B46
3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core............................................. B17
4.6.5 IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information Sharing
4. CL Software Setup............................................................ B18 Function) Setup................................................... B47
4.6.6 Saving Configuration............................................ B47
4.1 CL-AP Startup.............................................................. B19
4.6.7 Selector Setup (applicable only when a built-in
4.1.1 OS Startup.......................................................... B20 device is connected)............................................. B48
4.1.2 OS Setups.......................................................... B21 4.6.8 Settings for Transfer of Image Processing
4.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this procedure Parameters (only for A02 and A03)......................... B50
if the 15 monitor with a touch panel is provided.]...... B22 4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup......... B52
4.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt
When Exiting the Suspend Mode............................ B25 4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection.............................. B53
4.1.5 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons 4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility.................. B54
[applicable only in Japan]...................................... B26 4.7.2 Installing the RU M-Utility...................................... B56
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit)............................ B58

4.7.4 Installing the RU-AP (for 2nd and 3rd units)............. B61
4.7.5 Changing the CL IP Address.................................. B62
4.7.6 Setting Up IDT CONNECTION (patient information
sharing function).................................................. B62
4.7.7 Setting the Selector.............................................. B62
4.7.8 Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or
More CLs............................................................ B63
4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files.... B63
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection......... B64
4.8.1 Changing the CL IP Address.................................. B64
4.8.2 Performing Setup with the Service Utility.................. B64
4.8.3 IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing
function) Setup..................................................... B67
4.8.4 Selector Setup..................................................... B67
More CLs............................................................ B69
4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup......................... B69
4.8.7 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup......... B71
4.8.8 Wake-on-LAN Setup............................................. B71
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-C: Installation Connection to

9000 Series Equipment
1. CL Installation Conditions
[Applicable only in Japan]................................................ C1
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN: Installation Appendix
Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Appendix 5 Procedures for Changing

Panel Driver............................. Appx IN1-1 the CL and RU IP Addresses.... Appx IN5-1
1. Incorporating into the Network...................... Appx IN5-1

Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config......... Appx IN2-1 2. Changing the Software Settings.................... Appx IN5-1
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor

Reader [Option]...................... Appx IN3-1 Rack [Option].......................... Appx IN6-1
1. Connecting the Barcode Reader to

the CL............................................................... Appx IN3-1 Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor
Wall-Mounting Bracket
2. Performing Setup for IP Barcode Use........... Appx IN3-1 [Option]..................................... Appx IN7-1
3. Setup for Type B ID Online Operations......... Appx IN3-1
4. DENSO Barcode Reader................................. Appx IN3-3 Appendix 8 Changing the RU Host
Name.......................................... Appx IN8-1
5. OPTOELECTRONICS Barcode Reader.......... Appx IN3-4
1. When Version 1.1 or Earlier Is Used.............. Appx IN8-1
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic
Card [Option].......................... Appx IN4-1 2. When Version 1.2 or Later Is Used................ Appx IN8-5
1. Installing the Wall-Mounting Bracket............ Appx IN4-1 Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP

Address..................................... Appx IN9-1
2. Connecting the CL to the Reader.................. Appx IN4-2
3. Setting the Reader and Magnetic Card......... Appx IN4-3
4. Hospital Card Data Format Setup
Example [Reference]....................................... Appx IN4-6
5. ID Card Data Format [Reference]................... Appx IN4-10
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix 10 Connecting 4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600

for Windows XP.......................................... Appx IN11-14
a High-resolution Monitor.... Appx IN10-1
4.2.1 Installing the video driver................ Appx IN11-14
1. Mounting a High-resolution Monitor 4.2.2 Setting the monitor........................ Appx IN11-16
Board (When a 16001200 or 20481536 4.3 When Using a VREngine/SMD5
Resolution Monitor is Used).......................... Appx IN10-1 for Windows Vista....................................... Appx IN11-21
2. Installing a High-resolution Monitor
Driver (When a 16001200 or 20481536 4.3.2 Setting the monitor........................ Appx IN11-24
Resolution Monitor is Used).......................... Appx IN10-1 4.4 When Using a FireGL V3600
for Windows Vista....................................... Appx IN11-26
3. Changing to a High-resolution Monitor 4.4.1 Installing the video driver................ Appx IN11-26
(12801024, 16001200 or 20481536
4.4.2 Setting the monitor........................ Appx IN11-30
monitor)............................................................ Appx IN10-5
4.5 When Using a FireGL V3800
4. Reinstalling the Application and for Windows 7............................................. Appx IN11-34
Performing Necessary Settings..................... Appx IN10-8 4.6 When No Video Boards Are Added.............. Appx IN11-41
4.6.1 Connecting the monitor.................. Appx IN11-41
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd 4.6.2 Setting the monitor........................ Appx IN11-42
Monitor...................................... Appx IN11-1 4.7 Adjusting Width and Height on the 2nd
Monitor (Common to VREngine/SMD5,
1. Uninstalling the Video Driver......................... Appx IN11-2 FireGL V3600 and FirePro V3800)............... Appx IN11-44
2. Connecting the Video Board.......................... Appx IN11-4 5. Changing and Setting the 2nd Monitor......... Appx IN11-45
5.1 Changing the 2nd Monitor........................... Appx IN11-45
3. Installing the Monitor...................................... Appx IN11-5
5.2 Settings Necessary for the 2nd Monitor to
4. Installing and Setting the Video Driver......... Appx IN11-7 Recognize the Linking Application............... Appx IN11-45
4.1 When Using a VREngine/SMD5
for Windows XP.......................................... Appx IN11-7
4.1.2 Setting the monitor........................ Appx IN11-10
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment

CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)........................ 1-1 (FINP: Image Input/Output)......................................... 2-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 1-3 1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 2-3

1.1 Installing the PEI Board.............................................. 1-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 2-4
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................ 1-5
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation......... 2-4
2. Software Setup............................................................... 1-6 2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................ 2-5
2.1 CL Software Setup..................................................... 1-6 2.3 Service Utility Startup................................................. 2-5
2.1.1 Installing the LP Option Key................................ 1-6 2.4 Setups Required for Outputting Images to Other
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key...................................... 1-7 Connected Equipment................................................ 2-6
2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility................................... 1-8 2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected
Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES)....................... 2-7
2.1.4 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image
Printout When a Study is Completed 2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT........................... 1-9 Type Depending on the MPM Code
(FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)............................ 2-10
2.1.5 Setting the System Information for CL/LP
Connection....................................................... 1-10 2.4.3 Setup for Automatic Image Distribution
(DISTRIBUTION CODE).................................... 2-11
2.1.6 Setting the Film Annotation Character Format....... 1-10
2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 2-12
2.1.7 Exiting the Service Utility.................................... 1-11
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other Connected
2.2 Printer Main Unit Setup.............................................. 1-11 Equipment................................................................. 2-13
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 1-12 2.6 Service Utility Shutdown............................................. 2-14
3.1 Starting the CL-AP..................................................... 1-12 2.7 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 2-14
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format.......... 1-13 3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 2-15
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 1-14 3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 2-15
3.2 Image Input/output Checkout...................................... 2-15
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 2-16
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage:

(DICOM CR Storage)..................................................... 3-1 Transfer of Processed Images)................................. 4-1
2. Software Setup............................................................... 3-4 2. Software Setup............................................................... 4-4

2.1 CL Software Setup..................................................... 3-4 2.1 CL Software Setup..................................................... 4-4
2.1.1 Installation of DICOM CR Storage Option Key....... 3-4 2.1.1 Installing
the Processed Image Transmission Option Key..... 4-4
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation........................................ 3-5
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key...................................... 4-5
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup......................................... 3-5
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for 2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility................................... 4-5
the DICOM CR Storage Function......................... 3-6 2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected the DICOM CR Storage Function......................... 4-6
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function.... 3-9 2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function.... 4-9
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution............... 3-13
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 3-13 (DISTRIBUTION CODE).................................... 4-13
2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance................................... 3-14 2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 4-14
2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements............................. 3-16 2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance................................... 4-15
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown..................................... 3-16 2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements............................. 4-17
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 3-16 2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown..................................... 4-17
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 3-17 2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 4-17
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 3-17 3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 4-18

3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment........... 3-17 3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 4-18
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 3-18 3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment........... 4-18
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series

CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print)... 5-1 (FINP: Print Output)....................................................... 6-1

2.1 CL Software Setup..................................................... 5-3 2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation......... 6-4
2.1.1 Installation of the DICOM Print Option Key............ 5-3 2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................ 6-5
2.3 Service Utility Startup................................................. 6-5
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup......................................... 5-4
2.4 Printout Setup............................................................ 6-6
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the DICOM
Print Function................................................... 5-5 2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected
Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES)....................... 6-7
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected
Equipment for the DICOM Print Function.............. 5-8 2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression
Type Depending on the MPM Code
2.1.6 Registration of Printer That Automatically Outputs (FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)............................ 6-10
Print Films Upon Completion of Checkout
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT.............................. 5-12 2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout
2.1.7 Film Annotation Character Format Setup.............. 5-13 When a Study is Completed
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT..................................... 6-11
2.1.8 Changes in Name Elements................................ 5-14
2.1.9 Setup for Film Sorting Function........................... 5-14 2.6 Service Utility Shutdown............................................. 6-12
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown..................................... 5-14 2.7 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment......... 6-12
2.2 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment......... 5-14 3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 6-13
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 5-15 3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 6-13
3.1 Starting the CL-AP..................................................... 5-15 3.2 Printout Checkout...................................................... 6-13
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format.......... 5-16 4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 6-14
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 5-17
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online)............................................... 7-1 CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)........................ 8-1

1.1 Adding a Serial Connector
[Only when using the serial i/f].................................... 7-2 2. Software Setup............................................................... 8-4
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................ 2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation.... 8-4
7-3
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................ 8-5
2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 7-4
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function.......................... 8-5
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation....... 7-4 2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM MWM
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................ 7-5 Function........................................................... 8-5
2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information............................ 8-8
2.3 Driver Installation....................................................... 7-5
2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for MWM...................... 8-9
2.4 Service Utility Startup................................................. 7-6
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function............................ 8-10
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup..................................... 7-7 2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM PPS
2.6 Configuration Setup...................................................
7-7 Function........................................................... 8-10
2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection............... 7-8 2.4.2 Registration of RIS Information............................ 8-11
2.6.2 Configuration Setup IDC4 Connection.................. 7-10 2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with PPS...................... 8-12
2.7 Service Utility Shutdown............................................. 7-12 2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup.................................. 8-13
2.5.1 General Settings for MWM/PPS.......................... 8-13
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 7-13 2.5.2 Setting the Method of Inquiring at the RIS............. 8-14
3.1 Starting the CL-AP..................................................... 7-13 2.5.3 Setting Additional MWM Inquiry Items.................. 8-15
3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout..................... 7-14 2.5.4 Setting the Compliance with the JJ1017
Guideline......................................................... 8-15
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 7-16 2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned
to the RIS......................................................... 8-16
2.5.6 Setup of Timing for Transmission of PPS Study
Termination Notice............................................ 8-16
2.5.7 Embedding the Exposure Information into a PPS
Standard Tag.................................................... 8-17
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.5.8 Exposure Result Editing Setup............................ 8-17 CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)........... 9-1
2.5.9 Setting the MWM Code Meaning as
a Menu Name................................................... 8-18
2.5.10 Settings for Regenerating StudyInstanceUID for
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 9-3
a Study Acquired Using the MWM Function........... 8-19
2. Software Setup............................................................... 9-4
2.5.11 Setting the Compliance with JJ1017 V3................ 8-21
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys............ 9-4
2.6 Changing Name Elements.......................................... 8-23
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key.... 9-5
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping.......... 8-23
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key.............................................. 9-5
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 8-25 2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup........................ 9-6
3.1 Starting the CL-AP..................................................... 8-25 2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for
3.2 Verifying MWM.......................................................... 8-25 the Commitment Push Function.................................. 9-6
3.3 Verifying PPS............................................................ 8-25 2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for
the Commitment Push Function.................................. 9-8
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 8-26 2.7 Registering the SC AE Name..................................... 9-10
3. Verifying the Function................................................... 9-11

3.1 Starting the CL-AP..................................................... 9-11
3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver......................... 9-11
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+QA-WS CL+F-RIS (Ordering)

(Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images).............. 10-1 [Applicable only in Japan]........................................... 11-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 10-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 10-4

2.1 CL Software Setup..................................................... 10-4
2.1.1 Option Key Installation....................................... 10-4
2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment................ 10-5
2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information...................... 10-10
2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be
Transferred...................................................... 10-15
2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image Distribution
Function........................................................... 10-15
2.1.7 Changing Name Elements.................................. 10-16
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup............................................. 10-16
3. Verifying the Function................................................... 10-17

3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 10-17
3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS.................................... 10-17
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection)

CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)............. 12-1 [Applicable only in Japan]........................................... 13-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 12-2 CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient

1.1 Adding a Serial Connector.......................................... 12-2 Record System [Applicable only in Japan].......... 14-1
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................ 12-3
1.3 Hardware Setup
[for Siemens mammography X-CON].......................... 12-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 12-4

2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key....... 12-4
2.3 Installing the Driver.................................................... 12-5
2.4 Setting the Port and the Service Utility........................ 12-5
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON........................... 12-6
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports
[for Siemens mammography X-CON].......................... 12-9
3. Verifying the Connection/Data Exchange.................... 12-10

3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection................................... 12-10
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange..................................... 12-11
5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]............................... 12-13
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage:

CL+CL (Cluster Connection)...................................... 15-1 Digital Mammogram Transfer)................................... 16-1
2. Software Setup............................................................... 15-3 2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 16-3

2.1 Software Setup for All CLs......................................... 15-3 2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu.... 16-3
2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name..................................... 15-3 2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmission
2.1.2 Initializing the Output Queue and Image Option Keys............................................................... 16-4
Database......................................................... 15-4
2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings................... 15-5
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage
2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/
Table Settings................................................... 15-6
Function.................................................................... 16-5
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing...................... 15-11 2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment
for DICOM MG Storage Function................................ 16-8
2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup................................. 15-18
2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing Setup......... 15-20 2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution
Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE).............................. 16-12
2.1.8 Defining the Share Range.................................. 15-21
2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings............. 15-22 2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT..................... 16-13
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs............................... 15-25 2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method.......................... 16-13
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Processing Setup.... 15-25 2.9 Changing the Name Elements.................................... 16-14
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient Information
Management Setup........................................... 15-27 3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 16-15
2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup................................ 15-28 3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 16-15
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment........... 16-15
3. Connection Verification................................................. 15-29
3.1 Study Registration..................................................... 15-29 4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 16-16
3.2 Image Reading.......................................................... 15-30
3.3 Study Information and Image Display.......................... 15-30
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+POCKET id Console
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage).... 17-1 (Portable Exposure Function).................................... 18-1

1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console...... 18-2
1.2 Adding the Serial Connector....................................... 18-2
2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver................. 17-4
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key............... 17-5 2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 18-3
2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key....................................... 17-5 2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console......... 18-3
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on 2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key............................... 18-6
the DICOM Media Storage Function........................... 17-6
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings........................ 17-10
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console............................ 18-7
2.6 Configuration Settings................................................ 17-11 2.4.1 Setting Date and Time....................................... 18-7
2.4.2 Setting the Device ID......................................... 18-8
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 17-12
2.4.3 Setting Screen Properties................................... 18-9
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 17-12
2.4.4 Setting the Connection Speed............................. 18-12
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media....................... 17-12
2.5 Registering the Device ID........................................... 18-13
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage Media............................. 17-12
3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media...................... 17-12 2.6 Installing and Setting Up
the POCKET id Console Application........................... 18-14
3.2.3 Image Storage.................................................. 17-13
2.6.1 Installing the POCKET id Console Application....... 18-14
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 17-14 2.6.2 Setting Up
the POCKET id Console Service Utility................. 18-16
5. Other Settings................................................................ 17-15 2.6.3 Setting Configuration Items for
the POCKET id Console..................................... 18-17
5.1 Setting Multiple USB Memory Security Soft Paths....... 17-15
2.6.4 Starting the POCKET id Console Application and
5.2 Replace with Old Icons.............................................. 17-16 Transferring the Configuration File....................... 18-18
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Connection Verification................................................. 18-21 CL+Synapse Server (Web Query)............................. 19-1

3.2 Transferring Study Reception Information 1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 19-2
from the CL to the POCKET id Console...................... 18-21
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode................ 18-22
2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP............................................... 19-3
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted
from the POCKET id Console to the CL and 2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting
Checking the Result................................................... 18-23 (for Windows XP only)................................................ 19-3
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software........................ 19-4
2.4 Installing the CL-AP................................................... 19-4
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application............ 19-5
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables....................... 19-6
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings................. 19-8
2.8 Setting the User Utility................................................ 19-9
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 19-10

3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 19-10
3.2 Web Query Checkout................................................. 19-10
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+T-RIS (Ordering)
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint).......................... 20-1 [Applicable only in Japan]........................................... 21-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 20-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 20-4

2.1 CL Software Setup..................................................... 20-4
2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition Option
Key................................................................. 20-4
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key...................................... 20-5
2.1.3 Setting the Information on This Equipment
for Image Search/Acquisition.............................. 20-5
2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other Connected
Equipment for Image Search/Acquisition............... 20-8
2.1.5 Setting the Information on This Equipment
for the DICOM CR Storage Function.................... 20-12
2.1.6 Registering the Information on Other Connected
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function.... 20-14
2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................... 20-16
2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR.......................................... 20-16
2.1.9 Exiting the Service Utility.................................... 20-18
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 20-18
3. Verification...................................................................... 20-19
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server.... 20-20
3.3 Checking Film Output Images.................................... 20-20
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)........................ 22-1 CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter)........................ 23-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 22-2 1. Hardware Setup............................................................. 23-2

2.1 Installing the PDI Application...................................... 22-3 2.1 Starting the Service Utility.......................................... 23-3
2.2 Installing the Option Key............................................ 22-4 2.2 Setting the Configuration Items................................... 23-5
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key.............................................. 22-6 2.3 Exiting the Service Utility............................................ 23-7
2.4 Starting the Service Utility.......................................... 22-6
3. Verification...................................................................... 23-8
2.5 Setting the Configuration Items................................... 22-7
2.6 Exiting the Service Utility.............................................. 22-9
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP................................... 23-8
2.7 Editing the Institution Information................................ 22-9
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product
Information................................................................ 23-9
3. Verification...................................................................... 22-10
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area Product
3.1 Starting the CL-AP..................................................... 22-10 Information................................................................ 23-10
3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function....... 22-11 3.4.1 When DICOM PPS Connection is Enabled............ 23-10
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R........................................ 22-12 3.4.2 When DICOM Storage Connection is Enabled....... 23-10
3.4.3 When DICOM Print Connection is Enabled........... 23-10
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Precise Enlargement Function.................................. 24-1 QA ROI Measurement.................................................... 25-1

1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software.... 24-3 1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software............. 25-2
1.1.1 For Software V7.1............................................. 24-3 1.2 Setting the Firewall.................................................... 25-5
1.1.2 For Software V8.0 or Later.................................. 24-8
1.3 Installing the Option Key............................................ 25-5
1.2 Setting the Firewall.................................................... 24-10
1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Option Key.... 24-11
1.5 Setting the System..................................................... 25-6
1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key.............................................. 24-11 1.5.1 Setting the Service Utility.................................... 25-6
1.5 Setting the System..................................................... 24-12 1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued Monitor.... 25-7
1.5.1 Setting the OS.................................................. 24-12
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI
1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility.................................... 24-12
Measurement.................................................................. 25-9
1.5.3 Setting the User Utility........................................ 24-13
1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item..................................... 24-14 3. Confirming the Settings................................................ 25-11
2. Confirming the Settings................................................ 24-16
3.2 Confirming Image Display.......................................... 25-11
2.2 Confirming the Image Display..................................... 24-16 4. Backup/Restore.............................................................. 25-13
4.1 Backup...................................................................... 25-13
3. Backup/Restore.............................................................. 24-17
4.2 Restore..................................................................... 25-15
3.1 For Software V7.1...................................................... 24-17
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later......................................... 24-17
3.2.1 Backup............................................................ 24-17
3.2.2 Restore............................................................ 24-19
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function.............. 24-20
5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function............... 24-21

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)....................................... 26-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 26-2
2. Software Setup............................................................... 26-3

2.1 Installing the Option Key............................................ 26-3
2.3 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder...................... 26-5
2.3.1 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in
Windows XP..................................................... 26-5
Windows Vista/7............................................... 26-6
2.4 Setting the Configuration Items................................... 26-8
3. Verification...................................................................... 26-13
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
PC: Performance Check
CR-IR346CL Performance Checklist Connection to

One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357 ........................ 1
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist Connection to

two or more RUs, 5000plus and CR-IR356/357/359/
362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372 .......................... 2
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist

9000 Series Connection
[Applicable only in Japan]................................................ 3
CR-IR346CL/348CL Config List.............................................. 4

1. IMAGE MODALITY....................................................... 4
2. FINP SETUP................................................................ 5
3. QA FUNCTION............................................................. 5
4. PRINTER..................................................................... 5
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION..................................................... 7
7. CONFIG OPTION......................................................... 10
8. CONFIG QC................................................................. 10
9. CONFIG PDA............................................................... 11
10. CONFIG QR................................................................. 11
CR-IR346CL/348CL System Configuration List.................... 12
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Introduction
Introduction Warning and Cautionary Information

Precautions during the service work are indicated by the following terms
and symbols.
Notes on the Use of the Service Manual
1. This document is intended to be read by the service WARNING
personnel of FUJIFILM Corporation or authorized agent who
is commissioned by FUJIFILM Corporation to perform Serious injuries or death may result if this precaution is not
servicing tasks. observed.
Damage of the unit and customer database may also occur.
Under these circumstances, no one is allowed to perform the
following actions without the prior written permission from
FUJIFILM Corporation. CAUTION
Duplicating or reproducing this document in whole or in part Mild or moderate injuries may result if this precaution is not
Disclosing this document, in whole or in part, to a person other than observed.
the authorized service personnel Serious malfunction (which may be unrepairable or difficult to
repair) may also occur.
Lending or transferring this document, in whole or in part, to a third
party
IMPORTANT
2. Due care must be exercised when handling this document
Abnormal equipment operations (easy to repair) may result if this
because it contains product internal structure descriptions
and other confidential information. precaution is not observed.
* When the contents of this document need be changed, the

information about such changes will be conveyed using Engineering NOTE
Change Notice (ECN).
Indicates items which require particular attention during the necessary
The Engineering Change Notice (ECN) must also be handled work procedure.
using the same care as for this document.
3. Due to a product development schedule, the product REFERENCE

specifications and available options/variations prevailing at
Explanation of related items and terms.
the time of the release of this document may differ from the
descriptions given in this document. In such an instance, a
Service Engineering Information will be issued as needed to
furnish latest information about inapplicable specifications Screen Displays According to Different OSs
and components. This manual uses either of the Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 screen
displays.
4. If you have any doubt about the contents of this document When setting procedures to be performed are different between
or find errors, contact your local FUJIFILM representative. Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7, follow
the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Introduction
Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require CAUTIONS

Inspection/Calibration The grounding wire must be connected.
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing To avoid damages to the parts/units due to static discharge, use
instruments and tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated a wrist strap putting one end on your wrist and the other end on
as appropriate. the grounded section of the equipment, as illustrated below.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that When doing so, make sure to unplug the power connector from
have not been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the the socket to avoid electrical hazards.
machine could not be guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are
as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in Wrist strap
accordance with the specifications and instruction manuals of the
applicable servicing instruments and tools.
Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration

Name Inspection Calibration
Digital multimeter
Precautionary Labels
To prevent danger to humans and serious accidents, observe the
following. 00010003.EPS
When performing settings for several software programs, ensure

WARNINGS that applications other than those of specified procedures must
have been shut down appropriately.
Unless indicated otherwise, be sure to turn off the power switch
before maintenance work, and disconnect the power plug from
the outlet.
Even if the power switch is OFF, 100 to 240VAC (differs
according to machine specifications) will still be supplied to the
primary input terminal of the unit if the power cable is
connected, and this may result in possible electric hazards.
As neckties, scarves, and necklaces may get caught in the unit
during work, remove these items or take precautions against
such accidents.
Never modify the unit unless otherwise specified.
Modification of the safety unit (interlock, breaker, temperature
fuse, etc.) will cause serious problems as it is not only
dangerous but violates the related laws and regulations.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Introduction
The unit is also pasted with precautionary labels. Follow the instructions CR-IR 348CL (Mobile model)
on the labels when carrying out work.
Identification label
CR-IR 348CL (Lite) / CR-IR 348CL Plus

Year of manufacture label
CR-IR348CL (Mobile model) 00010014.EPS
CR-IR348CL (Lite) Identification label

CR-IR348CL Plus CL01002.EPS
Year of Manufacture and EFUP (Environmentally Friendly

Use Period) label
2007
Sample year of manufacture
00010015.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Introduction
NEC PC
NEC product label
WEEE label
CE label
Identification
label
00010011.EPS
Identification labels
CR-IR348CL (Lite) CR-IR348CL Plus CR-IR348CL (Mobile model)
00010012.EPS
CE labels
CR-IR348CL (Lite) CR-IR348CL Plus CR-IR348CL (Mobile model)
00010013.EPS
WEEE label
00010016.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions (Control Unit)
Follow the precautions below when installing, using, and servicing the
control unit (PC).
See the Users Guide provided for details on the control unit.
Input voltage : 115V or 230V

Electric hazard prevention :
The power cord of the control unit and CRT
monitor uses a 3-pin plug. Connect it to a
properly grounded power outlet. When using
an extension cord, use a 3-line type with a
grounding pin.
Place of installation : Avoid places where dust and foreign particles
may enter inside through the computer opening.
Avoid installing near heaters and heat
sources.
Precautions when working on internal parts of the control unit :
(1) Turn off the power of the PC, CRT, and other peripheral devices.
(2) Disconnect the power cord from the outlet to prevent electric
hazard.
(3) Open the I/O panel on the rear of the PC, touch the metallic part
to fully discharge body static electricity before accessing.
(4) When removing the board and memory module, etc., hold them
without directly touching the connectors and pins and place them
in a static electricity prevention package.
Safety Precautions (CRT monitor)

WARNING
High voltage is applied inside the CRT monitor.
To prevent electric hazards and danger, the CRT internal parts
cannot be accessed.
The CRT monitor does not consist of parts serviceable by the
service engineer.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Cautions Relating to This Service Manual contains the names of standards applied in IEC
60601-1-2.
Electromagnetic Compatibility The names of standards applied in EN 60601-1-2 are replaced as
follows.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) IEC 60601-1-2

(Descriptions in this Service Manual)
Standards applied in
EN 60601-1-2
This equipment complies with the EMC standards applicable to medical CISPR 11 EN 55011
devices, in accordance with the requirements of IEC60601-1-2 :2001 + IEC 61000-3-2 EN 61000-3-2
A1 2004/EN60601-1-2:2001+A1:2006.
However, there is no guarantee that harmful electromagnetic IEC 61000-3-3 EN 61000-3-3
interference will not occur in any installation environment. IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2
This equipment generates, and can radiate radio frequency energy. In a
IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3
particular environment, e.g., the equipment is not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions or any device that is not compliant with IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4
the EMC Standard is used in a surrounding area, harmful interference IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5
may result, causing the equipment or surrounding device to malfunction.
If this equipment causes harmful interference to other equipment or IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6
receives harmful interference from other equipment, you are IEC 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-8
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the IEC 61000-4-11 EN 61000-4-11
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the equipment.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the affected
equipment.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the affected equipment is connected.
If the problem persists, discontinue the use of the equipment and
consult the manufacturer of the affected equipment or FUJIFILM
JAPAN.
WARNING
Do not place devices generating electromagnetic wave near this
equipment.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001

(1) Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding
EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the
EMC information provided in the accompanying documents.
(2) Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect
medical electrical equipment.
(3) Information of all cables and their maximum lengths and accessories
that may affect EMC.
Name Specification
Network cable Cat5e or more, UTP-type straight cable
(4) The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those
specified, with the exception of transducers and cables sold by
[FUJIFILM Corporation] as replacement parts for internal
components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the [CR-IR346CL/348CL].
(5) The [CR-IR346CL/348CL] should not be used adjacent to or stacked
with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the [CR-IR346CL/348CL]
should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.
(6) Test items (Tables 1 to 4)
Table 1
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CR-
IR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
The CR-IR346CL/348CL uses RF energy
only for its internal function. Therefore,
RF emissions
Group 1 its RF emissions are very low and are
CISPR 11
not likely to cause any interference in
nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
Class A The CR-IR346CL/348CL is suitable for
CISPR 11
use in all establishments other than
Harmonic emissions
Class D domestic and those directly connected to
IEC 61000-3-2
the public low-voltage power supply
Voltage fluctuations/ network that supplies buildings used for
Not
flicker emissions domestic purposes.
complied.
IEC 61000-3-3
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Table 2
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
6kV contact 2kV contact
4kV contact
6kV contact
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If floors are covered
IEC61000-4-2 with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%.
8kV air 2kV air
4kV air
8kV air
2kV for power supply lines 2kV for power supply lines
Electrical fast transient/burst Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC61000-4-4 environment.
1kV for input/output lines 1kV for input/output lines
0.5kV, 1kV differential
1kV differential mode mode
Surge Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC61000-4-5 environment.
2kV common mode 0.5kV, 1kV, 2kV
common mode
<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle
40% UT 40% UT
(60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital
Voltage dips, short interruptions
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles environment. If the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL requires continued
and voltage variations of power
operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the
supply input lines
70% UT 70% UT CR-IR346CL/348CL be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or
IEC61000-4-11
(30% dip in UT) (30% dip in UT) a battery.
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles
<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency (50/60Hz)
Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a
magnetic field 3 A/m 3 A/m
typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment.
IEC61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Table 3
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer
IEC61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz to any part of the CR-IR346CL/348CL, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m 80 MHz to 800 MHz

IEC61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended
separation distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey,a should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio
broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the CR-IR346CL/348CL is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the CR-IR346CL/348CL should be observed to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the CR-IR346CL/348CL.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Table 4
Recommended separation distances between
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the CR-IR346CL/348CL
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in
which radiated RF disturbances are controlled.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL can help prevent electromagnetic
interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment (transmitters) and the CR-IR346CL/348CL as
recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
Rated maximum
m
output power of
transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
W
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from
structures, objects and people.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:
Abbreviations Adopted in
This Manual:
PC : Hardware (personal computer) used in the CR-IR346CL or
CR-IR348CL controller
CL : CR-IR346CL, CR-IR348CL
RU : CR-IR346RU
OS : Operating System (Windows 2000/XP/Vista)
AP : Application Software
Name of the Target Product of

This Manual:
Note that the target product name of this manual has been changed
from FCR XG1 to FCR XG-1. Read thus XG1 appearing in this
manual XG-1.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Caution for Handling Personal Information
Caution for Handling Personal Information

Discarding the Equipment
When disposing of the CR-IR 346CL/348CL, be sure to completely
discard any private information stored on it.
When to Obtain and to Bring Out Personal Information

Follow the operating procedures under the Private Information
Protection Law and prescribed by your local FUJIFILM representative.
When you collect logs, use such as a security-ensured jig provided by
your local FUJIFILM representative, and handle the medium with
adequate care.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MD-I
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
04/10/2001 01 New release (FM2951) All pages

05/30/2001 02 Revision for software version A02 and GX150 I, II, 111, 14
(FM3027)
05/30/2001 02 Changes in pagination (FM3027) 12, 13, 15, 16
08/30/2001 03 Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) I, II, 18, 11, 14, 17, 18
08/30/2001 03 Changes in pagination (FM3125) 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, 7, 8, 10, 15, 16, 18
07/20/2002 05 Revision for software version A08 (FM3428) I, II, 13, 6-8, 10
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) I, II, 5, 712, 19-22
08/20/2003 08 Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) I, II, 1016, 21
08/20/2003 08 Changes in pagination (FM4009) 1720, 2226
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) IIV, 1, 3, 4, 9, 1216, 28
12/10/2003 09 Changes in pagination (FM4158) 10, 11, 1727
02/20/2004 10 A new production tool adopted and layout All pages
design changed (FM4220)
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) I, II, 2, 3, 1214, 17, 22
11/12/2004 12 Revision for software V1.0(C), support I, II, 14, 6, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14
provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450)
07/30/2005 14 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, II, 1, 4, 7, 8, 1114, 1719,
2123, 28, 34
07/30/2005 14 Changes in pagination (FM4543) 15, 16, 20, 2427, 2933
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I, II, 16, 17, 22, 23
07/30/2006 16 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) IIV, 1, 3, 4, 15, 16, 20, 28
07/20/2007 17 Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) I, II, 1, 3, 4, 1719, 21, 22, 28, 29
10/31/2008 19 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) IIV, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 10, 12-14, 16, 18,
19, 2123, 26, 27, 29, 32, 33, 44
11/30/2009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, II, 1, 3, 5, 17, 2628, 30, 33, 35,
37, 38
11/30/2009 20 Changes in pagination (FM5622) 4, 6-16, 1825, 29, 31, 32, 34, 36,
3948
03/31/2010 21 Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) I, II, 13, 512, 1418, 20, 21,
2329, 3843, 5052
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MD-II
Control Sheet
12/10/2010 22 Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817) I, III, 1, 5, 30, 34, 40

12/10/2010 22 Changes in pagination (FM5817) 31-33, 35-39, 41-50
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) 1, 3, 16-19, 21, 22, 24, 26, 27, 29,
39, 40
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MD-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MD-IV
1. System Configuration
1. System Configuration For 5000MA connection

Dell OptiPlex GX260, 270 (Pentium type), etc.
This section shows the system configuration, which includes the Dell Precision WS330, 340 (Pentium type), etc.
CR-IR346/348CL application, and the operating environment for the PC.
Previously used CR Console
The application is to be installed on the following PCs. The PC to be
Dell OptiPlex GX150 (Pentium type), etc.
used varies with the image reader specification.
Mobile models
PC used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) connection
Dell Precision WS360, 370, 380 (Pentium RAID type), etc.
Dell OptiPlex GX110 (Pentium type), etc.
Dell Precision WS390 (Core 2 Duo type)
Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60, 280, 620, 745 (Celeron type),
755 (Dual Core type) etc. NEC N8368-B0045503 BASIC UNIT
(Pentium or RAID type - for European use only)
NEC Model N8368-B0045S01 BASIC UNIT
(Pentium type, for European use only): Dell Precision T3400 (Core 2 Duo type)
Hereinafter referred to as NEC PC.*1 Dell OptiPlex 960, 780 (Core 2 Duo type)
NEC Model N8368-B0045S02 BASIC UNIT *1
The NEC PC is compatible with EMC: IEC60601-1-2: 2001.
(Celeron type, for European use only): *2
9000 series connection is applicable only in Japan.
Hereinafter referred to as NEC PC.*1
PC used for 5000 plus (5000 series + CL) or CL-RU N:N

connection and 9000 series connection*2
CR Console Plus
Dell OptiPlex GX260, 270, 280, 620 (Pentium type), etc.
Dell OptiPlex 745, 755, 760, 780 (Core 2 Duo type)
(Pentium type, for European use only):
CR Console Lite
Dell OptiPlex GX50, 60, 280, 620, 745 (Celeron type),
755, 760, 780 (Core 2 Duo, Dual Core type) etc.
(Celeron type, for European use only):
For CR Console MINI (Applicable only in Japan)

Dell OptiPlex 745, 755 (Dual Core type)
HP Compaq dc7800 SF, dc7900 SF (Dual Core type)
HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF (Dual Core type)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MD-1
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Operating environment

Connection PC main unit
System configuration Item Description

Pentium III ; clock frequency: 500 MHz or higher
PC main unit CPU
Celeron ; clock frequency: 1.3 GHz or higher
System
Video cable 512MB or more
Monitor memory
Mother board
(video terminal: onboard) VRAM 4MB or more
HDD IDE, 6.4GB or more, 5400 rpm or higher
Video RAM FDD 3.5" 2-mode
CR-IR346CL
CD-ROM drive 24-time-speed or faster (recommended)
application CD
Expansion
PCI bus slot 2 (half-size PCI board)
E-IDE card slots
-i/f System area/image area Network 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compatible
(drive C)
Windows 2000 Professional
OS
Windows XP Professional
Network i/f Option key CD Other RS-232C 1, USB 2
LP connection i/f
(PEI01A board: optional) Monitor
X-CON/RIS connection i/f Item Description
(PSI04A board: optional)
Display resolution 1024 768 pixels or higher
USB USB
Number of display
connector connector colors
24-bit True-Color (16,777,216 colors)
Accessories Barcode Magnetic

(keyboard reader card reader
and mouse) (optional) (optional)
00000042.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Operating environment

Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection PC main unit
and 9000 Series Connection Item Description
Pentium III ; clock frequency: 1 GHz or higher (*1)
System configuration
CPU Celeron ; clock frequency: 1.3 GHz or higher
PC main unit Core 2 Duo ; clock frequency: 1.86 GHz or higher (*4)
Video cable System memory 512MB or more (*5)
Mother board Monitor
VRAM 4MB or more
(video terminal: onboard)
HDD IDE, 40GB or more, 7200 rpm or higher (*2)
FDD 3.5" 2-mode
Video RAM
CR-IR348CL CD-ROM drive 24-time-speed or faster (recommended)
application CD Expansion
PCI bus slot 2 (half-size PCI board)
card slots
E-IDE
-i/f System area/image area Network 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compatible
(drive C) Windows 2000 Professional
Windows XP Professional
OS
Windows Vista Business
Network i/f Option key CD Windows 7 Professional
LP connection i/f, Other RS-232C 1, USB 3 (*3)
9000 series connection i/f* *1 : Pentium IV; clock frequency: 1.5GHz or higher when the
(PEI01A board: optional) FCR 5000MA plus is connected.
X-CON/RIS connection i/f, *2 : SATA 160GBx2 (RAID1 type) for the mobile model.
9000 series connection i/f* (60GB or more for Windows Vista / 7)
(PSI04A board: optional) *3 : For the mobile model, one port is used for the external memory unit
Removable (DVD).
USB media *4 : Set up a single CPU by using BIOS.
(DVD) (For software version V6.0 (B) or later, the operation is possible with
a Multi CPU.)
POCKET id *5 : 1GB or more is required for software version V6.0(B) or later.
USB Console (A 2GB or more size is required for Windows Vista / 7.)
USB USB (Applicable only
in Japan)
Accessories Barcode Magnetic Remote power
(keyboard reader card reader control switch box
and mouse) (optional) (optional) (only for 5000 plus connection)
MD000010.EPS
* 9000 series connection is applicable only in Japan.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection
Monitor (15" LCD, 17" CRT)

Item Description
Display resolution 1024 768 pixels or higher
Number of display
24-bit True-Color (16,777,216 colors)
colors
Monitor (SL-IC300)
See manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
Monitor (SL-IC200)
See manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2. Connectors and Slots
2. Connectors and Slots

This section shows the locations of the following PC connectors,
memory modules, and PC board mounting slots.
Dell OptiPlex GX110
Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60
Dell OptiPlex GX260
Dell OptiPlex GX270
Dell Precision WS340
NEC PC
Dell OptiPlex GX280
Dell OptiPlex GX620
Dell OptiPlex 745
Dell OptiPlex 755
Dell Precision T3400
HP Compaq dc7800 SF
Dell OptiPlex 760
Dell OptiPlex 960
HP Compaq dc7900 SF
Dell OptiPlex 780
HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110 Memory modules

The maximum amount of memory (512MB) is factory installed prior to
System board location shipment. Therefore, no more memory can be added.
System board System board DIMM sockets

Expansion card slots
B A
00000264.EPS
Connectors (PC rear panel)

Mouse connector Serial port 2 connector
Parallel port connector Video connector
Memory slots
00000261.EPS

A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board 1 2
(optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS Serial port 1 connector
connection. These boards can be mounted in either of the two slots. USB port (2-port) NIC connector
Keyboard connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346CL. 00000262.EPS
PCI2
PCI1
00000263.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60 Memory configuration

A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
F System board DIMM sockets
R
O
N
T
Memory slots
System board
A
B
MD000015.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)

Expansion card slots Mouse connector NIC connector
MD000012.EPS Parallel port connector Video connector
Expansion card slots GX150, 50

A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board
(optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS
connection. These boards can be mounted in either of the two slots. Serial port 1 connector
USB port (2-port)
Serial port 2 connector Keyboard
PCI2 connector
Mouse connector
NIC connector
PCI1 Parallel port connector
GX60
MD000014.EPS
Serial port connector

Video connector Keyboard USB port (4-port)
connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL. MD000013.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.3 Dell OptiPlex GX260 Memory configuration

F
System board DIMM sockets
R
O
Memory slots N
T

System board
A B
MD000098.EPS

MD000099.EPS Mouse connector NIC connector
Parallel port connector
connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI2 to
PCI4.
F
R Serial port connector
O
N AGP USB port (4-port)
T Video connector Keyboard
PCI1 connector
1 2 3 4
PCI2
PCI3
PCI4
System board Riser board MD000100.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Dell Precision WS340
2.4 Dell Precision WS340 Memory configuration

System board RIMM sockets
F
R
Memory slots O
N
T

System board
3
4
1
2
MD000097.EPS
MD000104.EPS
Expansion card slots Mouse connector NIC connector
A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board Parallel port connector Video connector
connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots from PCI2 to
PCI4.
F
R
O
N AGP
T
(Video board)
Serial port 1 connector
PCI1
1 2 3 4 Serial port 2 connector USB port (2-port)
Keyboard
PCI2 connector
PCI3 : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL. MD000103.EPS
PCI4
System board Riser board MD000115.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

FRONT
Memory slots
4
3
2
1
RIMM sockets
System board
MD000094.EPS

System board Mouse connector NIC connector
MD000092.EPS
Parallel port connector Video connector

connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots PCI2 to PCI5.
FRONT
Serial port 2 connector USB port (4-port)
Serial port 1 connector Keyboard connector
AGP (Video board)
PCI1 : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL. MD000095.EPS
PCI2
PCI3
PCI4
PCI5
MD000093.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Memory slots
F
R
O
Expansion card slots N
T
System board
MD000108.EPS

MD000106.EPS
Mouse connector NIC connector
Parallel port connector
PCI4.
F
R Serial port connector
O
N AGP USB port (6-port)
T Video connector Keyboard connector
PCI1
PCI 2
PCI 3
PCI 4
System board MD000107.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.7 NEC PC
2.7 NEC PC Memory configuration

Memory slots

System board
MD000112.EPS

Mouse connector Parallel port connector
Keyboard
MD000110.EPS
connector NIC connector

connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots from PCI2 to
PCI4.
PCI 1
PCI 2
Serial port connector USB port (2-port)
PCI 3
Video connector
PCI 4
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL. MD000113.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.8 Dell OptiPlex GX280 SDT
F
System board location R
O
N
T
Memory slots
Expansion card slots PEG

System board
PCI 2
System board
MD000202.EPS
MD000201.EPS
SMT
F
R
Expansion card slots O
N
T
(optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS
connection. PEG
The GX280 has two types, one is small desk top (SDT) and the other is PCI 0
small mini tower (SMT), and locations of expansion card slots are
different with each other. PCI 1
PCI 2
PE1
System board
MD000222.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Memory configuration Connector configuration (PC rear panel)

SDT
SDT Serial connector NIC connector
System board DIMM sockets Parallel connector
F
R
O
N
T
Video connector USB port (6-port)
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL.

MD000203.EPS MD000224.EPS
SMT SMT
System board DIMM sockets Serial connector NIC connector

Parallel connector
F
R
O
N
T

MD000223.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

F
R
Memory slots O
N
T

System board 4
2
3
1
MD000207.EPS
MD000205.EPS
Expansion card slots PS/2 mouse connector NIC connector
Parallel connector Video connector
PCI4.
F
R
O
N AGP
T
(Video board) Serial port connector
PCI1 (COM1) USB port (6-port)
1 2 3 4 Serial port connector
(COM2) PS/2 keyboard connector
PCI2
PCI3 : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000208.EPS
PCI4
System board Riser board

MD000206.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

F
R
O
Memory slots N
T

System board
4
2
3
1
MD000211.EPS
MD000209.EPS Connector configuration (PC rear panel)

Parallel connector Video connector
connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots of PCI2 and
PCI3.
F
R PCI Express x16
O
N Card slot Serial port connector
T
(Video board)
Keyboard connector USB port (6-port)
PCI1
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
PCI2 MD000212.EPS
PCI3
PCI Express x1
(Card slot)
System board
MD000210.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

System board
Memory slots
MD000254.EPS

MD000252.EPS
Expansion card slots Parallel connector NIC connector
connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots of PCI1 and
PCI2.
PCI Express x16
PCI1 Video connector USB port (6-port)

PCI2
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL.
PCI Express x1 MD000255.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

System board
Memory slots
MD000258.EPS

MD000256.EPS Parallel connector
PCI3.
PCI Express x1
Card slot
PCI Express x16
Card slot Keyboard connector USB port (5-port)
PCI1
PCI Express x8 : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
Card slot MD000259.EPS
PCI2
System board PCI3 MD000257.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745 Expansion card slots

System board location (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS
connection.
System board Model 745 offers two types: a desktop (DT) and a mini tower (MT), each
Memory slots of which has expansion card slot locations different from each other.
DT
PCI Express x16

Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
MD000268.EPS
System board
MD000266.EPS
MT
PCI Express x16

Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express x1
Card slot
System board
MD000265.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

DT
DT Parallel connector NIC connector

MD000262.EPS
MD000264.EPS
MT
MT Parallel connector NIC connector

MD000263.EPS
MD000267.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

System board
Memory slots
MD000271.EPS

MD000269.EPS
Parallel connector
PCI3.
PCI Express x1
Card slot
PCI Express x16 USB port (5-port)
Card slot Keyboard connector
PCI1 Serial port connector
PCI Express x8 : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.

Card slot MD000272.EPS
PCI2
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.15 Dell OptiPlex 755 Expansion card slots

System board location (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS
connection.
System board Model 755 offers two types: a desktop (DT) and a mini tower (MT), each
Memory slots of which has expansion card slot locations different from each other.
DT
PCI Express x16

Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
MD000273.EPS
System board
MD000274.EPS
MT
PCI Express x16

Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express x1
Card slot
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

DT
DT Parallel connector NIC connector

MD000275.EPS MT
Parallel connector NIC connector
MT

MD000282.EPS
MD000283.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.16 Dell Precision T3400
2.16 Dell Precision T3400 Memory configuration

System board
Memory slots
MD000279.EPS

MD000277.EPS
Parallel connector
PCI3.
PCI1
PCI Express x16

Card slot Keyboard connector USB port (6-port)
PCI Express x8 Serial port connector
Card slot
PCI Express x16 MD000280.EPS
Card slot
PCI2
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF
2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF Memory configuration

System board
System board
Memory slots
DIMM sockets
MD000286.EPS

NIC connector Parallel connector
MD000284.EPS
USB port
(6-port) Keyboard connector
Video connector Mouse connector
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.18 Dell OptiPlex 760 Memory configuration

Windows XP : A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location Windows Vista : A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board System board DIMM sockets
Memory slots
AWS10008.ai
AWS10002.ai

Expansion card slots Parallel connector
When Windows XP is used for the OS, a total of two expansion card NIC connector
slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection
and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection.
For Windows Vista, the MOXA board (optional) is used for PCI Express x1.
PCI Express x16

Card slot
PCI1
USB port (6-port)
PCI2 Video connector
PCI Express x1
Card slot : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
AWS10010.ai
System board
AWS10007.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

Memory slots System board
NAX010130.ai

Parallel connector NIC connector
NAX010129.ai

When Windows Vista is used for the OS, the MOXA board (optional) is
used for PCI Express x1.
PCI Express x16

Card slot
PCI1
USB port (6-port)
PCI2
PCI Express x1 Serial port connector Video connector
Card slot
System board NAX010131.ai
NAX010128.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF
2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF Memory configuration

System board
Memory slots
MD000290.EPS

MD000289.EPS
NIC connector Mouse connector
USB port
(6-port)
Video connector Keyboard connector
MD000288.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

System board
Memory slots
DCL10018.ai

DCL10012.ai
Expansion card slots Video connector Parallel connector

(For 2M monitor) NIC connector
PCI Express x16

Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express x1 USB port (6-port)
Card slot Serial port connector
System board Video connector
DCL10017.ai (For touch panel monitor)
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL. DCL10019.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF Memory configuration

System board
Memory slots
MD000294.ai

NIC connector Mouse connector
MD000293.ai
USB port
(6-port)
Video connector Keyboard connector
MD000288.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3. System Connection Examples
3. System Connection Examples Network type

This example represents a system connection that is used with the
XG-1 system built into an existing hospital network, to which the IDT
This section shows CR-IR346/348CL system connection examples. function incorporated FCR5000 Series, IDT connection type FCR5000
Series, or similar equipment is connected.
Independent type [XG-1 system]
IDT
This example represents the most compact system connection, which QA-WS/ connection type
consists of the CR-IR346RU, CR-IR346CL, and printer. Image output HI-C655 FCR 5000 Series
(FINP or DICOM)
ID information entry, local storage, and local film output functions can
be exercised by this system alone. In this connection example, film
output is enabled either via the E-i/f or using the DICOM Print function. Hospital network
Connecting a printer via the E-i/f FRUP

XG-1 system IDT IDT
IDT function Image output
E-i/f CR-IR346RU CR-IR (FINP)
CR-IR346CL Printer 346CL incorporated
FCR5000 Series
FRUP XG-1 system MD000019.EPS
Illustrated below is an example of system connection with the 5000 plus

CR-IR346RU system incorporated into the configuration shown above. This system
configuration is available with software version A02 or later.
MD000018.EPS
Image output
(FINP)
IDT
Connecting a printer using the DICOM Print function QA-WS/ connection type
Image output HI-C655 FCR5000 Series
(FINP or DICOM)
FRUP DICOM Print
Hospital network
CR-IR346RU CR-IR346CL Printer
FRUP ID:FINP
MD000023.EPS Image: IDT IDT
DICOM Image output
(FINP or DICOM)
CR-IR CR-IR 5000 plus CR-IR
346RU 346CL 348CL
XG-1 system 5000 plus system MD000011.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3. System Connection Examples
Illustrated below is an example of system connection where the XG-1 The following example shows a case of system configuration where the
(two or more RUs connected) and 5000 plus are used simultaneously. CL is connected to the CR-IR355RU, 356, 357 or 359 or CR-IR362,
This system configuration is available with software version A04 or later. 363, 364, 366, 367, 368 or 370, 371, 372 and connection can be
The system configuration that includes the IDT-IV is available with established properly with the CR-IR355RU/356/357/362/363/364/368
software version A07 or later. for software version V3.1(B) or later, with the CR-IR366/367/370 for
software version V4.0(B) or later and with the CR-IR359/371/372 for
QA-WS/ software version V5.0(B).
Image output HI-C655 IDT-IV Hospital network
(FINP or DICOM)
Hospital network ID: FINP FRUP DICOM Print
FRUP ID: FINP CR-IR

FRUP CR-IR348CL Printer
Image: DICOM 35X, 36X or 37X*
* 35X : 355RU/356/357/359
CR-IR CR-IR CR-IR 36X : 362/363/364/366/367/368
5000 5000
346RU 346RU 348CL plus plus 37X : 370/371/372 MD000105.EPS
System connection where the XG-1 (two or more RUs connected)

and 5000 plus are used simultaneously. MD000020.EPS
The following example shows a case where some CLs are cluster-
connected (for shared study information). This system configuration is
available with software version A09 or later.
QA-WS/
Image output HI-C655 IDT-IV
(FINP or DICOM)
Hospital network ID:FINP
FRUP ID:FINP
FRUP
Image:DICOM
CR-IR CR-IR CR-IR 5000plus 5000plus CR-IR CR-IR

346RU 346RU 348CL 348CL 348CL
Cluster connection (shared study information) MD000024.EPS
For the cluster connection function, see 8. Cluster Connection

Function Overview.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
4. Software Function Overview
4. Software Function Overview Equipment Description

Up to two units can be connected.
CR-IR364, 366 or The connection protocol used is FRUP2.1.
External equipment connections 367 built-in type Uncompressed, nonstandardized 12-bit images
are output to the CL.
Equipment Description Up to two units can be connected.
The 348CL can be simultaneously connected to CR-IR370, 371 or The connection protocol used is FRUP2.1.
the XG-1 RU, FCR5000 cassette type, and 372 built-in type Uncompressed, nonstandardized 12-bit images
FCR5000 built-in type. Software version A03 are output to the CL.
does not allow you to use the XG-1 RU and Connection possible to CR-IR317/319/325/326/
FCR5000 built-in type simultaneously. The 327/329/332/335/336 and CR-MF125/126.
346CL can only be connected to one unit of the A maximum of two RUs, one cassette type
XG-1 RU. Image Reader or two built-in type Image
Software version A11 supports connection to 9000 series Readers, can be connected to one CL.
the CR-IR362/363/364. [Applicable only in Connection protocol used is the CR image
Image Reader Software version V1.0(C) supports connection Japan] transfer communication protocol (E-i/f) and ID
to the 9000 series. information used is the IDT/CSL-IR interface
Software version V3.1(B) supports connection (serial).
to the CR-IR355RU, 356, 357 or 368. Standardized 10-bit images are output to the
Software Version V4.0(B) supports connection CL.
to the CR-IR366, 367 or 370.
One unit can be connected through the use of
Software version V5.0(B) supports connection
the PEI board. The CR-LP414, FL-IM2636,
to the CR-IR359.
FL-IM3543, and FL-IM3543M cannot be
Software version V6.0(B) supports connection
connected.
to the CR-IR371/372. Local printer
Up to eight units can be connected. The double-density recording function is
The connection protocol used is FRUP. supported (FM-DPL only).
XG-1 RU Four film sizes (14"17", 14"14", 2636cm,
Uncompressed, nonstandardized, 12-bit images
are output to the CL. 10"12" and 8"10") are supported.
Up to eight units can be connected. The connection protocol used is DICOM BGP/
The connection protocol used is Private Printer SOP. The acceptable connection target
FCR5000 cassette is the FN-PS551, DRYPIX, FM-DP L or other
Unstandardized CR Storage. JPEG- Network printer
type specified device of a different manufacturer.
compressed, nonstandardized, 11-bit images
are output to the CL. However, the network printer cannot be used
together with the local printer.
Up to two units can be connected.
The connection protocol used is Private
FCR5000 built-in
Unstandardized CR Storage. JPEG-
type
compressed, nonstandardized, 11-bit images
Up to eight units can be connected. (For the
CR-IR355RU, 356,
CR-IR 355RU, only one unit can be connected.)
357, 359, 362, 363
The connection protocol used is FRUP2.1.
or 368 cassette
Uncompressed, nonstandardized 12-bit images
type
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Equipment Description Equipment Description

This device can deliver its output to one filing A maximum of three POCKET id Consoles can
device and eight other devices. As the be connected to each CL.
POCKET id Console
connection protocol, FINP, DICOM CR Storage, Available for workflow used for exposure
(V4.0(B) or later)
DICOM DX/MG Image Storage, or DICOM XR operations at locations outside the X-ray
Storage can be used. For the employed filing examination room.
DICOM receiver device, DICOM Storage Commitment and
Monitor Only one unit can be connected.
DICOM Query/Retrieve can be used. The
acceptable connection target is the HI-C655, 1024768 color LCD The touch panel function is provided.
QA-WS771, HI-C654, OD-F614/624, CR-IR
1024768 color CRT
355CL or other specified devices of different
manufacturers. 12801024 color LCD The touch panel function is provided.
DICOM MWM or SL-IC 300 The dedicated video board is required.
DICOM PPS Network connection. SL-IC 200 The dedicated video board is required.
compliant device
16001200
Host connection Ikegami
RIS Only one unit can be serially connected (via the The dedicated video board is required.
device based on monochrome
PSI04A board).
Type A/B interface 1k monitor
Network connection. Only one unit can be connected via USB. The
Synapse Magnetic card
Software version V8.1(B) or later. JIS card and ISO card are supported. The
reader
Only one unit can be serially connected (via functions are the same as those of the IDT-IV.
Dose-area product meter COM port on the PC). Other Barcode reader Only one unit can be connected via USB.
Only VacuTECs VacuDAP can be connected.
Full-size keyboard Only one unit can be connected.
Only one X-CON unit can be connected serially
X-CON Mouse Only one unit can be connected.
(with the PSI04A board).
For other than
Toshiba, Shimadzu, Hitachi, Philips and
mammography
Siemens devices are supported.
(A04 or later)
For mammography
Toshiba and Planmed devices are supported.
(V2.0(B) or later)
For mammography Siemens device are supported.
(V4.0(B) or later) (For serial connection, use COM port on the PC.)
The ID information collection and ID information
IDT
sharing functions are supported.
IDT-IV Up to 16 units can be connected.
Only one unit can be connected. Patient
IDC-IV information is acquired from the host via the
IDC-IV.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Start of processing Exposure

Function Description Function Description
m Displaying the study list stored on the HDD m Patient information input methods
(local worklist) Magnetic card input
m Displaying the DICOM worklist Keyboard input
m The following processes can be performed Software keyboard input (B00 or later)
with a study listing selected: Automatic ID assignment function (V2.0(B)
Study list display or later)
Exposure
QA ID assignment function used for screening
Lock examination (V7.1(B) or later)
Deletion Patient information on-line function (Type A/B)
Study registration Local database search (300,000 items)
Multi-frame forced output (reception) Acquisition from IDC-IV
This function enables multiple CLs to share m Exposure menu registration methods
study information and can be set up in service Choosing from a displayed group of
Shared study information utility mode. exposure menus - (Two or more exposure
(cluster connection)
8. Cluster Connection Function menus can be registered.)
Overview Choosing from a study menu
m Registered study list management function
m Exposure menu information setup/
Displaying a list of registered studies
management
Deleting registered studies
Image processing parameters
Exposure menu m Monitor image display
Requesting department Blackened images are displayed when the
Radiographer automatic shuttering process is specified.
Film annotation characters When an energy-subtracted image is
Import of consumables database received, the low-energy, bone, or soft-
m Environment setup tissue mode can be selected.
Six images can be displayed on the same
m Setup data backup/restore
User utility window in the list form. (B00 or later) [Not
m Patient database utility available when RU and CL are connected
m Acquisition and clearing of exposure result at the rate of 1:1.]
log Performing studies A precision image is displayed for image
m Customization of window display (B00 or confirmation purpose. For a PEM-specified
later) image, the PEM processing execution
m Transfer of image processing parameters to window is displayed.
FCR5000 series equipment m Input image monitoring
m Media reconstruction using removable media Thumbnails of images input for a previous
mCustomization of POCKET id Console study are displayed at the lower right corner
window/transfer of radiographer information of the window allowing thus to check input
status constantly. (B00 or later)
m The QA function can be exercised with
images for study selected.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

m Exposure list manipulation Showing the location of a menu selected in
New-exposure addition one study/the count of all exposure menus
Repeat (V7.0(B) or later)
Duplication Starting an Choosing from the local worklist (list of
Reexposure exposure (study) registered studies)
Exposure menu change Choosing from the DICOM worklist
Exposure menu parameter change Making an entry from the RIS
Exposure sequence change Making an entry from an RIS component
Image change
Temporary study An ongoing study can be temporarily
Information change
suspension suspended.
(The patient information/exposure
information can be changed. The results Study interruption An ongoing study can be interrupted.
will not be fed to the RIS.) The study ends when all the registered
S value/L value warning function Other Study termination exposures are made.
(for V3.0(B) or later)
Multiple studies performed at the same time The user can choose between forwarding the
Forwarding to QA/
(for V3.0(B) or later) studied items to QA and printing them without
printing without QA
m Automatic printing/delivery forwarding them to QA.
Performing studies
The user can choose printing/delivering Study result
exposed images successively or making Ordering and DICOM PPS are supported.
management
prints/delivery in compliance with the
instructions issued upon completion of a Setting of 2on1 or 2on1 or 4on1 format can be set up and image
study or printing/delivering according to user 4on1 on the study position can be changed accordingly on the
operations. window study window. (B00 or later)
m Study suspension (suspension/termination) Authority (password) can be determined to
Support to the PAS
and initiation of a new study operate modification of image processing
security function
When new patient information is entered via parameters (V7.0 or later).
the magnetic card or host-connected Type A
during study, a new study can be started.
In such an instance, the user can choose
between proceeding without changing the
exposure menu and removing the exposure
menu registration.
m Synapse Web Query (V2.0(B) or later)
Allowing the user to view images of the same
patient stored in the Synapse server
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
QA function (QA waiting study list/QA upon study ) Image output

The following items of information can be One or two (B00 or later) printers can be
handled: connected. Two-printer connection can be
Image information registered only for the DICOM Print function.
Exposure menus A printer optimum for film output is seleceted
Information display/
Image processing conditions automatically according to the Image size
correction
Film formats and Film format for the image to be output
Distribution destination selection for each study on film.
Imaging failure setup The QA-WS771s DICOM print format is
Output log complied with. The sorter function is the same
The following image manipulation functions are as for the FCR5000 Series. Printers
supported: connectable with the following protocols are
Shuttering process supported:
Restandardization process Local connection (E-i/f connection)
Image DICOM Print
Image processing change data
Image manipulation Rotation Output to printer FINP
output
Marker imbedding (setting for manual/ function The following film sizes are available for film
automatic imbedding) output with software version B00.
Image composition (manual/automatic) 14"17"
Trimming 2636cm
Annotation 14"14"
10"12"
The following operations can be performed for
8"10"
images:
Life size (100% size) output of a long-view
The sequence of images within a study can
combined image,
be changed.
12 frame image (12on1) output on a 14"17"
The images within a study can be
film,
interchanged.
Multiple images of the same study assigned
Images can be moved from one study to another.
on a film (1 to 4),
Images can be output.
Magnification-ratio-specified image output
The image erasure lock can be set.
Setup can be performed so as indicate the
Operations
completion of QA.
Images can be deleted.
The image can be magnified and the full
screen display is available.
Exposure menus can be additionally
registered to an already delivered study.
The following operation can be performed for
studies:
Multiple studies can be delivered. (Only studies
whose images have already been output.)
Other Window customization function
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Function Description Image search

Only one unit of the filing device can be Function Description Option key
connected. When FINP is employed,
standardized, unprocessed images can only Study information can be searched
be output. When DICOM is used, for from the filing device (Query).
nonstandardized images, standardized Based on the searched
images, and processed images can be output. DICOM Query/ information, images can be
Output to network- CL DICOM QR
Further, DICOM Storage Commitment is Retrieve acquired from the filing device
connected filing (Retrieve).
supported (one unit only). The output of 20
device Acquired images can be output to
lines/mm images can be generated only when
DICOM is used. Filing devices connectable the printer (Reprint).
with the following protocols are supported:
FINP
DICOM CR Storage
DICOM XR Storage
Up to eight units can be connected. When
FINP is employed, standardized, unprocessed
Image images can only be output. When DICOM is
data used, nonstandardized images, standardized
output images, and processed images can be output.
function The output of 20 lines/mm images can be
generated only when DICOM is used.
Filing devices connectable with the following
protocols are supported:
Output to network- FINP
connected device DICOM CR Storage
DICOM XR Storage
Software version A09 supports DICOM Digital
Mammography. Following are supported
service classes.
DX Image Storage For Presentation
DX Image Storage For Processing
MG Image Storage For Presentation
MG Image Storage For Processing
A function that delivers images automatically if
Delayed image
no actions are taken for an image for a certain
delivery
period of time after it has been received.
Patient information is logged in text format.
Patient information log
Patient information used for exposures can be
function
viewed with Service Utility.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Image processing Other

Function Description Option key Function Description Option key
Standardization Not applicable to image reoutputs that Exposure and mis-exposure image
Standard
(automatic/manual) are generated by an external device. information is stored and calculated
CL RETAKE
Gradation processing Standard Retake Analysis appropriately.
ANALYSIS
Calculated data is output in CSV
Spatial frequency data.
Standard
processing
The number of how many times the
DRC Standard* IP use count IP was used is calculated for each
Standard
TAS Standard* calculation IP barcode. The count can be reset
to 0.
IR 346 MFP
MFP
IR 348 MFP Temporary storage
Supported local
PEM CL PEM Simplified image storage Standard
storage
DICOM file storage
Not applicable to image reoutputs
CL SHUTTER- CL DICOM
Blackening that are generated by an external
PROC Removable media Removable media (DVD) MEDIA
device.
STORAGE B
Energy-subtraction Applicable when the XU-D1 is
CL ES CL DICOM
processing connected.
PDI creation Stores study results onto a CD-R PDI
20 lines/mm image STORAGE
Standard
support
CL USB
Composes multiple images into one CL IM Reads image data stored into USB
Image composition Reading image data STORAGE
so that it is output on one film. COMPOSITION memory from CR-IR 358CL.
FOR 358
Grid Pattern Removal Removes grid moire patterns
CL GPR Reads image data stored into USB
(GPR) processing without deteriorating image quality. Reading image data
memory from CR-IR 358CL / FCR- CL USB
Flexible Noise Control (FCR-MB 201
Improves image graininess. Standard MB 201 Console. Multiple kinds of STORAGE A
(FNC) processing Console)
security software are supported.
Right-and-left mammography User interface For hospitals Standard
Image up-and-down
images are automatically positioned Standard
positioning Authenticates a user at startup of
up-and-down.
the application.
Correction processing necessary Automatic log-off processing
High-luminance view
when displaying high-luminance Limited items available for each
box correction Standard
view box image processing on the user
processing Patient information
ordinary view box (monitor). Entry of mis-exposure comment Standard
protection
when canceling a mis-exposure
* The DRC and TAS processing items are stored on the standard key that occurred
CD. Re-entry of a password when
XG-1 system : XG-1 Standard key CD changing or modifying a
Two or more RUs, 5000 plus : Lite Standard key CD radiographer name
Plus Standard key CD
Date/time display Displays the current date and time. Standard
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Function Description Option key

Logging in to the Entry of password when logging in
Standard
Service Utility to the Service Utility.
Image Reader QC FCR QC TEST
Image Reader QC processing tool
processing SOFT
Mammo QC FCR QC TEST
Mammo QC processing tool
processing SOFT M
Presents displayed images and
Precise enlargement CR PRECISE
their additional information on a
images ENLARGEMENT
capacity-enhanced monitor.
An ROI determined on an image
enables display of width and height
CR QA ROI
QA ROI measurement of the ROI, as well as its mean pixel
MEASUREMENT
value, median pixel value, standard
deviation and area.
Displays Exposure Index (EI) and
Deviation Index (DI) for an image.
Displaying Exposure FR21 Setting the Exposure Standard
Index Index Function under
FR: Function-specific
Reference
Japanese
English
French
German
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Danish
Norwegian
Korean
Supported languages Standard
Chinese (China)
Chinese (Taiwan)
Portuguese
Polish
Hungarian
Czech
Russian
Turkish
Greek
Romanian
Displays an icon to indicate the
RAID status display Standard
RAID status.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow
5. Relationship between RU and CL RU-AP (solid-line arrow mark)

When the RU-AP is installed, the RU-AP, RU-Config, and RU
message file data are copied to the CL.
This section explains about the data exchange operations that are
performed between the CL and RU (CR-IR346RU) when they are The RU-AP and RU-Config data are copied to the FLASH ROM via
connected. the network.
NOTE REFERENCE
The application, operating system, and RU Configuration are The RU message file stores a detailed record of RU error events.
abbreviated hereafter AP, OS, and RU-Config, respectively. Codes of the errors encountered in the RU are used as a key for
displaying error codes and detailed error information on the CL
monitor.

RU-OS (broken-line arrow mark) and machine shipment control
Data flow during installation process data (chain-line arrow mark)
The RU-OS and machine shipment control data are copied to the
CL RU RUs FLASH ROM via the CLs FTP server.
FLASH ROM
RU-OS
RU message file RU-AP
RU-AP RU-Config
FTP server
CD
COMMON Machine shipment control data
RU-OS
Backup memory
RU-OS RU-AP
Default RU-Config
CD settings
Cleared
RU-Config
Machine shipment
control data Memory (SDRAM)
Machine RU individual data

shipment
control data
FD
Data enclosed with broken lines are temporarily stored in the FTP
server for transfer to the RU.
Data enclosed with solid lines are constantly stored for comparison with
the contents of the RUs FLASH ROM.
00000508.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Data flow during RU boot process Data flow during normal process
RU CL RU
FLASH ROM FLASH ROM
Image data
(1) (1)
RU-OS RU-Config
(1) (1) Backup memory
Machine shipment FTP server
RU-AP control data
COMMON Log data
Backup memory Memory (SDRAM)

RU-AP
Default RU-Config (2)
Image data
setting data*
RU-Config
RU-Config
Memory (SDRAM) RU-OS
Log data
Machine shipment control data
RU-OS RU-Config RU individual data
RU-Config
RU-AP Machine shipment
control data * Network setting items such
as default IP addresses of 00000510.EPS
the RU and CL.
00000509.EPS
Image data
When you boot the RU, the data in the FLASH ROM is copied to the The image data obtained by IP scanning is saved in the SDRAM and
memory (SDRAM) (arrow mark (1)). then transferred to the CL via the network.
If the backup memory contains default RU-Config setting data, it
overwrites the RU-Config data in the memory (SDRAM) (arrow mark (2)). Log data
The RU-AP copies the log data to the CLs FTP server as needed.
REFERENCE
The default RU-Config setting data does not usually exist in the backup
memory. It is written into the backup memory only when any of the
following procedures is performed:
The <Erasure process> switch activation + RU power ON procedure is
performed.
See 3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be
Performed upon RU Memory Initialization, under
MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
The Temporary Setting procedure for the backup memory is
performed with the RUs maintenance utility.
See MU: Maintenance Utility for the CR-IR346RU.
The RU-AP is installed from the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS
CD.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
Data flow during backup/restore process 5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
The RU M-Utility is used to back up or restore the various RU data.
AUTO UPDATE
CL RU (Currently this function is not used. Turn it OFF.)
FLASH ROM
The AUTO UPDATE function will automatically have the RU download
FTP server Machine shipment RU data from the FTP server if there is a discrepancy between CL FTP
control data server data and RU FLASH ROM data (RU-AP and RU-Config).
COMMON
The RU-AP and RU-Config are downloaded in the following sequence:
RU-Config
When the CL-AP starts running, the FTP servers RU-AP and RU-
Config are compared with the contents of the FLASH ROM. If they do
Machine shipment
control data Backup memory not match, the FTP server data overwrites the data in the FLASH ROM.
RU-Config Log data REFERENCE
Log data
Backup The FTP (a network protocol for file exchange between terminals) is
Media RU individual data used for data exchange between the RU and CL.
Memory (SDRAM)
The RU main unit is not equipped with input devices for directly
rewriting the RU internal data (RU-AP, RU-Config, etc.). Therefore, a
networked PC is used to rewrite the RU internal data. The CL-PC is
00000518.EPS
basically used when the CL-RU connection is established.
Log data
A set of log data stored in the backup memory is backed up onto CL RU
media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) in the sequence indicated
above. Note that the log data cannot be restored. FTP server FLASH ROM
RU M-Utility Comparison
RU-AP RU-AP
RU-Config
The RU-Config data stored in the FTP server is backed up onto RU-Config RU-Config
Comparison
media. In the restore process, the data on the media is copied to the
FTP server.
Machine shipment control data If a file date conflict occurs

The machine shipment control data stored in the FLASH ROM is CL RU
backed up onto media in the sequence indicated above. In the
restore process, the data is copied to the FLASH ROM via the FTP FTP server FLASH ROM
Acquisition
server. RU M-Utility
RU-AP RU-AP
RU-Config RU-Config
Acquisition
00010139.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
NOTE NOTE
The comparison between the RU-AP and RU-Config is made by [Influence of RU-AP upgrade on RU-Config]
checking the file date. It is thus well to remember that the FLASH ROM When you upgrade the RU-AP, the RU-Config file date may change for
data is updated even if a file in the FTP server is dated earlier than the following reason:
FLASH ROM data.
The date changes:
When the contents of the RU-Config are changed before the
If, for instance, the RU-AP version is upgraded from A00 to A01, the upgrade (including the contents of the RU-Config setup window
resulting sequence is as indicated below: displayed at the time of RU-AP installation).
The date remains unchanged:
1. The A01 version RU-AP is installed in the CLs FTP server. When the contents of the RU-Config are not changed at all.
2. Either the CL or the RU is restarted. At the restart, the data
in the FTP server and FLASH ROM are compared with each REFERENCE
other.
Since the A00 data and A01 data differ with each other, the RU When installing the RU-AP in the FTP server, use the RU M-Utility.
acquires the A01 version RU-AP from the FTP server and updates The RU M-Utility is a utility tool that is dedicated to the RU and used,
the A00 data in the FLASH ROM with the A01 data. for instance, for RU-AP installation and RU-Config setup.
Since this tool is required for RU-AP installation and RU-Config setup,
On the other hand, the contents of the RU-Config remain
it needs to be installed in advance. It is stored on the CD supplied with
unchanged. Therefore, the RU-Config data does not overwrite the
the RU.
FLASH ROM data even after a comparison is made.
CL RU
FTP server FLASH ROM Support for daylight saving time/winter time
RU M-Utility
RU-AP (A01) RU-AP (A00)
(AUTO UPDATE)
When the machine is operated in a region where the file time stamp
RU-Config RU-Config varies depending on whether daylight saving time or winter time is used,
CD
it is necessary to turn OFF the AUTO UPDATE function. If daylight
saving time is superseded by winter time or vice versa while this
function is left ON, the RU downloads FTP server data, throwing the
user into confusion.
The CL or RU is restarted.
To avoid the above problem, it is necessary to turn OFF the AUTO
CL RU UPDATE function when the machine is installed or serviced in a region
Comparison where the file time stamp varies depending on whether daylight saving
and
FTP server
acquisition
FLASH ROM time or winter time is used.
RU M-Utility
RU-AP (A01) RU-AP (A01)
RU-Config RU-Config
Comparison
only
00010036.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview
6. RU-CL N:N Connection CL (RU master IIP)

CL (other than
RU master IIP)
Function Overview FTP server
The RU data is
The RU-CL N:N connection function is furnished by software version exchanged with the
A04. This function enables one CL to control two or more RUs and Not equipped
RU master IIP only. with the FTP
allows you to simultaneously operate two or more CLs (for permitting
the RU to transfer images to the CLs in which the associated barcodes server.
are registered). The equipment controlling the use of the above function
on a network is called the RU master IIP. The RU master IIP plays an Images are
important role in establishing the N:N connections for the RU and CL. transmitted to
This section mainly deals with the RU master IIP functionality, a unit in which
summarizing the N:N connection function. the associated RU RU RU
barcode is
registered.
NOTE
Flow of RU data (RU-AP, RU-Config,
The terms CR-IR346RU, application, and RU configuration are error information, etc.)
abbreviated hereinafter to RU, AP, and RU-Config, respectively. Flow of ID information and image data MD000021.EPS
REFERENCE
CLs serving as the RU master IIP and those not serving The RU master IIP also incorporates the interface for displaying the RU
as the RU master IIP status and error information.
The CLs serving as the RU master IIP (hereinafter referred to as the RU
master IIP) manage the RUs. These CLs have an FTP server for
exchanging data with the RUs (the FTP server is detailed earlier). When Handling of data whose ID registration is completed at IDT-IV
establishing the N:N connections for the RU and CL, the RU needs to
define a networked CL as the RU master IIP. When the barcode of an IP is registered at an IDT-IV unit that shares
the patient information setup with the RU master IIP and that IP is read
Up to eight units of the RU (up to three for software version A10 or by the RU, the image data is handled as explained below:
earlier) can be managed by one unit of the RU master IIP.
The image data is transferred to the RU master IIP that shares the
On the other hand, the CLs not serving as the RU master IIP do not patient information setup with the IDT-IV.
have the FTP server for exchanging data with the RU. They merely The RU master IIP generates a new study in accordance with the ID
receive images from the RU. Therefore, the FTP server setup information registered at the IDT-IV, and stores an image in the area
procedures (procedures for installing and setting up the IIS and RU of the newly generated study.
M-Utility) need not be performed for these CLs.
Only one image is to be stored per study. Even when the IDT-IV is set
to issue Study Instance UIDs in relation to the same study, one image
will be stored per study.
For details on patient information sharing setup, see 3.13 Patient
Information Sharing Function Setup under MU: Maintenance
Utility.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
7. Ordering Function Overview
7. Ordering Function Overview

When the ordering function is exercised, the patient information,
exposure menu, and X-ray information entered at the RIS are
transmitted to the CL and, after completion of an exposure process,
various items of information used for actual exposures (actual values)
are returned to the RIS.
The CL exercises the ordering function via either the serial interface or
F-RIS (in Japan only).
(1) (2)
RIS CL RU/IR
(3)
(1) Various items of information (patient information,
exposure menu, and X-ray information) are transmitted to
the CL.
(2) Exposure
(3) The values actually used for exposure (patient
information, exposure menu, and X-ray information) are
received from the CL. MD000022.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview
8. Cluster Connection Function Function overview

Overview Study information display
Various study lists (Local WL, QA, Queue, Delivered, All, Today) of a
specific CL can display the study information about the other CLs
The cluster connection function enables network-connected CLs to within the shared range.
share study information.
In this instance, the study information that is not possessed by the
When this function is exercised for cluster-connected CLs, the study specific CL can also be obtained from the other cluster-connected
information and images registered with a connected CL can be CL and displayed.
displayed on the display screen of a specific CL. This function also
makes it possible to collectively manage patient information and Cluster-connected
perform an integrated output processing operation.
NOTE
If the Japanese and English versions of the CLs are used together, they Printer RU1 CL1 CL2 RU2
cannot be cluster-connected.
Patient information
database Information
An example of cluster connection 1.
sharing
2.
A typical cluster connection is shown below.
Study list display Study list display
Cluster-connected Study information Study information
A database A database
B B
C A C C
D B D D
Printer RU1 CL1 CL2 RU2 Image display Image display

Image files Image files
MD000089.EPS A A
A C
B D
MD000090.EPS
Image display
Study information can be selected from a study list to display the
associated image. In this instance, the CL having the study
information may not always be identical with the CL having the
associated image file.
If the CL having the associated image file is turned OFF in such a
situation, a file access error occurs so that a dummy image appears
on the display.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Study registration and study execution Sorting, search, and filtering

The study information registration and study execution processes Although the total number of studies to be displayed increases due
can be performed by a specific CL in the same manner as before. to cluster connection, you can perform a sorting/search/filtering
In addition, these processes can be performed by different CLs as operation from a study list to narrow down the range of study
well. information to be displayed.
Registered study information can be shared by cluster-connected
CLs. NOTE
Study information registration Study execution
If an error occurs, it is displayed and logged by a CL that has been
E
performing the affected process. Therefore, the error information
E F must be collected on an individual CL basis.
F
Example) Image reading error Displayed on a CL that has been
reading the affected image.
Printer output error Displayed on an output
processing CL.
Printer RU1 CL1 CL2 RU2 Shared study information display setup
Various study list setup windows are available for defining the items
Information
Patient information sharing to be displayed and the maximum number of studies to be displayed
database
in each study list.
1.
2.
Study list display Study list display
Share range setup
A
Study information
A Study information With Service Utility, you can define a share range to determine what
database database
B B CLs can share study information.
C A C C
B After a share range is defined in this manner from Service Utility, it
D D D
E E E can be narrowed down from a study list.
F F F
Shared patient information
Image display Image files Image display Image files
C E
When Service Utility is used to designate a certain CL as a patient
E A A D F information database server, the patient information entered in a
B
centralized manner from a specific CL can be shared by the other
CLs.
MD000091.EPS
When images are read for executing a study, they are stored in a CL
that has executed the study.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Studies enabled by cluster connection Restrictions on cluster connection

When a cluster connection is established, the following studies can be Configuration restrictions
conducted. Up to 12 units of the CL can be cluster-connected (for shared
study information).
Intensive QA (improved QA efficiency)
When establishing a cluster connection, it is necessary to initialize
After study reception, X-ray exposure, and primary verification the image databases of the CLs within a share range. The CLs
procedures are performed by a designated radiographer at various cannot be cluster-connected while they retain their previously
CLs, a senior radiographer can perform a secondary verification saved data.
procedure intensively at a separate CL.
When CLs are to be added to or removed from an institution in
Centralized study reservation (improved exposure efficiency) which a cluster connection is established, they are allowed to
retain their previously saved data. However, you must delete the
While a study reservation procedure is performed intensively at a image files that are saved in the CLs to be removed.
specific CL, the other CLs can be used exclusively for X-ray
exposure operations. A study can be reserved or started by entering When an MWM connection is used, each CL receives study
nothing other than patient information from the study reception information from the RIS. Therefore, the MWM tab in a study list is
window (without having to enter an exposure menu). not to be shared.
Setting restrictions
Integrated output processing (reduced output load)
A specific CL can be designated as an output processing unit so as The host name of a cluster-connected CL cannot exceed 10
characters in length. (When the 5000 is connected, the maximum
to carry out output processing in a centralized manner. In this
host name length is 10 characters due to the limitations on the
instance, the print option is required for the output processing CL
FINP character string length.)
only.
Ensure that the cluster-connected CLs use the same CL software
Moving a study from one X-ray exposure room to another version.
A currently executed study can be suspended and then resumed at There are some User Utility/Service Utility configuration settings
another CL. If, for instance, a built-in type X-ray exposure is needed that need to be the same for all CLs.
for a study that was originally registered for a cassette exposure, the For details on User Utility configuration settings, see
study can be moved to another X-ray exposure room. 2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table Settings in
OE15: Cluster Connection.
For details on Service Utility configuration settings, see
3. Various Configuration Settings Setup Configuration Item
in MU: Maintenance Utility.
Each CL can designate only one output processing CL.

All the output CLs entitled to issue an output request must be
registered with the output processing CL.
If the number of studies to be displayed is set to limitless, a
considerable amount of time may be required for operation.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Operational restrictions
A study currently used by a certain CL for exposure or QA
purposes cannot be selected from the other CLs (the All list
indicates that an exposure/QA process is in progress).
While a CL is running User Utility or Service Utility, the other CLs
can share the study information. However, image database
initialization, study-related information editing, and other similar
operations must be performed while all CLs are stopped.
Studies cannot be moved from one X-ray exposure room to
another if they are being used for exposure/QA at another CL,
registered without completing an image input, or in an output
process.
If the output processing CL receives a request for large-volume
output, the processing speed may decrease. To keep a high
output processing speed, perform setup in the same manner as
before so that each CL performs output operation.
When initializing the image database of a specific CL, ensure that
all the CLs within the predefined share range are turned ON (with
the CL application terminated). If the CLs containing any image
files are turned OFF, such image files will remain undeleted.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MT-I
Control Sheet

12/10/2000 00 Revision (FM2950) Pages I, II, 1, 6, 8, 10, 13, 15, 16
04/10/2001 01 Previous Chapter C Error Information/Service Parts All pages
divided and modified (FM2951)
05/30/2001 02 Revision for software version A02 and GX150 I, II, 5, 6, 12, 17, 21
(FM3027)
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, 4, Appx MT A-1, A-34, A-50,
A-75, A-98, A-99, A-111, A-112
03/20/2002 04 Changes in pagination (FM3297) Appx MT A-3549, A-5174,
A-7697, A-100110
07/20/2002 05 Revision for software version A08 (FM3428) I, II, 4, 11, 19, 23-36,
A-43, A-46, A-51, A-52, A-58, A-66,
A-94, A-95, A-104, A-105, A-111
07/20/2002 05 Changes in pagination (FM3428) Appx MT A-3538, A-41, A-44,
Appx MT A-34, A-39, A-40, A-42,
A-45, A-4750, A-5357, A-5965,
A-6793, A-96103, A-106110,
A-112116
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) I-IV, Appx MT A-1, 18, 3133, 36,
4345 ,48, 49, 53, 78 , 105, 109
11/30/2002 06 Changes in pagination (FM3499) Appx MTA-1930, 34, 35, 3742,
46, 47, 5052, 5477, 79104,
106108, 110116
03/01/2003 07 Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) I, II, 5, 6, 23, 24, Appx MT A-1, 36,
103, 104
03/01/2003 07 Changes in pagination (FM3634) Appx MT A-3749, 105, 106
08/20/2003 08 Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) I, II, 17, Appx MT A-1, 38, 45, 50,
5254, 60, 78, 79, 90, 101, 105,
107114, 118120
08/20/2003 08 Changes in pagination (FM4009) Appx MT A-3944, 4649, 51,
5559, 6177, 8089, 91100,
102104, 106, 115117
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) I, II, 15, 16, Appx MT A-13, 57,
20, 38, 48, 6870, 81, 86, 88,
9098, 124
12/10/2003 09 Changes in pagination (FM4158) Appx MT A-4, 819, 2137, 3947,
4967, 7180, 8285, 87, 89,
99123, 125, 126
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MT-II
Control Sheet
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) I, III, 1, 4, 5, 11, 13, 18, 19, 23, 28,
3034, 40, Appx MT-1, 2, 4, 5, 40,
41, 49, 5159, 65, 88, 89, 105,
121124, 131, 132, 140
07/30/2004 11 Changes in pagination (FM4254) 2022, 3539, Appx MT-3, 639,
4248, 50, 6064, 6687, 90104,
106120, 125130, 133139
11/12/2004 12 Revision for software V1.0(C), support I, III, 4, 23, 24, 4054
provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450)
07/30/2005 14 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, III, 4, 11, 20, 23, 40, 48,
Appx MT-1, 51, 58, 89, 90, 103,
104, 106, 107, 125128, 132134,
137139, 141154
07/30/2005 14 Changes in pagination (FM4543) Appx MT-5257, 5988, 91102,
105, 108124, 129131, 135, 136,
140
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 96
11/30/2005 15 Changes in pagination (FM4760) Appx MT-97153
07/30/2006 16 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, III, 4, 43, 55, 56, Appx MT-1,
4042, 91, 98, 145
146156
Appx MT-1, 22, 42, 11129,
139141, 146
142145, 147160
05/09/2008 18 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 4, 54, 55, 61,
66, 93, 100, 112114, 137, 148,
153, 163, 164
6792, 9499, 101111, 115136,
138147, 149152, 154162
10/31/2008 19 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 43, 44, 65, 95,
103, 109, 168
104108, 110167
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MT-III
Control Sheet
11/30/2009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, IV, 1, 4, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14, 24, 25,
2934, 3739, 4145, 49, 50,
Appx1 MT All pages,
Appx2 MT All pages
11/30/2009 20 Changes in pagination (FM5622) 810, 1523, 2628, 32, 35, 36, 40,
4648, 5164
03/31/2010 21 Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) I, IV, 4, 9, 19, 26, Appx1 MT-1, 62,
63, 104, 113, 120, 164, 166,
Appx2 MT-112, Appx3 MT-14,
Appx4 MT-14
03/31/2010 21 Changes in pagination (FM5670) Appx1 MT-64103, 105112,
114119, 121163, 165, 167, 168
12/10/2010 22 Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817) I, IV, 36, 37, 39, 40,
Appx1 MT All pages
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) 1, 4, 5, 7, 11, 14, 24, 29, 32, 34, 35,
39, 40, 44, Appx1 MT All pages
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MT-IV
1.1 Referring to Error Messages
1. Error Code Table Meaning of the event (error code)

A five-digit code displayed in the Event column implies the following.
For errors occurring while the CL-AP is being used, take appropriate A B C C C
countermeasures following the error codes (and error messages) listed
herein. A: Error-detected process
See 2. Using the Event Viewer. 1: Module used in common in the system
2: Main process
NOTE 3: Input process
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those 4: QA unit
displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7. 5: Output process
6: FINP process
7: UTILITY process
1.1 Referring to Error Messages B: Error level (See the Table Error Levels.)
Event (error code) and event source name CCC: For error level 0 or 1, this section of the error
When an error occurs, use the event and event source name code is provided so that it is unique in the process.
information to separate the assumed causes. For error level 2, 3 or 9, this section is unique in
the control. 00000071.EPS
The event and event source name are displayed in the Source and
Event columns of the Event Viewer main window shown below.
Source column Event column
00000072.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MT-1
Table Error Levels Message

Error Level Description The message is for describing errors and is displayed in the Description
(D) column of the Event Viewers Properties window shown below.
0: Fatal Error A serious, fatal problem that absolutely disables the
An error that fully systems stable operation. Description (D) column
disables system DB acc ess error
operation.
System file access file error
1: Warning Inevitably involves user notification and the system
An error that operation can be continued by the user intervention.
enables the Causes of this error type can be assumed as follows.
systems operation Data file access error
to be continued
after user Disk full
intervention. Faulty LP board
No response from the target destination for connection
2: Warning A slight error that does not require user notification.
An error that The system operation can be continued with no user
enables the intervention. The following causes can be assumed.
systems Unspecified data entered from networks. (An error
continuous implying that the system can be continued being
operation. substituted by the default).
00000073.EPS
3: Information Information that the system development section wishes to
Simple information keep.
9: Logical Error An error presumably caused by defective program.
Defective program Basically, this error does not occur at users site. This error
type has been aborted by the RU previously. The following
causes can be assumed.
Unspecified value returned from the method
Failure in securing memory
Failure in acquiring Windows resources
Error returned from the Windows API
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Identifying the problem cause when two or more errors encountered To identify the error cause, perform the following procedure:
have the same error code
The same error code may appear on the display even when the error 1. Start the Event Viewer.
cause varies. If you encounter such a situation, note both the error
code and error message to identify the error cause. 2. Open the Event Properties window.
For details the procedure for opening the above window, see
Event 2.4 Details of Events.
Event Description Causes
Source
FFCustom MessageBox A message box could not be
MsgBox Dialog Show displayed. The problem is 3. See both the error code and error message, and then locate
13005 Error. attributable to resource the associated error description in Appendix CL Error
inadequacy or system instability Message Table.
FFIdCon Recv The connection to the RU was
13005 nection error(%1).%n[%2] closed or an error occurred in
Watch the connection.
FFIdFilm It failed that [%1] The FfilmMarkDB key was not Error code
Mark gets the found in Directory.ini.
13005 connection string
of FilmMarkDB
FFId [%1] failed in the The connection to the
Menu liberating displaygroup table was not
13005 Change processing of the successfully closed.
display group
data acquisition
FFIdPat It failed that [%1] The LangStrDB key was not Error message
* InfoInput gets the SexMale found in Directory.ini or the ID
13005 caption 30705 was not registered in the
character string data base.
FFId Recv error[%1] The connection to the RU was
13005 RuMain closed or an error occurred in
Control the connection.
FFIdRu Magnetic card The employed magnetic card
13005 Main variation type was different than specified.
Control error[%1]
FFIipInput It failed that [%1] The connection character string
connects to was not properly registered for
13005 STRDB the LangStrDB key in Directory. 00000472.EPS
ini.
FFIpcInf [%1] It failed in_ Main thread creation was no
beginthread(%2). successful. The problem is
13005 attributable to resource
inadequacy or system instability.
* There are two or more occurrences of the same error code

(event).
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1.2 Precautions
1.2 Precautions 1.3 Error Message

An error such as incorrectly entered image processing parameters For error messages of software version A00 to A11, V.(B),
will not be handled as an error. see Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table (A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to
V.(B)).
An error code starting with 9 (e.g.: 9XXXX) is that generated by the
RU.
The correlation between the error level (the second digit of an error
code number) of CL-generated errors and that assumed by Windows
(Event Viewer) is as follows.
Error level Error level assumed by Windows

0 : Fatal Error EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE
1 : Warning EVENTLOG_WARNING_TYPE
2 : Warning EVENTLOG_WARNING_TYPE
3 : Information EVENTLOG_INFORMATION_TYPE
9 : Logical Error EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer
2. Using the Event Viewer 2.2 Starting the Event Viewer

1. Start up the Service Utility mode.
The Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 Event Viewer is used for checking details
of errors occurring with Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 or the CL-AP. For details of Service Utility mode startup, see
How to use the Event Viewer is described herein, together with the 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
startup procedures. Utility.
The IIP Service Utility window opens.
NOTE
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those
displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7.
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer

A variety of information items, such as resource information, system
operation status and application errors occurring with Windows 2000/
XP/Vista/7, are recorded (logged) to the Event Viewer.
Causes of errors that occur can be specified from the following logs.
Application Log
System Log
Security Log
The CL-AP error information is recorded to the Application Log.
To display the CL-AP error information, select the Application Log from
the tree menu of the Event Viewer main window shown below.
MT000008.EPS
00000371.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer
2. Click .
The Event Viewer main window opens.
REFERENCE
Use the following procedures if you cannot start up the Event
Viewer from the Service Utility mode.
1. From the Start menu at the lower left of the desktop window,
select Settings and then Control Panel to display the Control
Panel window.
2. Double-click Administrative Tool to display the Administrative
Tool window.
3. Double-click Event Viewer. The Event Viewer starts up.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer
2.3 Configuration and How to View For Windows Vista/7

the Event Viewer
Explained herein are the Event Viewers screen configuration (shown
below) and how to view it.
For Windows 2000/XP
A B C D E
00000375.ai
A Types:
Symbol Meaning Description
A B C D E F G H
00000375.EPS Displayed when a fatal error, such as failure in
Error device driver or service startup, or loss of data,
A Types: occurs while the system is running.
Symbol Meaning Description Displayed to indicate that the system has started
Displayed when a fatal error, such as failure in Information normally being successful in startup of services or
Error device driver or service startup, or loss of data, remote access.
occurs while the system is running. Displayed to indicate that the Warning can be
Displayed to indicate that the system has started Warning attributable to the cause of the error that has
Information normally being successful in startup of services or occurred.
remote access.
B Date and Time : The date and time when an event occurs.
Displayed to indicate that the Warning can be
Warning attributable to the cause of the error that has C Source : The source application that wrote an event.
occurred. D Event ID : Event ID
E Task Category : Event category
B Date :
The date when an event occurs.
C Time :
The time when an event occurs.
D Source :
The source application that wrote an event.
E Category :
Event category
F Event :
Event ID
G User :
The user who has been logged in when an event
occurs. N/A will be displayed if software that does not
specify the users name is used.
H Computer : Computer name used when an event occurs.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.4 Details of Events
2.4 Details of Events 2. Check detailed information of an event.
Described below are the procedures used for checking detailed event
information.
1. On the Event Viewer main window, double-click the log you

wish to display.
Description (D)
column
00000376.EPS
Data (T)
The Event Properties window opens. column
00000377.EPS
Description (D) : Displays detailed information of an event.

Data (T) : Displays the location where an event occurs,
using the information based on the number of
bytes or words.
3. Click .
The system return to the Event Viewer window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.5 Saving the Event Log
2.5 Saving the Event Log 3. Select or enter the following.

I
How to save event logs is explained below.
NOTE
Be sure to have media, such as an FD, USB memory stick or the like,
ready to use for saving event logs.
1. Insert media into the PC.
2. From the Action menu of the Event Viewer main window,

select Save Log File As....
II
00000379.EPS
I. Select a media drive.

II. Enter the filename (e.g.: log).
00000378.EPS
The Save Application Log (2) As window opens.

REFERENCE
If Text (Tab Separation) is selected for Save as Type, event logs
can be saved as text files.
4. Click .
The system returns to the Event Viewer/Application Log window.
5. Remove the media from the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.6 Deleting the Event Log
2.6 Deleting the Event Log 2.7 Quitting the Event Viewer
How to delete event logs are explained below. How to quit the Event Viewer is explained below.
1. From the Action menu of the Event Viewer window, select 1. Click of the Event Viewer main window.
Clear all Events.
The system return to the desktop window.
00000380.EPS
A window opens prompting you to confirm the data to be saved.
2. Click .
The system returns to the Event Viewer/Application Log window,
deleting thus all event logs.
00000381.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
3. Information Useful for Error 3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to

Recovery be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
This section explains about the procedure for recovering the connection
CL/RU connection recovery procedure to be performed upon RU to the CL when the memory is initialized by performing the memory
memory initialization initialization procedure (<Erasure process> switch activation + RU
This procedure is used to restore the RU IP address to its default power ON) at the RU.
setting to recover the connection to the CL. Use this procedure See 5. Relationship between RU and CL in MD: Machine
when, for instance, the RU is invisible to the network. Description.
Typical procedure for achieving recovery from an LP (local printer) This section explains about the recovery procedure to be performed in
printout generation failure situations where the CL and RU are in the following states:
This section describes the troubleshooting procedure to be (NETMASK 255.255.0.0)
performed in the event of an LP printing failure.
IP address IP address
Messages displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config update (RU-AP of RU 200.150.100.50 CL 200.150.100.10
version A06 or earlier)
When the RU-AP and RU-Config are written into the RUs FLASH
ROM, various messages appear on the CL monitor. Such messages SDRAM
RU IP address
are detailed in this section. 200.150.100.50
CL IP address
200.150.100.10 Backup
Precautions to be observed during the use of output options NETMASK memory
This section offers a troubleshooting guide that you should follow 255.255.0.0
when the error code 50001 (output option setup error) appears on
the display. FLASH ROM No data FTP server
RU IP ADDR RU IP ADDR
NOTE CL IP ADDR
NETMASK
CL IP ADDR
NETMASK
displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7. Same contents
RU-Config RU IP address RU-Config

200.150.100.50
CL IP address
200.150.100.10
NETMASK
255.255.0.0
00000089.EPS
REFERENCE
The SDRAM IP address is used as the IP address for the RU.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Recovery sequence overview Details of u Procedure 1

Procedure 2 1. Hold down the RUs <Erasure process> switch, turn ON the
Restore the CL-PC power switch.
main unit IP address
to the default*. You have to still hold down the <Erasure process> switch at
TCP/IP (NETMASK 255.255.0.0)
this stage.
IP address IP address
200.150.100.50 200.150.100.10 The RU is rebooted.
RU CL
172.16.1.10 172.16.1.20 2. Verify that the primary erasure LED on the RU panel comes
Results of procedure
1 execution Procedure 1 on (in about 7 seconds).
Copy the data When the memory
SDRAM to the SDRAM initialization procedure NOTE
RU IP address (after the is performed, the
172.16.1.10 FLASH ROM). If the primary erasure LED does not come on, the initialization
CL IP address
contents of the backup
memory revert to the process is not completed. In such an instance, perform steps 1.
172.16.1.20
NETMASK Backup default settings* and and beyond again.
255.255.0.0 memory the RU reboots.
Results of RU IP address
procedure 172.16.1.10
1 execution
FLASH ROM CL IP address
FTP Server
3. Release the <Erasure process> switch.
172.16.1.20
Copy the
NETMASK
data to the RU IP ADDR
CL IP ADDR 255.255.0.0
RU IP ADDR
CL IP ADDR
SDRAM when NETMASK NETMASK
rebooting
the RU.
* Default settings
RU IP address : 172.16.1.10 When you start the CL-AP, Restore the RU-
CL IPaddress : 172.16.1.20 the system transfers the Config internal
NETMASK : 255.255.0.0 RU-Config and at settings to the
the same time clears the default values*.
backup memory.
Procedure 3
Procedure 4 00000090.EPS
NOTES
The communication between the CL and RU can be restored to normal
by performing Procedures 1 and 2.
The RU-Config in the FLASH ROM can be restored to the default
settings by performing Procedures 3 and 4.
If the contents of the backup memory are cleared, the SDRAM will not
be overwritten on a reboot.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Details of u Procedure 2 5. Choose and then click

For Windows 2000/XP .
1. Perform settings as follows. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.
For Windows 2000
6. Choose .
Double-click on the desktop.
7. Perform the following setup steps:
The My Computer window opens. I
Double-click .
The Control Panel window opens.

II 00000430.EPS
For Windows XP
I. Change this entry to the default CL IP address (176.16.1.20).
Select from the menu. II. Change this entry to the default subnet mask (255.255.0.0).
The My Computer window opens. 8. Click .

You are returned to the Local Area Connection Properties
window.
2. Double-click .
9. Click .
The Network and Dial-up Connections window opens.
You are returned to the desktop.
REFERENCE
3. Double-click .
When a dialog box opens to prompt for a restart, click [Yes].
This causes the OS to restart and automatically starts up the CL-AP.
The Local Area Connection window opens.
4. Click .
The Local Area Connection Properties window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For Windows Vista/7 6. Choose .
1. Select Control Panel from the menu. 7. Perform the following setup steps:
The Control Panel (All Control Panel Items for Windows 7) I
window opens.
2. Double-click (click for Windows 7) .

II 00000430.EPS
The Network and Sharing Center window opens. I. Change this entry to the default CL IP address (176.16.1.20).
II. Change this entry to the default subnet mask (255.255.0.0).
3. Click View status (Local Area Connection for Windows 7).
8. Click .
window.
9. Click .
The system returns to the Local Area Connection Status window.
10. Click [Close].

The system returns to the Network and Sharing Center window.
AWS80302.ai
11. Close the Network and Sharing Center window.
The Local Area Connection Status window opens. You are returned to the desktop.
4. Click . REFERENCE
The Local Area Connection Properties window opens. When a dialog box opens to prompt for a restart, click [Yes].
This causes the OS to restart and automatically starts up the CL-AP.
5. Choose and then click
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Details of u Procedure 3 2. In the LIST OF EXITING RU field, click the host name of
the RU whose configuration file is going to be edited.
1. Start the RU M-Utility as directed below:
NOTE
Make sure that the CL-AP, Service Utility, or other AP or Explorer is
not running. If any such application is running, quit it.
RU host name 00000446.EPS
III. Specify the file.

The EDIT CONFIGURATION button text color changes from gray
to black.
3. Use PING to verify the connection to the RU.

I
II
IV. Click here. III
00000512.EPS
I. Enter the RU host name (ru0).

II. Enter the RU IP address (172.16.1.10).
III. Click .
II. Click here. IV. Verify that the network connection is normal.
I. Click here. 00000219.EPS 4. Click .

The RU M-Utility main menu opens.
The READER UNIT SETTING window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
5. Perform the following setup steps: Details of u Procedure 4

I
1. Click . Choose Programs, Fuji Film, FCR.
II The CL-AP starts up in about two minutes.

Version A software
III
00000513.EPS
I. Verify that the RUs default IP address is entered (172.16.1.10).

II. Switch to the CLs default IP address (172.16.1.20).
III. Switch to the default net mask (255.255.0.0).
6. Click .
The system saves your setting entries and returns to the main
menu.
7. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the window.

The system returns to the desktop screen.
00000195.EPS
Version B software
MT000049.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CAUTION
3. Click (or ).
While the RU panel LEDs are illuminated, never turn OFF the RU
power because the RUs CPU board may become damaged.
A menu opens.
After a while, all the LEDs on the RU panel come on.

A message appears on the CL monitor to indicate that the RU- 4. Hold down the <SHIFT> key and click .
Config is being updated. (While the update is in progress, the
system repeats a single-beep and two-successive-beep cycle.) The CL-AP exits.
l RU
All the LEDs on the RU panel glow. 00000196.EPS
l CL
A message appears to indicate that

the RU-Config is being updated.
0000517.EPS
The RU-Config update process ends.
2. Click on the CL monitor.
The RU restarts so that the updated RU-Config takes effect.

In several seconds, the Console Warning window appears on the
CL.
NOTE
Do not touch any operating controls for a while.
The Console Warning window automatically disappears.
The RU initialization message appears. In about one minute, the

RU becomes operative.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Editing NETWORK CONFIG 7. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
Change the RUs IP address that is entered from the CLs Service A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
Utility. If you do not change the RU IP address, an error (error code: saved.
31382) occurs when an image is read.
8. Click .
1. Start the CLs Service Utility.
The system saves the setup data.
2. Click [Setup Configuration Item].
9. From the Config (F) menu, choose Close.
The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window.
10. Click [Exit Service Utility].

MT000006.EPS
The Setup Configuration Item window opens.
3. Click the sign within .
4. Click the sign within and then

choose .
The HostName window opens in the right-hand area of the
currently displayed window.
5. Note the IP address indicated in the
field and change it to the RUs
IP address (172.16.1.10).
6. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Checking the PEI01A board device driver
Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) 1. Perform settings as follows.
Printout Generation Failure For Windows 2000
This section explains about the procedures to be performed when the
Status field of the user window Wait for Output indicates the Right-click on the desktop to select
occurrence of the error No Output Option (see the window shown
below).
Properties.
The System Properties window opens.
For Windows XP
Right-click from the menu to

No Output Option 00000447.EPS
select Properties.
Preliminary checkout
First, conduct the following checks to verify the LP settings:
2. Click the tab.
Check whether the LP option key is installed.
Check whether the PEI01A board is properly set and mounted.
3. Click in the Device Manager area.
Check for an improper cable connection between the PEI01A board
and printer. The Device Manager window opens.
Cause
If the No Output Option error is indicated when the above procedures
are properly completed, it is conceivable that the PEI01A board driver
may be improperly installed.
The PEI01A board driver is stored on the CL-APs CD. Installing the
CL-AP and starting the AP automatically installs the driver.
However, if a different incompatible driver is already installed, starting
the CL-AP does not automatically install the correct driver.
First of all, you should check whether the correct driver is installed as
directed below.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure
4. Note the hardware information about the PCI port. Deleting an invalid PCI device driver (marked ?)
1. In the Device Manager window, click the [+] mark to the
left of Other devices
PCI Device appears under Other devices.
2. Click and then choose Delete on the Action

menu.
No Good : Driver installation is Good : Driver installation is

not normally normally completed.
completed.
00000448.EPS
NOTE
If the OS is installed with the PEI01A board mounted in the PC, the
driver installation will not be successful causing a status where
other improper drivers have been installed.
00000449.EPS
The invalid driver named PCI Device is then deleted.
3. Exit the Device Manager and then restart the PC.

The CL-AP starts up in about one minute. When it starts up, the
PEI01A board driver (FUJIFILM Pei Device) is automatically
installed.
NOTE
For Windows XP, the installation wizard window opens after the PC
has been restarted. Install the PEI board driver following on-screen
instructions.
4. Verify that the driver is properly installed.

See Checking the PEI01A board device driver.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/

RU-Config Update
(RU-AP of version A06 or earlier) RU-Config
No
installation
This section describes the sequence that is followed after RU-AP completed?
installation or RU-Config editing and explains about the messages that Yes
appear on the display.
A message appears (code: 11025).
For details on the data exchanged between the CL and RU, see The RU-Config in the FLASH ROM
5. Relationship between RU and CL in MD: Machine
Description.
is updated.
The above message reports such an
update to the CL.
Install the RU-AP or edit the RU-Config.
Start the CL-AP. Click [Restart] that appears on the

CL monitor.
No An error dialog box opens

RU-AP changed?
(code: 31116, 31117, 31118, or
other RU connection error code).
Yes
Clicking [Restart] reboots the RU.
A message appears (code: 11024). The network connection temporarily
The RU-AP in the FLASH ROM is updated. closes on a reboot.*
The above message reports such an update The above error dialog box notifies
to the CL. the CL of such a disconnection.
Click [Restart] that appears on the CL monitor.
An error dialog box opens The RU becomes operative in about

(code: 31116, 31117, 31118, or other RU one minute.
connection error code).
* The error code to be displayed varies
Clicking [Restart] reboots the RU. with the disconnection timing.
The network connection temporarily closes on 00000515.EPS
a reboot.*
The above error dialog box notifies the CL of
such a disconnection.
* The error code to be displayed varies

with the disconnection timing. 00000514.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)
Message window (code: 11024)
00000603.EPS
Message window (code: 11025)
00000602.EPS
Error dialog box (code: 31116, 31117, or 31118)
00000604.EPS
00000606.EPS
00000605.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During

the Use of Output Options
IIf an error message of the error code 50001 appears at CL-AP startup,
check the settings for the following output options:
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE
IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED (processed image transmission)
IR346 DICOM PRINT
IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT
IR346 LOCAL PRINT
The checks to be performed are detailed below:
Option key Check
Verify that the option key is installed, and then
check whether SCU setup is properly completed
for this equipment. The procedure is described
below:
1. With the Service Utility, open the Setup
IR346 DICOM Configuration Item window.
CR STORAGE 2. Open NETWORK CONFIGURATION and then
THIS HOST (IIP).
IR346 DICOM 3. Check that an AE whose Role is SCU is
IM PROCESSED registered. If it is not registered, register it now.
IR346 DICOM PRINT For detailed registration procedure
descriptions, see OE: Connecting the CL
to Other Equipment.
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE OE3.
IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED OE4.
IR346 DICOM PRINT OE6.
IR346 DMS
Verify that the option key is installed.
NETWORK IN-OUT
Verify that the option key is installed, and then
check whether the PEI01A board is installed in the
PC. Also, check that DIP switch setup is properly
completed.
IR346 LOCAL PRINT For DIP switch settings and other
checkout procedures, see CL + Local
Printer (E-i/f Connection) in
OE: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC) NOTE

The table below summarizes various troubles that may arise with the
CL. In accordance with the encountered trouble, perform a procedure
indicated in the Check Method/Remedies column.
Symptom Probable Causes Check Method/Remedies
The PC (Windows) does not It is conceivable that the PCs memory may be Check the PCs memory. If it is defective, replace it.
start up. defective.
For the memory check procedure, see 4.1 Checking the Memory.
The CL-AP (application) It is conceivable that the data stored on the hard disk Check the hard disk. If any error is revealed by the check, perform a
does not start up. may be partly damaged. procedure for achieving error recovery or replace the hard disk.
For the hard disk check procedure, see 4.2 Checking the Hard Disk.
Output system options are not installed or not properly Install or properly set up output system options.
set up.
[Displayed error code: 50001 20110] For details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of
Output Options.
The dummy node is not set up. Choose the Service Utilitys Setup Configuration Item, NETWORK
[Displayed error code: 30151 20110] CONFIG, HIS HOST (IIP) to check for node setup. If no node is set up, set
DICOM Print SCU as a dummy node.
The DICOM Print option key need not be installed.
For the setup procedure, see 2.1.4 Setup of Information on this
Equipment for the DICOM Print Function in
OE5: CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print).
The connection to the network is not established. Connect the CL to the network.
[Displayed error code: 30151 20110]
The image database is not initialized. With the Service Utility, initialize the image database.
[Displayed error code: 50001 20001 30107
30151 20110] For the initialization procedure, see 12. Initializing the Image
Database in RI: Reinstalling the Software.
The MAC address is not acquired. Reinstall the network driver and then update it.
[Displayed error code: 20111 20110
(Error 20111 is recorded only in the applications event For the reinstallation procedure, see 4.7 Reinstalling the Network
log.)] Driver.
For the software version update procedure, see 4.8 Installing the
3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10).
If the error recurs after the network driver is updated, replace the PCs
motherboard. Before motherboard replacement, acquire the MAC address
manually and start up the CL-AP.
For the MAC address acquisition procedure, see 3.14 MAC
(Continued to the next page) Address Manual Input in MU: Maintenance Utility.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)

The CL-AP (application) The selector resetup procedure is not completed. After the host name for the built-in type equipment is changed, use the
does not start up. [Displayed error code: 31099] selector setup of the Service Utility to set the built-in type equipment host
name again.
For the setup procedure, see 12. Setting the Selectors Selector
Setting in MU: Maintenance Utility.
The LCD flickers. The refresh frequency setting is improper. Correct the refresh frequency setting.
For the refresh frequency setup procedure, see 4.4 Resetting the
Refresh Frequency.
The LCD touch panel does The screen contact position correction procedure was With the utility tool for the touch panel, perform the touch panel sound setup
not sound. performed twice in succession. procedure again.
For the setup procedure, see 4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel
Sound.
The barcode reader (BCR)/ The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows Device Manager, switch to the proper driver software.
magnetic card reader Reinstalling the OS with the BCR or MCR connected to
(MCR) does not operate. a USB port results in installation of improper driver For the driver software change procedure, see 4.6 Changing the
software. Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software.
The BCR/MCR does not The BCR/MCR is connected to an improper USB port. Connect the BCR/MCR to a recommended USB port.
normally operate.
For the reconnection procedure, see 4.3 USB Ports Recommended
for Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150
Only).
The local printer does not The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows Device Manager, switch to the proper driver software.
generate a film output. Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI
slot results in installation of improper driver software. For details, see 3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery
from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure.
Patient data cannot be The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows Device Manager, switch to the proper driver software.
exchanged in the ID online Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI
state. slot results in installation of improper driver software. For the driver software change procedure, see under the preceding
symptom, which is entitled The local printer does not generate a
film output.
The communication with the It is conceivable that the network driver may be Update the network driver software version.
RU or other equipment defective. Before proceeding to perform an update, have on hand the FD labeled 3Com
cannot be established [System event log: type, error; source, EL90Xbc; event 3C905C Network Driver Ver. A10 Disc 1/1, which is distributed to the service
(ping does not work). ID, 5001] personnel.
For the update procedure, see 4.8 Installing the 3Com Network
Driver (Ver. A10).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.1 Checking the Memory
4.1 Checking the Memory 7. Verify that 1. Start computer to run Dell Diagnostics is
selected, and then press the <Enter> key.
For checking the memory, use the Dell Optiplex ResourceCD, which is
supplied with the PC. The Dell Optiplex ResourceCD is Dells CD-
ROM that stores various drivers. The CD name slightly varies with the
Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu
PC model.
1. Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches. 1. Start computer to run Dell Diagnostics.
2. Start computer with CD-ROM support and go to a command pronpt.
The PC starts up.
Enter a choice: 1 Time remaining: 09
2. When the upper right corner of the screen reads

F2 SETUP, press the <F2> key.
NOTE
If you do not press the <F2> key in time, the setup screen does not
open. In such an instance, restart the PC and then perform step 2.
F5=Safe made Shift+F5=Command pronpt Shift+F8=Step-by-step confirmation[N]
The setup screen opens.

MT000020.EPS
The Dell Diagnostics Menu screen opens.

3. Choose Boot Sequence and then press the <Enter> key.
The boot drive selection dialog box opens. 8. Press the <2> key.
4. Uncheck Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk Drive C: (by

removing their check marks ()).
Dell Diagnostics Menu
1. Diskette Drive [1] Dell 32-bit Diagnostics for Resource CD

[2] Dell diagnostics
2. Hard-Disk Drive C: [3] EXIT
3. IDE CD-ROM Device

Please Enter Selection...
SPACE to enable/disable +,- to move down/up
Uncheck Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk Drive C:.

Leave IDE CD-ROM Device checked.
MT000009.EPS
5. Insert the Dell Optiplex ResourceCD into the PC.
6. Save the settings and then restart the PC. MT000021.EPS
Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu opens. The reading process for the modules starts (and it takes about two
minutes).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
9. Choose Test One Device with the <> key, and then press 11. Press the <Enter> key again.
the <Enter> key. The test type selection screen opens.
Dell (www.dell.com)
Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X
12. Verify that Extended Tests is selected, and then press the
Diagnostics Menu <Enter> key.
Dell (www.dell.com)
Test All Devices
System Memory Device Test for Highlighted Device
Test One Device
Advancded Testing System Memory Memory Address Line Test
Information and Results Memory Data Line Test
Program Options Memory Bit Coupling Test
Device Configuration
Exit to MS-DOS
Extended Tests
Quick Tests
MT000022.EPS
The list of tests appears.

Press Enter to select the highlighted item.
10. Choose System Memory with the <> key, and then press Press F1 for Help. Press ESC for previous menu.
MT000024.EPS
the <Enter> key.
The testing process starts (and it takes about 15 minutes when the
Dell (www.dell.com)
memory size is 512MB).
Device Groups Device for Highlighted Group

System Borad Devides System Memory
Processor Cache
System Memory
System Management BIOS
VESA /VGA Interface
Universal Serial Bus Interface
PC-AT Compatible Keyboards
Pointing Devices
Serial Ports
Parallel Ports
Network Interfaces
Diskette
IDE Devices
Audio Controller
Cable Detection Summary
Press Enter to select the highlighted item.
Press F1 for Help. Press ESC for previous menu.

MT000023.EPS
The right-hand area of the screen shows details of the System

Memory test.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
13. When the testing process ends, check for errors. 14. Press the <ESC> key a number of times until you are
If any error occurs, its description appears on the screen. Perform an brought back to the Dell Diagnostics Menu.
appropriate error recovery procedure in accordance with the on- Dell (www.dell.com)
screen error description. Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X
Dell (www.dell.com) Diagnostics Menu

Maximum loops: 0001 Maximum errors: 0001 Pause flag: YES

Loop count: 0001 Error count: 0000 Logging: NONE
Start time: 04/11/2002 15:05:29 Elapsed time: 000:14:57 Test All Devices
Test status: NONE Test One Device
Advancded Testing
Device: System_Memory Test:Memory_Address_line_Test Information and Results
Release: 1068 Mod Program Options
Your hardware performed optimally.
_ Device Configuration
System Memory Mem Press and key to continue. : Pass Exit to MS-DOS
Status: Pass Sta
Device: System_Me
Release: 1068 Model
_
System Memory Memory Bit Coupling Test : Pass
Status: Pass Status Code: DOS DDG-D MEMORY 040 000
Device: System_Memory Test: Memory_Bit_Coupling_Test
Release: 1068 Model(s): Memory
MT000026.EPS
End testing: 04/11/2002 15:20:26 - 0 errors
MT000025.EPS 15. Choose Exit to MS-DOS with the <> key, and then press
the <Enter> key.
The Diagnostics Menu screen closes.
16. Remove the CD-ROM.

17. Use BIOS to restore the previous setup status (steps 2. to 4.)
before startup with the CD-ROM.
1. Diskette Drive
2. Hard-Disk Drive C:
Check these items. MT000048.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk 4. Verify that the check boxes in the Check disk options area
are unchecked, and then click .
1. Start up Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 and open Windows
Explorer.
2. Right-click drive C (Local Disk C:) and then choose

Properties.
MT000012.EPS
The hard disk check starts (and it takes about 5 minutes when the
disk size is 40GB).
When the hard disk is normal, Phases up to 3 will be completed and a

dialog box will open to indicate the completion of the hard disk check.
If the hard disk is not normal, Phases up to 3 will not be completed and
a dialog box will open to indicate that the hard disk check is not
completed.
MT000010.EPS
3. Choose the Tools tab. In the Error-checking area, click

.
MT000011.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only)
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode

Reader/Magnetic Card Reader
Mounting (for GX150 Only)
If the barcode reader and magnetic card reader erratically operate from
time to time, reconnect their connectors as indicated below.
Connecting to the PC back panel
Magnetic card reader
Barcode reader
MT000013.EPS
Connecting to the PC front panel

(as viewed with the front panel removed)
Barcode reader Magnetic card reader

MT000045.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency For Windows Vista

Choose Personalization from the right-click menu on
If the screen flickers, it can be restored to normal by changing the the desktop.
refresh frequency setting.
The Personalization window opens.
The refresh frequency change procedure is described below.
Click Display Settings.
1. Perform the following settings.
For Windows 2000/XP
Choose Properties from the right-click menu on the
desktop.
The Display Properties window opens.
MT000014.EPS
MT000015.ai
Click the Settings tab.

Click .
Click .
MT000015.ai
MT000015.EPS
The monitor properties window opens.
The Plug and Play Monitor on NVidia Riva TNT2 window
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows 7 NOTE
Choose Screen resolution from the right-click menu on If the screen becomes disordered when a setting of 75 Hertz is
the desktop. chosen, change the setting to 70 Hertz.
If the screen becomes disordered even when set to 70 Hertz,
The Screen resolution window opens. change it to 60 Hertz.
Click Advanced settings.
MT000016.EPS
NDT02040001.ai

4. Click .
2. Click the Monitor tab. The confirmation window opens.
3. From the Refresh Frequency pull-down menu, choose 5. Click .

75 Hertz. The screen area changes and the Monitor Setup window opens.
(When the OS used is Windows Vista, the Display Settings
window opens.)
6. Click .
NOTE
If you do not click within 15 seconds, the system reverts the
previous setting. Therefore, click it without delay.
7. Click to close the Display Properties window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound For Windows XP
If you perform the screen contact position correction procedure two or 1. Double-click on the desktop.
more times in succession, the touch panel may fail to sound when you
touch it. The TouchWare Properties window opens.
To recover the touch panel sound generation function, perform the
following procedure.
For Windows 2000 IN000309.EPS
1. From of Windows 2000, point to Settings and

2. Select the Touch Settings tab.
then click Control Panel.
The Control Panel opens.
2. Choose Elo Touchscreen. IN000310.EPS
The Elo Touchscreen Properties window opens.

3. Perform following settings.
3. Click the Sound tab and then click . The touch
panel should sound normally.
I.
II.
IN000311.EPS
I. Touch to set Touch Mode to [Click on touch].
II. Touch to set Touch Sound to [System beep on

touchdown].
4. Touch to close the TouchWare Properties

window. The touch sound will then be restored.
MT000019.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound
For Windows Vista/7
1. Double-click on the desktop.
The MT 7 Software Control Panel window opens.
DCL70420.ai
3. Perform following settings.
I.
II.
DCL70421.ai
I. Touch to set Touch Mode to [Click on touch with

drag].
II. Touch to set Touch Sound to [Beep on touchdown].
4. Touch to close the MT7 Software Control Panel

window. The touch sound will then be restored.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/ 5. Note the hardware information about the USB ports.
Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software If USB drivers other than shown below are set up, perform the
following procedure to install proper USB drivers.
If any encountered problem is attributable to the recognition of wrong
driver software, use Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7s Device Manager to
check whether proper driver software is used. If improper driver
software is used, replace it with proper driver software.
The driver software check/change procedure is indicated below.
Normal installation of drivers
For Windows 2000 Upper: Barcode reader
Lower: Magnetic card reader
1. Open the Windows 2000 desktop screen.
2. From the menu, point to Settings and then click

Control Panel.
MT000046.EPS
3. Double-click . 6. In the Device Manager window, click the mark of the

hardware information that is not for the correct USB drivers
The System Properties window opens. installed as above.
4. Choose the Hardware tab and then click The name of the currently installed USB driver appears.
.
7. Select the item that appears at the click of the mark. From
the Action menu, choose Uninstall....
The currently set USB driver is then deleted.
8. If wrong driver software is set up for the other USB driver,

delete it as well.
9. Close Device Manager and then restart the PC.

In about one minute, the CL-AP starts up so that the proper USB
drivers are automatically installed.
10. Open Device Manager again to verify that the proper USB
drivers are installed.
MT000047.EPS
The Device Manager window opens.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows XP 5. In the Device Manager window, right-click Human

Interface Devices and then USB Human Interface Device
1. Open the Windows XP desktop screen. to select Update Drivers....
2. Select Control Panel from the menu.

3. Double-click .
4. Choose the Hardware tab and then click

.
MT0000053.EPS
The Hardware Update Wizard window opens.
6. Select and click

.
A window opens prompting you to select an installation option.
MT000047.EPS
7. Select and click
The Device Manager window opens. .

A window opens prompting you to select a driver.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Select a driver you wish to install and click . For the magnetic card reader
Select USB Card Reader.
For the barcode reader
m When a driver not supporting a BCR manufactured by

DataLogic was installed in CL V8.0 or before
Select USB Barcode Reader.
MT0000054.EPS
A window opens to indicate that installation processing has ended.
MT040022.ai
m In case of CL V8.1, or when a driver supporting

a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed
Select WinUSB BCR.
MT040021.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
9. Clck . 10. Verify that the proper USB drivers are installed.
NOTE
A window may open to request a restart when the driver software
for the barcode reader is changed in the software version 8.1 or
later. In that case, perform the following procedures.
I. Remove the barcode reader from the PC and click [OK].
The PC restarts.
After restarting, the CL-AP starts running.
II. Start up the Service Utility mode.
For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see 1.
Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
Example of state that
The main menu opens. the drivers installed normally
Upper: Barcode reader
III. Click [Exit Service Utility].
Lower: Magnetic card reader
The system returns to the desktop screen. MT040023.ai
IV. Connect the barcode reader to the PC and perform the

following procedures.
When the software was upgraded to V8.1 or later

Perform step 2 through 9.
Restart the PC and proceed to step 10.
When the software V8.1 or later was newly installed

Proceed to step 10.
You are then returned to the Device Manager window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows Vista/7 5. Select Browse my computer for driver software.
1. Open the Windows desktop screen.

The Control Panel (All Control Panel Items for Windows 7)
opens.
MT000057.ai

The Browse for diver software on your computer window opens.
4. In the Device Manager window, right-click Human
Interface Devices and then USB Human Interface Device 6. Select Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my
to select Update Driver Software.... computer.
MT000058.ai
The Select the device driver you want to install for this hardware
MT0000053.ai
window opens.
The Update Driver Software - USB Human Interface Device
window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Select a driver you wish to install and click . For the magnetic card reader
Select USB Card Reader.
For the barcode reader
m When a driver not supporting a BCR manufactured by

DataLogic was installed in CL V8.0 or before
Select USB Barcode Reader.
MT0000054.ai
The Windows Security window opens.
8. Select Install this driver software anyway.

MT0000055.ai
m In case of CL V8.1 or later, or when a driver supporting

a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed
Select WinUSB BCR.
MT000059.ai
A window opens to indicate that installation processing has ended.
MT040024.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
9. Click [Close]. 10. Verify that the proper USB drivers are installed.
NOTE
A window may open to request a restart when the driver software
for the barcode reader is changed in the software version 8.1 or
later. In that case, perform the following procedures.
I. Remove the barcode reader from the PC and click [OK].
The PC restarts.
After restarting, the CL-AP starts running.
II. Start up the Service Utility mode.
For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see 1.
Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
The main menu opens. Example of state that
III. Click [Exit Service Utility]. the drivers installed normally
Upper: Barcode reader
The system returns to the desktop screen. Lower: Magnetic card reader
MT040025.ai
IV. Connect the barcode reader to the PC and perform the

following procedures.
When the software was upgraded to V8.1 or later

Perform step 2 through 9.
Restart the PC and proceed to step 10.
When the software V8.1 or later was newly installed

Proceed to step 10.
The system returns to the Device Manager window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver 5. Click the mark for and then double-
click 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast....
For Windows 2000/XP
1. Open the Windows 2000/XP desktop screen.

Control Panel. (For Windows XP, select Control Panel
from the menu.)
3. Double-click .
MT000036.EPS
The System Properties window opens. The 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast... window opens.
4. Choose the Hardware tab and then click 6. Choose the Driver tab and then click .
.
MT000035.EPS

MT000037.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
The Confirm Device Removal window opens. 9. Click .

The following window opens.
MT000038.EPS
7. Click . MT000041.EPS
The network driver is then deleted. 10. Click .

After a while, a window like that shown below opens.
8. Return to the Hardware tab on the System Properties
window, which was opened in step 3, and then click
.
MT000042.EPS
MT000039.EPS 11. Just Click .

The Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard window A window opens to indicate that driver installation is completed.
opens.
MT000040.EPS
MT000043.EPS
12. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13. After completion of network driver installation, perform the For Windows Vista/7
following network driver setup steps from the driver
environment setup window. 1. Open the Windows desktop screen.
( ).
Uncheck
Uncheck ( ).
To open the driver environment setup window, double-click 3Com window opens.
3C920 Integrated Fast... as explained in step 5. and then choose the
Power Management tab.
4. In the Device Manager window that opens, click to the

left of and then double-click Intel(R)
82567LM-3 Gigabit Network Connection.
MT000044.EPS
14. Reinstalling the network driver deletes the IP address and

other relevant settings. Set the following network items
again.
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway (as needed)
MT040001.ai
The Intel(R) 82567LM-3 Gigabit Network Connection Properties

window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Select the Driver tab and click . 7. Insert the DRIVERS AND UTILITIES disk (Supplied with the
PC) into the PC and double-click autoRcd.exe in the CD.
The Dell ResourceCD utility software will go up and running and
System Model, Operating System and Topic selected
automatically.
MT040004.ai
8. Click Intel 825XX Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device

MT040002.ai
Rev:Axx.
The Confirm Device Uninstall window opens. A window like that shown below opens.
6. Checkmark and click

.
MT040005.ai
MT040003.ai
The network driver is then uninstalled.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
9. Scroll the display and click . 10. Click .

A window like that shown below opens.
MT040008.ai
11. Click .
MT040012.ai
MT040006.ai
12. Click .
MT040009.ai
MT040007.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13. Click . 16. Make sure that is
A window like that shown below opens. checkmarked and then click .
NOTE
If is not checkmarked, be
sure to checkmark it.

MT040013.ai
14. Click .
The License Agreement window opens.
MT040016.ai
17. Click .
A window like that show below opens.
MT040014.ai
15. Select and click

.
The Setup Options window opens.
MT040010.ai
18. Click .
A window like that show below opens.
MT040015.ai
MT040017.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
19. Click .
20. After completing installation of the network driver, perform

the following network driver settings on the driver
environment setup screen.
Checkmark Reduce link speed during standby. ( )
Unchekmark Wake on Directed Packet. ( )
Unchekmark Wake on Magic Packet. ( )
Unchekmark Wake on Magic Packet from power off state.
( )
Unchekmark Wake on Link. ( )
MT040011.ai
21. Reinstalling the network driver will cancel some setup

items, such as IP address and others. The following items
need to be set up anew.
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway (as necessary)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver 6. Click the mark for and then double-
(Ver. A10) click 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast....
1. Open the Windows 2000 desktop screen.
2. Insert the network driver FD (Ver. A10) into the FDD.

Control Panel.
4. Double-click .

MT000028.EPS
5. Choose the Hardware tab and then click The 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast... window opens.
.
MT000027.EPS

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Choose the Driver tab and then click . 9. Check ( ), and then click
MT000031.EPS
10. Check ( ), and then click
MT000029.EPS .
The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window opens.
MT000030.EPS
8. Click twice.
MT000032.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
11. Select the driver whose location field reads

a:\w9x90xbc.inf, and then click .
MT000033.EPS
The Digital Signature Not Found window opens.
12. Click .
A window opens to indicate that driver installation is completed.
13. Click .
REFERENCE
Installation is completed normally when the 3Com 3C920
Integrated Fast... window opened in step 7. displays the following
information.
Driver Provider: 3Com
Driver Version: 4.8.0.0
MT000034.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC) NOTE

Screens referred to herein are those of Windows XP. Note however that
contents displayed under Windows Vista are the same.
The table below summarizes various troubles that may arise with the
CL. In accordance with the encountered trouble, perform a procedure
indicated in the Check Method/Remedies column.
The PC (Windows) does not It is conceivable that the PCs memory may be Check the PCs memory. If it is defective, replace it.
start up. defective.
For the memory check procedure, see 5.1.2 Device Test
Procedures.
The CL-AP (application) It is conceivable that the data stored on the hard disk Check the hard disk. If any error is revealed by the check, perform a
does not start up. may be partly damaged. procedure for achieving error recovery or replace the hard disk.
For the hard disk check procedure, see 5.1.2 Device Test
Procedures.
Output system options are not installed or not properly Install or properly set up output system options.
set up.
[Displayed error code: 50001 20110] For details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of
Output Options.
The dummy node is not set up. Choose the Service Utilitys Setup Configuration Item, NETWORK
[Displayed error code: 30151 20110] CONFIG, HIS HOST (IIP) to check for node setup. If no node is set up, set
DICOM Print SCU as a dummy node.
The DICOM Print option key need not be installed.
For the setup procedure, see 2.1.4 Setup of Information on this
Equipment for the DICOM Print Function in
OE5: CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print).
The connection to the network is not established. Connect the CL to the network.
[Displayed error code: 30151 20110]
The image database is not initialized. With the Service Utility, initialize the image database.
[Displayed error code: 50001 20001 30107
30151 20110] For the initialization procedure, see 12. Initializing the Image
Database in RI: Reinstalling the Software.
The MAC address is not acquired. Reinstall the network driver and then update it.
[Displayed error code: 20111 20110 If the error recurs after the network driver is updated, replace the PCs
(Error 20111 is recorded only in the applications event motherboard. Before motherboard replacement, acquire the MAC address
log.)] manually and start up the CL-AP.
For the MAC address acquisition procedure, see 3.14 MAC
Address Manual Input in MU: Maintenance Utility.
For the motherboard replacement procedure, see
(Continued to the next page) 5.2.10 Motherboard.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)

The CL-AP (application) The selector resetup procedure is not completed. After the host name for the built-in type equipment is changed, use the
does not start up. [Displayed error code: 31099] selector setup of the Service Utility to set the built-in type equipment host
name again.
For the setup procedure, see 12. Setting the Selectors Selector
Setting in MU: Maintenance Utility.
The LCD flickers. The refresh frequency setting is improper. Correct the refresh frequency setting.
For the refresh frequency setup procedure, see 4.4 Resetting the
Refresh Frequency.
The LCD touch panel does The screen contact position correction procedure was With the utility tool for the touch panel, perform the touch panel sound setup
not sound. performed twice in succession. procedure again.
For the setup procedure, see 4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel
Sound.
The barcode reader (BCR)/ The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows Device Manager, switch to the proper driver software.
magnetic card reader Reinstalling the OS with the BCR or MCR connected to
(MCR) does not operate. a USB port results in installation of improper driver For the driver software change procedure, see 4.6 Changing the
software. Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software.
The local printer does not The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows Device Manager, switch to the proper driver software.
generate a film output. Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI
slot results in installation of improper driver software. For details, see 3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery
from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure.
Patient data cannot be The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows Device Manager, switch to the proper driver software.
exchanged in the ID online Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI The driver switchover procedure to be used is the same as the above.
state. slot results in installation of improper driver software.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Shutdown procedure
Using the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) enables you to perform the 1. Select Exit on the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) Main Menu
following. and press the <Enter> key.
Displaying the test item list and implementing selected test items The Exit menu window opens.
Displaying and storing the list of devices connected to the PC
Displaying and saving log information 2. Performs the following settings.
Reading and storing the test file When restarting the CL : Select <RBT> Reboot.
When turning OFF the power to the CL : Select <DWN> Shutdown.
5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and
Shutdown Procedures
3. Press the <O> key.
Procedures used to start up and shut down the error analysis tool The CL will become as determined at step 2. above.
(TeDoLi) are explained below.
Startup procedure
1. Turn ON the power to the CL.
2. When NEC is displayed at the center of the window, press

the <F4> key.
After about one minute, the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) Main Menu
will open.
+ ----------------+ Main Menu +--------------- +
| |
| <Test execution> |
| |
| <Device List> |
| |
| <Log Info> |
| |
| <Option> |
| |
| <Exit> |
MT000058.EPS
NOTE
The setup window will not open unless the <F4> key is pressed
with the timeliness.
In such an instance, restart the PC to repeat step 2.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.1.2 Device Test Procedures REFERENCE

Use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to test each of the devices. Use the <Space> key to turn ON/OFF the items marked with *.

For items marked with ->, use the <S> key to display detailed

1. Start up the error analysis tool (TeDoLi). setting items.
For details of the startup procedure, see 5.1.1 Error Analysis Executing the test will implement tests with all devices marked

Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures. with * at the same time.
As the default, the test implementation time is determined to be

eight minutes. The test implementation time can be set up
2. Select Test execution and press the <Enter> key.
accordingly with the Test Execution Option (displayed at the
The Test Select window opens. press of the <F9> key).
For details of each item, see the help function (displayed at the

3. Select desired test items (mark with an asterisk *). press of the <F1> key) that the error analysis tool (TeDoLi)
provides.
NOTE For the RAID specification, 2 HDDs will be recognized.

To conduct serial and network tests, connect a jig to the PC as
appropriate.
4. Press the <X> key.
+---------------------------------------| Test Select |----------------------------------------+ Tests will be conducted with the selected devices.
| |
-
| < > <SYS> System |
|
|
[ ] <FD0> Floppy0
[ ] <KB> Keyboard
-> |
|
5. After conducting tests with the selected devices, check to
| [ ] <MOUSE> Mouse |
see that there are no error occurrences. If an error
| [ ] <SERIAL0> Serial0 -> | occurrence is detected, take a necessary action as
| [ ] <SERIAL1> Serial1 -> | appropriate.
| [ ] <PARALLEL> Parallel -> |
| [ ] <VRAM> VRAM |
| [ ] <SPK> Speaker -> |
-> |
6. Press the <Esc> key some times to return to the Main Menu.
| [ ] <MEM> Memory
| [ ] <CACHE> Cache -> |
| [ ] <FAN> Fan Sensor -> | 7. After completing the tests, shut down the error analysis tool
| [ ] <TMP> Temperature Sensor -> | (TeDoLi).
| [ ] <VLT> Voltage Sensor -> |
-
| < > <IDE> IDE |
For details of the shutdown procedure, see 5.1.1 Error
| <-> <IDE 0> 00:82801DB ICH4 IDE | Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures.
| [ ] <HDD_0:0> 00: HDS722580VLAT20 -> |
| <-> <IDE 1> 00:82801DB ICH4 IDE |
| [ ] <CD-ROM_1:0> 00: FX48++M -> |
| <-> <NET> NETWORK |
| [ ] <eth0> 00: 82551QM [Ethernet Pro 100] -> |
| <-> <MISC> MISC |
| [ ] <AUDIO> ICH - Intel 82801DB-ICH4 -> |
| |
| |
| <Set(S)> <Execution(X)> <Cancel(ESC)> |
| |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
MT000061.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.1.3 Log Save Procedure 7. Enter a filename (default: <FIL>td.log) of the log you want to
save.
Use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to save logs as necessary.
----------------|
+ Save |--------------- +
1. Start up the error analysis tool (TeDoLi). | |
For details of the startup procedure, see 5.1.1 Error Analysis | Log Info |
Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures. | |
| Please input the filename. |
2. Insert the log save FD into the FD drive. |
| <FIL>td.log_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ |
|
| |
3. Select Log Info and press the <Enter> key. | <OK> <Cancel(ESC)> |
The Log Info window opens. +---------------------------------------------------+
Enter a log filename.

4. Press the <F> key. MT000060.EPS
The Select Log window opens.

8. Select <OK> and press the <Enter> key.
5. Select items you want to save logs (mark with an asterisk The selected log will then be saved onto the FD.
*).
+ ----------------| Select Log |--------------- + 9. Make sure that the FD drive access lamp is off and remove
| | the FD from the FD drive.
| Select log type |
| | 10. Press the <Esc> key.
| [ ] <P/F> [Pass/Fail] |
| [ ] <SYS> [SYSTEM-INFO] | The system then returns to the Main Menu window.
| [ ] <DEV> [DEVICE LIST] |
| [ ] <MSG> [MESSAGE LOG] | 11. Shut down the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
| | For details of the shutdown procedure, see 5.1.1 Error
| <OK(O)> <Cancel(ESC)> | Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures.
+---------------------------------------------------+
MT000059.EPS
REFERENCE
Use the <Space> key to turn ON/OFF the items marked with *.
6. Press the <O> key.

The Save window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2 Service Parts Replacement 5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement
Described herein are the procedures used to replace service parts. Dismounting procedure
NOTE 1. Shut down Windows XP and then turn OFF the power to the
CL-PC.
When you are requesting a part to be replaced free of charge, use the
error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to attach error log for the part that caused
an error to occur.
2. Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power supply.
For details of the device test procedures, see 5.1.2 Device NOTE
Test Procedures. Be sure to hold the plug to disconnect the power cord.
For details of the error log save procedure, see 5.1.3 Log Disconnecting the power cord holding the cable may break it.
Save Procedure.
Target work Reference 3. Disconnect all cables from the rear of the CL-PC.
5.2.1 Preparation for Parts
Preparation for parts replacement
Replacement 4. Secure a one- to two-meter space back-and-forth and right-
and-left, and also on top of the CL-PC.
Covers 5.2.2 Covers
CPU fan 5.2.3 CPU Fan
Hard Disk 5.2.4 Hard Disk Mounting procedure
CD-ROM drive 5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount a part.
FDD drive Drive
NOTE
CPU 5.2.6 CPU
Housing fan 5.2.7 Housing Fan After finishing the necessary work, check to see that the CL-PC starts
up normally.
Power supply unit 5.2.8 Power Supply Unit
Memory 5.2.9 Memory
Motherboard 5.2.10 Motherboard
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2.2 Covers 5.2.3 CPU Fan

Dismounting procedure Dismounting procedure
1. Make preparations for parts replacement. 1. Dismount the left-side cover.
For the parts replacement procedure, see 5.2.1 Preparation For how to dismount the left-side cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
for Parts Replacement.
2. Tilt the CL-PC so that its left side faces up.
2. Perform the following.
When dismounting the right-side and left-side covers: 3. Disconnect the CPU fan connector from the motherboard.
Remove screws and dismount the cover while sliding it slightly to the
back of the CL-PC. 4. Raise the CPU fan levers to unlock them accordingly.
When dismounting the front cover: Lever

Insert a screwdriver in a hole located on top of the front cover to
unlock it to dismount.
Mounting procedure
Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount a cover.
MT000053.EPS
5. Unlock the four claws to dismount the CPU fan.
#1
[Unlock]
Four claws
#2
[Dismount]
CPU fan
MT000054.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Mounting procedure 5.2.4 Hard Disk

Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount the CPU fan. NOTE
NOTE Use only NEC-specified hard disks. If a hard disk of a third party is
used, an error may occur not only with it but also with the CL-PC main
Pay due attention to the direction where the CPU fan is to be mounted. unit. Repair of an error or damage caused by the use of a third partys
hard disk will be at your own cost even still under warranty.
Dismounting procedure
1. Dismount the front cover.
CPU fan For how to dismount the front cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
Cable
MT000055.EPS 2. Dismount the CPU fan.
For how to dismount the CPU fan, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan.
3. Disconnect cables from the hard disk.

NOTE
Disconnect cables carefully. When doing so, exercise care not to
hit your hands against surrounding parts, which, otherwise, may
damage those parts incidentally.
4. Remove the two screws from the front.
5. Remove the hard disk bay while sliding it slightly to the

back of the CL-PC.
NOTE
Hold tight the hard disk bay, exercising due care so as not to touch
CPU or parts mounted on the motherboard.
6. Remove the four screws from the hard disk bay to dismount
the hard disk.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Mounting procedure 5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Drive

1. Mount the hard disk on the hard disk bay. Dismounting procedure
NOTE 1. Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side
Make sure that the hard disk has been set to be the MASTER and cover.
then mount it appropriately. Note, however, that you do not have to For how to dismount the front cover, right-side cover and
check the settings when the NEC-PC (RAID specification) is used. left-side cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
Rear of the hard disk

2. Disconnect cables from the CD-ROM drive or FD drive.
3. Remove screws to dismount the CD-ROM drive or FD drive.
MT000050.EPS
REFERENCE
Screws to be removed are as follows.
2. Remount the hard disk bay on the CL-PC. CD-ROM drive Right side : Two screws
Left side : Two screws
3. Connect the hard disk power cable and interface cable FD drive

Right side : One screw
Left side : Two screws
appropriately.
4. Mount the CPU fan. Mounting procedure

For the CPU fan mounting procedure, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan.
NOTE
5. Check hard disk power cable and interface cable connection Connect cables correctly, as illustrated below, paying attention to the
status. FDD interface cable polarity.
6. Remount the front cover. Motherboard Drive side

For how to mount the front cover, see 5.2.2 Covers. side
NOTE
If the CL-PC does not start running normally, check to see if the
cables are connected properly. Cables are twisted. MT000051.eps
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount a drive.

After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to the CL-PC
to make sure that no error messages appear during diagnosis for
initialization.
For details of error messages appearing during diagnosis for
initialization and actions to take, see 5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis
Messages During Initialization.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2.6 CPU Mounting procedure

CAUTION NOTES
Whenever dismounting/remounting the CPU, be sure to wear a When a floppy disk used for BIOS upgrading is attached to the CPU
wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that is held for replacement, upgrade BIOS accordingly after the CPU has been
by the human body, otherwise, the CPU may be damaged due to replaced.
static electricity discharged from the human body. Exercise care not to mount the CPU in an incorrect direction.
1. Dismount the CPU fan.
For how to dismount the CPU fan, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan.
CPU
2. Raise the CPU socket levers to remove the CPU.
NOTE MT000056.EPS
Carefully handle the CPU as it can be damaged easily.

Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the CPU.
initialization.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2.7 Housing Fan 5.2.8 Power Supply Unit

Dismounting procedure Dismounting procedure
1. Dismount the CPU fan. 1. Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side
For the CPU fan dismounting procedure, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan. cover.
For how to dismount the front cover, right-side cover and
2. Disconnect the housing fan connector from the left-side cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
motherboard.
2. Remove screws from the CD-ROM drive to slide it to the
3. While holding the housing fan with a hand, remove the two front.
screws to dismount it.
3. While holding the CL-PC with both hands, tilt the CL-PC
gently so that its left side faces up.
Mounting procedure
NOTE 4. Remove the hard disk bay.

For how to remove the hard disk bay, see 5.2.4 Hard Disk.
Pay attention to the housing fan mounting direction.
Cable
5. Disconnect cables from the power supply unit.
For motherboard (main power supply/CPU power supply)
For hard disk
For CD-ROM drive
For FD drive
Label face 6. While holding the power supply unit with a hand, remove
the four screws to dismount it.
Rear of the CL
MT000052.EPS
Mounting procedure
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the housing fan. Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the power supply unit.
initialization.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2.9 Memory Mounting procedure

CAUTION 1. Set the memory in an upright position and push it in the
socket.
Whenever dismounting/remounting memory, be sure to wear a
wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that is held When the memory is pushed in the socket, levers located on both
by the human body, otherwise, the CPU may be damaged due to the right-and-left sides will close automatically.
static electricity discharged from the human body.
NOTE
Pay due attention to the memory mounting direction. A notch is
NOTE provided on the terminal side of the memory to prevent it from
Use only NEC-specified memories. If a memory of a third party is used, being pushed in the socket mistakenly.
an error may occur not only with it but also with the CL-PC main unit.
Repair of an error or damage caused by the use of a third partys
memory will be at your own cost even still under warranty.
2. Remount the hard disk bay.
For how to remount the hard disk bay, see 5.2.4 Hard Disk.
3. After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to

Dismounting procedure the CL-PC to make sure that no error messages appear
during diagnosis for initialization.
1. Remove the hard disk bay.
For how to remove the hard disk bay, see 5.2.4 Hard Disk. NOTE
If an error message is displayed, perform Error cancel
2. Open levers on both the right-and-left sides of the memory procedure.
socket to remove the memory. Error cancel procedure
Lever
MT000057.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Error cancel procedure 5.2.10 Motherboard

1. Turn the monitor and PC power switch ON. CAUTION
The PC will start running. Whenever dismounting/remounting a motherboard, be sure to
wear a wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that
2. When F2 SETUP appears at the upper left corner of the is held by the human body, otherwise, the motherboard may be
window, press the <F2> key. damaged due to static electricity discharged from the human body.
NOTE NOTE
The setup window will not open unless the <F2> key is pressed Users equipment-specific information or setup information is stored in
with the timeliness. the memory (CMOS) on the motherboard. Prior to replacing a
In such an instance, restart the PC to repeat step 2. motherboard, be sure to jot down such stored data properly.
The setup window (PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility) then opens.

3. Select the Advanced tab. 1. Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover.
For how to dismount the front cover, right-side cover and
4. Perform the following. left-side cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
Select Advanced Chipset Control and then press the <Enter> key.
2. Remove the hard disk bay.
S elect Memory Reconfiguration and then press the <Enter> key. For how to remove the hard disk bay, see 5.2.4 Hard Disk.

Select Clear DIMM Errors:[Enter] and then press the <Enter> key.
3. Dismount devices, such as memory and PCI board, from the
motherboard.
5. Press the <Esc> key.
The Main Menu will open.
4. Disconnect all connectors from the motherboard.
Power cable (for main power supply/CPU power supply)
6. Press the <Ecs> key. Speaker cable
The Exit menu will open. Power switch cable
IDE cable (for CD-ROM drive/hard disk)
Sleep switch cable
7. Make sure that Exit Saving Changes has been selected FD drive cable
and press the <Enter> key. Housing fan cable
The Setup Confirmation window opens. CD audio cable
8. Make sure that Yes has been selected and press the
5. Remove the seven screws to dismount the motherboard.
<Enter> key.
Mounting procedure
The PC restarts. Check to see then that the error has been
canceled properly. Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount the motherboard.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During

Initialization
No. Error Message Error Causes Actions to Take
1 Diskette drive A error Drive A FDD error FDD failure, FDD cable * After cable connection
failure 1. Replace FDD.
2. Replace FDD cable.
2 Extended RAM Failed at address line: Abnormal extended memory Extended DIMM error * For an error occurring after confirming
status of the mounted memory
Replace DIMM.
3 System RAM Failed at offset: Abnormal base memory DIMM error * For an error occurring after confirming
Replace DIMM.
4 Shadow Ram Failed at offset: Abnormal memory DIMM error * For an error occurring after confirming
Replace DIMM.
5 Failure Fixed Disk Abnormal disk 1. Setup failure * After cable connection
2. IDE device failure 1. Check setup.
3. Motherboard failure 2. Replace IDE device.
3. Replace IDE device cable.
6 Keyboard Controller Failed Abnormal keyboard Keyboard controller error Replace motherboard.
controller
7 Keyboard error Abnormal keyboard Keyboard error * For an error occurring after confirming
connection to the keyboard
Replace keyboard.
8 Real time clock error Abnormal RTC RTC error * For an error occurring after redetermining
the setup
Replace motherboard.
9 System battery is dead - Replace and run SETUP Dead battery End of battery lifespan, RTC Replace battery.
error
10 System CMOS checksum bad - Default Configuration CMOS checksum error CMOS checksum error * For an error occurring after redetermining
used the setup
11 System cache error - Cache disabled Abnormal cache CPU cache error Replace CPU.
12 System timer error Abnormal timer Timer error Replace motherboard.
13 SMBIOS-SROM data checksumbad SROM checksum error Flash ROM write error * For an error occurring after redetermining
the setup
14 SMBIOS-SROM data read error SROM read error Flash ROM error * For an error occurring after redetermining
the setup
15 Check date and time settings Illegal date/time RTC error * For an error occurring after redetermining
the setup
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization
No. Error Message Error Causes Actions to Take

16 Fan Alarm occurred. Abnormal fan Housing fan error * For an error occurring after confirming
connection
1. Clean fan.
2. Replace fan.
17 CPU Fan Alarm occurred. Abnormal CPU fan CPU fan error * For an error occurring after confirming
connection and mounting
1. Clean fan.
2. Replace fan.
18 System Temperature out of the range. Abnormal temperature Temperature error, MB For an error occurring at normal
failure temperature
1. Setup
2. Replace motherboard.
19 System Voltage out of the range Abnormal voltage Power supply error, MB * For an error occurring after redetermining
failure the setup
1. Replace power supply.
2. Replace motherboard.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps Sound at PC Startup
5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps

Sound at PC Startup
A series of beep sounds notify occurrence of an error, when display of
the relevant error message or the problem indication is disabled on the
monitor for the error thus detected during hardware initialization.
Example:
One beep + 3 consecutive beeps + 1 beep + 1 beep
(beep pattern: 1-3-1-1)
The beep sounds in this pattern indicate occurrence of a DRAM refresh
test error.
The beep sounds in different patterns depending on the detected error
or problem, as shown in the table below.
Beep pattern Error Cause Remedy

3-3 (repeated) ROM checksum error
Flash Memory failure Replace motherboard.
1-2-2-3 ROM checksum error
Confirm DIMM attaching condition.
1-3-1-1 DRAM refresh error DIMM or motherboard failure
If the failure still remains, replace DIMM or motherboard.
Re-connect the keyboard.
1-3-1-3 Keyboard controller test error Keyboard Controller failure
If the failure still remains, replace keyboard or motherboard.
Error occurring during capacity
1-3-3-1
check, with no memory
1-3-4-1 DRAM address error Confirm DIMM attaching condition.
DIMM or motherboard failure
If the failure still remains, replace DIMM or motherboard.
1-3-4-3 DRAM test Low Byte error
1-4-1-1 DRAM test High Byte error
2-1-2-3 BIOS ROM copyright test error Flash Memory failure Replace motherboard.
2-2-3-1 Illegal interrupt test error Motherboard failure Replace motherboard.
Option ROM initialization error Confirm PCI board mounting condition if expansion of the option board is not
Failure of Flash Memory, Graphic displayed for the additionally extended PCI board.
1-2 Video initialization error
Adapter or PCI Card If the failure still remains, replace additionally extended PCI board or
Option ROM checksum error motherboard.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table (A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to V8.3(B))
Event Event Source Description Causes Remedies Remarks

10773 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv FFTagCharDataAdd Error Definition of TagCharDataAdd.ini is invalid. Check the TagCharDataAdd.ini.
<ImgConvAfterDicomSt>
10774 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv DICOM ReplaceVR/Push Failed in setting Photometric Interpretation Restart.
Error (0028, 0004).
10775 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv DICOM ReplaceVR/Push Failed in setting Pixel Intensity Relationship Restart.
Error Sign (0028, 1041).
10776 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv DICOM ReplaceVR/Push Failed in setting Presentation LUT Shape Restart.
Error (2050, 0020).
10900 IIPInputEz %1 : Registry Value The acquisition/setup key or registration Check the registry key.
Get/Set Error%n information is abnormal.
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
10901 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Connection This error is attributable to an abnormal Check Directory.ini or database file name.
Error%n character string in Directory.ini, an incorrect
[DB] %2%n database file name, or a damaged
[Exp] %3%n database.
%4%n
%5
10902 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Data This error is attributable to an abnormal Check the database table/field name.
Get/Set Error%n database acquisition/setup key or
[DB] %2%n database.
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
10903 IIPInputEz %1 : Dicom Data Object The DDO acquisition/setup tag is Check the DDO tag.
Get/Set Error%n abnormal.
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
10904 IIPInputEz %1 : Other Error%n Unknown error.
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx1MT-1
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
11900 IIPPortable %1 : Registry Value Get/ The registry was damaged. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Set Error reinstall the system.
[Key] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
%4%n
%5
11901 IIPPortable %1 : Database Connection Failed in accessing the image database. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Error reinstall the system and perform
[DB] %2 Initialization of image database. (Image
[Exp] %3 data will be fully deleted.)
%4
%5
11902 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Data Get/ This error is attributable to an abnormal Check the database table/field name.
Set Error%n acquisition/setup key or database.
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
11902 IIPPortable %1 : Database Data Get/ Failed in accessing the image database. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Set Error reinstall the system and perform
[Table]%3 data will be fully deleted.)
[Field]%4
[Exp]%5
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
11903 IIPPortable %1 : DDO Data Get/Set The DDO file was damaged. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
[Tag] %2 Initialization of image database. (Image
%3 data will be fully deleted.)
%4
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
11904 IIPPortable %1 : Other Error Program error or unstable system status. Check POCKET id Console connection
[Procedure] %2 status and restart. If the same symptom
[Error Code]%3 recurs, reinstall the system and perform
[Exp]%4 Initialization of image database. (Image
12001 FF32 [%1] Failed in reading a bitmap file. Check to see if the filename is correct or %1: Instance name
It failed in CreateFile(%2). It is conceivable that there was no such available hard disk space is sufficient. %2: Error code
%3 file, free disk space was not sufficient or Proceed with processing. %3: Bitmap file
the system was unstable. name/Icon file
name
12002 FF32 [%1] Failed in creating a file map object. Proceed with processing. %1: Instance name
It failed in It is conceivable that available resources %2: Error code
CreateFileMapping(%2). were insufficient or the system was %3: Bitmap file
%3 unstable. name/Icon file
name
12003 FF32 [%1] Failed in mapping a file. It is conceivable Proceed with processing. %1: Instance name
It failed in that available resources were insufficient %2: Error code
MapViewOfFile(%2). or the system was unstable. %3: Bitmap file
%3 name/Icon file
name
12004 FF32 [%1] Failed in creating a device context. Proceed with processing. %1: Instance name
CreateCompatibleDC. were insufficient or the system was
[%2] unstable.
12005 FF32 [%1] Failed in creating a DIB section. Proceed with processing. %1: Instance name
CreateDIBSection(%2). were insufficient or the system was %3: Bitmap file
name
12006 FF32 [%1] Failed in creating a bitmap picture object. Proceed with processing. %1: Instance name
OleCreatePictureIndirect(%2). were insufficient or the system was %3: Bitmap file
name
12008 FF32 [%1] Failed in reading an icon file. Check to see if the filename is correct or %1: Instance name
It failed in ExtractIon. It is conceivable that there was no such available hard disk space is sufficient. %2: Error code
%2 file, free disk space was not sufficient or Proceed with processing.
the system was unstable.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
12009 FF32 [%1] Failed in creating an picture object for an Proceed with processing. %1: Instance name
It failed in icon. It is conceivable that available %2: Error code
OleCreatePictureIndirect(%2). resources were insufficient or the system %3: Bitmap file
%3 was unstable. name/Icon file
name
12011 FF32 [%1] The file path was illegal. Check to see if the filename is correct. %1: Instance name
It is a filepath error. %2 Proceed with processing. %2: Error code
12012 FF32 [%1] Failed in acquiring memory. Check to see if the filename is correct. %1: Instance name
Memory allocation failed(%2). It is conceivable that available resources Proceed with processing. %2: Error code
%3 were insufficient or the system was %3: Bitmap file
unstable. name/Icon file
name
12014 FF32 [%1] An invalid input value was specified. Proceed with processing. %1: Instance name
(function name),
occurred error,
error code
%2 (function name),
occurred error,
error code
%1: Error details
%2 (function name),
%3 occurred error,
error code
%2: Error details (1/2)
%3: Error details (2/2)
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
12900 IIPPortable %1 : Registry Value Get/ A registry was damaged. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Set Error reinstall the system.
[Key] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
%4%n
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
12901 IIPPortable %1 : Database Connection Failed in accessing the image database. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
[Exp] %3 data will be fully deleted.)
%4
%5
12902 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Data This error is attributable to an abnormal Check the database table/field name.
Get/Set Error%n acquisition/setup key or database.
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
12902 IIPPortable %1 : Database Data Get/ Failed in accessing the image database. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Set Error reinstall the system and perform
[Table]%3 data will be fully deleted.)
[Field]%4
[Exp]%5
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
12903 IIPPortable %1 : DDO Data Get/Set The DDO file was damaged. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
[Tag] %2 Initialization of image database. (Image
%4
%5
12904 IIPInputEz %1 : Unknown Error%n Unknown error. Check the POCKET id Console connection
[Procedure] %2%n status.
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
12904 IIPPortable %1 : Other Error A general-purpose information event log. Check the POCKET id Console connection
[Procedure] %2 status.
[Error Code]%3
[Exp]%4
%5
13000 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] connects The requesting department database was Reinstall.
departDB not found in the path indicated by the
connection character string. The requesting
department table did not exist.
13000 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
FontName registry. characters can be corrupted.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13000 FFIdMenuChange It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13000 FFIdMenuItem It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13000 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] connects The technicians database was not found Reinstall.
paramedicDB in the pass indicated by the connection
character string or the technician's table
did not exist.
13000 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
ID# caption Directory.ini or the ID 30700 was not
registered in the character string database.
13001 FF32LIB Image Database Access The image database was not successfully Restart.
Failure. accessed (ADO error).
ErrNo:%1 NativeErrNo:%2
SQLState:%3 Source:%4
Description:%5
13001 FFCustomMsgBox MessageBox DataBase The message database was not Reinstall or check whether the message
Connection Error. successfully connected. It is conceivable database exists and the contents of
that the database did not exist or that the Directory.ini are correct.
specified data source name was invalid.
13001 FFCustomMsgBox MessageBox DataBase The connection to the message database Perform a reinstallation or check whether
Connection Error. was not successfully established. the message database exists and the
[%1] The database did not exist or the specified contents of Directory.ini are correct.
data source name was invalid.
13001 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
DepartLabel caption Directory.ini or the ID 30800 was not
13001 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
FontSize FontSizeM/FontSizeL/FontSizeLL key characters can be corrupted.
was not found in the registry.
13001 FFIdMenuChange It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13001 FFIdMenuItem It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13001 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
ParamedicLabel caption Directory.ini or the ID 30800 was not
EXAM# caption Directory.ini or the ID 30701 was not
13001 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13001 FFImageDBCTL Image Database Access The image database was not successfully Restart.
Error. accessed (ADO error).
ErroNo:%1
Source:%2
Description:%3
Failure. accessed (ADO error).
ErrNo:%1 NativeErrNo:%2
SQLState:%3 Source:%4
Description:%5
13001 FFIpcInf [%1] Initialization was unsuccessful. Restart. %1: Instance name
It failed in CoInitialize(%2). It is conceivable that the system was %2: Error code
unstable.
13001 FFLogFile [%1] Log file creation was unsuccessful. Check for a free disk space or restart. %1: Instance name
It failed in CreateFile(%2). The problem might have been caused, for %2: Error code
instance, by an invalid filename selection, %3: File name/mutex
inadequate disk space, or system name
instability.
13001 FF32LIB FF32lib Database Access Failed in accessing the database. Restart.
Failure.%nFunction:%1
Command:%2%nErrNo:%3
NativeErrNo:%4
SQLState:%5%n
Source:%6%n
Description:%7
13002 FFCustomMsgBox MessageBox Data Get The specified message was not databased. Perform a reinstallation or replace the
Error. It is conceivable that the message was not message database with the latest one.
registered in the message database or that
the specified ID was incorrect (program
defect).
13002 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13002 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Clear Caption Directory.ini or the ID 34800 was not
13002 FFIdMcrControl Driver initialize error[%1] The magnetic card was not connected. Connect the magnetic card reader.
13002 FFIdMenuChange It failed that [%1] gets the The Multibyte key was not found in the Reinstall.
multibyte flag registry.
13002 FFIdMenuItem It failed that [%1] gets the The Multibyte key was not found in the Reinstall.
13002 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
PatNameSbcs caption Directory.ini or the ID 30702 was not
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13002 FFIdRuMainControl Driver initialize error[%1] The magnetic card reader was not There are no operational problems.
connected.
13002 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13002 FFImageDBCTL [%1] The image database was not successfully Restart.
%2 accessed.
Failure. accessed.
InstanceName[%1]%2
13002 FFIpcInf [%1] A log save control was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom recurs, %1: Instance name
It failed in created. The problem is attributable to perform a reinstallation. %2: Error code
CoCreateInstance(%2). system instability or unregistered control.
LogFileCom create failure.
13002 FFLogFile [%1] File map object creation was unsuccessful. Restart. %1: Instance name
It failed in The problem is attributable to resource %2: Error code
CreateFileMapping(%2). inadequacy or system instability.
13002 FF32LIB FF32lib Database Access Failed in accessing the database. Restart.
Failure. InstanceName[%1]
%n%2%nFunction:%3
Command:%4
13003 FF32LIB Image Database Access The image database was not successfully Restart.
Failure. accessed.
InstanceName[%1]%2
%3
13003 FFCustomMsgBox Same MessageBox The specified message box is already Close the message box.
Existed. open.
[%1]
13003 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13003 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
connection string of strDB Directory.ini.
13003 FFIdMenuChange [%1] failed in the The DisplayDataDB key was not found in Reinstall.
initialization for the display Directory.ini or the connection character
group data acquisition string was not properly registered in the
display group table.
13003 FFIdMenuItem Image Folder Path Get The Bitmap key was not found in Reinstall.
Error Directory.ini.
13003 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
PatNameDbcs caption Directory.ini or the ID 30703 was not
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13003 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] gets the The Multibyte key was not found in the Reinstall.
13003 FFImageDBCTL [%1] The image database was not successfully Restart.
%2 accessed.
%3
Failure. accessed.
InstanceName[%1]%2%3
13003 FFIpcInf [%1] Memory allocation was not successfully Restart. %1: Instance name
Memory allocation failed. achieved for main thread creation.
The problem is attributable to resource
13003 FFLogFile [%1] File mapping was unsuccessful. Restart. %1: Instance name
MapViewOfFile(%2). inadequacy or system instability.
13003 FF32LIB FF32lib Database Access Failed in accessing the database. Restart. %1: Instance name
Failure. %2: Error code
InstanceName[%1]%n%2
%n%3
13004 FFCustomMsgBox MessageBox Dialog Create The message box could not be created. Restart.
Error. This error occurred due to insufficient
[%1] resources or system instability.
13004 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The FieldDepartList key was not found in Reinstall.
depart field list the system setup database.
13004 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
to strDB properly registered for the LangStrDB key
in Directory.ini.
13004 FFIdMcrControl Magnetic card data The magnetic card was found damaged. Have a normal magnetic card be read.
acquisition error[%1]
13004 FFIdMenuChange [%1] failed in the display The DisplayDataDB key was not found in Reinstall.
group data acquisition Directory.ini or the connection character
string was not properly registered in the
13004 FFIdMenuItem [Miss]Image Get Error Id_MissExposure_I.bmp was not found in Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
the path to an image folder or the image be displayed normally.
format was illegal.
13004 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The FieldParamedicList key was not Reinstall.
paramedic field list found in the system setup database.
Sex caption Directory.ini or the ID 30704 was not
13004 FFIdRuMainControl Magnetic card data The magnetic card is damaged. Have a normal magnetic card be read.
acquisition error[%1]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13004 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
connection string of STR Directory.ini.
DB
13004 FFIpcInf [%1] A pipe has already An attempt was made to duplicate a pipe. There are no operational problems. %1: Instance name
been made(%2). %2: Error code
13004 FFLogFile [%1] It failed in Mutex creation was unsuccessful. Restart. %1: Instance name
CreateMutex(%2). The problem is attributable to resource %2: Error code
%3 inadequacy or system instability. %3: file name/mutex
name
13005 FFCustomMsgBox MessageBox Dialog Show The message box could not be opened. Restart.
Error. This error occurred due to insufficient
13005 FFIdConnectionWatch Recv Error The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal.
EX Message [%1] Error Code connection error occurred.
[%2]
13005 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] gets the The FilmMarkDB key was not found in Reinstall.
connection string of Directory.ini.
FilmMarkDB
13005 FFldMcrControl Magnetic card variation The magnetic card was not of the specified Have the specified type of magnetic card
error[%1] type. be read.
13005 FFIdMenuChange [%1] failed in the liberating The connection to the display group table Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
processing of the display was not successfully closed. reinstall.
group data acquisition
SexMale caption Directory.ini or the ID 30705 was not
13005 FFIdRuMainControl Magnetic card variation The employed magnetic card type was Have the specified type of magnetic card
error[%1] different than specified. be read.
13005 FFIdRuMainControl Recv error[%1] The connection to the RU was closed or Check the connection to the RU.
an error occurred in the connection.
13005 FFIdRUMainControlEx Recv Error The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal.
Message [%1] Error Code connection error occurred.
[%2]
13005 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
to STR DB properly registered for the LangStrDB key
in Directory.ini.
13005 FFIpcInf [%1] Main thread creation was not successful. Restart. %1: Instance name
_beginthread(%2). inadequacy or system instability.
13006 FFCustomMsgBox List For Modeless The modeless message box management Restart.
MessageBox Management table was not successfully created.
New Error. The problem is attributable to resource
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13006 FFCustomMsgBox List For Modeless The modeless message box management Restart.
MessageBox Management table was not successfully created.
New Error. This error occurred due to insufficient
13006 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
to FilmMarkDB properly registered for the FilmMarkDB
key in Directory.ini.
13006 FFIdMcrControl Magnetic card variation The card format was incorrect or an Have the specified hospital card be read.
check error[%1] attempt was made to read an unspecified
hospital card.
13006 FFIdMenuChange [%1] Failed in the The DisplayDataDB key was not found in Reinstall.
initialization for the display Directory.ini.
menu data acquisition
SexFemale caption Directory.ini or the ID 30706 was not
13006 FFIdRuMainControl Magnetic card variation The card format was wrong or an attempt Have the specified hospital card be read.
check error[%1] was made to cause an unspecified hospital
card to be read.
13006 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] gets the The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
connection string of SYS Directory.ini.
DB
13006 FFIpcInf [%1] It failed in The specified pipe was not successfully Make a change so as to let the program %1: Instance name
WaitNamedPipe(%2). connected. It is conceivable that the pipe initiate a retransmission, or restart. %2: Error code
was not created or was unconnectable or
that the system was unstable.
13007 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
13007 FFIdMcrControl DataFormatDB access McrDataFormatDB key was not found in Reinstall.
error[%1] Directory.ini or McrDataFormat.mdb did not
exist in the specified path.
13007 FFIdMenuChange [%1] failed in the acquisition The connection character string was not Reinstall.
of number of records of properly registered in the display group
display menu data table.
13007 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
SexOther caption Directory.ini or the ID 30707 was not
13007 FFIdRuMainControl DataFormatDB access The McrDataFormatDB key was not Reinstall.
error[%1] found in Directory.ini or McrDataFormat.
mdb did not exist in the path.
13007 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
to SYS DB properly registered for the SysConfigDB
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13007 FFIpcInf [%1] The specified pipe was not successfully The problem is attributable to the program. %1: Instance name
It failed in CreateFile(%2). connected. It is conceivable that the pipe Check the program or restart. %2: Error code
was closed or that the system was
unstable.
13007 FFIpcInf [%1] The connection to the specified pipe was The problem is attributable to the program.
It failed in CreateFile(%2). not established. This error occurred Check the program or restart.
[Send Msg:%3] because the pipe was closed or the system
was unstable.
13008 FFCustomMsgBox An exception error An exception occurred (the system was Restart.
occurred. unstable).
[%1]
%2
13008 FFIdConnectionWatch Message Send Error [%1] A connection error occurred. Restore the RU connection to normal.
Ex Error Code [%2]
13008 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
in Directory.ini.
13008 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] get the The Bitmap key was not found in Reinstall.
folder path to Bitmap Directory.ini.
13008 FFIdMenuChange [%1] failed in the display Not properly registered to the display group Reinstall.
menu data acquisition table.
13008 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
in Directory.ini.
DateOfBirth caption Directory.ini or the ID 30708 was not
13008 FFIdRuMainControl DataFormatDB close The database was faulty. Reinstall.
error[%1]
13008 FFIdRUMainControlEx Message Send Error [%1] A connection error occurred. Restore the RU connection to normal.
WSAGetLastError = [%2]
13008 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] calls the The message database did not exist or the Reinstall.
CUSTOM MESSAGE BOX program was faulty.
(%2)
13008 FFIpcInf [%1] A message was not successfully The problem is attributable to the program. %1: Instance name
It failed in WriteFile(%2). transmitted. It is conceivable that the pipe Check the program or restart. %2: Error code
was closed or that the system was
unstable.
13008 FFIpcInf [%1] The message transmission was not It is conceivable that the program may be
It failed in WriteFile(%2). successfully completed. This error faulty. Check the program or restart.
[Send Msg:%3] occurred due to a closed pipe or system
instability.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13009 FFCustomMsgBox Common function error The common function returned an error. Restart.
occurred.
[%1]
%2
13009 FFIdConnectionWatch LogFile Name Make The Log key was not found in Directory. Reinstall.
error(%1).%n[%2] ini.
13009 FFIdConnectionWatchEx Log File Name Make The Log key was not found in Directory. Register the Log key in Directory.ini.
Error[%1] ini.
Error Code [%2]
13009 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] gets the The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
connection string of sysDB Directory.ini.
13009 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] get the Id_UpScroll_U.bmp/Id_UpScroll_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
bitmap to Previous Page Id_UpScroll_X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
path to an image folder or the image format
was illegal.
13009 FFIdMcrControl DataFormatDB close The database was faulty. Reinstall.
error[%1]
13009 FFIdMenuChange [%1] Failed in the liberating The connection to the display menu table Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
processing of the display was not successfully closed. initialize the image database.
13009 FFIdParamedicSelect Is failed that [%1] gets the The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
13009 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13009 FFIdRuMainControl LogFile Name Make The Log key was not found in Directory. Reinstall.
error[%1] ini.
13009 FFIdRUMainControlEx Log File Name Make The Log key was not found in Directory. Register the Log key in Directory.ini.
Error[%1] ini.
Error Code [%2]
13009 FFIpcInf [%1] Memory allocation was not successfully Restart. %1: Instance name
Memory allocation failed.achieved for reception thread creation. %2: Error code
The problem is attributable to resource
13010 FFIdConnectionWatch DB Connect The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
error(%1).%n[%2] Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist
in the path.
13010 FFIdConnectionWatchEx DB Connect Error [%1] SysConfigDB key was not found in Properly register the SysConfigDB key in
Error Code [%2] Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist Directory.ini.
in the specified path.
13010 FFIdDepartSelect It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
to sysDB properly registered for the SysConfigDB
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13010 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] get the Id_DownScroll_U.bmp/Id_DownScroll_D. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
bitmap to Next Page bmp/Id_DownScroll_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
found in the path to an image folder or the
image format was illegal.
13010 FFIdMcrControl Patient info data error[%1] The patient information contained in the Check the data contained in the magnetic
%n(%2) magnetic card was incorrect. card.
13010 FFIdMenuChange [%1] Failed in the The connection to the display menu table Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
termination of the display was not successfully closed. initialize the image database.
13010 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
13010 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
13010 FFIdRuMainControl DB Connect error[%1] The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist
in the path.
13010 FFIdRuMainControl Patient info data error[%1] The patient information carried by the Check the data stored in the magnetic
magnetic card was incorrect. card.
13010 FFIdRUMainControlEx DB Connect Error SysConfigDB key was not found in Properly register the SysConfigDB key in
[%1] Error Code [%2] Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist Directory.ini.
in the specified path.
13010 FFIpcInf [%1] Pipe creation was not successful. Restart. %1: Instance name
It failed in It is conceivable that the system was %2: Error code
CreateNamedPipe(%2). unstable.
13010 FFIpcInf [%1] It failed in The pipe was not successfully created. Restart.
CreateNamedPipe(%2). The system was unstable.
[Pipe:%3]
13011 FFIdConnectionWatch DB Read The EchoInterval, ComBreakTimeout1 Reinstall.
error(%1).%n[%2] PartFrupStatus, or EnableLog
FrupConnect key was not found in
SysConfig.mdb.
13011 FFIdConnectionWatchEx DB Read error[%1] The EchoInterval, ComBreakTimeout1 Ensure that the EchoInterval,
Error Code [%2] PortFrupStatus, or ComBreakTimeout1, PortFrupStatus,
EnableLogFrupConnect key was not and EnableLogFrupConnect keys are all
found in SysConfig.mdb. registered in SysConfig.mdb.
13011 FFIdDepartSelect It's failed that [%1] gets the DepartDB did not exist in Directory.ini. Reinstall.
connection string of
departDB
13011 FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] get the Id_Clear_U.bmp/Id_Clear_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
bitmap to Clear Id_Clear_ X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
was illegal.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13011 FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] gets the ParamedicDB did not exist in Directory.ini. Reinstall.
connection string of
paramedicDB
13011 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The IdLength key was not found in the Reinstall.
max length of ID# system setup database.
13011 FFIdRuMainControl DB Read error[%1] The PortFrupMain, AckTimeout, or Reinstall.
EnableLogFrupMain key was not found in
SysConfig.mdb.
13011 FFIdRUMainControlEx DB Read error[%1] The PortFrupMain, AckTimeout, or Ensure that the PortFrupMain,
Error Code [%2] EnableLogFrupMain key was not found in AckTimeout, and EnableLogFrupMain
SysConfig.mdb. keys are all registered in SysConfig.mdb.
13011 FFIipInput It failed that [%1] gets the The ScallHight/ScallWidth key was not Reinstall.
window size registered in the registry.
13011 FFIpcInf [%1] Pipe connection was not successfully Restart. %1: Instance name
It failed in awaited. It is conceivable that the system %2: Error code
ConnectNamedPipe(%2). was unstable.
13011 FFIpcInf [%1] The pipe connection request was not Restart.
It failed in successfully enqueued. The system was
ConnectNamedPipe(%2). unstable.
[Pipe:%3]
13011 FFCustomMsgBox ActiveX Data Objects(ADO) An ADO error was detected. Restart.
Error.
ErrorNo:%1
Source:%2
Description:%3
13012 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The ExaminationNoLength key was not Reinstall.
max length of EXAM# found in the system setup database.
13012 FFIpcInf [%1] Reception thread creation was not Restart. %1: Instance name
It failed in successful. The problem is attributable to %2: Error code
_beginthread(%2). resource inadequacy or system instability.
13012 FFIpcInf [%1] The reception thread was not successfully Restart.
It failed in created. This error occurred due to
_beginthread(%2). insufficient resources or system instability.
[Pipe:%3]
13013 FFIdMenuChange It failed that [%1] get the The Bitmap key was not found in Reinstall.
folder path to Bitmap Directory.ini.
13013 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The IdPadding key was not found in the Reinstall.
padding type of ID# system setup database.
13013 FFIdRUMainControlEx Configration error[%1] SysConfig.mdb was abnormal.
13013 FFIpcInf [%1] Message reception was not successful. Restart. %1: Instance name
It failed in ReadFile(%2). It is conceivable that the system was %2: Error code
unstable.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13013 FFIpcInf [%1] The message reception was not Restart.
It failed in ReadFile(%2). successfully completed. The system was
[Pipe:%3] unstable.
13014 FFIdConnectionWatch Ack Messeage Time The connection to the RU was closed or Check the connection to the RU.
Out(%1).%n[%2] an error occurred in the connection.
13014 FFIdConnectionWatchEx Ack Message Time The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal.
Out[%1] connection error occurred.
Error Code [%2]
13014 FFIdMenuChange It failed that [%1] get the Id_PrevPage_U.bmp/Id_PrevPage_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
bitmap to Previous Page D.bmp/Id _PrevPage_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
13014 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The ExaminationNoPadding key was not Reinstall.
padding type of EXAM# found in the system setup database.
13014 FFIdRuMainControl Ack Messeage Time The connection to the RU was closed or Check the connection to the RU.
Out[%1] an error occurred in the connection.
13014 FFIdRUMainControlEx Ack Message Time The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal.
Out[%1] connection error occurred.
13014 FFIipInput [%1] No RU Used Although the FRUP option was selected, Check the settings.
NetConfig did not have any RU connection
setting. There was a conflict between the
option setup and Config setup.
13014 FFIpcInf [%1] An illegal parameter was encountered %1: Instance name
It is a parameter error. (program defect).
13015 FFIdMenuChange It failed that [%1] get the Id_NextPage_U.bmp/Id_NextPage_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
bitmap to Next Page D.bmp/Id _NextPage_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
13015 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The Multibyte key was not found in the Reinstall.
13015 FFIpcInf [%1] An exception occurred (the system was Restart.
Exception Information. unstable).
%2
13016 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The DateFormat key was not found in the Reinstall.
date format type system setup database.
13017 FFIdConnectionWatchEx RU Host Unknown The RU was not properly set for the IIP. Check the setup.
Error[%1]
Error Code [%2]
13017 FFIdRUMainControlEx RU Host Unknown The RU was not properly set for the IIP. Check the setup.
Error[%1]
Error Code [%2]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13018 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
in Directory.ini.
13019 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
13020 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall.
13020 FFIipInput RU Error DB Connect Error The connection character string was not Reinstall.
in [%1] properly registered for the RuErrorDataDB
key in Directory.ini or the RU error
information database did not exist.
13021 FFIipInput RU Error Data Get Error in The window number sent from the RU was Ensure that the RU version agrees with the
[%1] not found in the RU error information RU error information database version.
database.
13022 FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
System ID
13022 FFIipInput RU Status DB Connection The connection character string was not Reinstall.
String Get Error in [%1] properly registered for the
RuStatusDataDB key in Directory.ini.
13023 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Patient The patient information contained illegal Correct the patient information setup.
Information Check Error%n information.
Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
13023 FFIipInput RU Status DB Connect The connection character string was not Reinstall.
Error in [%1] properly registered for the RuErrorDataDB
key in Directory.ini or the RU error
information database did not exist.
13024 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image Id_LocalSearch_U.bmp, Place Id_LocalSearch_U.bmp,
Get Error%n Id_LocalSearch_D.bmp, or Id_LocalSearch_D.bmp, and
BMP File [%3] Id_LocalSearch_X.bmp was not found in Id_LocalSearch_X.bmp in the path to the
the path to the folder in which images were folder in which images are positioned.
positioned.
13024 FFIipInput RU Status Data Get Error The window number sent from the RU was Ensure that the RU version agrees with the
in [%1] not found in the RU error information RU error information database version.
database.
13025 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Patient Info Get The patient information database was Repair the patient information database.
Error%n damaged.
Error [%3]%n
RetCode [%4]
13026 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Patient Info Set The patient information to be registered Enter correct patient information or repair
Error%n contained illegal information or the patient the patient information database.
Error [%3]%n information database was damaged.
RetCode [%4]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13027 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Patient Info Not No matching patient information was
Correspond%n found.
RetCode [%3]%n
13027 FFIipInput %1%n%2%n%3%n%4%n Control information No particular remedy needs be taken.
%5%n%6%n%7%0
13030 FFIipInput %1%n%2%n%3%n%4%n The connection character string was not Reinstall.
%5%n%6%n%7%0 properly registered for the
RuStatusDataDB key in Directory.ini.
13031 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Log Output The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Directory Get Error
13032 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): MCR Control The card reader unit was not connected. There are no particular problems except
Initialize Error that the magnetic card reader is not
available.
13033 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): LR button The range was changed by the Service No particular remedy needs be taken.
cannot be concave set Utility.
13034 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): TB button The range was changed by the Service No particular remedy needs be taken.
13035 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): TBLR button The range was changed by the Service No particular remedy needs be taken.
13036 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Rotation The range was changed by the Service No particular remedy needs be taken.
button cannot be concave Utility.
set
13037 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Message The MsgTableName key was not found in Reinstall.
Table Name Get Error the system setup database.
13038 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): StrDB The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Connection String Get Directory.ini.
Error
13039 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): StrDB The connection character string was not Reinstall.
Connect Error properly registered for the LangStrDB key
in Directory.ini.
13040 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): SysDB The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Error
13041 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): SysDB The connection character string was not Reinstall.
Connect Error properly registered for the SysConfigDB
13042 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): ImageDB The ImageDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Connection Character Directory.ini.
String Get Error
13043 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed The connection character string was not Reinstall.
ImageDB Connection properly registered for the ImageDB key
in Directory.ini.
13044 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed The image database was not successfully Reinstall.
ImageDB Open Recordset accessed.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13045 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager
ImageDB Close Recordset accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom
occurs while the SQL service manager is
normally operating, initialize the image
database (the entire image data is then
deleted).
13046 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): ImageDB The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager
Data Get Error accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
Data Set Error accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
Data Delete Error accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
ImageDBFlag Connection accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
ImageDBFlag Close accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
13051 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager
ImageDBFlag Data Set accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom
Error occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
13052 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed The initialization process for menu Reinstall.
MenuDB Initialize database access was not successfully
performed.
13053 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Menu Data Menu information was not successfully Reinstall.
in ImageDB Get Error acquired from the menu database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13054 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Menu Menu parameter information was not Reinstall.
Parameter Data in successfully acquired from the menu
ImageDB Get Error database.
13055 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed The termination process for menu Reinstall.
MenuDB Termination database access was not successfully
performed.
13056 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): NetDB The NetConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Connection Character Directory.ini.
String Get Error
13057 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed The connection character string was not Reinstall.
NetDB Connection properly registered for the NetConfigDB
13058 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): NetDB Data The network setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error
13059 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed New DICOM data was not successfully Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Create New DICOM Data created. initialize the image database.
13060 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Get Error acquired. initialize the image database.
13061 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully set up. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Set Error initialize the image database.
13062 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully deleted. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Delete Error initialize the image database.
13063 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully loaded. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Load Error initialize the image database.
13064 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully saved. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Save Error initialize the image database.
13065 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully freed. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Free Error initialize the image database.
13066 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The IdPadding key was not found in the Reinstall.
Padding Acquisition[Id#] system setup database.
13067 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The ExaminationNoPadding key was not Reinstall.
Padding found in the system setup database.
Acquisition[Exam#]
13068 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The DateFormat key was not found in the Reinstall.
Format Acquisition[Date Of system setup database.
Birth]
13069 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Cannot The requesting department database was Reinstall.
Access Data not found in the path indicated by the
Base[Departmdb] connection character string. The requesting
department table did not exist.
13070 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Displayed The FieldDepartList key was not found in Reinstall.
Item Is Not the system setup database.
Understood[Depart List]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13072 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The DepartDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Connected String Directory.ini.
Acquisition[Depart]
13073 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Cannot The technicians database was not found Reinstall.
Access Data in the path indicated by the connection
Base[Paramedicmdb] character string. The technicians table did
not exist.
13074 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Displayed The FieldParamedicList key was not Reinstall.
Item Is Not found in the system setup database.
Understood[Paramedic List]
13076 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The ParamedicDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Connected String Directory.ini.
Acquisition[Paramedic]
13077 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Window Size Acquisition
13078 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The ExposureListErase key was not Reinstall.
ExposureList Erase found in the system setup database.
13079 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Config The Config key was not found in Reinstall.
Directory Character String Directory.ini.
Get Error
13080 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): The image database was damaged. Check whether the SQL service manager
ImageDBFlag Data Get is normally operating. If the same symptom
Error occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
13081 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): StrDB The character string database was Reinstall.
Message String Get Error damaged.
13082 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): IP- The network setup database was damaged. Restart.
Address(RU) Get Error
13083 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Initialize The system was unstable. Restart.
Timeout <InImg>
13084 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Terminate The system was unstable. Restart.
Error <InImg>
13085 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Terminate The system was unstable. Restart.
Timeout <InImg>
13086 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Input The system was unstable. Restart.
Method Error <InImg>
13087 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Original The system was unstable. Restart.
Image Input Failure
<InImg>
13088 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Image The system was unstable. Restart.
Processing Trouble
<InImg>
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13089 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Menu Read The image database/information file was Reinstall.
Error <IdExposureList> damaged.
13090 FFIdDepartSelect %1 (%2) : Invalid Depart Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Code%n
Code [%3]
13090 FFIdParamedicSelect %1 (%2) : Invalid Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Paramedic Code%n
Code [%3]
13090 FFIdIndividualSelect %1 (%2) : Invalid Directory.ini was damaged. Repair Directory.ini.
Depart/Paramedic Code%n
Code [%3]
13091 FFIdDepartSelect %1 (%2) : Invalid Depart The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Name (SBCS)%n
Name (SBCS) [%3]
13091 FFIdParamedicSelect %1 (%2) : Invalid The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Paramedic Name
(SBCS)%n
Name (SBCS) [%3]
13091 FFIdIndividualSelect %1 (%2) : Invalid The database was damaged. Repair the database.
Depart/Paramedic
Name (SBCS)%n
Name (SBCS) [%3]
13094 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Message The system was unstable. Restart.
Send Error <IpcInfCom>
13096 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Request It is conceivable that there was a problem Check the RU status.
Command Not Executed on the RU side. (Although a command was
<RU> requested, it was not executed.)
13098 FF32LIB FF32lib A WIN32 system An error occurred when calling up the Restart.
library error occurred. WIN32 API.
[%1]%n%2
13098 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Reconnect The line was abnormal. Check the line.
Error <RU>
13098 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : %n A general-use message for the input of If it is referring to an error, follow the
[%3]%n patient information (serves as an error custom message box that opens.
%4%n message and also as information).
%5
13098 FFNetDB FFNetDB A WIN32 system An error occurred when calling up the Restart.
library error occurred. WIN32 API.
[%1]%n%2
13099 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Disconnect The line was abnormal. Check the line.
Error <RU>
13099 FF32LIB FF32lib An unknown error An exception error occurred. Restart.
occurred. [%1]%n%2
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13099 FFNetDB FFNetDB An unknown error An exception error occurred. Restart.
occurred. [%1]%n%2
13100 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The DisplayDataDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Display Group Directory.ini or the connection character
Acquisition[Initialize] string was not properly registered in the
Display Group Acquisition Directory.ini or the connection character
string was not properly registered in the
13101 IdMassOrder [%s] %s (%s) : Failed in The DisplayDataDB key was not found in Reinstall.
frmMassOrder Display Group Acquisition Directory.ini or the connection character
frmMassOrderConfig string was not properly registered in the
Display Menu Directory.ini.
Acquisition[Initialize]
13104 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The menu database was damaged. Reinstall.
Display Menu
Acquisition[Record]
13104 IdMassOrder [%s] %s (%s) : Failed in The menu database was damaged. Reinstall.
frmMassOrder Display Menu
frmMassOrderConfig Acquisition[Record]
13108 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The menu database was damaged. Reinstall.
Exposure Menu Acquisition
13109 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Next Set The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Number Data Get Error
13110 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Next Set The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Number Data Set Error
13111 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): System ID The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Data Get Error
13112 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Auto The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Distribution Data Get Error
13113 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Enable The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Selector Data Get Error
13114 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Auto Menu The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Select Data Get Error
13115 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Next Set The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Number Min Data Get Error
13116 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Next Set The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Number Max Data Get
Error
13120 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The database was not found or the Reinstall.
Getting ID-Online Port# associated key did not exist.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13121 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in ID- The database was not found or the Reinstall.
Online Device Name associated key did not exist.
13122 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): RU Status Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
DB Connection String Get
Error
13123 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The SelectableDirection key was not Reinstall.
selectable direction found in the system setup database or its
value was incorrect.
13124 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The SelectableFormat key was not found Reinstall.
Selectable Image Format in the system setup database or its value
Acquisition was incorrect.
13125 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): FilmMarkDB The FilmMarkDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Error
13126 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): FilmMarkDB The connection character string was not Reinstall.
Connect Error properly registered for the FilmMarkDB
13128 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The LimitFilmCopy key was not found in Reinstall.
Limit Film Copy Acquisition the system setup database or its value was
incorrect.
13131 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The SelectableEdrMode key was not Reinstall.
Selectable EDR Mode found in the system setup database or its
Acquisition value was incorrect.
13132 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The SelectableFunction key was not Reinstall.
Selectable Function found in the system setup database or its
13134 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The SelectableFilingMode key was not Reinstall.
Selectable EDR Mode found in the system setup database or its
13135 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): NetDB Data The connection character string for the Reinstall.
Get Error network setup database was not
successfully acquired or the network setup
database did not exist.
13136 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The EnableDistributionCode key was not Reinstall.
Enable DistributionCode found in the system setup database or its
13137 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The EnableFileString key was not found Reinstall.
Enable FileString in the system setup database or its value
Acquisition was incorrect.
13138 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The EnableFunction key was not found in Reinstall.
Enable Function Acquisition the system setup database or its value was
incorrect.
13157 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Finish Mode The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13158 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): RU Error DB The RuErrorDataDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Error
13159 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): RU Error DB The MsgTableName key was not found in Reinstall.
Table Name Get Error the system setup database.
13160 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Call Error The specified ID was not registered in Reinstall.
[RU Error CUSTOM RuErrorDataDB or the custom message
MESSAGE BOX] box was not successfully called.
13161 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed The program was faulty or the image file Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Display Thumbnail Image was damaged. initialize the image database.
13162 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Ip Size Unit The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
(Inch/Metric) Get Error
13165 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Image Size RU-dependent symptom. Check the RU status.
Code Specify Error
13166 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Pantomo The system setup database was damaged. Repair the system setup database.
Setting Get Error
13167 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): RU Error The RU error database was damaged. Reinstall the RU software.
Info Get Error
13168 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): RU Status The RU status information database was Reinstall the RU software.
Info Get Error damaged.
13177 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Default The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Menu Code Get Error
13178 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Next Multi The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Frame Pair Code Data Get
Error
13179 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Next Multi The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Frame Pair Code Data Set
Error
13180 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Series The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Generation Type Data Get
Error
13181 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Multi Frame The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
UID Information Get Error
13182 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The database did not exist or the Reinstall.
Getting XCON Port# associated key was not found.
13183 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The database did not exist or the Reinstall.
XCON Device Name associated key was not found.
13184 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): MCR Type The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error
13185 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): MCR The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Variation Get Error
13186 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Custom The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Card Use Get Error
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13187 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Font Name The Font key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Get Error registry. characters can be corrupted.
13188 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Font Size The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/ Displayed characters can be corrupted.
Get Error FontSizeM/FontSizeL/FontSizeLL key Reinstall the IIP as necessary.
13189 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Multibyte The Multibyte key was not found in the Reinstall.
Flag Get Error registry.
13190 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The LangStrDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Caption Acquisition[Id#] Directory.ini or the ID 30700 was not
Caption Acquisition[Exam#] Directory.ini or the ID 30701 was not
Caption Acquisition[SBCS Directory.ini or the ID 30702 was not
Patient Name] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[DBCS Directory.ini or the ID 30703 was not
Patient Name] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[Sex] Directory.ini or the ID 30704 was not
Caption Acquisition[Sex M] Directory.ini or the ID 30705 was not
Caption Acquisition[Sex F] Directory.ini or the ID 30706 was not
Caption Acquisition[Sex O] Directory.ini or the ID 30707 was not
Caption Acquisition[Date Of Directory.ini or the ID 30708 was not
Birth] registered in the character string database.
13199 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The IdLength key was not found in the Reinstall.
Limitation No system setup database.
Acquisition[Id#]
13200 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The ExaminationNoLength key was not Reinstall.
Limitation No found in the system setup database.
Acquisition[Exam#]
Caption Acquisition[Depart] Directory.ini or the ID 30800 was not
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Caption Directory.ini or the ID 30800 was not
Acquisition[Paramedic] registered in the character string database.
13203 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Image The Bitmap key was not found in Reinstall.
Folder Path Get Error Directory.ini.
13204 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Clear_U.bmp/Id_Clear_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Clear]Button Image Get Id_Clear_ X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
Error path to an image folder or the image format
was illegal.
13205 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Ok_U.bmp/Id_Ok_D.bmp/Id_Ok_X. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Ok]Button Image Get Error bmp was not found in the path to an be displayed normally.
image folder or the image format was
illegal.
13206 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Cancel_U.bmp/Id_Cancel_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Cancel]Button Image Get Id_Cancel_X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
was illegal.
13207 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Plus_U.bmp/Id_Plus_D.bmp/Id_Plus_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Plus]Button Image Get X.bmp was not found in the path to an be displayed normally.
Error image folder or the image format was
illegal.
13208 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Minus_U.bmp/Id_Minus_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Minus]Button Image Get Id_Minus_ X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
was illegal.
13209 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_NextPage_U.bmp/Id_NextPage_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Next Page]Button Image D.bmp/Id _NextPage_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the
13210 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_PrevPage_U.bmp/Id_PrevPage_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Previous Page]Button D.bmp/Id _PrevPage_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
Image Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the
13211 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): RU Watch The line was abnormal. The program was faulty.
Connection Disconnected
13212 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): No ACK The line was abnormal. The program was faulty.
Returned in RU Watch
Connection
13213 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): RU Control The line was abnormal. The program was faulty.
13214 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): No ACK The line was abnormal. The program was faulty.
Returned in RU Control
Connection
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Acquisition[Complete] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[QA Directory.ini or the ID 30201 was not
Unfinished] registered in the character string database.
Acquisition[Interrupt] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[Cancel] Directory.ini or the ID 30203 was not
Caption Acquisition[New Directory.ini or the ID 30500 was not
Study] registered in the character string database.
Acquisition[Registered] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[QA Directory.ini or the ID 30502 was not
Waiting] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[Output Directory.ini or the ID 30503 was not
Waiting] registered in the character string database.
Acquisition[Outputted] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[All] Directory.ini or the ID 30505 was not
Caption Acquisition[Today] Directory.ini or the ID 30506 was not
Image Acquisition[System] Directory.ini or the ID 30507 was not
Acquisition[StudyReseve] registered in the character string database.
Acquisition[StudyStart] registered in the character string database.
13231 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal. Reinstall.
Image Acquisition[Priority]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Image Acquisition[End]
Image Acquisition[Change]
13234 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal. Reinstall.
[New]Button Image Get
Error
[Repeat]Button Image Get
Error
[Again]Button Image Get
Error
[Add]Button Image Get
Error
[Delete]Button Image Get
Error
[Prev]Button Image Get
Error
[Next]Button Image Get
Error
[Monitor Mode]Button
Image Get Error
[QA]Button Image Get Error
[Change]Button Image Get
Error
[AP/PA]Button Image Get
Error
[EDR Mode]Button Image
Get Error
[Film Format]Button Image
Get Error
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
[Detail]Button Image Get
Error
13248 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): The character string database was Reinstall.
[New]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[Repeat]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[Again]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[Add]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[Delete]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[Prev]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[Next]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[Monitor Mode]Button damaged.
ToolTipText Get Error
[QA]Button ToolTipText Get damaged.
Error
[Change]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[AP/PA]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
[EDR Mode]Button damaged.
[Film Format]Button damaged.
[Detail]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Image Acquisition[New]
13263 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_NormalImage_U.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
Image Acquisition[Normal] Id_NormalImage_ D.bmp/ be displayed normally.
Id_NormalImage_X.bmp was not found in
the path to an image folder or the image
format was illegal.
13264 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_LR_Reverse_U.bmp/Id_LR_Reverse_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
Image Acquisition[LR] D.bmp/Id_LR_Reverse_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
13265 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_TB_Reverse_U.bmp/Id_TB_Reverse_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
Image Acquisition[TB] D.bmp/Id_TB_Reverse_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
13266 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Rotation180_U.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
Image Acquisition[TB LR] Id_Rotation180_D.bmp/ be displayed normally.
Id_Rotation180_X.bmp was not found in
the path to an image folder or the image
format was illegal.
13267 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Rotation90_U.bmp/Id_Rotation90_D. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
Image Acquisition[Rotation] bmp/ Id_Rotation90_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
13268 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Single_U.bmp/Id_Single_D.bmp/Id_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
Image Acquisition[Single] Single_X.bmp was not found in the path be displayed normally.
to an image folder or the image format was
illegal.
13269 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Twin_U.bmp/Id_Twin_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
Image Acquisition[Twin] Id_Twin_ X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
was illegal.
13270 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): An Illegal The film mark database was damaged. Reinstall.
Film Mark Character Was
Detected
Caption Acquisition[FIX] Directory.ini or the ID 33502 was not
Caption Acquisition[Skfix] Directory.ini or the ID 33503 was not
Caption Acquisition[SEMI- Directory.ini or the ID 33504 was not
X] registered in the character string database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Caption Acquisition Directory.ini or the ID 33505 was not
[DensityAverage] registered in the character string database.
13275 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Utility_U.bmp/Id_Utility_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Utility]Button Image Get Id_Utility_ X.bmp was not found in the be displayed nor
Error path to an image folder or the image format mally.
was illegal.
Caption Acquisition[Alarm Directory.ini or the ID 32700 was not
Stop] registered in the character string database.
13277 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The character string database was Reinstall.
Caption Acquisition[Exit] damaged.
Caption Acquisition[User damaged.
Utility]
Caption Acquisition[List damaged.
Setting]
Caption damaged.
Acquisition[Version]
Caption damaged.
Acquisition[CANCEL]
[Clear]Button Image Get
Error
[Clear]Button ToolTipText damaged.
Get Error
Acquisition[CANCEL] registered in the character string database.
Caption Acquisition[DUST] Directory.ini or the ID 35001 was not
13286 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Tooltip Text The character string database was Reinstall.
Get Error damaged.
Caption damaged.
Acquisition[TitleBar]
Caption Acquisition[Option] damaged.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13289 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Version Info The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error
13290 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Option List The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error
13291 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_RuProcess_I.bmp was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Cassette Acceptable] path to an image folder or the image format be displayed normally.
Image Get Error was illegal.
13292 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_RuProcessN_I.bmp was not found in Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Cassette Unacceptable] the path to an image folder or the image be displayed normally.
Image Get Error format was illegal.
[Miss]Image Get Error
13294 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_ApPa_U.bmp/Id_ApPa_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Image Style]Button Image Id_ ApPa_ X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
Get Error path to an image folder or the image format
was illegal.
13295 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Edr_U.bmp/Id_Edr_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[EDR]Button Image Get Id_Edr_ X.bmp was not found in the path be displayed normally.
Error to an image folder or the image format was
illegal.
13296 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_Edr_U.bmp/Id_Edr_D.bmp/Id_Edr_X. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Function]Button Image Get bmp was not found in the path to an be displayed normally.
Error image folder or the image format was
illegal.
13297 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilmCount_U.bmp/Id_FilmCount_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Film Count]Button Image D.bmp/Id_FilmCount_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the
13298 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_IpSize_U.bmp/Id_IpSize_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Ip Size]Button Image Get Id_ IpSize_X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
was illegal.
13299 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilmFormat_U.bmp/Id_FilmFormat_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Image Format]Button D.bmp/Id_FilmFormat_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
Image Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the
13300 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilingMode_U.bmp/Id_FilingMode_ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Filing]Button Image Get D.bmp/Id_FilingMode_X.bmp was not be displayed normally.
Error found in the path to an image folder or the
13301 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilmMark_U.bmp/Id_FilmMark_D.bmp Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Film Mark]Button Image /Id_ FilmMark_X.bmp was not found in be displayed normally.
Get Error the path to an image folder or the image
format was illegal.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13302 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_DistributionCode_U.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[Distribution Code]Button Id_DistributionCode_D.bmp/ be displayed normally.
Image Get Error Id_DistributionCode_ X.bmp was not
13303 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Id_CsCs_U.bmp/Id_CsCs_D.bmp/ Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot
[CSSS]Button Image Get Id_CsCs_ X.bmp was not found in the be displayed normally.
was illegal.
13304 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Image Data The line was abnormal. Check the line.
13309 FFIipInput [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The patient information contained an illegal Ensure that the patient information does
Patient Information character string. not contain any illegal character string.
13345 FFIdDepartSelect %1 (%2) : Database Data The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
13345 FFIdFilmMark %1 (%2) : Database Data The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
13345 FFIdMcrControl IdMcrControl The database was faulty. Reinstall.
(threadMcrRead) :
Database Data Get Error
13345 FFIdParamedicSelect %1 (%2) : Database Data The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
13345 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Database Data The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
13345 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Database Data The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
13345 FFIdIndividualSelect %1 (%2) : Database Data The database was damaged. Repair the database.
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13345 IdMassOrder %1 (%2) : Database Data The database was damaged. Reinstall.
frmMassOrder Get Error%n
frmMassOrderConfig Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
13346 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Patient The patient information contained illegal Correct the patient information setup.
Information Check Error%n information.
Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
13346 IdMassOrder %1 (%2) : Patient The patient information contained illegal Correct the patient information setup.
frmMassOrder Information Check Error%n information.
frmMassOrderConfig Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
13347 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Caption Get The character string database was Reinstall.
Error%n damaged.
CaptionId [%3]
13347 IdMassOrder %1 (%2) : Caption Get The character string database was Reinstall.
frmMassOrder Error%n damaged.
frmMassOrderConfig CaptionId [%3]
13348 FFIdDepartSelect %1 (%2) : Registry Data The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
13348 FFIdFilmMark %1 (%2) : Registry Data The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
13348 FFIdMenuChange %1 (%2) : Registry Data The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
13348 FFIdParamedicSelect %1 (%2) : Registry Data The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
13348 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Registry Data The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
13348 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Registry Data The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
13348 FFIdIndividualSelect %1 (%2) : Registry Data The registry was damaged. Repair the registry.
Get Error%n
13348 IdMassOrder %1 (%2) : Registry The registry was damaged. Reinstall.
frmMassOrder Data Get Error%n
frmMassOrderConfig Value [%3]
13349 FFIdDepartSelect %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Error%n
Key [%3]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13349 FFIdFilmMark %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Error%n
Key [%3]
13349 FFIdMenuChange %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Error%n
Key [%3]
13349 FFIdParamedicSelect %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Error%n
Key [%3]
13349 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Error%n
Key [%3]
13349 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
Error%n
Key [%3]
13349 FFIdIndividualSelect %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Directory.ini was damaged. Repair Directory.ini.
Error%n
Key [%3]
13349 IdMassOrder %1 (%2) : INI File Directory.ini was damaged. Reinstall.
frmMassOrder Data Get Error%n
frmMassOrderConfig Key [%3]
13350 FFIdFilmMark %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image The bmp file path or bmp file was Reinstall.
Get Error%n abnormal.
BMP File [%3]
13350 FFIdMenuChange %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image The bmp file path or bmp file was Reinstall.
BMP File [%3]
13350 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image The bmp file path or bmp file was Reinstall.
BMP File [%3]
13350 IdMassOrder %1 (%2) : Bitmap The bmp file path or bmp file was Reinstall.
frmMassOrder Image Get Error%n abnormal.
frmMassOrderConfig BMP File [%3]
13352 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Dicom MWM & The DICOM MWM & PPS option was not Install the DICOM MWM & PPS option.
PPS Option Not Install installed.
13353 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Dicom MWM The DICOM MWM option was not installed. Install the DICOM MWM option.
Option Not Install
13362 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Not Entry Host The host name for the local enclosure was With the service utility, register the host
Name not successfully acquired. information about the PPS local enclosure.
13370 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : PPS Request The equipment connection was faulty or Retry.
Failure [IN PROGRESS] the remote equipment power was OFF.
Failure [COMPLETED] the remote equipment power was OFF.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Failure [DISCONTINUED] the remote equipment power was OFF.
13382 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Study List Retry.
Refresh Exception%nError
[%3]
13386 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in data The serial cable was broken or the Reinstall.
reception%n[Online Time connected equipment did not respond.
Out]
13389 FFIdDepartSelect %1 (%2) : Database The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
13389 FFIdFilmMark %1 (%2) : Database The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
13389 FFIdParamedicSelect %1 (%2) : Database The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
13389 FFIdPatInfoInput %1 (%2) : Database The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
13389 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Database The database was damaged. Reinstall.
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%
13389 FFIdIndividualSelect %1 (%2) : Database The database was damaged. Repair the database.
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
13392 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : BCR Control The barcode reader was not connected. Connect the barcode reader.
Initialize Error
13420 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Menu A problem occurred in the 550X unit when Check the 550X unit.
Clear.%nInternal Error in a cleared menu was reported.
Builtin [%3]
13421 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Menu Clear A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Command Time out [%3] did not respond to a report about a cleared etc.).
menu.
13423 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Check the 550X unit.
Shelter.%nFatal Error [%3] the IP evacuation sequence.
13424 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Check the 550X unit. Solve the problem
Shelter.%nIntervention the IP evacuation sequence. with a UTL or the like.
Error in Builtin [%3]
Shelter.%nInternal Error in the IP evacuation sequence.
Builtin [%3]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13426 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Ip Shelter A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Command Time out [%3] did not respond to an IP evacuation etc.).
request.
13428 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Menu A line abnormality was encountered. Check the line.
Fixed.%nConnection Error
to Builtin [%3]
13429 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Menu A problem occurred in the 550X unit when Check the 550X unit.
Fixed.%nInternal Error in a finalized menu was reported.
Builtin [%3]
13430 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Menu Fixed A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Command Time out [%3] did not respond to a report about a etc.).
finalized menu.
13432 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A line abnormality was encountered. Check the line.
Size%nConnection Error to
Builtin [%3]
13435 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit when Check the 550X unit.
Size.%nInternal Error in a size notification request was issued.
Builtin [%3]
13436 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Ip Size A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Command Time out [%3] did not respond to a size notification etc.).
request.
Set.%nFatal Error [%3] the IP setup sequence.
13439 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Check the 550X unit. Solve the problem
Set.%nIntervention Error in the IP setup sequence. with a UTL or the like.
Builtin [%3]
Set.%nInternal Error in the IP setup sequence.
Builtin [%3]
13441 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Ip Set Command A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Time out [%3] did not respond to an IP setup request. etc.).
13442 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Ip Delete A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Command Time out [%3] did not issue an IP deletion request. etc.).
13443 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Cannot Change An attempt was made to change the Change the information after completion of
Patient Info patient information during an image input image input.
EditMode [%3] sequence (patient information change
button: inactive).
13444 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Cannot End An attempt was made to terminate a study Terminate the study after completion of
Examination during an image input sequence (study image input.
ExamEndMode [%3] end button: inactive).
13447 FFIipInput %1 : IipInput.exe [Starts] IipInput.exe is started (information).
13448 FFIipInput %1 : IipInput.exe [Normal IipInput.exe is terminated (information).
Termination]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13449 FFIipInput %1 : IipInput.exe [Forced IipInput.exe is terminated (information).
Termination]
13451 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Get Ip Line error. Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Information etc.).
Response.%nConnection
Error to Builtin [%3]
13452 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Get Ip A timeout occurred when an attempt was Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
Information Response Time made to respond to an ID information etc.).
out [%3] request from the 550X unit.
13457 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Image This error occurs if the image processing
Processing Information parameter file does not exist.
<InImg>
13458 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in Setup error. Change IIP's SysConfig setup or RU's
Connection Between connection style.
Reader and
Console.%nIIP[%3]%nRU
[-%4]
13459 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Wait Timeout for The XCON shot result reception timeout Review the XCON shot result reception
X-Cont Shot Result value for built-in type exposures was found timeout value for built-in type exposures.
improper.
13462 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Ordering The exposure menu received as the Register the exposure menu with the user
Exposure Menu Not Entry ordering information was not registered. utility.
[%3]
13470 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Exposure Menu The exposure menu received as the Register the exposure menu with the user
Register Error. ordering information was not registered. utility.
13471 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : All Exposure The exposure menu received as the Register the exposure menu with the user
Menu Register Error. ordering information was not registered. utility.
13472 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Selected Menu The exposure process for the selected Select a menu for which an exposure
is Done. exposure menu was already performed. process has not been performed.
XCON Result Information is The result data received from the XCON
annulled. [%3] will be discarded.
13473 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Menu is not No exposure menu was selected. The Select a menu for which an exposure
Selected. result data received from the XCON will be process has not been performed.
XCON Result Information is discarded.
annulled. [%3]
13474 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Exceeded the The XCON parameter was improperly set. Reregister the XCON parameter with the
Limitation Value of XCON user utility.
Exposure Data. [%3 = %4]
13475 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in The patient exposure order information
Ordering Data.[RIS] sent from the RIS was abnormal.
13477 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Exposure Menu The exposure menu specified by the Register the exposure menu with the user
Register Error. received ordering information was not utility.
registered.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13478 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : All Exposure The exposure menu specified by the Register the exposure menu with the user
Menu Register Error. received ordering information was not utility.
registered.
13479 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in The order exposure study termination Check the RIS settings.
Examination End signal was received from the RIS although
Command.[Ris] an order exposure was not received.
13480 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in The problem is attributable to a Check the equipment and cables.
Communication with RIS. disconnected line or invalid parameter.
[%3]%n[%4]
13483 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Menu is not An ID acquisition request was received Make a menu selection and then press the
Selected. from built-in type equipment although no OK button on the built-in type Console.
Failed in Getting ID exposure menu was selected.
Information
13484 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in the Inappropriate installation. Reinstall the system to secure matching
System Start. between DX option and menu database.
[Error: OpDcmStandardDx
or MenuData.mdb]
13489 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Patient Info Set Patient information to be registered Enter correct patient information or repair
Error%n included illegal information items or patient patient information database.
Error [%3]%n information database was damaged.
RetCode [%4]
13490 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : UserName Illegal information was input as the Call upon the user to input a correct
Check Error%n username. username.
Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
13491 FFIipInput User Login [UserName:%1] The user logged in the system.
13492 FFIipInput User Logout The user logged off the system.
[UserName:%1
13493 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : MCR-Data Send Failed in transferring magnetic card Repeat the same operation. If the symptom
Error.[RIS] information to the FRIS. remains uncorrected, check the barcode
information.
13494 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : BCR-Data Send Failed in transferring barcode information Repeat the same operation. If the symptom
Error.[RIS] to the FRIS. remains uncorrected, check the barcode
information.
13495 FFIipInput [%1] Failed in setting MCR Failed in setting magnetic card information. Repeat the same operation. If the symptom
data [%2] remains uncorrected, check the magnetic
card information.
13496 FFIipInput [%1] Failed in setting BCR Failed in setting barcode information. Repeat the same operation. If the symptom
data [%2] remains uncorrected, check the barcode
information.
13497 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : Failed in deleting Program error.
multibyte data
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Get/Set Error%n information was abnormal.
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%4%n
%5
13903 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Data The acquisition/setup key or database was Check the database table/field name.
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
13903 IIPInputEz %1 : Dicom Data Object The DDO acquisition/setup tag was Check the DDO tag.
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
13998 FFIipInput %1 (%2) : [%3] General information event log.
13998 FFIipInput SendToCommPort, COMM The data transmission port is defective. Check connection and settings of the port.
Port Send Error
13998 FFIipInput m_hQUEMutex, Create An exclusive processing error occurred. Restart.
Mutex Error
13998 FFIipInput CommOpen, COMM Port A failure resulted in an attempt to establish Check connection and settings of the port.
Open Error connection to the data transmission port.
13998 FFIipInput CommOpen, COMM Port Settings of the data transmission port are Check settings for connection to the port.
Param Set Error defective.
13998 FFIipInput tControlMain, A failure occurred in an attempt to start the Restart.
_beginthreadex Create main thread.
Error
13998 FFIipInput End_ControlProc, COMM A failure occurred in an attempt to close No particular remedial measures need to
Port Close Error the port. be taken as the CR Console is in process
of shutdown.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13998 FFIipInput MakeSendMessage, The received data is defective. Check the connected cable and device.
Message Code Convert
Error
13998 FFIipInput lFocus, The Focus data received is defective. Check the equipment targeted for
DicomDataFormatError connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput lTubeVoltage, The Tube Voltage data received is Check the equipment targeted for
DicomDataFormatError defective. connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput lExposureTime, The Exposure Time data received is Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput lmAs, The mAs data received is defective. Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput csGrid, The Grid data received is defective. Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput lGlandulardose, The Glandular Dose data received is Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput csFilterMaterial, The Filter Material data received is Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput BodyPartThickness, The Body Part Thickness data received Check the equipment targeted for
DicomDataFormatError is defective. connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput csActualStereoAngle, The Actual Stereo Angle data received is Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput csTubeHeadAngle, The Tube Head Angle data received is Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput lmAsActualValue, The Actual Value data received is Check the equipment targeted for
13998 FFIipInput SetAllMammoXcon, An attempt to generate a DICOM file Restart the CR Console.
DicomDataCreateError resulted in a failure.
13998 FFIipInput SaveResExpParamData, An attempt to store a DICOM file resulted Restart.
DicomFile Save Error in a failure.
13998 FFIipInput SaveResExpParamData, An attempt to obtain information on the Restart.
Not Use Dicom Directory folder targeted for storing a DICOM file
resulted in a failure.
13998 FFIipInput tComRecvMain, Sub Tread A attempt to create a data reception thread Restart.
Create Error resulted in a failure.
13998 FFIipInput MainTH_MainPrc, An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a Restart.
Received from Port [Alloc failure.
Error]
13998 FFIipInput MainTH_MainPrc, The received data is defective. Check the equipment targeted for
Received Buffer Claer connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, QUE Break The received data is defective. Check the equipment targeted for
by Interrupt Data from connection or restart it.
XCON
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, response The received data is defective. Check the equipment targeted for
data Format error connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, response A checksum error was found in the Check the equipment targeted for
data Checksum error received data. connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, Alloc Error An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a Restart.
for Dicom Data failure.
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, Alloc Error An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a Restart.
for XConError failure.
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, XConError The received data is defective. Restart.
data Iregular Format
13998 FFIipInput ACKOperation, No Target Illegal ACK data was received. Nothing particular.
[ACK] Receive
13998 FFIipInput SendToCommPort, Send Data transmission resulted in a failure. Check the equipment targeted for
Error connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput RetryOperation, Retry Send Data retransmission processing resulted in Check the equipment targeted for
Error a failure. connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput RetryOperation, Comm An attempt to retransmit data resulted in a Check the equipment targeted for
Send Retry Over failure. connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput RetryOperation, Response A timeout error occurred while in wait of Check the equipment targeted for
Timeout data reception. connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, The compression force data was abnormal. Nothing particular.
Compression Force data
Format error
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, A compression force data checksum error Nothing particular.
Compression Force data occurred.
Checksum error
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, Delete Deletion of a stored DicomFile resulted in Restart.
Dicom File Error a failure.
13998 FFIipInput RetryOperation, Delete Deletion of a stored DicomFile resulted in Restart.
Dicom File Error a failure.
13998 FFIipInput RespOperation, Send AskParam command transmission failed. Check the equipment targeted for
AskParam Error connection or restart it.
13998 FFIipInput FFGetPASSecurityFuncIDList The PAS security function ID list is empty. Restart
Error nCount=%1
13998 FFIipInput ConfigData Is Illegal Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPDataBit value to 0:7bit or
[DAPDataBit] DAPDataBit value. 1:8bit.
13998 FFIipInput DAPDataBit Nothing Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPDataBit value to 0:7bit or
undetermined DAPDataBit value. 1:8bit.
13998 FFIipInput ConfigData Is Illegal Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPStopBit value to 0:1bit or
[DAPStopBit] DAPStopBit value. 1:1.5bit or 2:2bit.
13998 FFIipInput DAPStopBit Nothing Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPStopBit value to 0:1bit or
undetermined DAPStopBit value. 1:1.5bit or 2:2bit.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13998 FFIipInput ConfigData Is Illegal Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPParity value to 0:none or 1:odd
[DAPParity] DAPParity value. or 2:even.
13998 FFIipInput DAPParity Nothing Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPParity value to 0:none or 1:odd
undetermined DAPParity value. or 2:even.
13998 FFIipInput ConfigData Is Illegal Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPBaudrate value to 0:1200 or
[DAPBaudrate] DAPBaudrate value. 1:2400 or 2:4800.
13998 FFIipInput DAPBaudrate Nothing Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set the DAPBaudrate value to 0:1200 or
undetermined DAPBaudrate value. 1:2400 or 2:4800.
13998 FFIipInput ConfigData Is Illegal Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set 1<=DAPWaitTime>=30.
[DAPWaitTime] DAPWaitTime value.
13998 FFIipInput DAPWaitTime Nothing Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set 1<=DAPWaitTime>=30.
undetermined DAPWaitTime value.
13998 FFIipInput ConfigData Is Illegal Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set 1<=DAPTrialCount>=255.
[DAPTrialCount] DAPTrialCount value.
13998 FFIipInput DAPTrialCount Nothing Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and Set 1<=DAPTrialCount>=255.
undetermined DAPTrialCount value.
13998 FFIipInput COMM Port Send Error A communication port transmission error. Check status of connected devices.
13998 FFIipInput Bad Directory Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
reason said at left.
13998 FFIipInput Not Found INI Key Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput DAPComPort Nothing Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput Not Fonud INI Key Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput Bad DSN Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput ComPortNo Error Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput DAPAddress Nothing Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput ConfigData Is Illegal Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
[DAPAddress] reason said at left.
13998 FFIipInput Not Read MDB Data Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput Create Mutex Error A mutex error occurred. Check to see if the system is up and
running double.
13998 FFIipInput COMM Port Open Error Failure to open a communication port. Check status of connected devices.
13998 FFIipInput COMM Port Param Set Failure to set up communication port Check status of connected devices.
Error parameters.
13998 FFIipInput _beginthreadex Create Failure to create a thread. Check the machine load.
Failed
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13998 FFIipInput COMM Port Close Error Failure to close a communication port. Check status of connected devices.
13998 FFIipInput Sub Thead Create Failed Failure to create a sub-thread. Check the machine load.
13998 FFIipInput Memory Alloc Error Memory allocation failure. Check the memory condition.
13998 FFIipInput Read Buffer Over Flow A read buffer overflow error. Restart. If the same error recurs even after
restarting the system, check the PCs
specification.
13998 FFIipInput Received UnKnown Code An unknown code was received from the Restart. If the same error recurs even after
from CommPort communication port. restarting the system, check the PCs
specification.
13998 FFIipInput Response Timeout A response timeout. Check status of connected devices.
13998 FFIipInput CreateError Failure to create a timer. Restart. If the same error recurs even after
restarting the system, check the PCs
specification.
13998 FFIipInput Database Data Get Error Failed in acquiring the system setup. Restart.
IdSRISConvert Database [%1]
Table [%2]
Key [%3]
13998 FFIipInput TemporaryFolderPath error The folder for created files containing Check the system setup.
IdSRISConvert information of the actual result as well as
for operating them did not exist. SYSCONFIG
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
No100 ReceptComputer Info
File Temporal Folder
13998 FFIipInput GetSharedFolderPath error Failed in acquiring the folder for created Restart.
IdSRISConvert mis-exposure images.
13998 FFIipInput "GetString() : %1 %2 Failed in acquiring the character strings to Restart.
IdSRISConvert connect to the database.
13998 FFIipInput ImageDBCOM.Connect() : Failed in accessing the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
IdSRISConvert %1 %2 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
initialize the image database.
13998 FFIipInput FFFlagDBConnect() : %1 Failed in accessing the image database Restart. If the same symptom frequently
IdSRISConvert %2 flag table. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
13998 FFIipInput ConnectRisConnectDb() : Failed in accessing the ReceptConnectDB. Restart.
IdSRISConvert %1
13998 FFIipInput OpenXMLTagInfo() : %1 Failed in accessing the ResultXMLTagInfo Restart.
IdSRISConvert table.
13998 FFIipInput GetCompName() : %1 Failed in acquiring a host name of the PC. Restart.
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput GetNowTime() : %1 Failed in acquiring the time setting of a PC. Check the PC setup and then restart.
IdSRISConvert
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13998 FFIipInput ExposureResultConvert() : Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the same symptom frequently
IdSRISConvert %1 actual result to be sent to the RIS. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
13998 FFIipInput Nothing StudyInstanceUID The information necessary to send to the Check the information of the actual result.
IdSRISConvert RIS was not found.
13998 FFIipInput SetCandelResult() error : Failed in acquiring the information of the Check the information of the actual result
IdSRISConvert RetCode = %1 actual result to be sent to the RIS. and then restart.
13998 FFIipInput Nothing ProcUID The information necessary to send to the Check the information of the actual result
IdSRISConvert RIS was not found. and then restart.
13998 FFIipInput GetExposureResult error Failed in acquiring the information of the Check the information of the actual result
IdSRISConvert actual result to be sent to the RIS. and then restart.
13998 FFIipInput MoveResultFile() : %1 Failed in outputting the information of the Check the system setup and then restart.
IdSRISConvert actual result to the RIS.
SYSCONFIG
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
No100 ReceptComputer Info
File Temporal Folder
No.307 Simplified Ordeing Report Share
Folder
13998 FFIipInput MoveResultFile() : Not The information of the actual result output Check the information of the actual result
IdSRISConvert Move Files to the RIS did not exist. and then restart.
13998 FFIipInput CheckPatientData error An error occurred while the information of Restart.
IdSRISConvert the actual result to be output to the RIS is
created.
13998 FFIipInput CreateResultXmlFile error An error occurred while the information of Restart.
created.
13998 FFIipInput GetInfoFileURL() Error : Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert %1 actual result to be sent to the RIS. initialize the image database.
13998 FFIipInput FcDicomOperation. Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert LoadDicomObject() Error : actual result to be sent to the RIS. initialize the image database.
%1
13998 FFIipInput GetExposureData() Error : Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert %1 actual result (exposure information) to be initialize the image database.
sent to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput GetSeriesData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert actual result (image information) to be sent initialize the image database.
to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput GetStudyData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert actual result (study information) to be sent initialize the image database.
to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput GetPatientData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert actual result (patient information) to be initialize the image database.
sent to the RIS.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13998 FFIipInput ImageDBCOM. Failed in accessing the image database. Check whether the SQL service manager
IdSRISConvert OpenRecordset() Error :%1 is normally operating. If the same symptom
sql=%2 occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
13998 FFIipInput ImageDBCOM. Failed in accessing the image database. Check whether the SQL service manager
IdSRISConvert CloseRecordset() Error :%1 is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
13998 FFIipInput GetRadiationData() Error : Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart.
IdSRISConvert %1 actual result (information of the actual
exposure result) to be sent to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput FcDicomOperation.%1 The DDO file was damaged. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert Error :%2 initialize the image database.
13998 FFIipInput GetImageData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
IdSRISConvert actual result (image information) to be sent initialize the image database.
to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput CheckData Error: %1 An error occurred while the information of Restart.
created.
13998 FFIipInput Check Error[%1] Failed in accessing the ResultXMLTagInfo Restart.
IdSRISConvert GetXMLTagInfo Error table.
13998 FFIipInput Check Error[%1] : [%2] The information of the actual result Check the information of the actual result.
IdSRISConvert contained information that cannot be sent
to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput CreateResultDOMTree An error occurred while the information of Check the information of the actual result.
IdSRISConvert error the actual result to be output to the RIS is
created.
13998 FFIipInput CreateNodePatient() Error An error occurred while the information of Restart.
IdSRISConvert the actual result to be output to the RIS is * If XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt
created. Valu is recorded in the event log, check
the information of the actual result without
restarting.
13998 FFIipInput CreateNodeStudy() Error An error occurred while the information of Restart.
restarting.
13998 FFIipInput CreateNode() Error An error occurred while the information of Restart.
restarting.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13998 FFIipInput XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 The information necessary to send to the Check the information of the actual result.
IdSRISConvert Not Elemnt Valu RIS was not found.
13998 FFIipInput CreateNodeMenu() Error An error occurred while the information of Restart.
restarting.
13998 FFIipInput CreateNodeImage() Error An error occurred while the information of Restart.
restarting.
13998 FFIipInput CreateNodeRadiation() An error occurred while the information of Restart.
IdSRISConvert Error the actual result to be output to the RIS is * If XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt
restarting.
13998 FFIipInput FFNetDBConnect() :%1 Unable to connect to the database for Check the NetConfig.mdb and then restart.
IdSRISConvert network setup.
13998 FFIipInput FFNetDBClose() :%1 Unable to connect to the database for Check the NetConfig.mdb and then restart.
IdSRISConvert network setup.
13998 FFIipInput Not FileExists : %1 The file did not exist. Check the system setup and then restart.
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput Not FolderExists : %1 The folder did not exist. Check the system setup and then restart.
IdSRISConvert
13998 IdExposerList GetAccessionNumberErr Failed in accessing the image database. Restart and perform a new study.
GetAccesionNumber()
13998 IdOrderingReserve CheckStudyCount.%4 The number of ordered studies which are Reduce the number of studies to be started
received exceeded the upper limit. at once.
13998 IdOrderingReserve SortStudyAndMenuNumber Failed in arranging the study sequence or Check the setting for study/exposure
CreateOneStudyInfo() error exposure sequence. sequence on the ordering equipment (RIS)
side.
13998 IdOrderingReserve Sort Study Number Error. Failed in arranging the study sequence in Check the setting for study sequence in
SortStudyNumber() nLoopCountA:%1 A and B order. study A and B.
nLooppCountB:%2
13998 IdOrderingReserve Sort Menu Number Error. Failed in arranging the menu sequence in Check the setting for menu sequence in
SortMenuNumber() nLoopCountA:%1 A and B order. menu A and B.
nLoopCountB:%2
13998 IdOrderingReserve FcDicomOperation. Failed in setting the order information to Check the system setup and then restart.
SetOrderInfo() SetStrData(&H20000D) the database.
Error : %1
SetOrderInfo() SetStrData(&H7F158) Error the database.
: %1
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
SetOrderInfo() SetStrData(&H181401) the database.
Error : %1
SetOrderInfo() SetStrData(&H7F222) Error the database.
: %1
SetOrderInfo() SetStrData(&201110A0) the database.
Error : %1
SetOrderInfo() SetStrData(&H20100050) the database.
Error : %1
13998 IdOrderingReserve SortStudyAndMenu An unknown error has occurred. Restart.
SortStudyAndMenu Number_Unknown_Error
Number()
13998 IdOrderingReserve UnKnown_Error An unknown error has occurred. Restart.
AddInsert()
13998 IdOrderingReserve wrong value is specified The order information was invalid. Check the system setup and then restart.
AddInsert()
13998 IdOrderingReserve Study Count Max Over : The number of ordered studies which are Reduce the number of studies to be started
CheckStudyCount() Study Count = %1 received exceeded the upper limit. at once.
13998 IdOrderingReserve Study Count Max Over : The number of ordered studies which are Reduce the number of studies to be started
CheckStudyCount() Not Multiple Study received exceeded the upper limit. at once.
13998 IIPInput.exe m_ctlTRISControl. Failed in communicating with the Toshiba Check the system setup and then restart.
m_ctlHome_ SendMessage_M08_RQ() RIS.
OnSelectedTab error%1
13998 IIPInput.exe Study Count Over Error The number of ordered studies which are Reduce the number of studies to be started
m_ctlIdInputRecept_ received exceeded the upper limit. at once.
OnErrorOccurred()
13999 FFIipInput SetWSExposureDistance-010 Failure to set up a value to DDO. Restart.
14000 FFIipInput GetWSExposureDistance-010 Failure to acquire a value from DDO. Restart.
14001 FFIipInput SetCasetteThickness-010 Failure to set up a value to DDO. Restart.
14002 FFIipInput GetCasetteThickness-010 Failure to acquire a value from DDO. Restart.
14003 FFIipInput ProcImageCombine-600 Failure to acquire a value from DDO. Restart.
14004 FFIipInput Initialize-22-04 Failure to initialize the authentication Restart.
dialog.
14006 FFIipInput UserControl_Terminate-1 Failure to close the authentication dialog. Restart.
14900 IIPInputEz %1 : Registry Value Get/Set An acquisition/setup key error. A registry Check the registry key.
Error%n information error.
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
14900 IIPPortable %1 : Registry Value Get/ A registry was damaged. There is no particular problem with
Set Error operations.
[Key] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
14901 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Connection Incorrect Directory.ini file character strings. Check the Directory.ini file. Also check the
Error%n An incorrect database filename. Damaged database filename.
[DB] %2%n database.
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
14901 IIPPortable %1 : Database Connection Failed in accessing the image database. There is no particular problem with
Error operations.
[DB] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
14902 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Data An acquisition/setup key error. A database Check the database table/filed name.
Get/Set Error%n error.
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
14902 IIPPortable %1 : Database Data Get/ Failed in accessing the image database. There is no particular problem with
Set Error operations.
[DB] %2
[Table]%3
[Field]%4
[Exp]%5
14903 IIPInputEz %1 : DDO Data Get/Set A DDO acquisition/setup tag error. Check the DDO tag.
Error%n
[Tag] %2%n
%3%n
%4%n
%5
14903 IIPPortable %1 : DDO Data Get/Set The DDO file was damaged. There is no particular problem with
Error operations.
[Tag] %2
%3
%4
%5
14904 IIPInputEz %1 : Other Error%n Other error.
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
14904 IIPPortable %1: Other Error A general-purpose information event log. There is no particular problem with
[Procedure] %2 operations.
[Error Code]%3
[Exp]%4
%5
19001 FFDICOMCommit SCU Initialization failed. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
[DPM Invoke fail] The system was unstable.
19001 FFDICOMCommit SCU Initialization failed. DPC thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
[DPC Invoke fail] The system was unstable.
19001 FFDICOMCommit SCU Initialization failed. Instance generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
[Insufficient memory] The system was unstable.
19001 FFDICOMEchoSCU Initialization failed. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMEchoSCU Initialization failed. Instance generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMMPPSSCU Initialization failed. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMMPPSSCU Initialization failed. Instance generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMMWLSCU Initialization failed. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMMWLSCU Initialization failed. Instance generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMPrintSCU Initialization failed. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMPrintSCU Initialization failed. Instance generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMStoreSCP Initialization failed. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMStoreSCP Initialization failed. DPC thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
[DPC Invoke fail] The system was unstable.
19001 FFDICOMStoreSCP Initialization failed. Instance generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMStoreSCU Initialization failed. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19001 FFDICOMStoreSCU Initialization failed. Instance generation was unsuccessful. Restart.
19002 FFDICOMCommit SCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[PushPrc] transmitted.
The system was unstable.
19002 FFDICOMCommit SCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[DiscontinueRequest] transmitted.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
19002 FFDICOMEchoSCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[EchoPrc] transmitted.
19002 FFDICOMMPPSSCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[CreatePrc] transmitted.
19002 FFDICOMMPPSSCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[SetPrc] transmitted.
19002 FFDICOMMWLSCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[FindPrc] transmitted.
19002 FFDICOMMWLSCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[CancelPrc] transmitted.
19002 FFDICOMPrintSCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[PrintPrc] transmitted.
[GetPrc] transmitted.
[DiscontinueRequest] transmitted.
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU Method lnvoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[FindPrc] transmitted.
[MovePrc] transmitted.
[CancelPrc] transmitted.
[FreePrc] transmitted.
19002 FFDICOMStoreSCU Method Invoke failed. A message was not successfully Restart.
[StorePrc] transmitted.
19003 FFDICOMCommit SCU File I/O failed. A communication log file was not Although the communication log cannot be
[Communication log file successfully opened. obtained, execution is possible.
name]
19003 FFDICOMEchoSCU File I/O failed. A communication log file was not Although the communication log cannot be
name]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
19003 FFDICOMMPPSSCU File I/O failed. A communication log file was not Although the communication log cannot be
name]
19003 FFDICOMMWLSCU File I/O failed. A communication log file was not Although the communication log cannot be
name]
19003 FFDICOMPrintSCU File I/O failed. A communication log file was not Although the communication log cannot be
name]
19003 FFDICOMStoreSCP File I/O failed. An adequate disk space was not available. Check the available disk space.
[Communication log file
name]
19003 FFDICOMStoreSCP File I/O failed. An image-related file was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom frequently
[Communication log file accessed. The problem is attributable to a occurs, replace the disk.
name] disk.
19003 FFDICOMStoreSCP File I/O failed. A communication log file was not Although the communication log cannot be
name]
19003 FFDICOMStoreSCU File I/O failed. A communication log file was not Although the communication log cannot be
name]
Get/Set Error%n information was abnormal.
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%4%n
%5
19902 IIPInputEz %1 : Database Data The acquisition/setup key or database was Check the database table/field name.
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
19903 IIPInputEz %1 : Dicom Data Object The DDO acquisition/setup tag was Check the DDO tag.
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
20001 FFCtrlProc It failed in CreateProcess. A subprocess was not successfully started Restart. If the same symptom occurs after A subsystem name is
It has the possibility that an up. The system was unstable or a a restart, reinstall. placed in the %1
executive file doesnt exist. necessary executable file was not found. position.
The start treatment cant be
continued. /CtrlProc:
RunProc()
%1
20002 FFCtrlProc Process start information is An illegal parameter was used for process Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
unusual. The start startup. It is conceivable that the contents a restart, reinstall.
treatment cant be of the process information database were
continued. /CtrlProc: wrong.
RunProc()
20003 FFCtrlProc It failed in the completion A process end request message was not Restart.
message preparation successfully created. It is conceivable that
treatment. The treatment the available resource was not adequate
cant be continued. / or that the system was unstable.
CtrlProc:EndProc()
20004 FFCtrlProc It failed in the completion A process end request message was not Restart.
message transmitting successfully transmitted. It is conceivable
treatment. The treatment that the transmission destination process
cant be continued. / was down or that the transmission
CtrlProc:EndProc() destination was wrong.
20005 FFCtrlProc It failed in the switching A window show/hide message was not Restart.
message preparation successfully created. It is conceivable that
treatment. The treatment the available resource was not adequate
cant be continued. / or that the system was unstable.
CtrlProc:ChangeProc()
20006 FFCtrlProc It failed in the switching A window show/hide message was not Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
message transmitting successfully transmitted. It is conceivable a restart, reinstall.
treatment. The treatment that the transmission destination process
cant be continued. / was down or that the transmission
CtrlProc:ChangeProc() destination was wrong.
20007 FFCtrlProc It failed in CreateProcess. A window show/hide message was not Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
It has the possibility that an successfully transmitted. It is conceivable a restart, reinstall.
executive file doesnt exist. that the transmission destination process
The start treatment cant be was down or that the transmission
continued. destination was wrong.
/CtrlProc:SetInitProcEnd()
20102 FFCustomMsgBox [20102] Setup not It is conceivable that the application key Install the application key. Main
completed. was not installed.
20104 FFCustomMsgBox [20104] Failed in securing It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom occurs after Main
system settings. or deleted. a restart, reinstall.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
20104 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the acquisition of The configuration information was not Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the configuration information. successfully acquired. This error occurred perform a reinstallation.
The initialization treatment due to an improper installation or system
cant be continued. / instability.
MainProcess:Main()
20105 FFCustomMsgBox [20105] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom occurs after Main
the process control or deleted. a restart, reinstall.
database.
20105 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the acquisition of Data was not successfully acquired from Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the process information the process information database. perform a reinstallation.
data base. The initialization This error occurred due to an improper
treatment cant be installation or system instability.
continued. /MainProcess:
Main()
20106 FFCustomMsgBox [20106] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom occurs after Main
the message distribution or deleted. a restart, reinstall.
control database.
20106 FFIIPMAIN It failed in opening of the The message database was not Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
message data base. successfully opened. This error occurred perform a reinstallation.
The initialization treatment due to an improper installation or system
cant be continued. / instability.
MainProcess:Main()
20108 FFCustomMsgBox [20108] Failed in process A subprocess was not successfully started View the event logs around to examine the Main
activation. up for some reason. cause.
20108 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the start of the The subprocess was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
sub-process. started. This error occurred due to an perform a reinstallation.
The initialization treatment improper installation or system instability.
cant be continued. /
MainProcess:Main()
20110 FFCustomMsgBox [20110] Failed in The subprocess was not successfully Check for error messages and warnings Main
initialization processing. started. It is conceivable that the system issued before the occurrence of this error
was unstable. This error may also occur as and then take a remedial action.
a consequence of the occurrence of Or, restart. If the same symptom recurs,
another error. perform a reinstallation.
20110 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the start of the The subprocess was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
sub-process. started. This error occurred due to an perform a reinstallation.
The initialization treatment improper installation or system instability.
cant be continued.
/MainProcess:
m_ProcessControl_
OnRunProcComplete()
20111 The MAC address could not be acquired. Reinstall the network driver (delete it and
then reinstall). Or, manually acquire the
MAC address with the Service Utilitys
MAC address acquisition function.
20118 FFCustomMsgBox [20118] Failed in process An error occurred for some reason during No particular remedy needs be taken. Main
termination. subprocess end processing.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
20118 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the completion of The subprocess was not successfully Restart.
the sub-process. terminated. The system was unstable.
/MainProcess:
ProcessEndRequirement()
20124 FFCustomMsgBox [20124] Failed in process A subprocess was not successfully View the event logs around to examine the Main
switchover. controlled for some reason. cause.
20124 FFIIPMAIN It failed in switching of the A subprocess changeover was not Restart.
process. /MainProcess: successfully effected. The target
xxxxx subprocess was not active or the system
was unstable.
21001 FFCustomMsgBox [21001] Failed in The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager List
connecting to the image an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
21002 FFCustomMsgBox [21002] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager List
the image database. an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
21003 FFCustomMsgBox [21003] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager List
information from the image an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
21004 FFCustomMsgBox [21004] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager List
deleted).
21005 FFCustomMsgBox [21005] Failed in setting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager List
information to the image an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
21006 FFCustomMsgBox [21006] Failed in deleting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager List
the study information. an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
21007 FFCustomMsgBox [21007] Failed in It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
connecting to the system damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
21008 FFCustomMsgBox [21008] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
the system setting damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
21009 FFCustomMsgBox [21009] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
information from the system damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
21010 FFCustomMsgBox [21010] Failed in It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
connecting to the character damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
21011 FFCustomMsgBox [21011] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
the character database. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
information from the damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
character database.
21013 FFCustomMsgBox [21013] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
the definition file. or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
21014 FFCustomMsgBox [21014] Failed in opening It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
the registry information. information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
21015 FFCustomMsgBox [21015] Failed in retrieving It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
21016 FFCustomMsgBox [21016] Failed in writing the It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
registry information. information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
21017 FFCustomMsgBox [21017] Failed in closing It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
21018 FFCustomMsgBox [21018] Failed in receiving The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
message. perform a reinstallation.
21019 FFCustomMsgBox [21019] Failed in canceling The selected image was being output or No particular response is required. List
the output processing. already deleted.
21020 FFCustomMsgBox [21020] Failed in output. The selected image was being output or No particular response is required. List
already deleted.
21021 FFCustomMsgBox [21021] Failed in receiving The system was unstable. No particular response is required. List
the message.
21022 FFCustomMsgBox [21022] Failed in initializing The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
process for message perform a reinstallation.
communication.
21023 FFCustomMsgBox [21023] Failed in The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
terminating process for perform a reinstallation.
message communication.
information from the host damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
21025 FFCustomMsgBox [21025] Failed in editing the The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
host setting database. perform a reinstallation.
21030 FFCustomMsgBox [21030] Failed in study Connection equipment was not operative Check the connected equipment or List
start. or the network was unstable. network.
21031 FFCustomMsgBox [21031] Failed in QA start. Connection equipment was not operative Check the connected equipment or List
or the network was unstable. network.
re-start. or the network was unstable. network.
21033 FFCustomMsgBox [21033] Failed in obtaining Connection equipment was not operative Check the connected equipment or List
study information from host or the network was unstable. network.
%s.
21034 FFCustomMsgBox [21034] Failed in locking Connection equipment was not operative Check the connected equipment or List
the study. or the network was unstable. network.
completion processing. or the network was unstable. network.
21036 FFCustomMsgBox [21036] The target study Connection equipment was not operative Check the connected equipment or List
exists but is not displayed or the network was unstable. network.
on the list.
21037 FFCustomMsgBox [21037] The target study The specified study may have been No particular measures need to be taken. List
could not be found. deleted.
21038 FFCustomMsgBox [21038] The input format The input format was incorrect. No particular measures need to be taken. List
for date is wrong.
21039 FFCustomMsgBox [21039] The input format The input format was incorrect. No particular measures need to be taken. List
for time is wrong.
21040 FFCustomMsgBox [21040] Searched word is The input word was incorrect. No particular measures need to be taken. List
illegal.
21041 FFCustomMsgBox [21041] Multiple target Two or more relevant studies existed. No particular measures need to be taken. List
studies exist. The study
cannot be started.
21051 FFCustomMsgBox [21051] An unknown study - Software version A06 or earlier was used - Upgrade the software to version A07 or
was received from the RIS. for MWM connection. later.
- Illegal data was contained in the study - Check the RIS side setup information and
information received from the RIS. the like.
21052 FFMWMHelper [MWMHelper]%1 This is an information log. There is no particular problem with
operations.
21053 FFMWMHelper [MWMHelper]%1 A warning condition is encountered. There is no particular problem with
For details, refer to the contents of the operations.
event log.
21054 FFMWMHelper [MWMHelper]%1 An error occurred. Restart.
A study received by means of MWM didnt
include StudyInstanceUID (0020,000D).
Request the MWM Server to send
StudyInstanceUID.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
21101 FFCustomMsgBox [21101] An error of The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
unknown cause occurred. perform a reinstallation.
21102 FFCustomMsgBox [21102] Failed in obtaining A specified study has already been No particular response is required. List
study information. deleted.
21103 FFCustomMsgBox [21103] Unable to specify a Destination for move was specified No particular response is required. List
target destination for move. incorrectly.
21104 FFCustomMsgBox [21104] Unable to specify a Destination for move was specified No particular response is required. List
target destination for move. incorrectly.
21105 FFCustomMsgBox [21105] Unable to move an Destination for move was specified No particular response is required. List
image. incorrectly.
21106 FFCustomMsgBox [21106] A study information The study information included illegal data. Check study data setting. List
display error occurred.
21129 FFCustomMsgBox [21129] The hard disk was - The free hard disk space was insufficient. - Delete unnecessary images. If any Main
full. - The shuttering process was used with images are left without being output,
software version A07 or earlier. Or, a output them.
forced termination procedure was - Upgrade the software to version A08 or
performed during a startup or freeze later and then initialize the image
(when version A07 or earlier was used). database.
21202 FFCustomMsgBox [21202] Initialization has The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
not been completed. perform a reinstallation.
21203 FFCustomMsgBox [21203] Radiographer It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
information database is damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
abnormal.
21204 FFCustomMsgBox [21204] Failed in obtaining The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
the registry information. perform a reinstallation.
21205 FFCustomMsgBox [21205] Failed in setting The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
registry values. perform a reinstallation.
21206 FFCustomMsgBox [21206] Failed in clearing a The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
displayed image. perform a reinstallation.
21207 FFCustomMsgBox [21207] Failed in Connection equipment was not operative Check other connected equipment or List
connecting to the database. or the network was unstable. network.
21208 FFCustomMsgBox [21208] Failed in Connection equipment was not operative Check other connected equipment or List
connecting to the database. or the network was unstable. network.
21209 FFCustomMsgBox [21209] Failed in setting the The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
study information sharing perform a reinstallation.
host.
the study information from damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
21211 FFCustomMsgBox [21211] An error of It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
unknown cause occurred in damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
obtaining radiographer
information.
Study information cannot
be obtained.
21214 FFCustomMsgBox [21214] Failed in starting The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
remote search/acquisition perform a reinstallation.
processing.
22100 FFIIPListMoveImage Warning. A warning was issued. For details, see the There is no particular problem with
%1 contents of the event log. operations.
22103 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the acquisition of The version information was not Reinstall.
the configuration information. successfully acquired. It is conceivable that
The initialization treatment the Version.env file did not exist in the
cant be continued. / specified directory or that the contents of
MainProcess:Main() the file were damaged.
22128 FFIIPMAIN An error occurred in logfile A log file backup was not successfully Reinstall. (Although there are no
backup treatment. / made. It is conceivable that the specified operational problems, various
MainProcess:xxxxx pathname was incorrect. communication logs cannot be saved.)
22200 FFIIPListMoveImage Error. An error occurred. For details, see the Since the process was aborted due to an
%1 contents of the event log. error occurrence, it is conceivable that a
data inconsistency may exist. Verify the
data consistency.
22201 FFIIPListMoveImage Initialize Error. The initialization process failed. Restart.
%1
22201 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n An attempt to obtain the registry Restart.
Failed in obtaining the information failed.
registry information.
22202 FFIIPListMoveImage FFGetString Error. The FFGetString function returned an Restart.
%1 error.
22202 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n An attempt to read the Directory.ini file Make sure that the Directory.ini file is
Failed in reading of the failed. correct and restart.
configuration file (Directory.
ini).
22203 FFIIPListMoveImage DB Connect Error. The database connection was not Restart.
%1 successfully established.
22203 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n The SysConfig.mdb file may have been Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
Failed in accessing the damaged.
system setting database.
22204 FFIIPListMoveImage DB Get Error. Data could not be acquired from the Restart.
% database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
22204 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n The LangStr.mdb file may have been Check the LangStr.mdb file.
Failed in accessing the damaged.
character database.
22205 FFIIPListMoveImage SetDB Error. Data could not be set up for the database. Restart.
%1
22205 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n The SQL server service manager has not Make sure that the SQL server has been
Failed in accessing the been started, because, for example, a started.
image database. necessary file was not installed.
22206 FFIIPListMoveImage Dicom Data Object Get Data could not be acquired from the Dicom Restart.
Error. Data Object.
%1
22206 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n An error occurred in the image processing Restart.
An error occurred in an server.
imageprocessing server.
22207 FFIIPListMoveImage Dicom Data Object Set Data could not be set up for the Dicom Restart.
Error. Data Object.
%1
22207 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n An error occurred in the PDI control library. Restart.
An error occurred in a
PDIcontrol library.
22208 FFIIPListMoveImage Dicom Data Object Set An exception error occurred. Restart.
Error.
%1
22208 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n A error occurred in the DICOM object. Restart.
An error occurred in the
DicomDataObject.
22209 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n%2%n An error occurred in a function that was Restart.
An error occurred in the called up.
called function.
22211 FFPDIWizardCom %1%n An exceptional error occurred. Restart.
An exception error
occurred.
23000 FFMWMStudyList RegCreatekey() returned The RegCreateKey function returned an Restart.
with Error at %1. error.
[%2]
23000 FFStudyList, RegCreatekey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure or
FFOutputList with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted or installation may have been perform reinstallation.
ended abnormally.
23000 FFIIPListCustomize RegCreatekey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure or
with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted or installation may have been perform reinstallation.
ended abnormally.
23000 FFIIPListSearch RegCreatekey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure or
ended abnormally.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23000 FFIIPListMoveImage Information. Information log. There are no operational problems.
%1
23000 FFMWMStudyList Study couldnt be started Failed in starting a study automatically for There are no operational problems.
automatically. %1. any reason.
[%2]
23001 FFMWMStudyList RegOpenkey() returned The RegOpenKey function returned an Restart.
[%2]
23001 FFStudyList, RegOpenkey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure or
FFOutputList with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted or installation may have been perform reinstallation.
ended abnormally.
23001 FFIIPListCustomize RegOpenkey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure or
ended abnormally.
23001 FFIIPListSearch RegOpenkey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure or
ended abnormally.
23001 FFMWMStudyList RegOpenkey() returned Failed in opening the registry (an error Restart.
with Error at %1. occurred with the program or the system
[%2] was unstable).
23001 FFMediaList RegOpenKey()returnedwith The RegOpenKey function returned an Restart.
Error at %1. error.
[%2]
23002 FFMWMStudyList RegClosekey() returned The RegOpenKey function returned an Restart.
[%2]
23002 FFStudyList, RegClosekey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
FFOutputList with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted.
23002 FFIIPListCustomize RegClosekey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted.
23002 FFIIPListSearch RegClosekey() returned The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted.
23002 FFMWMStudyList RegClosekey() returned Failed in closing the registry (an error Restart.
with Error at %1. occurred with the program or the system
[%2] was unstable).
23002 FFMediaList RegCloseKey() returned The RegCloseKey function returned an Restart.
withError at %1. error.
[%2]
23003 FFMWMStudyList RegQueryNumericValue() The RegOpenKey function returned an Restart.
returned with Error at %1. error.
[%2]
23003 FFStudyList, RegQueryNumericValue() The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
FFOutputList returned with Error at granted.
%1.%n[%2]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23003 FFIIPListCustomize RegQueryNumericValue() The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
returned with Error at granted.
%1.%n[%2]
23003 FFIIPListSearch RegQueryNumericValue() The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
%1.%n[%2]
23003 FFMWMStudyList RegQueryNumericValue() Failed in acquiring data from the registry or Restart.
returned with Error at %1. the program may not have been installed
[%2] properly.
23003 FFMediaList RegQueryNumericValue()r The RegQueryNumericValue function Restart.
eturned with Error at %1. returned an error.
[%2]
23004 FFMWMStudyList RegSetNumericValue() The RegOpenKey function returned an Restart.
[%2]
23004 FFStudyList, RegSetNumericValue() The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
FFOutputList returned with Error at granted.
%1.%n[%2]
23004 FFIIPListCustomize RegSetNumericValue() The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
%1.%n[%2]
23004 FFIIPListSearch RegSetNumericValue() The user authority may not have been Use the normal startup procedure.
%1.%n[%2]
23004 FFMWMStudyList RegSetNumericValue() Failed in writing data in the registry (an Restart.
returned with Error at %1. error occurred with the program or the
[%2] system was unstable).
23004 FFMediaList RegSetNumericValue()retu The RegSetNumericValue function Restart.
rned with Error at %1. returned an error.
[%2]
23005 FFIIPListCustomize FFGetString() returned with The problem is attributable to a damaged Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,
Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file. and then restart.
23005 FFIIPListSearch FFGetString() returned with The problem is attributable to a damaged Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,
Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file. and then restart.
23005 FFMWMStudyList FFGetString() returned with The FFGetString function returned an Restart.
Error at %1. [%2] error.
23005 FFMWMStudyList FFGetString() returned with The FFGetString function failed. Perform a reinstallation or restart.
Error at %1. This problem is attributable to an improper
[%2] installation.
23005 FFStudyList, FFGetString() returned with The problem is attributable to a damaged Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,
FFOutputList Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file. and then restart.
23005 FFMediaList FFGetString() returned with The FFGetString function returned an Restart.
Error at %1. error.
[%2]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23006 FFIIPListCustomize FFStrDBConnect() returned The problem is attributable to a damaged Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,
with Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file or missing LangStr.mdb and then restart. Or, check the LangStr.
file. mdb file.
23006 FFIIPListSearch FFStrDBConnect() returned The problem is attributable to a damaged Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,
with Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file or missing LangStr.mdb and then restart. Or, check the LangStr.
file. mdb file.
23006 FFMWMStudyList FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function failed. Perform a reinstallation or restart.
with Error at %1. [%2] The problem is due to an improper
installation or system instability.
23006 FFMWMStudyList FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function returned an Restart.
[%2]
23006 FFStudyList, FFStrDBConnect() returned The problem is attributable to a damaged Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,
FFOutputList with Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file or missing LangStr.mdb and then restart. Or, check the LangStr.
file. mdb file.
23006 FFMediaList FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function returned an Restart.
[%2]
23007 FFIIPListCustomize FFStrDBClose() returned The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. Check the LangStr.mdb file.
with Error at %1.%n[%2]
23007 FFIIPListSearch FFStrDBClose() returned The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. Check the LangStr.mdb file.
with Error at %1.%n[%2]
23007 FFMWMStudyList FFStrDBClose() returned The FFStrDBClose function failed. Restart.
with Error at %1.
[%2]
23007 FFStudyList, FFStrDBClose() returned The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. Check the LangStr.mdb file.
FFOutputList with Error at %1.%n[%2]
23007 FFMediaList FFStrDBClose() returned The FFStrDBClose function returned an Restart.
[%2]
23008 FFIIPListCustomize FFStrDBReadString() The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. Check the LangStr.mdb file.
returned with Error at
%1.%n[%2]
23008 FFIIPListSearch FFStrDBReadString() The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. Check the LangStr.mdb file.
%1.%n[%2]
23008 FFMWMStudyList FFStrDBReadString() The FFStrDBReadString function returned Restart.
returned with Error at %1. an error.
[%2]
23008 FFMWMStudyList FFStrDBReadString() The FFStrDBReadString function failed. Perform a reinstall or restart.
returned with Error at %1. The problem is attributable to an improper
[%2] installation.
23008 FFStudyList, FFStrDBReadString() The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. Check the LangStr.mdb file.
FFOutputList returned with Error at
%1.%n[%2]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23008 FFMediaList FFStrDBReadString() The FFStrDBReadString function returned Restart.
returned with Error at %1. an error.
[%2]
23009 FFIIPListCustomize FFRegGetKeySZ() returned The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure.
with Error at %1.%n[%2] unprivileged user.
23009 FFIIPListSearch FFRegGetKeySZ() returned The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure.
with Error at %1.%n[%2] unprivileged user.
23009 FFMWMStudyList FFRegGetKeySZ() returned The FFRegGetKeySZ function returned an Restart.
[%2]
23009 FFMWMStudyList FFRegGetKeySZ() returned The FFRegGetKeySZ function failed. Perform a reinstall or restart.
with Error at %1. This error is attributable to an improper
[%2] installation.
23009 FFStudyList, FFRegGetKeySZ() returned The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure.
FFOutputList with Error at %1.%n[%2] unprivileged user.
23009 FFMediaList FFRegGetKeySZ() returned The FFRegGetKeySZ function returned an Restart.
[%2]
2300A FFMWMStudyList FFRegGetKeyDWORD() The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function failed. Perform a reinstallation or restart.
returned with Error at %1. This error is attributable to an improper IIP
[%2] installation.
23010 FFIIPListCustomize FFRegGetKeyDWORD() The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure.
returned with Error at unprivileged user.
%1.%n[%2]
23010 FFIIPListSearch FFRegGetKeyDWORD() The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure.
returned with Error at unprivileged user.
%1.%n[%2]
23010 FFMWMStudyList FFRegGetKeyDWORD() The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function Restart.
returned with Error at %1. returned an error.
[%2]
23010 FFStudyList, FFRegGetKeyDWORD() The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure.
FFOutputList returned with Error at unprivileged user.
%1.%n[%2]
23010 FFMediaList FFRegGetKeyDWORD() The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function Restart.
returned with Error at %1. returned an error.
[%2]
23011 FFStudyList, FFSysDBConnect() It is conceivable that the Directory.ini file Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,
FFOutputList returned with Error at was damaged or the Hosts.mdb file did not and then restart. Or, check the SysConfig.
%1.%n[%2] exist. mdb file.
23011 FFIIPListCustomize FFHostDBInitialize() It is conceivable that the Directory.ini file Ensure that the Directory.ini file is correct,
returned with Error at was damaged or the Hosts.mdb file did not and then restart the system or check the
%1.%n[%2] exist. SysConfig.mdb file.
23011 FFMWMStudyList FFHostDBInitialize() FFHostDBInitialize() sent back an error. Restart the system.
%1. [%2]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23011 FFMediaList FFHostDBInitialize() FFHostDBInitialize() returned an error. Restart.
returned with Error at %1.
[%2]
23012 FFStudyList, FFSysDBClose() returned This error is attributable to a damaged Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
FFOutputList with Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file.
23012 FFIIPListCustomize FFHostDBGetQueryHost() It is conceivable that the Hosts.mdb file Check the Hosts.mdb file.
returned with Error at was damaged.
%1.%n[%2]
23012 FFMWMStudyList FFHostDBGetQueryHost() FFHostDBGetQueryHost() sent back an Restart the system.
returned with Error at error.
%1. [%2]
23012 FFMediaList FFHostDBGetQueryHost() FFHostDBGetQueryHost() returned an Restart.
[%2]
23013 FFStudyList, FFSysDBReadszValue() This error is attributable to a damaged Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
FFOutputList returned with Error at Directory.ini file.
%1.%n[%2]
23013 FFIIPListCustomize FFHostDBSetQueryHost() It is conceivable that the Hosts.mdb file Check the Hosts.mdb file.
returned with Error at was damaged.
%1.%n[%2]
23013 FFMWMStudyList FFHostDBSetQueryHost() FFHostDBSetQueryHost() sent back an Restart the system.
returned with Error at error.
%1. [%2]
23013 FFMediaList FFHostDBSetQueryHost() FFHostDBSetQueryHost() returned an Restart.
[%2]
23014 FFStudyList, FFSysDBReadnValue() This error is attributable to a damaged Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
FFOutputList returned with Error at Directory.ini file.
%1.%n[%2]
23014 FFMediaList FFSysDBReadnValue() It is conceivable that the SysConfig.mdb Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
returned with Error at file was damaged.
%1.%n
[%2]
23014 FFMWMStudyList Failed WorkListDB Open It is conceivable that the SQL Server Ensure that the SQL Sever is running.
Recordset at %1.%n Service Manager is not running or
[%2] necessary files are not installed.
23015 FFStudyList, Failed ImageDB The SQL Server Service Manager starts Ensure that the SQL Server is running.
FFOutputList Connection at %1.%n[%2] running or necessary files are not installed.
23015 FFMediaList Failed ImageDB It is conceivable that the SQL Server Ensure that the SQL Server is running.
Connection at %1.%n Service Manager is not running or
23015 FFMWMStudyList Failed WorkListDB Close It is conceivable that the SQL Server Ensure that the SQL Sever is running.
Recordset at %1.%n Service Manager is not running or
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23016 FFStudyList, Failed ImageDB The SQL Server Service Manager starts Ensure that the SQL Server is running.
FFOutputList Disconnection at running or necessary files are not installed.
%1.%n[%2]
23016 FFMWMStudyList Failed ReleasePossession Release of the possessive right failed. Ensure that the SQL Sever is running.
at %1.%n
[%2]
23017 FFStudyList, Failed ImageDB Open The SQL Server Service Manager starts Ensure that the SQL Server is running.
FFOutputList Recordset at %1.%n[%2] running or necessary files are not installed.
23018 FFStudyList, Failed ImageDB Update The SQL Server Service Manager starts Ensure that the SQL Server is running.
23019 FFStudyList, Failed ImageDB Close The SQL Server Service Manager starts Ensure that the SQL Server is running.
23020 FFStudyList Failed Get HostName as Failed in acquiring a host name. Check the network/network settings.
%1.%n[%2] The network may have been set up
incorrectly.
23020 FFMediaList Failed Get HostName as Failed in acquiring a host name. Check the network/network settings.
%1.%n[%2] The network may have been set up
incorrectly.
23021 FFStudyList Failed HostDB Data at Failed in acquiring data from the Hosts. Check the Hosts.mdb file.
%1.%n[%2] mdb file. The database may have been
damaged.
23021 FFMediaList Failed HostDB Data at Failed in acquiring data from the Hosts. Check the Hosts.mdb file.
%1.%n mdb file. The database may have been
[%2] damaged.
23022 FFStudyList Failed GetPossession at Failed in acquiring property. Check the network/equipment.
%1.%n[%2] It is conceivable that any other equipment
has already acquired property, network
disconnected or power not turned ON.
23022 FFStudyList Failed GetPossession at Failed in acquiring property. Check the network/equipment.
%1.%n It is conceivable that any other equipment
[%2] has already acquired property, network
disconnected or power not turned ON.
23023 FFMediaList Error Occurred.%n An error occurred for any reason. Restart.
23023 FFStudyList Failed A failure occurred in file change or delivery Restart the system.
DDOChangeOrDelivery at processing at film division/extension
%1.%n[%2] (12on1) output.
23024 FFStudyList Failed DicomQ/R at A failure occurred when performing DICOM Check the network/network settings, and
%1.%n[%2] Q/R processing. then restart the system as necessary.
23025 FFStudyList FFNetDBConnect() An attempt to establish connection to the Check NetConfig.mdb and restart the
returned with Error at network setup database resulted in a system.
%1.%n [%2] failure.
23026 FFStudyList Failed DicomQ/R Initialize A failure occurred in initialization of DICOM Restart the system.
at %1.%n[%2] Q/R processing.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23027 FFStudyList Failed A failure occurred in file change processing Restart the system.
MultiPrintDDOUpdate at at film division/extension (12on1) output.
%1.%n[%2]
23028 FFStudyList Failed MultiPrintDelivery A failure occurred in delivery processing at Restart the system.
%1.%n[%2] film division/extension (12on1) output.
23029 FFStudyList Failed FFNetDBGet An attempt to acquire data from the Check NetConfig.mdb and restart the
%1.%n[%2] network setup database resulted in a system.
failure.
23031 FFStudyList ctl_ListPatient_ExecutePDI A PDI processing error occurred. Restart.
()() returned with Error at
%1.%n
23099 FFIIPListCustomize An unknown error An unknown error occurred. Restart.
occurred.%n[%1]
23099 FFIIPListSearch An unknown error An unknown error occurred. Restart.
occurred.%n[%1]
23099 FFMWMStudyList An unknown error occurred. An exception error occurred. Restart.
[%1]
23099 FFMWMStudyList An unknown error occurred. An unknown error occurred. This error is Restart.
[%1] attributable to system instability.
23099 FFStudyList, An unknown error An unknown error occurred. Restart.
FFOutputList occurred.%n[%1]
23099 FFMediaList An unknown error occurred. An exception error occurred. Restart.
[%1]
23108 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the start of the A subprocess was not successfully started Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
sub-process. up. It is conceivable that installation was a restart, reinstall.
The initialization treatment not properly completed or that the system
cant be continued. / was unstable.
MainProcess:Main()
23118 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the completion of A subprocess was not successfully ended. Restart.
the sub-process. It is conceivable that the system was
/MainProcess: unstable.
ProcessEndRequirement()
23124 FFIIPMAIN It failed in switching of the Subprocess switching was not successfully Restart.
process. /MainProcess: performed. It is conceivable that the target
xxxxx subprocess was not running or that the
system was unstable.
24001 FFCustomMsgBox [24001] Selected study This dialog box opens for confirmation No particular response is required. List
information will be fully only.
deleted.
24002 FFCustomMsgBox [24002] No items displayed. There were no items to be displayed in the Select at least one display item. List
list.
24003 FFCustomMsgBox [24003] The item width is The maximum display width was exceeded Enter a smaller value. List
too large. by the specified value.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
24004 FFCustomMsgBox [24004] Cancels the This dialog box opens for confirmation List
selected output request. only.
24005 FFCustomMsgBox [24005] The search target No data matched the entered search List
string %S was not found. criteria.
24057 FFCustomMsgBox [24057 ] Unable to receive The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, List
information from the RIS perform a reinstallation.
trigger transmitter.
24062 FFCustomMsgBox [24062] Failed in changing The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, Worklist
the host setting. perform a reinstallation.
25001 FFCustomMsgBox [25001] Failed in Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL Check to see if the SQL service manager Media list
connecting to the media server service manager has not yet been is running properly. If this symptom occurs
database. started. although it is running properly, reinstall the
software because the database is highly
possible to be defective.
25002 FFCustomMsgBox [25002] Failed in accessing Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL Check to see if the SQL service manager Media list
the media database. server service manager has not yet been is running properly. If this symptom occurs
started. although it is running properly, reinstall the
25003 FFCustomMsgBox [25003] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL Check to see if the SQL service manager Media list
information from media. server service manager has not yet been is running properly. If this symptom occurs
started. although it is running properly, reinstall the
25004 FFCustomMsgBox [25004] Failed in accessing The database file is possible to be Restart the system. If the same symptom Media list
the system setup database. defective or has been deleted. recurs, reinstall.
the network setup defective or has been deleted. recurs, reinstall.
database.
the character string defective or has been deleted. recurs, reinstall.
database.
25007 FFCustomMsgBox [25007] Failed in reading Registry information is possible to be Restart the system. If the same symptom Media list
registry information. defective or has been deleted. recurs, reinstall.
25008 FFCustomMsgBox [25008] Failed in writing Registry information is possible to be Restart the system. If the same symptom Media list
25009 FFCustomMsgBox [25009] Failed in closing Registry information is possible to be Restart the system. If the same symptom Media list
25010 FFCustomMsgBox [25010] Failed in accessing The file is possible to be defective or has Restart the system. If the same symptom Media list
the definition file. been deleted. recurs, reinstall.
25011 FFCustomMsgBox [25011] Failed in connecting Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL Check to see if the SQL service manager Media list
to the image database. server service manager has not yet been is running properly. If this symptom occurs
started or the image database not although it is running properly, initialize the
initialized appropriately. image database (in such cases, image
data will be fully deleted.)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
25012 FFCustomMsgBox [25012] Failed in accessing Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL Check to see if the SQL service manager Media list
the image database. server service manager has not yet been is running properly. If this symptom occurs
started or the image database not although it is running properly, initialize the
25013 FFCustomMsgBox [25013] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL Check to see if the SQL service manager Media list
information from the image server service manager has not yet been is running properly. If this symptom occurs
database. started or the image database not although it is running properly, initialize the
25014 FFCustomMsgBox [25014] Failed in setting Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL Check to see if the SQL service manager Media list
information on the image server service manager has not yet been is running properly. If this symptom occurs
database. started or the image database not although it is running properly, initialize the
25015 FFCustomMsgBox [25015] Failed in mounting Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
media. is not ready. undamaged.
25016 FFCustomMsgBox [25016] Failed in Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
unmounting media. is not ready. undamaged.
25017 FFCustomMsgBox [25017] Failed in formatting Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
media. is not ready. undamaged.
25018 FFCustomMsgBox [25018] Failed in performing Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
QA processing. data is damaged. undamaged.
25019 FFCustomMsgBox [25019] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
a study from media. data is damaged. undamaged.
25020 FFCustomMsgBox [25020] Failed in image Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
delivery processing. data is damaged. undamaged.
25021 FFCustomMsgBox [25021] Some of the Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
studies cannot be data is damaged. undamaged.
performed.
25022 FFCustomMsgBox [25022] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
a study from media. data is damaged. undamaged.
25026 FFCustomMsgBox [25026] Output of some Due to the fact, for example, that the media Check to see if the media is inserted or Media list
studies was disabled. data is damaged. undamaged.
29001 FFCustomMsgBox [30507] A communication It is highly probable that the program was List
error with Ascent View faulty.
occurred.
29002 FFCustomMsgBox [40002] A communication It is highly probable that the program was List
error with Ascent View faulty.
occurred.
29010 FFIIPEvtMonitoringCtrl [54625] Power interruption The Win32 API function returned an error. Restart. Worklist
was detected.
29011 FFIIPEvtMonitoringCtrl [54626] No media An exception error occurred. Restart.
management files exist.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
29107 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the preparation The pipe for inter-process communication Restart.
of the pipe. The treatment was not successfully created.
cant be continued. / It is conceivable that the system was
MainProcess:Main() unstable.
29112 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the indication of The routine transition instruction message Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
the routine mode transition. was not successfully issued. a restart, reinstall.
/MainProcess: It is conceivable that the subprocess was
m_ProcessControl not running or that the pipe was not
_OnRunProcComplete() created.
29114 FFIIPMAIN An unusual message was The received message was unusual. Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
received. This message is It is conceivable that the message was not a restart, reinstall.
ignored. registered in the message information
/MainProcess: database or that the system was unstable.
m_ProcessComControl
_OnRecvNotification()
29115 FFIIPMAIN An unusual send cause A message was received from an unknown Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
was received. This send source. It is conceivable that the a restart, reinstall.
cause is ignored. transmission source was not registered in
/MainProcess: the message information database or that
m_ProcessComControl a wrong transmission source was selected.
_OnRecvNotification()
29116 FFIIPMAIN The form of the place of the An unknown transmission destination was Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
transmission isnt right. specified for the received message. a restart, reinstall.
/MainProcess: It is conceivable that the transmission
SendMessage() destination was not registered in the
message information database or that a
wrong transmission destination was
selected.
29117 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the message A message delivery was not successful. Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
delivery. It is conceivable that the subprocess at the a restart, reinstall.
/MainProcess: transmission destination was not running.
SendMessage()
29119 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the process An end notice was not successfully sent to Restart.
completion notice. the subprocess. It is conceivable that the
/MainProcess:ProcessEnd- subprocess was not running or that the
AnswerMessage() system was unstable.
29122 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the unusual An error notice was not successfully sent Restart.
occurrence notice. to the subprocess. It is conceivable that
/MainProcess: the subprocess was not running or that the
ErrorNoticeMessage() system was unstable.
29123 FFIIPMAIN It failed in the pipe close. An inter-process communication pipe was Restart.
/MainProcess: not successfully closed. It is conceivable
EndMainProcess() that the system was unstable.
29125 FFIIPMAIN It failed in close of the The message database was not Restart.
message data base. / successfully closed. It is conceivable that
MainProcess:xxxxx the system was unstable.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
29126 FFIIPMAIN It failed in reading of the Data was not successfully acquired from Reinstall.
registry information. / the registry. It is conceivable that
MainProcess:xxxxx installation was not properly completed.
29127 FFIIPMAIN It failed in writing of the Data was not successfully written into the Restart.
registry information. / registry. It is conceivable that the system
MainProcess:xxxxx was unstable.
29128 FFIIPMAIN Trash Folder is not found. %IipApplication%\Trash cannot be found. Restart. If the same error recurs even after The Trash folder could
restarting the system, reinstall it. not be found.
29129 FFIIPMAIN Tempolary file(s) could not Folder file included in %IipApplication%\ Restart. If the same error recurs even after The Trash folder could
delete. Trash cannot be deleted. restarting the system, reinstall it. not be deleted.
29130 FFCustomMsgBox [29130] The system is now This dialog box opens for confirmation
starting up. only. It appears when the system returns
from a user utility to an application.
29140 IIPMain [29140] It has passed 24 24 hours have passed since the Console Restart.
m_TimerRestart_Timer hours since the Console application started up.
application started up.
30001 FFCustomMsgBox [30001] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the connection characters or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
to the character database.
30002 FFCustomMsgBox [30002] Failed in It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
database.
to the system setting
database.
setting database.
to the image database.
30013 FFCustomMsgBox [30013] Failed in saving It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
listed (worklist) display or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
settings.
30019 FFCustomMsgBox [30019] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the connection characters damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
to the network setting
database.
30027 FFCustomMsgBox [30027] Failed in initializing It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the list (worklist). information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
obtained.
30045 FFCustomMsgBox [30045] IP address on the It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Image Reader not obtained. damaged or improperly set. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
30057 FFCustomMsgBox [30057] Failed in receiving The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the message. perform a reinstallation.
to the Image Reader status
information database.
30105 FFCustomMsgBox [30105] Failed in list The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
initialization (waiting for perform a reinstallation.
study).
QA).
output).
initialization (already perform a reinstallation.
output).
initialization (all). perform a reinstallation.
initialization (today). perform a reinstallation.
30117 FFCustomMsgBox [30117] Failed in updating The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
list (worklist) display. perform a reinstallation.
to the Image Reader
30122 FFCustomMsgBox [30122] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the Image Reader damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
information (IP size series).
information
(Pantomography
processing).
information (Magnetic card
type).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
information (Magnetic card
type).
information (Hospital card
used).
database.
30151 FFCustomMsgBox [30151] Failed in - The connection to the network was not - Connect to the network.
initialization processing. established. - Set a dummy node for THIS HOST (IIP)
- Node setup was not completed for THIS (e.g., DICOM Print).
HOST (IIP) under Network Config. - Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
- The system was unstable. perform a reinstallation.
the pass information (image or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
data folder).
30153 FFCustomMsgBox [30153] The shutdown The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
process resulted in a perform a reinstallation.
failure.
30155 FFCustomMsgBox [30155] Failed in list It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
initialization (waiting for or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
study).
30157 FFCustomMsgBox [30157] Database access The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
was unsuccessful. an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
30200 FFCustomMsgBox [30200] Failed in RIS There may be a problem with the RIS Verify the settings and then restart.
activation. module or RIS setup. If the same symptom recurs, perform a
reinstallation.
30201 FFCustomMsgBox [30201] A communication There may be a problem with the RIS Verify the settings and then restart.
error with RIS occurred. module or RIS setup. If the same symptom recurs, perform a
reinstallation.
30202 FFCustomMsgBox [30202] A communication There may be a problem with the RIS Verify the settings and then restart.
error with RIS occurred. module or RIS setup. If the same symptom recurs, perform a
reinstallation.
30204 FFCustomMsgBox [30204] Because of Failed in installation. Reinstall.
improperly performed
installation processing, the
system cannot be started.
30205 FFCustomMsgBox [30205] Failed in search The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
processing. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
30206 FFCustomMsgBox [30206] Failed in initializing The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
patient-incidental perform a reinstallation.
information.
30213 FFCustomMsgBox [30213] Failed in displaying The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, ID input section
the preview screen. perform a reinstallation.
30507 FFCustomMsgBox [30507] A communication An error occurred in the communication Restart. Communication error
error with Ascent View with Ascent View. with the linkage
occurred. application
31001 FFCustomMsgBox [31001] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the registry information information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
(font name).
(font size).
(multi-byte language
information).
the used language in damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
system setting.
to the character database.
database.
to the system setting
database.
setting database.
31010 FFCustomMsgBox [31010] Failed in The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
connecting to the image an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31011 FFCustomMsgBox [31011] Failed in acquiring - The problem is attributable, for instance, - Check whether the SQL service manager
information from the image to an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
- Software version A07 or earlier was used. normally operating, initialize the image
deleted).
- Upgrade the software to version A08 or
later.
31012 FFCustomMsgBox [31012] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
31013 FFCustomMsgBox [31013] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
the information from the an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
image database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
31014 FFCustomMsgBox [31014] Failed in setting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
information to the image an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
31015 FFCustomMsgBox [31015] Failed in deleting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
image database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
31016 FFCustomMsgBox [31016] Failed in The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
connecting to the flag an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
31017 FFCustomMsgBox [31017] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
the flag database. an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31018 FFCustomMsgBox [31018] Failed in setting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
information to the flag an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
initialization process for damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
menu setting database.
the menu information from damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the menu setting database.
the menu parameter damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
information from the menu
setting database.
terminating the menu damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
to the network setting
database.
connecting to the network damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
the information from the damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
network setting database.
31026 FFCustomMsgBox [31026] Failed in issuing The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the image information. perform a reinstallation.
31027 FFCustomMsgBox [31027] Failed in obtaining The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Use the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting
of CL Service Utility to see if Distribution
Code (ID:141) is checked or not.
If checked, uncheck it.
31028 FFCustomMsgBox [31028] Failed in setting the The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
image information. perform a reinstallation.
31029 FFCustomMsgBox [31029] Failed in deleting The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
31030 FFCustomMsgBox [31030] Failed in reading An image-related file was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom frequently
the image information file. accessed. The problem is attributable to a occurs, replace the disk.
disk.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31031 FFCustomMsgBox [31031] Failed in writing the An image-related file was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom frequently
image information file. accessed. The problem is attributable to a occurs, replace the disk.
disk.
31032 FFCustomMsgBox [31032] Failed in releasing The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the caption information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
(ID#).
(study#).
(patient name).
(Kanji-patient name).
(sex).
(sex: M).
(sex: F).
(sex: O).
(data of birth).
information (ID# input
character limitation).
information (Study # input
character limitation).
information (ID # padding
format).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
information (Study #
padding format).
information (date of birth
format).
31051 FFCustomMsgBox [31051] Invalid character is A 2-byte character, @, or other Make a proper entry.
input in ID #. unacceptable character was contained.
input in Study #. unacceptable character was contained.
input in patient name. unacceptable character was contained.
31054 FFCustomMsgBox [31054] Invalid character is A 1-byte character or other unacceptable Make a proper entry.
input in kanji-patient name. character was contained.
31055 FFCustomMsgBox [31055] Invalid character is A character other than M, F, and O Make a proper entry.
input in sex. was contained.
31056 FFCustomMsgBox [31056] Invalid format for The entry did not agree with a preselected Make a proper entry.
date of birth is input. birth date format.
the requesting department damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
(requesting dep.).
the item information for damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
displaying in the requesting
dep. Selection list.
information.
to the requesting
department database.
the technician information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
31063 FFCustomMsgBox [31063] Failed in caption It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
information (technician). damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the item information for damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
displaying in the technician
selection list.
the technician information. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
to the technician database.
(window size).
31068 FFCustomMsgBox [31068] No patient Nothing was entered in the patient Enter at least the patients sex.
information is input. information input field.
information (succeeded
from exposure menu
reservation list).
31070 FFCustomMsgBox [31070] Multiple studies An attempt was made to start an Start an examination process with one
cannot be executed. examination process with more than one examination item selected.
examination item selected from an
examination waiting list.
31071 FFCustomMsgBox [31071] No list is selected. An attempt was made to start execution Select at least one examination item.
with no examination item selected.
31072 FFCustomMsgBox [31072] Invalid character is An unacceptable character was contained. Make a proper entry.
input for film annotation.
31074 FFCustomMsgBox [31074] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
flag database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is
deleted).
31076 FFCustomMsgBox [31076] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the bitmap file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the button image (Clear damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (OK damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Cancel damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (increment damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the button image damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
(decrement button).
the button image (Next damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
page button).
the button image (previous damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
page button).
character database.
31099 FFCustomMsgBox [31099] An error of It is highly probable that the program was
unknown cause occurred. faulty.
31100 FFCustomMsgBox [31100] The image display It is conceivable that the image data or Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
process resulted in a failure image information file was damaged. perform a reinstallation.
while operating in the
image input subsystem.
the pass information (log or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
saving folder).
31103 FFCustomMsgBox [31103] Failed in calling up The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the patient information. perform a reinstallation.
31105 FFCustomMsgBox [31105] Failed in The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
terminating the image input perform a reinstallation.
subsystem.
terminating the image input perform a reinstallation.
subsystem.
31107 FFCustomMsgBox [31107] Failed in image The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
inputting process in the perform a reinstallation.
image input sub-system.
31110 FFCustomMsgBox [31110] Failed in calling up The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the exposure menu. perform a reinstallation.
31111 FFCustomMsgBox [31111] Failed in study The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
terminating process. perform a reinstallation.
inputting process. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31113 FFCustomMsgBox [31113] Failed in image - Software version A07 or earlier was used. - Upgrade the software to version A08 or
inputting process. - The system was unstable. later.
- Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
perform a reinstallation.
31114 FFCustomMsgBox [31114] Failed in specifying The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the urgent processing. perform a reinstallation.
31116 FFCustomMsgBox [31116] Communication line It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
for monitoring the faulty.
connection status with the
Image Reader(%s) has
broken.
31117 FFCustomMsgBox [31117] No connection It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
monitoring response from faulty.
the Image Reader(%s).
31118 FFCustomMsgBox [31118] Control line with the It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
Image Reader(%s) has faulty.
broken.
31119 FFCustomMsgBox [31119] No command It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
response from the Image faulty.
Reader(%s).
31120 FFCustomMsgBox [31120] Failed in Image It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
Reader status control. faulty.
31121 FFCustomMsgBox [31121] Command It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
requested to the Image faulty.
Reader has not been
executed.
31122 FFCustomMsgBox [31122] Failed in obtaining It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
the information (status) faulty.
from the Image Reader.
the information (machine faulty.
code) from the Image
Reader.
the information (FRUP faulty.
version) from the Image
Reader.
31125 FFCustomMsgBox [31125] Failed in re- It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
connecting with the Image faulty.
Reader.
31126 FFCustomMsgBox [31126] Failed in breaking It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
connection with the Image faulty.
Reader.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
(Study with QA completed).
the caption (only exposure damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
competed).
(Study interrupt button).
(Cancel button).
(Study reception tab).
(waiting for study tab).
(waiting for QA tab).
(Waiting for output tab).
(Already output tab).
(All tab).
(Today tab).
the button image (System damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
(Study reservation button).
(Study start button).
31141 FFCustomMsgBox [31141] Patient information An unacceptable character was contained. Make a proper entry.
is illegal.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the display group data. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the exposure menu perform a reinstallation.
information.
the button image (Urgent damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Study damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
completed button).
the button image (Update damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (New damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Repeat damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Re-shoot damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Add damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Delete damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the button image (Before damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
scroll button).
the button image (After damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
Scroll button).
the button image (Monitor damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
mode button).
the button image (QA damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Change damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Rotation/ damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
Inversion button).
the button image (EDR damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
mode button).
the button image (Image damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
format button).
the button image (Change damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
menu parameter button).
the tool tip (New button). damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the tool tip (Repeat button). damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the tool tip (Re-shoot damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the tool tip (Add button). damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the tool tip (Delete button). damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the tool tip (Before scroll damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the tool tip (After scroll damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the tool tip (Monitor mode damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the tool tip (QA button ). damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the tool tip (Change button). damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the tool tip (Rotation/ damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
Inversion button).
the tool tip (EDR mode damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the tool tip (Image format damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the tool tip (Change menu damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
parameter button).
the registry information (Set information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
No.).
31187 FFCustomMsgBox [31187] Failed in setting the It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
tool tip (Before scroll information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
information (System ID).
information (Auto-
distribution instruction
information).
information (Selector
auto-switchover
information).
information (Menu
auto-sequence
information).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
information (Set No.
minimum value
information).
information (Set No.
maximum value
information).
information (Series
information issuing
method).
31197 FFCustomMsgBox [31197] No matching work The contents of the image file did not Initialize the image database.
ID exists. agree with those of the image database.
31198 FFCustomMsgBox [31198] Failed in distribution The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
process. perform a reinstallation.
31201 FFIIPInImgCtrl Data error. [Detailed error Abnormal data was entered from the RU or Check the RU and the 5000 Series
information 31201 2 items] the 5000 Series equipment. equipment. Perform an image input
process again or restart.
31201 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image sizecode error. Illegal image size code when a request Check the RU and the 5000 Series
was issued for image input. equipment. Perform an image input
31201 FFIIPInImgCtrl InImgReadProc method Illegal image input request method Check the RU and the 5000 Series
parameter error. parameters. equipment. Perform an image input
31201 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Data error.%n[%1] Input data was incorrect. Restart the system.
31202 FFCustomMsgBox [31202] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Check the RU and the 5000 Series
the system setting damaged or deleted. equipment. Perform an image input
information (Patient process again or restart.
information online serial
port No.).
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl Initialize error. [Detailed An abnormality occurred in the initialization Restart the system. If the same symptom
error information 31202 14 process. The common probable causes occurs after a restart, perform a
items] are as follows: reinstallation and initialize the image
database.
Installation was not normally ended.
The parameter file was incorrect.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl Create Instance error. Failed in creating Control Instance. Restart the system. If the same symptom
occurs after a restart, perform a
reinstallation and initialize the image
database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl Directory path get error. Failed in acquiring each directory path Restart the system. If the same symptom
name. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl Thread make error.(Read) Failed in creating image input thread. Restart the system. If the same symptom
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl Thread make error.(Disp) Failed in creating image display thread. Restart the system. If the same symptom
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDR parameter file load Failed in memory loading of the EDR Restart the system. If the same symptom
error. processing parameter file. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image parameter file load Failed in memory loading of the image Restart the system. If the same symptom
error. processing parameter file. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl GetMessage(THREAD_ Failed in acquiring the image input/display Restart the system. If the same symptom
END) error. thread startup completion event. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl DICOM SCP control run Failed in DICOM SCP control startup. Restart the system. If the same symptom
error. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl GetMessage(DICOM_ Failed in acquiring the DICOM SCP control Restart the system. If the same symptom
RUN_COMPLETE) error. startup completion event. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl PostThreadMessage(IMG_ Failed in requesting for terminating image Restart the system. If the same symptom
END_REQ) error. input thread. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl PostThreadMessage(DISP Failed in requesting for terminating image Restart the system. If the same symptom
_END_REQ) error. display thread. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl GetMessage(THREAD_ Failed in acquiring the image input/display Restart the system. If the same symptom
COMPLETE) error. thread termination completion event. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl GetMessage(DICOM_END Failed in acquiring the DICOM SCP control Restart the system. If the same symptom
_COMPLETE) error. termination completion event. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl DICOM SCP control Failed in requesting for terminating DICOM Restart the system. If the same symptom
(EndPrc method) error. SCP control. occurs after a restart, perform a
database.
31202 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Initialize error.%n[%1] Failed in initialization processing. Restart the system.
information (Patient
information online device
name.).
31203 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Method process error.%n An error was detected during method Restart the system.
[%1] processing.
31204 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Windows API access error. The system was unstable. Restart the system.
%n[%1]
31205 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Parameter error.%n[%1] An abnormal parameter was detected. Restart the system.
31206 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Memory access error. System memory was insufficient. Restart the system.
%n[%1]
31207 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Function error.%n[%1] An error was detected during internal Restart the system.
processing.
Image Reader machine perform a reinstallation.
code.
the button image (New damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
31208 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl File access error.%n[%1] The system was unstable. Restart the system.
information (Image rotation/
inversion selectable range).
the button image (frontal damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
image button).
the button image (Left-right damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
invert button).
the button image (Up-side- damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
down invert button).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the button image (180 damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
degree rotation button).
(90 degree rotation button).
information (Image format
selectable range).
the button image (SINGLE damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (TWIN damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
to the film annotation
database.
connecting characters to damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the film annotation
database.
film annotation database.
information (upper limit of
No. of output film).
(CS).
(SS).
31241 FFCustomMsgBox [31241] Failed in creating - Software version A06 or earlier was used - Upgrade the software to version A07 or
thumbnail images with the to enter an image from the 5000 plus later.
image input subsystem. Series. - Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
processing in image input perform a reinstallation.
subsystem.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31243 FFCustomMsgBox [31243] Image format A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
information is illegal. system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no
particular response is required.
31244 FFCustomMsgBox [31244] Annotation A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
31245 FFCustomMsgBox [31245] No. of output film A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
31246 FFCustomMsgBox [31246] Distribution code A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
31247 FFCustomMsgBox [31247] Image reading A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
sensitivity is illegal. system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no
31248 FFCustomMsgBox [31248] Average output A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
density is illegal. system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no
31249 FFCustomMsgBox [31249] EDR mode is A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
illegal. system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no
31250 FFCustomMsgBox [31250] Image filing mode A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
is illegal. system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no
31251 FFCustomMsgBox [31251] Function mode is A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
31252 FFCustomMsgBox [31252] IP logical size A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
31253 FFCustomMsgBox [31253] Contrast shift is A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
31254 FFCustomMsgBox [31254] Sensitivity shift A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
31255 FFCustomMsgBox [31255] There is a A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
discrepancy between system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no
system setting and image particular response is required.
information.
information.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
information.
information.
31259 FFCustomMsgBox [31259] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the image information Delete the associated examination.
the image invert/rotate was damaged. If the same symptom frequently recurs,
information. perform a reinstallation.
31260 FFCustomMsgBox [31260] Failed in setting the A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a
image format information. system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no
31261 FFCustomMsgBox [31261]Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the image information Delete the associated examination.
the image format was damaged. If the same symptom frequently recurs,
information. perform a reinstallation.
31262 FFCustomMsgBox [31262] Film annotation is The registered film mark contained an Correct the film mark setup with a user
illegal. unacceptable character. utility.
(FIX).
(S value).
(SEMI-X).
(Density Ave)
(Density Average).
31270 FFCustomMsgBox [31270] Input value is The entered value contained an Make a proper entry.
illegal. unacceptable character or was out of
range or otherwise abnormal.
information (Function
selectable range).
function information. perform a reinstallation.
No. of output film. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
contrast shift. perform a reinstallation.
sensitivity shift. perform a reinstallation.
EDR mode information. perform a reinstallation.
FIX mode S value. perform a reinstallation.
SEMI-X mode average perform a reinstallation.
output density.
31282 FFCustomMsgBox [31282] Failed in QA The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
starting process. perform a reinstallation.
information (Filing mode
selectable range).
image filing information. perform a reinstallation.
the distribution destination perform a reinstallation.
information.
IP logical size information. perform a reinstallation.
information (Distribution
code change).
information (Film annotation
change).
information (Function
change).
the list display. perform a reinstallation.
31303 FFCustomMsgBox [31303] No list (Waiting for It is highly probable that the program was
study) is selected. faulty.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
QA) is selected. faulty.
output) is selected. faulty.
31306 FFCustomMsgBox [31306] No list (Already It is highly probable that the program was
output) is selected. faulty.
31307 FFCustomMsgBox [31307] No list (All) is It is highly probable that the program was
selected. faulty.
31308 FFCustomMsgBox [31308] No list (Today) is It is highly probable that the program was
selected. faulty.
the list (Waiting for study) perform a reinstallation.
display.
the list (Waiting for QA) perform a reinstallation.
display.
the list (Waiting for output) perform a reinstallation.
display.
the list (Already output) perform a reinstallation.
display.
the list (All) display. perform a reinstallation.
the list (Today) display. perform a reinstallation.
31315 FFCustomMsgBox [31315] No. of selected It is highly probable that the program was
study is illegal. Study faulty.
cannot be started.
31316 FFCustomMsgBox [31316] Failed in study The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
31317 FFCustomMsgBox [31317] No. of selected It is highly probable that the program was
studies is illegal. QA cannot faulty.
be started.
information (Operational
mode after studying).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the button image (Utility damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the patient information. perform a reinstallation.
31323 FFCustomMsgBox [31323] Date of birth could Illegal birth date information was set. Delete the associated examination. If the
not be converted to the same symptom recurs after deletion,
displaying format. perform a reinstallation.
(Stop alarm button).
31329 FFCustomMsgBox [31329] Message from the The RU software version conflicted with Confirm software version and setups on
Image Reader could not be the message file version on the IIP side or the RU side.
displayed. the RU message file was damaged or
otherwise abnormal.
31330 FFCustomMsgBox [31330] Failed in the It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
obtaining the caption damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
information (System
Terminating button).
(User Utility button).
(Study list setting button).
(Version displaying button).
(Cancel button).
the button image (Clear damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the tool tip information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
(Clear button).
31337 FFCustomMsgBox [31337] Failed in displaying The thumbnail image file was damaged, There are no processing problems except
the thumbnail images. deleted, or otherwise abnormal. for the inability to display thumbnail
images. If the same symptom frequently
occurs, initialize the image database.
31339 FFCustomMsgBox [31339] Failed in executing The RU is not ready for performing the Check the RU.
the dust removing process method.
starting method of the
Image Reader.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
(Cancel button).
(Cancel button).
31343 FFCustomMsgBox [31343] Failed in inputting It is conceivable that there was a problem Check the RU and line.
images. with the RU or line.
31344 FFCustomMsgBox [31344] Image size could It is conceivable that there was a problem Check the RU.
not be detected. with the RU.
31346 FFCustomMsgBox [31346] Failed in obtaining The RU software version conflicted with Check the software version and setup on
the Image Reader error the message file version on the IIP side or the RU side.
information. the RU message file was damaged or
otherwise abnormal.
31347 FFCustomMsgBox [31347] Failed in obtaining The RU software version conflicted with Check the software version and setup on
the Image Reader status the message file version on the IIP side or the RU side.
information. the RU message file was damaged or
otherwise abnormal.
31348 FFCustomMsgBox [31348] Failed in thumbnail The thumbnail image file was damaged, There are no processing problems except
image creation process. deleted, or otherwise abnormal. for the inability to display thumbnail
images. If the same symptom frequently
occurs, initialize the image database.
31349 FFCustomMsgBox [31349] Failed in displaying It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart,
the list (Waiting for study). unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation.
the list (Waiting for QA). unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation.
the list (Waiting for output).unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation.
the list (Already output). unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation.
the list (All). unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation.
the list (Today). unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation.
31355 FFCustomMsgBox [31355] Failed in It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart,
customizing the list display. unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation.
information (Default menu
code).
the tool tip text. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
(Title bar).
(Option label).
the version information. or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
31362 FFCustomMsgBox [31362] Option list could It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
not be obtained. information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
(Next multiple frame set
No.).
31364 FFCustomMsgBox [31364] Failed in setting the It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
registry information (Next information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
multi-frame set No.).
information (Series issuing
type).
the multi-frame UID perform a reinstallation.
information.
the cassette insertion damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
enabled image.
the cassette insertion damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
disabled image.
the image icon (Mis- damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
exposure).
the button image (Image damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
style button).
the button image (EDR damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Function damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (No. of damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
output film button).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the button image (IP size damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Film damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
format button).
the button image (Filing damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
the button image (Film damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
annotation button).
(Distribution code button).
the button image (CS/SS damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
button).
information (Serial port No.
for connecting to XCON).
the XCON device name. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
31382 FFCustomMsgBox [31382] Image data line to The line was abnormal. Check the line.
the Image Reader(%s) has
broken.
the caption information. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
31387 FFCustomMsgBox [31387] Failed in reading It is conceivable that the bitmap file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the bit-map file. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the font information. information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
31390 FFCustomMsgBox [31390] The information The entered information or its format was
about a requesting in error.
department was illegal.
31391 FFCustomMsgBox [31391] The information The entered information or its format was
about a paramedic was in error.
illegal.
31392 FFCustomMsgBox [31392] A patient Nothing matched the entered patient Check the patient information.
information search was information.
unsuccessful.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31393 FFCustomMsgBox [31393] Failed in setting up This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check RIS-side status or RIS setup.
connection status with the or RIS setup problem.
RIS.
31394 FFCustomMsgBox [31394] The line connected This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check the RIS status and RIS setup.
to the RIS was faulty. or RIS setup problem.
31400 FFCustomMsgBox [31400]The selected menu This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check the RIS status and RIS setup.
did not exist. or RIS setup problem.
31401 FFCustomMsgBox [31401] Path information It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
(image data folder) or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
acquisition was not
successful.
31402 FFCustomMsgBox [31402] Parameter icon It is conceivable that the bitmap file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
image acquisition was not damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
successful.
31403 FFCustomMsgBox [31403] Caption information It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
acquisition was not damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
successful.
31404 FFCustomMsgBox [31404] Failed in This error is attributable to a problem with Check the connected equipment,
communicating with other the connected equipment or connection connection setup, and others.
connected device. setup.
31405 FFCustomMsgBox [31405] Failed in The connected equipment may be faulty. Check the connected equipment.
evacuating the IP.
31406 FFCustomMsgBox [31406] Failed in setting the The connected equipment may be faulty. Check the connected equipment.
IP.
exposure size.
reference position for
exposure.
31409 FFCustomMsgBox [31409] No response The connected equipment may be faulty. Check the connected equipment.
comes from other
connected device.
31410 FFCustomMsgBox [31410] There is no answer The connected equipment may be faulty. Check the connected equipment.
from the device that ID
information is shared.
31411 FFCustomMsgBox [31411] A Study cant This error is attributable to an improperly Check the menu registration information.
register because the registered menu.
exposure menu registerd in
IDT isn't registered in IIP.
31412 FFCustomMsgBox [31412] An image data line The connected equipment may be faulty. Check the connected equipment.
with the reader is cut off.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31413 FFCustomMsgBox [31413] There are some The connection setup may be improper. Check the connection setup.
inconsistency in the IIP-RU
connection setting of the
system configuration.
31414 FFCustomMsgBox [31414] Failed in obtaining The database file may be damaged or Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the caption information (RIS deleted. perform a reinstallation.
tab).
31415 FFCustomMsgBox [31415] A communication The connected equipment may be faulty. Check the connected equipment.
error with RIS occurred.
31416 FFCustomMsgBox [31416] Some exposure This error is attributable to an improperly Check the settings.
menus couldnt be set menu parameter or other setup failure.
registered.
31417 FFCustomMsgBox [31417] An exposure menu This error is attributable to an improperly Check the settings.
couldnt be registered. set menu parameter or other setup failure.
31418 FFCustomMsgBox [31418] Failed in the The connection setup may be faulty. Check the connection setup.
reference of the reader
device.
31419 FFCustomMsgBox [31419] The exposure The XCON settings (limit values) were There is no practical problem because the
condition values to be sent inconsistent with the exposure condition limit values are transferred to the XCON.
to the X-ray apparatus was preset values for the menus.
over the limit.
31420 FFCustomMsgBox [31420] A failure occurred It is conceivable that the connected Check the connected equipment.
in the communication with equipment may be faulty.
the RIS.
31422 FFCustomMsgBox [31422] Failed in registering The patient information database operation Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the study to the patient was wrong. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
stitching processing. perform a reinstallation.
Ensure that only period is used as a
symbol representing a decimal point for
values to be set in OS Settings - Regional
Options. If any symbol other than a period
is used, correct it appropriately.
For details of how to perform settings, see
the section concerned in RI: Reinstalling
the Software.
For Windows 2000
Defining the character to be
used as a decimal point in
2.1.3 Setting the OS
For Windows XP
Defining the character to be
used as a decimal point in
For Windows Vista
Confirmation of decimal
symbol and digit grouping
symbol (other than Japanese) in
2.3.4 Setting the OS.
For Windows 7
Confirmation of decimal
symbol and digit grouping
symbol (other than Japanese) in
2.4.3 Setting the OS.
31424 FFCustomMsgBox [31424] Failed in saving the The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
exposure result information. perform a reinstallation.
31425 FFCustomMsgBox [31425] Failed in setting Invalid characters were used for the No remedial action is needed because the
actual exposure result performed procedure step description, process will be continuously performed
value. protocol name, or filter type. The radiation with the invalid settings replaced with the
source-to-detector distance or radiation standard ones.
time did not consist of numerals only.
The film output count or film size ID was
out of range.
31426 FFCustomMsgBox [31426] Failed in acquiring Settings may have been corrupted. Restart the system. If the same symptom
coloring information. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
31427 FFCustomMsgBox [31427] Failed in image The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
distribution processing. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
31428 FFCustomMsgBox [31428] Failed in displaying The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
the study information list. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
31429 FFCustomMsgBox [31429] Failed in setting The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
patient information. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31430 FFCustomMsgBox [31430] Failed in acquiring The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
patient information. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
31431 FFCustomMsgBox [31431] Failed in acquiring The bitmap file may have been damaged Restart the system. If the same symptom
image (background). or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
31441 FFCustomMsgBox [31441] Failed in acquiring It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
parameters used for or deleted. It is also conceivable that the perform a reinstallation.
displaying mammography database file was damaged or deleted.
images.
31444 FFCustomMsgBox [31444] Illegal information Polling to the shared folder with the receipt It is conceivable that the content of the
received from the outside. computer resulted in a failure. study received from the receipt computer
does not match the CR Console setting.
Check the connection setting and the
system setting.
31445 FFCustomMsgBox [31445] Illegal information The patient cannot be registered because Check to see that characters prohibited to
received from the outside. of a format error that occurred with the text use on the CR Console are not included in
received from the Fujitsu receipt computer. the transmitted information. Retransmit
then the study from the receipt computer,
as necessary.
31446 FFCustomMsgBox [31446] An error occurred A study transmitted from the receipt Check to see that characters prohibited to
for connection with the computer cannot be registered. use on the CR Console are not included in
equipment. the transmitted information. Retransmit
then the study from the receipt computer,
as necessary.
31456 FFCustomMsgBox [31456] Failed in obtaining The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, ID input section
the caption information or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
(Preview confirmation
message).
31457 FFCustomMsgBox [31457] Failed in obtaining The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, ID input section
the first page of the or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
exposure guidance.
31458 FFCustomMsgBox [31458] Failed in starting The file may have been damaged or Restart. If the same symptom recurs, ID input section
up the exposure guidance. deleted. perform a reinstallation.
31459 FFCustomMsgBox [31459] Failed in initializing The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, ID input section
the exposure guidance. perform a reinstallation.
31460 FFCustomMsgBox [31460] Failed in A connected device may have a problem. Check status of the connected device. ID input section
initialization of dose-area
product meter.
31461 FFCustomMsgBox [31461] Failed in A connected device may have a problem. Check status of the connected device, and ID input section
initialization of dose-area press the Retry button as required.
product meter.
31462 FFCustomMsgBox [31462] Failed in dose A connected device may have a problem. Check status of the connected device. ID input section
acquisition from dose-area
product meter.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
31850 FFCustomMsgBox [31850] Failed in It is conceivable that the connected Check status of the connected equipment.
communicating with X-ray equipment may have a problem or the
equipment. network may be unstable.
31851 FFCustomMsgBox [31851] Failed in registering The system is unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
a reserved study. recurs, reinstall the system.
31852 FFCustomMsgBox [31852] Failed in starting a The system is unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
reserved study. recurs, reinstall the system.
31853 FFCustomMsgBox [31853] An error occurred The system is unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
with connection to the recurs, reinstall the system.
equipment.
31854 FFCustomMsgBox [31854] Failed in searching The system is unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
a reserved study. recurs, reinstall the system.
31855 FFCustomMsgBox [31855] Received illegal It is conceivable that the connected Check information transmitted from the
information from the equipment may have transmitted illegal connected equipment.
outside. information.
31856 FFCustomMsgBox [31856] Received illegal It is conceivable that the connected Check information transmitted from the
information from the equipment may have transmitted illegal connected equipment.
outside. information.
32001 FFCustomMsgBox [32001] The card type is The employed card type did not agree with Check both the system settings and
not acceptable. the card type defined by the system setup employed card type.
data.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Initialize warning. [Detailed A warning-level error occurred in an image
Check whether the SQL service manager
error information 32001 35 database initialization process. The is normally operating. If the same symptom
items] common probable causes are as follows:
An abnormality occurred when the image database (the entire image data is then
database was accessed. deleted).
An abnormality occurred when an
information file was accessed.
An abnormality occurred when an image
file was created or referenced for image
file recovery.
The contents of the image database or
information file were illegal.
An unrecoverable image file was
encountered.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl DICOM SCP was Not found DICOM SCP is not defined in the Check whether the SQL service manager
in NetConfigDB. NetConfigDB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl DICOM SCP control status Failed in starting the DICOM SCP control. Check whether the SQL service manager
error. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl DDO file load error. Failed in reading the information file (DDO). Check whether the SQL service manager
is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl DDO file save error. Failed in storing the information file. (DDO). Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Size code was not found in There is no size code in the information file Check whether the SQL service manager
DDO. (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl RecordID was not found in There is no record ID in the information file Check whether the SQL service manager
DDO. (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl HQ file was not found in There is no HQ image file in the information Check whether the SQL service manager
DDO. file (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Std file was not found in There is no standard image file name in Check whether the SQL service manager
DDO. the information file (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image size was not found There is no image size in the information Check whether the SQL service manager
in DDO. file (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image sizecode error. Illegal image size cede. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Std file make error. Standard image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Thumb file make error. Thumbnail image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl FoeEDR file make error. Reduced image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Moire control error. Standard image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Thumb control error. Thumbnail image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl ForEDR control error. Reduced image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDR process error. EDR processing error. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Jpeg control error. JPEG processing error. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl InfoFileURL was not found The InfoFileURL field cannot be found in Check whether the SQL service manager
in ImageDB. the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl InfoFile was EMPTY in The InfoFileURL field in the image DB is Check whether the SQL service manager
ImageDB. EMPTY. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl StdImageFileURL was not The StdImageFileURL field cannot be Check whether the SQL service manager
found in ImageDB. found in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl ThmImageFileURL was not The ThmImageFileURL field cannot be Check whether the SQL service manager
found in ImageDB. found in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl MaskImageFileURL was The MaskImageFileURL field cannot be Check whether the SQL service manager
not found in ImageDB. found in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDRBackupFileURL was The EDRBackupFileURL field cannot be Check whether the SQL service manager
not found in ImageDB. found in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl StdImageFileURL set error Failed in registering the standard image Check whether the SQL service manager
in ImageDB. file name in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl ThmImageFileURL set error Failed in registering the thumbnail image Check whether the SQL service manager
in ImageDB. file name in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl MaskImageFileURL set Failed in registering the reduced image file Check whether the SQL service manager
error in ImageDB. name in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB Image DB access error. Check whether the SQL service manager
access(get_Fields) error. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB access error. Image DB access error. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl UpdateCloseRec error. Image DB access error. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Create file error. Failed in creating a file. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl File open error. Failed in opening a file. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl File close error. Failed in closing a file. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl File read error. Failed in reading a file. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl File write error. Failed in writing a file. Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
32001 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Initialize warning.%n[%1] A warning-level error occurred during Nothing particular. (Processing was
initialization processing. continued.)
32001 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Initialize warning.%n[%1] A warning-level error occurred during Nothing particular. (Processing was
initialization processing. continued.)
32002 FFCustomMsgBox [32002] Failed in reading A simple read error occurred or the Read the card again. If the same symptom
the card. problem might have been caused by recurs, check the contents of the card and
damaged contents of a card or a broken the magnetic card reader.
magnetic card reader.
32002 FFIIPInImgCtrl Data not found.(warning) A warning-level error was found in Nothing in particular. (The data found
[Detailed error information information file data. abnormal was replaced by the default
32002 1 item] value to continue with the process.)
32002 FFIIPInImgCtrl Data not found. There is no data in the information file Nothing in particular. (The data found
(DDO). abnormal was replaced by the default
value to continue with the process.)
32002 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Data not found.(warning) A warning-level error was detected in the Nothing particular. (The error data was
%n[%1] information file data. replaced by the default value and
processing was continued.)
32002 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Data not found.(warning) A warning-level error was detected in the Nothing particular. (The error data was
%n[%1] information file data. replaced by the default value and
32003 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Status warning. [Detailed A process request was issued while an Nothing in particular. (The process request
error information 32003 1 initialization or termination process was was rejected.)
item] being performed.
32003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Status error.(IDInfoChange Image display request method execution Nothing in particular. (Processing
method) timing error after ID information was requested was rejected.)
changed.
32003 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Status warning.%n[%1] A warning-level error occurred during Nothing particular. (The error data was
method processing. replaced by the default value and
32003 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Status warning.%n[%1] A warning-level error occurred during Nothing particular. (The error data was
method processing. replaced by the default value and
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
32012 FFCustomMsgBox [32012] Illegal information The problem was caused, for instance, by Check the contents of the card.
has been detected in the an invalid character contained in the
patient information. contents of the card.
32015 FFCustomMsgBox [32015] Failed in reading The problem was caused, for instance, by Check the contents of the barcode.
the IP#. an incompatible barcode format.
32040 FFCustomMsgBox [32040] The number of The number of studies to be sent to the Decrease the number of studies to be sent
studies exceeds the PDA exceeded the maximum limit. to the PDA.
maximum number of
transmissions. Unable to
transmit.
32041 FFCustomMsgBox [32041] Information in Actual results of studies already subjected Check both the PDA and CL studies.
received study is invalid. to exposure were received from the PDA.
Unable to receive the study
result.
32042 FFCustomMsgBox [32042] Failed in calculating
The input parameter (DDO file) is invalid. Reperform exposure.
EI or DI. The ExposureIndex.prm file is illegal Correct the ExposureIndex.prm file.
(reading error or correction error).
34001 FFCustomMsgBox [34001] The same patient The card read was about the patient whose This dialog box merely opens to attract the
information has been input. examination was being conducted. users attention. No particular response is
required.
34002 FFCustomMsgBox [34002] A certain The last examination was ended abruptly Check information sent by the connected
examination finished before during an image read process (due, for device.
the completion of an image instance, to a power failure).
read.
34084 FFCustomMsgBox [34084] Illegal informationIllegal information was received from the Correct the information properly and then
was transmitted from the RIS. restart the study from the RIS.
RIS. Information of the started study includes
the one that is not allowed for the CR
Console.
34085 FFCustomMsgBox [34085] Communication A connected device may have a problem Reconnect. If the same symptom recurs,
with the RIS was disabled. or the network can be unstable. check status of the connected device.
34091 FFCustomMsgBox [34091] An unknown error An error of unknown cause occurred with Restart.
occurred in an attempt to the connection to the Toshiba RIS.
connect to the RIS.
34092 FFCustomMsgBox [34092] A failure occurred The system was unstable. Restart.
when starting the ordered
study.
34094 FFCustomMsgBox [34094] A failure occurred An attempt to inform the RIS of the Determine the same technologist both for
when notifying the RIS of changed technologist resulted in a failure. the RIS and the CR Console.
the changed technologist.
34095 FFCustomMsgBox [34095] A failure occurred Communication with the RIS at startup of Stop the study exposure started via the
in communication with the an ordered study resulted in a failure. Toshiba RIS and then restart it.
RIS at startup of a study.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
34096 FFCustomMsgBox [34096] A failure occurred Communication with the RIS at the end of Confirm the actual exposure result. If
in communication with the an order study resulted in a failure. information of the actual exposure result is
RIS when finishing a study. not reflected appropriately on the data,
input it on the RIS screen.
If the same symptom remains, restart the
relevant system.
34097 FFCustomMsgBox [34097] A failure occurred The system was unstable. Match technologist registration information
when changing the RIS of this equipment with that of the
user. connected device.
34098 FFCustomMsgBox [34098] Failed in Display of RIS view screen was disabled. Restart the relevant system. If the same
communicating with other symptom remains, check settings for
connected device. connection of the connected device.
34107 FFCustomMsgBox [34107] Do you wish to When rotating a marker-specified image, When the [Yes] button is pressed, the ID input section
delete markers and execute determine whether or not to delete the markers are deleted and the image with no
the operation? markers. markers is rotated. When the [No] button is
pressed, the image is rotated without
deleting the markers.
34109 FFCustomMsgBox [34109] Images were input This error message is issued if the 3rd Re-perform image stitching. ID input section
during the preview display. image is input while 2 stitched images are
being previewed.
34112 FFCustomMsgBox [34112] One of the target Image stitching was performed while 1 of Re-perform image stitching after the ID input section
menus for stitching is in the 2 menus targeted for stitching completion of image input in the menu that
progress. processing was being processed. is in process.
34310 FFCustomMsgBox [34310] Patient information Patient information of the same patient ID Pressing the YES button will overwrite ID input section
of the same patient ID number has been changed. the patient information to continue
number has been changed. necessary processing. Press the NO
button to continue processing without
overwriting the patient information. To
suspend processing, press the Cancel
button.
34842 FFCustomMsgBox [34842] Incorrect password. Input password data is incorrect. Input a correct password.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Memory allocate error. Sufficient memory was not available to the Restart.
[E1027] system.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Socket recv buffer. Failed in acquiring the socket reception Restart.
buffer.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Pantomo work buffer. Failed in acquiring the pantomography Restart.
reading buffer.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImgReadProcess memory Failed in memory acquisition. Restart.
allocate error.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Memory allocate error. Failed in memory acquisition. Restart.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Memory Exception error. An exception generated when acquiring Restart.
memory.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Disp Qeue param. Failed in acquiring an image display Restart.
queue.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Read qeue param. Failed in acquiring an image reading Restart.
queue.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl ReadThread main param. Failed in acquiring image input thread Restart.
parameters.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl JpegThread main param. Failed in acquiring JPEG compression Restart.
thread parameters.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image Data area. Failed in acquiring image reading date Restart.
area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image Time area. Failed in acquiring image reading time Restart.
area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl DICOMDataObj set data Failed in acquiring information file (DDO) Restart.
area. setup memory area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDR data. Failed in acquiring EDR image separation Restart.
processing area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDR out data. Failed in acquiring EDR image separation Restart.
processing area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Disp image data. Image display area. Restart.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl SkGp Image area. Failed in acquiring image area after Restart.
normalization processing.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl GammaTable(LUT) area. Failed in acquiring the processing table. Restart.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl Beta param area. Failed in acquiring the processing Restart.
parameter area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl DRC param area. Failed in acquiring the DRC processing Restart.
parameter area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl MFP-DRC param area. Failed in acquiring the MFP-DRC Restart.
processing parameter area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl MFP-USM param area. Failed in acquiring the MFP-USM Restart.
processing parameter area.
39001 FFRUInpImgMgr Initialization failed. %n[%1] The initialization process was not Restart.
successfully performed.
39001 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Memory allocate error. System memory was insufficient. Restart.
%n[%1]
39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl Message post/get error. The system was unstable. Restart.
[Detailed error information
39002 5 items]
39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl PostThreadMessage (%s) Failed in (%s) message transmission while Restart.
error. in image input processing.
39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl PostMessage error. Failed in message transmission while in Restart.
image input processing.
39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl GetMessage (%s) error. Failed in (%s) message reception while in Restart.
image input processing.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl GetMessage error. Failed in message reception while in image Restart.
input processing.
39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl Post/Get Message error. Failed in message transmission/reception Restart.
while in image input processing.
39002 FFRUInpImgMgr Finalize Failed. %n[%1] The finalization process was not Restart.
successfully performed.
39002 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Message post/get error. The system was unstable. Restart.
%n[%1]
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl IIPInImg control error. An abnormality was found in the IIP input Restart.
[Detailed error information image process.
39003 19 items ]
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Get DispatchID error. Failed in setting DICOM SCP control Restart.
Property = %s properties (%s).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Invoke error. Property = %s Failed in setting DICOM SCP control Restart.
properties (%s).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Get DispatchID error. Failed in viewing DICOM SCP control Restart.
Property = %s properties (%s).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Invoke error. Property = %s Failed in viewing DICOM SCP control Restart.
properties (%s).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Get DispatchID error. Failed in performing the DICOM SCP Restart.
Method = %s control method (%s).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Invoke error. Method = %s Failed in performing the DICOM SCP Restart.
control method (%s).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl DispQeue was full. Failed in registering an image display Restart.
queue.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl DispQeue status error. Failed in registering an image display Restart.
queue (illegal status).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Thumbnail image disp Failed in displaying a pre-reading image. Restart.
error.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDR/ID image disp error. Failed in displaying a processed image. Restart.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Data not found. The relevant menu code cannot be found Restart.
in the image processing parameters.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image File Path get error. Failed in acquiring the directory path name Restart.
of the image file.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl File name set error.(%s) Failed in setting the (%s) file name in the Restart.
information file (DDO).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl JPEG Thread error. Failed in creating a JPEG compression Restart.
thread.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image process error(%s). Failed in starting the image processing Restart.
control.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Input image control error. Internal discrepancy found during input Restart.
image processing.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl File type error. Internal discrepancy found during input Restart.
image processing.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Img type error. Internal discrepancy found during input Restart.
image processing.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl Exception error. An exception found during input image Restart.
processing.
39003 FFRUInpImgMgr Invalid Status. %n[%1] The status was invalid. Restart.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl CR-Image control error. An abnormal end was found in an image Restart.
[Detailed error information file creation process or image display
39004 13 items] process.
The problem is attributable to a disk.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl Disp control(%s Method) Image display processing error (method Restart.
error. name: %s).
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDR control (%s) error. Error occurred during EDR processing Restart.
(processing ID:%s).
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDR process error. Error occurred during EDR processing. Restart.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl ForEDR control error. Error occurred during reduced image Restart.
creation processing.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl HQ file create error.(%s) Failed in creating an HQ image file (file ID). Restart.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image Jpeg-compress Error occurred during JPEG compression Restart.
error. processing.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image process error.(%s) Failed in starting the image processing Restart.
control. (Internal processing name: %s)
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl Image sizecode error. Illegal image size code. Restart.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB/DDO access Error occurred in access to the image DB Restart.
error.(%s) or information file (DDO).
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl Jpeg control (%s) error. Error occurred during JPEG processing Restart.
(processing ID: %s).
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl Miore control error. Error occurred during standard image Restart.
creating processing.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl SkGp control (%s) error. Error occurred during normalization Restart.
processing. (Processing ID:%s)
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl Thumbnail control error. Error occurred during thumbnail image Restart.
creating processing.
39004 FFRUInpImgMgr Thread Invoke failed. Thread creation was not successfully Restart.
%n[%1] completed.
39004 FFInImgMonitorCtrl CR-Image control error. An error was detected during image Restart.
%n[%1] processing.
39005 FFIIPInImgCtrl Pipe error. [Detailed error The system remains unstable. Restart.
information 39005 1 item ]
39005 FFIIPInImgCtrl Pipe create error.(%s) Failed in creating a pipe. (Pipe type: %s) Restart.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
39005 FFRUInpImgMgr Socket Access Failed. A socket communication error occurred. Check the network status and then restart
%n[%1] the system.
39005 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Pipe error. %n[%1] The system was unstable. Restart.
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl File error. [Detailed error The system remains unstable. Restart.
information 39006 7 items]
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl File error. Failed in accessing the file. Restart.
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl File error(%s). Failed in accessing the file. (Processing Restart.
type.)
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl Create file error. Failed in file creation processing. Restart.
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl CreateFileMapping error. Failed in file mapping processing. Restart.
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl MapViewOfFile error. Failed in file mapping processing. Restart.
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl EDRImageFile mapping Failed in mapping the reduced image file Restart.
error. before EDR processing.
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl File mapping error. Failed in file mapping processing. Restart.
39006 FFRUInpImgMgr System Function Call An error was returned by a system call Restart.
Failed. %n[%1] (Win32 API, etc.).
39006 FFInImgMonitorCtrl File error.%n[%1] The system was unstable. Restart.
39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl Data not found.(error) The data in the image database or Make an exposure again. If the error
[Detailed error information information file was abnormal. recurs, initialize the image database (the
39007 3 items] entire image data is then deleted).
39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl Data not found. / DDO Data The relevant VR cannot be found in the Make an exposure again. If the error
not found. information file (DDO). recurs, initialize the image database (the
entire image data is then deleted).
39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl Data not found.(%s) / DDO The relevant data cannot be found in the Make an exposure again. If the error
Data not found.(%s) information file (DDO). recurs, initialize the image database (the
39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl %s GetVR error. Failed in acquiring VR shown by %s. Make an exposure again. If the error
recurs, initialize the image database (the
39007 FFRUInpImgMgr Invalid Receive Data. Invalid data was received from the RU. Check the connection to the RU.
%n[%1]
39007 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Data not found.(error) There is an error in the image database/ Restart.
%n[%1] information file data.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl DB access error. [Detailed An abnormality occurred when a database Restart. If the same symptom frequently
error information 39008 19 was accessed. occurs, perform a reinstallation.
items]
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB key get error. Image DB key name acquisition error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB connect error. Image DB connection error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB OpenRecordset Image DB open error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
error. perform a reinstallation.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB get_Fields error. Image DB viewing error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB get_Item error. Image DB viewing error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB get_Value error. Image DB viewing error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB put_Value error. Image DB setup error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Data:%s perform a reinstallation.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB SetValue Image DB setup error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
error.(%s) perform a reinstallation.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB (%s) set error. Image DB setup error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl DICOM&ImageDB data set Image DB setup error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB UpdateRecordset Image DB update error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB CloseRecordset Image DB close error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB close error. Image DB close error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB: ReceiveFlag set ReceiveFlag setup error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB access error. Image DB access error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB access(%s) error. Image DB access error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl ImageDB access error.(%s) Image DB access error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl SysConfig DB access error. SysConfig DB access error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl Net Config DB access NetConfig DB access error. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
39008 FFIIPInImgMgr Insufficient memory. The available memory was insufficient. Restart.
%n[%1]
39008 FFInImgMonitorCtrl DB access error.%n[%1] An error occurred with accessing to several Restart.
databases.
39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl Socket access error. The problem is attributable to a Check the connection to the RU.
[Detailed error information disconnected RU or the like.
39009 5 items]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl Socket error. Error occurred during socket generation Check the connection to the RU.
termination processing.
39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl Socket connect error. Error occurred during socket connection Check the connection to the RU.
processing.
39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl Socket close error. Error occurred during socket disconnection Check the connection to the RU.
processing.
39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl Socket recv error. Error occurred while receiving data from Check the connection to the RU.
the socket.
39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl Socket recv time out. Timeout detected while receiving data from Check the connection to the RU.
the socket.
39009 FFIIPInImgMgr Create Dicom Data Object Data object creation was not successfully Restart.
Failed. %n[%1] completed.
39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl DICOMDataObj data area. An exception occurred when accessing to Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the information file (DDO). perform a reinstallation.
39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl Exception error. Exception handling was done. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
[Detailed error information occurs, perform a reinstallation.
39010 5 items]
39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl Exception error. Property = An exception occurred when setting Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
%s DICOM SCP control properties (%s). perform a reinstallation.
39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl Exception error. Method = An exception occurred when performing Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
%s the DICOM SCP control method (%s). perform a reinstallation.
39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl Exception error. / Exception An exception occurred. (Processing type.) Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
error.(%s) perform a reinstallation.
39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl Memory Exception error. An exception occurred while acquiring Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
memory. perform a reinstallation.
39010 FFIIPInImgMgr Input Image Operation is The disk was full or the connection limit This is not an operating error. Wait a while
Busy. %n[%1] was exceeded by the input request (busy and then input again.
state).
39010 FFInImgMonitorCtrl Exception error.%n[%1] An exceptional error occurred. Restart.
39010 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Exception error.%n[%1] An exceptional error occurred. Restart.
39035 FFCustomMsgBox [39035] Unable to obtain Information coming from the RIS may not Include study UID in the information that
study UID from the list include study UID. comes from the RIS.
(worklist).
39044 FFCustomMsgBox [39044] No list has been There may be a problem on the connection Check the connection device status.
selected. device side.
39045 FFCustomMsgBox [39045] Failed in image A failure occurred in an attempt to acquire Restart the system. If the same failure
input processing. an image from the Image Reader. recurs, restart both the Image Reader and
the system.
Restarting the Image Reader disables
image retransmission from it to the system.
If the same error recurs even after
restarting the Image Reader, contact our
maintenance personnel.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
39046 IdContainer [39046] Failed in image Commands were received in a wrong order Select the failed menu again and read the
acquisition from Image from the Image Reader. images. If it fails again, restart.
Reader.
39901 FFInitializingStudy [%1] An exception error occurred. Restart.
An exception error
occurred(%2).
39902 FFInitializingStudy [%1] An error occurred. Restart.
%2.
40001 FFCustomMsgBox [40001] An error of The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
40002 FFCustomMsgBox [40002] A communication An error occurred in the communication Restart. Communication error
error with Ascent View with Ascent View. with the linkage
occurred. application
40200 FFQAMsgBox Process Communication The method return value for the inter- Restart.
Control Error. process communication control resulted in
[File Name] [Function Name] an error.
[Error Code]
40201 FFQAMsgBox Journal Proc Failure. The method return value for the log save Restart.
[File Name] [Function Name] control resulted in an error.
[Error Code]
40202 FFQAMsgBox CustomMessageCtrl The return value for the custom message Restart.
Access Failure. box control resulted in an error.
[File Name] [Function Name]
[Error Code]
40203 FFQAMsgBox Image DB Access Control The method return value for the image Restart.
Error. database access control resulted in an
[File Name] [Function Name] error.
[Error Code]
40204 FFQAMsgBox Media DB Access Control The method return value for the media Restart.
Error. database access control resulted in an
[Error Code]
40205 FFQAMsgBox Process Communication The method return value for the inter- Restart.
API Error. process communication API resulted in an
[Error Code]
40206 FFQAMsgBox SysConfig DB Access An error occurred with connection/ Restart.
Error. disconnection/value acquisition/value
[File Name] [Function Name] setup for the system setup database
[Error Code] access API.
40207 FFQAMsgBox LangStr DB Access Error. An error occurred with connection/ Restart.
[File Name] [Function Name] disconnection of the character string
[Error Code] database access API.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
40208 FFQAMsgBox LangMsgBox DB Access An error occurred with connection/ Restart.
Error. disconnection of the message box
[File Name] [Function Name] database access API.
[Error Code]
40209 FFQAMsgBox Flag DB Access Error. An error occurred with connection/value Restart.
[File Name] [Function Name] acquisition/value setup/disconnection of
[Error Code] the flag database access.
40210 FFQAMsgBox Return value of a The method return value for the image Restart.
ImgDeliveryCom makes an distribution instruction component resulted
error. in an error.
[Error Code]
40211 FFQAMsgBox NetConfig DB Access Error. An error occurred with connection/ Restart.
[File Name] [Function Name] disconnection/value acquisition/value
[Error Code] setup for the network setup database
(irreplaceable).
41001 FFCustomMsgBox [41001] The device is not No media was set in position. Set media that is appropriate for the
ready. device.
41002 FFCustomMsgBox [41002] Remaining capacity The file to be copied was too large to fit Switch to larger-capacity media.
is insufficient. onto the media at the receiving end.
41003 FFCustomMsgBox [41003] Destination for file An invalid pathname was specified as the Check the system setup.
copy is illegal. file copy destination.
41004 FFCustomMsgBox [41004] E-mail program Outlook was not properly set up. Exit IIP and then complete Outlook setup.
cannot be started.
41005 FFCustomMsgBox [41005] No data cannot be The disk was write-protected or damaged. Check the disk.
written on the disk.
41106 FFCustomMsgBox [41106] Hard Disk Full. The hard disk was full. Exit QA, delete unnecessary images from
the list, and retry the distribution.
41107 FFCustomMsgBo [41107] Hard Disk Full. The hard disk was full. Exit QA, delete unnecessary images from
the list, and retry the distribution.
41108 FFCustomMsgBox [41108] Failed in reading No JPEG image gradation correction file is Check the correction file.
the LUT file for JPEG available or the format is illegal.
Image.
41109 FFCustomMsgBox [41109] A menu of a A menu of a different modality was Select a menu of the same modality.
different modality has been selected.
selected.
41110 FFCustomMsgBox [41110] Failed in access to The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the image database. perform a reinstallation.
41111 FFCustomMsgBox [41111] Failed in access to It is conceivable that the shared host has Check targets involved in the shared host.
the image database. not been started.
41112 FFCustomMsgBox [41112] Failed in access to It is conceivable that QA processing was Check other equipment or perform another
the image database. performed on other equipment. study.
the image file. not been started.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
41114 FFCustomMsgBox [41114] Failed in saving the It is conceivable that the shared host has Check targets involved in the shared host.
information. not been started.
41118 FFCustomMsgBox [41118] Failed in image It is conceivable that the shared host has Check targets involved in the shared host.
output processing. not been started.
41119 FFCustomMsgBox [41119] Failed in QA startup The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
processing. perform a reinstallation.
41130 FFCustomMsgBox [41130] Failed in replacing No extension menus have been registered. Check menu registration information.
an image.
41131 FFCustomMsgBox [41131] Study information It is conceivable that system settings for Check the settings.
cannot be modified. the study # and ID # have been changed.
41140 FFCustomMsgBox [41140] The function cannot A function that was called up did not match Check the customized settings.
be implemented. the optional system settings.
41141 FFCustomMsgBox [41141] An error occurred. The system was unstable. Reinstall the program if the same symptom
recurs after restarting the equipment.
41150 FFCustomMsgBox [41150] Failed in file output A failure occurred in accessing the Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
processing. transmission file. The system may have perform a reinstallation.
been unstable.
41151 FFCustomMsgBox [41151] There is no free The hard disk was full. Exit QA processing, delete unnecessary
space on the hard disk. images from the list, and retry output
processing.
41152 FFCustomMsgBox [41152] Free space is The hard disk was full. Exit QA processing, delete unnecessary
insufficient on the images from the list, and retry output
destination for output. processing.
41200 FFQAMsgBox HDD FULL. The hard disk was full. Increase the free hard disk space and then
[File Name] [Function Name] retry operation.
[Error Code]
41201 FFQAMsgBox The specified path does not The specified path was not found. Check path settings.
exist.
[Error Code]
41202 FFQAMsgBox Media are not ready. No media was ready. Check the media status.
[Error Code]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
41203 FFQAMsgBox The capacity of copy place The capacity of the media targeted for Replace the media for anyone of larger
media is insufficient. copy was insufficient. capacity.
[Error Code]
41210 FFQAMsgBox Return value of a The method return value for the image Check the destination for image distribution
ImgDeliveryCom makes an distribution instruction component resulted and then retry.
error. in an error. (Processing other than image
[File Name] [Function Name] distribution can be continued.)
[Error Code]
42200 FFQAMsgBox Cant Get Bitmap Failed in acquiring a bitmap (replaceable). Reinstall the program.
(Processing continuation).
[Error Code]
42201 FFQAMsgBox CustomMessageCtrl The return value for the custom message Reinstall the program.
Access Failure(Processing box control resulted in an error.
continuation).
[Error Code]
42202 FFQAMsgBox SysConfig DB Access An error occurred when obtaining a system Reinstall the program.
Failure(Processing setup database access API value or the
continuation). obtained value was illegal (replaceable).
[Error Code]
42203 FFQAMsgBox LangStr DB Access An error occurred when obtaining a Reinstall the program.
Failure(Processing character string database access API
continuation). value (replaceable).
[Error Code]
42204 FFQAMsgBox LangMsgBox DB Access The return value for the message box Reinstall the program.
Failure(Processing database access API resulted in an error.
continuation).
[Error Code]
42205 FFQAMsgBox FF32 Access Failure The return value for the FF32 library (FF32. Reinstall the program.
(Probably acquisition of dll) resulted in an error.
Registry goes wrong.)
[File Name] [Function Name] * When acquiring an optional key registry,
[Error Code] no error will be registered even if no key
is available.
42206 FFQAMsgBox Tag Information Access No tag information was set up though it Use default information for processing.
Failure(Processing must have been set up beforehand There is no operational problem.
continuation). (replaceable).
[Error Code]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
42207 FFQAMsgBox NetConfig DB Access An error occurred when obtaining a Reinstall the program.
Failure(Processing network setup database value or obtained
continuation). value was not correct (replaceable).
[Error Code]
42209 FFQAMsgBox FF32 Access Failure Failed in obtaining/setting an FF32 library Reinstall the program.
(Processing continuation). value (replaceable).
[Error Code]
42210 FFQAMsgBox Invalid function ID Number. An illegal function ID (disregard). There is no operational problem.
(Processing continuation).
[Error Code]
42211 FFQAMsgBox Data is not found in No custom setup database registered Register custom setup database using the
CustomScreenDB. (processing can be continued). customization setting displayed on the
[File Name] [Function Name] User Utility window.
[Error Code]
42212 FFQAMsgBox LogFile Access Failure. Failed in accessing the log file. Reinstall the program.
[Error Code]
42214 FFQAMsgBox The amount of adjustments The amount of position adjustment is set to Manually adjust the positioning amount
is 0. 0 (zero). from the trimming dialog.
[Error Code]
42299 FFQAMsgBox Data resource access error. A clustering resource access error Check network connection status.
[File Name] [Function Name] (processing can be continued).
[Error Code]
43000 FFQAManagerCom %S Information for development personnel. There are operational problems. A character string is
placed in the %S
position.
43010 FFIIPInImgCtrl Cant Get FontSize The font size was not registered in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Information. registry. characters can be corrupted.
43010 FFQAManagerCom Cant Get FontSize The font size was not registered in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Information. registry. characters can be corrupted.
43020 FFIIPInImgCtrl Cant Get Caption The character string database did not exist Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Information. or was damaged. characters can be corrupted.
43060 FFQAManagerCom [Control: %1, The character string database did not exist Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Function: %2 , Code: %3] or was damaged. characters can be corrupted.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
43110 FFIIPInImgCtrl Cant Access Local The language setup data was not obtained. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Configuration Data. characters can be corrupted.
43201 FFIIPQACtrl Focus Set Failure. The focus cannot be determined properly. There is no particular problem with
operations. (The focus cannot be
determined properly because the
annotation character input dialog has been
inactivated.) After shutting the
magnification function, input of annotation
characters becomes possible.
43301 FFQAManagerCom [Control: %1, The screen size was not obtained. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Function: %2 , Code: %3] characters can be corrupted.
43310 FFQAManagerCom [Control: %1, The language setup data was not obtained. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
Function: %2 , Code: %3] characters can be corrupted.
44200 FFQAMsgBox Journal Proc Failure. The method return value for the log Restart the system.
[File Name] [Function Name] storage control resulted in an error.
[Error Code]
44201 FFQAMsgBox An unexpected Method An unexpected method call (called up at Restart the system.
call. an impossible timing, being possible
[File Name] [Function Name] though to continue processing).
[Error Code]
44262 FFCustomMsgBox [44262] The maximum Automatic marker setting was attempted Delete unnecessary markers so that there QA section
settable number of on an image where the number of are 4 or less, and reperform the setting.
automatic markers automatic markers allowed for one
exceeded. exposure menu was exceeded.
44263 FFCustomMsgBox [44263] Do you wish to The image was rotated/flipped with Press the [Yes] button to delete the QA section
delete markers and execute markers determined on it. markers so that the image is rotated/flipped
the operation? appropriately. Press the [No] button to
rotate/flip the image without deleting the
markers.
44266 FFCustomMsgBox [44266] Markers are not The setting of automatic markers was Press the [Yes] button to delete the already QA section
being selected. attempted on an image with an exposure registered automatic markers. Press the
menu where automatic markers are [No] button not to make any changes in the
already-registered, though no markers setting of the automatic markers.
have been determined on the same image.
44267 FFCustomMsgBox [44267] Automatic markers The setting of automatic markers was Press the [Yes] button to determine image QA section
will be registered. performed for an exposure menu for which makers for the exposure menu as the
no automatic markers have been automatic markers. Press the [No] button
determined. not to perform the setting of automatic
markers.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
44268 FFCustomMsgBox [44268] Automatic markers The setting of automatic markers was Press the [Yes] button to delete already QA section
will be registered. performed for an exposure menu for which registered automatic markers and
automatic markers have already been determine image markers as the automatic
determined. markers. Press the [No] button not to make
any changes in the setting of the automatic
markers.
44269 FFCustomMsgBox [44269] Automatic markers Automatic marker setting was performed Perform automatic marker setting on QA section
cannot be set up. on an image retrieved from media. images input from the Image Reader.
44270 FFCustomMsgBox [44270] Automatic markers Automatic marker setting was performed Perform automatic marker setting on QA section
cannot be set up. on an image retrieved from external images input from the Image Reader.
device.
44354 FFCustomMsgBox [44354] Invalid character The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
has been input in ID #. instance, to the inclusion of an
unacceptable character.
has been input in Study #. instance, to the inclusion of an
unacceptable character.
has been input in patient instance, to the inclusion of an
name. unacceptable character.
has been input in kanji- instance, to the inclusion of an
patient name. unacceptable character.
has been input in the sex instance, to the inclusion of an
(gender). unacceptable character.
44359 FFCustomMsgBox [44359] Format of date of The entry did not agree with the date Make a proper entry.
birth is not applicable. format defined by system setup.
44360 FFCustomMsgBox [44360] The same study An attempt was made to enter an Enter another number.
No. already exists. examination number that was already
used.
44361 FFCustomMsgBox [44361] Anatomical region An anatomical region name was not Make a proper entry.
has not been input. entered.
has been input in the instance, to the inclusion of an
anatomical region. unacceptable character.
has been input in the kanji- instance, to the inclusion of an
anatomical region. unacceptable character.
44364 FFCustomMsgBox [44364] No menu name A menu name was not entered. Make a proper entry.
has been input.
has been input in the menu instance, to the inclusion of an
name. unacceptable character.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
has been input in the kanji- instance, to the inclusion of an
menu name. unacceptable character.
has been input in the film instance, to the inclusion of an
annotation characters. unacceptable character.
44368 FFCustomMsgBox [44368] No patient The patient information was not entered. Make a proper entry.
information has been input.
44369 FFCustomMsgBox [44369] The Study ID The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
contained an invalid instance, to the inclusion of an
character. unacceptable character.
44392 FFCustomMsgBox [44392]The maximum The 5th View Modifier was selected. Select View Modifiers so that the total QA section
number of View Modifiers number is 4 or less.
settable exceeded.
44393 FFCustomMsgBox [44393] View modifier code It is not allowed to set up view code Change system configuration of the QA section
sequence items cannot be modifier for an image with no view code exposure menu so that view code
changed. information. information can be set up appropriately
and then re-input an image.
44394 FFCustomMsgBox [44394] Information that System configuration of the view code Press [OK] to cancel inconsistent QA section
contradicts with the system modifier set up for the image was changed. information and to display the view code
configuration exists in the modifier change window.
View Modifier Code Press [Cancel] not to change the view
Sequences specified on code modifier.
images.
44551 FFCustomMsgBox [44551] Film format will be This window opens for confirmation only.
changed.
44603 FFCustomMsgBox [44603] Failed in automatic An error occurred while in automatic image Check order and orientation of images. QA section
linkage of stitching images. stitching processing.
44604 FFCustomMsgBox [44604] Automatic stitching The automatic image stitching button was Press [OK] to perform automatic image QA section
will be performed and the pressed. stitching processing. When doing so,
data will be stored. results of fine adjustment processing will
be discarded.
Press [Cancel] to return to the current
dialog box.
44732 FFCustomMsgBox [44732] Failed in calculating The input parameter (DDO file) is invalid. Reperform exposure.
EI or DI. The ExposureIndex.prm file is illegal Correct the ExposureIndex.prm file.
(reading error or correction error).
49200 FFQAMsgBox FF32 Error. The return value for the FF32 library (FF32. Restart the system.
[File Name] [Function Name] dll) resulted in an error (irreplaceable).
[Error Code]
49201 FFQAMsgBox Method Argument Error. A method argument type error (for Restart the system.
[File Name] [Function Name] instance, there were no objects).
[Error Code]
49202 FFQAMsgBox Cant get Tag Information. No tag information was set up though it Restart the system.
[File Name] [Function Name] must have been set up beforehand
[Error Code] (irreplaceable).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
49203 FFQAMsgBox Memory or Resource Failed in acquiring memory/handle Restart the system.
cannot be gained. resources.
[Error Code]
49204 FFQAMsgBox Windows API error Windows API return value resulted in an Restart the system.
occurred. error.
[Error Code]
49298 FFQAMsgBox Secondary detection code An error occurred with the return value of Restart the system.
Error. the secondary detection code.
[Error Code]
49299 FFQAMsgBox Exception Error occurred. An exceptional error (an error detected Restart the system.
[File Name] [Function Name] with Try/Catch, OnErrorGoto).
[Error Code]
50000 FFFinpSend Memory Error.%n%1 The system was abnormal (memory Restart.
allocation was not accomplished).
50000 FFOutImgPrc Initialize Error.%n%1 An abnormality was encountered during Restart. If the same symptom frequently
initialization. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50000 FFOutImgPrc2 Initialize Error.%n%1 An error occurred during initialization Restart. If the same symptom frequently
processing. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50001 FFCustomMsgBox [50001] Failed in Output option setup was not completed. Perform output option setup.
initialization process. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
50001 FFFinpSend Dicom Data Object Load The DicomDataObject file for output was Perform a reinstallation.
Error.%n%1 not found.
50001 FFIIPOUTPUT Initialize Error.%n[%1] Initialization process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
occurs, perform a reinstallation.
Output control was not exercised.
The error check method was not
successfully called.
A certain other program error occurred.
50001 FFOutImgPrc DB Connect Error.%n%1 An abnormality occurred in the connection Check whether the SQL service manager
to a database. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
50001 Spooler Initialize Error.%n[%1] Initialization process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Output section
occurs, perform a reinstallation. container.
No output control was exercised.
An error check method call was
unsuccessful.
Other program error.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50001 FFOutImgPrc2 DB Connect Error.%n%1 An abnormality occurred in the connection Check whether the SQL service manager
to a database. is normally operating. If the same symptom
deleted).
50002 FFCustomMsgBox [50002] Failed in output The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs after
process. a restart, perform a reinstallation.
50002 FFFinpSend File Open Error.%n%1 There is no output raw data file. Reinstall.
50002 FFIIPOUTPUT State Change State transition notification process error. Restart.
Error.%n[%1]
The output destination was not
successfully reregistered.
The state transition notification call was
not successful.
An unknown program error occurred.
50002 FFOutImgPrc DB Information Error.%n%1 The database information was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50002 Spooler State Change Error.%n[%1] State change notification process error. Restart. Output section
container.
An output destination was not
successfully registered.
A state change notification call was not
successful.
Line establishment message transmission
error [not used].
Line abnormality message transmission
error [not used].
50002 FFOutImgPrc2 DB Infomation Error.%n%1 The database information was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50003 FFFinpSend File Read Error.%n%1 The output raw data file is abnormal. Reinstall.
50003 FFIIPOUTPUT Routine Change Routine change process error. Restart.
Error.%n[%1]
The resumption request was not
successfully made.
50003 FFOutImgPrc System Error.%n%1 The system was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50003 Spooler Routine Change Routine change process error. Restart. Output section
Error.%n[%1] container.
A resumption request was not
successfully made.
50003 FFOutImgPrc2 System Error.%n%1 The system was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50004 FFCustomMsgBox [50004] Failed in output - An exposure menu name with an - Upgrade the software to version A08 or
process. apostrophe was used with software later.
version A07 or earlier. - Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
50004 FFFinpSend FinpSend Error.%n%1 An abnormality occurred in the output Restart. If the same symptom frequently
sequence. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50004 FFIIPOUTPUT Spool Error.%n[%1] Spool process error. Restart.
The spool request call was not

successfully made.
The reoutput request was not
successfully made.
The study termination notification was not
successfully made.
The spool request response status was
invalid.
50004 FFOutImgPrc I/F Timing Error.%n%1 An interface abnormality was encountered. Restart.
50004 Spooler Spool Error.%n[%1] Spool process error. Restart. Output section
container.
A spool request call was not successfully
made.
A reoutput request was not successfully
made.
An examination end notification was not
successful.
The spool request response state was
illegal.
50004 FFOutImgPrc2 I/F Timing Error.%n%1 An interface abnormality was encountered. Restart.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50005 FFIIPOUTPUT ExeOutput Error.%n[%1] Forced-output process error. Restart.
The spool forced output request call was

not successfully made.
The queue forced output response
message was not successfully
transmitted.
50005 FFOutImgPrc CreateFileMapping File mapping was unachievable. Restart.
Error.%n%1
50005 Spooler ExeOutput Error.%n[%1] Forced output process error. Restart. Output section
container.
A spool forced output request was not
A queue forced output response message
was not successfully transmitted.
50005 FFOutImgPrc2 CreateFileMapping File mapping was unachievable. Restart.
Error.%n%1
50006 FFIIPOUTPUT Image Proc Error.%n[%1] Image processing error. Restart.
The image processing request call was

The image processing setup completion
call was not successfully made.
The image processing completion
notification call was not successfully
made.
The image processing job acquisition
request was not successfully made.
50006 FFOutImgPrc File Open Error.%n%1 The file could not be opened. Check the file.
50006 FFOutImgPrc2 File Open Error.%n%1 The file could not be opened. Check the file.
50007 FFCustomMsgBox [50007] Failed in The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs after
terminating process. a restart, perform a reinstallation.
50007 FFIIPOUTPUT Output Proc Error.%n[%1] Output processing error. Restart.
The output destination information was

not successfully acquired.
The output request call was not
successfully made.
The output completion notification was
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50007 FFOutImgPrc File Read/Write A file write/read was unsuccessful. If the problem frequently occurs, replace
Error.%n%1 The problem is attributable to a disk. the disk or take some other remedial
action.
50007 Spooler Terminate Error.%n[%1] Termination process error. Restart. Output section
container.
50007 FFOutImgPrc2 File Read/Write A file write/read was unsuccessful. If the problem frequently occurs, replace
Error.%n%1 The problem is attributable to a disk. the disk or take some other remedial
action.
50008 FFCustomMsgBox [50008] Failed in image The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs after
processing for output. a restart, perform a reinstallation.
50008 FFIIPOUTPUT Commit Proc Error.%n[%1] Commitment processing error. Restart.
The commitment destination information

was not successfully acquired.
The commitment request call was not
successfully made.
The commitment completion notification
was not successfully made.
50008 FFOutImgPrc CreateDispatch The control was not successfully initialized. Check that the control is registered.
Error.%n%1
50008 Spooler Image Proc Error.%n[%1] Image process error. Restart. Output section
container.
An image process request was not
An image process setup completion call
An image process completion notification
was not successfully called.
An image process job acquisition request
was not successfully issued.
50008 FFOutImgPrc2 CreateDispatch The control was not successfully initialized. Check that the control is registered.
Error.%n%1
50009 FFIIPOUTPUT Queue Resume Queue resumption process error. Restart.
Error.%n[%1]
The queue resumption request call was
The queue resumption response
transmitted.
50009 FFOutImgPrc Memory Get Error.%n%1 The system was abnormal (memory Restart.
allocation was not achieved).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50009 Spooler Output Proc Error.%n[%1] Output process error. Restart. Output section
container.
Output destination information was not
successfully acquired.
An output request was not successfully
called.
An output completion notification was not
successful.
50009 FFOutImgPrc2 Memory Get Error.%n%1 The system was abnormal (memory Restart.
allocation was not achieved).
50010 FFIIPOUTPUT Queue Delete Queue deletion process error. Restart.
Error.%n[%1]
The queue deletion request was not
successfully made.
The queue deletion response message
50010 FFOutImgPrc Memory(DDO) Get The system was abnormal (memory Restart.
Error.%n%1 allocation was not achieved).
50010 Spooler Queue Resume Queue resumption process error. Restart. Output section
A queue resumption request was not
A queue resumption response message
50010 FFOutImgPrc2 Memory(DDO) Get The system was abnormal (memory Restart.
50011 FFIIPOUTPUT Unit Suspend Equipment output suspension process Restart.
Error.%n[%1] error.
The equipment output suspension

request call was not successfully made.
The equipment output suspension
response message was not successfully
transmitted.
50011 FFOutImgPrc Memory(VR) Get The system was abnormal (memory Restart.
50011 Spooler Queue Delete Queue deletion process error. Restart. Output section
A queue deletion request was not
successfully issued.
A queue deletion response message was
not successfully transmitted.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50011 FFOutImgPrc2 Memory(VR) Get The system was abnormal (memory Restart.
50012 FFIIPOUTPUT Unit Resume Error.%n[%1] Equipment output resumption error. Restart.
The equipment output resumption

request call was not successfully made.
The equipment output resumption
response message was not successfully
transmitted.
50012 FFOutImgPrc Dicom Data Object Dicom Data Object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50012 Spooler Unit Suspend Error.%n[%1] Unit output suspension process error. Restart. Output section
container.
A unit output suspension request was not
A unit output suspension response
transmitted.
50012 FFOutImgPrc2 Dicom Data Object Dicom Data Object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50013 FFOutImgPrc Dicom Data Object No Dicom Data Object did not contain any Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Data.%n%1 data. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50013 Spooler Unit Resume Error.%n[%1] Unit output resumption process error. Restart. Output section
container.
A unit output resumption request was not
A unit output resumption response
transmitted.
50013 FFOutImgPrc2 Dicom Data Object No Dicom Data Object did not contain any Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Data.%n%1 data. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50015 FFIIPOUTPUT Terminate Error.%n[%1] Termination process error. Restart.

50020 FFOutImgPrc Data Error.%n%1 A data abnormality was encountered. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50020 FFOutImgPrc2 Data Error.%n%1 A data abnormality was encountered. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50021 FFOutImgPrc Output Job DB Error.%n%1 The output database was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50021 FFOutImgPrc2 Output Job DB Error.%n%1 The output database was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50022 FFOutImgPrc Memory Over.%n%1 A memory area abnormality was Restart.
encountered.
50022 FFOutImgPrc2 Memory Over.%n%1 A memory area abnormality was Restart.
encountered.
50030 FFOutImgPrc OutImgPrc Error.%n%1 An abnormality occurred. Restart.
50030 FFOutImgPrc2 OutImgPrc Error.%n%1 An abnormality occurred. Restart.
50100 FFOutImgPrc IFormatCom Error.%n%1 The format calculation object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50100 Spooler Spooler Error.%n%1 Common error message. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Queue information class related initialize the image database.
message.
An output job file was not successfully
accessed.
Output job information was not
successfully accessed.
Film information was not successfully
acquired. Information was not
The job status was not successfully
acquired (program error).
Job information was not successfully
freed.
Unit information class related message.

Unit information was not successfully
freed.
Spooler class related message.

The film count was not successfully
checked.
The image count/image information area
Unit information was not successfully
acquired.
Other program error
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50100 FFOutImgPrc2 IFormatCom Error.%n%1 The format calculation object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50101 FFOutImgPrc IRawMakeCom The raw data creation object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50101 Spooler RunProc Error.%n%1 Initialization process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database.
A spool start process was in error.
A database connection was not
successfully closed.
50101 FFOutImgPrc2 IRawMakeCom The raw data creation object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50102 FFOutImgPrc FFNetDB Error.%n%1 An abnormality occurred at the time of Restart. If the same symptom frequently
network setup data acquisition. occurs, perform a reinstallation.
(It is conceivable that the network setup
database was abnormal.)
50102 Spooler OutputRegisterProc Output destination registration process Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Error.%n%1 error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
The spooler control state was abnormal.
An illegal parameter was encountered.
An output destination registration request
message was not successfully issued.
An output destination was not
successfully registered.
50102 FFOutImgPrc2 FFNetDB Error.%n%1 An abnormality occurred at the time of Restart. If the same symptom frequently
network setup data acquisition. occurs, perform a reinstallation.
(It is conceivable that the network setup
database was abnormal.)
50103 FFOutImgPrc IImgJpegCtrl Error.%n%1 The decompression object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50103 Spooler StateChangeProc Local printer/Dicom printer state change Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Error.%n%1 notification process error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
A printer state change notification
The unit status was not successfully
acquired.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50103 FFOutImgPrc2 IImgJpegCtrl Error.%n%1 The decompression object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50104 FFOutImgPrc IFMImgSkGpCtrl The normalization process object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50104 Spooler ErrorCheckProc Data integrity check process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A data integrity check request message
50104 FFOutImgPrc2 IFMImgSkGpCtrl The normalization process object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50105 FFOutImgPrc IFMImgVRSCtrl The zoom object (VRS method) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50105 Spooler RestoreJob Error.%n%1 Job restoration error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An unprocessed job restoration request
50105 FFOutImgPrc2 IFMImgVRSCtrl The zoom object (VRS method) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50106 FFOutImgPrc IRotateCom Error.%n%1 The rotation object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50106 Spooler SpoolProc Error.%n%1 Spool process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A parameter error occurred.
A spool request message was not
DDO file information was not successfully
acquired.
50106 FFOutImgPrc2 IRotateCom Error.%n%1 The rotation object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50107 FFOutImgPrc IFMImgParamCtrl The image process management Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 parameter object was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50107 Spooler ReoutputProc Error.%n%1 Reoutput start process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A reoutput start message was not
50107 FFOutImgPrc2 IFMImgParamCtrl The image process management Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 parameter object was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50108 FFOutImgPrc IFMImgHandCtrl The CR image process object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50108 Spooler StudyReqEndProc Study termination request processing error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Spooler control status error. initialize the image database.
Illegal parameters.
Failed in issuing study termination
request message.
Other program errors.
50108 FFOutImgPrc2 IFMImgHandCtrl The CR image process object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50109 FFOutImgPrc IFMImgFCmpCtrl FCR compression (compression/ Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 decompression (Fujis unique method)) occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
was abnormal. initialize the image database.
50109 Spooler ExeOutputJob Error.%n%1 Forced output request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A forced output request message was not
The requested output image data did not
exist.
50109 FFOutImgPrc2 IFMImgFCmpCtrl FCR compression (compression/ Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 decompression (Fujis unique method)) occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
was abnormal. initialize the image database.
50110 FFOutImgPrc IDataToPrintCom Data conversion (for DICOM) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50110 Spooler GetImageProcJob Image processing job acquisition process Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An image processing job acquisition
request message was not successfully
issued.
Data was not databased.
50110 FFOutImgPrc2 IDataToPrintCom Data conversion (for DICOM) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50111 FFOutImgPrc IDataToStorageCom Data conversion (for DICOM Storage) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50111 Spooler SetImageProcComplete Image processing completion notification Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Error.%n%1 process error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
An image processing completion
notification message was not successfully
issued.
50111 FFOutImgPrc2 IDataToStorageCom Data conversion (for DICOM Storage) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50112 FFOutImgPrc IFMImgMoireCtrl Moire elimination was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50112 FFQCMsgBox Custom DB Access Error. Access error to ReaderQC.mdb. Restart.
[File Name]
[Function Name]
[50112]
50112 Spooler GetOutputProcJob Output job acquisition response process Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An output job acquisition response
50112 FFOutImgPrc2 IFMImgMoireCtrl Moire elimination was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50113 FFOutImgPrc IFilmCharMakeCom The film annotation character generation Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 object was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50113 Spooler SetOutputProcComplete Output completion notification process Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An output completion notification
50113 FFOutImgPrc2 IFilmCharMakeCom The film annotation character generation Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 object was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50114 FFOutImgPrc MaskProcExec Error.%n%1 The blackening process was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50114 Spooler GetCommitProcJob Commitment job acquisition response Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The spooler control status was abnormal.
The commitment jog acquisition response
The data was not found in the database.
50114 FFOutImgPrc2 MaskProcExec Error.%n%1 The blackening process was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Output image process
occurs, perform a reinstallation and then control
50115 FFOutImgPrc RecognizeProcExec The blackening automatic recognition Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 process was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50115 Spooler QueueResume Queue output resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A queue output resumption request
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50115 Spooler SetCommitProcComplete Commitment completion notification Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The commitment completion notification
The queue was not found.
The data was not found in the database.
50115 FFOutImgPrc2 RecognizeProcExec The blackening automatic recognition Restart. If the same symptom frequently Output image process
Error.%n%1 process was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then control
50116 FFOutImgPrc ExecMarker Error.%n%1 The marker imbedding process was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50116 Spooler QueueDelete Error.%n%1 Queue deletion request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A queue deletion request message was
not successfully issued.
Output job file information was not
Queue deletion was not successful.
Database access was not successful.
50116 FFOutImgPrc2 ExecMarker Error.%n%1 The marker imbedding process was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50117 FFOutImgPrc ExecMarker Information for software development There is no problem with operations.
Warning.%n%1 personnel.
50117 FFOutImgPrc LUTProcExec Error.%n% An error occurred in a display gradation Restart. If the same symptom frequently
correction process. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50117 Spooler QueueResume Queue output resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The queue output resumption request
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50117 Spooler UnitSuspend Error.%n%1 Unit suspension request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A unit suspension request message was
50117 FFOutImgPrc2 LUTProcExec Error.%n% An error occurred in a display gradation Restart. If the same symptom frequently
correction process. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50118 FFOutImgPrc ExecMarker Information for software development There is no problem with operations.
Information.%n%1 personnel.
50118 FFOutImgPrc MPMCode Error.%n%1 An error occurred in an output information Restart. If the same symptom frequently
conversion process. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50118 Spooler QueueDelete Error.%n%1 Queue deletion request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The spooler control status was abnormal. initialize the image database.
Failed in issuing a queue deletion request
message.
Failed in accessing the output job file
information.
Failed in deleting the queue.
Failed in accessing the database.
50118 Spooler UnitResume Error.%n%1 Unit resumption request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A unit resumption request message was
50118 FFOutImgPrc2 MPMCode Error.%n%1 An error occurred in an output information Restart. If the same symptom frequently
conversion process. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
50119 Spooler SuspendProc Error.%n%1 Suspension request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A suspension request message was not
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50119 Spooler UnitSuspend Error.%n%1 Equipment suspension request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently
error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
The equipment suspension request
50119 FFOutlmgPrc Trimming Error.%n%1 An error occurred while in trimming Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50119 FFOutlmgPrc2 Trimming Error.%n%1 An error occurred while in trimming Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50120 Spooler ResumeProc Error.%n%1 Resumption request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A resumption request message was not
50120 Spooler UnitResume Error.%n%1 Equipment resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently
error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
The equipment resumption request
50120 FFOutlmgPrc AnnotationProc An error occurred while in annotation Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 information embedding processing. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
intialize the image database.
50120 FFOutlmgPrc2 AnnotationProc An error occurred while in annotation Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1 information embedding processing. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
intialize the image database.
50121 Spooler EndProc Error.%n%1 End request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An end request message was not
50121 Spooler SuspendProc Error.%n%1 Suspension request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The suspension request message was
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50121 FFOutlmgPrc FNCProc Error.%n%1 An error occurred during FNC processing. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
perform reinstallation and initialize the
image database.
50121 FFOutlmgPrc2 FNCProc Error.%n%1 An error occurred during FNC processing. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
perform reinstallation and initialize the
image database.
50122 Spooler ResumeProc Error.%n%1 Resumption request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The resumption request message was
50122 FFOutlmgPrc MaskProcExec Sk and Gp values do not exist for Auto Although there is no problem with
Warning.%n%1 blackening process. operations, check the data appropriately.
50122 FFOutlmgPrc2 MaskProcExec Sk and Gp values do not exist for Auto Although there is no problem with
Warning.%n%1 blackening process. operations, check the data appropriately.
50123 Spooler EndProc Error.%n%1 Termination request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The termination request message was
50123 FFOutlmgPrc IIPHand Error.%n%1 Processing of output image failed. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50123 FFOutlmgPrc2 IIPHand Error.%n%1 Processing of output image failed. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
50400 FFQCAutoCalcCom File %1, Spot %2, Fatal Error (exceptional error)
Code %3.
50500 FFQCAutoCalcCom File %1, Spot %2, Fatal Error (exceptional error)
Code %3.
50600 FFIipMedia Logical Program Error. %n Program error. Restart.
50601 FFIipMedia Catch Exception Error. %n An unexpected exception error occurred. Restart.
50602 FFIipMedia Out Of Memory Error. %n Failed in securing necessary memory. Restart.
50603 FFIipMedia Data Base Error. %n An error occurred in the database. Restart.
50604 FFIipMedia Not Initialize. %n Initialization not performed. Restart.
50605 FFIipMedia File I/O Error. %n An error occurred while in file read Check to see if the image file is correct.
processing.
50606 FFIipMedia Create Instance Error. %n Failed in creating COM component Restart.
instance.
50607 FFIipMedia Pipe Create Error. %n Failed in creating a pipe. Restart.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50608 FFIipMedia Pipe Create Error. %n Failed in closing a pipe. Restart.
50609 FFIipMedia The Demand Is Already The relevant request cannot be accepted Wait for a while and then re-implement as
Performing. %n because it is now being implemented or there is a process that is being now
other request is now being implemented. implemented.
50610 FFIipMedia Send Message Error. %n Failed in transmitting a message (Send Restart.
message failure).
50611 FFIipMedia Unjust Event Reception. An illegal event, such as inconsistency in Make sure that the network setting is
%n AE name, was received. correct.
50612 FFIipMedia Not FCR Image. %n The selected study couldnt be acquired Make sure that the image file is correct.
because it didnt include FCR images.
50613 FFIipMedia AEMedia no entry. %n No media that is for the determined AE is Make sure that the network setting is
registered. correct.
50614 FFIipMedia Resource Access Error. %n A resource access error. Restart.
50615 FFIipMedia Media Process End. %n The media control process ended. Nothing particular.
50616 FFIipMedia UPSEvent Pipe Create Failed in creating a named pipe for Restart.
Failure. %n detection of power rupture.
50617 FFIipMedia Attribute Error. %n The attribute caused an error to occur. Make sure that the network setting is
correct.
50618 FFIipMedia Picture storage demand Failed in starting a request for image Make sure that the image file is correct.
start failure. %n storage.
50619 FFIipMedia Picture get demand start Failed in starting a request for image Make sure that the image file is correct.
failure. %n acquisition.
50620 FFIipMedia Send Message Error. %n Message transmission error. Restart.
50621 FFIipMedia Get Host Name Error. %n An error occurred when acquiring a host Restart.
name.
50622 FFIipMedia Resistry Error. %n Failed in operating a registry. Restart.
50623 FFIipMedia DVDform.exe not exist. %n The DVDForm.exe file did not exist. Check the format function system setting.
50624 FFIipMedia DVDform.exe Start Error. Failed in starting the DVDForm.exe file. Check the format function system setting.
%n
50625 FFIipMedia DVDform.exe. Operation An error occurred while operating the Check the format function system setting.
Error. %n DVDForm.exe file.
50626 FFIipMedia Format end Error. %n A format end detection error. Check the format function system setting.
50627 FFIipMedia Media Format Error. %n A media format failure. Nothing particular.
50628 FFIipMedia Media Drive Type Error. %n The media drive type was not correct. Make sure that the network setting is
correct.
50629 FFIipMedia BatFile not exist. %n The bat file did not exist. Restart.
50630 FFIipMedia MediaDB Restore Error. An error occurred while in bat restore Restart.
%n processing.
50631 FFIipMedia MediaDB Store Error. %n An error occurred while in bat store Restart.
processing.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50632 FFIipMedia Message Box Error. %n An error occurred in the custom message Nothing particular.
box.
50633 FFIipMedia File Format Error. %n The file format is not correct. Nothing particular.
50634 FFIipMedia Cant Terminate by Storrtrv The Terminate process was disabled Wait for a while and then re-implement
busy. %n because the thread was in operation or in because there is a process in operation.
process of finishing.
50635 FFIipMedia DDOFile Invalid. %n An illegal image information file. Nothing particular.
50636 FFIipMedia Reconstruction is Error. %n An error occurred during data Nothing particular.
reconstruction processing.
50637 FFIipMedia Program Error. %n Program error. Restart.
50638 FFIipMedia File I/O Error. %n File I/O error. Restart.
50639 FFIipMedia Memory not allocated. %n Memory securing error. Restart.
50640 FFIipMedia Other Error. %n Other errors. Restart.
50641 FFIipMedia ddo error. %n Failed in image information processing. Nothing particular.
50642 FFIipMedia Drive not Exist. %n The specified drive did not exist. Make sure that the network setting is
correct.
50643 FFIipMedia Disk not Exist. %n There was no disk in the specified drive. Make sure that the network setting is
correct.
50644 FFIipMedia Not Removable. %n The specified drive was not for removable Make sure that the network setting is
media. correct.
50645 FFIipMedia Eject FALSE. %n Media ejection failed. Nothing particular.
50646 FFIipMedia Lock FALSE. %n Media lock failed. Nothing particular.
50647 FFIipMedia Unlock FALSE. %n Media unlock failed. Nothing particular.
50648 FFIipMedia Cannot get Freespace. %n Failed in securing free space. Nothing particular.
50649 FFIipMedia SaveDCMFile FALSE. %n Failed in creating a DICOM format file. Nothing particular.
50650 FFIipMedia SaveDDOFile FALSE. %n Failed in creating an image information file. Nothing particular.
50651 FFIipMedia Set invalid value. %n No parameter values have been set up. Restart.
50652 FFIipMedia Cannot make DICOMDIR. Failed in creating DICOMDIR. Replace the media.
%n
50653 FFIipMedia Cannot create file. %n CreateFile method error. Restart.
50654 FFIipMedia Cannot mapping file. %n CreateFileMapping method error. Restart.
50655 FFIipMedia Cannot mapview of file. %n MapViewOfFile method error. Restart.
50656 FFIipMedia Cannot flushview of file. %n MapViewOfFile method error. Restart.
50657 FFIipMedia Not Found consistflag. %n The file consistency flag was not found in Make sure that the image file is correct.
DICOMDIR.
50658 FFIipMedia Drive not Ready. %n The drive was not ready for use. Nothing particular.
50659 FFIipMedia File not Found. %n The file did not exist. Nothing particular.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50660 FFIipMedia Load DICOMDIR no use. Failed in reading the media management Make sure that the image file is correct.
%n file.
50661 FFIipMedia Initialize failed. %n Failed in initialization processing. Restart.
50662 FFIipMedia Data not found. %n No data available. Make sure that the image file is correct.
50663 FFIipMedia DeleteFile failed. %n Failed in deleting the file. Make sure that the image file is correct.
50664 FFIipMedia Memory not allocated. %n Failed in securing memory. Restart.
50665 FFIipMedia File I/O Error. %n A failure occurred in file reading Restart.
processing.
50666 FFIipMedia Buffer Error. %n Failed in securing buffer. Restart.
50667 FFIipMedia Get filesize failed. %n Failed in acquiring the file size. Restart.
50668 FFIipMedia Not set path. %n No paths have been set. Make sure that the network setting is
correct.
50669 FFIipMedia Incorrect image information. Image information was not correct. Make sure that the image file is correct.
%n
50670 FFIipMedia FFGetString failed. %n A failure occurred with the FFGetString Restart.
function.
50671 FFIipMedia DB COM create failed. % A failure occurred in creation of a database Restart.
instance.
50672 FFIipMedia DB COM connect failed. A failure occurred in connection of the Restart.
%n database.
50673 FFIipMedia DB COM close failed. %n A failure occurred when releasing the Restart.
database.
50674 FFIipMedia ADO queryinterface failed. A failure occurred in acquisition of the ADO Restart.
%n interface.
50675 FFIipMedia DB COM openrecordset Failed in acquiring a record set. Restart.
failed. %n
50676 FFIipMedia DB COM updaterecordset Failed in updating the record. Restart.
failed. %n
50677 FFIipMedia DB COM closerecordset Failed in releasing the record set. Restart.
failed. %n
50678 FFIipMedia DB COM deleterecordset Failed in deleting the record. Restart.
failed. %n
50679 FFIipMedia ADO setrecord failed. %n Failed in setting up the ADO interface Restart.
record.
50680 FFIipMedia FFDicom2Internal failed. A failure occurred with the Restart.
%n FFDicom2Internal function.
50681 FFIipMedia FFInternal2Output failed. A failure occurred with the Restart.
%n FFInternal2Output function.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50700 FFIIPDicomQR Unknown Error. %n[Module] An error of unknown cause occurred. Restart the system.
%1%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode]%3
%n[Ret]%4
%n[Description]%5
50700 FFCustomMsgBox [50700] An unknown error The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
occurred. perform a reinstallation.
50701 FFIIPDicomQR Logical Program Error. An exceptional error occurred. It is difficult Restart the system.
Exception has Occurred. to continue processing because it is a
%n[Module] %1 serious error.
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%n[Ret]%4 %n[Description]
%5
initialization processing. perform a reinstallation.
50702 FFIIPDicomQR Logical Program Error. Not The error that occurred is unsupported Restart the system.
Supported Case. though it is within the supposed range.
%n[Module] %1 Processing cannot be continued because it
%n[Function] %2 is a serious error.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50703 FFIIPDicomQR Initialization Error. An initialization processing error. Restart the system.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50704 FFIIPDicomQR UnInitialization Error. A shutdown processing error. Restart the system.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50705 FFIIPDicomQR System Configuration A system setup acquisition error. Shut down the system to make sure that
Information Acquisition system settings are correct.
Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50706 FFIIPDicomQR Network Configuration A network setting acquisition error. Shut down the system to make sure that
Information Acquisition system settings are correct.
Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50707 FFIIPDicomQR Resource (Message/String/ A resource (message, character string, Restart the system.
Bitmap etc.) Acquisition BMP, etc.) acquisition error.
Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50708 FFIIPDicomQR Registry Information A registry setting acquisition error. Restart the system.
Acquisition
Error. %n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50709 FFIIPDicomQR InterProcess Message An error occurred during an inter-process Restart the system.
Communication Error. message communication.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50710 FFIIPDicomQR Database Access Error. A database access error. Restart the system.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50711 FFIIPDicomQR DDO Access Error. A DDO file access error. Restart the system.
%n[Module]
%1 %n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50720 FFIIPDicomQR Query Processing Error. A search processing error occurred. Restart the system.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
50721 FFIIPDicomQR Queried Information Display A search result display error occurred. Restart the system.
Error. %n[Module] %1 Processing cannot be continued because it
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50740 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieve Processing Error. An acquisition processing error. Processing Restart the system.
%n[Module] %1 cannot be continued because it is a serious
%n[Function] %2 error.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50741 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieved Image Display An acquired image display error occurred. Restart the system.
Error. %n[Module] %1 Processing cannot be continued because it
%n[SpotCode] %3
n[Ret]%4 %n[Description]
%5
50742 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieved Image Output An image delivery processing error Restart the system.
Error. occurred. Processing cannot be continued
%n[Module] %1 because it is a serious error.
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
50809 FFCustomMsgBox [50809] An unknown The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
anomaly was encountered. perform a reinstallation.
50900 FFIIPImgProcServer Error.%n%1 An error occurred while creating a PDI Restart. Image processing
image. server
51001 FFIIPOUTPUT Initialize Warning.%n[%1] Initialization process warning. Check the network settings. If any setting
is incorrect, perform a reinstallation.
The output equipment execution was not
successfully started.
The output equipment name (AE name/
host name) was not successfully acquired
(there was an inconsistency between the
option and network settings).
The FFNET database was not
51001 Spooler Initialize Warning.%n[%1] Initialization process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Output section
occurs, perform a reinstallation. container.
An output device execution was not
successfully started.
An output device name (AE name/host
name) was not successfully acquired.
FFNETDB access was unsuccessful.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
51002 FFIIPOUTPUT State Change State transition notification process Restart.
Warning.%n[%1] warning.
The response to an acquisition request

51002 Spooler State Change State change notification process warning. Restart. Output section
Warning.%n[%1] container.
An acquisition request was not
successfully answered.
51007 Spooler Terminate Warning.%n[%1] Termination process warning. Restart. Output section
container.
A process status flag was not successfully
set.
A process termination response message
An abnormality occurrence notification
transmitted.
A message box was not successfully
displayed.
A spooler termination request was not
A spooler control end request was not
The spooler control end response state
was abnormal.
An image process control end request
An output device control end request was
The output device control end response
state was abnormal.
51010 FFCustomMsgBox [51010] Specified device The setup data was incorrect or the Reset the data or check the equipment.
does not exist. equipment not started.
51011 FFCustomMsgBox [51011] Failed in reading of The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings.
the configuration file file could not be read.
(TagLookup.ini).
51012 FFCustomMsgBox [51012] Failed in reading of The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings.
the gray level correction file could not be read.
file.
51013 FFCustomMsgBox [51013] Failed in output The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
process. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
51015 FFIIPOUTPUT Terminate Warning.%n[%1] Termination process warning. Restart.
The process status flag was not

successfully set.
The process termination response
transmitted.
The abnormality occurrence notification
transmitted.
The message box was not successfully
opened.
The spooler termination request call was
The spooler control termination request
call was not successfully made.
The spooler control termination response
status was abnormal.
The image processing control termination
The output equipment control termination
The output equipment control termination
response status was abnormal.
51300 FFCustomMsgBox [51300] The measurement The measurement process could not be Make sure that the images are entered.
process cannot be performed because there was no image.
performed.
51301 FFCustomMsgBox [51301] The hard disk is The remaining free space is insufficient. Increase the free space and then perform
full. the output process again.
51302 FFCustomMsgBox [51302] Failed in the image The image output process could not be Start up the host at the output destination
output process. performed because the host at the output and then perform the output process again.
destination was not running.
51303 FFCustomMsgBox [51303] The measurement The measurement process could not be To perform the measurement process, use
process cannot be performed because images derived from images that are derived from the same
performed. different image readers are contained in a image reader.
single study.
51304 FFCustomMsgBox [51304] The measurement All the images necessary for measurement Make sure that the images are entered.
process cannot be process execution were not entered.
performed.
51305 FFCustomMsgBox [51305] The measurement The measurement process can be Check the 1-Shot Phantom image size and
process cannot be performed only when the 1-Shot Phantom make an exposure again.
performed. image size is 2430cm or larger.
51306 FFCustomMsgBox [51306] The entered value The entered monitor dosage value was out Enter another value.
is illegal. of range.
51307 FFCustomMsgBox [51307] The entered value The artifact setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
51308 FFCustomMsgBox [51308] The entered value The burger phantom setting was out of Enter another value.
is illegal. range.
51309 FFCustomMsgBox [51309] The entered value The wire mesh setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
51310 FFCustomMsgBox [51310] The data save The save process could not be performed Make sure that the images are entered.
process cannot be because there was no image.
performed.
51311 FFCustomMsgBox [51311] The measurement The phantom position was invalid. Ensure that the phantom is properly
process cannot be positioned for the IP, and then make an
performed. exposure again.
51312 FFCustomMsgBox [51312] Failed in the image The selected image was not found. Select an image that can be output.
output process.
51313 FFCustomMsgBox [51313] The entered value The S-value setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
51314 FFCustomMsgBox [51314] The entered value The shading setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
51315 FFCustomMsgBox [51315] The entered value The image noise setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
51316 FFCustomMsgBox [51316] The entered value The sharpness setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
51317 FFCustomMsgBox [51317] The entered value The jitter setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
51318 FFCustomMsgBox [51318] The entered value The linearity setting was out of range. Enter another value.
is illegal.
51319 FFCustomMsgBox [51319] The entered value The setting for accuracy of measurement Enter another value.
is illegal. was out of range.
51320 FFCustomMsgBox [51320] Failed in accessing The image file was not found. Make sure that the images are entered.
the image file.
51321 FFCustomMsgBox [51321] Failed in accessing The database could not be accessed. Restart.
the database. [ReaderQC]
51322 FFCustomMsgBox [51322] Failed in the data The output file was not successfully Perform the log output process again.
save process. created.
51323 FFCustomMsgBox [51323] An error of Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
51324 FFCustomMsgBox [51324] The measurement The measurement process could not be Check the menu for a mixture of high- and
process cannot be performed because images differing in standard-pixel density images, and then
performed. reading pixel density coexisted. make an exposure again.
51325 FFCustomMsgBox [51325] The image is The 1-Shot Phantom image was invalid. Ensure that the phantom is properly
illegal. positioned for the IP, and then make an
exposure again.
51326 FFCustomMsgBox [51326] The measurement The image reader name was not set for the Ensure that the name is properly set.
process cannot be image file.
performed.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
51501 FFCustomMsgBox [51501] Failed in An abnormality occurred during the Processes other than FINP input can be
initialization processing. initialization of the FINP input subsystem. performed.
51502 FFCustomMsgBox [51502] Descrepancy in The PRINT attribute output destination was Specify the PRINT attribute output
settings. not specified. destination.
51701 FFIIPDicomQR Failed in Query Processing. Necessary processing failed. Continue processing. If the same error still Change of an existing
%n[Module] %1 occurs, restart the system. log
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
51702 FFCustomMsgBox [51702] Failed in displaying The search result includes illegal data. Stop acquiring studies that include illegal
the study information list. information.
51710 FFCustomMsgBox [51710] Input information Input information includes illegal data. Input correct data.
includes illegal characters.
51711 FFCustomMsgBox [51711] Input information Input information includes illegal data. Input correct data.
exceeds the limit number of
characters.
51712 FFCustomMsgBox [51712] The hit rate of The number of hit studies is many. Narrow down the search conditions
searching for studies accordingly.
exceeded the limit value.
Search processing is
suspended.
51713 FFCustomMsgBox [51713] Failed in searching The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
study information. perform a reinstallation.
51714 FFCustomMsgBox [51714] A network error The network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
occurred while in search of connected equipment.
study information.
51715 FFCustomMsgBox [51715] A timeout error The network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
occurred while in search of connected equipment.
study information. No
responses come from
equipment targeted for
search.
51717 FFCustomMsgBox [51717] Information of The network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
equipment targeted for connected equipment.
search cannot be found.
Network settings may not
be correct.
51718 FFCustomMsgBox [51718] A communication The network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
error occurred while in connected equipment.
search of study information.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
51720 FFIIPDicomQR Query Processing Error. A search processing error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
%n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued after the system.
%n[Function] %2 error is notified to the user as it is
%n[SpotCode] %3 insignificant.
%5
51721 FFIIPDicomQR Queried Information Display A search result display error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
Error. %n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued after the system.
%5
processing to acquire perform a reinstallation.
studies.
51722 FFCustomMsgBox [51722] Failed in Free space on the hard disk is insufficient. Increase free space on the hard disk
processing to acquire appropriately.
studies. Free hard disk
space is not sufficient.
51722 FFIIPDicomQR Failed in Query Processing. A query processing error occurred. Continue processing. If the same error still Change of an existing
%n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued after the recurs, restart the system. log
%5
51723 FFCustomMsgBox [51723] Failed in An acquired study includes illegal data. Stop acquiring studies that include illegal
processing to acquire information.
studies. Studies include
images that cannot be
displayed.
51725 FFCustomMsgBox [51725] Information of Network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
equipment targeted for connected equipment.
image acquisition cannot
be found. Network settings
may not be correct.
51726 FFCustomMsgBox [51726] A communication Network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
error occurred in an attempt connected equipment.
to acquire studies.
51727 FFCustomMsgBox [51727] A timeout error Network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
occurred while in process connected equipment.
of study acquisition. No
responses come from the
equipment targeted for
study acquisition.
51729 FFCustomMsgBox [51729] Input information is Input information includes illegal data. Input correct information.
not correct.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
51730 FFCustomMsgBox [51730] An attempt is made Acquired study information includes illegal Stop acquiring studies that include illegal
to acquire a study data. information.
generated by an unknown
modality.
51731 FFCustomMsgBox [51731] A study generated Acquired information includes illegal data. Stop acquiring studies that include illegal
by an unknown modality information.
was acquired.
51732 FFCustomMsgBox [51732] The hit rate of The number of hit studies is many. Narrow down the search conditions
searching for studies accordingly.
exceeded the listed limit
value.
51740 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieve Processing Error. A study acquisition error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
%n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued after the system.
%5
51741 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieved Image Display An error occurred when displaying If the same error still recurs, restart the
Error. %n[Module] %1 acquired images. Processing can be system.
%n[Function] %2 continued after the error is notified to the
%n[SpotCode] %3 user as it is insignificant.
%5
51742 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieved Image Output A delivery processing error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
Error. %n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued after the system.
%5
51743 FFIIPDicomQR Failed in Retrieve An acquisition error occurred. Processing Continue processing. If the same error still Change of an existing
Processing. can be continued after the error is notified recurs, restart the system. log
%n[Module] %1 to the user as it is insignificant.
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
51805 FFCustomMsgBox [51805] Failed in image Acquired studies include illegal data. Stop acquiring studies that include illegal
display processing. Some information.
images cannot be
displayed.
51806 FFCustomMsgBox [51806] Failed in image Acquired studies include illegal data. Stop acquiring studies that include illegal
distribution processing. information.
51810 FFCustomMsgBox [51810] Information on the Network settings were inappropriate. Check settings of network and other
device targeted for image connected equipment.
printout was not found.
Network settings may
possibly be incorrect.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
52000 FFFinpSend Warning.%n%1 Information for development personnel. There is no problem with operations.
52000 FFOutImgPrc Warning.%n%1 Information for development personnel. There is no problem with operations.
52002 FFEifPrinter SMCU Driver error. An error occurred in the SMCU driver. Restart.
[%1] The problem might have been caused, for
instance, by data incompleteness or
system instability.
52003 FFEifPrinter EIFIMG Driver error. An error occurred in the EIFIMG driver. It is Restart.
[%1] conceivable that the system was unstable.
52004 FFEifPrinter Received unexpected An unknown command was received from Check the log of communications with the
command. the printer. connected printer or restart the printer/IIP.
[%1]
52006 FFEifPrinter File Error. The raw data file for output was not found. Since the problem is attributable to a
[%1] program error, try performing a reinstall.
52100 FFQCMsgBox Custom DB Access Error. The bitmap was not successfully acquired. Check that the bitmap file is installed.
[File Name]
[Function Name] [50112]
52100 Spooler Spooler Warning.%n%1 Common warning message. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Queue information class related initialize the image database.
message. Image information
(SOPInstanceUID) was not successfully
acquired. The job status was not
Spooler class related message.
A database connection was not
successfully closed.
Illegal image display format data.
52101 Spooler RunProc Warning.%n%1 Initialization process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A character string database connection initialize the image database.
was not successfully opened.
52102 FFQCMsgBox SysConfig DB Access An error/invalid value was encountered Restart.
Failure (Processing when an attempt was made to acquire a
continuation). system setup database access API value.
[File Name]
52103 FFQCMsgBox LangStr DB Access Failure An error occurred when an attempt was Restart.
(Processing continuation). made to acquire a character string
[File Name] database access API value.
52103 Spooler StateChangeProc Local printer/Dicom printer state change Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Warning.%n%1 notification process warning. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
A unit state character string was not
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
52105 FFQCMsgBox FF32 Access Failure The FF32 library (FF32dll) return value It is probable that the installation was not
(Probably acquisition of was in error. properly completed. Perform a
Registry goes wrong) reinstallation.
[File Name] * For option key registry acquisition, no
[Function Name] [52105] error occurs even if the key is missing.
52105 Spooler RestoreJob Warning.%n%1 Job restoration warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An output job file was not successfully initialize the image database.
accessed.
52106 Spooler SpoolProc Warning.%n%1 Spool process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Unit information acquisition was not initialize the image database.
successful.
File deletion was not successful.
Queue cancellation was not successful.
Data was not successfully written into a
log file.
52108 FFQCMsgBox Custom DB Access Failure An attempt to set/acquire a value from Restart.
(Processing continuation) ReaderQC.mdb failed.
[File Name]
52108 Spooler StudyReqEndProc Examination end request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Warning.%n%1 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
A database was not successfully initialize the image database.
accessed.
DDO file information was not successfully
acquired.
52109 FFQCMsgBox FF32 DB Access Failure Registry setup/acquisition failed It is probable that the registry information
(Processing continuation) (replaceable). was not properly installed. Perform a
[File Name] reinstallation.
52109 Spooler ExeOutputJob Forced output request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
DDO file information was not successfully initialize the image database.
acquired.
52110 FFQCMsgBox FF32 DB Access Failure An image file access error occurred. Since the image is valid, make an
(Processing continuation) exposure again.
[File Name]
52110 Spooler GetImageProcJob Image processing job acquisition process Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Warning.%n%1 warning. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
An output unit type parameter error
occurred.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
52112 Spooler GetOutputProcJob Output job acquisition response process Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An output unit type parameter error was
encountered.
52114 Spooler GetCommitProcJob Commitment job acquisition response Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Warning.%n%1 process warning. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
A commitment equipment type parameter
error occurred.
52116 Spooler QueueDelete Queue deletion request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
An image database flag was not initialize the image database.
successfully set.
The DDO file was not successfully
deleted.
52117 Spooler UnitSuspend Unit suspension request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A unit status character string was not initialize the image database.
52118 Spooler QueueDelete Queue deletion request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The image database flag was not initialize the image database.
successfully set.
The DDO file was not successfully
deleted.
52118 Spooler UnitResume Unit resumption request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
A unit status acquisition error occurred. initialize the image database.
52119 Spooler UnitSuspend Equipment suspension request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The equipment status character string
52120 Spooler UnitResume Equipment resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently
An equipment status acquisition error
occurred.
52400 FFQCAAutocalccom File %1, Spot %2, Code Warning information. Perform reexposure and then
%3. measurement processing because the
image is illegal.
52500 FFQCAAutocalccom File %1, Spot %2, Code Fatal error (exceptional error).
%3.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
52720 FFIIPDicomQR Query Processing Error. A search processing error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
%n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued as it is system.
%n[Function] %2 insignificant.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
52721 FFIIPDicomQR Queried Information Display A search result display error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
Error. %n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued as it is system.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
52740 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieve Processing Error. A study acquisition error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
%n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued as it is system.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
52741 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieved Image Display An error occurred when displaying an If the same error still recurs, restart the
Error. %n[Module] %1 acquired study. Processing can be system.
%n[Function] %2 continued as it is insignificant.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
52742 FFIIPDicomQR Retrieved Image Output A delivery processing error occurred. If the same error still recurs, restart the
Error. %n[Module] %1 Processing can be continued as it is system.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
52750 FFIIPDicomQR Logical Program Error. A timeout error occurred. Shut down the system to ensure that
%nNetwork Warning network settings are correct. Make sure
(Timeout). %n%1 %n %2 that other connected equipment is
operating properly.
52751 FFIIPDicomQR Network Warning(Over The number for hit results exceeded the Suspend search processing. Narrow down
Number Of Result). %n%1 upper limit. the search conditions to retry search
%n %2 processing.
52760 FFTsSearchCondition Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52761 FFTsSearchCondition DB Operation Status A warning given when the database Restart the system.
Warning. %n operation result status is illegal.
52770 FFMaSearchCOM Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52771 FFMaSearchCOM Network Error. %n A network error occurred. Restart the system.
52772 FFMaSearchCOM Network Error. %n The number for hit results exceeded the Restart the system.
upper limit.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
52800 FFIIPDicomQR Network Warning(Timeout). A timeout error occurred. Shut down the system to ensure that
%n%1 %n %2 network settings are correct. Make sure
that other connected equipment is
operating properly.
52801 FFIIPDicomQR Network Warning(DiskFull). The hard disk is full. Suspend acquisition of studies. Increase
%n%1 %n %2 free space on the hard disk and then retry
acquisition.
52802 FFIIPDicomQR Warning(Retrieve Image The acquired study does not include Make sure that other connected equipment
Nothing). %n%1 %n %2 images. retains correct study information.
52810 FFTsImgRetInd Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52820 FFMaRetrieve Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52821 FFMaRetrieve Storage SCP not found. %n No Storage SCP is set up. Restart the system.
52822 FFMaRetrieve Cannot Get NetWork Necessary network settings cannot be Restart the system.
Setting. %n acquired.
52823 FFMaRetrieve Integration Warning in There is a problem with consistency of the Restart the system.
DataBase. %n database.
52824 FFMaRetrieve DICOM Data Waring. %n A DICOM data-related warning. Restart the system.
52825 FFMaRetrieve Local Retrieve Warning. A warning given when images cannot be Restart the system.
%n acquired locally.
52826 FFMaRetrieve Input Image Warning A warning given when an SH image is Restart the system.
(DensityCode = SH). %n input.
52850 FFMaCommon Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52851 FFMaCommon Debug Log OutPut. %n Event log output number for debugging Restart the system.
purposes.
52852 FFMaCommon Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52860 FFMaCommonImage Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52870 FFTsCommon Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. Restart the system.
52871 FFTsCommon Catch DB exception. %n An exceptional access to the database. Restart the system.
52900 FFIIPImgProcServer Warning.%n%1 There is a defect in the specified data. Check to see that the system configuration Image processing
is correct. server
52901 FFIIPImgProcServer Dicom Data Object Image information processing failed while Restart. Image processing
Error.%n%1 creating a PDI image. server
52902 FFIIPImgProcServer JOB Error.%n%1 An attempt to create JOB information Restart. Image processing
resulted in a failure while creating a PDI server
image.
52903 FFIIPImgProcServer I/F Error.%n%1 An error occurred when a request was Restart. Image processing
issued to create a PDI image. server
53106 Spooler SpoolProc Information in a spool process. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Spooler
Infomation.%n%1 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
Unit type mismatch notification. initialize the image database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
53820 FFMaRetrieve Retrieve Process Start. %n Process startup. Restart the system.
53821 FFMaRetrieve Retrieve Process End. %n Process shutdown. Restart the system.
53823 FFMaRetrieve Image is Already Exists in Information given when the same image is Restart the system.
ImageDB. %n input.
53827 FFMaRetrieve 12Bits Image Cannot Discard the retrieved image as no 12-bit There is no problem with operations.
Retrieve. image can be acquired. Select another image that is not 12-bit.
This Image Is Deleted.
53870 FFTsCommon Retry is success. %n Database retry information. Restart the system.
54100 FFQCMsgBox Journal Proc Failure. Writing error. Check to see the media has not been
[File Name] prohibited for writing.
54600 FFIipMedia HDD Disk Full Error. %n The HDD disk was full. Secure sufficient HDD space by, for
example, deleting unnecessary images.
54601 FFIipMedia Network Error. %n An error occurred on the network. Make sure that the network setting is
correct.
54602 FFIipMedia Not Mount. %n No destination has been mounted for data Mount the drive.
storage.
54603 FFIipMedia Media Ctrl(Format or Media control (either of formatting, Retry after a while because either of
Mount or Unmount)Run. mounting and unmounting) was in process. formatting, mounting and unmounting is in
%n process.
54604 FFIipMedia Media Read Only. %n The media was for read only. Nothing particular.
54605 FFIipMedia Media Unformat. %n The media was not formatted. Nothing particular.
54606 FFIipMedia Media Storage Is Media storage was in process. Retry after a while because there is a
Operating. %n process in operation.
54607 FFIipMedia Message reception from A message received from other equipment Nothing particular.
other cases. %n units.
54608 FFIipMedia ReceptionMessage is The received message was not normal. Restart.
Abnormal. %n
54609 FFIipMedia Next Transaction by The next processing started as a timeout Nothing particular.
Timeout. %n occurred.
54610 FFIipMedia Media Is Already Mount. The media has already been mounted. Nothing particular.
%n
54611 FFIipMedia Set Default by acquisition Default was set because a failure occurred Nothing particular.
failure. %n during data acquisition from Directory.ini.
54612 FFIipMedia Media White Protect. %n The media was write-protected. Nothing particular.
54613 FFIipMedia DICOMDIR Read Only. %n The DICOMDIR file was for read only. Nothing particular.
54614 FFIipMedia Cant Format by Formatting was not possible because there Nothing particular.
DICOMDIRfile. %n was the DICOMDIR file.
54615 FFIipMedia Not Browseable Media. %n It was not browseable media. Nothing particular.
54616 FFIipMedia Not Writeable Media. %n It was not writable media. Nothing particular.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
54617 FFIipMedia No DICOMDIR Other Exist. There was no DICOMDIR file but were Nothing particular.
%n other files.
54618 FFIipMedia DICOMDIR is mismatching. The DICOM DIR file was mismatching. Reconstruct the media.
%n
54619 FFIipMedia Media no exist. %n No media existed. Nothing particular.
54620 FFIipMedia Mount User Cancel. %n The user canceled mounting processing. Nothing particular.
54621 FFIipMedia Version is Different. %n The database version was different from Nothing particular.
that of the version file.
54622 FFIipMedia Media Diskfull. %n The media disk was full. Replace the media.
54623 FFIipMedia Image not exist in media. Images for the requested study did not Nothing particular.
%n exist in the media.
54624 FFIipMedia Image cant get Exist by Images that couldnt be acquired due to an Nothing particular.
Error. %n error existed in the acquired study.
54625 FFIipMedia Allcancel by Electric Power Processing discontinued due to power Restart.
Stop. %n rupture.
54625 FFCustomMsgBox [54625] Power interruption Processing discontinued due to power Check the power cable and then restart.
was detected. rupture.
54626 FFIipMedia DICOMDIR not Exist. %n The DICOMDIR file did not exist. Make sure that the image file is correct.
54626 FFCustomMsgBox [54626] No media The DICOMDIR file did not exist. Make sure that the image file is correct.
management files exist.
54627 FFIipMedia DICOMDIR is protected. The management file was for read only or Nothing particular.
%n write-protected.
54628 FFIipMedia Unsuitable right format. %n The media was unformatted or improperly Nothing particular.
formatted.
54629 FFIipMedia Cancellation demand. %n Processing canceled as it was requested. Nothing particular.
54630 FFIipMedia Reconstruction is not need. The management file needs not to be Nothing particular.
%n reconstructed.
54631 FFIipMedia Disk Limit. %n The free disk space available was not Secure sufficient HDD space by, for
sufficient. example, deleting unnecessary images.
54632 FFIipMedia Other File Exists (May I Files other than DICOMDIR existed. (Are Nothing particular.
format?). %n you sure to format?)
54633 FFIipMedia Push the O.K. button after Insert the media and press the OK button. Nothing particular.
inserting media. %n
54634 FFIipMedia Finish Reconstruct. %n Reconstruction finished. Nothing particular.
54635 FFIipMedia Auto Mount Finished. %n Auto mounting finished. Nothing particular.
54640 FFIipMedia Other Information. %n, Other information. Nothing particular.
59001 FFEifPrinter System call has failed. [%1] An error returned upon a WIN32 API Restart.
function call. It is conceivable that the
system was unstable.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
59005 FFEifPrinter Unable to setup timers. An unknown timer event occurred. It is Restart.
[%1] conceivable that the system was unstable.
59100 FFQCMsgBox FF32 Error. An FF32 library (FF32.dll) return value It is possible that the registry information
[File Name] error (irreplaceable). has not been installed correctly. Perform a
[Function Name] [59100] reinstallation.
59102 FFQCMshBox Cant get Tag Information. No value is set up for the tag information Perform reexposure because the image is
[File Name] even though it must have been set up illegal.
[Function Name] [59102] accordingly (irreplaceable).
59103 FFQCMsgBox Memory or Resource Failed in obtaining memory/handle Increase available resources and then
cannot be gained. resource. retry.
[File Name]
59198 FFQCMsgBox Secondary detection code A secondary detection code return value
Error. error.
[File Name]
59701 FFIIPDicomQR Logical Program Error. An exceptional error occurred. Processing If the same error still recurs, restart the
Exception has Occurred. can be continued because it is insignificant. system.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
59702 FFIIPDicomQR Logical Program Error. Not The error that occurred is unsupported If the same error still recurs, restart the
Supported Case. though it is within the supposed range. system.
%n[Function] %2 is insignificant.
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
59751 FFIIPDicomQR Catch Exception Error. An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
%n%1 %n %2 unexpectedly.
59761 FFTsSearchCondition Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
59762 FFTsSearchCondition Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
memory to be secured appropriately.
59763 FFTsSearchCondition Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
memory to be released appropriately.
59771 FFMaSearchCOM Catch Exception Error. %n An unexceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
59772 FFMaSearchCOM Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59773 FFMaSearchCOM Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
59774 FFMaSearchCOM Data Base Error. %n A database error occurred. Restart the system if the relevant
processing has been completed.
If the relevant processing remains
unprocessed, there may be an illegal study
in the server targeted for search of data. In
this case, no particular remedial measures
need to be taken.
59801 FFIIPDicomQR Catch Exception Error. An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
%n%1 %n %2 unexpectedly.
59802 FFIIPDicomQR Invalid Propaty Error. Illegal properties (AddIndicationMethod Restart the system.
%n%1 %n %2 only).
59811 FFTsImgRetInd Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
59812 FFTsImgRetInd Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59813 FFTsImgRetInd Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59821 FFMaRetrieve Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
59822 FFMaRetrieve Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59823 FFMaRetrieve Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59824 FFMaRetrieve Process Communication An error occurred in the communication Restart the system.
Error. %n control.
59825 FFMaRetrieve Retrieve Process Exists. A process was started double. Restart the system.
%n
59826 FFMaRetrieve Image is Already Exists in Image input is disabled because the same Restart the system.
ImageDB. %n image already exists in the image
database.
59827 FFMaRetrieve File Error. %n A file error occurred. Restart the system.
59828 FFMaRetrieve NetWork Error. %n The association was disconnected due to Restart the system.
a network error.
59829 FFMaRetrieve Cannot Get NetWork Necessary network settings cannot be Restart the system.
Setting. %n acquired.
59830 FFMaRetrieve DICOM Retrieve Timeout. A timeout error occurred in an attempt to Restart the system.
%n acquire a study.
59831 FFMaRetrieve DICOM Retrieve is Not DICOM acquisition processing is not Restart the system.
Able to Use Now. %n available at present.
59832 FFMaRetrieve Processing Image is Processing is disabled because the image Restart the system.
Deleted. %n was deleted.
59851 FFMaCommon Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
59852 FFMaCommon Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59853 FFMaCommon Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59855 FFMaCommon Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
59856 FFMaCommon Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59857 FFMaCommon Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59861 FFMaCommonImage Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
59862 FFMaCommonImage Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59863 FFMaCommonImage Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59871 FFTsCommon Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred Restart the system.
unexpectedly.
59872 FFTsCommon Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59873 FFTsCommon Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the Restart the system.
59900 FFIIPImgProcServer Exception Error.%n%1 An exceptional error occurred. Reinstall the system. Image processing
server
60000 FFCustomMsgBox [60000] Failed in accessing An apostrophe was used for exposure Upgrade the software to version A08 or
the database. menu name setup with the user utility later.
when the employed software version was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
A07 or earlier. perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file is
damaged or deleted.
60002 FFCustomMsgBox [60002] User Utility will be There is no alternative but to exit the Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
terminated. program due to the occurrence of an perform a reinstallation.
abnormality.
the character string damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
database.
60053 FFCustomMsgBox [60053] Value of registry It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
information is abnormal. information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
character string database.
60056 FFCustomMsgBox [60056] Failed in obtaining The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings.
the information from the file could not be read.
system setting file.
60057 FFCustomMsgBox [60057] Failed in setting The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings.
information to the system file could not be read.
setting file.
the display group damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
information.
the menu information. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the MPM code. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
the XCON parameter. damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
database.
the film annotation damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
the film annotation damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
database.
60251 FFCustomMsgBox [60251] Image processing The image processing parameter data is Check the image processing parameters.
parameter data is abnormal.
abnormal.
60260 FFCustomMsgBox [60260] System has not It is conceivable that the IIP executable file Reinstall.
been rebooted. was damaged or deleted.
60300 FFCustomMsgBox [60300] The option and the The menu data and the option do not Install a menu that is suited to the option.
database do not agree with agree with each other.
each other.
60301 FFCustomMsgBox [60301] Data storage The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
resulted in a failure. or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
60302 FFCustomMsgBox [60302] Failed in deleting The database file may have been damaged Reinstall. If the same symptom recurs,
image data. or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
61060 FFCustomMsgBox [61060] Wrong password An incorrect password was entered. The password is fixed at 1111.
has been input.
61082 FFCustomMsgBox [61082] No menu has been An attempt was made to start an editing or Complete a menu selection before initiating
selected. like operation without selecting any menu. an editing or like operation.
61083 FFCustomMsgBox [61083] Already registered The menu could not be deleted because it Clear the registration for display and then
for displaying and cannot was registered for display. delete the menu.
be deleted.
61084 FFCustomMsgBox [61084] Already registered The menu could not be deleted because it Remove the target menu from the
to the study menu and was registered for the examination menu. examination menu in advance.
cannot be deleted.
61085 FFCustomMsgBox [61085] No menu was A certain display group was empty because No empty display group is allowed to exist.
registered for a certain no menu was registered for it. Register one or more menus for the display
display group. group or delete the display group.
has been input in the instance, to the inclusion of an
display group name. unacceptable character.
61093 FFCustomMsgBox [61093] Display group will This window opens for confirmation only.
be deleted.
61094 FFCustomMsgBox [61094] Display group The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
name is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the
inclusion of an unacceptable character.
61103 FFCustomMsgBox [61103] Same extension The entered data value was already Enter another value.
menu code already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61106 FFCustomMsgBox [61106] Same ANK The entered data value was already Enter another value.
exposure menu name registered or otherwise unacceptable.
already exists.
61109 FFCustomMsgBox [61109] Same kanji- The entered data value was already Enter another value.
exposure menu name registered or otherwise unacceptable.
already exists.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
61110 FFCustomMsgBox [61110] Extension menu The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
code is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the
61111 FFCustomMsgBox [61111] ANK exposure The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
menu name is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the
61112 FFCustomMsgBox [61112] Kanji-exposure The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
menu name is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the
61122 FFCustomMsgBox [61122] MPM code is The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the
61125 FFCustomMsgBox [61125] Same film The entered data value was already Enter another value.
annotation already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61130 FFCustomMsgBox [61130] Device code is The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
61131 FFCustomMsgBox [61131] Film-related code is The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
61132 FFCustomMsgBox [61132] Auto-exposure The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
mechanism is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the
61142 FFCustomMsgBox [61142] Same study menu The entered data value was already Enter another value.
code already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61145 FFCustomMsgBox [61145] Same ANK study The entered data value was already Enter another value.
menu name already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61148 FFCustomMsgBox [61148] Same kanji-study The entered data value was already Enter another value.
menu name already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61149 FFCustomMsgBox [61149] No exposure menu An attempt was made to start an editing or Complete a menu selection before initiating
has been selected. like operation without selecting any menu. an editing or like operation.
61151 FFCustomMsgBox [61151] Exposure menu The maximum permissible number of Delete any unnecessary menu.
cannot be registered. menu registrations was exceeded.
61152 FFCustomMsgBox [61152] Same exposure The entered data value was already Enter another value.
menu has already been registered or otherwise unacceptable.
registered.
61153 FFCustomMsgBox [61153] Study menu code The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the
61154 FFCustomMsgBox [61154] ANK study menu The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
61155 FFCustomMsgBox [61155] Kanji-study menu The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
61171 FFCustomMsgBox [61171] No technician code An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.
has been input. an input field left blank.
61172 FFCustomMsgBox [61172] Technician code is The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry.
61173 FFCustomMsgBox [61173] Invalid character An unacceptable character was contained. Make a proper entry.
has been input in the
technician code.
61174 FFCustomMsgBox [61174] Same technician The entered data value was already Enter another value.
code already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61175 FFCustomMsgBox [61175] No ANK technician An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.
name has been input. an input field left blank.
61176 FFCustomMsgBox [61176] ANK technician The entered data was too long. Make a proper entry.
name is too long.
has been input in the ANK
technician name.
technician name already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
exists.
61179 FFCustomMsgBox [61179] No kanji-technician An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.
name has been input. an input field left blank.
61180 FFCustomMsgBox [61180] Kanji-technician The entered data was too long. Make a proper entry.
name is too long.
has been input in the kanji-
technician name.
technician name already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
exists.
61191 FFCustomMsgBox [61191] No requesting An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.
department code has been an input field left blank.
input.
61192 FFCustomMsgBox [61192] Requesting The entered data was too long. Make a proper entry.
department code is too
long.
has been input in the
requesting department
code.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
61194 FFCustomMsgBox [61194] Same requesting The entered data value was already Enter another value.
department code already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
exists.
61195 FFCustomMsgBox [61195] No ANK requesting An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.
department name has been an input field left blank.
input.
61196 FFCustomMsgBox [61196] ANK requesting The entered data was too long. Make a proper entry.
department name is too
long.
has been input in the ANK
name.
requesting department registered or otherwise unacceptable.
name already exists.
61199 FFCustomMsgBox [61199] No kanji-requesting An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.
department name has been an input field left blank.
input.
61200 FFCustomMsgBox [61200] Kanji-requesting The entered data was too long. Make a proper entry.
department name is too
long.
61201 FFCustomMsgBox [61201] Invalid character The entered data value was already Make a proper entry.
has been input in the Kanji- registered or otherwise unacceptable.
name.
requesting department registered or otherwise unacceptable.
name already exists.
61211 FFCustomMsgBox [61211] No film annotation An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.
characters have been input. an input field left blank.
61212 FFCustomMsgBox [61212] Film annotation The entered data was too long. Make a proper entry.
characters are too long.
has been input in the film
annotation characters.
61214 FFCustomMsgBox [61214] Same film The entered data value was already Enter another value.
annotation already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61224 FFCustomMsgBox [61224] Drive is not ready. No media was inserted into the drive. Insert media.
61234 FFCustomMsgBox [61234] Drive is not ready. No media was inserted into the drive. Insert media.
61235 FFCustomMsgBox [61235] Wrong disk A wrong media was inserted into the drive. Insert correct media.
61236 FFCustomMsgBox [61236] Wrong disk A wrong media was inserted into the drive. Insert correct media.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
61300 FFCustomMsgBox [61300] Backup processing The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
61301 FFCustomMsgBox [61301] Restore processing The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
61302 FFCustomMsgBox [61302] An error of The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
61303 FFCustomMsgBox [61303] Failed in importing
The problem is attributable, for instance, to Prepare a consumables database again.
the consumables database.a damaged file.
61340 FFCustomMsgBox [61340] A file backed up An attempt was made to restore a backup To restore to the IIP, use a backup file
with another application made by the Viewer for use with the IIP or generated by the IIP. To restore to the
cannot be restored. to restore a backup made by the IIP for Viewer, use a backup file generated by the
use with the Viewer. Viewer.
61341 FFCustomMsgBox [61341] This is not a A file other than Supply.mdb was selected Select a Supply.mdb file.
contrast medium database for an import.
file.
61342 FFCustomMsgBox [61342] No backup files Specified drive or folder can be incorrect. Specify a correct destination for data
exist. backup.
64220 FFCustomMsgBox [64220] Backup is This window opens for confirmation only.
interrupted.
64221 FFCustomMsgBox [64221] Backup is This window opens for confirmation only.
completed.
64222 FFCustomMsgBox [64222] Backup is being This window opens for confirmation only.
prepared.
64223 FFCustomMsgBox [64223] Insert FD. This window opens for confirmation only.
64230 FFCustomMsgBox [64230] Restoring is This window opens for confirmation only.
interrupted.
64231 FFCustomMsgBox [64231] Restoring is This window opens for confirmation only.
completed.
64232 FFCustomMsgBox [64232] Being restored. This window opens for confirmation only.
64250 FFCustomMsgBox [64250] Parameter Batch This window opens for confirmation only.
Updating
64313 FFCustomMsgBox [64313] Unable to obtain The setup file format is not correct or Check settings.
system configuration of the cannot be read.
target destination for image
data transfer.
64314 FFCustomMsgBox [64314] Unable to obtain The setup file format is not correct or Check settings.
system configuration. cannot be read.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
64460 FFCustomMsgBox [64460] File extension is The MPM code has reached its limit. Allot existing MPM code or use extended
not possible because the MPM code.
MPM code has reached its
limit for extension.
64595 FFCustomMsgBox [64595] Failed in launching The linking application is not installed Reinstall the linking application.
Ascent View setting correctly.
window.
70000 FFCustomMsgBox [70000] Failed in It is possible that the RetakeAnalyisData. Open the RetakeAnalysisData.mdb file
conversion of mis-exposure mdb file is write-protected. properties to check to see if it is write-
image log information. protected.
70001 FFCustomMsgBox [70001] Failed in deletion of It is possible that the RetakeAnalyisData. Open the RetakeAnalysisData.mdb file
log files. mdb file is write-protected. properties to check to see if it is write-
protected.
70002 FFCustomMsgBox [70002] Failed in accessing It is possible that the file is damaged or Restart the system. If the same symptom
the definition file. deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
70005 FFCustomMsgBox [70005] Connection to the It is possible that the database file is Restart the system. If the same symptom
system setting database damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
resulted unsuccessful.
70006 FFCustomMsgBox [70006] Failed in acquiring It is possible that the database file is Restart the system. If the same symptom
information from the system damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
character string database damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
information from the damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
character string database.
70009 FFCustomMsgBox [70009] Failed in acquiring It is possible that the registry information is Restart the system. If the same symptom
registry information. damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
70010 FFCustomMsgBox [70010] Failed in writing It is possible that the registry information is Restart the system. If the same symptom
registry information. damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
technologist information. damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
classifications of mis- damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
exposure images.
comments on mis-exposure damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
images.
log information database damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
information for setup of damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
mis-exposure image
analysis.
70016 FFCustomMsgBox [70016] Failed in reading It is possible that the image file is damaged Although the image file in question is not
image files. or deleted. displayed, there are no problems with
other operations.
70017 FFCustomMsgBox [70017] Failed in displaying An error occurred while in image Restart the system. If the same symptom
images. processing. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
70019 FFCustomMsgBox [70019] Failed in The date display format may have been Input in a correct format.
conversion of date format. input incorrectly.
70020 FFCustomMsgBox [70020] Failed in storage of This error is displayed when a failure Retry data store. If the same symptom
the mis-exposure image log occurred in data storage. recurs, change the destination for storage
list. accordingly.
70021 FFCustomMsgBox [70021] Failed in storage of This error is displayed when a failure Retry data storage. If the same symptom
the calculation result. occurred in data storage. recurs, change the destination for storage
accordingly.
70022 FFCustomMsgBox [70022] An error occurred It is possible that the image display control Restart the system. If the same symptom
while an image is being or image file has a problem. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
displayed.
70023 FFCustomMsgBox [70023] An unknown error The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
occurred. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
database of regions to be damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
exposed resulted
unsuccessful.
database of causes of damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
mis-exposure images
70026 FFCustomMsgBox [70026] Failed in calculation The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
of the mis-exposure image recurs, perform a reinstallation.
log.
calculation result of the recurs, perform a reinstallation.
mis-exposure image log.
network setting database damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
necessary data from the damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
network setting database.
the list. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
70031 FFCustomMsgBox [70031] Free hard disk The size of the file copied is too large to be Replace for media of large capacity, if
space for writing data is accommodated in the media. available.
insufficient.
70032 FFCustomMsgBox [70032] Failed in deleting It is possible that the file is damaged or Restart the system. If the same symptom
the mis-exposure image deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
log.
the exposure result log. deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
an image file. deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
70035 FFCustomMsgBox [70035] Failed in writing It is possible that the database file is Restart the system. If the same symptom
image data in the system damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
70036 FFCustomMsgBox [70036] Failed in writing It is possible that the database file is Restart the system. If the same symptom
image data in the display damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
setting database.
70037 FFCustomMsgBox [70037] Failed in relocating The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
the tree structure. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
70038 FFCustomMsgBox [70038] Failed in reducing The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
the tree structure. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
70039 FFCustomMsgBox [70039] Transition to the The system was unstable. Restart the system. If the same symptom
main window resulted recurs, perform a reinstallation.
unsuccessful.
70040 FFCustomMsgBox [70040] Failed in accessing It is possible that the database file is Restart the system. If the same symptom
the menu database. damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
the log information damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
database.
the system setup database. damaged or deleted. recurs, perform a reinstallation.
70043 FFCustomMsgBox [70043] Failed in storage of It is possible that the file is damaged or Retry file storage. If the same symptom
image data. deleted. It is also possible that the target recurs, perform a reinstallation.
media for file storage has problems.
94001 FFCustomMsgBox [94001] The scanner This window opens for confirmation only.
cleaning process was
completed.
94002 FFCustomMsgBox [94002] The scanner Dust removal was unaccomplished due to Check the RU status.
cleaning process could not a problem on the RU side.
be performed.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Appendix 2 Cooper Application Error Message Table
ID Message Causes Remedies

00005 Cooper applications ID is not specified. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
have been installed.
00005 Application configuration error. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
00005 Application configuration error. Create WCF client The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
failed. have been installed.
00005 Initialize WCF communication failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
00015 Application configuration error. Start service failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
00240 Initialize WCF failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
00240 Send message failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
00345 Given file [Path] contains data that not valid/suitable The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
for binding into application. have been installed.
10000 Another application instance is running. Another CooperManager instance is running. (The Restart the system.
system can only perform one instance at one
time.)
10005 Create WCF client failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10005 No service is running on specified endpoint. Create The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
WCF client failed. have been installed.
WCF channel failed. have been installed.
10010 Communication error. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10015 Start service failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10015 A communication error occurs. Start service failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10035 A communication error occurs. Send message failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10050 Invalid operation. Create WCF client failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
WCF client failed. have been installed.
10070 DDO file path is null or empty The DDO file does not exist. Restart the system.
10071 Image file is not found The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10071 Image file path is empty The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10071 Cannot get image width The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10071 Cannot get image height The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10071 Cannot get image depth The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10071 DDO object of DDO file {0} is null The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10072 Load images buffer fail The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10075 Dont enough free memory Not enough memory to be used. Restart the system.
10180 Start CooperManager failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10205 Create proces for {0} application failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10205 Color code in appconfig is incorrected The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10210 Input string was not in a correct format. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
10210 Value was either too large or too small for an Int32. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
10215 Start Cooper applications process failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10220 Can not load autolayout file. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10221 Can not start hook key for application switching The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
function. have been installed.
10221 Can not unset hook key for application switching The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
function. have been installed.
10225 Invalid number of screen. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10230 Config TargetView is invalid. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10230 Can not create switch listener form. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10230 Send command active app false. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10230 Send command deactive current app false. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10230 Send command failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10235 Create named pipe object failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10235 Send message failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10235 Close named pipe object failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10240 Initialize IPCHandler failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10240 Initialize WMHandler failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10240 Initialize WCF failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10240 Value of timeout start Cooper application (in The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. have been installed.
SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Value cannot be null. have been installed.
SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Input string was not in a have been installed.
correct format.
SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Value was either too large have been installed.
or too small for an Int32.
10240 Start CooperApp failed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10295 The config for Config folder is not found in the file The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
DirectoryDef.xml have been installed.
10295 Unauthorized Access to the folder:[Folder Name] The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10295 Path of this folder is too long: [Path] The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10295 The Config folder: [Folder name] is not found. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10295 File: [Config file]: The Config element with Key=[Key] is The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
invalid. have been installed.
10301 Error in load multi language. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10302 Error when apply auto layout The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10302 Error when get size of config folder. The config file does not exist. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10302 Error when delete temporary folder. The Temp file does not exist or the authority may Confrim the authority to the folder C:\Program Files\
not have been granted. Fujifilm\Cooper\Data\Temp.
If the problem continues to occur, restart the system.
10302 Not permission in destination folder. No access authority to the destination folder. Allot authority to the storage folder for backup files.
If failed again, restart the system.
10302 Unknow error while copying file. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10302 Unknow error occured. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10302 Config folder not found. Check value in DirectoryDef. The config file does not exist. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
xml have been installed.
10302 Error when load value in DirectoryDef.xml The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10302 Config folder has not any files The config file does not exist. Reinstall the application.
10302 Version file in system folder not found. The version.xml file does not exist in the Cooper/ Reinstall the application.
System folder.
10302 Error occur when create temporary folder. No access authority to the temporary folder. Allot authority of the Cooper/Data folder.
Restart the application.
10302 Time out when extract or compress config folder. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Error when apply auto layout The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Not permission in destination folder. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Unknow error while copying file. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Unknow error occured. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Version file in system folder not found. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Version file not found. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Load version file in backup folder error The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Load version file in system folder error. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Error in read value in config file. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Config folder not found. Check value in DirectoryDef. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
xml have been installed.
10303 Error when load value in DirectoryDef.xml. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Error occur when create temporary folder. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10303 Time out when extract or compress config folder. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10304 Error when show message dialog. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10320 Error occurred. Message: {0}. StackTrace: {1}. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10320 The directory {0} is not found. Message: {1}. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
StackTrace: {2}. have been installed.
10320 Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
data from {NetSetting file} have been installed.
10320 Cannot locate specified file: {Path}. Message: {1}. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10320 Cant load xml node into entity The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10320 Cant load file {0} to XmlDocument The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10320 Cant load protocol info from xml node The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10320 Error occurred while trying to operate with specified The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
File/Folder {NetSetting.xml} (probably invalid location have been installed.
or permission error). Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}.
10320 Cannot operate with file {NetSettingPath} due to The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
permission problem occurred. Message: {1}. have been installed.
StackTrace: {2}.
10320 Cant save an object to xml node The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10320 Cannot open XML file {0}. Message: {1}. StackTrace: The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
{2}. have been installed.
10320 Cannot open XML file {NetSetting.xml}. Message: {1}. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10345 The AdjustLayout function of AutoLayout class: Control The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
input is null have been installed.
10345 Config TargetView is invalid. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10345 Given key AppScreenFolderKey does not exist for The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
lookup from Config file. have been installed.
10345 Directory definition not found for key : The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
AppScreenFolderKey. have been installed.
10345 Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
data from [Auto layout file name] have been installed.
10345 Given key [Mode type] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
Collection. have been installed.
10345 Cannot locate specified file: [Image file]. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10345 Given file [screen layout file] contains data that not The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
valid/suitable for binding into application. have been installed.
10365 Not enough argument to format a text string The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10365 Format of input string is invalid format The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10365 Content of exception The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10375 Given key [Message id] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
[MessageBoxDef.xml file]. have been installed.
10380 Parameter is null The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10385 Given key AppScreenFolderKey does not exist for The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
lookup from Config file. have been installed.
10385 The directory [Directory key] is not found. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10385 Cannot operate with directory [Directory path] due to The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
permission problem occurred. have been installed.
10385 The directory [Directory path] is not found. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10385 Error occurred while trying to operate with specified The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
File/Folder [File path] (probably invalid location or have been installed.
permission error).
10385 Error occurred while try saving data to specified file. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10410 Cannot operate with directory [Directory path] due to The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
permission problem occurred. have been installed.
10410 The directory [Directory path] is not found. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10410 Required parameter LoadXMLConfigFile is null or The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
empty have been installed.
10410 Error occurred while trying to perform: Failed while The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
trying to load XML Config file to entities have been installed.
10410 Required parameter xmlFile is null or empty The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10410 Given key [Config file name] does not exist for lookup The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
from ConfigData (ConfigAccessor). have been installed.
data from ConfigData (ConfigAccessor) have been installed.
10410 Given key [Keyword] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
ConfigData (ConfigAccessor). have been installed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10430 Required parameter itemKey is null or empty The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10430 Given key [Keyword] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
Directories (DirectoryAccessor). have been installed.
data from Directories (DirectoryAccessor) have been installed.
10435 Given key AppName does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
Config file. have been installed.
10435 Another item has the same key with [message id] is The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
already existed. have been installed.
10450 Given key TargetView does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
Config file. have been installed.
10450 Given key monitorType does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
Monitors (MonitorAccesor). have been installed.
data from Monitors (MonitorAccesor) have been installed.
data from AllNoteInfoItem (NoteInfoAccessor- have been installed.
>GetNoteInfoEntity).
10465 Given key [Key] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
AllNoteInfoItem (NoteInfoAccessor- have been installed.
>GetNoteInfoEntity).
data from ListItemAtCorner (NoteInfoAccessor). have been installed.
10465 Given key Corner does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
ListItemAtCorner (NoteInfoAccessor- have been installed.
>GetListItemAtCorner).
CornerItemSetting (NoteInfoAccessor->Save). have been installed.
NoteItemList (NoteInfoAccessor- have been installed.
>BindPrivateProperty).
data from dicVersions (AppVersionInfoAccessor). have been installed.
10465 Given key [Key] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
dicVersions (AppVersionInfoAccessor) have been installed.
10565 Error occurred while trying to operate with specified The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
File/Folder [Path] (probably invalid location or have been installed.
permission error).
10565 Another item has the same key with [AttributeName] is The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
already existed. have been installed.
10565 Fail to validate XML structure for specified file: [Path]. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10565 Method [Method name]: Required parameter [List The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
parameters] is null or empty have been installed.
10565 Error occurred while try saving data to specified file: The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
[Path]. have been installed.
10565 The directory [Path] is not found. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10565 Cannot locate specified file: [Path]. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10565 Cannot open XML file [Path]. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10565 Cannot operate with file [Path] due to permission The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
problem occurred. have been installed.
10605 Value of Pixel pitch space must be greater than 0 The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10605 Value of Pixel pitch monitor must be greater than 0 The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10605 Error code + Error message The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10605 Number of images is invalid The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10615 Cant get image width. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
10615 Cant get image height The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
10615 Cant get image bitstored. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
10615 Cant get image depth The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
10615 Cant get image density The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
10615 Dont support this output type. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10615 Cant get SQ for image processing parameters. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10615 Images depth is invalid. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10615 Error in ProcRun method of IPHandle object. The image processing parameter file of the CL Reinstall the CL application.
application is damaged.
10615 Error in Initialize method of IPHandle object. The image processing parameter file of the CL Reinstall the CL application.
10615 Cant get Param path. The image processing parameter file of the CL Reinstall the CL application.
10615 Error in ConvertParamToXML method of FMImgParam The image processing parameter file of the CL Reinstall the CL application.
object. application is damaged.
10635 Note config file reading error The NoteInfoDef.xml file does not exist or is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
damaged. have been installed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10640 Item \[Item name] dont have DDO tag in Note config The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
file have been installed.
10640 [Value] is not appropriate number format. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10640 [Value] is not appropriate hexadecimal format. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10640 Value[Tag value] is overflow double type The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10640 [Tag value] is not appropriate date time format. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10640 Number of DDO tag differ from value of Num attribute The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10640 [Tag value 1], [Tag value 2] are not appropriate The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
number format.
10640 [String tag] is not appropriate tag format. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10640 [Tags value 1] or [Tags value 2] is not appropriate The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
date time format. have been installed.
10675 Given key TargetView does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
Config file have been installed.
10675 Given key AppShortName does not exist for lookup The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
from Config file have been installed.
10680 Cant make {0} ({1:X8}) tag. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10680 Call FFCutMultibyte method is fail. The necessary component for image display is Reinstall the CL application.
damaged.
10680 Call FFConvertCNStoUTF8 method is fail. The necessary component for image display is Reinstall the CL application.
damaged.
10680 Call FFConvertGB2312toGB18030 method is fail. The necessary component for image display is Reinstall the CL application.
damaged.
10680 Wrong characterset. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10685 Exception content. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10685 Can not process searching while key search is empty. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10685 Search process is failed. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10685 Get PACS infor error. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10685 Can not create DDO key search. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10685 Search process can only perform when DicomQuerys The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
status is Idle. have been installed.
10715 Not enough memory to start retrieve Not enough memory to be used. Restart the system.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10715 Retrieve data time out The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10715 Cant delete old images file at folder: {0}. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
have been installed. If the problem continues to occur,
restart the system.
10715 Cant get AE: [AEName] in DicomQRNetSetting.xml file Incorrect settings of PACS server. Confirm the PACS settings of S-UTL. After setting
normally, restart the system.
10720 Cant append ddo tag: {0:x}. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Cant append ddo tag: {0:x} or {1:x}. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 index: {0} of pixel spacing is out of range The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Get value of tag: {0:x} failure. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Invalid direction scan {0} The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Cant copy value of tag: {0:x} to tag: {1:x}. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Cant delete ddo tag: {0:x} The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Read density is empty. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Read density is not double type. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Cannot set value for Kanji Patient name tag. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10720 Cannot set value for Patient name tag. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10725 Retrieved image folder: {0} dont exist. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
10725 Cant load DDO file: The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10725 Cant rename retrieved file. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
10730 Process image failure ImgProcCtrl.dll does not exist. Restart the system.
Incorrect image information of DDO file. Reinstall the linking appication for which reinstllation is
supported.
10730 DLL for processing image not found. ImgProcCtrl.dl does not exist. Restart the system.
Reinstall the linking appication for which reinstllation is
supported.
10730 Access COM component fail. An error occurs when accessing to the function of Restart the system.
ImgProcCtrl.dll. Reinstall the linking appication for which reinstllation is
supported.
10740 Cant load DDO file: {0} The DDO file does not exist. Restart the system.
The DDO file format is not the standard format
of DICOM.
10740 Cant read image file path at tag {0} The tag which specifies path to the DDO file does Restart the system.
not exist.
10740 Image file: {0} dont exist The image file does not exist. Confirm the file path again.
If the error continues to occur, restart the system.
10740 Not enough memory to read image file {0} Not enough memory to be used. Restart the system.
10740 Open Image file: {0} error The image file does not exist. Confirm the file path again.
The path of the image file is too long. If the error continues to occur, restart the system.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10740 Allocate memory for image buffer failure Not enough memory to be used. Restart the system.
10740 Not enough memory to save image file {0} Not enough memory in HDD to retrieve images. Delete unnecessary studies from the CL application.
10740 Cant save buffer to image with path: {0} Not enough memory in HDD to retrieve image. Delete unnecessary studies from the CL application.
The file path is too long. Confirm the authority to write in files and the existance of
The storage folder of file does not exist. storage folder.
No authority to write in files.
10740 Not enough memory to retrieve image to client Not enough memory to be used. Restart the system.
10740 Not enough memory to process image during retrieval Not enough memory to be used. Restart the system.
period
10740 Cant delete original image that retrieved from server. No authority to delete files. Confirm the authority to delete files in the folder.
10745 Store image thead has unknow error The necessary component for image display is Reinstall the CL application.
damaged.
20005 Application configuration error. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20005 The operation is timeout. Create WCF channel failed. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20005 The operation is timeout. Stop service failed. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20010 The operation is timeout. Send message failed. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20050 Start service [Service name] failed. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20175 Create process for [AppName] application failed. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20205 Start Cooper applications failed. Time out occurs. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20205 The file on path [Path] is not exist or maybe it is already The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
running. have been installed.
20205 Create process for {0} application failed. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20215 (EventHandler) handler is null Retrieve an event without the delegate function. Restart the system.
20235 This TypeCode [TypeCode] is not supported. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20350 Application ID [AppID] is duplicated. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20350 The message string appended with the string The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
representation of the invalid argument value.
20350 Cant get tag number. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
20350 DDO file is not found. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
20350 Load DDO file is error. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
20350 Cant get TypeCode of tag [Tag] The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
20350 Cant get Length of tag [Tag]. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
20350 Length of tag [Tag] equal 0. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Restart the system.
20350 [DLL] specified in a DLL import cannot be found The Dll file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20615 Close SysConfigDB error. The config file is damaged or the DB file is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL
application.
20615 Cant connect to SysConfigDB. The config file is damaged or the DB file is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
application.
20615 Cant get SysConfigDB path. The config file is damaged or the DB file is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
application.
20615 Cant get GA offset from DB. The config file is damaged or the DB file is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
application.
20615 Cant get GS offset from DB. The config file is damaged or the DB file is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
application.
20715 Port: [PortNo] is not available. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
20720 Cannot get value of Patient name tag. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix 3 Precise Enlargement Function Error Message Table
NOTE
ECHO represents Precise Enlargement Function.

01001 Unknown error An unknown error has occurred. Restart the system or reinstall ECHO.
01005 Not found config file: Echo.Config.exe The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
01010 Saving data error The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
01010 Content of exception The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
01015 UserUtility: The config with Key={0} is not found in the The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
config file of application
01025 VersionInformation: The Application element with The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
ID={0} in the version file cant be load. have been installed.
01145 Unknown error The necessary component for image display is Reinstall the CL application.
damaged.
01145 Cant Load ImageError file : The resource file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
01145 Cant get PEM value The image processing parameter file of the CL Verify the setting of the CL application.
application is damaged or the PEM value itself ConfigQA->PEM Processing in the case of Magnify
does not exist. Display
01145 Cant connect to database The database of the CL application does not exist Reinstall the CL application.
or is damaged.
01145 Not found Monitor LUT file The monitor LUT file does not exist or is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
01165 The string with Id=[LanguageID] is not found in the The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
language file
01390 Not found AppName key The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
10000 Another application instance is running. There is a running ECHO process. Restart the system.
11005 DDO file is not found The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Exposure again.
11010 Save Font information to application config file error. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
11155 Value of Loupe Zoom Ratio is invalid The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
11155 Value of Loupe Zoom Ratio must be greater than 0 The config file is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
11375 Image buffers size is invalid Not enough memory. Restart the system.
11380 Error occurred by ImgProcCtrl::Execute(Path=[DDO The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Or the Exposure again. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall
file path],ProcFlag=[pem process],ProcImgType= image processing parameter file of the CL the CL application.
[Image type],FuncID=[Function ID],ErrID=[Error id], application is damaged.
ErrDetailID=[Error detail])
11380 Image file is not found Failure in generation of image data by Console. Restart the system.
21175 [ArgumentException]
21390 Not found resource file The resource file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ECHO.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix 4 QA ROI Measurement Error Message Table
NOTE
ROI represents QA ROI Measurement.

01001 Unknown Error! An unknown error has occurred. Restart the system or reinstall ROI.
01010 Not found config file: {0} The ROI.exe.config file does not exist. Or the file Reinstall ROI.
is deleted or renamed by user mistakenly.
01045 VersionInformation: The string with Id={0} in the The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
language file cant be load. have been installed.
01045 VersionInformation: The Application element with The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
ID={0} in the version file cant be load. have been installed.
01390 Unknown Error! An unknown error has occurred when error Restart the system or reinstall ROI.
message dialog box appears.
10000 Another application instance is running. There is a running ROI process. Restart the system.
11005 Cannot get information about monitor. The monitor information file is damaged. Set the 1st monitor again at the Change Monitor from
ROI installer.
11005 Monitor LUT file not exist. The monitor LUT file does not exist or is Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which
11015 Could not found DDO file! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11015 Get image type failed! The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
11015 Load image information failed! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11020 Bad input parameters! The config file is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
11025 Can not load DDO file! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 High quality image file does not exist! The high resolution image file does not exist. After storing the high resolution images to the console,
press the ROI measurement button again.
If the problem continues to occur, restart the system.
11025 Standard image file does not exist! The standard-pixel density image file does not Open the QA window again or exposure again.
exist.
11025 Can not get high quality images URL! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get standard images URL! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get images depth! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get images height! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get images width! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get images pixel spacing X! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get images pixel spacing Y! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get images density! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get device processing description! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
11025 Can not get images sensitivity! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11025 Can not get images rotate/invert state! The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Open the QA window again.
11030 Read configuration information failed! The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
11035 Bad parameters! The config file is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
11040 Bad parameters! The config file is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
21005 Can not apply layout for screen. The config file is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
21005 Can not set string definition for screen items. The config file is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
21030 Invalid XML file format! The config file is damaged. Reinstall ROI.
31010 Roi started OK! - -
31010 Receive command: {0} - -
31010 Receive message: {0} - -
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-I
Control Sheet

12/10/2000 00 Revision (FM2950) I, II, 5, 7, 8, 9, 1315, 22, 23, 27,
28, 33, 35, 39, 40
04/10/2001 01 Previous Chapter D Reinstalling the Software All pages
modified (FM2951)
05/30/2001 02 Revision for software version A02 I, II, 1, 35, 8, 9, 11, 13-16, 1842,
Appx A-18, Appx B-14,
Appx C-1, 2, Appx D-16,
08/30/2001 03 Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) I, II, 1, 3, 4, 7, 1217, 21, 22,
2429,31, 32, 34, 35, 37, 38, 41
Appx A-1, 4, 7, Appx C-3, 4,
Appx D-1, 3, 4, 6-8
4246
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, 15, 34, 41, Appx A-7,
Appx B-13, Appx D-1, 4
03/20/2002 04 Changes in pagination (FM3297) Appx D-2, 3, 5, 6-8
07/20/2002 05 Revision for software version A08 (FM3428) I, II, 13-16, 1924, 26, 28, 29, 31,
32, 38, 39, 41, 4548, 54, Appx A-1,
7, Appx D-1, 2, 47, Appx E-14,
Appx F-14
07/20/2002 05 Changes in pagination (FM3428) 12, 17, 18, 25, 27, 30, 3337, 40,
4244, 4953, Appx D-810
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) I, II, 3, 4, 9, 22, 24, 26, 28, 3133,
38, Appx D-1, 2, 49, 11,
Appx F-5, 6
11/30/2002 06 Changes in pagination (FM3499) Appx D-10, 12
03/01/2003 07 Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) I, II, 20, 22, 26, 3234, 39,
Appx C-24, Appx D-1, 7
03/01/2003 07 Changes in pagination (FM3634) 40-54
3145, 4858, Appx C-2, Appx D-1
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) IIV, 22, 25, 29, 38, 41, Appx A-7,
Appx C-2, Appx D-1, Appx D-2
12/10/2003 09 Changes in pagination (FM4158) 2628, 3037, 39, 40, 4258,
Appx D-314
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-II
Control Sheet
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software version B00 (FM4254) I, III, 1, 340, 4648, 52, 57, 58, 60,
62, 63, 66, 67, 75, 76, 78,
Appx A-16, 816, Appx B-1, 2,
Appx D-1, 2, 58, 10, 14,
Appx E-1, 2, Appx F-1
07/30/2004 11 Changes in pagination (FM4254) 4145, 4951, 5356, 59, 61, 64,
65, 6874, 77, 79, 80, Appx A-7,
Appx B-3, 4, Appx D-1113
11/12/2004 12 Revision for software version V1.0(C), support I, III, 1, 3, 41, 43, 45, 46, 50, 55, 57,
provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450) 59, 60, 6264, 67, 75, 78,
Appx C-14, Appx G-112
65, 67, 75, 8186, Appx A-2,
Appx D-2, 10, Appex G-1, 2, 12
07/30/2005 14 Changes in pagination (FM4543) 44
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I, III, 1, 45, 47, 53, 55, 57, 64, 66,
74, 83, Appx G-1, 11, 12,
Appx H-14
07/30/2006 16 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, III, 5, 23, 44, 46, 49-53, 66, 73,
Appx RI A-1317, Appx RI D-2, 3, 7,
11, 14, Appx RI G-1012, 16
Appex RI I-16
6772, 7490, Appx RI A-18,
Appx RI G-1315
07/20/2007 17 Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) I, III, 13, 10, 11, 26, 4248, 51, 53,
5658, 6063, 6567, 69, 71, 77,
78, 81, 84, Appx RI A-10,
Appx RI C-24, 68, Appx RI D-2, 9,
1518, Appx RI G-1, 2, 1316,
Appx RI H-1, Appx RI I-7, 8
07/20/2007 17 Changes in pagination (FM5201) Appx RI C-5, Appx RI D-1014
6063, 65, 66, 6769, 71, 77, 78,
81, 84, Appx RI C-4, Appx RI D-2,
17, Appx RI G-1, 2, 13, 14, 16,
Appx RI H-1
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-III
Control Sheet
10/31/2008 19 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) I, IV, 1, 3, 42, 44, 4649, 51, 54,
5759, 61, 63, 64, 6668, 70, 72,
78, 79, 82, 85, 92, Appx RI A-2, 8,
10, 20, D-2, 3, 911, 16, 17, G-1, 2,
13, 14, 16, H-1, J-14
10/31/2008 19 Changes in pagination (FM5460) 50, 52, 53, 55, 56, 60, 62, 65, 69,
71, 7377, 80, 81, 83, 84, 8691,
Appx RI A-1119
11/30/2009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, IV, 14, 22, 4281, 83, 8596,
98101, 103, 105109, 111, 114,
115, 123, 126129, 136144,
Appx A-15, 1013, 2124, B-13,
6, C-4, D-15, 10, 1214, 17, 18,
E-1, 46, G-1, 2, 14, 17, 18, I-712
116122, 124, 125, 130135,
Appx A-69, 1420, B-4, 5, D-69,
11, 15, 16, 19, 20, E-2, G-313, 15,
16
03/31/2010 21 Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) I, IV, 24, 43, 45, 61, 62, 84, 85, 87,
90, 93, 94, 96, 97, 99, 100,
102104, 107, 108, 112116, 121,
131, 143, 144, 147, 148, Appx A-1,
2, 7, 8, 2325, 27, 28, D-13, 911,
14, 15, 18, 19, 2124, D-1, H-1, I-4,
7, 8
101, 105, 106, 109111, 117120,
122130, 132142, 145, 146,
Appx A-26, D-12, 13, 16, 17, 20
12/10/2010 22 Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817) I, IV, 45, 84, 107, 111, 112, 133,
145, Appx D-2, 14, 22,
Appx I-1316
12/10/2010 22 Changes in pagination (FM5817) Appx B-7, 8, Appx C-7, 8,
Appx E-7, 8, Appx G-19, 20
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-IV
Control Sheet
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) 14, 21, 22, 40, 42, 80125, 130,
134, 135, 140, 151, 153, 154, 159,
168, 171, 181, 184, 186196,
Appx A-1, 4, 5, 1013, 21, 22,
Appx B-13, Appx D-1, 2, 13, 14, 19,
Appx E-4, 5, Appx G-10, Appx I-13
08/31/2011 23 Changes in pagination (FM5893) 20, 126129, 131133, 136139,
141150, 152, 155158, 160167,
169, 170, 172180, 182, 183, 185,
Appx A-2328
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-V
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-VI
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-VII
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-VIII
1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC)

Presented below is the procedure used for installing the CL-AP from the
OS. Follow the flowchart on the next page to install the CL-AP.
For how to install the CL-AP from the OS to an NEC PC, see
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC).
For how to install the CL-AP from the OS to an HP PC, see
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC).
NOTES
To facilitate you to understand installation workflow in this edition, the

following icons are shown to the right of the title in each chapter.
XG-1 RU : XG-1 RU
5000plus : FCR5000, etc.
9000 : 9000 series
355RU : CR-IR 355RU
356 : CR-IR 356
357 : CR-IR 357
359 : CR-IR 359
362 : CR-IR 362
363 : CR-IR 363
364 : CR-IR 364
366 : CR-IR 366
367 : CR-IR 367
368 : CR-IR 368
370 : CR-IR 370
371 : CR-IR 371
372 : CR-IR 372
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same
as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7.
When setting procedures to be performed are different between
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Window 7, follow
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual RI-1
Installation workflow 15. Creating the FTP Server

(Windows 2000/XP only)
For RU-CL 1:1 connection:
CL-Config and RU-Config(*1) backup See Chapter 5 under
MU: Maintenance
Essential
16. CR-IR346RU Settings For RU-CL N:N connection:
Utility.
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS Only for RU master IIP
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings
3. Setting Up the Monitor
Only when remote
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]
maintenance mode is used.
4. Installing MSDE/Database Management
System and Its Service Pack 19. IIS Network Virus Protection
5.1 Installing the CL-AP

20. Settings Necessary for Installation of
Windows XP Service Pack 2
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size
6. Installing the Screen Saver
22. Setting the Event Log
7. Installing the CL Components
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode
When one XG-1 RU or multiple (Windows Vista/7 only)
8. Installing the Standard Key XG-1 RUs or 356/357/359/36X/
37X are connected.
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista/7 only)
When one XG-1 RU or one
9. ****BLANK**** 35X or multiple XG-1 RUs or *1 For the 5000 plus series or CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X, see the individual
5000plus or 356/357/359/36X/ Service Manual to save Config backup.
37X are connected.
For details of the RU master IIP see 6. RU-CL N:N Connection
Function Overview under MD: Machine Description.
10. Option Key Installation
11. AP Key Installation
12. Initializing the Image Database
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)
14. Restoring the CL-Config
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS Display color

Display area
True Color (24 or 32bits)
1024768 (15inch LCD/17inch CRT)
Monitor settings MS-IME setting
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 (Japanese version The toolbar is stored in the task bar.
only)
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
OS installation and setting procedures are different between Windows
NOTES 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7. Follow the
procedures specific to the used OS.
Before installing the OS, note down the CL host name, IP address,
subnet mask, and other relevant information. These items of For Windows 2000
information will be called for during OS installation. See 2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000.
The 5000 plus is abbreviated hereinafter simply IR.
For Windows XP
See 2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP.
u Property sheet
OS installation drive C:\ For Windows Vista
C drive only (no other partitions will See 2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista.
Partition/format
be created.) /NTFS
Name FUJIFILM Corporation For Windows 7
Regional settings
Organization FUJIFILM Corporation See 2.4 Installing and Setting Windows 7.
Indicated on the right-hand side of
Product key
the PC main unit cover.
The default settings when shipped
from factory
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX
Computer name Computer name CR-IR346CL (Lite) : CRXXXXXXXX
and password CR-IR348CL (Plus) : CPXXXXXXXX
(XXXXXXXX : manufacture No.)
Take notes accordingly if changed.
Password fcr-iip
Protocol used TCP/IP
172.16.1.20 when shipped from
IP address factory.
* Take notes accordingly if changed.
Network settings
Subnet mask factory.
* Take notes accordingly if changed.
Used by the work group.
Domain or
(The group name remains the
work group
default.)
This computers Automatically logged
Administrator
user settings on user name
(auto logon settings) Password fcr-iip
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000 NOTES

OS installation procedures are described herein using a DELL
OptiPlex GX110 PC and a GX150 PC models.
2.1.1 Installing Windows 2000 If other PC models are used, see the user manual that comes with the PC.
This section explains about the Windows 2000 installation procedure. If the PC is not connected via the network, the network setup windows
will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To establish
The OS is to be installed in the following situations: network settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (connection
to the RU) before installation work.
After HDD replacement
When the HDD has been replaced, check setup details ahead of time
After an error occurrence in the OS
because the HDD cannot be operated unless the PCs BIOS settings
Items to be readied for OS installation: are changed accordingly.
Windows 2000 installation CD Driver software installation can be required while Windows 2000 is
(Dell Product Recovery CD (Windows 2000) contained in the PC being installed. In such a case, install it using the Dell Resource CD.
box.)
Dell Resource CD
(A CD that stores various drivers.)
Removing the board and peripheral devices
Product key
(Indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit.) 1. Remove the PEI or PSI board if it is mounted on the PCI
slots.
IMPORTANT
For board removal procedures, see Appendix C Removing/
Before formatting the HDD, back up necessary data other than image Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI).
data as required by the user.
Back up config data (CL-Config, RU-Config) that stores various CL 2. Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as the barcode
and RU settings, ahead of time. reader and magnetic card reader, from the USB ports (except
Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items the keyboard and mouse).
(check all the items).
NOTES
When the OS was installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on the
PCI slots, be sure to delete the file from the Device
Manager upon completion of OS installation.
Checking the PEI01A board device driver in 3.2 Typical
Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer)
Printout Generation Failure under MT: Machine
Troubleshooting.
If you perform the OS installation procedure while the peripheral
devices are connected to the USB ports, improper drivers will be
installed as is the case with the PEI and PSI boards.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Network connection between the CL and the RU/IR RAID-related settings

Unless the PC is connected properly via the network, the network setup When a RAID-based PC is used, perform RAID-related settings as
windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, depending appropriate.
on the Windows 2000 installer specifications. For details of RAID-related settings, see Appendix I RAID-related
Settings.
1. Use a crossing cable to connect the CL to the RU/IR or use a
network cable to connect the CL to the HUB for network
connection via the HUB.
2. Turn ON the power to the RU/IR.

For network connection via the HUB, the power can be left
turned OFF.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Collecting the computer-related information 6. Save the setup data and restart the PC.
After a while, the message Press any key to boot from CD..
1. Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches. appears at the upper left corner of the window.
The PC starts up.
2. Press the <F2> key when the message F2 SETUP appears

at the upper right of the window.
NOTE
00000346.EPS
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window
will not open.
In such a case, restart the PC to perform step 2. again.
7. Press the <Enter> key within a 3-second period.
NOTE
The setup window opens.
If you do not press the <Enter> key within a period of about
3. Select Boot Sequence and press the <Enter> key. 3 seconds after the message Press any key to boot from CD..
appears at the upper left corner of the screen, the installation CD
The startup drive selection dialog opens. cannot be recognized.
If such a failure occurs, restart the PC to perform step 7. again.
4. Deselect both Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk Drive C:
(uncheck the mark.)
The Windows 2000 Professional Setup window opens in about
two minutes.
8. Press the <Enter> key.
Uncheck both Diskette Drive and

Hard-Disk Drive C:.
Leave IDE CD-ROM Device as is. 00000325.EPS
5. Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive of the PC.
00000302.EPS
The Windows 2000 License Agreement window opens.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
9. Press the <F8> key. Deleting/formatting a partition

1. Select C: NTFS (or make sure that C: NTFS is selected)
and then press the <D> key.
NOTE
Before deleting a partition, back up important image data and other
necessary data that are stored on the HDD.
If a partition is deleted, the entire data in that partition is lost.
00000303.EPS
A screen about Windows 2000 repairs opens in several seconds. 00000307.EPS
10. Press the <Esc> key. NOTE

If Unknown partition exists on the window above, press the <L>
and then <Enter> keys to delete the partition.
The partition deletion confirmation screen opens.
00000304.EPS
A window opens, where partitions are to be deleted or set up.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
2. Press the <Enter> key. 4. Select Unpartitioned space (or make sure that
Unpartitioned space is selected) and then press the
NOTE <Enter> key.
This screen does not open when an attempt is made to format a
partition in which no OS is installed. NOTE
The <C> key needs not be pressed because only the C drive will
be used on the CL.
Note, however, that creation of partition is not required for software
version A10 or later.
00000308.EPS
The partition deletion confirmation screen opens again.

00000310.EPS
3. Press the <L> key. The format selection screen opens.
00000309.EPS
After the completion of partition deletion, the partition creation

screen opens.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
5. Verify that the Format the partition using the NTFS file 8. Check ( ) both 1. Diskette Drive and 2. Hard-Disk Drive
system option is selected, and then press the <Enter> key. C:.
Check ( ) both 1. and 2.

00000511.EPS
00000311.EPS
9. Save the setup data and start the PC.
After formatting the HDD that takes about eight to 20 minutes 10. After the installation data has been read from the HDD (this
depending on the HDD capacity, files will be copied from the CD-
ROM to the HDD (this takes about five minutes). takes about three minutes), click when
The PC restarts. Windows 2000 setup wizard startup window opens.
6. When the message F2 SETUP appears at the upper right REFERENCE

corner of the window, press the <F2> key.
If you do not click , the system automatically
NOTE switches to the Regional Settings window.
If you fail to press the <F2> key, restart the PC, wait until the
message F2 SETUP appears at the upper right corner of the Device driver setup processing starts, which takes about four
screen, and press the <F2> key. minutes.
After the completion of device driver setup processing, the
Regional Settings window opens.
7. Select Boot Sequence and press the <Enter> key.

The startup drive selection dialog opens.
00000315.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Performing setup in accordance with the setup wizard 5. Enter the following settings:
1. From the Regional Settings window, click . Enter a computer name (host name) in the
The Software Personal Setup window opens. field.
2. Enter the following settings: The default settings are as follows.
Enter FUJIFILM Corporation in the CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX

field. ( represents a space.) (use upper-case characters to enter the CL.
XXXXXXXX are for the CL serial number.)
Enter FUJIFILM Corporation in the
CR-IR348CL : CRXXXXXXXX (Lite)
field. ( represents a space.) (use upper-case characters to enter the CR.
XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
3. Click .
CR-IR348CL : CPXXXXXXXX (Plus)
The product key input window opens.
(use upper-case characters to enter the CP.
XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
NOTES
Enter the host name that was noted down before the start of OS
installation.
Even if you enter lower-case characters, their upper-case
00000318.EPS
equivalents appear in the field.
4. Enter the product key in the field and then Note, however, that the entered lower-case characters will be
internally handled as lower-case character data.
click .
Enter fcr-iip in the field.
REFERENCE
The product key is indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC Enter fcr-iip in the field.
main unit.
REFERENCE
A window opens to prompt for computer name and password
input. The character string entries in the [Administrator Password:] and
[Confirm Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
00000319.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
6. Click . Setting the network information

The date/time setup window opens. NOTE
If the PC is not connected to the network, the network setup window
7. Verify the date, time, and time zone, and then click does not open.
.
If any wrong setting is encountered, correct it and then click 1. When a network setup option selection window appears,
prompting you to choose between Standard and Custom,
. choose (by changing to ), and then
Verify the date. Verify the time. click .
The Network Component Setup window opens.
2. Make sure that is checked.

If it is not checked, put a check mark on it (by changing
to ).
3. Select (by highlighting it), and
Verify the time zone. 00000320.EPS

then click .
The Network Setup window opens in several minutes. The Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties window opens.
4. Choose (so that changes to ).
IP Address and Subnet Mask then appear.
REFERENCE
The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields are now ready to accept
your numerical value input.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
5. Enter the following settings: 8. Verify that the

Enter an IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.20) in the radio
field. button is selected (set to ), and then click .
Enter a subnet mask (e.g., 255.255.0.0) in the

field.
NOTE
Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted down
before the start of OS installation.
6. Click .
The system returns then to the Network Component Setup
window. 00000345.EPS
REFERENCE
7. Click . It takes a few seconds to display the
Do not let the CL become a domain member.
following window (computer domain setup window).
After a while, the computer domain setup window opens. The Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window opens
in about five minutes.
9. Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
10. Click .
The PC restarts and the Network Identification Wizard Start
window opens.
00000314.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Setting the user to be logged on automatically 5. Click .
1. From the Network Identification Wizard Start window, click After a while, the Getting Started with Windows 2000 window
opens.
.
A computer user setup window opens.
00000336.EPS
2. Make sure that the radio

button is turned ON.
3. Enter the following settings:

00000323.EPS
Click the downward arrow mark within the

field to change to
6. Deselect (so that changes
. to ).
Enter fcr-iip in the field. 7. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the window.
OS installation is now completed.
REFERENCE
The character string entries in the [Password:] and [Confirm
Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
4. Click .
The Network Identification Wizard ends and the desktop screen

appears on the display.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
2.1.2 Installing the Driver Software A new window opens to indicate that the installation wizard is
started.
For driver software installation, use the utility software on Dell
ResourceCD. To do this, you must first install the utility software on the
PC for the CL.
REFERENCE
To determine what driver software needs to be installed, you can use
Device Manager. To open Device Manager, perform the following steps: 00000366.EPS
1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon from the [Start] menu. From the
pop-up menu that opens, choose [Properties].
The [System Properties] window opens.
3. Click .
2. Click the [Hardware] tab. The installation processing starts.
3. Click [Device Manager]. After a while, a window opens to indicate that setup is completed.
Device Manager opens.
The software for items marked ? in Device Manager is not installed. 4. Verify that is chosen, and
Install the driver software for such items.
then click .
The PC restarts.
Installing the Dell ResourceCD utility software
REFERENCE
1. Insert Dell ResourceCD, which is supplied with the PC, into
the CD-ROM drive. Depending on the version of the Dell ResourceCD utility software,
the PC needs not to be restarted.
2. When the following window automatically opens, click
.
00000365.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Installing the driver software 3. In the Video area, click INTEL 815.
For the GX150, install the following driver software. WinZip Self-Extractor appears.
Video driver : Intel815
System driver : Intel CHIP SET 4. Click to decompress files.
Audio driver : ADI1885
IDE ATA/ATAPI controller : Intel ATA Storage Dell Computer Self-Extracting Driver Installation appears.
NOTE 5. Click .
Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model and
utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling Dell
Technical Support or visiting associated home page.
1. Click , point to Programs and Dell Accessories,

and then click Dell ResourceCD.
The Dell ResourceCD utility software starts up.
2. When the following window opens, perform setup for the
Search Criteria area under the following conditions.
System Model = OptiPlex GX150 Device Type = All
Operating System = Windows 2000 Topic = My Drivers
RI000064.EPS
A window opens to indicate that unzipping is completed.
6. Click .
Internet Explorer starts up.
RI000063.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
7. Scroll the screen downward until you reach its bottom, and 8. Choose Run this program from its current location and
then click . then click .
RI000066.EPS
The Security Warning window opens.
9. Click .
The driver software installer starts running.
10. Follow the installers on-screen instructions to install the

driver software.
11. Install the other driver software (Intel CHIP SET, ADI1885
and Intel ATA Storage) by performing the same procedure as
indicated in steps 3. through 10.
RI000065.EPS
The File Download window opens.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
2.1.3 Setting the OS 4. Click .

Perform the following OS-related settings. The confirmation window opens.
The number of colors (Colors) and monitor resolution (Screen
area) 5. Click .
Refresh frequency
The screen area changes and the monitor setting window opens.
Modification of the OS selection menu
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the
suspend mode (as necessary) 6. Click .
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
NOTE
Setting the monitor Click immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds,
the window returns to the previous status.
1. Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose
Properties from the pop-up menu.
00000108.EPS
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. Complete monitor setup as directed below.
I II 00000109.EPS
I. Colors : Choose True Color (24- or 32-bit).

II. Screen area : Choose 1024 768 pixels.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Setting the refresh frequency 5. Click .
1. In the Settings tab of the Display Properties window, The screen area changes and the Monitor Setup window opens.
click .
6. Click .
The Plug-and-Play Monitor and ... Properties window opens.
NOTE
2. Click the Monitor tab.
If you do not click within 15 seconds, the system
3. From the Refresh Frequency pull-down menu, choose reverts the previous setting. Therefore, click it without delay.
75 Hertz.
NOTE 7. Click to close the Display Properties window.

If the screen becomes disordered when a setting of 75 Hertz is
chosen, change the setting to 70 Hertz.
change it to 60 Hertz.
RI000041.EPS
4. Click .
The confirmation window opens.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Hiding the OS selection menu 4. Uncheck .

When the OS is installed newly, the OS selection menu opens at OS
startup. Therefore, perform the following procedure so that the OS
selection menu does not open:
1. Click , point to Settings, and click Control

Panel.
00000125.EPS
2. Double-click .
5. Click .
You are returned to the System Properties window.
3. Click the Advanced tab and then click
6. Click .
.
00000124.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
exiting the suspend mode Select . (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point.
By default, the PC prompts for password input when you attempt to exit If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you
the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may select an image distribution destination with the QA function.
inadvertently press the Suspend button on the keyboard, perform the
following procedure as needed. 1. From the menu, point to Settings, and then click
Control Panel.
1. From the menu, point to Settings, and then click
Control Panel.
2. Double-click .
2. Double-click .
The Regional Options window opens.
The Power Options Properties window opens.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
RI000084.EPS
4. Uncheck
( ).
RI000083.EPS
5. Click and then close the Control Panel.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Confirm the following settings. Setting the taskbar

I. Click the Numbers tab and then select . (period) for the Change the setting so that the Windows taskbar is hidden automatically.
Decimal symbol field.
If, as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected 1. Right-click the mouse on the taskbar to select Properties.
for the Digit grouping symbol field and Decimal symbol field,
change the symbol for the Digit grouping symbol field. The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window opens.
II. Check that the value is set to 0.7 for the Display leading zeros
field. 2. Place a checkmark to ( ).
I.
RI0000362.EPS
3. Click and close the Taskbar and Start Menu

II. Properties window.
RI000101.EPS

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP NOTES

OS installation procedures are described herein using a Dell Optiplex
GX60 PC model.
2.2.1 Installing and Setting Windows XP If other PC models are actually used, see the User Manual that comes
with the PC.
This section describes how to install Windows XP.
If the PC is not connected via the network, the network setup windows
The OS is to be installed in the following situations: will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To perform
network settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (connection
After HDD replacement to the RU) accordingly before installation work.
When HDD of a recommended PC model is replaced, check setup
Items to be readied for OS installation details ahead of time because the HDD may not be operated unless
the PCs BIOS settings are changed accordingly.
Windows XP installation CD
(Dell Product Recovery CD (Windows XP) contained in the PC box.) Driver software installation may be required while Windows XP is
being installed. In such an instance, use the Dell Resource CD to
Dell Resource CD install it.
(A CD that stores various drivers.)
Product key
(Indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit.)
Removing the boards and peripheral devices
IMPORTANT
Before formatting the HDD, make backup copy of data other than
1. Remove the PEI or PSI board if it is mounted on the PCI
image data, if any, as required by the user. slots.
For how to remove the board, see Appendix C Removing/
Make backup copy of config data (CL-Config, RU-Config) that stores Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI).
various CL and RU settings, ahead of time.
Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items 2. Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as barcode reader
(place checkmarks to all items).
and magnetic card reader, from the USB ports (except the
keyboard and mouse).
NOTES
When the OS was installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on the
PCI slots, make sure to delete the file using Device
Manager upon completion of OS installation.
Checking the PEI01A board device driver in 3.2 Typical
Troubleshooting
If you perform the OS installation procedure while the peripheral
devices are connected to the USB ports, improper drivers will be
installed as is the case with the PEI or PSI board.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Network connection between the CL and the RU/IR RAID-related settings

Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network When a RAID-based PC is used, perform RAID-related settings as
setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, appropriate.
depending on the Windows XP installer specifications. For details of RAID-related settings, see Appendix I RAID-related
Settings.
1. Use a crossing cable to connect the CL to the RU/IR or use a
network cable to connect the CL to the HUB for network
connection via the HUB.
2. Turn ON the power to the RU/IR.

For network connection via the HUB, the power can be left
turned OFF.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Collecting the computer-related information 6. Save the setup data and restart the PC.
1. Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches. After a while, the Press any key to boot from CD message
appears at the upper left corner of the window.
The PC starts running.
2. Press the <F2> key when F2 SETUP appears at the upper press any key to boot from CD
right corner of the window.
NOTE RI000211.EPS
will not open. 7. Press the <Enter> key within three seconds.
In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.
NOTE
The setup window opens. If you do not press the <Enter> key within about three seconds
after the Press any key to boot from the CD message appears at
3. Select Boot Sequence and press the <Enter> key. the upper left corner of the window, the installation CD will not be
A dialog opens prompting you to select a startup drive. recognized accordingly.
4. Remove checkmarks from Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk
Drive C:. (Uncheck the marks.) In about two minutes, the Window XP Professional Setup
window opens.
1. Diskette Drive
2. Hard-Disk Drive C: 8. Press the <Enter> key.
3. IDE CD-ROM Device The Windows XP License Agreement window opens.
SPACE to enable/disable +,- to move down/up 9. Press the <F8> key.

A window opens, where partitions are to be deleted or set up.
Remove checkmarks from Diskette Drive
and Hard-Disk Drive C:.
Leave IDE CD-ROM Device checked as is. RI000210.EPS
5. Insert the installation CD into the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Deleting/formatting a partition 5. Verify that the Format the partition using the NTFS file
system option is selected, and then press the <Enter> key.
1. Select C: NTFS (or make sure that C: NTFS is selected) After formatting the HDD that takes about eight to 20 minutes
and then press the <D> key. depending on the HDD capacity, files will be copied from the CD-
ROM to the HDD (this takes about five minutes).
NOTE
The PC restarts.
Before deleting a partition, make backup copy of necessary image
data stored on the HDD.
If a partition is deleted, the entire data in that partition will be lost.
6. Press the <F2> key when F2 SETUP appears at the upper
right corner of the window.
XXXX MB Disk 0 Id 0 on bus 0 atapi [MBR] NOTE

C: partition1: NTFS xxxx MB(xxxx MB free)
D: partition2: NTFS xxxx MB(xxxx MB free)
If you fail to press the <F2> key, restart the PC, wait until the
message F2 SETUP appears at the upper right corner of the
RI000212.EPS
window, and the press the <F2> key.
NOTE
If Unknown partition exists on the window above, press the <L>
and then <Enter> keys to delete the partition as well. 7. Select Boot Sequence and press the <Enter> key.
A dialog opens prompting you to select a startup drive.
The partition deletion confirmation window opens.
8. Place checkmarks to both Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk
Drive C:.
NOTE
1. Diskette Drive
This window does not open when an attempt is made to format a
partition in which no OS is installed. 2. Hard-Disk Drive C:
The partition deletion confirmation window opens again.
3. Press the <L> key.
Check ( ) both 1. and 2. RI000213.EPS
After the completion of partition deletion, the partition creation
window opens.
9. Save the setup data and restart the PC.
4. Select Unpartitioned space (or make sure that After the installation data has been read from the HDD (this takes
Unpartitioned space is selected) and then press the about five minutes), Regional and Language Options window
opens.
<Enter> key.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Performing setup in accordance with the setup wizard 5. Enter the following settings:
Enter a computer name (host name) in the
1. From the Regional and Language Options window, click
field.
.
The Software Personal Setup window opens. The default settings are as follows.
2. Make entries as follows. CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX

(use upper-case characters to enter the CL.
Enter FUJIFILM Corporation in the XXXXXXXX are for the CL serial number.)
field. ( represents a space.) CR-IR348CL : CRXXXXXXXX (Lite)
(use upper-case characters to enter the CR.
Enter FUJIFILM Corporation in the XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
field. ( represents a space.)
(use upper-case characters to enter the CP.
3. Click . XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
The product key input window opens.
NOTES
4. Enter the product key in the field and then Enter the host name that was noted down before the start of OS
installation.
click . Even if you enter lower-case characters, their upper-case
equivalents appear in the field.

REFERENCE
Note, however, that the entered lower-case characters will be
The product key is indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC internally handled as lower-case character data.
main unit.
A window opens to prompt for computer name and password Enter fcr-iip in the field.
input.
REFERENCE
The character string entries in the [Administrator Password:] and
[Confirm Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
6. Click . Setting the network information

The date/time setup window opens. NOTES
7. Verify the date, time, and time zone, and then click If the PC is not connected to the network, the network setup window
does not open.
. If the network driver is not installed properly, the network setup window
will not be displayed. In such a case, install the network driver and
If any wrong setting is encountered, correct it and then click then perform network settings accordingly.
.
1. When a network setup option selection window appears,
Verify the date. Verify the time. prompting you to choose between Standard and Custom,
choose (by changing to ), and then
click .
The Network Component Setup window opens.
2. Make sure that is checked.

If it is not checked, put a check mark on it (by changing
to ).
3. Select (by highlighting it), and
Verify the time zone. 00000320.EPS
then click .
The Network Setup window opens in several minutes.
The Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties window opens.
4. Choose (so that changes to ).

IP Address and Subnet Mask then appear.
REFERENCE
The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields are now ready to accept
your numerical value input.
5. Enter the following settings:

Enter an IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.20) in the
field.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Enter a subnet mask (e.g., 255.255.0.0) in the Setting the user account
field.
1. Click [Next] on the Welcome to Windows screen that opens.
A window opens where how to establish connection to the internet
NOTE is to be specified.
before the start of OS installation. 2. Click Skip.
A window opens where user registration to Microsoft is to be
made.
6. Click .
The system returns then to the Network Component Setup 3. Select No and click [Next].
window. A window opens where the computer user is to be determined.
7. Click . It takes a few seconds to display the 4. Enter any user name other than Administrator (iip, for
instance), and click [Next].
following window (computer domain setup window).
A window opens to indicate completion of setup processing.
After a while, the computer domain setup window opens.
5. Click [Finish].
8. Verify that the
After a while, the Windows desktop opens.
radio
button is selected (set to ), and then click .
7. Select .
The User Accounts window opens.
8. Select .
A window opens where the logon or logoff option is to be selected.
9. Remove the checkmark from (
) and click .
00000345.EPS
REFERENCE
Do not let the CL become a domain member.
The Welcome to Windows window opens in about 15 minutes. RI0000381.EPS
The system returns to the User Accounts window.

010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
10. Select iip from the user account names.

The user account setup change window opens.
11. Select Create Password.

The password creation window opens.
12. Perform the following entries:

: Enter fcr-iip.
: Enter fcr-iip.
REFERENCE
The character string entries in the [Type a new password:] and
[Type the new password again to confirm:] fields appear as .
13. Click .
A window for file and/or folder settings will open.
14. Click .
The system returns to the User Accounts window.
15. Close both the User Accounts and Control Panel

windows.
16. Select Logoff from the menu and then click

Logoff on the window that will open.
The iip account logs off, showing then the logon window.
17. Enter Administrator as the user name and fcr-iip as the

password. Click then .
The Window desktop opens.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
2.2.2 Installing the Driver Software Installing the Dell Resource CD utility software
For driver software installation, use the utility software on Dell 1. Insert Dell ResourceCD, which is supplied with the PC, into
ResourceCD. To do this, you must first install the utility software on the the CD-ROM drive.
PC for the CL.
2. When the following window automatically opens, click
REFERENCE .
Device Manager. To open Device Manager, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click My Computer from the menu and select
Properties from the pull-down menu that opens.
The [System Properties] window opens.
2. Click the [Hardware] tab.
3. Click [Device Manager].
The software for items marked ? in Device Manager is not installed.
Install the driver software for such items. RI000214.EPS
A new window opens to indicate that the installation wizard is

started.
RI000215.EPS
3. Click .
The installation processing starts.
After a while, the InstallShield Wizard Complete window opens.
4. Click .
A utility program starts to display the initial screen.
5. Place checkmark to Click here to prevent this information

from being displayed again ( ) and close the
window.
REFERENCE
Depending on the version of the Dell Resource CD utility software,
the PC needs not to be restarted.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Installing the driver software 2. In the Video area, click name of a driver to be used.
Install software for the following drivers. WinZip Self-Extractor appears.
However, do not install the network driver during this procedure and do
it during Installing the network driver software.
3. Scroll the display and click .
Video driver
System driver A driver-related window opens.
Network driver
Audio driver 4. Click .
NOTE A window opens to prompt you to confirm a destination targeted
Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model and for decompressing the video driver.
Technical Support or visiting associated home page. 5. Click .
1. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select [Programs], [Dell

Accessories] and then [Dell Resource CD].
The Dell Resource CD utility software starts running, selecting
automatically System Model, Operating System and then
Topic.
RI000217.EPS
A window opens to prompt you to confirm the folder where the file
is to be decompressed.
6. Click .
A window opens to indicate that decompressing processing is
completed.
7. Click .
The Readme file opens.
RI000216.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
8. Scroll the screen downward until you reach its bottom, and 14. Enter Administrator as the user name and fcr-iip as the
then click . password. Click then .
The Window desktop opens.
15. Install other driver software programs using the same

procedure described in steps 1. through 14.
RI000218.EPS
The File Download window opens.
9. Click .
The Setup window opens.
10. Click .
The Software License Agreement window opens.
11. Click .
The Readme information window opens.
12. Click .
The installation wizard completion window opens.
13. Select Yes, I want to restart my computer now. and click

.
The PC restarts.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Installing the network driver software 4. Click .

Install the network driver as follows.
Described herein is the procedure used to install Intel 10/100 LOM in
the network driver.
NOTE
utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling Dell RI0000372.EPS

A window opens to prompt you to confirm the folder where the file
is to be decompressed.
1. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select [Programs], [Dell
Accessories] and then [Dell Resource CD]. 5. Click .
The Dell Resource CD utility software starts running, selecting A window opens to indicate that decompressing processing is
automatically System Model, Operating System and then completed.
Topic.
6. Click .
The Readme file opens.
7. Close the Readme file.
8. Right-click My Computer from the menu to

select Properties.
RI000216.EPS
2. In the Network (NIC) Drivers area, click name of a driver to

be used.
A driver-related window opens.
3. Click .
A window opens to prompt you to confirm a destination targeted
for decompressing the network driver.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
9. Click the Hardware tab and then the 11. Click the Driver tab and then .
tab.
RI0000375.EPS
RI0000373.EPS
The Hardware Update Wizard window opens.
12. Select Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]
10. Right-click Ethernet Controller from Other devices to and click .
select Properties.
RI0000376.EPS
A window opens where search and installation options are to be

selected.
RI0000374.EPS
The Network Adapters Properties window opens.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
13. Select Dont search. I wil choose the driver to install. and 16. Click Browse and select C:\DELL\drivers\R56484\WinXP.
click .
RI0000379.EPS
17. Click .
The network adapter selection window opens.
RI0000377.EPS
18. Click .
A hardware type selection window opens. A window opens to indicate completion of the Hardware Update
Wizard.
14. Select Network adapters and click .
19. Click .
The Intel(R) PRO/100 M Network Connection Properties window
opens.
20. Click .
21. Make sure that the network driver has been installed
properly and close the Device Manager window.
RI0000378.EPS
The network adapter selection window opens.
15. Click .
The Install From Disk window opens.
RI0000380.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
2.2.3 Setting the OS Setting the refresh frequency

Perform the following OS-related settings. 1. In the Settings tab of the Display Properties window,
The number of colors (Colors) and monitor resolution (Screen area) click .
Refresh frequency The Plug-and-Play Monitor and ... Properties window opens.
Modification of the OS selection menu
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the 2. Click the Monitor tab.
suspend mode (as necessary)
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point 3. From the Screen refresh rate pull-down menu, choose
75 Hertz.
Setting the monitor
1. Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose NOTE
Properties from the pop-up menu. If the screen becomes disordered when a setting of 75 Hertz is
chosen, change the setting to 70 Hertz.
2. Click the Settings tab. change it to 60 Hertz.
RI0000354.EPS
3. Complete monitor setup as directed below.
I. II. RI0000355.EPS
I. Screen area : Choose 1024 768 pixels.

II. Colors : Choose True Color (24- or 32-bit). RI000221.EPS
4. Click .
The screen area changes and the monitor setting window opens.
5. Click .
NOTE
Click immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds, the window
returns to the previous status.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
4. Click . Hiding the OS selection menu

The screen area changes and the Monitor Settings window When the OS is installed newly, the OS selection menu opens at OS
opens. startup. Therefore, perform the following procedure so that the OS
selection menu does not open:
5. Click .
1. Click to select Control Panel.
NOTE
returns to the previous status. 2. Select .
6. Click to close the Display Properties window.

3. Doubl-click .
4. Click the Advanced tab and then click .
RI0000357.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
5. Uncheck ( ). Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when

exiting the suspend mode
By default, the PC prompts for password input when you attempt to exit
the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may
following procedure as needed.
RI000223.EPS
1. From the menu, click Control Panel to select it.
6. Click .
The system returns to the System Properties window.
2. Double-click .
7. Click .
The system returns to the Control Panel. The Power Options Properties window opens.
8. Close control panel. 3. Select Never for System standby.

The system returns to the desktop.
RI0000363.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
4. Click the Advanced tab. Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
Select . (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point.
5. Uncheck ( ). If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you
select an image distribution destination with the QA function.

2. Double-click the icon.

RI000225.EPS
6. Click . The Regional and Language Options window opens.
The system returns to the Control Panel.

3. Make sure that the Regional and Language Options tab is
7. Close the Control Panel. selected and click .
RI000228.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
4. Confirm the following settings. Canceling settings for automatic OS update

I. Click the Numbers tab and then select . (period) for the Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows XP) update as follows.
Decimal symbol field.
If, as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected
for the Digit grouping symbol field and Decimal symbol field, 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
change the symbol for the Digit grouping symbol field.
II. Check that the value is set to 0.7 for the Display leading zeros
field.
2. Double-click .
3. Click Automatic Updates tab.
I. 4. Remove checkmark from [Keep my computer up to date.]

( ).
II.
RI000226.EPS
5. Click
RI0000365.EPS
.
The system returns to the Control Panel. 5. Click .
6. Close the Control Panel.
The system returns to the desktop. 6. Close the Control Panel.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Setting display properties Setting the taskbar

Use the procedure below to change display properties from Windows Change the Windows taskbar display setting as follows.
XP to Windows Classic.
1. Right-click a position on the taskbar to select Properties.
1. Right-click a menu on the desktop to select Properties. The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window opens.
2. Perform the following taskbar-related settings.
2. Select Windows Classic from the Themes pull-down
Place a checkmark to ( ).
menu.
RI00000356.EPS
RI0000361.EPS
3. Click . Remove the checkmark from ( ).

The display properties change to Classic.
4. Click and close the Display Properties

window.
RI0000364.EPS
3. Click and close the Taskbar and Start Menu

Properties window.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista Removing the peripheral devices
1. Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as barcode reader,
2.3.1 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
magnetic card reader and touch panel, from the USB ports
This section describes how to install Windows Vista. (except the keyboard and mouse).
The OS is to be installed in the following situations:
After HDD replacement
Items to be readied for OS installation

OPERATING SYSTEM Disk
DRIVERS AND UTILITIES Disk
IMPORTANT
image data, if any, using Explorer or the like.
Make backup copy of config data that stores various CL and RU
settings, ahead of time.
Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items
(place checkmarks to all items).
NOTE
will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To perform network
settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (HUB) accordingly
before installation work.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Network connection to the CL Changing boot sequence of the computer (for DELL PCs)
Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network In here Boot Sequence is changed so that PC starts from CD by the
setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, BIOS menu of a PC.
depending on the Windows Vista installer specifications.
1. Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches.
1. Use a network cable to connect the CL to the HUB. The PC starts running.
2. Turn ON the power to the HUB.

2. Press the <F2> key when the DELL logo appears at the
center of the window.
NOTE
RAID-related settings If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup
When a RAID-type PC is used, RAID-related settings must be window will not open.
performed accordingly. In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.
For details of the RAID-related settings, see Appendix I RAID-
related Setting. The setup window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Select System Configuration USB Controller and 5. Select Performance Multi Core Support and place a
select Enable. checkmark to Enable Multi Core Support.
AWV32124A.ai
AWV32126.ai
4. Select Security CPU XD Support and remove the

6. Select Intel SpeedStep and remove the checkmark from
checkmark from Enable CPU XD Support.
Enable Intel SpeedStep.
AWV32127.ai
7. Select General in the Boot Sequence area and set so

AWV32125.ai that Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive comes to the very
top.
AWV32149.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
8. Select Remote Wake Up in the Power Management area Re-installing the OS

and then select Disable.
1. Select My language is English.
DCL32001.ai
AWV32002.ai
9. Insert the OPERATING SYSTEM disk into the PC. The language sellection window opens.
10. Click at the lower right corner of the window. 2. Make the following settings.
A confirmation window opens.
11. Click [Yes].

A while after restarting, the message Press any key to boot from
CD or DVD.. appears at the upper left corner of the window.
12. Press the <Enter> key within three seconds.

After a while, the Windows Vista setup window opens.
NOTE AWV32003.ai
If you do not press the <Enter> key within about three seconds
Language to install : English
after the Press any key to boot from the CD or DVD message
Time and currency format : English (United States)
appears at the upper left corner of the window, the installation CD
Keyboard or input method : US
will not be recognized accordingly.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3. Click [Next]. 6. Select Custom (advanced).

AWV32006.ai
AWV32004.ai
The Where do you want to install Windows? window opens.

4. Click Install now.
The Please read the license terms window opens.
7. Select Drive options (advanced).
5. Place a checkmark to I accept the license terms and click

[Next].
AWV32007.ai
AWV32005.ai
The Which type of installation do you want? window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
8. Select Delete. 10. Select New.
AWV32008.ai
AWV32010.ai

11. Click [Apply].
9. Click [OK].
AWV32009.ai
The system returns to the Where do you want to install

Windows? window.
AWV32011.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
12. Select Format. Windows setup

1. Make the following settings.
AWV32012.ai
AWV32014.ai

Type a user name (for example, John) : iip
Type a password (recommended) : fcr-iip
13. Click [OK]. Retype your password : fcr-iip
Type a password hint : Enter a one-byte space
NOTES
The character string entries in the Type a password
(recommended): and Retype your password: fields appear as
.
When a character has been entered into the column Type a
password hint, it becomes possible to click .
AWV32013.ai

Windows? window. 2. Click .
A window opens to prompt for computer name.
14. Click [Next].
The OS installation processing starts.
Upon completion of installation, the Choose a user name and
picture window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Enter a computer name (host name) in the field provided for 6. Verify the Date, Time, and Time zone and click
such purpose. .
The defaults are as follws. If the date time and time zone are incorrect, correct then
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX accordinary and then click .
(CL represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
(CR represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
(CP represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
AWV32017.ai
AWV32145.ai
NOTE
4. Click .
If a dialog box like that shown below opens, select Public location.
The Help protect Windows automatically window opens.
5. Select Ask me later.
AWV32016.ai AWV32018.ai
The Review your time and date settings window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
The following window opens. Setting the user account

AWV32019.ai
7. Click .
After a while, a login window opens.
8. Remove the OPERATING SYSTEM disk from the PC. AWV32021.ai

9. Enter fcr-iip and click .
2. Select System and Maintenance.
AWV32020.ai
NOTE
The entered password is displayed as .
The desktop screen opens.

AWV32028.ai
REFERENCE The System and Maintenance window opens.

If the Welcome Center window has been displayed, close the
Welcome Center window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Select Administrative Tools. 5. Click .
AWV32031.ai
The Computer Management window opens.
6. Select Local Users and Groups Users.
AWV32029.ai
The Administrative Tools window opens.
4. Double-click Computer Management.

AWV32032.ai
7. Right-click Administrator and select Properties.
AWV32030.ai
The User Account Control window opens.
AWV32033.ai
The Administrator Propeties window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
8. Remove the checkmark from Account is disabled and 11. Make the following settings and click .
click .
AWV32036.ai
New password : fcr-iip

Confirm password : fcr-iip
NOTE
AWV32034.ai

The system returns to the Computer Management window.
9. Right-click Administrator and select Set Password....
AWV32037.ai
12. Click .
AWV32035.ai
The Set Password for Administrator window opens.
10. Click .
AWV32148.ai
The Set password for Administrator window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
13. Right-click iip and select Properties. Setting the User Account Control
Turn off and disable User Account Control from prompting for
credentials to install applications, and changing the elevation prompt
behavior.
AWV32038.ai
The iip Properties window opens.
14. Place a checkmark to Account is disabled and click

.
AWV32021.ai
2. Select User Accounts.
AWV32040.ai
AWV32039.ai
The system returns to the Computer Management window. The User Accounts window opens.
15. Close the Computer Management window.

The system returns to the Administrative Tools window.
16. Close the Administrative Tools window.

The system returns to the System and Maintenance window.
17. Close the System and Maintenance window.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Select User Accounts. 5. Click .
AWV32041.ai
AWV32043.ai
The Make changes to your user account window opens. The Turn User Account Control On or Off window opens.
4. Select Turn User Account Control on or off. 6. Remove the checkmark from Use User Account Control
(UAC) to help protect your computer and click .
AWV32044.ai
The Microsoft Windows window opens.
AWV32042.ai
The User Account Control window opens.
AWV32045.ai
7. Click .
After the PC restarted, a login window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
8. Enter fcr-iip and click . 2.3.2 Installing the Driver Software

Installing the driver software
Use the DRIVERS AND UTILITIES disk supplied with the PC to install
the following driver software items.
REFERENCE
AWV32020.ai
I. Right-click My Computer from the menu and select Properties

NOTE from the pull-down menu that opens.
The entered password is displayed as . The [System Properties] window opens.
II. Click [Device Manager].
REFERENCE The software for items marked ! in Device Manager is not installed.
If the Welcome Center window has been displayed, close the
Welcome Center window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Installing the Dell Resource CD utility software 4. Click .
1. Insert the DRIVERS AND UTILITIES disk into the PC. The Ready to Install the Program window opens.
The AutoPlay window opens.
2. Select Run autoRcd.exe.
AWV32050.ai
5. Click .
The installation processing starts. After a while, the InstallShield
Wizard Completed window opens.
AWV32128.ai
The ResourceCD Installation window opens.
3. Cliclk .
AWV32051.ai
6. Click .
The utility program starts and the initial window is displayed.
7. Checkmark Click here to prevent this infomation from

being displayed again. and close the window.
AWV32048.ai
A new window opens to indicate that the installation wizard is

started.
AWV32049.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Installing the Driver Software REFERENCE

Installing the software for the following drivers. For example, installation procedure of video device driver is described
as follows.
1. Controller Drivers
Intel Chipset Software Installation Utility Rev:Axx 1. Reinsert the DRIVER AND UTILITIES... disk to have
AutoPlay mode be activated.
2. Video Drivers
The Dell ResourceCD utility software starts and System model,
Intel Q43/Q45/G43/G45 (Eaglelake) Graphics Controller Rev:Axx Operating system, and Topic are selected automatically.
3. Audio Drivers
Analog Device ADI 198X Integrated HD Audio Rev:Axx
4. Network (NIC) Drivers

Intel 825XX Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device Rev:Axx
5. OS Tools
Dell OS Tools Rev:Axx
Dell System Software:Rev:Axx
NOTE
Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model
and utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling AWV32054.ai
Dell Technical Support or visiting associated home page.

2. In the Video area, click name of a driver to be used.
AWV32139.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Scroll the display and click . 4. Click .

AWV32057.ai
5. Click .
AWV32055.ai
AWV32058.ai
6. Click .
AWV32056.ai
AWV32059.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7. Click . 11. Click [Next].

The following window opens. A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
12. Select No, I will restart this computer later. and click
[Finish].
The system returns to the driver extraction window.
13. Click
AWV32060.ai
.
8. Click [Next].
AWV32065.ai
The system returns to the driver selection window.

AWV32061.ai Refer to Device Manager and install the corresponding driver.
Installation has been completed when the Device Manager
9. Click [Yes]. window shows no more exclamation marks ! .
AWV32062.ai
10. Click [Next].

Upon completion of installtion, the following winidow opens.
AWV32063.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Restarting and Setting the PC 6. Enter fcr-iip and click .

1. Restart the PC.
NOTE
will not open.In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. AWV32020.ai
above again.
7. Remove the checkmark from Run at startup and close the
The setup window opens. Welcome Center window.
3. Select System Configuration USB Controller and

select No Boot.
AWV32124.ai
4. Click at the lower right corner of the window.

AWV32144.ai
5. Click [Yes].
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.3.3 Installing Windows Vista SP2
1. Insert Vista SP2 OS Update DVD V1.0 (114Y5085053A00)

into the PC.
The Welcome to Windows Vista Service Pack 2 window opens.
2. Click [Next].
The Please read the license terms window opens.
3. Checkmark I accept the license terms and click [Next].

The Install Windows Vista Service Pack 2 window opens.
4. Ensure that Automatically restart the computer is

checkmarked and then click [Install].
Installation processing will start.
After the PC has restarted, the login window opens.
5. Type in fcr-iip on the window that opens and click .

The Windows Vista Service Pack 2 is now installed window
opens.
6. Click [Close].
7. Remove the DVD from the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.3.4 Setting the OS Setting the Control Panel

Perform the following OS-related settings. Change display of the Control Panel to the classic view.
Setting the Control Panel
Setting the IP address 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
Setting the taskbar
Setting the Security Center
Setting the automatic OS update
Setting the monitor size
Setting the visual effects
Setting the screen properties
Setting the Power Options
Setting the Internet Time
Canceling settings for simplified file sharing
Addition of components AWV32021.ai
Setting the Service

Setting the Windows Sidebar
Setting the Windows Defender
2. Select Classic View.
Setting the Defragmentation
Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping symbol
(other than Japanese)
AWV32067.ai
The Control Panel changes to classic view.
3. Close the Control Panel window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setting the IP address 4. Double-click Local Area Connection.

Setting the IP address.
AWV32146.ai
The Local Area Connection Status window opens.
5. Click .
AWV32021.ai
2. Double-click .
The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
3. Select Manage network connection. AWV32073.ai
AWV32147.ai
The Network Connection window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click 8. Click .

. The system returns to the Local Area Connection Properties
window.
9. Click .
10. Click .
The system returns to the Network Connection window.
AWV32074.ai 11. Close both the Network Connection and Network and
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window Sharing Center windows.
opens. The system returns to the desktop screen.
7. Select Use the following IP address and make the

following settings.
I
II
AWV32077.ai
I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 172.16.1.20)

II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.255.0)
NOTE
Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted downbefore
the start of OS installation.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setting the taskbar 4. Select Notification Area tab and remove the checkmark
Change the windows taskbar display setting as follows. from Hide inactive icons.
AWV32082.ai
5. Click .
The system returns to the Control Panel window.
AWV32021.ai
The Control Panel window opens. 6. Close the Control Panel window.
2. Double-click .
The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window opens.

Place a checkmark to Auto-hide the taskbar.
Remove the checkmark from Show Quick Launch.
AWV32081.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setting the Security Center 4. Select Dont notify me and dont display the icon (not
Hiding security alarm notifications as follows. recommended).
AWV32085.ai
The system returns to the Windows Security Center window.
5.
AWV32021.ai
Close the Windows Security Center window.


2. Double-click . The system returns to the desktop screen.
The Windows Security Center window opens.
3. Select Change the way Security Center alerts me.
AWV32084.ai
A notification window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setting the automatic OS update 4. Select Never check for update and click .
Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows Vista) update as follows.
AWV32088.ai
The system returns to the Windows Update window.
AWV32021.ai 5. Close the Windows Update window.

The Control Panel window opens. The system returns to the desktop screen.
2. Double-click .
The Windows Update window opens.
3. Select View advanced options.
AWV32087.ai
The Change settings window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setting the Monitor Size 3. Select Advanced Settings....

Change the monitor size to 12801024 as follows.
1. Select Personalization from the right-click menu on the

desktop.
2. Select Display Settings.
AWV32091.ai
4. Select List All Modes....
AWV32090.ai
The Display Settings window opens.
AWV32092.ai
The List All Modes window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. Select 1280 by 1024, True Color (32 bit), 60 Hertz and click Setting the Visual Effects
. Hiding the windows contents while dragging.
AWV32093.ai
The system returns to the monitor properties window.

AWV32021.ai
6. Click . The Control Panel window opens.

The system returns to the Display Settings window.
NOTE
2. Double-click .
If a window like that shown below opens, click in 15
seconds.
The Performance Infomation and Tools window opens.
3. Select Adjust visual effects.
AWV32094.ai
7. Click . AWV32098.ai
The system returns to the Personalization window. The Performance Options window opens.
8. Close the Personalization window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Remove the checkmark from Show window contents while Setting the Screen Properties
dragging and click . Change the properties settings screen from Windows Vista to
Windows Classic.

desktop.
2. Select Theme.
AWV32099.ai
The system returns to the Performance Infomation and Tools

window.
5. Close the Performance Infomation and Tools window.

The system returns to the desktop screen. AWV32153.ai
The Theme Settings window opens.
3. Select Windows Classic from the pull-down menu offered

by the Theme option.
AWV32152.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Click . Setting the Power Options

The properties settings screen changes to classic view. Changing the power options for PC and HD drives.
5. Click . 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.

The system returns to the Personalization window.

AWV32150.ai
2. Double-click .
The Power Options window opens.
3. Select High performance and click Change plan

settings.
AWV32101.ai
The Edit Plan Settings window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Select Change advanced power settings. 6. Select Power buttons and lid and Power button action,
and then select Shut down.
AWV32136.ai
The advanced setting window opens.
5. Select Hard disk - Turn off hard disk after and select
Never.
AWV32154.ai
7. Select Power buttons and lid and Start menu power

button, and then select Shut down.
AWV32137.ai
AWV32155.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
8. Click . Setting the Internet Time

The system returns to the Change plan settings window. Disabling synchronization with an Internet time server.
9. Close the Change plan settings window. 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
AWV32150.ai
2. Double-click .
The Date and Time window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Select the Internet Time tab and click Canceling settings for simplified file sharing
. Disabling use of the sharing wizard.
AWV32150.ai

AWV32103.ai
The Internet Time Settings window opens.

2. Double-click .
4. Remove checkmark from Synchronize with an Internet time
server and click . The Folder Options window opens.
3. Select the View tab.
AWV32104.ai
The system returns to the Date and Time window.
5. Click . AWV32106.ai

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard and Addition of components
click . Installing additional Windows components.
AWV32150.ai
2. Double-click .
AWV32107.ai

The Uninstall or change a program window opens.

3. Select Turn Windows features on or off.
AWV32109.ai
The Windows Features window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Place a checkmark to the following items. Setting the Service

FTP Publishing Service
IIS 6 Management Comptibility 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
Telnet Client
AWV32150.ai
2. Double-click .
3. Double-click Services.
AWV32110.ai
REFERENCE
indicates an item to be installed.
indicates installation of some items of the lower level.
When a check box is checked, all items in lower levels are
selected at the same time.
5. Click .
Upon completion of installation, the sysytem returns to the AWV32130.ai
Windows Features window. The Services window opens.

6. Close the Uninstall or change a program window.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Right-click FTP Publishing Service and select Properties. Setting the Windows Sidebar
The FTP Publishing Service Properties (Local Computer) window Hiding the Windows sidebar.
opens.
5. Select Automatic from the Startup type pull-down menu
and click .
AWV32150.ai

AWV32131.ai
The system returns to the Services window.
6. 2. Double-click .
Close the Services window.
The Windows Sidebar Properties window opens.
The system returns to the desktop screen. 3. Remove the checkmark from Start Sidebar when Windows
starts and select .
AWV32112.ai

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setting the Windows Defender 4. Remove the checkmark from Use Windows Defender and
Changing the settings for Windows Defender. click .
AWV32150.ai
2. Double-click .
AWV32115.ai
The Windows Defender window opens.

3. Select Tools and select Options.
AWV32151.ai
5. Click .
The system returns to the Windows Defender window.
AWV32114.ai
6. Close the Windows Defender window.
The Options window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setting the Defragmentation 3. Select the Tools tab and select .

Disabling the setting for automatic defragmentation.
1. Select Computer from the menu.
AWV32121.ai
The Disk Defragmenter window opens.
AWV32119.ai
4. Remove the checkmark from Run on a schedule
The Computer window opens. (recommended) and click .
2. Right-click Local Disk (C:) and select Properties.
AWV32122.ai
The system returns to the Local Disk (C:) / Properties window.
5. Click .
The system returns to the Computer window.
AWV32120.ai
6. Close the Computer window.
The Local Disk (C:) Properties window opens. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping 3. Confirm that a language other than Japanese has been
symbol (other than Japanese) selected and click Customize this format.
If the Current format has been changed to a language other than
Japanese in Regional and Language Options, confirm the decimal
symbol and the digit grouping symbol.
Decimal Symbol : . ( period )
Digit grouping Symbol : , ( comma )
Display leading zeros : 0.7
AWV32141.ai
The Customize Regional Options window opens.

AWV32150.ai
2. Double-click .
The Regional and Language Options window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Confirm the following settings.

Decimal Symbol : . (period)
Digit grouping Symbol : , (comma)
DXL03020320.ai
5. Click .
The system returns to the Regional and Language Options
window.
6. Click .
7. Close the Computer window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.4 Installing and Setting Windows 7 Removing the peripheral devices

1. Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as barcode reader,
2.4.1 Installing and Setting Windows 7 magnetic card reader and touch panel, from the USB ports
(except the keyboard and mouse).
This section describes how to install Windows 7.
The OS is to be installed in the following situations:
After HDD replacement Network connection of CL
After an error occurrence in the OS Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network
setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed,
Items to be readied for OS installation
depending on the Windows 7 installer specifications.
Reinstallation Disk
Resource Disk 1. Use a network cable to connect the CL to the HUB.
IMPORTANT
2. Turn ON the power to the HUB.
image data, if any, using Explorer or the like.
Make backup copy of config data that stores various settings of CL
and Reader/Detector/Exposure device connected to CL, ahead of
time.
Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items
(place checkmarks to all the items).
NOTE
will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To perform network
settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (HUB) accordingly
before installation work.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-82
Changing boot sequence of the computer (for DELL PCs) 4. Select Security CPU XD Support and remove the
In here Boot Sequence is changed so that PC starts from CD by the checkmark from Enable CPU XD Support.
BIOS menu of a PC.

NOTE
will not open.
In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.

DXL03020002.ai
3. Select System Configuration USB Controller and then

No Boot.
5. Select Performance Multi Core Support and place a
checkmark to Enable Multi Core Support.
DXL03020001.ai
DXL03020003.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-83
6. Select Intel SpeedStep and remove the checkmark from 8. Select Low Power Mode in the Power Management area
Enable Intel SpeedStep. and then remove the checkmark from Enable Low Power
Mode.
DXL03020004.ai
7. Select Remote Wake Up in the Power Management area

and then select Disable.
DXL03020006.ai
9. Insert the Reinstallation Disk into the PC.
10. Click at the lower right corner of the window.

11. Click [Yes].

The DELL logo appears, and then F12 Boot Options appears at
the upper right corner of the window.
12. Press the <F12> key while F12 Boot Options appears.
The Boot Device Menu screen appears.
DXL03020005.ai 13. Select Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive and press the
<Enter> key.
After a while, the Press any key to boot from CD or DVD...
message appears on the window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-84
14. Press the <Enter> key within three seconds.

After a while, the Windows 7 setup window opens.
NOTE
If you do not press the <Enter> key within about three seconds
after the Press any key to boot from the CD or DVD... message
appears on the window, the Reinstallation Disk will not be
recognized accordingly.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-85
Re-installing the OS 3. Click .

1. Select My language is English. The following window opens.
DXL03020139.ai
DXL03020137.ai 4. Click Install now.

The language selection window opens. The Please read the license terms window opens.
2. Make the following settings. 5. Place a checkmark to I accept the license terms and click
.
DXL03020138.ai
Language to install : English

Time and currency format : English (United States)
Keyboard or input method : US
DXL03020140.ai
The Which type of installation do you want? window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-86
6. Select Custom (advanced). 8. Select Delete.
DXL03020141.ai
The Where do you want to install Windows? window opens. DXL03020143.ai

7. Select the partition to be deleted and select Drive options
(advanced).
DXL03020144.ai
9. Click .

DXL03020142.ai
Windows? window.
10. If multiple partitions exist, repeat the step 7. to 9. and delete

all the existing partitions.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-87
11. Select Disk 0 Unallocated Space and select New. 13. Click .
Partition 1 and Partition 2 are assigned.
DXL03020148.ai
DXL03020145.ai 14. Select Partition 1 and select Format.
12. Click .
DXL03020149.ai
DXL03020146.ai
DXL03020150.ai
15. Click .

DXL03020147.ai
Windows? window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-88
16. Select Partition 2 and select Format. 18. Select Partition 2 and click .
DXL03020151.ai
DXL03020153.ai
NOTE
To install Windows 7, the system requires at least 6031 MB free
space. If you select a partition whose free space is less than 6031
DXL03020152.ai
MB and select , Windows 7 cannot be installed.
17. Click .
The OS installation processing starts.
Upon completion of installation, a window to enter user name and
The system returns to the Where do you want to install computer name opens.
Windows? window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-89
Windows setup 3. Make the following settings.
DXL03020155.ai
Type a password (recommended) : fcr-iip

Retype your password : fcr-iip
Type a password hint : enter a one-byte space
DXL03020154.ai
Type a user name (for example, John) : iip

Type a computer name : CSL NOTES
The character string entries in the Type a password
2. Click . (recommended): and Retype your password: fields appear as
.
A window opens to prompt for password. When a character has been entered into the column Type a
password hint, it becomes possible to click .
4. Click .
The Help protect your computer and improve Windows

automatically window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-90
5. Select Ask me later. 7. Select Public network.
DXL03020156.ai
The Review your time and date settings window opens.
6. Verify the Time zone, Date, and Time and click

DXL03020158.ai
.
The system finalizes the settings.
If they are incorrect, correct accordingly and then click
.
DXL03020159.ai
Upon completion of finalizing process, the desktop screen opens.
8. Remove the Reinstallation Disk from the PC.
DXL03020157.ai
The Select your computers current location window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-91
Setting the user account

3. Click .
DXL03020162.ai
4. Double-click Computer Management.

DXL03020160.ai
2. Select Large icons from View by.
DXL03020163.ai
DXL03020161.ai 5. Select Local Users and Groups Users.

The All Control Panel Items window opens.
DXL03020164.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-92
6. Right-click Administrator and select Properties. 8. Right-click Administrator and select Set Password....
DXL03020167.ai
The Set Password for Administrator window opens.
DXL03020165.ai
9. Click .
The Administrator Properties window opens.
7. Remove the checkmark from Account is disabled in the

General tab and click .
DXL03020168.ai
A window opens to prompt for password.
DXL03020166.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-93
10. Make the following settings and click . 13. Place a checkmark to Account is disabled in the General
tab and click .
DXL03020169.ai
New password : fcr-iip

Confirm password : fcr-iip
NOTE
DXL03020172.ai

14. Close the Computer Management window.

DXL03020170.ai

11. Click .
The system returns to the All Control Panel Items window.
16. Close the All Control Panel Items window.
12. Right-click iip and select Properties.
DXL03020171.ai
The iip Properties window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-94
Setting the User Account Control 3. Select Change User Account Control Settings.
Turn off and disable User Account Control from prompting for
credentials to install applications, and changing the elevation prompt
behavior.
1. Select All Control Panel Items from the menu.
DXL03020173.ai
The User Account Control Settings window opens.
4. Lower the slide bar to the bottom and click .
DXL03020160.ai
2. Click .
DXL03020174.ai
DXL03020175.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-95
5. Click .
6. Close the User Accounts window.

7. Restart the PC.

DXL03020046.ai
NOTE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-96
2.4.2 Installing the Driver Software
Use the Resource Disk supplied with the PC to install the following
driver software items.
REFERENCE
I. Right-click My Computer from the menu and select
Properties from the pull-down menu that opens.
II. Click [Device Manager].
The software for items marked ! in Device Manager is not installed.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-97
Installing the driver software REFERENCE

Installing the software for the following drivers. For example, installation procedure of video device driver is described
as follows.
1. System Drivers
Intel Chipset Software Installation Utility Rev: Axx 1. Reinsert the Resource Disk to have AutoPlay mode be
activated.
2. Video Drivers
The Dell ResourceCD utility software starts and System model,
Intel Q43/Q45/G43/G45 (Eaglelake) Graphics Controller Rev: Axx Operating system, and Topic are selected automatically.
3. Audio Drivers
Analog Devices ADI 198x Integrated HD Audio Rev: Axx
4. Network (NIC) Drivers

Intel 825XX Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device Rev: Axx
5. Storage Drivers (For RAID type)

Intel Matrix Storage Manager Rev: xxx
NOTES
DXL03020307.ai
If the system requests to restart the PC after installation of each driver,

restart the PC. NOTE
If proper System Model, Operating System, and Topic are not
displayed under Search Criteria, select them properly.
2. In the Video Drivers area, click name of a driver to be used.

DXL03020308.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-98
3. Click . 4. Click .
DXL03020312.ai
5. Click .
DXL03020309.ai
The following window opens. DXL03020313.ai
6. Click .
DXL03020310.ai
NOTE
When is clicked, the following window might be
displayed. If the window is displayed, replace the disk according to DXL03020314.ai
the instruction on the window and click .
DXL03020311.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-99

The following window opens. Upon completion of installation, the following window opens.
DXL03020315.ai
8. Click .
NOTE
If you are installing Video Drivers and when the Welcome to the
Setup Program window opens, remove the checkmark from
Automatically run WinSAT and enable the Windows Aero desktop
theme (if supported). and click . DXL03020318.ai
The following window opens. 11. Click .
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
DXL03020316.ai
9. Click . DXL03020319.ai
The following window opens. 12. Select Yes, I want to restart this computer now. and click
.
DXL03020317.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-100
DXL03020046.ai
NOTE
The desktop screen appears.
14. Remove the Resource Disk from the PC.

Refer to Device Manager and install the corresponding driver.
Installation has been completed when the Device Manager window
shows no more exclamation marks ! .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-101
2.4.3 Setting the OS Setting the control panel

Change display of the control panel to the Large icons view.
Perform the following OS-related settings.
Setting the control panel 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
Changing the computer name
Setting the IP address
Setting the taskbar
Hiding icons on the taskbar
Setting the action center
Setting the automatic OS update
Setting the monitor size
Setting the visual effects
Setting the automatic window arrangement
Setting the power options
Setting the internet time DXL03020160.ai
Canceling settings for simplified file sharing

Addition of components The Control Panel window opens.
Setting the service
Disabling the scheduler 2. Select Large icons from View by.
Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping symbol
(other than Japanese)
DXL03020161.ai

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-102
Changing the computer name 4. Select the Computer Name tab and click .
DXL03020323.ai
DXL03020160.ai
The Computer Name/Domain Changes window opens.
5. Input the following into the Computer name column.
The defaults are as follws.
2. Click .
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX
(CL represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
The System window opens.
(CR represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
3. Select Advanced system settings.
(CP represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
DXL03020322.ai
DXL03020324.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-103
6. Click . 10. Enter fcr-iip and click .

DXL03020325.ai
7. Click .
NOTE
8. Click .
The desktop screen appears.
DXL03020326.ai
9. Click .
After the PC is restarted, a login window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-104
Setting the IP address 4. Click .

Setting the IP address.
DXL03020160.ai

DXL03020328.ai

2. Click .
5. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click
.
The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
3. Confirm that Unidentified network is set to Public

network and select Local Area Connection.
DXL03020327.ai

DXL03020329.ai
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-105
6. Select Use the following IP address and make the Setting the taskbar
following settings. Change the windows taskbar display setting as follows.
I
II
III
DXL03020330.ai
I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 172.16.1.20)

II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.0.0)
III. Keep the Default gateway in blank. (Do not enter)
NOTE
DXL03020160.ai
before the start of OS installation. The All Control Panel Items window opens.
The system returns to the Local Area Connection Properties The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window opens.
window.
3. Select the Taskbar tab and make the following settings.
8. Click .
Place a checkmark to Auto-hide the taskbar.
The system returns to the Local Area Connection Status window. Place a checkmark to Use small icons.
9. Click .
10. Close the Network and Sharing Center window.

DXL03020331.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-106
4. Select the Start Menu tab and select Shut down. 6. Place a checkmark to Always show all icons and
notifications on the taskbar and click .
DXL03020332.ai
5. Select the Taskbar tab and click .
DXL03020334.ai
The system returns to the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties

window.
DXL03020333.ai 7. Click .
The Notification Area Icons window opens. The system returns to the All Control Panel Items window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-107
Hiding icons on the taskbar Setting the action center

Hide the confirmation message for security or maintenance.
1. Select Unpin this program from taskbar from the right-
click menu of at the right side of on the taskbar. 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
DXL03020335.ai
The icon hides.
2. Perform step 1. for and at the right side of on

the taskbar. DXL03020336.ai
2. Click .
The Action Center window opens.
3. Select Change Action Center settings.
DXL03020337.ai
The Change Action Center settings window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-108
4. Select Problem reporting settings. 6. Remove all checkmarks and click .
DXL03020340.ai
The system returns to the Action Center window.

DXL03020338.ai
7. Close the Action Center window.
The Problem Reporting Settings window opens.
5. Select Never check for solutions and click .
DXL03020339.ai
The system returns to the Change Action Center settings window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-109
Setting the automatic OS update 4. Select Never check for updates and click .
Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows 7) update as follows.
DXL03020342.ai
The system returns to the Windows Update window.
5. Close the Windows Update window.

DXL03020336.ai
2. Click .
The Windows Update window opens.
3. Select Change Settings.
DXL03020341.ai
The Change settings window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-110
Setting the monitor size 4. Select 1280 1024, True Color (32 bit), 60 Hertz and click
Change the monitor size. .
1. Select Screen resolution from the right-click menu on the

desktop.
The Screen Resolution window opens.
2. Click Advanced settings.
Win7Appx01003.ai
The system returns to the monitor properties window.
5. Click .
The system returns to the Screen Resolution window.
DXL03020343.ai
The monitor properties window opens. 6. Click .

3. Select the Adapter tab and click . The system returns to the desktop screen.
DXL03020344.ai
The List All Modes window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-111
Setting the visual effects 4. Remove the checkmark from Show window contents while
Hiding the windows contents while dragging. dragging on the Visual Effects tab and click .
DXL03020336.ai
The All Control Panel Items window opens. DXL03020347.ai
The system returns to the Performance Information and Tools

window.
2. Click .
5. Close the Performance Information and Tools window.
The Performance Information and Tools window opens. The system returns to the desktop screen.
3. Select Adjust visual effects.
DXL03020346.ai
The Performance Options window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-112

Change the screen properties settings from Windows 7 to Windows
Classic.

desktop.
2. Select Windows Classic.
DXL03020203.ai
The screen properties settings change to classic view.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-113
Setting the automatic window arrangement 3. Select Make the mouse easier to use.
Disable the automatic adjustment function of window size.
DXL03020220.ai
DXL03020210.ai The Make the mouse easier to use window opens.

The All Control Panel Items window opens. 4. Place a checkmark to Prevent windows from being
automatically arranged when moved to the edge of the
2. Click . screen and click .
The Ease of Access Center window opens.
DXL03020221.ai
The system returns to the Ease of Access Center window.
5. Close the Ease of Access Center window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-114
Setting the power options 4. Select High performance and click Change plan
Changing the power options for PC and HD drives. settings.
DXL03020228.ai
The Edit Plan Settings window opens.
5.
DXL03020210.ai
Select Change advanced power settings.

2. Click .
The Power Options window opens.
3. Click at the right side of Show additional plans.
DXL03020229.ai
The advanced settings window opens.
DXL03020227.ai
An additional plan displays.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-115
6. Select Hard disk and Turn off hard disk after, and then 8. Select Display and Turn off display after, and then set to
set to Never. 20.
DXL03020230.ai
DXL03020232.ai
7. Select Power buttons and lid and Power button action,

and then select Shut down. 9. Click .
The system returns to the Edit plan settings window.
10. Close the Edit plan settings window.

DXL03020231.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-116
Setting the internet time 3. Select the Internet Time tab and click
Disabling synchronization with an internet time server. .
DXL03020233.ai
DXL03020210.ai The Internet Time Settings window opens.

4. Remove checkmark from Synchronize with an Internet time
server and click .
2. Click .
The Date and Time window opens.
DXL03020234.ai
The system returns to the Date and Time window.
5. Click .

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-117
Canceling settings for simplified file sharing 4. Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard and
Disabling use of the sharing wizard. click .
DXL03020226.ai
DXL03020210.ai

2. Click . The system returns to the desktop screen.
The Folder Options window opens.
3. Select the View tab.
DXL03020225.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-118
Addition of components 4. Place a checkmark to the following items.

Installing additional Windows components. Internet Information Services FTP Server and all of items
under FTP Server
Internet Information Services Web Management Tools and
1. Select Control Panel from the menu. all of items under Web Management Tools
Telnet Client
DXL03020210.ai
2. Click .
The Programs and Features window opens.

DXL03020258.ai
3. Select Turn Windows features on or off. REFERENCE

indicates an item to be installed.
indicates installation of some items of the lower level.
When a check box is checked, all items in lower levels are
selected at the same time.
If the restart is requested after the installation, restart the PC.
DXL03020257.ai
The Windows Features window opens.

5. Click .

Upon completion of installation, the system returns to the
Programs and Features window.
6. Close the Programs and Features window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-119
Setting the service 4. Right-click Microsoft FTP Service and select Properties.
The Microsoft FTP Service Properties (Local Computer) window
Active the Microsoft FTP Service. opens.
1. Select Control Panel from the menu. 5. Select General tab and Automatic from the Startup
type pull-down menu, and then click .
DXL03020348.ai
DXL03020210.ai
The system returns to the Service window.

6. Close the Service window.
2. Click . The system returns to the Administrative Tools window.
The Administrative Tools window opens. 7. Close the Administrative Tools window.
3. Double-click Service.
DXL03020321.ai
The Service window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-120
Disabling the scheduler 3. Double-click Task Scheduler.

Disable the scheduling settings for Defrag, Time Synchronization, and
Windows Error Reporting.
DXL03020235.ai
DXL03020210.ai The Task Scheduler window opens.

4. Select Task Scheduler Library Microsoft Windows
Defrag.
2. Click .
DXL03020239.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-121
5. Right-click ScheduledDefrag and select Disable. 7. Right-click SynchronizeTime and select Disable.
DXL03020240.ai DXL03020243.ai
The Status of ScheduledDefrag changes to Disable. The Status of SynchronizeTime changes to Disable.
DXL03020241.ai DXL03020244.ai
6. Select Task Scheduler Library Microsoft Windows 8. Select Task Scheduler Library Microsoft Windows
Time Synchronization. Windows Error Reporting.
DXL03020242.ai
DXL03020245.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-122
9. Right-click QueueReporting and select Disable.
DXL03020246.ai
The Status of QueueReporting changes to Disable.
DXL03020247.ai
10. Close the Task Scheduler window.


The system returns to the All Control Panel Item window.
12. Close the All Control Panel Item window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-123
Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping 3. Select the Format tab and confirm that a language other
symbol (other than Japanese) than Japanese has been selected in the Current Format
If the Current format has been changed to a language other than and click .
Japanese in Regional and Language Options, confirm the decimal
symbol and the digit grouping symbol.
Decimal Symbol : . ( period )
Digit grouping Symbol : , ( comma )
DXL03020291.ai
DXL03020210.ai
The Customize Regional Options window opens.

2. Click .
The Region and Language window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-124

Decimal Symbol : . (period)
Digit grouping Symbol : , (comma)
DXL03020320.ai
5. Click .
The system returns to the Region and Language window.
6. Click .

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RI-125
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel
3. Setting Up the Monitor Adjusting the contrast and brightness

Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows:
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 Model 9416TD15/H2
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Contrast : 127
(Press the Menu switch on the right-hand side of
The setup procedure varies with the connected monitor. the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.)
Brightness : 255
(Press the or button on the right-hand side of
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel the monitor while the Main Menu is not displayed
on the screen.)
Perform the following procedures to install the touch panel driver and
adjust the touch panel and monitor. Model 9416TD15/H2-1
Contrast : 65%
Installing the touch panel driver and adjusting the touch the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.)
panel Brightness : 100%
For details on the procedures for setting up a touch-panel- (Press the or button on the right-hand side of
attached monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel the monitor while the Main Menu is not displayed
Driver in Appx IN: Appendix to Installation. on the screen.)
Model L350P-TS
Adjusting the monitor Contrast : 80%
Adjust the monitor if it has a problem with the following performance Brightness : 80%
characteristics. (Press the Enter switch on the front of the monitor
to adjust the brightness by selecting <Picture
Width Adjustment>, then <Contrast/Brightness>.)
Horizontal position
Height Model L351P-TS
Contrast : 90%
Vertical position
Brightness : 90%
Pincushion distortion (Press the Enter switch on the front of the monitor
Screen rotation to adjust the brightness by selecting <Picture
Adjustment>, then <Contrast/Brightness>.)
For details on the adjustment procedures, refer to the
documentation supplied with the monitor.
Model L362T
Contrast : Default (not determined)
Brightness : 90%
Model L560T-C
Brightness : 100%
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3.2 17" CRT Monitor
3.2 17" CRT Monitor 3.5 Ikegami 1k Landscape Monitor

Adjust the monitor as needed. No other setup procedures need be Install the video board driver and perform setups for adjustments of
performed. width and height on the monitor.
For the procedure of video board driver installation, see
Adjusting the monitor Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver of this chapter.
Adjust the monitor if it has a problem with the following performance
characteristics.
Width
Horizontal position
Height
Vertical position
Pincushion distortion
Screen rotation
Brightness
Contrast
For details on the adjustment procedures, refer to the
documentation supplied with the monitor.
3.3 Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300

Install the video board driver and perform monitor setups.
For detailed setup procedure of the Super Resolution LCD Monitor
SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
3.4 LCD Monitor SL-IC200

Install the video board driver and perform monitor setups.
For detailed setup procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200,
see manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.1 For Windows 2000/XP
4. Installing MSDE/Database 1. Insert the CL-AP CD (1 of 2) into the PC.
Management System and Its The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens.
Service Pack NOTE

In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
CAUTION
When Windows XP SP2 was installed in 2. Installing and Setting
Up the OS, make sure to create the FTP server before you install
MSDE and its service pack.
For how to create the FTP server, see 15. Creating the FTP Server
(Windows 2000/XP only). RI0000470.ai
REFERENCE
Perform the following procedure to install MSDE (SQL7) and MSDE
(SQL7SP*) and its service pack. IIP Setup Tool is a utility tool that performs CL-AP installation and
other tasks. This tool is stored on the CD (product name:
MSDE is a database that manages the images and patient information Application software; Part No. 114Y5342001A) that is supplied with
handled by the CL. If MSDE is not installed, the CL does not operate. the CL as a standard accessory.
REFERENCE
The service pack is a modification program that corrects various 2. Enter 1 and then press the <Enter> key.
problems with MSDE. The installation menu for MSDE and its service pack opens.
For the OS of V7.0(B) or earlier, one CL-AP CD contains all the
programs. Therefore, read CL-AP CD (1 of 2) or CL-AP CD (2 of 2)
for CL-AP CD as necessary.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. To install the Japanese version, enter 1. To install the 4. When the Press any key to continue... message appears,
Korean version, enter 2 and 5 for the English version. press the <Enter> key.
Finalize your number entry by pressing the <Enter> key. The system returns to the IIP Setup Tool main menu window.
5. Restart the CL to activate MSDE.

After the CL has been started up, MSDE will be activated
automatically. (The icon appears in the task tray at the lower
right.)
6. If you wish to proceed to CL-AP installation processing, skip

over the following steps 7. and 8. to go to the next page.
RI000098.EPS 7. Enter 0 and then press the <Enter> key.

As indicated in the following window illustration, the MSDE/service The system exits IIP Setup Tool and returns to the desktop
pack installation process progresses. screen.
MSDE and service pack installations end in about ten minutes in

total.
8. Remove the CD from the PC.
RI000099.EPS
REFERENCE
When you choose 6) Version Check, you can view the version
information about MSDE and service pack.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.2 For Windows Vista
4.2 For Windows Vista/7 3. To install the Japanese version, enter 1. To install the
English version, enter 5. Finalize your number entry by
Install the Database Management System (SQL Server). pressing the <Enter> key.
SQL Server is a database that manages the images and patient
information handled by the CL. If SQL Server is not installed, the CL
does not operate.
1. Insert the CL-AP CD (1 of 2) into the PC.

RI000098.ai
The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens.

As indicated in the following window illustration, the SQL Server
NOTE installation process progresses.
SQL Server installation processing completes in about ten
minutes.
RI000099.ai
REFERENCE
Choosing 6) Version Check enables you to view the version
RI0000470.ai information about SQL Server and service pack.
2. Enter 1 and then press the <Enter> key.

4. When the Press any key to continue... message appears,
The installation menu opens. press the <Enter> key.
The command prompt will close.

The system exits IIP Setup Tool and returns to the desktop
screen.
7. Restart the CL to activate SQL Server.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Installing the CL-AP 5.1 Installing the CL-AP

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
NOTE
Install the CL-AP and replace the menu database.
Installing the CL-AP will automatically set up the wallpaper.
NOTE
To use the Synapse servers Web Query function with software version
V7.1(B) or earlier, perform the procedure below.
I. When the Synapse Client software is installed, uninstall it.
12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse Workstation) in
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the
Software
II. Install the Synapse Client software.
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query) in OE19: Connecting the
CL to Other Equipment
RI000097.EPS
REFERENCE
For the OS of V7.0(B) or earlier, one CL-AP CD contains all the 2. Enter 2 and then press the <Enter> key.
programs. Therefore, read CL-AP CD (1 of 2) or CL-AP CD (2 of 2) The installer starts running and opens the IIP - InstallShield
for CL-AP CD as necessary. Wizard / Welcome to the ... window.
00000178.EPS
3. Click .
The IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Setup Type window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Select the monitor type to be used, and then click 5. Click .

. In a few minutes, a window like that shown below opens.
When the 15" monitor with the touch panel or the 17" CRT monitor
is to be used, choose Color (1024 768).
When the 17 monitor with the touch panel is to be used, choose
Color (1280 1024).
When the color Super Resolution LCD SL-IC300 is to be used,
select Color (2048 1536). RI000026.EPS
When the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor is to be used, select Black/

u NOTE u
White (1600 1200).
When the monochrome Super Resolution LCD SL-IC300 is used, Although a message saying that Image Database does not exist.
select Black/White (2048 1536). can appear for software versions A04 or later, the CL-AP
installation processing will not be affected.
When the monochrome LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, select
Black/White (1600 1200).
RI000032.EPS

In a few seconds, a window like that shown below opens.
Select the monitor

type to be used. RI000027.EPS
RI000100.EPS
u NOTE u
The IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Ready to Install the Program
window opens. Although a message saying that Patient Database does not exist.
can appear for software versions A04 or later, the CL-AP
00000180.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Press the <Enter> key. 9. Press the <Enter> key.

In a few seconds, a window like that shown below opens. u NOTE u
For the software of version V2.0 (B) or later or V1.0 (C), the
following two windows will be displayed. Press the <Enter> key.
Make sure that installation processing has ended, and then
proceed to step 10.
RI000227.EPS
RI0000468.AI
RI000105.EPS
Upon completion of installation, the IIP - InstallShield Wizard /

InstallShield Wizard Completed window opens.
RI0000469.AI
00000181.EPS

In a few seconds, a window like that shown below opens.
RI000028.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
10. Click . 12. Select the SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat file that is located

in the directory below on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2 when
The system returns to the IIP Setup Tool main menu.
V7.1(B) or later is used), and then click .
NOTES D:\Tools\StudyAutoDelete\SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat
For software version V7.0(B) or later, perform all the steps from
11 through 16. NOTE
For software version V6.0(B) or earlier, it is not necessary to Specify for the underlined section a name of the drive where the
perform steps 11 through 14. CL-AP CD has been installed.

For Windows 2000/XP
Select Run... from the menu and click .

RI0000489.ai
For Windows Vista/7 The DiskUsageLimitSize Setting Tool window opens.

Select All Programs - Accessories - Run... from the
menu and click .
RI0000490.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13. When Windows XP is used for the OS, enter 1 and press 2 5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
when Windows Vista or Windows 7 is used for the OS. Press
3 when a RAID-based PC is used for the CL. Press then Exposure menus that can be installed will differ depending on the
the <Enter> key to determine the entry. language of the OS on which the CL-AP is installed.
To change an exposure menu or image processing parameter, the
NOTE
menu database must be changed following individual procedures.
For software version V7.0(B), the 2) Set DiskUsageLimitSize for
60GB option does not appear. u NOTE u
Note that exposure menu settings will revert to the default if a menu
A window like that shown below opens. database is replaced.
For the Japanese OS:

5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database (for the Japanese OS)
RI0000476.ai
14. Press the <Enter> key. For an OS other than Japanese:

5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database (for an OS other than
15. Turn the PC power OFF and mount the PEI or PSI board on Japanese)
the PC.
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI) 5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database (for the Japanese OS)
u NOTE u For V7.0 or earlier
If the OS was being installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on 1. Enter 3 on the IIP Setup Tool main menu and press the
the PCI slots, use Device Manager to delete the file <Enter> key.
at this step.
Checking the PEI01A board device driver in 3.2 Typical A window like that shown below opens.
Troubleshooting.
16. Re-connect the USB peripheral devices (barcode reader,

magnetic card reader, etc.) that have been disconnected 00000301.EPS
before OS installation.
u NOTE u
For Windows XP, you must perform driver software settings after
USB peripheral devices are connected.
For the driver software setup procedure, see
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader
Driver Software under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2. When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography 4. Enter 1 when you wish to use hospital menus, enter 2
option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize your selection for general practitioner menus, and 3 for veterinary
entry by pressing the <Enter> key. menus. Press then the <Enter> key.
A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed. NOTE
When you have selected hospital menus, a window opens where
whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing)
parameters is specified. Enter an item number that is for the menu
to be used at the institution and then press the <Enter> key.
RI0000382.EPS
3. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key.

RI0000384.EPS
RI0000383.EPS
The message saying Menu Database Installation Completed will
be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is
NOTE completed.
When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at
step 2 above, a window opens where whether or not to use the
FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is specified.
Enter an item number that is for the menu to be used at the
institution and then press the <Enter> key.
RI0000384.EPS
The message saying Menu Database Installation Completed

will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is
completed.
Skip step 4 and proceed to step 5.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Set up the following, as necessary. For V7.1 or later

Addition of descriptive characters to icons 1. Enter 3 on the IIP Setup Tool main menu and press the
To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons <Enter> key.
displayed on the main window of the hospital CL-AP, install the
descriptive characters appropriately. A window like that shown below opens.
For details of the descriptive character installation

procedure, see FR10 Setup for Addition of Descriptive
Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under
FR: Function-specific Reference.
Display of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons

To display the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons on the main 00000301.EPS
window of the general practitioner CL-AP, install the icons

appropriately. 2. When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography
For details of the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icon installation option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize your selection
procedure, see FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 entry by pressing the <Enter> key.
Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under FR: Function-
A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed.
specific Reference.
Addition of date and time display

To display the current date and time on the main window of the
CL-AP, perform settings necessary for enabling addition of the
date and time display function. RI0000382.EPS
For details of the procedure used to perform date and time

display settings, see FR18 Setup of Date and Time 3. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key.
Display under FR: Function-specific Reference.
6. If you wish to continue to install various components, skip
subsequent steps 7 and 8, and proceed to 7. Installing the
CL Components.
7. Installing the CL Components. RI0000471.ai
7. Enter 0 and press the <Enter> key. NOTE

The system returns to the desktop. When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at
step 2 above, a window where the item number for a desired image
8. Remove the CD from the PC. processing parameter (for film/for monitor) is to be entered will
open. In such cases, skip step 4 to proceed to step 5.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key. 7. Set up the following, as necessary.
A window like that shown below opens. Addition of descriptive characters to icons
To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons
displayed on the main window of the hospital CL-AP, install the
descriptive characters appropriately.
For details of the descriptive character installation
procedure, see FR10 Setup for Addition of Descriptive
RI0000472.ai Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under
FR: Function-specific Reference.
5. Enter the item number for a desired image processing Display of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons
parameter (for film/for monitor) and press the <Enter> key. To display the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons on the main
A window like that shown below opens. window of the general practitioner CL-AP, install the icons
appropriately.
For details of the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icon installation
procedure, see FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000
Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under FR: Function-
specific Reference.
Addition of date and time display

To display the current date and time on the main window of the
CL-AP, perform settings necessary for enabling addition of the
RI0000384.EPS
date and time display function.
For details of the procedure used to perform date and time
6. Enter the item number for the FNC parameter (Flexible Noise display settings, see FR18 Setup of Date and Time
Control processing) that is to be used in the hospital and Display under FR: Function-specific Reference.
press the <Enter> key.
The message saying Menu Database Installation Completed will 8. If you wish to continue to install various components, skip
be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is subsequent steps 9 and 10, and proceed to 7. Installing the
completed. CL Components.
7. Installing the CL Components.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database (for an OS other 3. Enter the item number of the language you wish to install
than Japanese) and press the <Enter> key.
A window opens where an Image Reader type for connection is to
For V7.0 or earlier be selected.
1. Enter 3 on the IIP Setup Tool main menu and press the
<Enter> key.
RI0000385.EPS
NOTE
00000301.EPS When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at
step 2 above, a window opens where whether or not to use the
2. When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is specified.
option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize you r selection Enter an item number that is for the menu to be used at the
entry by pressing the <Enter> key. institution and then press the <Enter> key.
A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed. When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be
installed:
RI0000386.EPS
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected:
RI0000384.EPS
The message saying Menu Database Installation Completed

RI0000428.EPS will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is
NOTE completed.
Skip steps 4 and 5, and proceed to step 6.
Do not select 20) Slovene because software version V7.0 (B)
does not provide support to it.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Enter an item number that is for the connected equipment For V7.1 or later
and press the <Enter> key.
1. Enter 3 on the IIP Setup Tool main menu and press the
A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible <Enter> key.
Noise Control processing) parameters is selected.
When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be
installed:
00000301.EPS
RI0000386.EPS
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected: 2. When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography
option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize you r selection
entry by pressing the <Enter> key.
A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed.
RI0000384.EPS
5. Enter an item number for the FNC parameter to be used and

be displayed to indicate that menu database replacement is
completed.
6. If you wish to continue to install various components, skip

subsequent steps 7 and 8 and then proceed as directed on
the next page.

RI0000427.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Enter the item number of the language you wish to install 5. Enter the item number for a desired image processing
and press the <Enter> key. parameter (for film/for monitor) and press the <Enter> key.
A window opens where an Image Reader type for connection is to A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible
be selected. Noise Control processing) parameter is selected.
When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be

installed:
RI0000385.EPS
NOTE
RI0000386.EPS
When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected:
step 2 above, a window where the item number for a desired image
processing parameter (for film/for monitor) is to be entered will
open. In such cases, skip step 4 to proceed to step 5.
4. Enter an item number that is for the connected equipment

A window opens where an image processing parameter is to be RI0000384.EPS
selected (for film/for monitor).

6. Enter an item number for the FNC parameter to be used and
be displayed to indicate that menu database change is completed.
7.
RI0000472.ai
If you wish to continue to install various components, skip

subsequent steps 8 and 9 and then proceed as directed on
the next page.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later)
7. Installing the CL Components 3. Click .
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 4. Click .

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Install as follows the components (files) that are necessary for activating
the CL.
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later)

For installing the console software Built_inConsole, use the IIP Setup
Tool on the CL-AP installation CD (2 of 2).
u NOTE u
Built_inConsole must be installed even when only the RU or 5000
cassette-type Image Reader is installed. If it is not installed, an error
occurs when the CL-AP starts running. RI000031.EPS
When the installation process ends, a message appears to

1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. indicate the completion of installation.
NOTE RI000029.EPS

5. Click .
A dialog box appears, prompting you to restart the PC.
6. Click .
RI000030.EPS
The PC restarts.
RI000097.EPS
2. Type in the number 4 and then press the <Enter> key. 7. Click when the 20102 error code window is
The Built_inConsole Setup window opens. displayed after the PC has been restarted.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later)
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later) 3. Click .
For the FRIS Modules, use IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP installation A window opens, prompting you to start the installation.
CD (2 of 2).
u NOTE u
Even if the F-RIS function is not used, install the FRIS Modules. If they
are not installed, an error occurs when the CL-AP starts.
RI000043.EPS

The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens. 4. Click .
NOTE The Risiip - Choose Program Group window opens.

RI000044.EPS
5. Click .
The following warning window opens.
RI0000473.ai

The Risiip Setup window opens.
RI000045.EPS
RI000042.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later)
The following window opens. A message appears to indicate that the installation is completed.
RI000049.EPS
RI000046.EPS
10. Click .
7. Click .
The installation process for the FRIS Modules is thus completed.
11. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
RI000047.EPS
8. Click .
RI000048.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key
8. Installing the Standard Key REFERENCE

This error screen opens when the AP key is not installed.
This error screen does not imply any anomalies because the AP
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 key will be installed later in 11. AP Key Installation.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
2. Click .
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key The system returns to the desktop screen.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 3. Insert the XG-1 Standard Key CD into the PC.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 The RU connection key installation start window automatically
opens.
Install the XG-1 Standard Key that is supplied with the CL, as directed
below. This on-screen portion varies with the key to be installed.
If the CD supplied with the CL is the Standard Key, proceed to
8.3 Installing the Standard Key.
REFERENCE 00000337.EPS
When the XG-1 Standard Key (A01) is installed, the following functions 4. Click .
are available.
RU connection (FRUP) A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
HQ image transfer (image transfer from the RU only) These displayed portions vary with the key to be installed.
DRC image processing
TAS image processing
Image magnification or full screen display on the QA window
LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACS
REFERENCE
00000338.EPS
The XG-1 Standard Key will be supplied only for a shipment when a
single RU is to be connected. When two or more RUs or a single 5000 5. Click .
plus are to be connected, install the 5000 Standard Key as well.
The HQ image transfer key installation start window automatically
opens.
1. Turn ON the PC power. 6. In the same manner as indicated in steps 4. and 5. above,
An error screen like that shown below opens immediately after CL- consecutively install the HQ image transfer key, DRC image
AP startup. processing key, TAS image processing key, image
magnification or full screen display key on the QA window,
and other competing PACS connection key.
00000332.EPS 7. Remove the CD from the PC.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key 3. Insert the 5000 Standard Key CD into the PC.
The installation start window for the 5000 series key automatically
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 opens.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
These on-screen portions
vary with the key to be installed.
When a single 5000 plus are connected, install the 5000 Standard Key.
The 5000 Standard Key is stored on the CD that is supplied with the
CL.
REFERENCE
When the 5000 Standard Key is installed, the following functions are
available. RI000002.EPS
5000 plus connection

DRC image processing 4. Click .
TAS image processing A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
Image magnification or full screen display on the QA window
LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACSs
5. Click .
These on-screen portions

1. Turn ON the PC. vary with the key to be installed.
The following error window opens immediately after CL-AP
startup.
00000332.EPS
REFERENCE
RI000003.EPS
The above error window opens when the AP key is not installed.
This error screen does not imply any anomalies because the AP The installation start window for the DRC image transfer key
key will be installed later in 11. AP Key Installation. opens.
6. In the same manner as indicated in steps 4. and 5. above,

consecutively install the DRC image processing key, TAS
2. Click .
image processing key, image magnification or full screen
You are returned to the desktop screen. display on the QA window key and other competing PACS
connection key.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8.3 Installing the Standard Key
8.3 Installing the Standard Key 2. Click .

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 3. Insert the Standard Key CD into the PC.
The installation start window for the RU connection key
Install the Standard Key supplied with the CL, as directed below. automatically opens.
The Standard Key released after A09 includes the two types, Lite and
Plus, and their available functions are different with each other. u NOTE u
REFERENCE double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
When the Standard Key is installed, the following functions are
available. This on-screen portion varies with the key to be installed.
RU connection (FRUP)
HQ image transfer (only images from RUs)
5000 plus connection
DRC image processing 00000337.EPS
TAS image processing
FNC processing (A01 or later for Lite and A02 or later for Plus) 4. Click .
Image magnification or full screen display on the QA window A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
[not available for Lite.] These displayed portions vary with the key to be installed.
LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACSs
[not available for Lite.]
Film annotation characters [not available for Lite.]
Delux QA [not available for Lite.]
1. Turn ON the PC.

The following error window opens immediately after CL-AP 00000338.EPS
startup.
5. Click .
The HQ image transfer key installation start window automatically
opens.
00000332.EPS
6. In the same manner as indicated in steps 4. and 5. above,
consecutively install the HQ image transfer key, 5000 plus
REFERENCE connection key, DRC image processing key, TAS image
The above error window opens when the AP key is not installed. processing key, FNC image processing key, image
This error screen does not imply any anomalies because the AP magnification or full screen display on the QA window key
key will be installed later in 11. AP Key Installation. (not available for Lite), other competing PACS connection
key (not available for Lite) and Delux QA key (not available
for Lite).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
9. ****BLANK****
9. ****BLANK****
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
10. Option Key Installation Function Product Code Description

CR Digital Mammography
CL DICOM MAMMO S function. Image processing
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 parameters will not be provided.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
CL DICOM MAMMO P function. Image processing
Install the same option keys that were used immediately before OS
parameters will be provided.*1
reinstallation. Image input/
Unless the option keys have been deleted by newly installing the OS or output (contd) CL DICOM MEDIA Removable media image storage
deleting the option key registry, option key reinstallation is not required. STORAGE B function
Function for study query/image
u NOTE u CL DICOM QR
retrieval to/from filing devices.
After option key installation, be sure to install the AP key. The reason is CL DICOM PDI Function that writes exposed
that installing the option keys disables the AP key that has been enabled. STORAGE images onto a CD-R.
Image Function assuring that an image
CL DICOM
storage has surely been stored in the
Function Product Code Description COMMITMENT
assurance archiver unit.*2
IR346 LOCAL PRINT LP (local printer) connection IR 346 DELUX-QA QA function addition*3
Print output QA function
IR346 DICOM PRINT DICOM Print function CL TILE-IM QA FOR PLUS QA batch processing
DICOM-based image IR 346 MFP
transmission functions available MFP image processing
(Also include a function to IR 348 MFP
transmit unstandardized images CL SHUTTER-PROC Shuttering processing
to the QA-WS.) Options installed
IR346 DICOM CR CL PEM PEM image processing
are as follows.
STORAGE
CR Storage SCU (Standard) CL IM COMPOSITION Image composition
CR Storage SCU (Private) Image
(Private Unstandardized CR processing CL IM-MAGNIFY FOR Image magnification (for Lite
Storage is included in LITE Standard Key)
Private.) LUT adjustment for connection to
Image input/ CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT
Functions available for other competing PACS (for Lite
output FOR LITE
processed-image transmission Standard Key)
IR346 DICOM IM with DICOM Options installed are CL ANNOTATION Annotation function
PROCESSED as follows. FOR LITE (for Lite Standard Key)
CR Storage SCU (Standard)
Processed image generation *1 To use this option, the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key must have
Function for image transfer (input/ been installed.
output) with FINP Options *2 To use this option, the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key
IR346 DMS NET-WORK installed are as follows. must have been installed.
IN-OUT FINP output *3 When IR346 DELUX-QA is installed, all the QA functions are made
FINP input (Supports only the available. If it is not installed, only a limited number of QA functions
reprint function.) available.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Function Product Code Description *2 Install ActiveSync (Windows Mobile device center when the OS used is
Windows Vista) prior to installation of the POCKET id Console option key.
Grid Pattern Removal (GPR)
Image CL GPR
function u NOTE u
processing
FCR QC TEST SOFT Image Reader QC function
(contd) Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD for each product.
FCR QC TEST SOFT M Mammo QC function
CL ID ONLINE ID Online function
The installation procedure is described below.
CL DICOM ORDER MWM DICOM worklist function
The same installation procedure applies to all the option keys.
DICOM worklist function
CL DICOM ID MWM (acquiring only patient
Acquisition
information) 1. Insert an option key CD into the PC.
of patient
information DICOM PPS function*1 The installation start window automatically opens in several
CL DICOM MPPS Basically, installed together with seconds.
MWM.
u NOTE u
DX CL SYNAPSE RIS
Ordering function (Synapse RIS) In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
CONNECT
Energy Energy subtraction function double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
subtraction CL ES Make sure to install this function
processing when XU-D1 is connected. 2. Click .
X-ray
CL X ONLINE X-CON control function A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
controller
CL SOFT FOR POCKET Study reception information
P-Console The indication varies
ID CL*2 transfer/reception function
with the option key
Reading of CL USB STORAGE FOR Function to read image data stored for installation.
image data 358 into USB memory from CR-IR 358CL.
Function to read image data
Reading of
stored into USB memory from
image data
CL USB STORAGE A CR-IR 358CL / FCR-MB 201
(FCR-MB
Console. Multiple kinds of
201Console)
security software are supported.
Display of
Function to present displayed
precise CR PRECISE
images and their additional 00000455.EPS
enlargement ENLARGEMENT
information on the 2nd monitor.
images 3. Click .
Function to determine an ROI on
an image and display its width The system returns to the desktop screen.
QA ROI CR QA ROI
and height, as well as the mean u NOTE u
measurement MEASUREMENT
pixel value, median pixel value,
standard deviation and area. Depending on the option for installation, the installation start
Function for storage/calculation window will be displayed some times.
Other CL RETAKE ANALYSIS of exposure/mis-exposure image Perform steps 2. and 3. as well.
information.
*1 Use this option together with the CL DICOM ORDER MWM or
CL DICOM ID MWM option.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
11. AP Key Installation
11. AP Key Installation Install the AP key as follows:
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC.

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
u NOTE u
u NOTE u In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
Before AP key installation, be sure to install a standard key and option double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
keys.
REFERENCE 2. Click .
The CL is designed so that the CL-AP can be started up when registry A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
information is generated to define the encryption key. The associated
registry information is generated when the AP key is installed.
Version A software
00000456.EPS
3. Click .
RI000007.EPS
Version B software
RI0000104.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
12. Initializing the Image Database 3. Click [Data Base Utility].

The ImageDB Initialization window opens.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
u NOTES u
After initial installation of the OS, be sure to initialize the image
database. Starting up the CL-AP without initializing the image 00000130.EPS
database will cause errors to be indicated (error codes: 50001, 20001,

30107, 30151, 20110, etc).
[For Windows 2000/XP]
4. Click .
Database can be initialized only when MSDE has been running.
If MSDE is running, the icon will be displayed in the task tray at the A confirmation window opens.
lower right corner of the window. If it is not displayed, restart the PC.
[For Windows Vista/7]
Database can be initialized only when SQL Server has been running.
If the SQL Server has not been running, restart the PC.
If images are accumulated on the image output queue, database DCL44011.ai
cannot be initialized. It is thus necessary to delete images

accumulated on the image output queue.
5. Click .
For the procedure to be used to delete images accumulated The command prompt window opens. After several seconds, the
on the image output queue, see 8.2 Clearing the Contents of following message appears.
the Image Output Queue under MU: Maintenance Utility.
1. Turn ON the CL-PC power.

Windows starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts
running.
00000184.EPS
2. Start the Service Utility.

For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
The main menu opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

After about 20 seconds, the system completes image database
initialization.
u NOTES u
If the following message appears, images included in the image
database have not been initialized accordingly.
It failed in initialized DB.
Make sure that MSDE has been running and images are not
accumulated on the image output queue.
To start up MSDE
Restart the PC and make sure that the icon is displayed in
the task tray.
To start up SQL Server
I. Restart the PC.
II. Select Control Panel from the menu and double-click
(click for Windows 7) Administrative Tools.
III. Double-click Computer Management.
IV. Select Computer Management Service and Application
SQL Server configuration Manager SQL Server 2005
Service.
V. Confirm that SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) is running.
When images are accumulated on the image output queue
Delete images accumulated on the output queue.
8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue
under MU: Maintenance Utility
7. The same message as that appears in step 4. above (Press

any key to continue...) will reappear here. Press the <Enter>
key.
The system returns to the ImageDB Initialization window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)
13. Display Optimization nanao L362T : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch
panel (model L362T)
(LUT file settings) Linear LUT : Linear (straight line) LUT
nanao Radiforce GS310-CLG : LCD monitor SL-IC300
(monochrome monitor)
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 nanao Radiforce R31 : LCD monitor SL-IC300
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 (color monitor)
nanao L568M : 17" color LCD monitor (model L568)
With [LUT] of the Service Utility, install an LUT file that matches the nanao L560T-C : EIZO 17" LCD monitor with a touch
display characteristics. panel (model L560T-C)
nanao Radiforce G22-CL : LCD monitor
(2M monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce GS220 : LCD monitor
nanao Radiforce GS310-ECN : LCD monitor
nanao Radiforce RX320 : LCD monitor
(3M color monitor)
For details, see 4. Display Optimization - LUT in
MU: Maintenance Utility.
RI000106.EPS
TPS 9415 TD15 : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel

(model TPS9415TD15/G2)
(model TPS9416TD15/H2)
TPS 9416TD15_2 : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
(model TPS 9416TD15/H2-1)
PRESTO! (B/W) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor
SL-IC300 (monochrome)
PRESTO! (Color) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor
SL-IC500 (color)
ikegami MDM2130 : Ikegami monitor (1k landscape
type)
nanao L350P : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch
panel (model L350P-TS)
nanao L351P : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch
panel (model L351P-TS)
nanao SL-IC200 : LCD Monitor SL-IC200
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
14. Restoring the CL-Config ExposureResultLog.mdb file (A10 or later)

Setup for exposure result log output items
MWMTagSetting.mdb file (A11 or later)
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 DICOM MWM C-FIND tag and internal data mapping setup
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 information
PConsoleSer.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
The following 24 data files are to be restored in the CL: Settings for PDA connection
RejectComment.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
Configuration Restore/Backup (IV. on the Service Utility Setting for comments on mis-exposed images
main menu window) CODEDSTB file (V1.0(C) or later)
Setting a distribution code for connection to the 9000 series
Backs up or restores CLs setup data. equipment
Files to be backed up or restored are as follows.
UMB_ATLAS1u.prm, UMB_ATLAS1t.prm,
SysConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) UMB_ATLAS2u.prm, UMB_ATLAS2t.prm (V4.0(B) or later)
System settings Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR364
Local printer settings (type U/type T), CR-IR366 and CR-IR367.
CSL settings UMB_ATLAS1a.prm (V5.0(B) or later)
FINP settings Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR371.
FRUP settings TagCharDataCut.ini (V5.0(B) or later)
QA process settings Setup for output of truncated data
NetConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) IDMassHistory.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
Connected equipment information table Patient ID history
Connection destination setup table
DicomPrint sort destination setup table MassOrder.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
FINP compression ratio setting Setup of order issuance function for screening examination
Distribution code setting UMB_BASE1a.prm (V7.1(B) or later)
PN.mdb file (A00 or later) Setup of unevenness removal processing for the Image Reader
PN (Person Name) settings (reserved)
McrDataFormat.mdb file (A00 or later) ExposureIndex.prm (V8.0(B) or later)
Magnetic card format setting Setup of ExposureIndex function
TagReplace.ini file (A02 or later) TagCharDataAdd.ini (V8.1(B) or later)
Setup for DICOM tag replacement Setup of character string adding function for DICOM tag
QACustom.mdb file (A02 to V5.0(B)) IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat (V8.1(B) or later)
Setup of display items on the QA window Setup of issuance function for diagnostic orders
Selector.mdb file (A02 or later) IMPORTANT
Selector setup Data files to be restored must be of the same software versions.
TagLookup.ini file (A09 or later) Restoring data files of different software versions will disable the
DICOM tag editing (for Siemens) software to be operated correctly. Note, however, that the following can
FilmStrFmt.env file (A09 or later) be restored correctly.
Film character definition Restoring the A02 version data to A03
BcrDataFormat.mdb file (A10 or later) Restoring the A04 or A05 version data to A06
Barcode format setting
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
u NOTES u Restoring configuration for connection to other equipment

(available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/CR-IR35X/36X/37X/
If no backup data is available, restore the configuration settings as 9000series)
follows.
2. Software Setup in OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment
Restoring the RU (one RU connection) configuration (NETWORK
CONFIG Restoring the barcode reader and magnetic card reader
configuration (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/
ALL OTHER NODES and CONNECTING EUIPMENT)
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X/9000 series)
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Reader [Option] and
Host name : ru0 (default) Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option] in
IP address : 172.16.1.10 Appx IN: Installation Appendix
(default) Setting dummy nodes (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/
Add Node : FRUP CR-IR35X/36X/37X/9000 series)
Attribute : CASSETTE
Function : READER
Device#1 : ru0 (default)
1. Insert media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) that stores
a CL-Config backup into the PC.
2. Start the Service Utility mode.

For details on the Service Utility mode startup procedure, see
00000512.EPS
Utility.
Restoring configuration for connection to the XG-1 RU (two or The main menu appears.
more RUs connected)
4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection under IN-B: Installation
Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/ 3. Click .
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
The Configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
Restoring configuration for connection to the 5000 plus
4.6 Configuration Setting for IR (5000plus series) Connection
under IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000
4. Click in the Configuration Restore area.
plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
Restoring configuration for connection to the CR-IR356/357/
359/36X/37X
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection under
IN-B: Installation - Connection to Tow or More RUs, 5000 plus and
CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
Restoring the CL system configuration (available common to 00000349.EPS
XG-1 RU/5000 plus/CR-IR35X/36X/37X/9000 series)
The Specified Directory window opens.
5.3 Setup with Service Utility in IN-A: Installation Connection to
One XG-1 RU or CR-IR 355RU/356/357/359
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility under
IN-B: Connection to Two of More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/
357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372 00000350.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Click the downward arrow mark within
, and then choose the
media drive.
6. Click .
You are then returned to the Configuration Restore/Backup

window.
7. Click .
u NOTES u
Even when the restore process ends, no message appears to
indicate it. While the restore process is being performed, the
mouse cursor is replaced by the mark. When the mark
changes back to the mouse cursor, it means that the restore
process is ended.
Note, however, that the mark appears only when the mouse
cursor is positioned within the Configuration Restore/Backup
window.
When there are three backup FDs, change first the 1st FD to the
2nd FD. Perform then steps 3 through 7 to restore data of the 2nd
FD and change it to the 3rd FD. Follow steps 3 through 7 to
restore data of the 3rd FD in a similar manner.
Before removing the media (FD, USB memory stick or the like),
check to see that the drive access lamp is distinguished.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)
15. Creating the FTP Server 1. Insert the Windows 2000/XP reinstallation CD into the PC.
(Windows 2000/XP only) REFERENCE

When the Dell OptiPlex GX110 is employed as the PC, use the
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 Dell Product Recovery CD.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
The Microsoft Windows 2000/XP CD window opens.
Perform the following procedures to prepare on the CLs HDD the FTP Windows 2000
server to be viewed by the XG-1 RU and CR-IR35X/36X.
The FTP server can be created by installing the IIS manager.
u NOTES u
When the OS used is Windows Vista or Windows 7, the work operation
directed herein needs not be done.
For RU-CL N:N connection (when two or more CLs are connected),
create the FTP server only for the CL that will serve as the RU master-
IIP.
REFERENCE
The IIS manager is a program used for creating an FTP server and 00000140.EPS
comes with the OS (Windows 2000/XP).
Windows XP
RI0000358.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)
2. Perform the following settings. For Windows XP

For Windows 2000 Place a checkmark to
Click . ( ) and click .

The Internet Information Service (IIS) window opens.
For Windows XP
Place a checkmark to
Click .
( ) and click .
The Windows Components Wizard window opens.
The system returns to the Windows Components Wizard
window.
Click .
Installation processing will start.
After a few minutes, a message appears to indicate that
installation processing has been completed.
4. Click .
The system returns to the Microsoft Windows 2000 CD/XP
window.
00000141.EPS
5. Click .
3. Perform the following settings. The system returns to the desktop screen.
For Windows 2000
Place a checkmark to
( ) and click . CAUTION
When the FTP server was created following the procedure
Installation processing will start. described in this chapter before performing 4. Installing MSDE/
After a few minutes, a message appears to indicate that Database Management System and Its Service Pack, with
installation processing has been completed. Windows XP SP2 installed as directed in 2. Installing and Setting
Up the OS, return to 4. Installing MSDE/Database Management
System and Its Service Pack to reinstall the software.
Return to 4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and
Its Service Pack.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility
16. CR-IR346RU Settings 16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility

The RU M-Utility is a utility (also referred to as the FCR TOOL) that
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 exercises RU-AP installation, RU-Config setup, data backup, and other
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 functions.
For the operations of the CL and RU, it is necessary that the RU
To perform CR-IR346RU (XG-1 RU) software settings, be sure to M-Utility be installed in the CL.
observe the procedures shown in the flow below.
For the RU M-Utility installation procedure, see 5.2.1 Installing
u NOTE u the RU M-Utility in IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
For RU-CL N:N connection (when two or more CLs are connected),
perform CR-IR346RU-related settings only for the CL that will serve as
the XG-1 RU master-IIP.
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring

the RU-Config
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server 4. From the Action menu, choose Properties.
To set up the FTP server, use the IIS manager to specify the location
(directory) where the RU saves configuration and other data.
Communications between the CL and the RU will not be enabled if the
location for saving the data is not specified on the directory.
1. In the Control Panel window, double-click .
2. Double-click .
00000460.EPS
The Internet Information Services window opens.

The Default FTP Site Properties window opens.
3. Click the sign to the left of the CLs host name and then
5. Click the Home Directory tab.
select .
00000152.EPS
00000151.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
6. Enter settings as directed below: 9. Type in ftp 127.0.0.1 and then press the <Enter> key.
A message appears to prompt for user name input.
---------------------------------------------------
Connected to 127.0.0.1.
220 iip-1 microsoft FTP Service (Version 5.0).
User(127.0.0.1:(none)):_
---------------------------------------------------
10. Type in cr-ir346 and then press the <Enter> key.

A message appears to prompt for password input.
---------------------------------------------------
331 Password required for cr-ir346.
Password:_
II I
---------------------------------------------------
00000153.EPS
I. Click to select directory of 11. Type in cr-ir346 and then press the <Enter> key.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR346.
u NOTE u
Even when you enter the password, nothing appears on the
II. Check (so that changes to ). display.
The following message appears when you successfully log into

7. Click and then click . the FTP server:
---------------------------------------------------
The system returns to the Internet Information Services window.
230 User cr-ir346 logged in.
ftp>_
8. The next step is to check whether the FTP server is ---------------------------------------------------
operating normally.
From the Start menu, choose Programs, Accessories, u NOTE u
and then Command Prompt.
If the above message does not appear, it means that the FTP
The Command Prompt window opens. server is not properly set up. In such an instance, perform steps
12. and 13. and then repeat the whole FTP server setup procedure
beginning with step 1.
12. Type in bye and then press the <Enter> key.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config
13. Close the Command Prompt window. 16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the
REFERENCE
RU-Config
[registration of the FTP user (user name: cr-ir346)]
First, install the RU-AP in the CL, and then restore the RU-Config. To do
For the RU to access the FTP, both the login name and the this, use the RU M-Utility and perform the procedures set forth in this
password are required. For the CL operation, no such settings are section.
required because both the login name and the password are set up
automatically. IMPORTANT
Use the procedure below to check the setup data. If the CLs IP address written in the RU-Config backup is other than
172.16.1.20, you must pay due attention to the procedure that you
1. Click the Users and Passwords icon in the Control Panel. perform immediately after RU-AP installation.
The Users and Passwords window opens.
2. Make sure that the cr-ir346 user name has been registered to Be sure to restore the RU-Config immediately after RU-AP installation.
the Administrators group. Before restoring it, never restart the CL-AP or PC.
The FTP servers RU-Config data reverts to the default values when the
RU-AP is installed. Since the RU-Config in the RUs FLASH ROM is
updated to the default data if the CL-AP is started up with the FTP
server RU-Config reverted to the default, the RU will result in losing
track of the CL.
Confirm. u NOTE u
Before installing the RU-AP, turn ON the RU power.
00000461.EPS
Installing the RU-AP (procedure applicable to RU-AP

version A07 or later)
For the RU-AP installation procedure, see 5.2.2 Installing the RU-
AP in IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Restoring the RU-Config l Main menu window
Perform the procedure set forth below to restore the RU configuration

file.
REFERENCE
The scanner data, which was backed up at the time of installation, need
not be restored unless the FLASH ROM of the RU main unit becomes
defective.
1. Have on hand media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) on

which the RU-Config was backed up. Insert this media into
the PC.
2. Start the RU M-Utility as directed below.

00000215.EPS
3. In the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name of

the RU to be restored.
RU host name
IV. Click.
00000434.EPS
The pull-down menu for the

II. Click. field and the
EXECUTE button change their color from gray to black.
I. Click. 00000219.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Note the field to 7. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the window.
verify that is
selected, and then click . 8. From the menu, select sequentially Programs,
FujiFilm and FCR.
The CL-AP starts up.
The RU fetches the RU-Config in the FTP server to overwrite the
RU-Config in the FLASH ROM.
REFERENCE
00000351.EPS
No problem arises even when the RU-Config in the FLASH ROM is
overwritten in the above manner.
5. Click . As far as the FTP server data is the same as the data in the RUs
FLASH ROM, the latter data is not overwritten. However, when the
RU-Config is restored, its date is updated. That is why the contents
The RU-Config is then restored in the FTP server. A window opens of the FLASH ROM are updated. The RU-Config setup data used
to indicate the end of the restore process.
to overwrite the FLASH ROM is identical with the data that was
backed up.
00000352.EPS
6. Click .
The system returns to the RU M-Utility main menu.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
This section describes the software setup procedures for the CR-IR35X/
36X/37X.
u NOTE u
When two or more CLs are connected, perform the following procedures
for only the CL unit that serves as the RU master IIP.
Installing the RU PC-TOOL

Install the CR-IR35X/36X/37Xs RU PC-TOOL on the CL PC.
For the installation procedure, see IN: Installation in the Service

Manual of the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
Setting the RU PC-TOOL

With the RU PC-TOOL, perform the application installation and
configuration setup procedures for the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
For the installation and configuration setup procedures, see

IN: Installation in the Service Manual of the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
REFERENCE
You do not have to perform an FTP server setup procedure for the
CR-IR35X/36X, because FTP server setup is automatically completed
when you install the RU PC-TOOL. (However, the FTP server setup
procedure must be performed for the XG-1 RU.)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference] 3. Enter settings as directed below.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
I
II
To perform a remote maintenance of the CL, set up NetMeeting by
performing the procedures set forth below. III
A client who is using the Synpase Web Query function on the CL with
Windows XP must not install NetMeeting.
(This is because multiple images appear being overlapped with each
other in the viewing dialog.)
NOTE 00000356.EPS
When the OS used is Windows Vista or Windows 7, the work operation I. Enter FCR in the field.
directed herein needs not be done.
II. Enter CSL in the field.
Installing NetMeeting III. Enter FCR-CSL in the field.

For Windows 2000 4. Click .
From the [Start] menu, sequentially select Programs,
A window opens to prompt for director server setup.
Accessories, Communication and then NetMeeting.
The NetMeeting window opens.
5. Enter settings as directed below.
For Windows XP
From the [Start] menu, select Run....
The Run... window opens.
Enter conf.exe in and click . I

The NetMeeting window opens. II
00000357.EPS
I. Deselect (so that changes to ).

II. Check (so that changes to ).
00000355.EPS
2. Click .
A window opens, prompting you to enter user information.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

A window opens, prompting you to specify the network connection A window opens to indicate that audio setup is completed.
speed.
7. Click .
A window opens for shortcut creation.

00000360.EPS
14. Click .
I
NetMeeting starts up in about 15 seconds.
II
For Windows 2000
00000358.EPS
I. Deselect (so that changes to ).

II. Deselect (so that changes to ).
9. Click .
The Audio Tuning Wizard window opens.
00000361.EPS
For Windows XP
00000359.EPS
10. Click .
A volume setup window opens.
11. Click .
A microphone setup window opens.
12. Click . RI0000353.EPS
A message appears to indicate that no microphone is connected.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Setting remote desktop sharing

1. From the Tools menu, choose Remote Desktop Sharing.
The Remote Desktop Sharing Wizard window opens.
00000362.EPS
2. Click .
A window opens to explain about the access rights to Remote
Desktop Sharing.
3. Click .
A screen saver setup window opens.
4. Turn ON the (so that changes to ),

and then click .
A window opens to indicate the end of setup.
00000363.EPS
5. Click .
The system returns to the NetMeeting window.
6. From the Call menu, choose Exit and Activate Remote

Desktop Sharing.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
19. IIS Network Virus Protection 3. Double-click the service listing named World Wide Web
Publishing Service.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
To provide network virus protection, complete the following setup

procedures for IIS.
Suspending the Web service and SMTP server
Disabling unnecessary accounts that can access the FTP service
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows 7, the work operation directed herein
needs not be done.
Suspending the Web service and SMTP server

(only Windows 2000/XP) RI000068.EPS
The World Wide Web Publishing Service Properties (Local

1. Click , point to Settings, and then click Control Computer) window opens.
Panel.
4. From the Startup type pull-down menu, choose Disabled.
(For Windows XP, select Control Panel from the
menu.)
2. Double-click and then .
The Services window opens.
Choose "Disabled". RI000069.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Click . Disabling unnecessary accounts that can access the

FTP service
The selection for the Startup type field changes from Automatic
to Disabled. For Windows 2000/XP
1. In the Control Panel window, double-click and
then .
2. Click on the host name in the left-hand pane and then click
on Default FTP Site in the right-hand pane.
RI000070.EPS
6. In the same manner as indicated in steps 3. through 5, RI000072.EPS
disable Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) as well.

3. From the Action menu, choose Properties.
4. Choose the Security Accounts tab and then uncheck

Allow Anonymous Connections ( ).
Disable this service. RI000071.EPS
RI000073.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. When the confirmation dialog box opens, choose . For Windows Vista
1. In the Control Panel window, double-click and
then .
2. In the left-hand side pane, click on the Host Name - FTP

Site - Default FTP Site.
RI000074.EPS
6. Click .
You are then returned to the Internet Information Services
window.
RI0000478.ai
7. Close the Internet Information Services window and

Control Panel window. 3. From the Action menu, choose Properties.
8. Restart the PC.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Choose the Security Accounts tab and then uncheck 7. Close the Internet Information Service window and the
Allow anonymous connections ( ). Control Panel window.
8. Restart the PC.
RI0000479.ai
5. When the confirmation dialog box opens, choose .
RI0000480.ai
6. Click .
The system returns to the Internet Information Services window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
20. Settings Necessary for Windows XP SP2 installation

Installation of Windows XP 1. Insert the Windows XP SP2 CD into the PC.
Service Pack 2
The Windows XP Service Pack 2 Setup Wizard window opens.
2. Click .
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 The software license agreement window opens.
To protect the CL from the threat of network viruses and illegal access, 3. Place a checkmark to [I agree] ( ) and click
Windows XP Service Pack 2 (hereinafter referred to as SP2) should
be installed. Follow the steps below to perform settings necessary for .
installation of Windows XP SP2.
The Select Options window opens.
CL-AP shutdown
Windows XP SP2 installation
Firewall settings 4. Click .
NOTE Installation of Windows XP SP2 starts.

The Completing the Windows XP Service Pack 2 Setup Wizard
Installation of Windows XP SP2 is performed provided that the CL has window opens in about 22 minutes.
already been installed appropriately. If Windows XP SP2 was reinstalled
for reason of a CL failure, for example, be sure to reinstall the CL and
then install Windows XP SP2. 5. Click .
The computer restarts and then the Help protect your PC window
opens.
CL-AP shutdown
1. Turn ON the PC power. 6. Place a checkmark to [Not rigth now] ( ) and click
Windows starts running. The CL-AP starts running too in about .
one minute, displaying then the CL initial window.
The CL-AP starts.
2. Within a period of three seconds after the CL initial window
opens, sequentially click the upper left corner and then the 7. Shut down the CL-AP.
upper right corner of the window. For how to shut down the CL-AP, see steps 2 and 3 of
The Service Utility starts and then the Service Utility window CL-AP shutdown.
opens.
3. Click [Exit Service Utility] at the lower right of the window.

The Service Utility will then shut down.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Firewall settings 3. Click .

The two types of settings, exceptional settings and communication
protocol ICMP settings, are performed on the Firewall window. The Add a Program window opens.
Exceptional settings
1. Select Control Panel from the menu, and
double-click Windows Firewall.
The Windows Firewall window opens.
200000001.EPS
2. Select the Exceptions tab. 20000003.EPS
4. Click .
The Browse window opens.
200000002.EPS
20000004.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. If the Browse window includes any of the execution files The Add a Program window then opens again.
(programs) listed below, select one of them and click
.
Table Execution file list

Execution file name Remarks
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInput.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInputEz.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMain.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipOutput.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSDecision.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSIpServer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSXfer.exe
20000005.EPS
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\DicomStoreSCP.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMedia.exe 6. Click with the program to be added being
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ML_UPSEvent.exe
selected appropriately.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPUserUtility.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\BmpServer\ For installing
BmpServer.exe the RU PC-TOOL. 7. Make sure that a checkmark is placed to the left of the
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\InfoHostServer\ For installing added execution file displayed in the Programs and Services
InfoHostServer.exe the FCR-TOOL. field.
C:\Program Files\Microsoft ActiveSync\wcescomm.exe When the POCKET id
Console is used.
C:\Program Files\NetMeeting\conf.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\FTP.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\mnmsrvc.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\INETSRV\inetinfo.exe For installing
the client RU PC-TOOL.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN.exe When WakeOnLAN is used.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe When WakeOnLAN is used.
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\Retrieve.exe For version V3.0 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\ For version V3.0 or later
IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPTRISScreen.exe For version V3.1 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IdLoginExe.exe For version V3.1 or later
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ For version V8.1 or later
IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe
20000006.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the number for programs to be 12. Make sure that a checkmark is placed to the left of the
added. added port name displayed in the Programs and Services
filed.
9. Click .
The Add a Port window opens.
10. Add ports as instructed below.
I
II
III
20000008.EPS
20000007.EPS
I. Enter a port name in .
II. Enter a port number in .

III.
Table Port setup information list
Port name Port number Protocol type
FTP_port 21 TCP
SQLServer_port 1433 TCP
SQLMonitor_port 1434 UDP
11. Click .
The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
ICMP settings 3. Click .

1. Select the Advanced tab on the Windows Firewall window
and click of ICMP.
The ICMP Settings window opens. 4. Click on the Windows Firewall window.
The Windows Firewall window will then close.
20000009.EPS
2. Place a checkmark to the Allow incoming echo request

setup item ( ).
20000010.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Balloon Tips display settings 4. On the Alert Settings window that opens, remove
The Windows Security Center may display an alert, or Balloon Tips, in checkmarks from Firewall, Automatic Updates and
the notification area (to the right of the taskbar). To suppress such an Virus Protection ( ).
alert, follow the procedure below.
1. Select Control Panel from the menu. 5. Click .
The Control Panel window opens. NOTE

2. Double-click Security Center. Following the procedure shown below, you can ensure that Windows
XP SP2 has been installed successfully.
1. Right-click My Computer from the menu.
The My Computer pop-up menu window opens.
2. Select Properties.
3. Select the General tab.
Windows XP SP2 has been installed successfully if Service Pack
2 is displayed in the System.
20000011.EPS
3. Click Change the way Security Center alerts me that is on

the left-side pane.
20000012.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size 2. Select Advanced tab and click in
Performance.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
NOTE
In Windows 7, the virtual memory size is automatically set up in System
managed size; therefore, you do not need to check it.
1. Perform the following settings. AWS35012.ai
For Windows 2000/XP The Performance Options window opens.

Select Control Panel from the menu, and double-click
3. Select Advanced tab and click in Virtual
. memory.

For Windows Vista
Select Control Panel from the menu, and
double-click .
Click Advanced system settings.
AWS35013.ai
The Virtual Memory window opens.
AWS35040.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

Initial size : 1536 MB
Maximum size : 2048 MB
AWS35014.ai
5. Click .
The system returns to the Performance Options window.
6. Click .
7. Close the System Properties window.

The system returns to the System window.
8. Close the System window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
22. Setting the Event Log 4. Make the following settings.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For Windows 2000/XP

double-click [Administrative Tools].
I
2. Double-click Event Viewer.

II
The Event Viewer window opens.
3. Right-click a Application and then choose Properties

from the pop-up menu.
RI0000482.ai
I. Check that the maximum log size is 512KB.

NOTE
If the maximum log size is set to a value other than the one
shown above, change it to 512 KB.
II. Select Overwrite event as needed.
5. Click .
The system returns to the Event Viewer window.
6. Right-click a System and then choose Properties from

the pop-up menu.
The the System Properties window opens.
7. Perform the same procedure as in steps 4 and 5.

RI0000481.ai 8. Close the Event Viewer window.
The Application Properties window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows Vista/7 4. Make the following settings.

double-click (click for Windows 7) [Administrative Tools].
2. Double-click Event Viewer.

The Event Viewer window opens.
3. Right-click Application and then choose Properties from

the pop-up menu.
II
AWS35011.ai
I. Check that the maximum log size is 20480KB.
NOTE
AWS35039.ai
If the maximum log size is set to a value other than the one
The Log Properties - Application window opens. shown above, change it to 20480 KB.
II. Select Overwrite events as needed.
5. Click .
6. Right-click a System and then choose Properties from

the pop-up menu.
7. Perform the same procedure as in steps 4 and 5.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Select Customize... from the View menu.
20000012.ai
The Customize View window opens.
9. Remove the checkmark from the Action pane.
AWS35011.ai
10. Click .
11. Close the Event Viewer window.


010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista/7 only)
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode

(Windows Vista/7 only)
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372

window opens.
3. Remove the checkmark from Use AutoPlay for all media

and devices.
AWS35021.ai
4. Click [Save].

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
24. Firewall Settings

(Windows Vista/7 only)
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
NOTE
Firewall settings are performed provided that the CL has already been
installed appropriately.
AP shutdown
1. Turn ON the PC power.
Windows starts running. The CL-AP starts running too in about
one minute, displaying then the CL initial window.
2. Within a period of three seconds after the CL initial window

opens, sequentially click the upper left corner and then the
upper right corner of the window.
The Enter Password window opens.
DXL41001.ai
3. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Setting the Firewall / ICMP When the AP-CD is used
When the FD is used 1. Insert the CL-AP CD into the PC.
1. Insert the 114Y5085953A00 FD into the FD drive. 2. Select All Programs Accessories Run... from the
menu.
2. Select All Programs Accessories Run... from the
menu. The Run... window opens.
The Run... window opens. 3. Enter D:\Tools\FirewallSetting.bat and click [OK].

The command prompt window opens.
3. Enter A:\FirewallSetting.bat and click [OK]. After a while, the following window opens.
After a while, the following window opens.
20000011.ai
RI0000496.ai
4. Press the <Enter> key. 4. Press the <Enter> key.

The system returns to the desktop screen. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Checking the Firewall Settings REFERENCE

For Windows Vista Execution file list
1. Select Control Panel from the menu and Execution file name Remarks
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInput.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInputEz.exe
double-click . C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMain.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipOutput.exe
The Windows Firewall window opens. C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSDecision.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSIpServer.exe
2. Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall.
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSXfer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\DicomStoreSCP.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMedia.exe
AWS35015.ai
The Windows Firewall Settings window opens. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\BmpServer\ RU PC-TOOL
3. Select the Exceptions tab and check to see that the BmpServer.exe installed
following items are checkmarked appropriately. C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\InfoHostServer\ FCR-TOOL
BmpServer.exe conf.exe InfoHostServer.exe installed
DicomStoreSCP.exe FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe C:\Program Files\NetMeeting\conf.exe
FF-WakeOnLAN.exe FTP.exe
IdLoginExe.exe IipFinp.exe
IipInput.exe IipInputEz.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\mnmsrvc.exe
IipMain.exe IipMedia.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\INETSRV\inetinfo.exe Client PC tool
IipOutput.exe IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe installed
IIPServiceUtility.exe IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN.exe WakeOnLAN
IIPTRISScreen.exe IIPUserUtility.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe WakeOnLAN
inetinfo.exe InfoHostServer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\Retrieve.exe For V3.0 or later
ML_UPSEvent.exe mnmsrvc.exe
Retrieve.exe SSDecision.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe For V3.0 or later
SSFinp.exe SSIpServer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPTRISScreen.exe For V3.1 or later
SSXfer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IdLoginExe.exe For V3.1 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe For V8.1 or later
Port setup information list

FTP_port 21 TCP
RI240001.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows 7 REFERENCE

Execution file list
1. Select Control Panel from the menu and Execution file name Remarks
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IipInput.exe
click . C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IipMain.exe FCR
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IipFinp.exe
The Windows Firewall window opens. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IipOutput.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\SSDecision.exe
2. Select Allow a program or feature through Windows C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\SSIpServer.exe
Firewall. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\SSFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\SSXfer.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IipMedia.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\Retrieve.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe
DXL03140002.ai C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPTRISScreen.exe
The Allowed Programs window opens. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IdLoginExe.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\SFPD.exe ShimadzuFPD
3. Confirm that the Home/Work (Private) of each execution
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\inetsrv\inetinfo.exe When installing
file has been checked.
the Client PC-
Tool
Port setup information list

FTP_port 21 TCP
DXL03140003.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Checking the ICMP Settings 3. Select Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local
Computer Monitoring Firewall and confirm that the
1. Select Control Panel from the menu and following items have been added.
double-click (click for Windows 7) [Administrative Tools] . Networking - Address Mask Request (ICMPv4-In)
The Adoministrator Tools window opens. Networking - Destination Unreachable (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Echo Request (ICMPv4-In)
2. Double-click Windows Firewall with Advanced Security. Networking - Parameter Problem (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Redirect (ICMPv4-In)
Networking - Redirect (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Router Solicitation (ICMPv4-In)
Networking - Source Quench (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Time Exceeded (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Timestamp Request (ICMPv4-In)
AWS35021.ai
The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window opens.
RI0000483.ai
CAUTION
In Windows 7, the above items may exist in Inbound Rules and
Outbound Rules. If the above items do not exist in Firewall,
check for the items in each tree.
4. Close both the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security

and Administrative Tools windows.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Setting the firewall related to FTP Server 4. Select Inbound Rules.

(Windows 7 only)
DXL03020260.ai
5. Right-click FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)

and select Enable Rule.
DXL03020210.ai
2. Click .
The Windows Firewall window opens.
3. Select Advanced settings. DXL03020261.ai
The Enabled of FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)

changes to Yes.
DXL03020259.ai
DXL03020262.ai
The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
6. Select Exit from File menu.
DXL03020263.ai
7. Close the Windows Firewall window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs

This appendix describes the procedures for uninstalling the following
APs:
CL-AP
MSDE (SQL SP included) / SQL Server
RU-AP
RU M-UTILITY
Option keys
Touch panel driver
Console software (Built_inConsole)
FRIS Modules
Synapse Client (Synapse Workstation)
*1
Precise enlargement software
*1
QA ROI measurement software
CAUTION
*1: Uninstall this software only when reinstalling or upgrading a
linking application. No support is provided to only
uninstallation of any linking application.
u NOTE u
as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows7, follow the
procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI A-1
1. CL-AP 5. Click .
Use the IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to uninstall the CL-AP. u NOTE u
u NOTE u The message Prepare Installation appears here.
Note that the uninstallation process then starts, and not the
When uninstalling CL-AP of software version V7.0 (B) or later, have the installation process as the message indicates.
date/time display application (IIPDisDateTime) exit beforehand the task
manager (by calling up at the press of the <Ctrl>+<shift>+<Esc> keys).
In about one minute, the uninstall process ends.
1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. 6. Close the Add/Remove Programs window.
The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens. You are then returned to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
u NOTE u NOTES
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, When the Synapse Client software is installed on the CL, uninstall first
double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD. the CL-AP and then the Synapse Client software.
For how to uninstall the Synapse Client software, see
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under
RI: Reinstalling the Software.
RI000097.EPS
2. Type in the number 5 and then press the <Enter> key.

The Add/Remove Programs window opens.
3. Select the CL-AP (IIP in the window).

The selected item is then highlighted.
4. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. MSDE (SQL SP Included) / SQL Server 4. Perform the following settings.

For Windows 2000
1. Right-click in the task tray at the lower right corner of the Double-click on the desktop.
desktop, and then click MS SQL Server-Stop.
The My Computer window opens.
Double-click .
For Windows XP
Select from the menu.

00000473.EPS
The SQL Server Service Manager window opens.

5. Double-click .
2. Click .
3. Right-click in the task tray again, and then click Exit. The Add/Remove Programs window opens.
6. Select MSDE and then click .

The Confirm File Deletion window opens.
00000474.EPS
The icon disappears from the task tray.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7. Click . 2.2 For Windows Vista/7
The installation shield starts running to initiate an MSDE

uninstallation. 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
After a while, the Remove Shared File? window opens.
window opens.
2. Double-Click (click for Windows 7) .
3. Double-Click .
4. Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, select

00000475.EPS
.
8. Click .
5. Within the tree in the right-hand area of the window, right-
click , select Stop.
9. Click .
Uninstallation ends in 10 seconds.
10. Click .
The system returns to the Add/Remove Programs window.
11. Close the Add/Remove Programs window and Control

Panel.
00000485.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
6. Close the Computer Management window. 10. Select MSSQLSERVER: Database Engine and then click
The Administrative Tools window opens. .
7. Click in the upper left-hand area of the Administrative

Tools window.
8. Double-Click (click for Windows 7) .
9. Select Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and then click

.
The Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Uninstall window opens.
00000486.ai
11. Click Finish.

The installation shield starts running to initiate an SQL Server
uninstallation. After a while,Uninstallation ends. The system then
returns to the Programs and Features window.
12. Close the Programs and Features window and then the
Control Panel window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. RU-AP 2. Click [UNINSTALL].
To uninstall the RU-AP, use the RU M-Utility. u NOTE u

All the RU-APs displayed in the LIST OF EXISTING RU area are
1. Start the RU M-Utility as directed below: uninstalled.
IV. Click.
II. Click. 00000477.EPS
A confirmation window (the message Completed) appears on the

display.
3. Click .
The system then returns to the main menu.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4. RU M-Utility u NOTES u
Although the window says Welcome to the FCR TOOL Setup
u NOTE u Wizard, the setup process does not start.
Use the RU-CD to uninstall the RU M-Utility. Do not uninstall the RU FCR TOOL is another name for RU M-Utility.
M-Utility from Add/Remove Programs in Control Panel because an
improper uninstallation results.
3. Click .
The FCR TOOL Setup/Remove the Program window opens.
1. Insert the RU-CD into the PC.
After a while, the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS window
opens.
00000479.EPS
4. Click .
The FCR TOOL Setup/Completing the FCR TOOL Setup Wizard
window opens. Uninstallation is now completed.
5. Click .
The system then returns to the initial window (which automatically
opened when the CD was set in position).
00000214.EPS
2. Click .
After a while, the FCR TOOL Setup window opens.
00000480.EPS
6. Click [EXIT].

00000478.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. Option Keys 4. Enter the uninstallation command in the Open (O) box and
click .
The option key CD is required for uninstalling an option key.
D:\option keys executable file name (xxxxxx.exe)/u
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
When uninstalling an option key, be sure to perform the following
procedure. If, for instance, you directly remove an option key with Enter the media drive name for the underlined portion.
Registry Editor or the like, the option name may remain in a user
window although the option function is removed.
REFERENCE
To confirm the executable file name of an option key, you should
1. Insert into the PC the CD for the option key you wish to directly view the contents of the CD from Explorer or the like.
uninstall.
Example: Executable file names for IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE
option
2. The installation window opens. Press the OptionDcmStandardCR.exe
button to close this window. OptionDcmPrivateCR.exe
3. Select Run... box from the menu. You can click the button to select the executable file
for the option key to be uninstalled.
The Run... box opens.
A window opens to indicate that uninstallation is completed.
5. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6. Touch Panel Driver 4. Click .
The touch panel driver uninstallation procedure differs whether it is The uninstallation start window opens.
L362T, L560T-C or other than those models.
Uninstall the driver accordingly following the proper procedure.
Monitor other than L362T and L560T-C

RI000008.EPS
For Windows 2000

5. Click .
When uninstallation process ends, the PC restarts.
Double-click .
For Windows XP
2. Double-click .
3. Select the touch panel driver (MonitorMouse for Windows

2000) and click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
L362T monitor 4. Click .

u NOTE u The Reminder window opens.
When the OS used is Windows Vista/7, the procedure to be performed
is different. 5. Click .
See L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista/7.
Uninstallation process starts.
For the procedure to be performed under Windows Vista/7, see
L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista/7.
6. When uninstallation process ends, click .
1. Perform the following settings. The confirmation window opens.
Double-click on the desktop. 8. Close the Control Panel window.
The My Computer window opens. 9. Restart the PC.
Double-click .
For Windows XP
2. Double-click .
3. Select TouchWare 5.64 SR1, and click .

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
L560T-C monitor 4. Click .

u NOTE u Uninstallation process starts, and the USB Driver Removal
When the OS used is Windows Vista/7, the procedure to be performed window opens within a few seconds.
is different.
See L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista/7. 5. Click .
For the procedure to be performed under Windows Vista/7, see
L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista/7. The Reminder window opens.

For Windows 2000

RI0000466.AI

6. Click .
Double-click . The Reminder window opens.
For Windows XP

RI0000467.AI

7. Click .
2. Double-click . 8. When uninstallation process ends, click .

3. Select TouchWare 5.64 SR1, and click .
10. Restart the PC.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista/7


window opens.
3. Right-click MT 7.xx(build) for Windows and select

Uninstall/Change from the menu that opens.
4. Click .
Uninstallation processing starts.
5. At the completion of uninstallation processing, click

.
7. Restart the PC.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Console Software (Built_inConsole) 3. Perform the following settings.

For Windows 2000/XP
u NOTE u
Select Built_inConsole and click .
After the console software is uninstalled, be sure to reinstall the console
software. The CL-AP does not start running when the console software The Application Removal window opens.
is uninstalled. For Windows Vista/7
Select Built_inConsole and click .
1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. The Application Removal window opens.
The IIP Setup Tool main menu opens automatically.
4. Click .
NOTE
The install shield starts running and begins to uninstall the MSDE.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, After a while, the Shared Component window opens.
RI000009.EPS
5. Click .
NOTE
When is clicked, a window like that shown
below may open. In such cases, click to proceed to
RI000097.EPS the next step.

The Add/Remove Programs window or the Programs and
Features window opens.
RI0000428.EPS
The uninstallation process ends and the confirmation window opens.
6. Click .
The system then returns to the Add/Remove Programs window.
7. Close the Add/Remove Programs window and then the

main menu.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. FRIS Modules
[Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
9. DVD-RAM Driver
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
10. POCKET id Console-AP 2. From the menu on the POCKET id Console,
1. Soft-reset the PDA terminal (POCKET id Console). select Settings and then tap on the tab.
REFERENCE
While holding down either of the right and left scan trigger buttons
on the POCKET id Console, press the Enter key and the Function
key at the same time, and then release these keys.
Scan trigger
Function key
( button)
Enter key
RI000102E.EPS
( button)
Scan trigger
RI0000366.EPS
The screen is reset, and the desktop opens in a few seconds.

3. Double-click .
The Remove Programs window opens.
RI000101E.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4. Select FujiFilm POCKET id Console and tap on 5. Tap .

.
When the uninstallation completes, the system returns to the
Remove Programs window.
RI000103E.EPS
The Remove Program window opens. RI000105E.EPS
6. Close the Remove Programs window.
NOTES
If the following window opens, perform steps 7 and onward to
remove specific files.
Until you have performed step 7, be careful not to touch the PDA
screen. Touching the screen will cause the current screen to
disappear.
RI000104E.EPS
RI000106E.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7. Take a note of the folders or file paths that are listed on the 11. Press and hold with the stylus pen one of the folders or files
screen as shown below. that you have noted down at step 7, and then tap Delete
from the menu that appears.
RI000109E.EPS
A dialog opens asking you to confirm deletion of the folder or file.
RI000107E.EPS
12. Tap on .
8. Tap on anywhere on the screen.
The system returns to the System window.
9. Tap on the mark in the upper-right corner of the screen.

10. From the menu on the POCKET id Console,

select Programs and then File Explorer. RI000110E.EPS
The specified folder or file is deleted, and then the system returns
to the File Explorer screen.
13. If there are two or more folders/files to delete, repeat steps

11 and 12 until all of them are deleted.
RI000108E.EPS
The File Explorer window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
14. If there are any Study information file(s) and/or Screen

customization setting file(s), repeat steps 11 and 12 to
delete all of them.
NOTE
Study information file(s) and Screen customization setting file(s)
are stored under the folders that are set for the following paths,
respectively.
Study information file(s)
No.3, StudyFilePath under SYSTEM CONFIG - CONFIG
PDA
Screen customization setting file(s)
No.4, CustomFilePath under SYSTEM CONFIG - CONFIG
PDA
15. Tap on the mark in the upper-right corner of the screen.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
11. ActiveSync 6. Click .
NOTE The desktop opens.
When ActiveSync has been removed, the POCKET id Console option 7. Restart the PC.
key needs to be reinstalled for reinstallation of the ActiveSync function.

For Windows 2000
Double-click .

For Windows XP
2. Double-click .
3. Select Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7 and click .

A window opens prompting for confirmation of file removal.
4. Click .
The uninstallation window opens.
5. Click .
Uninstallation processing will start. After a while, a window opens
to indicate that uninstallation processing has been completed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse 5. Click .

Workstation) After a while, the Downloaded Program Files window opens
automatically.
6. Click the symbol at the upper right-corner of the window
For Windows 2000
to close the Downloaded Program Files window.
Double-click on the desktop. The system returns to the desktop.
7. Restart the PC.
The My Computer window opens. 8. If the CL-AP starts up after the PC restart, click the upper-
right and -left corners of the window once each to have the
Double-click . Service Utility be displayed. Then shut down the Service
Utility.
The Control Panel window opens. 9. Open the following folders.
For Windows XP/Vista/7 Windows 2000 : C:\WINNT\Download Program Files
Windows XP/Vista/7 : C:\WINDOWS\Download Program Files

window opens.
2. Double-click (click for Windows 7) ( for
Windows Vista/7) in Control Panel.

3. Select Synapse and click .

The WARNING window opens.
4. Click .
The same window opens again.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
10. Perform the following settings. 11. Click .

For Windows 2000/XP/Vista
Right-click Synapse Medical Imaging Workstation and select
Remove.
RI000230.EPS
12. Close the Downloaded Program Files.
RI000229.EPS
For Windows 7
Remove SynapseWorkstaion.dll and SynapseWorkstation.
inf.
NOTE
Depending on the version of the Synapse client, the files above are
automatically removed. If the files do not exist, proceed to the next step.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13. Exposure Guidance

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
14. Precise Enlargement Software

This section describes the procedure used to uninstall the Precise
Enlargement software.
CAUTION
Uninstall the Precise Enlargement software only when
reinstalling or upgrading this application software.
Uninstallation processing can be performed only from a CD of
the same version of software that has already been installed.
Described below are the procedure on how to confirm the
Precise Enlargement software version and the CDs that are for
the available version.
I. Click C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml.
II. Confirm <SoftwareVersion> shown in <Application ID=
Name=ECHO>.
III. Depending on the version confirmed of the Precise
Enlargement software, use either of the following CDs.
For <SoftwareVersion>1.0:
Precise Enlargement software installation CD
(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A00))
For <SoftwareVersion>2.1:
Precise Enlargement software installation CD
(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A01))
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For the V1.0 Precise Enlargment software 4. Select Remove Echo and click .
1. Insert the Precise Enlargement software installation CD
(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A00)) into the
PC.
2. Use Explorer to double-click Setup.exe.

The Install Echo application screen window opens.
3. Click .
AWS807003.ai
The Installation Complete window opens.
AWS807004.ai
AWS807002.ai
The Welcome to the Echo Setup Wizard window opens. 5. Click .
6. Uninstall the option key.

For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 5. Option Keys.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For the V2.1 Precise Enlargment software 4. Click .

1. Insert the Precise Enlargement software installation CD
(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A01)) into the
PC.

The Install Precise enlargement function screen window opens.
AWS807009.ai
The Uninstallation Complete window opens.

3. Click .
AWS807010.ai
5. Click .
6. Uninstall the option key.

AWS807008.ai
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 5. Option
The Welcome to the Precise enlargement function Setup Wizard Keys.
window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
15. Windows Mobile Device Center

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
16. QA ROI Measurement Software 4. Click .
This section describes the procedure used to uninstall the QA ROI

Measurement software.
CAUTION
Uninstall the QA ROI Measurement software only when
reinstalling or upgrading this application software. AWS807012.ai
Uninstallation processing can be performed only from a CD of

the same version of software that has already been installed. The Uninstallation Complete window opens.
For the V2.0 QA ROI Measurement software

1. Insert the QA ROI measurement software installation CD (QA
ROI measurement (114Y5342319A00)) into the PC.

AWS807013.ai
The Install QA ROI Measurement screen window opens.

5. Click .
3. Click . 6. Uninstall the option key.

For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 5. Option
Keys.
AWS807011.ai
The Welcome to QA ROI Measurement Setup Wizard window

opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name
Appendix B Changing the CL Uninstalling the MSDE/SQL Server

Host Name For the procedure for uninstalling the MSDE/SQL Server,
see Appendix A Uninstalling the APs.
u NOTE u Changing the CL-PC host name

When changing the CLs host name, be sure to follow the sequence
indicated below.
If you do not use the correct procedure to change the host name, the For Windows 2000
CL-AP may become inoperative.
Uninstalling the MSDE/SQL
Server The My Computer window opens.
Changing the CL-PC host name Double-click .
Installing the MSDE/SQL Server The Control Panel window opens.
Rebuilding the image database Double-click .
Setting the Service Utility The System Properties window opens.
For Windows XP
Initializing the image database ... Use this procedure only when
you wish to remove images from
the HDD.
* If you wish to retain images, do
not perform this procedure.
Double-click .
u NOTE u
as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7. The System Properties window opens.
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7, follow
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI B-1
For Windows Vista/7 For Windows XP/Vista/7

Select Control Panel from the menu. Click the Computer Name tab.

window opens.
RI0000359.EPS
Double-click (click for Windows 7) .

Click .
The Computer Name Changes window opens.
Change the host name of the Computer name field.
Click .
2. Perform the following settings. Change.
For Windows 2000 RI0000360.EPS
Click the Network Identification tab.

3. Click .
For Windows 2000/XP

00000482.EPS The Network Identification window opens. (Although a
message appears prompting you to restart the PC, you must
Click . restart it in step 6.)
The Identification Changes window opens. For Windows Vista/7
Change the host name entry in the Computer name field. A window like that shown below opens.
Change.
00000483.EPS
RI0000361.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Click . Installing the MSDE/SQL Server

The system then returns to the System Properties window. For the MSDE/SQL Server installation procedure, see 4. Installing
MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack in
5. Click . (For Windows Vista/7, click .)
A windows opens to prompt for a restart. u NOTE u
When MSDE/SQL Server and service pack are installed, the PC is
6. Click . (For Windows Vista/7, click .) forced to restart. After a restart, the CL-AP automatically starts up;
however, an error occurs because the image database is not
The PC restarts. rebuilt.
In this instance, just click [OK] to close the error window.
7. When a certain period of time elapses after PC startup, error The system recovers from this error when you rebuild the image
windows open. Close all such windows. database.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Rebuilding the image database Setting the Service Utility

When you change the CLs host name, the Service Utilitys network
1. Select from the menu. Use then the setup for this equipment changes to that for other connected equipment.
Therefore, you have to restore the original network setup as directed
key to select necessary files located in the below:
directories below: 1. Start the Service Utility and then click [Setup Configuration
Item].
A00 version: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Temp\
ImageDB\SQL\Attach.bat The Setup Configuration Item window opens.
A02 version or later: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Temp\ 2. Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, click the
AttachAll.bat
mark to the left of , and then click
the mark to the left of .
u NOTE u
Do not execute the above command from the MS-DOS prompt. 3. Choose (CLs previous host name).
The MS-DOS prompt window then opens, displaying the message

Press any key to continue .... 4. Change the entry in the upper right
corner of the window to a new host name.
5. Click .
6. From the Config menu, choose Save.

00000484.EPS
A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
The MS-DOS prompt window closes. The image database is thus 7. Click .
completely rebuilt.
This makes it possible to use again HDD images that have been The system saves the setup data.
available before CL host name change.
The original network setup is then restored.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Initializing the image database [as required]
u NOTE u
If you wish to retain images stored in the HDD, do not initialize the
image database.
Initializing the image database deletes all images from the HDD.
1. Initialize the image database with the Service Utility.

For the image database initialization procedure, see
12. Initializing the Image Database in RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
The CL host name change procedure is now completed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling 5. Raise the lever in the direction of the arrow.
the Board (PEI/PSI) 6. Remove the card cage from the CL-PC.
7. Remove the PEI or PSI board from the PCI slot in the card
Removing the board (for GX110) cage.
7. PEI or PSI board
1. After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to
5. Lever
the CL-PC has been turned OFF. PCI slot
2. Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source. 6. Card cage
3. Remove the CL-PC cover.

FR
ON
T
4. When the card cage is mounted, its PC board interferes with

a cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull
the disk unit on the front of the CL-PC before mounting the
card cage.
#1 [Push] Disk unit
CL-PC
#2 [Pull]
00000353.EPS
ONT
FR
8. Mount the card cage in the CL-PC.
#1 [Push]
9. Return the lever to its original position.
Hard disk rear cable 10. Restore the disk unit.

CL-PC 00000202.EPS
11. Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
12. Mount the CL-PC cover.
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI C-1
Removing the board (for GX150, 50, 60, 280 SDT) Removing the board (for GX260, 270, 280 SMT, 620 and
Precision WS340, 330, 360, 370)
the CL-PC has been turned OFF.
2. Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source.
3. Open the CL-PC cover.

4. Hold the card cage handle and remove the card cage.
3. Dismount the CL-PC cover.
5. Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot within the card
4. Remove the support arm (GX260, 270, 280 SMT, WS340, 360,
370) or screw (WS330, 620) that fastens the PEI or PSI board
cage.
bracket.
Handle
u NOTE u
4. Card cage
Keep the screw thus removed because it may be necessary at later
steps.
5. PEI or PSI board
AGP slot PEI or PSI board

slot connector
T
ON
FR
CL-PC
RI000022.EPS
6. Mount the card cage in the CL-PC.
7. Close the CL-PC cover.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
5. Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot. 6. Mount a feeler bracket (a metal plate inserted into an empty
expansion card slot.)
Support arm Bracket
Feeler bracket
PEI or PSI board
GX260,270,280 SMT
PEI or PSI WS340,360,370
board slot
RI000202.EPS
PCI slot
7. Use a support arm or screw to fasten the feeler bracket.
Bracket
Screw
PEI or PSI board 9. Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
PEI or PSI WS330

board slot
PCI slot
Screw
Bracket
PEI or PSI board

PEI or PSI
board slot
WS620
PCI slot
RI000430.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Removing the board (for 745 DT, 745 MT, 755 DT, 755 MT, 6. Mount a feeler bracket (a metal plate inserted into an empty
760, Precision WS380, 390, T3400) expansion card slot).
Feeler bracket
3. Dismount the CL-PC cover.

RI000432.EPS
4. Unlatch the fixing latch (for 745 DT, 745 MT, 755 DT, 755 MT,
760, 780) or open the fixing door (for WS380, 390, T3400) 7. With a fixing latch or fixing door, fasten the feeler bracket.
that secures the PEI or PSI board bracket.
5. Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot.
Fixing latch or 9. Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
Bracket fixing door
PEI or PSI board

PEI or PSI
board slot
WS380, 390, T3400
745 MT, 755 MT, 760
PCI slot
Fixing latch
Bracket
PEI or PSI board

PEI or PSI
board slot
745 DT, 755 DT
PCI slot
RI000431.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Removing the board (for NEC PC) 7. Use a screw to fasten the feeler bracket.
1. After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to 8. Mount the CL-PC left-side cover.
3. Open the CL-PC left-side cover.

Reinstalling the board (common to all models)
4. Hold the card cage handle and remove the card cage.
Reinstall the board by reversing the removal procedure.
u NOTE u
Keep the screw thus removed because it may be necessary at later
steps.
5. Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot.

Screw PEI or PSI board
Bracket
PEI or PSI
board slot
PCI slot
00000513.EPS
6. Mount a feeler bracket (a metal plate inserted into an empty

expansion card slot.)
Feeler bracket
RI000202.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appendix D Upgrading the AP

This appendix describes the CL-AP upgrade procedures.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Before upgrading the AP, verify that there are no patients reserved for Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same
exposure (no patients are registered in the examination queue window). as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7.
Also, check that no image is left in the QA queue or output queue. When setting procedures to be performed are different between
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7, follow
Procedures (version upgrade to A11)
Upgrade the CL-AP to version A11 by performing the following steps:
Upgrade type *1 Pay due attention to the versions of the Built_in
Description Console software and built-in type machine
Step (correlating to the subsequent A02/03 A04 to A08 A09 A10 (550xplus) software.
titles prefixed by the mark) A00/01A11
A11 A11 A11 A11 Built_in Console software version A07 is stored on
the CD for CL version A02/A03, and Built_in Console
1 Uninstalling the CL-AP
software version A08 is stored on the CD for CL
Uninstalling the old PEI board version A04 to A08. A09 is stored on the CD for CL
2
driver (Only when the LP is used) version A09 and A10. A10 is stored on the CD for CL
version A11.
Uninstalling the Built_in
3
Console software
The built-in type machine software versions
compatible with Built_in Console version A10 are
4 Uninstalling FRIS Modules indicated below. If necessary, upgrade the built-in
type main unit software.
Upgrading the MSDE Service 5501: A13 5502D: A09 5501D: A09 XU-D1:
5 Pack (SQL7SP3) software
A07
version
*2 When version A04 is used, an error (error code:
6 Installing the CL-AP
30151 or 20110) occurs at CL startup if no node is
Installing the Built_in Console set for [NETWORK CONFIG] - [THIS HOST (IIP)].
7
software *1, *3 If no node is set, be sure to set a dummy node.
If at least one node is already set, there is no need
8 Installing FRIS Modules
to perform step 10.
Installing the new PEI board *3 To use the CL with its software version A07 or later,
9
driver (Only when the LP is used)
the Built_in Console software of version A08 or later
10 Setting dummy nodes *2 *2 is required. Otherwise, an automation error will
occur.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI D-1
Procedures (version upgrade to V8.3(B))

NOTE WARNING
When upgrading version A0010 to V8.3(B), follow Procedures (version Never change the software version from A or V.(B) to V1.0(C).
upgrade to A11) to upgrade the software version to A1118 and upgrade A new installation from the OS is also prohibited.
now the version to V4.0(B) or later. Then upgrade it finally to V8.3(B).
Procedures (version upgrade to A11)
Upgrade the CL-AP to version V8.3(B) by performing the following steps:

Upgrade type *1 Pay due attention to the versions of the
Description Built_in Console software and built-in
Step (correlating to the subsequent V1.0(B), V2.0(B) A11-18, V3.0(B), V5.0(B) V5.0(B), V6.0(B) V4.0(B) to V7.0(B) V4.0(B) to V7.0(B) V4.0(B) to V8.0(B) V4.0(B) to V8.2(B) type machine (550xplus) software.
titles prefixed by the mark) V3.0(B)*2 V4.0(B)V5.0(B)*2 V6.0(B) V7.0(B) V7.1(B)*2 V8.0(B)*2 V8.1(B)*2 V8.3(B)*2 Built_in Console software version A08 is
stored on the CD for CL version A08. A09
1 Uninstalling the CL-AP is stored on the CD for CL version A09
Uninstalling and A10. A10 is stored on the CD for CL
2 version A11, V1.0(B) - V8.3(B).
the old PEI board driver The built-in type machine software versions
Uninstalling the Built_in compatible with Built_in Console version
3 *1
Console software A10 are indicated below. If necessary,
upgrade the built-in type main unit software.
4 Uninstalling FRIS Modules 5501:A13 5501D:A09 5502D:A09 XU-D1:A07
Upgrading the MSDE *2 The AP version is upgraded sequentially
5 Service Pack (SQL7SP4) as follows:
software version A00 - A11 V1.0(B) V2.0(B) V3.0(B)
V4.0(B) V5.0(B) V6.0(B) V7.0(B)
Installing the Windows 2000
6 *7 *7 *7 V7.1(B) V8.0(B) V8.1(B) V8.3(B)
SP4 update program rollup *3 Make sure to upgrade the AP version only
7 Installing the CL-AP for the equipment actually in use.
*4 Add Mammo QC menus to equipment
Installing the Built_in
8 *1 units where such menus are used.
Console software
*5 Use the DICOM Query/Retrieve function
9 Installing FRIS Modules to perform necessary settings on a
location where the reverse-conversion
Installing the new PEI
10 LUT is applied.
board driver
*6 For an institution where Mammo QC menus
11 Setting dummy nodes are newly added at the time when the
software version is upgraded to V7.1(B), if
Upgrading the POCKET
12 *3 the institution wishes to use the existing
id Console-AP version menus continuously as they are, install first
13 Adding Mammo QC menus *4 *4, *6 *4 *4 *4 the Mammo QC menus under V7.0(B)
environment and then upgrade it to V7.1(B).
14 Setting 16bitLUT files *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 (Upgrade the software version to V7.1(B)
Uninstalling and then add the Mammo QC menus again
15 *8 *8 *8 with the use of the V7.1(B) CL-AP CD.)
the linking application
*7 For the CL-AP of V7.1(B) or earlier installed
Installing *8 *8 *8
16 under the Windows 2000 environment, this
the linking application procedure must always be performed before
Resetting installing the CL-AP of V8.0(B) or later.
17 *8 Be sure to perform this procedure when
the USB device (BCR)
the Precise Enlargement software has
been installed with the V7.1(B) CL-AP.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Uninstalling the CL-AP 1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.

Use the IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to uninstall the CL-AP. The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
When uninstalling CL-AP of software version V7.0 (B) or later, have the In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
date/time display application (IIPDisDateTime) exit beforehand the task double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
manager (by calling up at the press of the <Ctrl>+<shift>+<Esc> keys).
NOTE
When installing the FSTD2009 Parameters, initialize the image
database from Service Utility mode and delete past study information
completely.
Installing the FSTD2009 Parameters will cancel the existing menu
information, causing then an inconsistency (in MPM codes or in menu
codes) to result with regard to the past study menu information
accumulated on the hard disk. This may disable the past studies to be
opened.
RI000097.EPS
NOTE 2. Type in the number 5 and then press the <Enter> key.
For an institution where the actual exposure result data file output The Add/Remove Programs window opens.
function and/or mis-exposure comment input function is used, complete
the following steps and then perform uninstallation processing. 3. Select the CL-AP (IIP in the window).
1. Start up the CL-AP. The selected item is then highlighted.
2. Select User Utility from the menu.
4. Click .
User Utility mode starts running.
3. Use the exposure result log storage function to save mis-exposure A confirmation window opens.
log or exposure result log.
4. Shut down User Utility mode while holding down the <Shift> key.
5. Click .
The system returns to the desktop. u NOTE u

The message Prepare Installation appears here.
Note that the uninstallation process then starts, and not the
installation process as the message indicates.
In about one minute, the uninstall process ends.
6. Close the Add/Remove Programs window.

You are then returned to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Uninstalling the old PEI board driver

Complete the following steps only when the LP is used: 3. Choose and then click
1. From the IIP Setup Tool menu window, type in the number .
6 and then press the <Enter> key.
RI000097.EPS
RI000013.EPS
The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard window opens.
The Choose a Removal Task window opens.
4. Verify that is chosen, and then
RI000012.EPS click .
2. Click .
The Choose a Hardware Task window opens.
RI000014.EPS
The Installed Devices on Your Computer window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
5. Choose and then click . 7. Click .

You are then returned to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
RI000015.EPS
The Uninstall a Device window opens.

.
RI000016.EPS
The Completing the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard window

opens.
RI000017.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Uninstalling the Built_in Console software Uninstalling FRIS Modules

u NOTE u 1. Use the IIP Setup Tool menu to input 5 and press the
After the console software is uninstalled, be sure to reinstall it. <Enter> key.
If it is left uninstalled, the CL-AP does not start up. The Add/Remove Application window opens.
2. Select Risiip.
1. Enter 5 from the IIP Setup Tool menu and then press the
<Enter> key. Risiip will be displayed in reverse video.

3. Click .
2. Select Built_inConsole and click . The Application Removal window opens.
The Application Removal window opens.
3. Click .
InstallShield then opens to start uninstalling MSDE.
After a while, the Shared Component window opens. RI000075.EPS
4. Click .
After about one minute, a window opens asking you to confirm
completion of removal processing.
RI000009.EPS
u NOTE u
4. Click . If the Shared Component window (that asks if you wish to delete
the Shared File) is displayed during the uninstallation process, click
The uninstallation process ends and then a confirmation window , and then on the confirmation
opens.
window.
5. Click .
The system returns to the Add/Remove Programs window. 5. Click .
The system returns to the Add/Remove Application window.
6. Close the Add/Remove Programs window and then
Control Panel.
6. Exit the Add/Remove Application window.
The system then returns to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Upgrading the MSDE service pack (SQL7SP4) software 4. Perform the following settings.
version For Windows 2000
1. Right-click in the task tray at the lower right corner of the
on the desktop.
Double-click
desktop, and then click MS SQL Server-Stop.
Double-click .
For Windows XP
00000473.EPS
The SQL Server Service Manager window opens.
2. Click .
5. Double-click .
3. Right-click in the task tray again, and then click Exit. The Add/Remove Programs window opens.
6. Select MSDE and then click .

The Confirm File Deletion window opens.
00000474.EPS
The icon disappears from the task tray.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7. Click . 12. From the IIP Setup Tool menu window, type in 1 and
then press the <Enter> key.
The installation shield starts running to initiate an MSDE
uninstallation.
After a while, the Remove Shared File? window opens.
RI000097.EPS
The MSDE and service pack installation window opens.
00000475.EPS
8. Click .
9. Click .
Uninstallation ends in ten seconds.
10. Click .
The system then returns to the Add/Remove Programs window.
11. Close the Add/Remove Programs window and Control

Panel.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
13. Enter 5 and press the <Enter> key. 14. Press the <Enter> key.
The IIP Setup Tool menu ends.
15. Remove the CL-AP CD from the PC.

16. Restart the CL to implement the upgraded MSDE.
17. The username and login window will appear while the CL is
being restarted. Enter the password in one-byte characters.
RI000098.EPS
Username : Administrator
Password : fcr-iip
The service pack installation process will start. The MSDE
installation process will end in about ten minutes. (It takes 20 to 30
minutes depending on the number of images stored on the HD.)
RI000200.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Installing the Windows 2000 SP4 update program rollup

2. Select [Run] from the menu.
The Run window opens.
3. Depending on the desired OS language, enter an execution

file name of the table below and then click .
OS
Execution file names
languages
Japanese D:\RollupKB\Japanese\KB891861-v2-x86-JPN.EXE
English D:\RollupKB\English\KB891861-v2-x86-ENU.EXE
Chinese
D:\RollupKB\ChineseSimplified\KB891861-v2-x86-CHS.EXE
Simplified
Korean D:\RollupKB\Korean\KB891861-v2-x86-KOR.EXE
Chinese
D:\RollupKB\ChineseTraditional\KB891861-v2-x86-CHT.EXE
Traditional
NOTE
Specify the media drive name for the underlined portion.
The installation window opens.
4. Click [Next].
5. Select [I Agree] and click [Next].

Installation processing starts and will complete in a few minutes.
6. Restart the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Installing the CL-AP NOTE

NOTE When upgrading a software version, choose the currently used
monitor resolution, otherwise a display error may result.
For the CL-AP of V7.1(B) or earlier installed under the Windows 2000
environment, be sure to perform the procedure set forth in Installing
the Windows 2000 SP4 update program rollup and then install the
CL-AP of V8.0(B) or later.
1. From the IIP Setup Tool main menu, type in 2 and then
The installer starts running and the IIP - InstallShield Wizard /
Welcome to the ... window opens.
00000178.EPS
Select the monitor

type to be used.
2. Click . RI000100.EPS
The IIP Setup/Setup Type window opens. The IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Ready to Install the Program
window opens.
3. Select the monitor type to be used, and then click
.
When a 15" monitor with a touch panel or a 17" CRT monitor is used,
choose Color (1024 768).
When a 17 monitor with a touch panel is used, choose Color (1280
1024). 00000180.EPS
When the color Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 is used,

choose Color (2048 1536).
When the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor is to be used, select Black/
White (1600 1200).
When the monochrome Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC 300 is
used, choose Black/White (2048 1536).
When the monochrome LCD Monitor SL-IC 200 is used, choose Black/
White (1600 1200).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Click . 6. Press <Enter>.

The following window opens in several seconds.
The following window opens in several minutes (five to 30
minutes).
RI000026.EPS
u NOTE u
Although a message saying that Image Database does not exist.
RI0000468.AI
RI000032.EPS
5. Press <Enter>.
RI0000469.AI
RI000027.EPS 7. Press <Enter>.

u NOTE u
Although a message saying that Patient Database does not exist.
RI000028.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
8. Press the <Enter> key. NOTES

u NOTE u For software version V7.0(B) or later, perform all the steps from
10 through 17.
When the software version used is V2.0 (B) or later, the two windows For software version V6.0(B) or earlier, it is not necessary to
like those shown below open. Press the <Enter> key and ensure perform steps 10 through 13. Proceed to step 14.
that installation processing has ended. Proceed then to step 9.

For Windows 2000/XP
Select Run... from the menu and click .
RI000227.EPS
For Windows Vista/7
Select All Programs - Accessories - Run... from the
menu and click .
RI000105.EPS
Installation processing completes showing then the

IIP - InstallShield Wizard / InstallShield Wizard Completed
window.
00000181.EPS
9. Click .
The system then returns to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
11. Select the SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat file that is located 13. Press the <Enter> key.
in the directory below on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2 when
V7.1(B) or later is used), and then click . 14. To use the Synapse servers Web Query function, perform
D:\Tools\StudyAutoDelete\SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat the procedure below.
NOTE NOTES
Specify the media drive name for the underlined section. When the CL-AP was installed after the Synapse Client software
had been installed, skip steps I. and II. below.
Skip steps I. and II. below when installing the CL-AP of V8.0(B) or
later.
I. When the Synapse Client software is installed, uninstall it.

Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the
Software
RI0000489.ai
The DiskUsageLimitSize Setting Tool window opens. II. Install the Synapse Client software.
CL + Synapse Server (Web Query) in OE19: Connecting
the CL to Other Equipment
15. To use the standard markers (applicable only in Japan),

perform the procedure below.
For how to install the standard markers (applicable only in
Japan), see Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only
RI0000490.ai
in Japan] under FR17: Function-specific Reference.
12. When Windows XP is used for the OS, enter 1 and press 2 16. To install the FSTD2009 Parameters, perform the procedure
below.
when Windows Vista or Windows 7 is used for the OS. Press
3 when a RAID-based PC is used for the CL. Press then For how to install the FSTD2009 Parameters, see
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database under RI: Reinstalling
the <Enter> key to determine the entry. the Software.
NOTE
For software version V7.0(B), the 2) Set DiskUsageLimitSize for
17. When the PDI option is already installed, change the version
of the Application Used to Create This Disk (included in
60GB option does not appear.
the README.TXT file stored on the CD-R) in accordance
with the version of CL-AP.
(e.g.: With V8.3, chage to V8.03.0000.)
For how to edit the README.TXT file, see 2.7 Editing the
Institution Information in CL+PDI (Portable Data for
Imaging) under OE22: Connecting the CL to Other
RI0000476.ai Equipment.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Installing the Built_in Console software When the installation procedure ends, a message appears to
indicate the completion of installation.
1. From the IIP Setup Tool menu, type in 4 and then press
the <Enter> key.
RI000029.EPS
4. Click .
A dialog box opens, prompting you to restart the PC.
6. Click .
RI000097.EPS
The Built_in Console Setup window opens.
2. Click .
RI000030.EPS
The PC restarts.
3. Click .
RI000031.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Installing FRIS Modules 4. Click .
1. Start IIP Setup Tool and then choose 10) Install FRIS The following warning window opens:
Modules.
The [Risiip Setup] window opens.
RI000045.EPS
RI000042.EPS
5. Click .

2. Click .
A window opens, prompting you to start the installation.
RI000046.EPS
6. Click
RI000043.EPS
.
3. Click .
The [Risiip - Choose Program Group] window opens.
RI000047.EPS
RI000044.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7. Click .
RI000048.EPS
8. Click .
9. If the Version Conflict window opens again, click

.
If the same window still opens again, click repeatedly

until a message appears to indicate the installation is completed.
10. Click on the window that opens at step 9.

above.
RI000049.EPS
The installation process for the FRIS Modules is thus completed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Installing the new PEI board driver Upgrading the POCKET id Console-AP
The new PEI board driver is automatically installed after the PC is The POCKET id Console-AP can be upgraded by uninstalling the
restarted. POCKET id Console-AP and then installing it again.
1. The CL-AP starts up in about two minutes after a PC restart. 1. Uninstall the POCKET id Console-AP.
While the CL-AP startup process in progress, verify that the For the procedure for uninstalling the POCKET id Console-
new PEI board driver is installed (the following window AP, see 10. POCKET id Console-AP in Appendix A
Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
opens and remain displayed for several seconds during the
startup process). 2. Install the POCKET id Console-AP.
For the procedure for installing the POCKET id Console-AP,
see 2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console
Application under OE18: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
Adding a Mammo QC menu

RI000025.EPS When the software version was upgraded to V5.0(B) or V7.1(B) or later,
use the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to add a Mammo QC menu properly to a
2. Deliver a film output signal to the LP and verify that the LP device where the Mammo QC menus are to be used.
generates a proper film output. NOTE
If the LP does not generate a film output, see 3.2 Typical To newly apply the Mammo QC function based on the existing menus
Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) after the software version was upgraded to V7.1(B) or later, add the
Printout Generation Failure under MT: Machine Mammo QC menus with the use of the V7.0(B) CL-AP CD and then
Troubleshooting.
follow the steps below.
Setting dummy nodes 1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.

If no nodes have been set up for Setup Configuration Item The IIP Setup Tool main menu opens automatically.
NETWORK CONFIG THIS HOST(IIP) in the Service Utility mode, NOTE
the DICOM Print SCU needs to be set up as the dummy node.
It is not necessary to install the DICOM Print option key.
For the setup procedure, see 2.1.4 Setup of Information on This
Equipment for the DICOM Print Function under OE5: Connecting
the CL to Other Equipment.
RI0000429.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Type in 7 and press the <Enter> key. 4. Input the item number of a language you want to install and
A window like that shown below opens. press the <Enter> key.
u NOTE u
A dialog box like that shown below may appear. In such cases,
click [OK] to proceed to the subsequent step.
00000301.EPS
3. To use DICOM MG Storage (digital mammography option),

RI0000475.ai
type in 2 and 1 for other cases. Press then the <Enter> Scrolling up on the installation main menu, appearing after the
key. above dialog box was closed, will display the Installation Failed.
message. This poses no problem and you can proceed to the next
The menu of languages that can be installed appears. step.
A window opens prompting you to select whether or not to use the

FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameter.
u NOTE u
When new Mammo QC menus are to be added from V7.1(B) or
later at an institution where the FSTD2009 Parameters were
adopted, installation processing completes without displaying the
FNC parameter selection window. (FNC parameter installation
processing is not performed.)
RI0000427.EPS
u NOTE u
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
When English (U.S.) was selected for the language to be installed Setting up a 16bitLUT file
A 10bitLUT file became now unavailable with software version V5.0 (B)
or later. For this reason, you have to set up a 16bitLUT file using either
of the following procedures.
RI0000386.EPS When using a file to be installed with V5.0 (B) or later

Newly installing V5.0 (B) or later or upgrading a previous version to
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected V5.0 (B) or later will cause the following files to be installed on the CL.
Folder location : C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut folder
Files : mono_PL300_LL_16.lut (for 300 candelas of
maximum monitor luminace)
mono_PL400_LL_16.lut (for 400 candelas of
maximum monitor luminace
Rename the installed files as follows.
Filename : SCP AE name + .lut
RI0000384.EPS
When converting a previously used LUT file to a 16bit file

5. Input the item number for an FNC parameter you want to To convert a previously used 10bitLUT file to a 16bitLUT file, use the
use and press the <Enter> key. LUT bit conversion tool.
The system returns then to the IIP Setup Tool main menu. This For details of the LUT bit conversion tool, see 1. LUT Bit
completes addition of a Mammo QC exposure menu. Conversion Tool in Display Gradation Correction Setup under
FR5: Function-specific Reference.
When a reverse-conversion LUT is used for the DICOM

Query/Retrieve function
With software version V7.0 (B) or later, the previously used 10bitLUT
file cannot be used for ReverseLUT. For this reason, use CreateLUT.
exe to create a 16bitLUT file so that it is set up for ReverseLUT.
For details of creation of a 16bitLUT file, see Setup of LUT
Reverse-conversion Processing under FR14: Function-specific
Reference.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Uninstalling the linking application Installing the linking application

u NOTE u Perform version upgrade installation processing for the targeted linking
application.
When the Precise Enlargement application software has been
installed with the V7.1(B) CL-AP, make sure to upgrade the software Precise Enlargement application software
version as follows. For details of the installation procedure, see Precise Enlargement
Precise Enlargement application software: From V1.0 to V2.1 Function under OE24: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
Uninstall the linking application only when reinstalling or upgrading this
application software. No support is provided to only uninstallation of
any linking application.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 14. Precise

Enlargement Software in Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Resetting the USB device (BCR)
When upgrading the CL from V8.0(B) or before to V8.1(B) or later, the
driver settings for the barcode reader needs to be configured again.
For the detailed resetting porocedures,
see 4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader
Driver Software under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
Appendix E Setup for Security Replacing the default password with a new password
Enhancement 1. Simultaneously press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and [Delete] keys.
To provide CL security enhancement, complete the following three Windows security
setup procedures. Microsoft
Replacing the default password with a new password
Changing the setup so that the computer prompts for password input
Windows 2000
at logon Professional
Defining the minimum character count for the password Logon Information
You are logged on as xxxxx\xxxxxxxx.
Logon Date: xx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx
1. For Windows 2000/XP Use the Task Manager to close an application that is not responding.
Lock Computer Log Off... Shut Down

NOTE
Change Password... Task Manager Cancel
as those displayed by Windows XP. RI000078.EPS
Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow the procedure specific to the
used OS to perform necessary settings. 2. Click the [Change Password...] button.
Settings performed for password change and prompt for password The Change Password window opens.
input at login will not start up the CL automatically. To have it start up
automatically, it is necessary to input the user name and the password
on the Windows initial screen.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI E-1
3. From the Change Password window, perform the following Changing the setup so that the computer prompts for
setup steps. password input at logon
Change Password
Microsoft
Windows 2000 For Windows 2000

Professional Click , point to Settings, and then click Control
Panel.
User name: Administrator
Log on to: clxxxxxxxx

I
Old Password: For Windows XP
II
New Password:
III Select from the menu.
Confirm New Password:
OK Cancel
RI000079.EPS
I. Enter the currently used password (fcr-iip by default).

2. Double-click .
II. Enter a new password consisting of no more than seven
characters. The Users and Passwords window opens.
III. Enter the new password again for confirmation.
3. Check Users must enter a user name and password to use
4. Click . this computer. ( ).
A window opens for password change confirmation.
5. Click .
You are then returned to the Windows Security window.
6. Click .
RI000080.EPS
4. Click .
The system then returns to the Control Panel.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Defining the minimum character count for the password 4. Set the number of password characters to 7.
1. Open Control Panel.
Double-click and then .
The Local Security Settings window opens.
RI000082.EPS
5. Click .
RI000081.EPS You are then returned to the Local Security Settings window.
2. Click the mark for and then click 6. Close the Local Security Settings window.
.
The right-hand pane shows the password policy settings.
3. Double-click .
The Local Security Policy Setting window opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2. For Windows Vista/7 3. From the Change Password window that opens, perform
the following setup steps.
NOTE
Windows Vista screens are used herein, whose contents are the same
as those displayed by Windows 7.
Windows Vista and Windows 7, follow the procedure specific to the I
used OS to perform necessary settings. II
Settings performed for password change and prompt for password III
input at login will not start up the CL automatically. To have it start up
automatically, it is necessary to input the user name and the password
on the Windows initial screen. DCL8A005.ai
I. Enter the currently used password (fcr-iip by default).

II. Enter a new password consisting of no more than seven
Replacing the default password with a new password characters.
III. Enter the new password again for confirmation.
1. Simultaneously press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and [Delete] keys.
2. Click the [Change Password...] button.

4. Click .
Your password has been changed. is displayed.
5. Click [OK].
DCL8A008.ai
The Change Password window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Prompting the user for password input at logon
1. Select All Programs Accessories Run... from the

menu.
2. Input control userpasswords2 and click .
RI0000505.ai
3. Checkmark User must enter a user name and password to

use this computer. ( )
DCL8A007.ai
4. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Limiting the length of input password to be more than a 4. Set the number of characters used for password input to 7.
certain number of characters
1. Sequentially double-click Control Panel, and
then .
The Local Security Policy window opens. DCL8A004.ai
5. Click .
The system returns to the Local Security Policy window.
6. Close the Local Security Policy window.
DCL8A003.ai
2. Click mark to the left of and then

.
Several setup items related to the password policy appear in the
right-hand side pane of the window.
3. Double-click .
The Minimum password length Properties window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver
Appendix F Installing the Video Installing the video driver

Board Driver 1. Insert the Matrox Millennium G450 CD-ROM into the CD-
ROM drive.
The installation steps for the Matrox Millennium G450 video board driver
(hereinafter abbreviated to the G450 video driver) are described below:
2. Double-click , , , and in
Connecting the jig monitor
order named.
The setup program starts running.
Installing the video driver
3. Select a language and then click .
Setting the resolution
u NOTES u
The G450 video driver can be installed only when the PC for the

employed CR CL MA (mammography CL) accepts the G450 video
board.

as those displayed by Windows XP.
Connecting the jig monitor RI000085.EPS
Since the Ikegami MDM2130 monitor does not support the VGA mode, A window opens to display the information about a supported
no screen indication can be obtained during video driver installation. device.
Therefore, the multiscan VGA monitor (having a display resolution of
1600 1200 or 1280 1024 and a refresh frequency provided by a
horizontal frequency of 75 Hz and a vertical frequency of 93 kHz) is
furnished as a jig. Connect this jig to the video board connector to which
the Ikegami monitor is currently connected.
RI000093.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI F-1
4. Click twice. Setting the resolution

The installation process starts.
Upon completion of installation, a window opens to indicate the
1. Right-click the desktop. When the right-clicked menu
opens, choose Properties.
end of installation.
2. Choose the Settings tab and then click .
RI000094.EPS
5. Click .
A window opens, prompting you to restart the PC.
6. Remove the video board driver CD-ROM from the CD-ROM

drive.
7. Click .
The PC restarts.
When the PC is restarted, the Log On to Windows window
opens.
8. Enter fcr-iip in the password field and then click

.
u NOTE u
The User name field reads Administrator by default. Leave this
user name entry unchanged because you have to log onto
Windows 2000 as Administrator.
The desktop screen opens. RI000095.EPS
The Matrox G450 monitor setup window (main window) opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
3. Choose the Monitor Settings tab and then click . 7. Click .

You are then returned to the previous window.
8. Click .
The Matrox Monitor Wizard - Save Changes window opens.
9. Turn ON the radio button ( ),

and then click .
RI000087.EPS
The Matrox Monitor Wizard - Monitor List window opens.

4. Click the mark for . RI000096.EPS
5. Choose and then click . You are then returned to the main window.
6. Choose 1600 1200 32-bit 75 Hz and then click 10. Click .

. You are then returned to the Display Properties window.
RI000089.EPS
The Matrox Power Desk window opens.

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
11. Perform the following monitor setup steps and then click 15. If the Ikegami monitor is not connected, disconnect the jig
monitor and then connect the Ikegami monitor.
.
16. If the screen area setting is not 1600 1200, open the
Display Properties window and change the setting to
1600 1200.

u NOTE u
If a screen area setting of 1280 1024 pixels is selected in an
(Colors: True Color (32-bit)) earlier step in accordance with the jig monitor specifications, be
sure to change the setting to 1600 1200 pixels after Ikegami
monitor connection.
The Ikegami monitor is capable of displaying 1280 1024 pixels;
however, it is presumed that the application software displays
1600 1200 pixels.
(Screen area: 1280 1024 or 1600 1200 pixels)
u NOTE u
As the screen area, choose either 1280 1024 pixels or
1600 1200 pixels depending on the maximum resolution of the jig
monitor. If the screen area setting exceeds the maximum resolution
of the jig monitor, the jig monitor displays nothing. If such a
situation occurs, disconnect the jig monitor and connect a monitor
that supports the selected screen area setting.
You are returned to the Display Properties window.
12. Click .
The Monitor Settings window opens.
13. Click .
You are returned to the Display Properties window.
14. Click .
You are then returned to the desktop screen.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Appendix G Reinstalling the

Software (NEC PC)
1. Installation Flow
Described herein are the procedures used to install the CL-AP from the
OS. When doing so, observe the installation flow shown at the right.
NOTE
XG-1 RU : XG-1 RU
356 : CR-IR 356
357 : CR-IR 357
359 : CR-IR 359
362 : CR-IR 362
363 : CR-IR 363
364 : CR-IR 364
366 : CR-IR 366
367 : CR-IR 367
368 : CR-IR 368
370 : CR-IR 370
371 : CR-IR 371
372 : CR-IR 372
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI G-1
Installation flow 18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference] Only when remote maintenance
mode is used.
CL-Config and RU-Config(*1) backup See Chapter 5 under
MU: Maintenance 19. IIS Network Virus Protection
Utility.
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS 20. Settings Necessary for Installation of
3. Setting Up the Monitor
21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size
4. Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database *1 For the 5000 plus series and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X, see the individual
Service Manual to save Config backup.
6. Installing the Screen Saver For details of the RU master IIP, see 6. RU-CL N:N Connection
Function Overview under MD: Machine Description.
7. Installing the CL Components
8. Installing the Standard Key
9. ****BLANK**** When multiple XG-1 RUs or

5000plus or 356/357/359/36X/
37X are connected.
10. Installing the Option Key
11. Installing the AP Key and Setting the

User Interface
13. Optimizing the Screen Display (Setting

the LUT file)
15. Creating the FTP Server

For RU-CL 1:1 connection:
Essential
16. CR-IR346RU Settings
For RU-CL N:N connection:
Only for RU master IIP
17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS The Windows XP installation procedure is explained as follows.
Install the OS in the following cases:

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 When the HDD is replaced.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 When an error occurs with the OS.
NOTES Have the following ready for use when installing the OS.
NEC Recovery CD-ROM (WinXP Professional Reinstalling DISK#1#3
Before installing the OS, jot down the CL host name, IP address, (3 CDs) included in the PC package)
subnet mask, and other relevant information. These items of
information will be called for during OS installation. IMPORTANT
The 5000 plus is abbreviated hereinafter simply IR.
Before formatting the HDD, make backup copies of image data, if
u Property sheet there are any, as required by the user.
OS installation drive C:\ Make backup copies of the config data (CL-Config and RU-Config)
C drive only (no other partitions will that store various settings of the CL and RU, ahead of time.
Partition/format User the User Utility function to make backup copies of user setting
be created)/NTFS
Name FUJIFILM Corporation information (by placing checkmarks to all items).
Regional settings
Organization FUJIFILM Corporation
Indicated on the right-hand side of
Product key
the PC main unit cover. Removing the board and peripheral devices
The default settings when shipped
from factory. 1. Remove the PEI or PSI board from the PCI slots, if it is
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX mounted.
Computer name Computer name CR-IR346CL (Lite) : CRXXXXXXXX
For the board removal procedure, see Appendix C Removing/
and password CR-IR348CL (Plus) : CPXXXXXXXX
Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI).
(XXXXXXXX: Manufacture No.)
*Take notes accordingly if changed.
Password fcr-iip 2. Remove all peripheral devices, such as Barcode Reader,
Protocol used TCP/IP Magnetic Card Reader and others, from the USB port.
IP address factory. NOTES
*Take notes accordingly if changed.
255.255.0.0 when shipped from If OS installation processing is performed with the PEI or PSI board
Network settings left mounted on the PCI slots, use the Device Manager to delete the
Subnet mask factory.
*Take notes accordingly if changed. Other Devices file after the OS has been installed accordingly.
Used by the workgroup. Checking the PEI01 board device driver in 3.2 Typical
Domain or
(The group name remains the Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer)
workgroup
default.) Printout Generation Failure under MT: Machine
This computers Automatically logged Troubleshooting
Administrator
user settings (auto on user name
logon settings) Password fcr-iip If OS installation processing is performed with the peripheral devices
Display color True Color (24 or 32bits) left connected to the USB port, a different driver will be installed, same
Display area 1024768 (15inch LCD/17inch CRT) as the case with the PEI or PSI board.
Monitor settings
MS-IME setting
The toolbar is stored in the taskbar.
(Japanese version only)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Installing the OS 8. Make sure that Yes has been selected and press the
<Enter> key.
1. Turn the monitor and PC power switch ON.
The PC restarts. DISK#1 installation processing will then start and
The PC will start running. a window like that shown below will open after about five minutes.
2. When F2 SETUP appears at the upper left corner of the Span Volume [1] Done
window, press the <F2> key. Insert next media and press enter to continue...
NOTE
The setup window will not open unless the <F2> key is pressed
with the timeliness. OK Cancel FileName?
In such an instance, restart the PC to repeat step 2.
RI000234.EPS
The setup window (PhenixBIOS Setup Utility) opens.

9. Insert Recovery CD DISK#2 into the CD-ROM drive and
3. Select the Boot tab. press the <Enter> key.
DISK#2 installation processing will then start and a window like
4. Move CD-ROM Drive to the top. that shown below will open after about five minutes.
CD-ROM Drive Span Volume [2] Done

+Removable Devices Insert next media and press enter to continue...
+Hard Drive
IBA 4.1.06 Slot 0200
OK Cancel FileName?
RI000231.EPS
RI000235.EPS
5. Insert the Recovery CD DISK#1 into the CD-ROM drive.
6. Press the <Esc> key. 10. Insert Recovery CD DISK#3 into the CD-ROM drive and
The Exit menu will open.
DISK#3 installation processing will then start and a window like
7. Check to see that Exit Saving Changes has been selected that shown below will open after about two minutes.
The Setup Confirmation window opens. finish to load MCF.GHO .
D:\>
Setup Confirmation
RI000236.EPS
Save configuration changes and exit now?
[Yes] [No]
11. Remove Recovery CD DISK#3 and turn the PC power switch
OFF.
RI000232.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
12. Turn then the PC power switch ON. Uninstalling the launcher
The Windows XP Professional Setup window will open.
1. Click at the upper right corner of the desktop.
13. Select I accept this agreement ( ) and click
.
The Launcher Maintenance Screen window opens.
OS installation processing will finish, starting then Windows XP.
RI000237.EPS
2. Click .
An uninstallation confirmation window opens.
RI000238.EPS
3. Click .
Launcher uninstallation processing will finish and the system then

returns to the desktop.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Setting the computer name 5. Enter a computer name (host name).

2. Click .
3. Double-click .
The System Proterties window opens. RI000242.EPS
Default settings are as follows.

4. Click the Computer Name tab and then . CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX
(CL is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the
product number.)
(CR is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the
product number.)
(CP is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the
product number.)
6. Click .
7. Click .
RI000249.EPS
The Computer Name Changes window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Setting the IP address 6. Select ( ) and perform the

following settings.
2. Double-click .
The Network Connections window opens.
I
3. Double-click . II

RI000243.EPS
4. Click . I. Enter an IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.20).

II. Enter a subnet mask (e.g.: 255.255.0.0).
7. Click .
5. Select , and click .
8. Click .
9. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Setting the network speed Setting the date and time
1. Select Control Panel from the menu. 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
2. Click .
2. Double-click .
The Date and Time Properties window opens.

The Intel PROSet window opens.
3. Confirm the date and time.
3. Click the Speed tab and select
Confirm the date.
( ).
NOTE
The CR-IR346RU (XG-1 RU) supports only 100Mbps half duplex.
Be sure to 100Mbps half duplex.
Confirm the time. RI000244.EPS
4. Select the Time Zone tab and confirm the time zone.
RI000239.EPS
4. Click .
The system returns to the Control Panel. Confirm the time zone.
RI000245.EPS

The system returns to the desktop. 5. Click to close the Control Panel.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Avoiding a password input prompt when exiting from 5. Uncheck

the suspend mode ( ).
following procedure as required.

RI000250.EPS
2. Double-click .
6. Click .
The Power Option Properties window opens. The system returns to the Control Panel.
3. Set System Standby to Never. 7. Close the Control Panel.

RI000246.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Determining a character to be used as a decimal point 4. Confirm the following settings.

Specify . (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point. I. Click the Numbers tab and then select . (period) for the
If anything other than a period is specified for that, an error occurs when Decimal symbol field.
you select an image distribution destination with the QA operation. If, as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected
for the Digit grouping symbol field and Decimal symbol field,
change the symbol for the Digit grouping symbol field.
1. Select Control Panel from the menu. II. Check that the value is set to 0.7 for the Display leading zeros
field.
2. Double-click .
3. Make sure that the Regional Options tab has been

selected and click . I.
II.
RI000247.EPS RI000248.EPS
5. Click .

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Settings for automatic synchronization (to be made on 3. Make the following settings.
RAID PC only)
Settings may be made so that synchronization is automatically
I
performed on a regular basis.
II
1. From the menu, select Promise Array

RI000397.EPS
Management and then Local PAM.
I. Enter administrator.
The Promise Array Management window opens.
II. Enter fcr-iip.
4. Click .
You are logged in to Promise Array Management.
5. Drag the scroll bar on the right side of the window down to
the bottom.
RI000395.EPS
2. Right-click CLXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXX represents a

product number), and select Login.
RI000396.EPS
The login dialog opens.
RI000398.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
6. Make the following settings. Performing synchronization (on RAID PC only)

I II III When you have reinstalled the OS, it is necessary to perform
synchronization manually for the first time only.
1. On the menu tree, double-click CRXXXXXXXX -

FASTTRAK - Controller in this order, and then select
Ary1.
RI000399.EPS
I. Checkmark Enabled.
II. Set the time at which automatic synchronization should take
place, according to the demand of the hospital.
III. If you have changed the set time at which automatic
synchronization is to be performed from the default value to
some other value, click Change.
RI000400.EPS
2. Click the [Start] button under Synchronization.
RI000401.EPS
A confirmation dialog opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Click .
Synchronization starts.
REFERENCES
During the synchronization process, the progress status of
synchronization is displayed on the tree menu.
RI000402.EPS
If the PC shuts down while synchronization is in progress, the

synchronization will resume once the PC has restarted.
A synchronization process will take 1 to 2 hours if the PC is not being
used, and 5 to 6 hours if the PC is in use.
4. When the synchronization process completes, click to

close the Promise Array Management window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Setting Up the Monitor 7. Installing the CL Components

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For details of monitor settings, see 3. Setting Up the Monitor For how to install various CL components, see 7. Installing the
under RI: Reinstalling the Software. CL Components under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
4. Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack 8. Installing the Standard Key
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For how to install MSDE and its Service Pack, see 4. Installing For how to install Standard Key, see 8. Installing the Standard
MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack under Key under RI:Reinstalling the Software.
9. ****BLANK****
5. Installing the CL-AP
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 10. Installing the Option Key
5.1 Installing the CL-AP XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For the CL-AP installation procedure, see 5.1 Installing the
CL-AP under RI: Reinstalling the Software. For the Option Key installation procedure, see 10. Option Key
Installation under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
For how to replace the menu database, see 5.2 Replacing the 11. Installing the AP Key and Setting the
Menu Database under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
User Interface
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
6. Installing the Screen Saver 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For details of AP Key installation and user interface settings, see

11. AP Key Installation under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
12. Initializing the Image Database 15. Creating the FTP Server
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For initialization of the image database, see 12. Initializing the

Perform the following procedure to prepare on the CLs HDD the FTP
Image Database under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
server to be viewed by the XG-1 RU and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
The FTP server can be created by installing the IIS Manager.
13. Optimizing the Screen Display (Setting u NOTE u

the LUT file) For RU-CL N:N connection (when two or more CLs are connected),
perform necessary settings here only for the CL that will serve as the
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 RU Master IIP.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For optimization of the screen display (setting the LUT file), see
13. Display Optimization (LUT file setting) under
REFERENCE
RI: Reinstalling the Software. The IIS Manager is a program used for creating an FTP server and
comes with the OS (Window XP).

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 The Control Panel opens.
For how to restore the CL-Config, see 14. Restoring the

CL-Config under RI: Restoring the Software.
2. Double-click .
The Add or Remove Program window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Click Add/Remove Windows Components. 7. Click .

The screen returns to the Control Panel.

RI000240.EPS
The Windows Components Wizard window opens.
RI000241 .EPS
4. Check ( ) and click

.
The Internet Information Service (IIS) window opens.
5. Check ( ) and click

.
The system returns to the Windows Components Wizard window.
6. Click .
IIS Manager installation processing will start.
After a few minutes, a message appears to indicate that
installation processing has been completed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
16. CR-IR346RU Settings 20. Settings Necessary for Installation of

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
For CR-IR346RU settings, see 16. CR-IR346RU Settings under 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For details of settings necessary for installation of Windows XP
Service Pack2, see 20. Settings Necessary for Installation of
Windows XP Service Pack2 under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For how to set up the virtual memory size, see 21. Checking the
For CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X settings, see 17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Virtual Memory Size under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
Settings under RI: Reinstalling the Software.

For how to set up the event log, see 22. Setting the Event Log
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For details of NetMeeting, see 18. Setting Up NetMeeting

[Reference] under RI: Reinstalling the Software.

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
For details of IIS network virus protection, see 19. IIS Network
Virus Protection under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1 Service pack installation

1. Insert the V3.1 CD into the PC.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 The Main/Option Menu window opens.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
NOTE
Install CL-AP software version V3SP1 (hereinafter referred to as V3.1)
as a service pack for version V3.0.
Installing V3.1 will make it possible for you to use on the CL additional
functions, such as supports provided to Portuguese, GPR processing in
RU 1:1 configuration and others.
Described herein is the V3.1 installation procedure.
Preparations for installation (exiting the CL-AP)

21000001.EPS
Prior to installing V3.1, exit the CL-AP by following the steps below.
2. Type in 1 and press the <Enter> key.
1. Turn ON the power to the PC.
After completion of installation, the system returns to the Main/
Windows will be up and running. The CL-AP will also be up and Option Menu window.
running in about one minute, and the CLs initial window opens.
3. To install various functions offered by V3.1, see
2. After the CLs initial window has opened, check that no Installation of functions described on the next page.
study is left in WL, QA and Queue tabs. If there is any study To quit, type in 0 and press the <Enter> key.
remaining unprocessed, perform the following.
Finish or delete a study in the Local WL tab.
Finish a study in the QA tab.
Output or delete a study in the Queue tab. 4. Remove the CD from the PC.
3. When the exit window opens at the click of ,

click while holding down the <Shift> key.
The CL-AP exits and the system returns to the desktop.
REFERENCE
If you click [OK] without holding down the <Shift> key, both the
CL-AP and Windows exit.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI H-1
Installation of functions 4. Type in a number for the Imager Reader to be used and
For functions such as support provided to Portuguese, install only
necessary functions to suit installation sites, after V3.1 has been The Select Image Processing Parameter Type window opens.
installed accordingly.
For installation of environment settings for Portuguese

1. Type in 10 on the Main/Option Menu window and click the
<Enter> key. 21000005.EPS
The Menu Database Installation Menu (Select Variation) window

opens. 5. When FNC parameters (for optionally available Flexible
Noise Control processing) are not to be used, type in 1,
and 2 when they are to be used. Press then the <Enter>
key.
After completion of installation, the system returns to the Main/
21000002.EPS Option Menu window.
2. Type in 1 and press the <Enter> key. When using the Toshiba RIS connection function (applicable
The Menu Database Installation Menu (Select Locale) window only in Japan)
opens.
For details of the Toshiba RIS connection function, see
OE21 CL+T-RIS (Ordering) under OE: Connecting the CL to
Other Equipment.
21000003.EPS
When using the function to display information specific to
veterinary clinics (applicable only in Japan)
NOTE
The Image Reader Type Menu window opens.
Whenever an optionally available function has been installed as above,
restart your PC.
21000004.EPS
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
Verification necessary after completion of installation

processing
After completion of installation processing, perform the following
procedure to make sure that CL-AP V3.1 has been installed
appropriately.
Select Programs from the Start menu to make sure that the CL
version is V3.1.
Restart your PC to make sure that the software version displayed at
the lower right corner of the CLs initial window is V3.1.
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
Appendix I RAID-related Settings 5. Select RAID On and press the <Enter> key.
ystem
rives SATA Operation
1. Setting to Enable the RAID Mode skette Drive
rive 0 SATA-0
rive 1 SATA-1 RAID Autodetect / AHCI RAID Autodetect / ATA RAID On Combination
1. Turn ON the monitor display and the PC. rive 2 SATA-2

rive 3 SATA-3
rive 4 SATA-4
The PC starts up. rive 5 SATA-5
ATA Operation
2. When the F2 SETUP indication appears in the upper-right RI0000405.EPS
corner of the window, press the <F2> key.

NOTE 6. Press the <ESC> key.
If the <F2> key is pressed too late, the setup window fails to open.
In such a case, restart the PC and perform step 2 again.
7. Select Save/Exit and press the <Enter> key.
The setup window opens. Exit
3. Select Drives and press the <Enter> key. Remain in Setup Save/Exit Discard/Exit
System
RI0000406.EPS
Drives
Onboard Devices The PC restarts.
Video
Performance
RI0000403.EPS
4. Select SATA Operation and press the <Enter> key.
System
Drives
Diskette Drive
Drive 0 SATA-0
Drive 1 SATA-1
Drive 2 SATA-2
Drive 3 SATA-3
Drive 4 SATA-4
Drive 5 SATA-5
SATA Operation
SMART Beporting
RI0000404.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI I-1
2. Creating a RAID Level-1 Configuration 4. Select RAID1 (Mirror) and press the <Enter> key.
[ CREATE VOLUME MENU ]

1. When the following message appears, press the <Ctrl> + <I>
key combination. Name: RAID_Volume0
RAID Level: RAID1(Mirror)
Disks: Select Disks
Press <CTRL-I> to enter Configuration Utility... Strip Size: N/A
Capacity: 149.0 GB
RI0000407.EPS
Create Volume
2. Select Create RAID Volume and press the <Enter> key. RI0000410.EPS
[ MAIN MENU ]
5. Make sure that the capacity is set to the default value
1. Create RAID Volume (maximum allowable size), and press the <Enter> key.
2. Delete RAID Volume
3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID [ CREATE VOLUME MENU ]
4. Exit Name: RAID_Volume0
RI0000408.EPS
Disks: Select Disks
Strip Size: N/A
3. Make sure that RAID_Volume0 is being selected, and Capacity: 149.0 GB
Create Volume
[ CREATE VOLUME MENU ]
RI0000411.EPS
Name: RAID_Volume0
RAID Level: RAID0(Stripe)
Disks: Select Disks 6. Make sure that Create Volume is selected, and press the
<Enter> key.
Strip Size: 128KB
Capacity: 298.0 GB [ CREATE VOLUME MENU ]
Create Volume Name: RAID_Volume0

RI0000409.EPS
Disks: Select Disks
Strip Size: N/A
Capacity: 149.0 GB
Create Volume
RI0000412.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
7. When the following message appears, press the <Y> key.
WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST.
Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N) ;
RI0000413.EPS
8. Select Exit and press the <Enter> key.
[ MAIN MENU ]
1. Create RAID Volume

2. Delete RAID Volume
3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID
4. Exit
RI0000426.EPS
9. When the following message appears, press the <Y> key.

[ CONFIRM EXIT ]
Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N) ;
RI0000414.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
3. Creating an Intel SATA Driver FD and 5. When the following window opens, enter 2.
Installing the RAID Driver Microsoft Windows 98 CD-ROM Startup Menu
CAUTION
1. Boot from Main Disk
If the reinstallation CD that came with the PC contains Windows 2. Boot from CD-ROM
XPSP1 or earlier, create an FD of SATA driver and perform
installation of the RAD driver by following the procedure below.
Enter your choice: _
1.
RI0000419.EPS
Insert the Dell Resource CD that came with the PC into the
PC.
6. Enter 5.
2. Restart the PC.
Dell Precision Workstation Resource CD
3. When F12=Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of Please select an option from the list below.
the window, press the <F12> key.
NOTE 1.) Run MIC Diagnostics/Configuration

If the <F12> key is pressed too late, the setup window fails to open. 2.) Run Dell Diagnostics
In such a case, restart the PC and perform step 3 again. 3.) Go to Video Diagnostics Menu
4.) Run SCSI Mard Drive Diagnostics
The setup window opens. 5.) Copy Hard Drive Controller Drivers to Diskette
6.) Exit to DOS
4. Select * Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive and press the RI0000416.EPS
<Enter> key.
Boot Device Menu
* Onboard or USB Floppy Drive

* Intel RAID_Volume0
* Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive
* System Setup
* Hard Drive Diagnostics
* Boot to Utility Partition
Please Up/Down arrows to highlight desired item.

Please Enter to select highlighted item.
RI0000415.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7. Make sure of the PC model name, interface type (SATA), and 9. When the following message appears, press the <N> key.
driver type (RAID), and select the driver number of the
appropriate machine model.
The Driver Files have been Copied.
REFERENCE Do you need to copy another driver to Diskette ?
Y/N
The following screen shows an example where the drive for the
Precision 370 is selected.
RI0000420.EPS
Model name : Precision 370
Interface : SATA
Driver type : RAID 10. When the following message appears, remove the FD from
the FDD, and affix a label bearing the title Intel SATA
Drivers to the disk.
Please Select the Drive you wish to transfer to Floppy.
* Latest drivers can be downloaded at Dell .com * You can now reboot to your Operatiog System CD to start the install.
*Don't forget to hit F6, when the system is inspecting your computer
1.) Precision 670/470/370 Adaptec U320 SCSI RAID onboard or add-in controller Conf iguration if you need to install SCSI or Raid drivers*
drivers for Windows XP and 2000 C:\>
2.) Precision 670/470 Adaptec SATA HostRAID controller Drivers for Windows XP RI0000421.EPS
and Windows 2000
3.) Precision 370 SATA AHCI/RAID storage drivers for Windows XP and 2000
4.) Precision 650/450 LSI Onboard SCSI or LSI Add in Controller drivers 11. Shut down the PC.
for Windows 2000
RI0000417.EPS
12. Turn ON the PC.
The PC starts up.
8. When the following message appears, insert an FD into the
FDD, and press the <Y> key.
Insert a floppy into the Floppy disk drive, and data on the Disk WILL BE ERASED.
.
Continue?
Y/N
RI0000418.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
13. When the following message appears, press the <F6> key. 15. When the following window opens, insert the FD labeled
Intel SATA Drivers into the FDD, and press the <Enter>
NOTE key.
The following message appears for 5 seconds on the screen after
the PC has been turned ON. Press the <F6> key immediately after Please insert the disk labeled
the screen turns blue.
Manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
Windows Setup into Drive A:

=============
* Press ENTER when ready.
RI0000424.EPS
16. Select Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller and press

the <Enter> key.
Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH6R)

Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver... Intel(R) 82801FR SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH6R)
RI0000422.EPS RI0000425.EPS
You will see no change on the screen immediately after the press
of the <F6> key. After a while as the setup process proceeds as 17. When the following window opens, remove the FD from the
usual, the Specify Additional Device window opens. FDD and press the <Enter> key.
14. When the following message appears, press the <S> key. Windows Setup
=============
Windows Setup
=============
S=Specify Additional Device ENTER=Continue F3=Exit

RI0000423.EPS
S=Specify Additional Device ENTER=Continue F3=Exit
The system returns to the setup window.
RI0000423.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
4. RAID Structure Confirmation 4. Check whether or not the [RAID Volumes] [Level] has
been set for the [RAID1(Mirror)] in the [DISK/VOLUME
(only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT) INFORMATION].
2. Press the <F2> key when logotype of DELL appears at the

NOTE
RI0000486.ai
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the Interl(R)
Matrix Storage Manager window will not open. In that case, restart
the PC to perform Step 2. again.
5. Check whether or not the [RAID Volumes] [Status] has
been set for the [Normal] in the [DISK/VOLUME
The Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager window opens. INFORMATION].
RI0000487.ai
NOTE
RI0000484.ai
If the Status is other than Normal, HDD may be defective, so
replace the HDD.
3. Press <Ctrl> + <I> immediately. For details about replacement procedure of HDD, see
NOTE 5. Replacement Procedure of Damaged RAID Configuration
HDD (only for Dell OptiPlex 960MT/780MT) below.
If the <Ctrl> + <I> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the main
menu window will not open. In that case, press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Delete> key and perform Step 2. and Step 3. again.
6. Press the <ESC> key.
The main menu window opens. A confirmation window opens.
RI0000488.ai
RI0000485.ai
7. Press the <Y> key.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. Replacement Procedure of Damaged 3. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of
RAID Configuration HDD (only for DELL the window.
OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Replacement procedure in case one of two RAID configuration HDDs is
damaged.
5.1 Confirmimg which HDD is damaged
1. Turn On the PC power.

MU000031.EPS
The following window opens, and startup process is suspended.

NOTE
When the following window is displayed, enter the login password
(fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click .
AWS301001.ai MU000035.EPS
2. Enter the <F1> key. The Service Utility starts. The IIP Service Utility window opens.
Windows starts up.
After about one minute, the CL-AP starts running. 4. Click [Exit Service Utility].
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. Select All Programs Intel Matrix Storage Manager 7. Confirm on the screen which of the HDDs is damaged.
Intel Matrix Storage Console from the menu.
AWS301002.ai
REFERENCE
AWS301008.ai
The HDD marked with under the RAID Hard Drives has

The Intel Matrix Storage Console window opens. some troubles.
6. Select Advanced Mode from the View menu.
AWS301007.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
5.2 Replacing HDD 5.3 Rebuilding RAID
1. Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power 1. Turn ON the PC power.
cable. Windows starts up.
After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
2. Open the cover of the PC main unit, and replace the
damaged HDD with a new HDD. 2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
NOTE sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of
the window.
For the new HDD, use the one with same capacity as the damaged
HDD. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
3. Close the cover of the PC main unit, and reconnect the

power cable.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility starts. The IIP Service Utility window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4. Select All Programs Intel Matrix Storage Manager 6. Click .

AWS301008.ai

The Intel Matrix Storage Console window opens. AWS301004.ai
The Select Hard Drive window opens.

5. Right-click the HDD under Non-RAID Hard Drives, and
then choose Rebuild to this Hard Drive.
7. Confirm that the newly added HDD is registered in the
Selected column, and then click .
AWS301003.ai
The Welcome to the Rebuild RAID Volume Wizard window

opens.
AWS301005.ai
The Completing the Rebuild RAID Volume Wizard window

opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
8. Click . 5.4 Verification
1. Select All Programs Intel Matrix Storage Manager

AWS301009.ai
AWS301008.ai
Rebuilding of RAID starts.

The Intel Matrix Storage Console window opens.
REFERENCE
In the Intel Matrix Storage Console window, selecting basic
2. Confirm that the RAID Hard Drive construction is working
properly.
mode from the View menu to change the display mode will
enable you to check the progress of RAID reconstruction.
AWS301010.ai
AWS301006.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
6. Setting the RAID Status Display Tool Enter D:\Tools\RAIDStatusDisplay\Setup.exe and

(Windows XP / Vista / 7 only ) click .
The Welcome to the IIPDispRaidStatus Setup Wizard window opens.
6.1 Installing the RAID Status Display Tool For Windows Vista/7
Click .
The start menu opens.
Enter D:\Tools\RAIDStatusDisplay\Setup.exe in
NOTE and press the <Enter> key.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, The Welcome to the IIPDispRaidStatus Setup Wizard window opens.
proceed to step 3.
4. Click .
The Select Installation Folder window opens.
FR0J0002.ai

The system exits IIP Setup Tool and returns to the desktop
screen.
3. Make the following settings. RI0000502.ai
For Windows XP
Select Run from the menu.
RI0I0001.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Click .
The Confirm Installation window opens.
RI0000503.ai
6. Click .
RI0000504.ai
7. Click .
9. Restart the PC.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6.2 Setting the operation of RAID Status Display Tool

Operation of the RAID status display tool are controlled by the values NOTE
of registry. Operation can be changed by changing the values of the If the monitor is changed to a smaller one, icons may not be displayed
registry. properly. In that case, directly delete HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\
SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus and restart the PC.
The registry value of icon display position is updated along with the
position where icon is dragged.
If the registry does not exist when the RAID status display tool is
started, system operates in the default setting.
Registry Key
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus
Value of Registry Key

The following items can be set.
Items Name of Value Default Contents
REG_DWORD Set up the icon display position coordinate (pixel coordinate on the upper left corner of icon area) of the RAID status
DisplayPositionX display tool.
Icon display position
REG_DWORD * If the setup value does not exist, the icon displays on the lower right corner of the 1st monitor and the position will be
DisplayPositionY recorded.
REG_DWORD IconWidth Set up the icon display size of the RAID status display tool. Specify the width and height by pixel.
Icon size 32
REG_DWORD IconHeight * The minimum setting value is 16. The value under 16 is recognized as 16.
Display/hide the text REG_DWORD DisplayText 1 Set up to display/hide the text with "0: Hide" and "1: Display".
REG_DWORD TextColorR Set up the font color for texts. Specify each of the RGB color space from 0 to 255.
Font color for texts REG_DWORD TextColorG 255 * Black (0, 0, 0) is used for transparent color so it cannot be specified.
REG_DWORD TextColorB * The font-related settings other than colors and sizes will be the same as for the system font.
Set up the font size (height of character cell) for texts by pixel.
Font size for texts REG_DWORD TextFontSize * If the setup value does not exist, the size of the system font is used. (The value will not be saved)
* The font-related settings other than colors and sizes will be the same as for the system font.
REG_SZ Module1 IAAnotif.exe [For internal processing]
Module name list
REG_SZ Module2 IAStorIcon.exe * Modules can be registered up to Module8.
C:\Program Files\Intel\ [For internal processing]
REG_SZ Gui1 Intel Matrix Storage * GUI can be registered up to Gui8.
Manager\Shell.exe * To prevent GUI for management (Matrix Storage Console) from starting up when the icon is clicked, create the registry
GUI program list
C:\Program Files\Intel\ of Gui1 and Gui2, and then delete the value (make the columns empty).
REG_SZ Gui2 Intel(R) Rapid Storage
Technology\IAStorUI.exe
Updating cycle REG_DWORD RefreshTime 1000 The updating cycle of the display . Set up by 1/1000 seconds (ms).
Minimum travel REG_DWORD The minimum travel distance of icon. Set up by pixel equivalent value.
5
distance MoveMinDistance
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6.3 Settings Necessary for Dell Precision WS370 6.4 Disabling RAID Status Display Tool
(Intel Application Accelerator)
On the PC to which Intel Application Accelerator is installed, the 1. Right-click the taskbar, and select Task Manager.
following settings may be necessary. The Windows Task Manager window opens.
When GUI for management does not start 2. Select IIPDispRaidStatus (Main) from the Applications
Add the following descriptions to the registries below. tab, and then click [End Task].
Target registry
3. Select All Programs Accessories from
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus
the menu.
Added character strings
REG_SZ Gui3 = C:\Program Files\Intel\ 4. Right-click IIPDispRaidStatus and select Delete.
Intel Application Accelerator\Shell.exe
When the irrelevant character string is displayed on the text 5. Restart the PC.
area of the tool
Add the following descriptions to the registries below.
Target registry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Intel\Intel Application Accelerator
Added character strings
RAIDNotificationIcon = dword:00000003
When RAID management software does not start up properly

even if management GUI icon is clicked
Open the property window for IIPDispRaidStatus in the startup folder
and specify C:\Program Files\Intel\Intel Application Accelerator for
Start in.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC) [Applicable only in Japan]
Appendix J Reinstalling the

Software (HP PC)
[Applicable only in
Japan]
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx RI J-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MU-I
Control Sheet

08/30/2001 03 Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) I, II, III, IV, 3, 5-7, 13, 14, 1624,
28-30, 35, 36, 39, 44
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, 6, 7, 12-14, 1, 23, 25, 26, 30,
31,35, 44
33, 34, 46, 48
47
03/01/2003 07 Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) I, II, 19, 17, 19, 31, 3340, 5056
3033, 3543, 59, 60
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) I, II, 1, 3, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21, 30, 35,
37, 45, 5154 , 62
5561
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) I, II, III, IV, 3, 4, 69, 15, 1719, 22,
23, 27, 30, 32, 33, 3740, 4250,
68
41, 5167
11/12/2004 12 Revision for software V1.0(C) and corrections I, II, 3, 4, 69, 24, 67
(FM4450)
07/30/2005 14 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, II, 4-8, 13, 16-19, 23, 33, 3942,
44, 45, 4754, 56, 66, 74
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) IIV, 12, 37, 4345
07/30/2006 16 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, II, 4, 14, 15, 20, 3546, 49, 74,
75, 7780
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MU-II
Control Sheet
3546, 4850, 74, 75
7780
4860, 6276, 8184
88
27, 31, 50, 52, 55, 56, 66, 73, 74,
86
54, 5765, 6772, 7585, 8792
03/31/2010 21 Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) I, III, 57, 22, 24, 38, 56, 68, 83
88
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) 13, 22, 43, 74, 75
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MU-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MU-IV
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility 2. Perform the procedure described below.

Version A software
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and
This section explains about the procedures for starting/exiting the upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
Service Utility, which is used as a service utility tool during CL
installation and servicing. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Starting the Service Utility

The procedure for starting the Service Utility varies depending on
whether the CL-PC power is ON or OFF.
MU000032.EPS
When the PC power is OFF
The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility
1. Turn ON the PC power. window opens.
Windows 2000 starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts. Version B software
NOTE upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
A window like that shown below opens in case the date and time Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
displayed on the PC are older than those when it was started last
time.
Click [OK] on the window that opens, and set correct date and time
on the Date/Time Properties window.
MU000031.EPS
The password entry window opens.
CLP401002.EPS
If this window opens, the PC battery is possible to be dead. Use

the procedure below to check.
MU000035.EPS
1. Set the current date/time.
2. Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power cable
Enter fieldengineer and click .
from the outlet.
3. After a few minutes, re-connect the power cable and turn the The Service Utility mode starts and then the IIP Service
power to the PC ON again. Utility window opens.
4. Check to see that the set date/time are correct. If the date/time
values revert back to those before settings, have the battery be NOTE
changed.
The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B)
or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility
mode starts without opening this window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual MU-1
When the PC power is ON 3. Perform the procedure described below.

Version A software
1. Clicking Shut Down in the (or ) When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and
upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
menu while the CL-AP is running will display the exit
window. Click while holding down the <Shift>
key.
2. From the menu, sequentially choose Programs, MU000032.EPS
Fuji Film, and FCR. The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility
window opens.
The CL-AP starts in about one minute.
Version B software
MU000031.EPS
MU000035.EPS
Enter fieldengineer and click .
The Service Utility mode starts and then the IIP Service
Utility window opens.
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Exiting the Service Utility

1. Click [Exit Service Utility] on the IIP Service Utility window.
00000056.EPS
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions
2. Overview of Service Utility

Functions
When the Service Utility starts running, the following window (herein-
after referred to as the main menu) opens.
XI ( Not displayed for

II the B version)
XII
III
XIII
IV
XIV
V
XV
VI
XVI (Displayed only when the
relevant option key is installed.
VII Applicable only in Japan.)
XVII (Displayed for only V1.0(C)
VIII version: for Japanese
version only)
IX
X
XVIII
00000061.EPS
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
I. Setup Study Sharing m Selector.mdb file (A02 or later)

This menu item is used for setup of study information sharing. Selector setup
For details of the setup procedure, see CL+CL (Cluster m TagLookup.ini file (A09 or later)
Connection) under OE15: CL + CL (Cluster Connection). DICOM tag editing (for Siemens)
II. Setup Configuration Item m FilmStrFmt.env file (A09 or later)
This menu item is used for CL system information setup, network Definition of film annotation characters
setup, LP setup, FINP/DICOM setup, automatic distribution code m BcrDataFormat.mdb file (A10 or later)
setup, and other setup purposes. Barcode format setup
This is the most frequently used menu item for installation. m ExposureResultLog.mdb file (A10 or later)
For details of this window, see 3. Various Configuration
Setup for exposure result log output items
Settings - Setup Configuration Item. m MWMTagSetting.mdb file (A11 or later)
DICOM MWM C-FIND tag and internal data mapping setup
REFERENCE information
Automatic distribution code setup is performed with the Service m PConsole Ser.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
Utility. However, attribute distribution setup is performed with a user Setup of PDA connection
utility. Attribute distribution setup is basically performed by the user. m RejectComment.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
Setup of comment on mis-exposed images
III. LUT m CODEDSTB file (V1.0(C) or later)
This menu item is used for setup of LUT file information (a file that Setup of a distribution code for connection to the 9000 series
optimizes the window display) for the display that the CL supports. equipment
m UMB_ATLAS1u.prm, UMB_ATLAS1t.prm,
4. Display Optimization LUT
UMB_ATLAS2u.prm, UMB_ATLAS2t.prm (V4.0(B) or later)
IV. Configuration Restore/Backup Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the
This menu item is used to back up or restore CL setup data. CR-IR 364 (type U/type T), CR-IR 366 and CR-IR 367.
The following files are backed up or restored. m UMB_ATLAS1a.prm (V5.0(B) or later)
m SysConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR371.
System setup item m TagCharDataCut.ini (V5.0(B) or later)
PRINTER setup item Setup for output of truncated DICOM tag data
CSL setup item m IDMassHistory.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
FINP setup item Patient ID history
QA process setup item m MassOrder.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
m NetConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) Setup of order issuance function for screening examination
Connection device information table m UMB_BASE1a.prm (V7.1(B) or later)
Connection destination setup table Setup of unevenness removal processing for the Image Reader
DicomPrint sorting destination setup table (reserved)
FINP compression ratio setup m ExposureIndex.prm (V8.0(B) or later)
Distribution code setup Setup of ExposureIndex function
m PN.mdb file (A00 or later) m TagCharDataAdd.ini (V8.1(B) or later)
PN setup item Setup of character string adding function for DICOM tag
m McrDataFormat.mdb file (A00 or later) m IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat (V8.1(B) or later)
Magnetic card format setup Setup of issuance function for diagnostic orders
m TagReplace.ini file (A02 or later) For the backup procedure, see 5. Restoring/Backing Up the
Setup for DICOM tag replacement Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup.
m QACustom.mdb file (A02 to V5.0(B)) For the restore procedure, see 14. Restoring the CL-Config
Setup of display items on the QA window under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
V. Retrieve EDR Backup Data VIII. DataBase Utility

This menu item is used to retrieve EDR image data stored in the CL This menu item is used to initialize image database, delete (clearing
and save it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the like. off the image output queue) accumulated images from output queue
and initialize patient database.
For the EDR data retrieval procedure, see 6. Retrieving EDR
Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data. For details of the operation procedure, see 8. Management of
Various Databases DataBase Utility.
REFERENCE
IX. Magnetic Card Setting
The EDR data refers to data halfway through a calculation task while
This menu item is used to set the data format for magnetic cards
EDR processing is being performed. This data is used to analyze
(hospital cards) and define ISO card read character code.
later how EDR processing was performed actually.
For details of the data format, see Appendix 4. Setting Up the
Magnetic Card [Option] under Appx IN: Installation
VI. Verify Connection Appendix.
This menu item is used to verify the connection to the RU or other For details of the ISO card definition, see 9. Setting the
connected equipment. The CL offers the following connection Magnetic Card Magnetic Card Setting.
verification functions:
X. Barcode Setting
Using the PING (connected equipment host name or IP address
input required) to verify the network connection to other connected This menu item is used for barcode setup.
equipment. For details of the format, see 10. Setting the Barcode
Using connected equipments AE name (Application Entity Name) Barcode Setting.
to verify the connection to DICOM connected equipment
XI. Customized QA Item (Not displayed for the B version)
For details of the procedure for verifying connection to other
This menu item is used to customize information, such as kanji
equipment, see 7. Verifying the Connection to Other
Connected Equipment Verify Connection. patient name, patient ID, date of birth, etc., relevant to patient image
displayed on the QA window.
VII. Edit/View Film String For details of the setup procedure, see 11. Customizing the
This menu item is used to directly edit the file named FilmStrFmt. QA Items Customized QA Item.
env file, which defines the film annotation character format. The tool
named View Film String can also be used to confirm on-screen film XII. Selector Setting
annotation characters. This menu item is used for selector setup necessary when
connecting a built-in IR. This function is same as that of IDT-IV
u NOTE u selector setup.
The contents of the FilmStrFmt.env file are written in Unicode. For details of the setup procedure, see 12. Setting the
Therefore, use NotePad or other Unicode-compliant text editor for Selectors Selector Setting.
editing purposes.
For details of FilmStrFmt.env file editing and View Film String

usage, see 3. Film Annotation Character Setup (Direct Editing
of FilmStrFmt) in Print Output Function under
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
XIII. View Event Log

This menu item is used to launch the Event Viewer of Windos 2000.
The Event Viewer allows you to confirm errors occurring in the OS or
CL-AP.
For details of how to use the Event Viewer, see 2. Using the
Event Viewer under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
XIV. Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool

This menu item is used to compress CL log files or several setup
files at a time and back them up on media, such as FD, USB
memory stick or the like. This function is useful for looking into
causes of errors that occur.
For details of how to collect log files or various setup files, see
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files Log/
Configuration Files Acquisition Tool.
XV. DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting

This menu item is used to perform internal data mapping for the tags
to be set up for the information about the CLs inquiries addressed to
the RIS (C-FIND-RQ) and the tags received in the form of a
response from the RIS to the CL (C-FIND-RSP).
For details on tag mapping, see 14. Setting the DICOM MWM
C-FIND Tags DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting.
XVI. P-Console Setting (Applicable only in Japan.)

This menu item is used to transfer configuration data to the POCKET
id Console or register device id of the POCKET id Console to be
handled on the CL.
For details of how to use the POCKET id Console, see
15. Setting the POCKET id Console P-Console Setting.
XVII. Distribution Code for FCR9000 Series Connection

(Displayed for only V1.0(C) version: for Japanese version only)
This menu item is used to describe distribution code for E-i/f-
connected 9000 series IR.
XVIII. Exit Service Utility

This menu item is used for exiting the Service Utility mode.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items
3. Various Configuration Settings 3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items

Setup Configuration Item In the individual tree items, the following items can be set up.
SYSTEM CONFIG
When you click [Setup Configuration Item] on the main menu, the
following window opens. This tree item is used to set the basic information about the CL.
Various items are listed in a tree form (these items are hereinafter Clicking the + sign to the left of SYSTEM CONFIG displays the
referred to as tree items) under CONFIG. When you click these items, SYSTEM CONFIG tree items.
you can open windows to set detailed information for specific tree items. The displayed items allow you to set the CL system information (I in
the window illustration below), FINP basic information (II), QA
functionality (III), Printout functionality (IV), IDT or Console
functionality (V), trimming functionality (VI), Image Reader QC
functionality (VII), POCKET id Console functionality (VIII), 9000
connection functionality (IX), and DICOM Query/Retrieve
functionality (X).
I
Items listed in II
a tree form III
(tree items) IV
V
VI
VII
00000060.EPS
VIII(*1)
The individual tree items are detailed in the following subsection. IX(*2)
X(*3) 00000062.EPS
(*1) 9.CONFIG PDA is displayed only when the option key for the
POCKET id Console is installed. (Applicable only in Japan.)
(*2) 10. CONFIG 9000 is displayed only for V1.0 (C).
(*3) 10. CONFIG QR is displayed only for V3.0 (B) or later.
For details of 1. IMAGE MODALITY, see 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY.
For details of 3. QA FUNCTION, see 3.5 Configuration
Details 3. QA FUNCTION.
For details of 4. PRINTER, see 2. Setup Necessary When
Editing the Film Annotation Character Format under
For details of 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION, see 3.6 Configuration
Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION.
For details of 7. CONFIG OPTION, see 3.7 Configuration
Details 7. CONFIG OPTION.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items
For details of 8. CONFIG QC, see 3.8 Configuration Details FILM SORTING
8. CONFIG QC. This tree item is used to define the film sorting conditions for DICOM
For details of 9. CONFIG PDA (*1), see 3.9 Configuration prints.
Details 9. CONFIG PDA.
For details of the FILM SORTING tree item, see 3.12 Setting
For details of 10. CONFIG9000 (*2), see IN-C: Installation
Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function.
Connection of 9000 Series Equipment.
For details of 10. CONFIG QR (*3), see 3.10 Configuration FINP COMPRESSION TYPE
Details 10. CONFIG QR.
This tree item is used to formulate an image compression definition
of each MPM code for use in image output generation with the FINP.
PERSON NAME
This tree item is used to define the sequence of patient name Before the use of this feature, however, the image compression
elements and characters that delimit names. setting for each MPM code needs to be turned ON from NETWORK
CONFIG.
Clicking the + sign to the left of PERSON NAME displays the
items for defining the details of PERSON NAME. IDT CONNECTING
For details on the PERSON NAME, see 3.11 Setting the Name This tree item is used to make patient information available being
Elements for DICOM Connection. shared with the CR Console (CL) and IDT-IV that are on the same
network.
NETWORK CONFIG See 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup.
This tree item is used to set the CL/connected equipment network
information and perform FINP/DICOM setup. MAC ADDRESS
Clicking the + sign to the left of NETWORK CONFIG displays the This tree item is used to prevent error occurrence that disables Mac
NETWORK CONFIG tree items. Address to be acquired at CL-AP startup.
The displayed items allow you to set the CL main unit information See 3.14 Mac Address Manual Input.
(I in the window illustration below) and connected equipment
information (II). LOG SHARE
This tree item is used to register the target CLs host name and IP
I address when using the Retake Analysis function and the IP use
II count calculation function.
00000063.EPS
See 3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup.
DISTRIBUTION CODE
This tree item is used to perform automatic distribution code setup
so that images can be distributed automatically to a device of HD_
FILE attribute.
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
This tree item is used to define the connected equipment that is
connected to the CL.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items 1. Double-click the Value column to the right of a configuration
item name.
When you click a tree item in the left-hand area of the Setup
Configuration Item window, a list of setup items appears in the right-
hand area of the window (this list is hereinafter referred to as a
configuration list).
This section explains about the procedure for editing the setup items in
a configuration list.
REFERENCE
Value column 00000065.EPS
A configuration list appears when you click the following tree items:
A maximum of nine tree items under SYSTEM CONFIG
(Display items are different depending on the used software version 2. Edit a configuration item.
and options.)
When the column you double-clicked changes to a direct input
PERSON NAME
field (e.g., )
I. With the mouse, select the text to be edited, and then key in
new text.
When the column you double-clicked changes to a pull-down

menu (e.g., )
I. Click the downward arrow mark ( ) for the pull-down menu
(e.g., ), and then choose a target item

from the pull-down menu.
When the column you double-clicked changes to a field with

upward and downward arrow marks (e.g., )
00000064.EPS
I. Click the upward arrow mark ( ) or downward arrow mark
( ) to change the value as desired.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
3.3 Saving the Configuration Data
3.3 Saving the Configuration Data

To save the configuration data, perform either of the following
procedures with the mouse or keyboard:
Saving with the mouse
1. From the Config (F) menu, click Save (V).

2. Click [YES].
The system saves the edited configuration data.
Saving with the keyboard
1. Hold down the Alt key and press the F key.

A pull-down menu opens.
2. Press the V key.

3. Press the Return key.

The system saves the edited configuration data.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
3.4 Configuration Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY

IMAGE MODALITY setup items (1 to 5)
For cluster
No. Name Selection Meaning
connection
1 System Common 0 : Japanese date (S62.10.07) Specifying the date format to be used in medica linstitutions. Agreement
Date Format 1 : ANSI long date (1987.OCT.07) required.
2 : ANSI short date (1987.10.07) * The date format is applicable in common to entry ofthe date
3 : American long date (OCT.07.1987) of birth, monitor display, film output, and allother date-related
4 : American short date (0.07.1987) representations.
5 : European long date (07.OCT.1987) * The default English setting at shipment from factory is
6 : European short date (07.10.1987) 2:ANSI short date (1987.10.07).
2 Alert MSG Display Yes Specifying whether or not to display the confirmation screen Agreement
When Deleting Image After selecting [Delete], the confirmation screen forimage for image deletion before actually deleting animage. required.
deletion will be displayed. Pressing [OK] willdelete the
specified item.
No
After selecting [Delete], the confirmation screen forimage
deletion will not be displayed and the specifieditem deleted
immediately.
3 Activate Error Yes Specifying whether or not to activate retrial processing after Agreement
Recovery Retrial The system continues retrial processing until the connected the error occurrence. required.
devices are recovered. Once recovered, itautomatically
continues output (including printout) of image accumulated
on the output queue.
No
The system does not output (print) images in standby
status unless it manually outputs (includingprintout) such
images.
4 Institute/Site Name A maximum of 60 one-byte character. Setting the medical institution name (in 1-byte characters). Agreement
Strings ( FUJIFILM HOSPITAL) required.
* For language setup of one-byte characters, a hospital name
specified here will be printed on film.
* Be sure to use 1-byte characters for entering medical
institution name as they are used in the DMS system.
* Make sure to enter 1-byte characters on the keyboard.
* The default number of characters printed on film is 20 at a
maximum.
5 IP Size by inch or 0:Inch Specifying the IP size. Agreement
Metric Displays 14"14" and 14"17" images in the inch system. required.
1:Metric * Specify the IP size considering the cassette size available on
Displays 14"14" and 14"17" images in the metric system. the RU side.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
6 Two independent Yes Specifying whether or not to set up frequency processing RN Agreement
Mask Sizes Sets independent RN for the right and left images. independently for the right and left images on the double- required.
Applicable to Left and (Hipmnrl.prm is used.) image output.
Right images No
Sets the same RN for the right and left images.
(Hipmenu.prm is used.)
7 Language Setup for 0 : Japanese 11 : ChineseSimplified Specifying the language used. Agreement
Screen Message 1 : English 12 : ChineseTraditional required.
2 : German 13 : Portuguese * There is no need to change in the Japanese version. Change
3 : French 14 : Polish the setting as necessary for the languages other than
4 : Spanish 15 : Hungarian Japanese.
5 : Italian 16 : Czech * The default setting on the CL-AP CD is 1:English.
6 : Swedish 17 : Russian * The default English setting at shipment from factory is
7 : Finnish 18 : Slovene 1:English.
8 : Danish 19 : Turkish * Software version V7.0 (B) does not provide support to
9 : Norwegian 21 : Greek 18: Slovene.
10 : Korean 22 : Romanian
8 Insitute/Site Name in A maximum of 15 two-byte characters. Specifying the kanji medical institution name. Agreement
Two-Byte Characters ( ) required.
* Be sure to enter two-byte characters on the keyboard.
(Using the <Alt>+< / > keys, the character entry mode
can be made available for entering two byte characters.)
* The default number of characters printed on film is 15 at a
maximum.
* For language setup of two-byte characters, a hospital name
specified here will be printed on film.
9 UID Issuance after Yes Specifying whether or not to issue new image UID and SOP Agreement
Modifying ID Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. Instance UID when modifying the patient, study, series or required.
Information No image information.
Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
* Select Yes if you wish to identify images for each
modification.
Modifying Normalized Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. Instance UID when modifying the conditions for normalization. required.
Parameter No
Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID. * Select Yes if you wish to identify images for each
modification.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

For cluster
connection
Modifying Image Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. Instance UID when modifying image processing parameters. required.
Processing No
Parameter Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID. * Select Yes if you wish to identify images for each
modification.
12 UID Issuance Before Yes Specifying whether or not to output SOP Instance UID as a Agreement
Sending Processed Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. processed CR image UID when outputting processed images. required.
Data No
Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
13 DICOM Series 0 : 1 Study - N series and 1 Series - 1 image Specifying the series generation logic. Agreement
Generation Logic Issues a number so that it has multiple series for one study required.
and only one image for one series. Detailed explanations
1 : 1 Study - N series and 1 Series - M image
Issues a number so that it has multiple series for one study
and multiple images for one series.
2 : 1 Study - 1 series and 1 Series - N image
Issues a number so that it has only one series for one study
and multiple images for one series.
14 System Recognition A_Z ( A) Setting the system ID. Be sure to
ID (A to Z) assign a
* Reflected on the image attributes and used for automatic unique ID
study number generation. for each CL.
* Assign a unique ID individually for each equipment unit.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
* The system ID set up on the RU configuration (referred to as
the image ID on the RU) will be printed on film.
15 User Utility Password 0 : No Password Required Specifying if password entry is required when entering the Agreement
Required or Not Password entry is not required. user utility mode. required.
1 : Default Password
As the default, 1111 is entered for the password. * The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR
Entering 111111 will enable you to use the group update Console MINI is 1: Default Password.
menu of exposure menu parameters (for services).
2 : Password Required
Hides the default password (1111).
Entering 111111 will enable you to use the group update
menu of exposure menu parameters.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
16 SOP Class UID for 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.1 Specifying an SOP Class UID that is sent back to PPS when Agreement
PPS When No FILE 1.2.392.200036.9125.1.1.2 no other connected hosts are set up as the destinations for required.
Attribute Output FILE attribute image output (for example, when a QA-WS is
connected as a connected host).
* Use the same UID as that used by the HI-C655 for FILE
attribute output.
17 Protocol Name for 0 : Function Code Specifying a value used for setup of the Protocol Name for Agreement
PPS Sets up a Code (function codes such as RT, TS, ES, etc). PPS. required.
1 : ANK Menu Name
Sets up a Menu Name (exposure menu) in alphanumerics.
18 Display Performed Yes Specifying whether or not to display an already performed Agreement
Procedure on No study in the CL work list. For a study already performed, required.
Worklist Tab specifying NO will hide it even if its related information is sent
from MWM. Basically, specify NO when the PPS function is
not available.
19 Kind of Output Image 0 : L, H, B, S L : Low-energy image Specifying the combination of kinds of images to be transferred Agreement
(Energy Subtraction) 1 : L, B, S H : High-energy image to other connected host. required.
2 : L, S B : Bone image
3 : L, B S : Soft tissue image
4 : L, H
20 Send 3 on 1 Format 0 : Yes Specifying whether or not to transfer 3on1-format images to an Agreement
to External Device Transmits Images. externally connected image storage device. required.
1 : No
Does not transmit images. * Specify Yes only when the target storage device can
receive ES 3on1-format images.
* This setup item is not for film output.
21 Connection Between 0 : 1-1 Specifying whether the 1-to-1 or N-to-N connection is to be Agreement
Reader and Console 1-to-1 connection established for the CL and RU. required.
1: N-N
N-to-N connection * The default setting at shipment from factory is 1:N-N for the
2: N-N (Not Use IP Barcode) CR Console Lite/Plus.
N-to-N connection (IP barcode is not to be used.) * The default setting at shipment from factory is 2: N-N (Not
Use IP Barcode) for the CR Console MINI.
* If 2:N-N (Not Use IP Barcode) is specified here, No must
be specified for No. 80 Enable Auto Menu Creation in
CSL/IDT FUNCTION.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
22 Long Type Character Yes Specifying the font sizes of the ID number and other items for Agreement
Format Decreases the font sizes to increase the number of CRT display and film annotation character printing. required.
displayable characters.
No * Note that the item to be specified for actually increasing the
Does not increase the number of displayable characters. number of characters is separately available.
23 Tag Mapped on 0040, 0100>0040, 0007 DICOM-defined tag numbers to be mapped onto a study menu Agreement
Study Menu at MWM for MWM use. required.
Use
24 Perform Mapping to Yes Specifying whether or not to perform mapping for study and Agreement
Exposure Menu at Performs mapping. exposure menus during MWM use. If No is selected, only the required.
MWM Use No patient information will be used to initiate a study process (the
Does not perform mapping. exposure menu or other data will not be transmitted).
25 Display Dialog When Yes Specifying whether or not to open a warning window when Agreement
Failed in Mapping to Opens a warning window. mapping is not successfully performed for a CL study menu or required.
Menu at MWM Use No exposure menu during MWM use.
Does not open a warning window.
26 Use Study Yes Specifying whether or not to use the Study Instance UID that Agreement
InstanceUID from Uses the Study Instance UID sent from the RIS. is transmitted from the F-RIS. required.
RIS No
Does not use the Study Instance UID sent from the RIS. * To enable the MWM Order function, the StudyInstanceUID
must be received unfailingly from the RIS. Unless otherwise,
no studies can be started.
27 StudyInstanceUID Type1 Study Instance UID number issue type for CL internal number Agreement
Generation Logic <company name>.2.1.<Accession number> issuance. required.
Type2
<company name>.2.2<study date><modality>.<Accession number> * If the order number does not exist or the Study Instance UID
Type3 is longer than specified, the system automatically uses
<company name>.2.3.<study date><modality>.<patient ID> Type7.
Type4 * Do not specify anything other than Type7 unless otherwise
<company name>.2.4.<study date>.<patient ID>. requested by the user.
<requesting department> When anything other than Type7 was specified at the request
Type5 of the user, have the user understand that the same
<company name>.2.5.<order number> components determined double will make the
Type6 StudyInstanceUID to be determined double as well, resulting
<company name>.2.6.<study date>.<order number> then in causing a problem to occur on the DICOM Server
Type7 side.
<company name>.2.<MAC address>.<TimeStamp>.
<machine-dependent ID number>
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
28 Dicom Storage 1 to 4 ( 3) Number of connections simultaneously available for Dicom Agreement
Output Connection Storage output generation. required.
Number
* Item to be specified for the LF-C2.
29 Image Number 0 : System ID+Serial Number Specifying whether or not to attach a machine shipment Agreement
Generation Logic Attaches a machine shipment control number. control number to the beginning of the Image Number. required.
1 : Serial Number This number is printed on film as well.
Does not attach a machine shipment control number.
30 Display Pixel Size 264 Monitor pixel size. To be changed in accordance with the
monitor type.
15" touch panel LCD monitor : 297

17" CRT monitor : 316 (recommended value :
resolution 1024 768)
(V7.0 or later)
SL-IC300 : 207
Ikegami CRT monitor : 255 (recommended value)
(1k landscape-type)
SL-IC200 : 255
* This setting represents a constant for 100%-size image

display by the QA function.
* Since the CRT monitor can vary its pixel size through screen
size adjustments, calculate the pixel size value as indicated
below and use it as the setting.
Screen width (mm) number of pixels 1000 = pixel size

Example : 360 mm 1600 pixels 1000 = 225
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
32 Kind of Print Image 0 : Original Specifying image type of the film output that is generated upon Agreement
(Image Combining Original image only. image combination. required.
Process) 1 : Original+Combined When you are specifying 3 or 4 (life-size image output) for the
Original image and combined image (reduced to 35 43cm setup value, also confirm setup values for Nos. 75 and 76 of
image). PRINTER setup items.
2 : Combined
Combined image only (reduced to 35 43cm image). * This setting can also be changed from User Utility. The latest
3 : Combined (Lifesize) setting takes effect no matter which utility is used.
Combined image (life size)
4 : Combined (Lifesize)+Combined
Combined image (life size) + combined image (reduced to
35 43cm image).
33 Kind of Transfer 0 : Original Specifying image type of the network output that is generated Agreement
Image (Image Original image only. upon image combination. required.
Combining Process) 1 : Original+Combined
Original image and combined image (reduced to 35 43cm * This setting can also be changed from User Utility. The latest
image). setting takes effect no matter which utility is used.
2 : Combined
Combined image only (reduced to 35 43cm image).
3 : Combined (Lifesize)
Combined image (life size)
4 : Combined (Lifesize)+Combined
Combined image (life size) + combined image (reduced to
35 43cm image).
34 Enable Statistical Yes Specifying whether or not to output an exposure result data Agreement
Info. Output Enables the exposure result data file output function. file. required.
No
Disables the exposure result data file output function. Exposure result data : Patient ID, patient name, study date,
study time, anatomical region, exposure
menu, etc.
* Select Yes when using the Retake Analysis function.

* The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR
Console MINI is Yes.
35 Modality of MG Specifying whether MG or DX is to be used for mammogram Agreement
Mammography Handles as MG. DICOM output. required.
Image DX
Handles as DX. * Version A09 provides MG support only.
* It is necessary that option key installation be completed.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
36 Administrator Up to 20 one-byte characters. Specifying administrator privilege password for the user
Password ( fcr-iip) authentication function.
* Be sure to enter a 1-byte character string from the keyboard.

37 Enable Security Yes Specifying whether or not to use the user authentication
Function Uses the user authentication function. function.
No
Does not use the user authentication function.
38 Link User Account to Yes Specifying whether the technologist name field should display
Operators Name Displays the login user name in the technologist name field. the name of a user who logs in with the user authentication
No function.
Does not display the login user name in the technologist
name field.
39 UID Issuance about a Yes Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID/
function (except Issues a new image UID/SOP Instance UID number. SOPInstance UID number when an image data editing process
Image Processing) to No (other than image processing) was performed.
change to the image Does not issue a new image UID/SOP Instance UID
themselves number. * When an image obtained after editing is to be differentiated
from the original one, choose Yes.
* This image data editing process involves shuttening
processing, marker processing, annotation, ES processing
and image composition.
40 Rotate the 2nd Yes Specifying whether or not to rotate
Stitching Image Rotates the second image 180 degrees. the second image 180 degrees for
No long-view menu (function: WS) At an institution where
Does not rotate. automatic generation. double and triple long-
view cassettes are used
* When a Fuji Films long-view mixed, set both of 40.
cassette is used, it is necessary and 41. to Yes.
to rotate the second image 180 For a double cassette,
degrees. rotate the second image
by 180 and for a triple
41 Rotate the 3rd Yes Specifying whether or not to rotate cassette, rotate the third
Stitching Image Rotates the third image 180 degrees. the third image 180 degrees for image by 180.
No long-view menu (function: WS)
Does not rotate. automatic generation.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
42 Enable Stitching Yes Specifying whether or not to enable the stitching edge
Edge Adjustment Enables the stitching edge adjustment function. adjustment function for images generated with the long-view
No menu (function: WS).
Disables the stitching edge adjustment function.
* You should basically choose Yes
43 Cut IP Edge for Yes Specifying whether or not to cut the IP edge when combining
Stitching Cuts the IP edge. images that are generated with the long-view menu (function:
No WS).
Does not cut the IP edge.
* You should basically choose No.
44 Use Series Yes Specifying whether or not to use an ID number (new tag) when Agreement
Identification Uses series ID number. the F-RIS is connected. required.
From F-RIS No
Does not use series ID number. * To set Yes, make sure ahead of time that the F-RIS server
version is compatible with this option.
45 UID Issuance after Yes Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Agreement
Modifying Trimming Issues a new number. Instance UID as trimming information is modified. required.
Parameter No
Does not issue new number.
46 UID Issuance after Yes Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID/ Agreement
Modifying Issues a new number. SOPInstance UID number when FNC parameters are required.
FNC Parameter No changed.
Does not issue a new number.
47 Quantity which paints 0-200 (0) Specifying the paint area for the mammographic chest wall Agreement
inside the recognition Specifies a quantity that is variable in 0.01 mm increments shuttering process. required.
result of the chest from 0.00 to 2.00 mm.
wall [ 0.01mm] * The chest wall shuttering process exercises a blackening
* In actual processing, values smaller than pixel size of the function to automatically paint out the chest walls transparent
standard-pixel density will be discarded. portion that may result from a bend or other inadequacy
during IP reading.
48 Apply GS Filter To Yes Specifying whether or not to subject 8" 10"/18 24 cm Agreement
8 10 / 1824 Image Perform GS conversion. standard-pixel density images to GS conversion. required.
No
Does not perform GS conversion. * If No is chosen, a moire pattern may appear in a film output
and the like.
49 Kind of the image 0 : Thm image file Specifying the image type to be used for image display. Agreement
used for the Uses half the standard-pixel density image size. required.
displaying 1 : Std image file
Uses the standard-pixel density image size.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IMAGE MODALITY setup item (50 to 53 and 55 to 57)

For cluster
connection
50 Portable Finish Mode 0 : Finish Study Specifying how to finish a study whose IP has been registered
on the POCKET id Console.
* This setting can be determined also by the User Utility

function and the setting determined later will be enabled.
51 Use Reject Comment Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable entry of comment on
Enables the entry. mis-exposed images.
No
Disables the entry. * Select Yes when using the Retake Analysis function.
52 Time Until Auto Log 0-60 (0) Specifying the time (represented in minutes) until when auto
Off logoff takes place.
* Note that if 0 is set, no auto logoff will take place.

53 Horizontal UMB 0 : ALL OFF Specifying whether or not to apply image unevenness removal
Processing for No image unevenness removal processing is applied. processing to the table type (CR-IR 364T, CR-IR 367 and
VELOCITY & 1 : ON Table Type Only CR-IR 370) and upright type (CR-IR 364U and CR-IR 366)
PRELIO Image unevenness removal processing is applied only to Image Readers.
the table type (CR-IR 364T, CR-IR 367 and CR-IR 370)
equipment. * Specify ON only for newly installed mobile models or
2 : ON Upright Type Only equipment on which an image unevenness problem arose as
Image unevenness removal processing is applied only to it was subjected to undue vibrations. Specify OFF for newly
the upright type (CR-IR 364U and CR-IR 366) equipment. installed equipment or already-installed equipment at a
3 : ALL ON hospital.
Image unevenness removal processing is applied to all
equipment models.
55 Gradients(x10) of 0-1000 (13) Specifying a gradient of the linear gradation LUT used for Agreement
LUT used for Preview display of a quick-view image. required.
Image (Specify a x10 value.)
* Do not change the preset default value because this is a

reserve item.
56 Use Password Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable the PAS security Agreement
Security Enables the PAS security function. function. required.
No
Disables the PAS security function.
57 Password for PAS A maximum of 16 one-byte characters are allowed to use. Specifying a password for authentication of the PAS security Agreement
Security ( 19750225) function. required.
* Be sure to enter a 1-byte character string from the keyboard.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IMAGE MODALITY setup item (67, 72, and 85)

For cluster
connection
67 Use Service Utility Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable the Service Utility Agreement
Password Enables the Service Utility password function. password function. required.
No
Disables the Service Utility password function. * The default setting on the CL-AP CD is Yes.
72 Enable Exposure Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable the Exposure Index Agreement
Index Function Enables the Exposure Index function. function. required.
No
Disables the Exposure Index function.
85 RSPC FileCopy Path A maximum of 256 one-byte characters are allowed to use. Specifying the folder path targeted for log file copy (shared Agreement
( None) folder in the PC of remote maintenance service side) required.
* Name the shared folder as the IP address of CL for

determining the PC which has generated the log files.
* Add \ at the end of the shared folder path.
* Do not use the network drive name for the path of the shared
folder. Specify the host name or IP address as a path name.
(Example)
For specifying the host name:
\\hostname\realtimelog\172.16.1.101\
For specifying the IP address:
\\172.16.1.240\realtimelog\172.16.1.101\
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Detailed explanations 2: 1 Study-1 series and 1 series-N Image

Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has only
13. DICOM Series Generation Logic
one series and that each series has two or more images.
In relation to the DICOM Series Generation Logic, the following
supplements explain the logic of series numbering subsequent to 1:1 1:N
image a cquisition from the RU. 1 Study 1 series 1 Image
0: 1 Study-N series and 1 series-1 Image
1 Image
Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has more
than one series and that each series has only one image.
1:N 1:1 N Image

1 Study 1 series 1 Image 00000466.EPS
1:1
1 series 1 Image
1:1
N series 1 Image
00000464.EPS
1: 1 Study-N series and 1 series-M Image

Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has more
than one series and that each series has two or more images.
1:N 1:M
1 Study 1 series 1 Image
1 Image
M Image
1 series
N series
00000465.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.5 Configuration Details 3. QA FUNCTION

QA FUNCTION setup items (1 to 7)
For cluster
connection
1 Enable Image Proc. Yes Enabling updated image processing parameter flag. Agreement
Pram Update Flag Reflects updated image processing parameters upon flag. required.
No
Does not reflect updated image processing parameters
upon flag.
2 Enable E-mail Button Yes Specifying whether or not to use the image transfer function Agreement
Used. via E-mail and the simplified image storage function. required.
No
Not used. * Specify No.
3 Use Dialog for No Specifying whether or not to open a dialog box for specifying
Choosing Folder to Does not open. the destination directory when you save an image with the
Save Jpeg Image Yes simplified image storage function.
Opens.
4 Destination Path of E : \ Specifying the simplified image storage destination.
JPEG File
* Be sure to enter 1-byte characters via the keyboard.
* The default value for V7.1(B) or earlier is A:\.
5 Filename Format of 0 : Image Number Filename generation rule applied to simplified image storage. Agreement
JPEG Information Image number+serial number.txt required.
1 : Type 1 * Patient ID number : A maximum of 16 characters,
Host name+date+serial number.txt Tag (0010, 0020).
2 : Type 2 Dominical year : Fixed at six characters.
Paitent ID No+_+dominical year+_+study anatomical Study anatomical region : A maximum of 16 characters,
region+_+serial number+_+host name.txt Tag (0018, 0015).
Serial number : Fixed at four characters
(starting from 0000).
Host name : A maximum of ten characters.
Delimitation : _ (underscore).
6 JPEG Image None Specifying whether or not to provide perceptual linear Agreement
Processing Use (Example) gradation correction at the time of JPEG image storage. required.
CrtLut C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\CrtLut1.env This selection takes effect when you specify the names of the
directory and file in which the setup file is stored.
7 Alert MSG Display Yes Specifying whether or not display the confirmation dialog when Agreement
When Output Opens. the reprint button/study distributino button is pressed. required.
No
Does not open.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
8 Display Save Button No Specifying whether or not to display the Save button. Agreement
Not displayed. required.
Yes
Displayed.
9 Alert MSG Display No Specifying whether or not to display the Save confirmation
When Save Not displayed. dialog when shifting from the previous study or image or at the
Yes completion of QA processing.
Displayed.
10 Alert MSG Display No Specifying whether or not to display the Save confirmation
When Image Not displayed. dialog when energy subtraction or shuttering processing is
Changed Yes performed, or menu or image is changed, or images are
Displayed. composed together.
11 Enable Dicom Yes Specifying whether or not to use the DICOM file storage
File Storage Used. function.
No
Not used.
12 Tranfer Syntax 0 : Implicit VR Little Endian Specifying the DICOM file storage transfer syntax.
Used When Using 1 : Explicit VR Little Endian
Dicom File Storage 2 : Jpeg Lossless
13 Save Multibyte Code Yes Specifying whether or not to save multi-byte characters at
When Using Dicom Multi-byte characters are saved. DICOM file storage.
File Storage No
Multi-byte characters are not saved.
14 Save Annotation Yes Specifying whether or not to save annotation information at
Information When Annotation information is saved. DICOM file storage.
Using Dicom File No
Storage Annotation information is not saved.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
15 DCM File Image None Specifying an LUT file when performing LUT processing for
Processing Use (Example) DICOM file storage.
CrtLut Storage-scp Do not describe .lut (extension) for software version V5.1(B)
(Software version V5.1 (B) or earlier) or earlier.
The folder used is fixed to C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Storage-scp.lut CrtLut and include specified LUT files in this folder.
(Software version V6.0 (B) or later) For software version V6.0 (B) or later, use an absolute path
(including extension) to describe necessary settings.
Ex. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Storage-scp.lut

* A maximum of 64 alphanumerics can be used to specify
necessary data.
* If no data is specified, CrtLut processing will not be
performed.
* If no specified file exists, an error will occur.
16 Change Modality Yes Specifying whether or not to save MG as CR at the DICOM file
When Using Dicom MG is saved as CR. storage.
File Storage No
(MG CR) MG is not saved as CR.
17 Enable Change No Specifying whether or not to enable to edit the date and time
ImageDate and Disabled. of image generation.
ImageTime Yes
Enabled. * Select No in Japan.
18 Image File Type For 0 : Std image file Specifying whether to use a standard image or high-density
Magnify Display 1 : Hq image file image to display a magnified image.
* Also confirm the setup value of No. 19.

* For setup of the type of an image displayed when no image
magnification processing is applied, confirm setup value for
No. 49 of IMAGE MODALITY setup items.
19 PEM Processing in Yes Specifying whether or not to perform PEM processing on an
the case of Magnify PEM processing is performed. ultra-high density image when it is magnified and displayed.
Display No
No PEM processing is performed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
QA FUNCTION setup items (20)

For cluster
connection
20 Alert MSG Type 0 : Connect with RIS Specifying a message type to be displayed when changing the
When Patient RIS connection (hospital layer) patient information.
Information will be 1 : Without RIS
Modified Non-RIS connection (general practitioner layer)
2 : Non-Display
Not displayed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION

CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (1 to 6)
For cluster
connection
1 AutoMenuSelect No Specifying whether or not to automatically move onto the next
From exposure list menus of unread images, manually exposure menu item (at the bottom on the screen) when
selects exposure menus of the image to be read the next. multiple exposure menus are registered.
Yes
When an image is received from the RU, automatically
moves onto the next exposure menu item (at the bottom on
the screen).
2 Default Menu Code A maximum of 16 one-byte characters. Setting the extension menu code of the exposure menu to be
for Unregistered ( FCR0908-0000) used as the default when it is unregistered.
Image
* This item can also be set up using the User Utility function.
The item set up the last will be valid.
* Make sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
* The default setting on the CL-AP CD is FCR0909-0000.
3 Enable Distribution No Specifying if the distribution code is used when changing Agreement
Code The distribution code is not used. exposure menu parameters. required.
Yes
The distribution code is used. * The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR
4 Enable Film String No Specifying if the film annotation characters are used when Agreement
The film mark is not used. changing exposure menu parameters. required.
Yes
The film mark is used.
5 Enable Function No Specifying if the function setup is used when changing Agreement
Setup The function setup is not used. exposure menu parameters. required.
Yes
The function setup is used. * The default setting at shipment from factory is Yes for the
CR Console Lite/Plus.
6 Enable No Specifying whether or not to use the pantomography (to isolate Agreement
Pantomography The pantomography is not used. a 15 30cm image from a 10" 12" size image). required.
Processing Yes
Image isolation processing is performed if the target image
is a pantomography menu (MPMcode20 4) in 10" 12"
size.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
7 Enable Performance No Specifying whether the result information (film size and split Agreement
Data (RIS) The performance data is disabled. exposure count) can be defined from the CL menu parameter required.
Yes edit dialog box at the time of ordering from the RIS.
The performance data is enabled.
8 Enable Automatic No Specifying if the automatic selector changeover function is
Selector Switching Not used. used.
Yes
Used.
9 Enable Requesting No Specifying if the requesting department name field is displayed Agreement
Dept. Name Field The requesting department name field is not displayed. on the patient information entry screen. required.
Yes
The requesting department name field is displayed.
10 Enable Technologist No Specifying if the technologist name field is displayed on the Agreement
Name Field The technologist name field is not displayed. patient information entry screen. required.
Yes
The technologist name field is displayed.
11 Image Rotation/ 0 : L-R reversal Specifying the range available for selection of image rotation Agreement
Reversal Range 1 : T-B reversal and reversal when changing exposure menu parameters. required.
2 : L-R,T-B reversal
3 : L-R reversal / 90-deg,Rotation * The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR
4 : L-R,T-B reversal / 90-deg,Rotation Console MINI is 4: L-R,T-B reversal / 90-deg, Rotation.
Selects a combination of L-R, T-B, 90-deg or Rotation

L-R : Right and left rotation,
T-B : Top and bottom rotation,
90-deg, Rotation : 90 reversal
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
12 EDR Mode Setup 0 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX Specifying the range available for selection of EDR mode Agreement
1 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X when changing exposure menu parameters. required.
2 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/MANUAL
3 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X/MANUAL * The default setting on the CL-AP CD is 0:AUTO/SEMI/FIX.
Selects a combination of AUTO, SEMI, FIX, SEMI-X or

MANUAL from 0 to 3.
AUTO : Automatically calculates both the S and L values
based on the image.
SEMI : The L value is fixed. Automatically calculates the S
value as per determined process.
FIX : The L value is fixed. The S value is the default or
manually entered.
SEMI-X : The L value is fixed. Automatically calculates the S
value as per determined process. Manually enters
area for calculation and output density.
MANUAL : For manual entry of both the S and L values.
13 Image Data Filing 0 : OFF/ON Specifying the range available for selection of filing mode Agreement
Mode Setup 1 : OFF/ON/ON* when changing exposure menu parameters. required.
Selects a combination of OFF, ON or ON* from 0 and 1.

OFF : Not to filing to the OD device.
ON : Filing to the OD device.
ON* : Filing of an HQ image to the OD device after converting
it to a normal density image.
14 Function Setup RT,TS,ES,WS,PS,TM Specifying functions that can be selected when changing Agreement
( RT,PS,TM,WS) exposure menu parameters. required.
RT : Routine processing (routine exposure) * Enumerate functions demarcating them using one-byte
TS : Temporal subtraction processing * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
ES : Energy subtraction processing
WS : Whole spine processing
PS : IVP processing
TM : Tomographic processing
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
15 Examination No. 1 to 16 ( 10) Setting the Accession No. length (1 to 16). Agreement
Length required.
* Set 6 or larger when 1 is set for 29. Study Number Issuance
Logic Setup and 14 or larger when 2 is set
* This function also specifies the number of characters printed
on film.
* If using the Accession Number character string adding
function, input the character string as
(Number to be set up) 16 - (Number of characters to be added).
16 Examination No. 0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567) Specifying the Accession No. padding method. Agreement
Padding Method Right-padded with spaces to the head. required.
1 : Pad with zero to the head (0001234567) * This function also specifies right/left justification of character
Right-padded with zeros to the head. strings printed on film.
2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ) * If using Synapse RIS, select either 0 : Pad with space to the
Left-padded with spaces to the tail. head ( 1234567) or 2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ).
3 : Pad with zero to the tail (1234567000)
Left-padded with zeros to the tail.
17 Patient ID Length 1 to 64 ( 10) Setting the patient ID length. Agreement
required.
* This function also specifies the number of characters printed
on film. To specify the number of characters that exceeds 11,
set Yes for No. 22 Long Type Character Format of IMAGE
MODALITY.
* To include the institution identification code in the patient ID
to be issued automatically, specify 64 for the maximum
patient ID length.
* If using the Accession Number character string adding
function, input the character string as
(Number to be set up) 64 - (Number of characters to be added).
18 Patient ID Padding 0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567) Specifying the patient ID padding method. Agreement
Method Right-padded with spaces to the head. required.
1 : Pad with zero to the head (0001234567) * This function also specifies right/left justification of character
Right-padded with zeros to the head. strings printed on film.
2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ) * If using Synapse RIS, select either 0 : Pad with space to the
Left-padded with spaces to the tail. head ( 1234567) or 2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

For cluster
connection
19 Reception No. Length 1 to 16 ( 5) Setting the reception No. length. Agreement
required.
* Use this setting for Type B ID Online connection.
20 Reception No. 0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567) Specifying the reception No. padding method. Agreement
Padding Method Right-padded with spaces to the head. required.
1 : Pad with zero to the head (0001234567) * Use this setting for Type B ID Online connection.
Right-padded with zeros to the head.
2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 )
Left-padded with spaces to the tail.
21 Exposure List No Specifying whether or not to erase the preset exposure list Agreement
Erasure Setup Does not erase. when entering new patient information on the examination and required.
Yes examination reservation screens.
Erases.
* This item can also be set up using the User Utility function.
The item set up the last will be valid.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is Yes for the
22 Requesting Dept. 0 : Code Setting the content of the menu to be displayed in the Agreement
Name Field Setup Displays the requesting department code. requesting department name field. required.
1 : NameSbcs
Displays the requesting department name in alphanumerics.
2 : NameDbcs
Displays the requesting department name in kanji.
23 Technicians Name 0 : Code Setting the content of the menu to be displayed in the Agreement
Field Setup Displays the technicians code. technicians name field. required.
1: NameSbcs
Displays the technicians name in alphanumerics.
2 : NameDbcs
Displays the technicians name in kanji.
24 Min.Set Number 1 to ZZ ( 1) Setting the minimum value for the function processing setup
No.

* Enter a value smaller than that specified in 25. Max. Set
Number below.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
25 Max.Set Number 1 to ZZ ( 9Z) Setting the maximum value for the function processing setup
No.
* Enter a value larger than that specified in 24. Min. Set

Numberabove.
26 MCR Customized No Specifying whether or not to use the hospital card. Agreement
Card The hospital card is not used. required.
Yes For details of setup, see Installation Appendix 4
The hospital card is used. Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option] under
Appx IN: Appendix to Installation.
27 MCR Card Type 0 : JIS Specifying the magnetic card type. Agreement
(JIS/ISO) 1 : ISO required.
* The default English setting at shipment from factory is
1:ISO.
For details of setup, see Installation Appendix 4
Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option] under
Appx IN: Appendix to Installation.
28 MCR Card Format 0 : FUJI (JIS type, ISO type) Specifying the magnetic card format setup type. Agreement
Setup 1 : FJ01 (JIS type) required.
2 : FJ02 (JIS type) For details of setup, see Installation Appendix 4
3 : FJ03 (JIS type) Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option] under
4 : FJ04 (JIS type) Appx IN: Appendix to Installation.
5 : FJ05 (JIS type)
6 : FJ51 (ISO type)
29 Study Number 0 : OFF Specifying the logic available for automatic Accession number Agreement
Issuance Logic Setup 1 : <System Id+Auto Increment> (0008, 0050) issuance mode. required.
2 : <Date+System Id+Auto Increment>
* Verify the setting made in 15. Examination No. length.
System ID : Converts A to 1, ........ and Z to 26. Make sure that 6 or larger is set when 1 has been selected
Date : Converts in the form of yyyymmdd (year, and 14 or larger, when 2 has been selected.
month, day). * (0008, 0050) are the Accession number tag.
Auto Increment : Starts with the initial value counted to be
0001 and the count is reset to the initial
value if it extends over the two consecutive
years.
30 Technician's Code 1 to 2 ( 2) Setting the technicians code length. Agreement
Length required.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

For cluster
connection
31 ID Online Acquisition 0 : CP850 (DOS Latin 1) Specifying the code set for use in ID Online connection. Agreement
Info. Code Setup 1 : CP1252 (Win Latin 1) required.
For detailed code set descriptions, see Detailed
explanations.
32 ID Online Serial Port Enter a numerical value in accordance with the PSI board Specifying the ID Online serial port. Agreement
No. channel. required.
(If you do not use the ID online serial port, enter 0.) ( 0)
33 ID Online Interface 0 : Short Specifying the ID Online interface format. Agreement
Format 1 : Long (to be selected when an extended format is in use) required.
34 ID Online/Offline Enter a numerical value (use the default setting under normal Specifying the online/offline switching timeout value. Agreement
Switching Timeout conditions). (10) required.
35 ID Online Requesting Enter a numerical value (use the default setting under normal Specifying the timeout value for information inquiry at the RIS. Agreement
Timeout conditions). (30) required.
36 ID Online Search Key 0 : ID# Specifying the type of ID Online search key. Agreement
1 : ID#&RECEPT# required.
2 : ID#&EXAM#
3 : ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#
A combination of patient ID number, reception number, and

examination number is to be used as a search key.
ID# : Patient ID number
RECEPT# : Reception number
EXAM# : Examination number
37 ID Online Type 0 : Type-A Specifying the ID Online interface type. Agreement
The RIS transmits information. required.
1 : Type-B
2 : Type-IDC4
The CL uses a search key to make inquiries at the RIS for
the purpose of acquiring patient information.
38 Host Name of RIS One-byte character ( idc4) IDC4 host name when using the ID Online function for IDC4. Agreement
Server (Type-IDC4) required.
* Use a maximum of 16 alphanumerics to specify the host
name.
39 IP Address of RIS 172.16.1.1 IDC4 IP address when using the ID Online function for IDC4. Agreement
Server (Type-IDC4) required.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
40 Port Number for RIS Enter a numerical value in accordance with the RIS port IDC4 port number when using the ID Online function for IDC4. Agreement
Server (Type-IDC4) number. required.
(13001) * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
41 RIS Type Setup 1 : S1 (NEC-Type1) RIS type when ordering (serial connection only) is intended. Agreement
NEC (for TYPE-I) required.
2 : S2 (NEC-Type2) * Serially connected ordering is available only for version A04
NEC (for TYPE II) or later.
3 : S3 (Fujitsu/Hitachi) * Version A07 supports only 2: S2 (NEC-Type2).
For Fujitsu/Hitachi
42 Wait Time for 1 to 30 (Basically not changed.) ( 3) Specifying the wait time (in seconds) between the instant at
Performed Exposure which the ID information acquisition request is received from
Info. from Xcon the built-in type machine and the instant at which the XCON
exposure result information is received in situations where
exposures are made by the built-in type machine with the
XCON connection established.
43 Xcon Status Display XCON Image display caption when the XCON is connected.
Strings
* Use a maximum of five alphanumerics to specify the caption.
44 Xcon Serial_TX Enter a numerical value in accordance with the PSI board Performing XCON control serial port setup.
Control Port channel.
(Enter the value 0 if the control port is not used.) ( 0)
45 Xcon Performed Info. No Specifying whether or not to receive operating condition data.
Reception Does not receive operating conditions.
Yes
Receives operating conditions.
46 Xcon Exposure Info. No Specifying whether or not to transfer exposure condition data.
Transfer Does not transfer exposure conditions.
Yes
Transfers exposure conditions.
47 Xcon Exposure Info. 28 Minimum tube voltage.
Limit Value
(Minimum KVP [kv])
48 Xcon Exposure Info. 110 Maximum tube voltage.
Limit Value
(Maximum KVP [kv])
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
49 Xcon Exposure Info. 9 Minimum tube current.
Limit Value
(Minimum X-ray Tube
Current [mA])
50 Xcon Exposure Info. 400 Maximum tube current.
Limit Value
(Maximum X-ray
Tube Current [mA])
51 Xcon Exposure Info. 10 Minimum irradiation time.
Limit Value
(Minimum Exposure
Time [msec])
52 Xcon Exposure Info. 5400 Maximum irradiation time.
Limit Value
(Maximum Exposure
Time [msec])
53 Xcon Exposure Info. 0 to 9999 ( 0) Minimum Reserve Code 1 value to be sent to the X-CON.
Limit Value
(Minimum Reserve 1)
54 Xcon Exposure Info. 0 to 9999 ( 8000) Maximum Reserve Code 1 value to be sent to the X-CON.
Limit Value
(Maximum Reserve
1)
55 Distribution Code for 5000-IIP Distribution code used for receiving images from the FCR5000
FCR5000 Series series.
Connection
* Be sure to enter a maximum of eight one-byte characters on
the keyboard.
56 Enable Patient Info. No Specifying whether or not to use the patient database function. Agreement
DB Function Does not use the patient database function. required.
Yes
Uses the patient database function.
57 Max. Number of 0 to 300000 ( 5000) Maximum number of patients that can be recorded to the Agreement
Patient Info. patient database. required.

Console MINI is 300000.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
58 Patients Name 0: Sbcs (one-byte code) Patient name format available for Japanese domestic market
Format 1: Dbcs (two-byte code) only.
2: Sbcs+Dbcs (both one- and two-byte codes are used.)
59 Enable Customize No Performing setup concerning the specifications for industrial- Agreement
Function of Study List Yes use materials. required.
and Patient Info. Selecting No disables the study list customization and patient
ListDB Function database list customization functions.
60 IP Info. Request 1 to 60 (basically not changed.) ( 60) Timeout value that prevails in the CL when the RU conducts Agreement
Timeout an IP information search while the RU-CL N:N connections required.
(Reader:CSL=N:N) established.
61 Replace ALL IP Size No Specifying whether the CL applies a specified image size Agreement
When Receive Size Does not change. change to unexposed menu items in the study list upon receipt required.
Change Request Yes of an exposure image size change notification from the built-in
from Builtin Changes. type machine in situations where the RIS is connected.
62 RIS Status Display RIS Window display caption when the RIS is connected.
String
* Specify by entering a maximum of five alphanumerics.
63 RIS Serial-TX Control Enter figures in accordance with the PSI board CH. Specifying the RIS control serial port.
Port (Enter 0 if this function is not used.) ( 0)
64 MWM RIS Trigger 5001 (Basically not changed.) RIS trigger reception port number for MWM use.
Port Enter a numerical value in accordance with the RIS trigger
reception port.
65 MWM RIS Trigger 1 to 1000. (Basically not changed.) (10) RIS trigger reception timeout value (sec) for MWM use. Agreement
Timeout required.
66 MWM Execute Study 0 : Manual Specifying the study start method for MWM use. Agreement
Type Manual start. Select an appropriate method in accordance with the RIS required.
1 : Trigger specifications and actual hospital operations.
Trigger-driven start.
2 : Auto
Automatic execution upon study reception.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
67 MWM Request Yes The configuration function for this inquiry item is disabled. Agreement
Exposure Dose Makes an inquiry. This inquiry item will be validated when you add it as one of required.
Status No the inquiries to be addressed to the RIS by exercising the
Makes no inquiry DICOM MWM C-FIND tag setup function.
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags DICOM

MWM C-FIND Tag Setting in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
68 MWM Exposure 0 : Normal Exposure menu code system for MWM use. Agreement
Menu Code 1 : JJ1017 Make an appropriate selection in accordance with the RIS required.
Treatment 2 : JJ1017(Ver3) specifications.
69 Recept Computer ReceptComp Receptor computer host name for receptor computer use.
Hostname
* Enter a name of consisting of no more than 16 alphanumeric
characters.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters via the keyboard.
70 Recept Computer IP 172.16.1.50 Receptor computer IP address for receptor computer use.
Address
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters via the keyboard.
71 Recept Computer 6000 Receptor computer port number for receptor computer use.
Port Number Enter a numerical value in accordance with the receptor
computer port number.
72 Recept Computer 0 : A01 Patient information format to be acquired from the receptor
Patient Info. Format 1 : A51 computer.
Select a setting in accordance with the receptor computer.
73 Recept Computer 1 to 60. (Basically not changed.) (15) Timeout value (sec) for the response from the receptor
Request Timeout computer.
74 Search Order of 0 : Recept Comp. Local DB Patient information search sequence during receptor computer
Patient Info. Receptor computer local patient database use.
1 : Local DB Recept Comp. The setting can also be changed with the user utility.
Local patient database receptor computer
2 : Recept Comp. Only
Receptor computer only
3 : Local DB Only
Local patient database only
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
75 Patient ID# is Unique Yes Specifying whether the patient ID numbers to be registered in
Patient ID numbers must be unique. the local patient database should be unique.
No When you register the information about a patient ID number
Duplicate patient ID numbers can be used. in the patient database with Yes chosen, it overwrites the
information having the same patient ID number.
76 PPS Exposure Status 0 : No Specifying whether the PPS should return the exposure status Agreement
Sequence Does not output. (such as repeat/reject of exposures) with a Private tag. required.
1 : Status Only
Outputs only exposure status. * Specify 0: Output Default Condition for 120 Xcon No-Data
2 : Status + Other Results Default Output.
Outputs exposure status along with other actual results.
77 IME Mode for Kana 0 : None IME mode setup upon startup (kana patient name).
Patients Name No IME control
1 : ON * If 3: OFF-Fix is selected, IME cannot be started.
IME ON
2 : OFF
IME OFF
3 : OFF-Fix
IME OFF
4 : Dbcs-Hiragana
2-byte hiragana characters
5 : Dbcs-Katakana
2-byte katakana characters
6 : Sbcs-Katakana
7 : Dbcs-A&
2-byte alphanumeric characters
8 : Sbcs-A&N
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
78 IME Mode for Kanji 0 : None IME mode setup upon startup (kanji patient name).
Patients No IME control
1 : ON * If 3: OFF-Fix is selected, IME cannot be started.
IME ON
2 : OFF
IME OFF
3 : OFF-Fix
IME OFF
4 : Dbcs-Hiragana
2-byte hiragana characters
5 : Dbcs-Katakana
6 : Sbcs-Katakana
7 : Dbcs-A&N
8 : Sbcs-A&N
79 RIS Type Setup 0 : NEC-Type2-Normal Specifying whether or not to use the expansion format when
(NEC) serial ordering connection is established with NEC Type2.
1 : NEC-Type2-Expand
* Select 2 for 41 RIS Type Setup.
80 Enable Auto Menu Yes This setting relates to a situation where the cassette is set in
Creation Enables the automatic creation function. position without registering an exposure menu. Specify
No whether you want to automatically complete default exposure
Shows a warning. menu registration or display a warning for prompting the user
to register an exposure menu.
* Select No here when 2: N-N (Not Use IP Barcode) is

specified for IMAGE MODALITY No. 21.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is No for the
CR Console MINI (for software version V7.0 (B) or later).
81 Enable Continuous Yes Specifying whether or not to permit the same barcode to be
Barcode Read Enables the continuous barcode read function. continuously registered.
No
Disables the continuous barcode read function.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
82 Selection Type of 0 : Linked Specifying whether or not to establish a link between one-byte Agreement
Requesting Service Links. requesting department names and kanji requesting department required.
1 : Separated names.
Does not link.
* If 1: Separated is chosen, you can key in a requesting
department name from the study reception window.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is 1:Separated
for the CR Console Lite/Plus (for Japanese users).
83 Default Requesting Requesting department code consisting of up to 16 one-byte Requesting department name to be displayed by default.
Service characters.
No options. * Be sure to key in a one-byte character string.
* Be sure to enter a requesting department code.
84 Barcode Type for 0 : Accession Number Search key used for barcode-based searches. Agreement
Search on List Accession number required.
1 : Patient ID
Patient ID.
85 Default Value for 0 : ST Image reading pixel density to be used for processing at CL Agreement
Underfined Pixel Standard pixel density side when the image reading pixel density setting registered at required.
Density 1 : HQ the IDT741 is outside the acceptable range.
High pixel density
86 Image Adjust Mode 0 : Type 1 (GP) Image adjustment mode with the general practitioners
Only processing is displayed. specifications.
1 : Type 2 (All)
Full screen display.
87 PPS Edit Billing Yes Specifying whether or not to edit the information about Agreement
Supplies Edits consumables. requested consumables in the exposure result editing process. required.
No
Does not edit consumables. * This selection takes effect only when Yes is chosen for item
No. 88.
88 PPS Edit Exposure Yes Specifying whether or not to edit the exposure results at the Agreement
Result Edits the exposure results. end of study. required.
No
Does not edit the exposure results. * This selection takes effect only when the DICOM PPS
connection is established.
89 MWM Menu Name Yes Specifying whether the Code Meaning Agreement
Mapping Handles as an exposure menu name. (0040,0100>0040,0008>0008,0104) acquired as the required.
No information about a response from the RIS should be handled
Does not handle as an exposure menu name. as an exposure menu name.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
90 PPS Exposure Status 0040, 0260 > 0080, 0104 Specifying the tag for exposure information mapping at the Agreement
Mapping Tag Tag for exposure information mapping. PPS. required.
* If this field is left blank, exposure information mapping does

not take place. The tag VR may be limited depending on the
setting for item No. 91.
91 PPS Exposure Status 0 : None Specifying the information to be set for exposure information Agreement
Mapping Kind Performs no mapping. mapping for the standard tag at the PPS. required.
1 : Div + Status + Kind
Divided exposure count/exposure status/exposure kind (all). * The VR values that can be set for the tag indicated under
2 : Div item No. 90 are
Divided exposure count only. LT, ST, UT, and LO for 1;
3 : Status + Kind LT, ST, UT, LO, and SH for 2;
Exposure status/exposure kind only. LT, ST, UT, and LO for 3.
92 PPS N-SET Timing 0 : Complete Specifying the time at which the PPS study termination notice Agreement
When the study is terminated after receipt of all images. (N-SET) should be transmitted to the RIS. required.
1 : Subscribe
When a study termination process is performed after all
menu IPs are registered or when a study termination
process is performed in situations where setup is completed
so as to delete unregistered menus.
2 : DownloadPDA
At the completion of transfer of a study to the POCKET id
Console.
93 Use Distribution 0 : Yes Specifying whether or not to handle a requesting department Agreement
Code Depart Name Handles as a distribution code. name as a distribution code. required.
1 : No
Does not handle as a distribution code.
94 Film Size Setup 1100000000 Selecting a film size. Agreement
required.
* The selectable film sizes are 14" 17", 26 36 cm,
14" 14", 10" 12" and 8" 10".
95 Recept Computer 0 : Standard Computer type for connection of a receipt computer. Agreement
Type FujiFilm Standard required.
1 : SANYO * To use Synapse RIS, select 0: Standard.
Sanyo
2 : TOSHIBA
Toshiba
3 : FUJITSU
Fujitsu
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (96 to 102 and 105)

For cluster
connection
96 Kanji Patients Name No Selecting whether or not to use a function for automatically Agreement
Auto Convert Not used. converting to a kana patient name when a kanji patient name required.
Yes is input on the hospital-specified patient information input
Used. window. (Applicable only in Japan.)

97 Recept Computer C:\User\IIP\ReceptShare\ Specifying a folder in which the shared information file is to be Agreement
Info File Share Folder saved when a receipt computer is connected. required.
98 Recept Computer 1 to 300 (5) Specifying a time interval at which the polling process is to be Agreement
Info File Polling performed to the shared information file. required.
Interval ([sec])
* Interval from 1 through 4 can be set when Synapse RIS is
connected. Set the interval longer than 5 when a recept
computer is connected.
* The default setting for V8.1 or later is 1.
99 Recept Computer 0 : XMLOnly Specifying a file type to be handled as an information file when Agreement
Info File Type Only XML is used. a receipt computer is connected. required.
1 : CSVOnly
Only CSV is used. * To use Synapse RIS, select 0: XMLOnly.
2 : Both
Both XML and CSV are used.
100 Recept Computer C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Data\Reserved Specifying a folder in which an information file where an error Agreement
Info File Temporal occurred is to be backed up when a receipt computer is required.
Folder connected.
101 Enable Study No Specifying whether or not to use the study reservation function Agreement
Reservation Not used. for general practitioners. (Applicable only in Japan.) required.
(Easy Operation Yes
Only) Used.
102 Use Space Padding No Specifying whether or not to use a space-padded patient ID for Agreement
ID Not used. general practitioners. (Applicable only in Japan.) required.
(Easy Operation Yes
Only) Used.
105 Do Next Study At Yes Specifying whether or not to use a function that enables to
Study Scren With Used. start the next study with the study window displayed, when the
End Button Click No study end button is clicked on the study window.
Not used.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (106 to 109 and 111 to 114)

For cluster
connection
106 Automatic Issuance Yes Specifying whether or not to issue a patient ID automatically.
patient ID Issued automatically.
No * What is defined by the IssuanceIdPreset.dat file in the C:\
Not issued automatically. Progam Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config folder applies for the
automatic patient ID issuance logic.
See Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID
Issuance in FR11: Function-specific Reference.
107 Enable mAs Value Yes Specifying whether or not to recalculate the mAs value using
Recalculation Recalculated. the actual PPS result edit function.
No
Not recalculated.
108 Xcon Format Type 0 : Old Specifying the X-CON type.
Conventional X-CON other than for mammography.
1 : Old-Expand 1 : Old-Expand is applicable to Shimadzu UD150B-40/L-40/
Expanded Shimadzu X-CON format L-40E/L-40F models.
4 : Mammo1
X-CON-1 for mammography use.
5 : Mammo2
X-CON-2 for mammography use.
6 : Mammo3
X-CON-3 for mammography use (Not used)
109 Xcon Interlock Yes Specifying whether or not to transmit the interlock command.
Command Transfer Transmitted.
No
Not transmitted.
111 Xcon Serial_TX 0 : 1200 Specifying the X-CON serial transfer rate (unit: bit).
Baudrate 1 : 2400
2 : 4800
3 : 9600
112 Xcon No-Response 0-255 (20) Specifying the timeout value for response coming from the
Timeout X-CON (unit: 100msec).
113 Xcon Data Reception 0-255 (20) Specifying the timeout value for reception of data coming from
Timeout the X-CON (unit: 100msec).
114 Media Auto Mount Yes Specifying whether or not to automatically mount the media
Automatically mounted. (DVD) at CL startup.
No
Not mounted automatically.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
115 Synapse Host for Synapse Specifying name of the Synapse server that offers the Web
Web Query Query function.
* Make sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.

* A maximum of 255 alphanumerics can be used to specify the
server name.
116 Web Query Root /All%20Patients Specifying a root folder of the Synapse server to be searched
Path for with the Web Query function.
* A maximum of 128 two-bytes characters and 256

alphanumerics can be used to specify the root folder.
117 Xcon DoseValue1 0 : Average Organ Dose Specifying which of the mammary gland absorption dose,
Assigns the mammary gland absorption dose to Value 1. exposure dose and area dose (of the two types of dose values
1 : Entrance Dose transmitted from the X-CON) is to be assigned to Value 1.
Assigns the exposure dose to Value 1.
2 : Dose Product
Assigns the area dose to Value 1.
118 Xcon DoseValue2 0 : Average Organ Dose Specifying which of the mammary gland absorption dose,
Assigns the mammary gland absorption dose to Value 2. exposure dose and area dose (of the two types of dose values
1 : Entrance Dose transmitted from the X-CON) is to be assigned to Value 2.
Assigns the exposure dose to Value 2.
2 : Dose Product
Assigns the area dose to Value 2.
119 Enable Velocity 0 : No Specifying whether to display or hide the high-sensitivity
Sensitivity Button Hides all. selection button for high-speed erasure of data on the
1 : Yes (Velocity_T Only) VELOCITY.
Displays only on the VELOCITY T.
2 : Yes (Velocity_U Only)
Displays only on the VELOCITY U.
3 : Yes (Both)
Displays on both the VELOCITY T and U.
120 Xcon No-Data Default 0 : Output Default Condition Specifying the setting for output of actual result value when it
Output Outputs the default database value by setting it up to the couldnt be received from the X-CON.
tag.
1 : Doesnt Output Anything
Does not set up exposure-related information to the tag.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
122 External Character 0 : Replace asterisk Specifying how to convert unspecified external characters,
Conversion Replaces an external character with the asterisk. used to represent a kanji patient name, that have been input
1 : DataCut from the outside, such as RIS.
Cut off the kanji patient name.
123 MWM Not Received No Specifying whether or not to delete the study information when
Condition Delete Study information is not deleted. C-FIND-RES is notified even though the Network WL tab has
Study Yes not been selected.
Study information is deleted.
124 Enable Clear View for Yes Specifying whether or not to enable mammography images to
Mammography Enabled. be displayed on the high-luminance view box.
No
Disabled. * To enable this option, also confirm setup values for Nos. 125
to 130.
125 Clear View Mode: -288 to 288 ( -11) Specifying an offset value ( 100 times) to be added to the
Offset GS (100) GS value when displaying a mammography image on a high-
luminance view box.
126 Clear View Mode: -80 to 80 ( 1) Specifying an offset value ( 10 times) to be added to the
Offset GA (10) GA value when displaying a mammography image on a high-
luminance view box.
Offset DRE (10) DRE value when displaying a mammography image on a
high-luminance view box.
* Specify 2 when the SL-IC300 is connected.

128 Clear View Mode: A to T ( E) Specifying a fixed value (A to T) for DRT when displaying a
Fix DRT mammography image on a high-luminance view box.
* This parameter is used whenever a mammography image is

displayed on a high-luminance view box.
Offset MDE (10) MDE value when displaying a mammography image on a high-
luminance view box.
* Specify 2 when the SL-IC300 is connected.

130 Clear View Mode: Fix A to T ( E) Specifying a fixed value (A to T) for MDT when displaying a
MDT mammography image on a high-luminance view box.
* This parameter is used whenever a mammography image is

displayed on a high-luminance view box.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
131 Enable MultipleStudy Yes Specifying whether or not to permit multiple studies to start at
Permitted. the same time.
No
Not permitted.
132 Enable SpecialPrint Yes Specifying whether or not to enable the special print function.
Enabled.
No * Also confirm the setup value for No. 77 of PRINTER setup
Disabled. items.
133 Use 12on1 Film Print Yes Specifying whether or not to use 12on1 format output from the
in MediaList Used. media list.
No
Not used. * If Yes is selected, normal print is disabled.
134 MWM Yes Specifying whether or not to permit regeneration of
StudyInstanceUID Permitted. StudyInstanceUID for the MWM study.
Regeneration No
Not permitted.
135 Enable Swap Image Yes Specifying whether or not to allow study image swapping/
In Order Enabled. menu change when an order is received.
No
Disabled. * Applicable only in Japan.
136 Xcon Serial_TX 0 to 32 ( 0) Serial port number used for the X-CON control.
Control Port2 (Type in 0 if this number is not used.) For Siemens mammography X-CON
137 Exposure Guidance http://localhost : 8080 Top-page URL of the exposure guidance (Pico positioning
URL guidance).
* Applicable only in Japan.

138 FUJITSU Recept 1 to 65535 ( 5011) Port number for the FUJITSU receipt computer to receive
Computer data.
Receiving Port
Number * Applicable only in Japan.
139 FUJITSU Recept 1 to 1000 ( 1000) Timeout value for the FUJITSU receipt computer to receive
Computer continuous text. (Unit = msec)
Receiving Timeout
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
140 Enable IP Use Count Yes Specifying whether or not to enable list-form display of
List Enabled. information of how many times the IP was used.
No
Disabled. * Use the LOG SHARE setup function to register the host
name and IP address of the CL targeted for calculation of IP
use count information.
141 Enable IP Use Count Yes Specifying whether or not to enable reset of the IP use count.
Reset Enabled.
No * Leave the setting to its default value of No.
Disabled.
142 Xcon Serial_TX 0 : none Specifying the X-CON serial transfer parity.
Parity 1 : odd
2 : even
143 TOSHIBA-RIS 172.16.1.20 [Toshiba RIS] IP address of RIS client device. 15 characters at
IpAddress the maximum.

144 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 65535 ( 6001) [Toshiba RIS] Port number for RIS connection (RIS side).
ConnectPortForRIS
145 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 65535 ( 6000) [Toshiba RIS] Port number for RIS connection (CL side).
ConnectPortForIIP
146 TOSHIBA-RIS http://172.16.1.30/e-ris/java/fcr-ris.htm?logincode=tosrim [Toshiba RIS] Default URL of RIS. 256 characters at the
RisDefaultURL maximum.

147 TOSHIBA-RIS \\172.16.1.20\RisShare [Toshiba RIS] Folder shared between RIS and CL. 256
TemporaryFolder characters at the maximum.

148 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 60 ( 5) [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an exposure
ExposureStartMsg start message till receiving a reply from RIS.
TimeOut
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
149 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 10 ( 3) [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an exposure
ExposureStartMsg start message.
RetryCount
150 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 60 ( 5) [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a patient list
PatListDisplayMsg display request message till receiving a reply from RIS.
TimeOut
151 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 10 ( 3) [Toshiba RIS] Number of retires made for sending a patient list
PatListDisplayMsg display request message.
RetryCount
152 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 60 ( 5) [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an exposure
ExposureEndMsg completion notification message till receiving a reply from RIS.
TimeOut
153 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 10 ( 3) [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an exposure
ExposureEndMsg completion notification message.
RetryCount
154 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 60 ( 2) [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a RIS
ApplicationEndMsg termination request message till receiving a reply from RIS.
TimeOu
155 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 10 ( 3) [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending a RIS
ApplicationEndMsg termination request message.
RetryCount
156 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 60 ( 2) [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a connection
ConnectionWatch monitor message till receiving a reply from RIS.
MsgTimeOut
157 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 60 ( 2) [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an external input
ExternalInputMsg information notification message till receiving a reply from RIS.
TimeOut
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (158 to 163, 165 and 167)

For cluster
connection
158 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 10 ( 3) [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an external
ExternalInputMsg input information notification message.
RetryCount
159 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 10 ( 3) [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending a connection
ConnectionWatch monitor message.
MsgRetryCount
160 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 365 ( 10) [Toshiba RIS] Retention period for shared folder information
IFFilesPreservation file (days).
Period
161 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 : With series [Toshiba RIS] Type of exposure result information file. With or
ResultType With series information set without series information set.
1 : With no series
Without series information set * Applicable only in Japan.
162 TOSHIBA-RIS 0 to 120 ( 60) [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from initiating RIS screen till
RISInitializeStartMsg receiving a RIS initialization completion notification message.
TimeOut
163 Enable Auto IP Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable the Auto IP Shelter
Shelter for 550x Enabled. function.
No
Disabled.
165 Enable Auto Marker Yes Specifying whether or not to use the function to automatically
Used. embed markers (lead characters) in an exposed image.
No
Not used.
167 PDI Drive Letter Specifying an alphabetical letter assigned to the drive on the
CD-R drive targeted for output by using the PDI function.
* Use an alphabetical letter in capital.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (168 to 171 and 177 to 182)

For cluster
connection
168 PDI Use CrtLut A maximum of 64 one-byte characters. Specifying SoftcopyLUT applied to a processed image by
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\PDI.lut using the PDI function.
* Use the absolute path to specify the LUT filename (including

extension). If it is left empty, no CrtLut processing is
performed.
* No extension is included in the default setting determined by
software version V6.0 (B). To use the default setting from
software version V6.0 (B), add extension .lut to the end of
the filename.
169 PDI Image Density 0 : ST Specifying pixel density of a stored image by using the PDI
1 : HQ function.
170 PDI Use Multibyte Yes Specifying whether or not to include multi-byte information in
Included. the DICOM contents by using the PDI function.
No
Not included.
171 PDI Transfer Syntax 0 : Explicit VR Little Endian Specifying a DICOM contents transfer syntax by using the PDI
1 : Jpeg Lossless function.
* Select 0:Explicit VR Little Endian if complied with IHE.

177 DAP Serial_TX Parity 0:none Specifying a DAP serial transfer parity.
1:odd
2:even
178 DAP Serial_TX 0-32 ( 0) Specifying a DAP serial transfer control port number.
Control port (0: Not used.)
179 DAP Message Trial 1-255 ( 3) Specifying a DAP message transfer trial count.
Count
180 DAP Address A Specifying a DAP address character while a DAP is
connected.
(Specify a capital alphabet.)
181 Wait Time for 1-30 ( 1) Specifying a time to wait (in seconds) until a response is
Response. From received after a related command was transferred to the DAP.
DAP
182 DAP Status Display A maximum of 5 one-byte characters. Specifying a caption used to indicate a related status while a
Strings ( DAP) DAP is connected.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
185 Enable Display Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable the function to
Reverse Marker Enables the function to automatically display the right-and- automatically display the right-and-left reverse marker.
left reverse marker.
No * Determine the right-and-left reverse marker to
Disables the function to automatically display the right-and- C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ReverseMarker.bmp.
left reverse marker.
186 Reverse Marker A maximum of 7 one-byte characters. Specifying relative positions of the X coordinate and the Y
Position [%] (X\Y) ( 12\5) coordinate at the center, in relation to the width of the right-
and-left reverse marker.
* Determining the top left as the original point, delimit the

numbers from 0 to 100 with \. The fist figure is set to
represent relative position of the X coordinate and the other
that follows is to represent relative position of the Y
coordinate.
187 Reverse Marker 0 : White-Black Specifying foreground and background colors of the right-and-
Color (Fore Color- While - Black left reverse marker.
Back Color) 1 : White-Clear
White - Clear
2 : Black-White
Black - White
3 : Black-Clear
Black - Clear
188 Mass Order Site A maximum of 49 one-byte characters. Specifying to which tag the site identification code, entered
Code Mapping Tag (Blank) using the screening examination ordering function, is to be
mapped.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (197 to 199, 307 and 308)

For cluster
connection
197 Alert MSG When Yes
Specifying whether or not to display the message when the
Patient Information Displays the message when the patient information is patient information is changed at the time of connecting to
will be Modified changed. Synapse RIS.
SynapseRIS No
Dose not display the message when the patient information
is changed.
198 Grid Data Sort Order 0:String A condition for sorting records in the list window.
1:Number
199 Overwrite of 0:Not Overwrite Specifying whether or not to overwrite patient data in the local
the Patient Info 1:Overwrite drive with the one acquired from receipt computer.
(Applicable only in Japan.)
307 Simplified Ordering C:\Usr\IIP\OrderingReportShare\ Specifying the directory to share files of the actual result
Report Share Folder information when connecting to Synapse RIS.
308 Synapse RIS URL http://localhost:8080 Specifying the URL to access the Synapse RIS.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Detailed explanations
31. ID Online Acquisition Info. Code Setup
CP850 : DOS Latin1
00000504.EPS
CP1252 : Win Latin1
00000503.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.7 Configuration Details 7. CONFIG OPTION

CONFIG OPTION setup items (2 to 7)
For cluster
connection
2 Enable Trimming Yes Specifying whether or not to enable the trimming function. Agreement
Function Enables the trimming function. required.
No * Settings for whether the trimming function is enabled or
Disables the trimming function. disabled must be the same in a hospital.
* Select Yes when 8. Enable MammoImage Alignment
Function is enabled.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is Yes for the
3 Enable Reader QC Yes Specifying whether or not to enable the Image Reader QC Agreement
Function Enables the Image Reader QC function. function. required.
No
Disables the Image Reader QC function.
4 Enable Display Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable the Scroll View Agreement
Previous Study Enables the Scroll View function. function (previous study monitoring function). required.
Function No
Disables the Scroll View function. * Note that if the Scroll View function is enabled, you can
select only delayed delivery for image delivery setting.
5 Enable Synapse Yes Specifying whether to enable or disable the Synapse Web
WebQuery Enables the Synapse Web Query function. Query function.
No
Disables the Synapse Web Query function.
6 Enable S/L Value Yes Specifying whether or not to perform setting and warning for
Restriction Function Performs setting and warning. the allowable range of S and L values.
No
Not to perform setting and warning.
7 Enable Yes Specifying whether or not to enable the Retake Analysis
RetakeAnalysis Enables the Retake Analysis function. function.
Function No
Disables the Retake Analysis function. * To enable this option, use the log storage function offered by
the User Utility to collect necessary logs beforehand.
* To enable this option, specify Yes also for Nos. 34 and 51
of IMAGE MODALITY setup items.
* Use the LOG SHARE setup function to register the host
name and IP address of the CL targeted for calculation of
Retake Analysis.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CONFIG OPTION setup items (8 to 10, 12 and 13)

For cluster
connection
8 Enable Yes Specifying whether to enable the mammography image
MammoImage Enables the positioning function (button displayed). positioning function (function button displayed accordingly) or
Alignment Function No disable it (function button not displayed).
Disables the positioning function (button not displayed).
* To enable this option, also specify Yes for No. 2.
* When Yes is specified for this item, set up a used MPM
code using the User Utility.
9 Enable 12on1 Film Yes Specifying whether or not to enable 12on1 format output.
Print Function Enables 12on1 format output.
No * To enable this option, also confirm setup value for No. 133 of
Disables 12on1 format output. CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items and setup values for Nos.
78, 79 and 80 of PRINTER setup items.
10 Enable Exposure Yes Specifying whether or not to enable the exposure guidance
Guidance Enables the exposure guidance function. function for general practitioners.
No
Disables the exposure guidance function. * Applicable only in Japan.
12 Enable MammoQC Yes Specifying whether or not to display the button to call up the
Function Displays the button. Mammo QC function.
No
Does not display the button.
13 Enable Connecting Yes Specifying whether or not to connect CL directly to a DAP.
DAP Directly Connect directly to a DAP.
No
Not to connect directly to a DAP.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.8 Configuration Details 8. CONFIG QC
3.8 Configuration Details 8. CONFIG QC

CONFIG QC setup items (1 to 6)
For cluster
connection
1 Visible QC Record Yes Specifying whether or not to show the Delete button on the Agreement
Delete Button Displays the button. Image Reader QC history information display window. required.
No
Does not display the button.
2 Destination Path of E: \ Specifying a directory for storage of history information on the Agreement
QC Record File Image Reader QC history information display window. required.

3 Country 0:Japanese Shows the country (area) where this equipment is used
currently.
4 Visible QCRecord Yes Specifying whether or not to show the Delete button on the
Delete Button Shows the button. Mammo QC history information display window.
No
Does not show the button.
5 Destination Path of E: \ Specifying a directory for storage of history information on the
QC Record File Mammo QC history information display window.

6 Select CSV Output 1: UseQCTransferPath Specifying how to determine an equipment unit where history
Folder 2: Last Folder information is to be stored on the Mammo QC history
information display window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.9 Configuration Details 9. CONFIG PDA
3.9 Configuration Details 9. CONFIG PDA

CONFIG PDA setup items (1 to 6) (Applicable only in Japan)
For cluster
connection
1 BatteryWarning1 0 to 100 ( 30) Specifying the timing when the first warning is given to indicate
the remaining battery power.
This is specified according to the ratio assuming the fully
charged battery to be 100.
2 BatteryWarning2 0 to 100 ( 20) Specifying the timing when the second warning is given to
indicate the remaining battery power.
This is specified according to the ratio assuming the fully
charged battery to be 100.
* When the remaining battery power is lower than the specified
value, the POCKET id Console becomes inoperative. In such
an instance, charge the POCKET id Console main unit
properly.
* Determine values for 1. BatteryWarning1 and
2. BatteryWarning2 so that 1. BatteryWarning1 >
2. BatteryWarning2.
3 StudyFilePath \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Job Specifying a folder path for the POCKET id Console where the
study information file is to be stored.
* Use a folder to be specified according to this folder path
exclusively for the POCKET id Console.
* Specify a folder that is different from the one specified in 4.
CustomFilePath below.
4 CustomFilePath \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Custom Specifying a folder path for the POCKET id Console where the
screen customize setting file and display item setting file are to
be stored.
* Use a folder to be specified according to this folder path
exclusively for the POCKET id Console.
* Specify a folder that is different from the one specified in 3.
StudyFilePath above.
5 LoginFlag 0 : OFF Specifying whether login entry is essential or not at startup.
Not to display the login window at startup. When ON is specified, entry of technologist name and
1 : ON password is required every time logging onto the POCKET id
Displays the login window at startup. Console.
* Entered technologist name and password are transferred
using the CR Consoles User Utility function.
6 PDAShare Interval 30 to 300 ( 60) File sharing polling interval (sec) in PDA connection of LAN
connection mode. (reserved)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.10 Configuration Details 10. CONFIG QR
3.10 Configuration Details 10. CONFIG QR

CONFIG QR setup items (1 to 3)
For cluster
connection
1 Retrieved Image 0 : Normal Specifying image confirmation finish mode.
Viewer Finish Mode Normal finish (finishing after clicking the finish button)
1 : Finish After Reprint
Finishes after generating reprint.
2 Reverse LUT For 0 : None Specifying whether or not to perform LUT reverse-conversion
Processed Image No Console reverse-conversion processing is performed. processing when a processed image is retrieved.
1 : SendConfigurationInformation
Console reverse-conversion processing is performed on the
printer side after LUT type information is sent to the printer.
2 : ApplyReverseLUT
Console reverse-conversion processing is performed at the
output process of the console.
3 The Patient Format * : (1) family Specifying which element(s) of a patient name is to be
For Search Condition *^* : (2) family, given matched with the search conditions.
*^*^* : (3) family, given, middle
*^*^*^* : (4) family, given, middle, prefix * A patient name consists of the following five elements.
*^*^*^*^* : (5) family, given, middle, prefix, suffix This setup item is to determine which of those five elements
*=* : (1) Multi-byte support to (1) above. are to be matched with the search conditions.
*^*=*^* : (2) Multi-byte support to (2) above. family, given, middle, prefix, suffix
*^*^*=*^*^* : (3) Multi-byte support to (3) above. * * appearing in the selective alternatives at left represents
*^*^*^*=*^*^*^* : (4) Multi-byte support to (4) above. one of the patient name elements.
*^*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*^* : (5) Multi-byte support to (5) above. ^shows delimitation between the elements, and =shows
that multi-byte characters can be typed in.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM 5. Perform the setup steps indicated below:
Connection
This appendix explains about the procedure for changing the name I
element sequence and delimiter.
At some institutions, a patient name is displayed on the monitor by II
changing the sequence of its elements. For example, the name Fuji
Taro may be displayed as Taro Fuji (with the given name and family III
name positions interchanged).
The DICOM protocol stipulates only one sequence of name elements. 00000424.EPS
Therefore, it is necessary to define the relationship between the name I. To validate this standard (condition) change, check it ( ).
element sequence stipulated by standards (or conditions) other than II. Enter a one-byte character delimiter between name elements.
DICOM and the name element sequence stipulated by DICOM.
u NOTES u
1. Start the Service Utility of the CL. Any one-byte characters can be used as a delimiter. However, a
one-byte space ( ), hyphen (-), comma (,) or period (.) should
normally be used.
2. Click .
One or two kinds of delimiters can be defined (either can be used
as a delimiter). For instance, enter -, if you wish to define both of
3. Click the sign within . hyphen and comma.
Input example: Element3=given, middle-family
4. Select a standard (condition) (e.g., FINP).
III. Enter a multi-byte character delimiter between name elements.
u NOTES u
Any one- or two-byte characters can be used as a delimiter.
However, a two-byte space ( ) or hyphen () should normally be
used.
Standard (or condition) One or two kinds of delimiters can be defined (either can be used
as a delimiter). For instance, enter if you wish to define both of
two-byte space and hyphen.
Input example: Element3=given middle family
00000423.EPS
IMPORTANT
Do not change the settings for DICOM_MWM_PPS, DICOM_IN, or
DICOM_OUT.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function
6. Set up name elements for one-byte characters. 3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film
Enter name elements directly on the keyboard. To separate one name Sorting Function
element from the other, use a delimiter defined in step 4. above.
When a printer targeted for DIOCM printout has a multiple number of
One name element BIN (sorter), film output is possible to different BINs accordingly
(family (name))
depending on the requirement.
Two name elements
(family given) In the procedure described herein, the printer targeted for DICOM
printout is the FM-DP L and the requirement (recognition key) for film
Three name elements output to each BIN is the equipment identification code (DEV_CODE),
(family given middle) as illustrated below.
Four name elements
(family given middle u Setup example
prefix)
Five name elements
(family given middle BIN1
prefix suffix)
MU000010.EPS
BIN2
FM-DPL
7. Set up name elements for multi-byte characters.
RU-1 RU-2 RU-3
Enter name elements directly on the keyboard. To separate one name CL
Equipment
element from the other, use a delimiter defined in step 5. above.
identification code : A B C
BIN setting : 1 2 2 00000400.EPS
One name element
(family (name))
Described below is the setup procedure.
Two name elements
(family given)
Three name elements
1. Start up CL Service Utility mode.
(family given middle)
Four name elements 2. Click [Setup Configuration Item].
(family given middle
prefix) 3. Select and
Five name elements from the tree on the left-hand side of the window. Select
(family given middle then the DICOM print AE name (fujiprinter - DICOM -
prefix suffix) FM-DP L).
MU000011.EPS
The AE setup window for the FM-DP L opens on the right-hand
side of the window.
8. Use the Configuration (F) menu to save the setup data.
4. Click .
The DICOMSetup window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5. Make the following selections and entry. 7. Select .
II
III
00000055.EPS
I. Select BIN_I.
II. Select a recognition key (e.g.: DEV_CODE). 00000054.EPS
(Indent for REQ_SRV, MPM and BODY_PART.)

The right-hand side of the window changes to the film sorting
III. Enter a BIN number (e.g.: 1). setup list.
REFERENCE
In the Default Bin Number box, specify the default BIN number to 8. Click .
which the film is to be output when an input number verification is
not possible. The Film Sorting window opens.
6. Click .
You are returned to the previous window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
9. Make the following selections and entries. The window below shows the results of setup example presented at
the beginning of this section.
II
III
00000053.EPS
00000052.EPS
I. Select the AE name.
II. Enter a verification data item.
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is DEV_
CODE, enter an equipment identification code
(e.g.: A, B or C).
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is REQ_
SRV*, enter a requesting department name (e.g.: Radio).
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is MPM*,
enter an MPM code (e.g.: 0200).
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is BODY_
PART*, enter an anatomical region (e.g.: CHEST).
(Note that * indicates an indent.)
III. Enter a BIN number.
10. Click .
You are returned to the previous window.
11. To set up other verification data items continuously, repeat

steps 8. to 10 . above.
12. Use the Configuration menu to save the setup data.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup
3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function 5. Enter settings as directed below:

Setup
The patient information sharing function is exercised to share the
patient information between two or more CLs and IDT-IV units existing I
in the same network.
In compliance with an ID inquiry (IP barcode) coming from the Image
Reader, the relevant CL will acquire requested ID information from any II
IDT-IV or CL even when that CL has no such information.
When the IDT-IV and CLs are interconnected as shown below, the III
patient information sharing function is set up to enable the units
(e.g., idt4-a and cl-a) to share the patient information.
IV
u Connection example
group-A group-B
V
idt4-a idt4-b
172.16.1.101 172.16.1.102
GateWay 00000555.EPS
I. Enter the host name.

II. Enter the IP address.
cl-a cl-b III. Select a machine attribute.
172.16.1.201 172.16.1.202 IV. Specify the group name.
00000549.EPS
u NOTE u
The setup procedure is described below: When you specify the group name for the first time, the GroupName
field contains no entry. Therefore, enter a group name from the
1. Start the CLs Service Utility. keyboard.
2. Click [Setup Configuration Item]. V. When you define the machine as a gateway, check .
3. Click . u NOTE u
The right-hand area of the window changes to the CONFIG\IDT When the patient information is to be shared by groups, it is
CONNECTING window. necessary to define one unit of each group as the gateway (check
).
4. Click .
The IDT Connection window opens. 6. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.14 MAC Address Manual Input
7. To set up another machine, repeat steps 4. through 6. 3.14 MAC Address Manual Input
8. With the Config (F) menu, save the setup data. When the MAC address cannot automatically be acquired, this utility is
used to make a manual entry and let the CL recognize it.
The window shown below indicates the results that are obtained when
the equipment is set up as indicated in the connection example at the u NOTE u
beginning of this section. If the MAC address is not acquired, the CL-AP does not start up (Error
20110 or 20111 occurs).
When the following window opens and indicates that the values in the
MAC address fields are all 0s, it means that the MAC address is not
automatically acquired.
In such an instance, enter a 12-digit value (00:50:DA:C4:D5:8D when
only one CL is used). The next time the CL starts up, it recognizes the
entered value as the MAC address so that the CL-AP starts running.
If two or more CLs are used, make the following entries. For each CL
addition, increment the last two-digit value by one (in hexadecimal
notation).
00000556.EPS
2nd unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 8E
3rd unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 8F
4th unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 90

MU000008.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function 6. Click .

Setup
Setup of the log information sharing function enables you to use the 7. To register other CLs successively, repeat steps 4 through 6.
Retake Analysis function and IP use count calculation function.
8. Use the Config (F) menu to save the setup data.
u NOTE u
To make use of the Retake Analysis function, the OpRetakeAnalysis
option key must be installed.
New setup
Described below is the procedure used to newly set up host name and
IP address of the CL with which the log information is to be shared.
1. Start up the CL Service Utility.
3. Click .
4. Click .
The Log Share window opens.
II
00000565.EPS
I. Enter the host name.
II. Enter the IP address.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup
Deleting unnecessary settings Changing settings

Described below is the procedure used to change host names and IP
addresses of other CLs with which the log information is to be shared.
2. Click [Setup Configuration Item]. NOTE
3. Click . Host name and IP address of this equipment are only to be displayed
and cannot be changed.
4. On the right-hand side pane of the window, select a CL

name to be deleted and then click [Delete]. 1. Start up the CL Service Utility.
3. Click .
4. Select host name and IP address of the CL targeted for

change.
5. Click .
The Log Share window opens.
6. Change host name and IP address appropriately.
7. Click .
8. To change settings of other CLs successively, repeat steps

4 through 7.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
4. Display Optimization LUT
4. Display Optimization LUT TPS 9415 TD15 : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
Install an LUT file that matches the display characteristics. (model TPS9416TD15/H2)
REFERENCE (model TPS 9416TD15/H2-1)
PRESTO! (B/W) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300
The LUT file is used to adjust luminance values measured on an image (monochrome)
displayed on the monitor. PRESTO! (Color) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300
(color)
ikegami MDM2130 : Ikegami 1k landscape monitor
nanao L350P : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
(model L350P-TS)
2. Click [LUT]. nanao L351P : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
The Monitor List window opens. (model L351P-TS)
nanao SL-IC200 : LCD SL-IC200
3. Select the connected display and then click . nanao L362T : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
(model L362T)
Linear LUT : Linear (straight line gradation) LUT
nanao Radiforce : LCD monitor SL-IC300
GS310-CLG (monochrome monitor)
Select the connected
display monitor type. nanao Radiforce R31 : LCD monitor SL-IC300 (color monitor)
nanao L560T-C : EIZO 17" LCD monitor with a touch panel
(model L560T-C)
nanao Radiforce G22-CL: LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce GS220 : LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce : LCD monitor (3M monochrome monitor)
GS310-ECN
nanao Radiforce RX320 : LCD monitor (3M color monitor)
Settings are thus completed, and the system returns to the IIP
Service Utility window.
IN000129.EPS
u NOTE u
To use a nanao L351P (model L351P-TS) with the CL software A08 or
earlier, install the LUT file on the FD provided with the LCD monitor.
[Installation procedures]
Copy the lut.txt and nanao_L351P.env files on the FD to the
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\lut folder (overwrite the lut.txt file).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup
5. Restoring/Backing Up 4. Select a save destination directory and then click

.
the Configuration File
The system returns to the Configuration Restore/Backup window.
Configuration Restore/Backup
5. Click .
For details of procedures used for restoring the configuration
file, see 14. Restoring the CL-Config in RI: Reinstalling the
Software. u NOTES u
Even when the save process ends, no message appears to
1. Click [Configuration Restore/Backup] on the main menu. indicate it. While the save process is being performed, the mouse
The configuration Restore/Backup window opens. cursor is replaced by the mark. When the mark changes
back to the mouse cursor, it means that the save process is
2. Click [...] for the Configuration Backup area.
ended.
Note, however, that the mark appears only when the mouse
cursor is positioned within the Configuration Restore/Backup
window.
If, on the PC where an FD is used, a message appears prompting
you to change the FD, insert a new FD into the PC.
6. Click .
The system returns to the main menu.

00000417.EPS
A window opens, prompting you to specify the save destination.
3. Click the downward arrow mark ( ) within
in the Drive: box to

select the drive onto which the configuration file is to be
saved.
The Directory: box shows the directory structure of the selected
drive.
REFERENCE
If drive a is selected, a message appears to prompt for the
insertion of an FD.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6. Retrieving EDR Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data
6. Retrieving EDR Data 2. Select one or more EDR data.
Retrieve EDR Backup Data When selecting only one piece of EDR data
I. Select an EDR data item by clicking it.
1. Click [Retrieve EDR Backup Data] on the main menu. The selected item becomes highlighted.
A list of EDR data appears. When selecting two or more contiguous EDR data (selecting all
data between A and B in the window illustration below)
EDR data list

00000068.EPS
00000067.EPS
I. Click the first item of a set of contiguous data (A002 in the

REFERENCE above window illustration).
No EDR data appears immediately after installation. The selected item becomes highlighted.
EDR data listings do not appear until images are transferred to the
CL. II. Hold down the Shift key and click the last item (A006 in the
above window illustration) of the contiguous data set.
All the items from the first to the last become highlighted.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6. Retrieving EDR Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data
When selecting two or more noncontiguous EDR data 4. Click the downward arrow mark ( ) within
in the Drive box to select the drive
onto which the EDR data is to be saved.
The left-hand area of the window shows the directory structure of
the selected drive.
A
B 5. Select the save destination directory and then click

.
C
REFERENCE
00000069.EPS If drive a is selected, a message appears to prompt for the
I. Click the first item to be selected (A002 in the above window insertion of an FD.
illustration).
The selected item becomes highlighted. When the save process ends, the system returns to the Retrieve
EDR Backup Data window.
II. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the second item to be
selected (A004 in the above window illustration).
6. Click .
The second item becomes highlighted as well.
III. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the third item to be selected
(A006 in the above window illustration).
The third item becomes highlighted as well.
IV. To select any additional item, repeat step III.
REFERENCE
Even if highlighted items are hidden when the window scrolls,
they are retained as selected items.
3. Click .
A window opens, prompting you to specify the save destination.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify Connection
7. Verifying the Connection to 2. Verify the Ping or DICOM connection as directed below:
Other Connected Equipment Verifying the connection with the Ping
Verify Connection I. In the field, enter the host
1. Click [Verify Connection] on the main menu. name or IP address of the equipment to be subjected to
connection verification.
The Verify Connection window opens.
REFERENCE
Clicking the downward arrow mark within
lists the host names of
equipment registered in the Service Utility.
II. Click .
III. Verify the connection.

The connection is normal when the following message is
displayed four times within the command prompt window.
Reply from 172.16.1.20: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
00000070.EPS
REFERENCE
Values for time<10ms and TTL=128 in the message above
vary depending on the network status. Connection remains
normal even though such values vary.
IV. Close the command prompt window.

The system returns to the Verify Connection window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify Connection
Verifying the DICOM equipment connection

3. Click .
u NOTE u
To verify connections between DICOM equipment units, it is The system returns to the main menu.
necessary that both this equipment and other connected
equipment must support Service Class for the Verification
function.
For details of the setup procedure, see CL+HI-C655/

QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in
OE3: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
I. Click the downward arrow mark within
to specify the AE name of
the DICOM equipment to be subjected to connection

verification.
II. Click .
III. Verify the connection.

When the window below opens, the connection is OK.
00000246.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
8.1 Initializing the Image Database
8. Management of Various 2. Click [DataBase Utility].
Databases DataBase Utility The ImageDB Initialization window opens.
This section describes the procedures for initializing the image

database, deleting the queued output images (clearing the contents of
the image output queue), and initializing the patient database.
8.1 Initializing the Image Database 00000130.EPS
u NOTES u 3. Click .
When the OS is installed newly, be sure to initialize the image
database. If you start up the CL-AP without initializing the image u NOTE u
database, an error window opens (error code: 50001, 20001, 30107,
30151, 20110, etc.). If is clicked with the version B software, a
confirmation window like that shown below is opened.
If the MSDE is not running, database initialization cannot be effected.
While the MSDE is running, the icon is displayed in the task tray Click to proceed to the next step.
at the lower right corner of the screen. If the icon is not displayed,
restart the PC.
If the SQL Server is not running, database initialization cannot be
effected. If it is not running, restart the PC.
If the image output queue is not empty, database initialization cannot
be effected. Delete the images from the image output queue. MU000018.EPS
For the procedure for deleting the images from the image output The command prompt window opens to display the following
queue, see 8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output message:
Queue.

For the Service Utility startup procedure, see
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility. 00000184.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue
4. Press the <Enter> key. 8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image
The image database initialization process ends in about Output Queue
20 seconds.
u NOTES u 1. Start the Service Utility.

When the following message appears, the image database is not 2. Click [DataBase Utility].
initialized.
The DataBase Utility window opens.
It failed in initialized DB.
Check that the MSDE is running and that no image is placed on the 3. Click .
image output queue.
To start the MSDE u NOTE u
Restart the PC. Verify that the icon is displayed in the task
tray. If is clicked with the version B
[For Windows Vista/7] software, a confirmation window like that shown below is opened.
To start the SQL Server
I. Restart the PC. Click to proceed to the next step.
II. Select Control Panel from the menu and then
double-click Administrative Tools.
III. Double-click Computer Management.
IV. Sequentially select Computer Management, Service and
Programs, SQL Server Component Manager and then SQL
Server 2005 Service. MU000019.EPS
V. Make sure that the SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) is running.
If the image output queue is not empty The command prompt window opens to display the following
Delete the images from the image output queue. message:
For the procedure for deleting the images from the

image output queue, see 8.2. Clearing the Contents of
the Image Output Queue.
5. When the message Press any key to continue appears 00000347.EPS
again, press the <Enter> key.

You are then returned to the ImageDB Initialization window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8.3 Initializing the Patient Database
4. Press the <Enter> key. 8.3 Initializing the Patient Database

The images are then deleted from the output queue and you are
returned to the DataBase Utility window. 1. Start the Service Utility.
2. Click [DataBase Utility].

5. Click .
You are then returned to the main menu.
3. Click .
u NOTE u
If is clicked with the version B software,

a confirmation window like that shown below is opened.
Click to proceed to the next step.
MU000020.EPS
The command prompt window opens to display the following

message:
00000557.EPS

The patient database is then initialized and you are returned to the
DataBase Utility window.
5. Click .

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
8.4 Initializing the Study Reservation Database (Only for B version)
8.4 Initializing the Study Reservation

Database (Only for B version)
2. Click [DataBase Utility].

3. Click .
4. Click .
MU000021.EPS
The command prompt window opens to display the following

message:
MU000017.EPS

The patient database is then initialized and you are returned to the
DataBase Utility window.
6. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
9.1 Setting the Hospital Card Data Format
9. Setting the Magnetic Card 3. Click [Read Code].
Magnetic Card Setting The ISO Card Read Code window opens.
4. Edit special characters.

9.1 Setting the Hospital Card Data Format u NOTES u
For detailed descriptions of the data format setup procedure, see

Characters on the gray background cannot be edited.
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option], under Be sure to enter one-byte characters.
Appx IN: Installation Appendix.
The default setting is complied with ISO7811-6.
9.2 Defining the ISO Card Character Read

Code
When using an ISO type magnetic card, special characters need to be
set up as follows, as required.
u NOTE u
This function will not basically be used in Japan.
1. Start up the CLs Service Utility mode.
2. Click [Magnetic Card Setting].

The Magnetic Card Setting window opens. MU000007.EPS
REFERENCE
To delete an entered character, enter a one-byte space.
5. Click .
You are returned to the Magnetic Card Setting window.
6. Click .
MU000006.EPS
You are returned to the main menu.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
10. Setting the Barcode Barcode Setting
10. Setting the Barcode To add/modify a format

1.
Barcode Setting Operate as follows on the Barcode window.
To add a format, click [Add].
To modify a format, select a format for modification from the list and
This section describes the procedures used for barcode format settings
then click Modify.
(addition, modification and deletion).
A multiple number of formats can be determined. Data will be processed The Barcode Format window opens.
in the format in which the Barcode Type, Start Character and Stop
Character match the first. 2. Make necessary settings as follows.
u NOTE u
Note that only one setting will be generated where Other is determined
for the Barcode Type.
1. Start up the CLs Service Utility mode.

2. Click [Barcode Setting].

A format list appears on the Barcode window.
00000561.EPS
Barcode Type: Barcode type

0: NW7; 1: Code39 (Not NW7); 2: Others
Start Character: Start character
a to d for NW7; Code39 is fixed to *.
Stop Character: Stop character
a to d for NW7; Code39 is fixed to *.
Barcode Length: Barcode length
Does not include Start Character/Stop Character. 1 represents an
indeterminate length.
Data Offset: Data start position
Data Length: Data length
1 shows that a read barcode length is handled as a data length.
Purpose: Purpose of use of the barcode (effective only when
POCKET id Console is used.)
0: Patient ID/Accession No./Reception No., 1: Technologist
username, 2: Technologist password
00000560.EPS The barcode is read on the POCKET id Console according to the
barcode format of the purpose specified here.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
10. Setting the Barcode Barcode Setting
u NOTE u
For NW7, it is not allowed to use a for Start Character and c for Stop
Character because those settings represent an IP barcode.
3. Click .
You are returned to the Barcode window.
4. Click .
u NOTE u
When any data other than 0 has been set to Data Offset, be sure to
specify a Data Length value smaller than Barcode Length-Data Offset.
If 1 is specified, data may include a stop character or an indeterminate
value resulting thus in an error to occur.
To delete a format
1. In the list on the Barcode window, select a format to be
deleted, and click .
A format thus selected will be deleted.
2. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
11. Customizing the QA Items Customized QA Item
11. Customizing the QA Items Modifying QA items
Customized QA Item 1. Choose or and then click
.
This section describes the procedures for customizing (adding,
modifying, or deleting) the following six QA items of patient information, The QA window opens.
which appear in the QA window:
Kanji Patient Name Sex
REFERENCE
Patient ID Accession No. InputQA opens the QA window that can be used during a study.
Date of Birth Date of Study ListQA opens the QA window that can be used after completion of
a study.
2. Customize QA items I through VI.
2. Click [Customized QA Item].
The patient information list appears.
Patient information list

I
II
III
IV
VI
00000553.EPS
00000552.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
11. Customizing the QA Items Customized QA Item
I. Group number (If this field is left blank, the patient information is Adding patient information
hidden.)
II. Element number (If this field is left blank, the patient information 1. Choose or , select the item to be added
is hidden.) to the patient information list, and then click .
III. Private creator flag
The QA window opens.
IV. VR
V. Acceptable input character type
0 : Linguistic Area (the language selection is complied with)
1 : Single-byte (ANK)
2 : Ideographic (kanji)
3 : Phonetic (change to katakana)
REFERENCE
The V. selection can be made only when PN is selected for VR.
VI. Display caption name
3. Click .
You are then returned to the Customized QA Item window.
Deleting patient information
1. Choose or , select the item to be

deleted from the patient information list, and then click
.
The Close Configuration window opens. 00000554.EPS
2. Make QA data entries and then click .

2. Click . For details on the QA items, see under Modifying QA
The patient information is then deleted. items.
You are then returned to the Customized QA Item window.
Restoring the QA items to the default settings
1. Click .
The contents of InputQA and ListQA both revert to their default

values (with deleted ones restored).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
12. Setting the Selectors Selector Setting
12. Setting the Selectors IV. Choose a Reader Type.

5501
Selector Setting 5502
Velocity Upright
Velocity Table/Universal
This section describes the procedure for setting the selectors. To revert to Cassette, choose a blank from the pull-down
menu of the hostName: field.
1. Start the CLs Service Utility. V. Enter the character string (consisting of up to five characters) to
be displayed on the selector button.
2. Click [Selector Setting]. VI. This entry field appears when 5501 or 5502 is chosen as
Reader Type.
The Selector Setting window opens.
When Yes is specified for No. 163 Enable Auto IP Shelter for
550x under SYSTEM CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION,
3. Perform the following setup steps: choose Yes if you wish that the exposure mode (Auto IP Shelter
mode) be notified automatically to the built-in type equipment
(predetermined to the selector) and No to manually notifying it
I
of the exposure mode.
VII. To restore the currently edited selector to the status that
II prevailed at CL startup, turn this radio button ON.
III 4. Click .
IV You are then returned to the main menu.
V
u NOTE u
If the host name for the 5501 plus, 5502 plus, or other built-in type
equipment is changed in situations where 5501 or 5502 is
VI selected as Reader Type, you must perform the hostName
setup procedure again. If you do not observe this precaution, an
VII error (code: 31099) occurs at CL-AP startup.
00000551.EPS
I. Choose a selector tab.

II. Set the Technique Code paying attention not to set the same
code with other selectors.
III. Select a device to be added to the selector (use the host name
for selection).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files

Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool
This section describes the procedure for copying the CLs log and
configuration files to an HD.
u NOTE u
The procedure for collection of log and configuration files varies
depending on the software version used. Therefore, check the software
version used and then perform necessary procedure appropriately.
For the procedure required for software version V5.0 (B) or earlier,
see 13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier.
For the procedure required for software version V6.0 (B) or later,
see 13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier
13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier A window where to specify the target destination for file copy
opens.
u NOTES u
This function is useful when asking the software design section for
error analysis. Collect log files before uninstalling the software,
otherwise log files will be deleted consequently. MU000029.EPS
Before actually asking for error analysis, be sure to collect log files (Log. * The folder targeted for file copy in the C drive is fixed to
cab), various setup files (Config.cab), and image information files C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP.
(Image.cab), together with the date when the problem arose and Type in 2 and press the <Enter> key.
description of the operation that caused such problem to arise. A window like that shown below opens.
2. Click [Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool].

A command prompt window opens.
MU000030.EPS
II. Copies the configuration files.

The Config.cab file is created.
I III. Copies the log files.
II The Log.cab file is created.
III The Log.cab file contains personal data.
IV IV. Copies the files related to the image information and image
database.
The Image.cab file is created. The Image.cab file contains
MU000005.EPS personal data.
u NOTES u WARNING
If you intend to execute step II, III, or IV without executing step I
(with drive A selected as the copy destination), be sure to insert When it is necessary to take a file that contains personal data out
an FD into the FDD beforehand. of an institution so that it is submitted to analysis, be sure to
obtain advance approval of the relevant institution.
When you have specified HD as the target destination for copying
files, use USB memory or the like to copy Log.cab, Config.cab
and Image.cab that are located immediately below the C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP folder.
3. Click at the upper right corner of the command prompt
window.
I. Specifies the file copy destination (drive A by default). The system returns you to the main menu.
Type in 1 and press the <Enter> key.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later
13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later I. To delete personal information, checkmark it.
II. Select a time range for which logs are to be collected in the file.
Software version V6.0 or later enables you to determine whether or not Specify the collection date range value
to include personal information in log files to be collected. Collects log files of a specified time range.
Input a desired time range in .
u NOTES u (Example: If 30 is input in the box, files of the day on which
the collection was made and the preceding 30 days are
This function is useful when asking the software design section for collected.)
error analysis. Collect log files before uninstalling the software,
otherwise log files will be deleted consequently. Collect all
Collects all log files.
Before actually asking for error analysis, be sure to collect log files (Log.
cab), various setup files (Config.cab), and image information files WARNING
(Image.cab), together with the date when the problem arose and
description of the operation that caused such problem to arise. When it is necessary to take a file that contains personal data out
of an institution so that it is submitted to analysis, be sure to
1. Start the CLs Service Utility. obtain advance approval of the relevant institution.
2. Click [Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool].

The Acquisition Tool window opens. 4. Click .
3. Perform the following steps. A confirmation window opens.
REFERENCE
I When Specify the collection date range value is selected at step
3 above, the time range thus specified is displayed in the
confirmation window that opens.
II
When Collect all is selected, All Routine*.inf will be collected is
displayed.
DCL41302.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later
5. Click . 7. Click to close the Acquisition Tool window.
u NOTE u 8. Copy the collected files onto USB memory or the like.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, a window like that shown Files thus collected are stored on C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP.
below is displayed while files are being collected. In such cases, do Targeted files are the following two:
not click [Cancel] because an error may be caused to occur.
(computer name) _NP.cab
A file from which any personal information was deleted. This file is
created when Delete personal information was checkmarked at
step 3 above.
(computer name) _P.cab
A file from which no personal information was deleted. This file is
created when Delet personal information was not checkmarked at
step 3. above.
MU000036.ai
When the file collection processing is complete, a window like that

shown below opens.
DCL41304.EPS
This filename appears when

6. Click . Delete personal information
was checkmarked at step 3.
The system returns to the Acquisition Tool window. above. MU000034.EPS
REFERENCE
Checkmarking Delete personal information at step 3 above will
activate the [Check Results] button.
If the [Check Results] button is clicked, the relevant text file is
displayed enabling you to check contents of the collected files.
Check contents of the collected files accordingly.
Image_Collect_NP.txt : A text file from which any personal
information was deleted.
Image_Show_P.txt : A text file from which no personal
information was deleted.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags I. Sets the tags (C-FIND-RQ) for the information about the CLs
inquiries addressed to the RIS.
DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting II. Perform internal data mapping setup for the tags (C-FIND-RSP)
received in the form of a response from the RIS to the CL. (1/2)
III. Perform internal data mapping setup for the tags (C-FIND-RSP)
The procedure for DICOM MWM C-FIND tag/internal data mapping received in the form of a response from the RIS to the CL. (2/2)
setup is described below:
u NOTES u
1. Start the CLs Service Utility. The following limitations are imposed on mapping:
The main menu opens. The tags that can be set for the inquiry information are limited to
the standard tags for the MWM and the tags extended by the CL.
2. Click [DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting]. The response tags can be mapped to up to two destinations.
The DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag & Mapping Setting window For response tag mapping, up to three hierarchical layers of the
opens. SQ can be used.
The response tags can be mapped only when they are of the
3. Perform the following setup steps: same VR type.
You cannot select the response tags within the SQ alone. Their
parent tags will also be selected at all times.
When mapping a response tag, an error occurs if only parent SQ
tags are described. Therefore, be sure to describe also daughter
tags.
Received data cannot be processed.
4. Click .
The system returns you to the main menu.
REFERENCE
To copy the Requst Procedure ID (0040, 1001) value to the Study ID
(0020, 0010), for instance, input 00200010 in the line of the Request
Procedure ID.
MU000015.EPS
I II III 00000067.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
15.1 Transferring the Configuration Data
15. Setting the POCKET id Console

P-Console Setting
Set up the POCEKT id Console following the procedures below.
Transferring POCKET id Console configuration files from the CL to
the POCKET id Console
Registering the device ID
Checking version of the POCKET id Console application
15.1 Transferring the Configuration Data MU000023.EPS
When any of the configuration data that relates to the POCKET id

Console was changed, the configuration file should be transferred to the
4. Click .
POCKET id Console.
REFERENCE
The POCKET id Console-related configuration data includes the
following. MU000024.EPS
All items included in CONFIG PDA under Setup Configuration Item

Config SYSTEM CONFIG
Items that specify the language to be used and the like, included in
5. Click .
IMAGE MODALITY under Setup Configuration Item Config Transfer of the configuration file starts and then a window opens
SYSTEM CONFIG to indicate completion of the file transfer.
Setting of padding for the study number and patient ID, included in
CSL/IDT FUNCTION under Setup Configuration Item Config
SYSTEM CONFIG
Intended use (Purpose) of the barcode included in Barcode Format
under Barcode Setting MU000025.EPS
Upon receipt of the configuration file by the POCKET id Console,

1. Place the POCKET id Console in the cradle. the POCKET id Console will be rebooted automatically.
2. Start up the CL Service Utility. NOTES

The main menu opens. If configuration file transfer failed, re-place the POCKET id Console in
the cradle and make sure that the PC recognizes the POCKET id
Console.
3. Click . If the POCKET id Console application has not been started, start it up
and then transfer the configuration file.
The P-Console Setting window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
15.2 Registering the Device ID
15.2 Registering the Device ID 4. In the field, enter device ID of the POCKET
This section describes the procedure for registering device ID of the
POCKET id Console handled on this CL. id Console to be handled on this CL (e.g. FF001).
REFERENCE
NOTE
The POCKET id Console device ID is indicated in the Device ID
It is allowed to register device ID for a maximum of 3 POCKET id tab that appears on the window displayed by selecting the About
Consoles. icon under Start Setting System tab.

5. Click .
The device ID will be added in the PDA DeviceID Registered List
field.
2. Click .
MU000027.EPS
6. Click .
The system returns to the P-Console Setting window.

MU000023.EPS
3. Click .
The PDA DeviceID Registration window opens.
MU000026.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
15.3 Checking Version of the POCKET id Console Application
15.3 Checking Version of the POCKET id 6. Click .

Console Application
You can check version of the application installed on the POCKET id
Console, as follows. NOTE
For a failure to display the application version, re-place the POCKET id
1. Place the POCKET id Console in the cradle. Console in the cradle and make sure that the PC recognizes the
POCKET id Console correctly.
3. Click .
MU000023.EPS
4. Click .
The P-Console Version window opens.
5. Check version of the POCKET id Console application.
Verify
MU000028.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

FR consists of the following:
FR1 Print Output Function FR13 Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing
FR2 DICOM Tag Mapping Function FR14 Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
FR3 Creating /Deleting Markers FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons
FR4 Using the DICOM Log Mode [Applicable only in Japan]
FR5 Display Gradation Correction Setup FR16 Accession Number Data Truncation Function
FR6 DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens) FR17 Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan]
FR7 Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure Result Log Function FR18 Setup of Date and Time Display
FR8 Wake-on-LAN Setup FR19 Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and Windows
FR9 GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup Vista / 7 Coexistent Environment [Applicable only in Japan]
FR10 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
[Applicable only in Japan] FR21 Setting the Exposure Index Function
FR11 Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance FR22 Accession Number Character String Adding Function
FR12 Setup of Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual FR-I
Control Sheet

12/10/2000 00 Revision (FM2950) I, II, 13, 59, 1417
04/10/2001 01 Previous Chapter F Function-specific Reference All pages
modified (FM2951)
05/30/2001 02 Revision for software version A02 (FM3027) I, II, 1-116, 18, 2022, 2-1, 2
05/30/2001 02 Changes in pagination (FM3027) 1-17, 19
2-1
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, 1-7, 2-1, 3-14, 4-14
07/20/2002 05 Revision for software version A08 (FM3428) I, II, 1-1, 1719, 2138, 2-2, 5-1, 2,
6-1, 2
5-2
11/30/2002 06 Changes in pagination (FM3499) 1-13, 15, 16, 21, 2337, 39
39, 41, 7-1, 2
03/01/2003 07 Changes in pagination (FM3634) 1-14, 1618, 2332, 3538, 40, 42
08/20/2003 08 Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) I, II, 13, 8-1, 2, 9-1, 2
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) I, II, 1-13, 15, 20, 22, 41, 9-1
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) I, II, 1-13, 14, 2023, 3-1, 4-1, 2,
5-2, 6-1, 8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 2, 11-14
11/12/2004 12 Corrections (FM4450) I, II, 1-20, 21, 39, 5-1
07/30/2005 14 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, II, 1-1, 6, 8, 11, 1316, 18, 2026,
28, 30, 42, 2-1, 4-2, 12-1, 2, 13-1, 2,
14-1, 2
07/30/2005 14 Changes in pagination (FM4543) 1-9, 10, 12, 17, 19, 27, 29, 3141,
4346
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I, II, 1-38, 41
07/30/2006 16 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) IIV, 1-7, 17, 46, 6-1, 8-1, 9-1, 13-1,
15-1, 2
07/20/2007 17 Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) I, II, 1-8, 11, 13, 42, 44, 46, 2-1,
5-18, 6-1, 12-1, 16-1, 2
05/09/2008 18 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) I, II, 1-16, 2226, 4-2, 14-1, 2
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual FR-II
Control Sheet
10/31/2008 19 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) I, III, 1-8, 16, 17, 45, 48, 14-2, 17-1,
2, 18-18
10/31/2008 19 Changes in pagination (FM5460) 1-1844, 46, 47
11/30/2009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, III, 1-12, 13, 20, 44, 3-1, 4-1, 2,
6-1, 8-1, 4, 9-1, 11-14, 13-1, 14-1,
19-1, 2, 20-118
11/30/2009 20 Changes in pagination (FM5622) 3-24, 8-2, 3, 9-2
03/31/2010 21 Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) I, III, 1-29, 39, 42, 6-1, 8-1, 9-1,
11-1, 13-1, 20-124, 21-1, 2
12/10/2010 22 Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817) I, III, 11-1, 16-1, 20-9, 21-1, 2,
22-14
12/10/2010 22 Changes in pagination (FM5817) 2-3, 4, 5-7, 8, 6-3, 4, 7-3, 4, 8-3, 4,
9-3, 4, 10-3, 4, 12-3, 4, 13-3, 4,
14-3, 4, 15-3, 4, 16-3, 4, 17-3, 4,
18-7, 8, 19-3, 4, 20-8, 1028,
21-3, 4
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) I, III, 3-18, 4-1, 8-1, 14-1, 18-16,
19-1, 20-1, 810, 1824, 26-32
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual FR-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual FR-IV
Print Output Function
Print formats
Print Output Function The CL supports the following formats : Single, Twin, 2on1, 4on1 and
3on1 (energy subtraction images/special format).
Presented herein are the settings necessary for enabling the print
output function. Film
Image
u NOTE u
The CR-IR346/348CL and the Local Printer are abbreviated
hereafter CL and LP, respectively.
Setup necessary when connecting the LP Single TWIN 2on1

Describes various setup items for the sorter or printer type (New or Old)
for when using the LP.
See 1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP.
Setup necessary when editing the film annotation

character format
Describes various setup items for the film annotation character format. 4on1 3on1 F0000020.EPS
See 2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Single : One image is allotted on film.
Character Format.
Twin : Two same images are allotted on film.
Each of the images are subjected to different image
Film annotation character setup (direct editing of processing.
FilmStrFmt)
2on1 : Two different images are allotted on film.
Describes the film annotation character setup procedure defined for
each FMT No. 4on1 : Four different images are allotted on film.
See 3. Film Annotation Character Setup (Direct Editing of 3on1 : Three different images are allotted on film (for output of energy
FilmStrFmt). subtraction images/special format).
Setting the DICOM Print output conditions REFERENCE

See 4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions. When the image size is larger than the area available for printing an
image on film, the image size will be reduced automatically to the area
available for image printing.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual FR1-1
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP
1. Setup Necessary When

Connecting the LP
Setup items necessary when connecting the LP are listed below.
Set up the items listed below in Setup Configuration Item - SYSTEM
CONFIG - 4. PRINETR of the Service Utility mode.
Table Configuration list when connecting the LP

For cluster
connection
1 Pixel Clock Rate 10 Specifying the image transfer speed. (Pixel Clock Rage Agreement
Changeover Basically select this item. [*0.1sec/pixel]) required.
20
Select when the LP i/f cable exceeds 60m in length.
2 Enable Magnify Yes Specifying whether or not to magnify and print a 3543cm/ Agreement
Print Magnifies. 14"17" 3535cm/14"14" standard image on a 3543cm or required.
No 3535cm film in the one-image format.
Does not magnify.
* Basically select No. To select Yes, a permission is
required from the service maintenance headquarters.
3 [Indent] 0 : None Specifying the film sorting type when a sorter is used for the Agreement
Film Sorting Info. 1 : Space(2)+Dep.code (8) FM-DPL printer. required.
Setup 2 : Dep.Code(4)+MenuName(6)
3 : Dep.Code(4)+FilmChar1(6) * Do not specify 3 and 6 when the HIC655 and QA-WS are
4 : FCRImageID(1)+Space(9) used.
5 : Space(4)+MPMcode(4)+Space(2)
6 : Space(4)+FilmChar1(6)
7 : Dep.Code(4)+MPMcode(4)+Space(2)
Space : Space
Dep.Code : Requesting department in alphanumerics
MenuName : Menu name in one-byte characters
FilmChar1 : Film mark
FCRImageID : Image ID (ID on the film annotation characters)
MPMcode : MPM code
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP
Table Configuration list when connecting the LP

For cluster
connection
4 [Indent] 0_16 (0) When 2, 3 or 6 is selected for 3 Film Sorting Info. Setup Agreement
Menu Name Start above, six characters of the Menu Name (20 characters) or required.
Position on Film FilmChar (ten characters) will be used. This item is to specify
which portion of the area is selected and used.
For example, if 0 is specified, six characters from the top will
be used. If 2 is specified, six characters counting from the third
character will be used.
* The portion of setup value + six characters that exceeds the

area of each item will be spaces.
* When FilmChar is used, an error occurs if ten or more is
specified for the number of characters.
5 [Indent] 0 : Space Specifying the unique ID for film sorting condition. Agreement
Unique ID for Film 1 : ID# required.
Sorting Condition * Do not specify 1 when the HIC655 and QA-WS are used.
6 Printer Interface 0 : Old Specifying the printer i/f type.
Type (Old/New) Select when using a CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FM-
IM3543N /FL-IM3543MN printer.
1 : New
Select when using a printer other than the above.
7 Film Size Available 0 : 2636 (2636cm) Specifying the film size used on the printer side.
in Printer 1 : 3543 (3543cm/1417inch)
2 : 3535 (3535cm/1414inch) * This setting is effective only when 0:Old was selected when
the previous i/f printer has been connected (Printer Interface
Type (Old/New)).
8 Film Base Color 0 : Blue Specifying the film base color used on the printer side.
(Blue/Clear) 1 : Clear
* This setting is effective only when 0:Old was selected when
Type (Old/New)).
9 Printer Buffer Size 0 : Single Specifying the buffer size used on the printer side.
1 : Double
* This setting is effective only when 0:Old was selected when
Type (Old/New)).
u NOTE u
Items after 10 are used when editing the film annotation character format,
which are thus described in 2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film
Annotation Character Format.
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.1 Setup Items Table
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the

Film Annotation Character Format
Setup items necessary when editing the film annotation character
format are listed below.
Set up the items listed below in Setup Configuration Item - SYSTEM
CONFIG - 4. PRINETR of the Service Utility mode.
Setup Items Table

Table Film annotation character format configuration list
For cluster
connection
10 Black Margin 0 : Margin depend on image ID (default: Transparent) Specifying the film margin type. Agreement
Setup on Film Transparent or black depending on the image information. required.
Edge Transparent unless specified by the image information.
1 : Margin depend on image ID (default: Black) Transparent
or black depending on the image information.
Black unless specified by the image information.
2 : Transparent Margin (Fix)Always transparent.
3 : Black Margin (Fix)
Always black.
11 Trimming Range Specifying the amount of trimming in mm (for other than Agreement
[mm] The amount of mammography). required.
trimming
0~25 (0) * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the key board.
12 Trimming Range 0~25 (0) Specifying the amount of trimming in mm (for mammography). Agreement
for Mammography required.
[mm] * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the key board.
13 Print Barcode Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to output on film the IP no. read by Agreement
No : Does not output. the RUs barcode reader. required.
14 Print EDR Mode Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to output on film the setup data in Agreement
No : Does not output. EDR mode. required.
* A for AUTO, S for SEMI, F for FIX and S for SEMI-X

will be printed on film.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
15 Print Image Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print image processing conditions Agreement
Process Condition No : Does not output. on film. required.
16 Print L, S, CS, SS Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print L, S, and CS/SS values on Agreement
Condition No : Does not output. film. required.
17 Print Shot Time Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print the date of exposure on film. Agreement
No : Does not output. required.
* Other than Japanese version, EXP: will be printed as the
title to the top (on the left side) of the date of exposure.
18 Print Set Process Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print the routine or group Agreement
No : Does not output. information on film. required.
* Film printout example: RT-01, TS 1 01

19 Print Engineer ID Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print the technicians code Agreement
No : Does not output. information on film. required.
20 Print Menu Name Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print image processing conditions Agreement
No : Does not output. on film. required.
21 Print Compression Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print image data compression Agreement
Rate No : Does not output. code information on film. required.
* On the Japanese version, compression ratio: will be printed

as the title on the left side of the image data compression
code information.
CC: will be printed for other than the Japanese version.
22 Print Energy- Yes : Outputs. Specifying whether or not to print energy subtraction Agreement
Subtraction No : Does not output. processing parameter information on film. required.
Parameter
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
23 Print Image Frame Yes : Printed with image frame. Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing a Agreement
(3543 film: 1417, No : Printed with no image frame. 3543cm, 3535cm, 2636cm or 2025cm film in the following required.
1414,1843/ patterns.
3535 film: 1414/ 14"17"
2636 film: 1014/ 3543cm/14"17" image in the single format
2025 film: 810, 3535cm/14"14" image in the single format
1824 1843cm image in the single format
Single Format) 14"14"
3535cm/14"14" image in the single format
26x36cm
10"14" image in the single format
8"10"
* Unless the output format is properly positioned, the image

format will not be displayed.
24 Print Image Frame Yes : Printed with image frame. Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing Agreement
(3543 film:1843, No : Printed with no image frame. an 1843cm image on a 3543cm film in the LR or 2on1 required.
LR/2on1 Format format.
LR/2on1 Format)
* Unless the output format is properly positioned, the image
format will not be displayed.
25 Print Image Frame Yes : Printed with image frame. Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing a Agreement
(3543 film:1417, No : Printed with no image frame. 3543cm/14"17", 1843cm or 1824cm/8"10" image on a required.
1843 , 810 4on1 3543cm film in the 4on1 format.
Format)
26 Print Image Frame No : Printed without image frame. Specifying whether or not to add image frame when outputting Agreement
(3543 film:Energy- Yes : Printed with image frame. an energy subtraction 3on1 format image on a 14"17" film. required.
Substraction 3on1
Format)
27 Print Image Frame No : Printed without image frame. Specifying whether or not to add image frame to 1824 cm or Agreement
(2636 film:1824, Yes : Printed with image frame. 2430cm size images that are printed on 2636cm size film in required.
2430/2025 the single mammography format or to 1824cm size images
film:1824 Single that are printed on 8"10" size film in the single mammography
Mammography format.
Format)
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
28 Print Image Frame No : Does not generate outputs. Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing Agreement
(2636 film:1824 Yes : Generates outputs. an 1824cm size image on 2636cm size film in required.
2on1 100% mammography 2on1 (100%) format.
Mammography
Format)
29 No Print Scale [Dialog setup] (?3??) Specifying whether or not to print the reading scale. Agreement
(User Definition required.
Rules) The setup procedure is described in Details of * This setup is effective only when Printed with image frame
[dialog setup]. is selected.
* This setup can be selected also for each MPM code. A
maximum of 8 MPM codes can be specified (a wild card can
be used).
30 Representation of Age : Displayed by the age. Specifying the age representation format. Agreement
Age Other than the Japanese ver. : E.g.) 25Y, 1Y8M, 1Y10D, 13D required.
Date of Birth : Displayed by the date of birth. * Use 1. IMAGE MODALITY - 1. System Common Date
Other than the Japanese ver. : E.g.) DATE B is printed. Format for the DATE representation format.
31 Print Reverse Mark 0 : None Specifying whether or not to output the right-and-left image Agreement
Does not print. rotation mark. required.
1 : R-reverse
Image not rotated : Does not display.
Image rotated : is displayed.
2 : AP or PA
Image not rotated: AP is displayed.
Image rotated: PA is displayed.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
32 Print Film 0 : None Specifying the film annotation character area display format Agreement
Character Field Does not output film. when printing a 3543cm, 3535cm, 2636cm or 2025cm required.
(1417-S/4on1, 1 : Only area 1 film in the following patterns.
1843-LR/2on1/ Only film annotation character area 1 is displayed. 14"17"
4on1, 810-4on1, 2 : Only area 2 3543cm/14"17" image in the single or 4on1 format
1414-S, 1014-S, Only film annotation character area 2 is displayed. 1843cm image in the TWIN, 2on1 or 4on1 format
1824-LR/2on1, 3 : Both 1824cm/8"10" image in the 4on1 format
810/1824-S Both areas 1 and 2 are displayed. 14"14"
Format) 3535cm/14"14" image in the single format
2636cm
8"10"
See Film annotation character areas 1 and 2.

33 Print Film Char 2/ 0 : Film char 2 Specifying whether to output film annotation character 2 Agreement
Examination Film annotation character 2 (exposure stand information) is (exposure stand information) or the Accession Number. required.
number output.
1 : Examination Number * The default setting at shipment from factory is 1:Examination
The Accession Number is output. Number for the CR Console Lite/Plus.
34 Size Selection of 0 : Standard Specifying the film annotation character area display format Agreement
3543, 3535, 2636, 1 : Large when printing a 3543cm, 3535cm, 2636cm or 2025cm required.
2025 Film film in the following patterns.
Character (Single 14"17"
Format) 3543cm/14"17" image in the single format
14"14"
26x36cm
8"10"
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
35 3543 Film [Dialog setup] (0010) Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation Agreement
Character Field The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing a 3543cm/14"17" required.
Position & Rotation [dialog setup]. image in the single or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
(1417 Image)
* This setup is effective for all exposure menus.
To specify this setup individually for each MPM code, use the
No. 39 setup.

Character Field The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing a 4335cm/17"14" required.
Position & Rotation [dialog setup]. image in the single or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
(1714 Image)
No. 40 setup.

Character Field The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1843cm image in required.
Position & Rotation [dialog setup]. the LR, 2on1 or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
(1843 Image)
No. 41 setup.

38 3543, 2025 Film [Dialog setup] (0010) Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation Agreement
Character Field The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1824cm/8"10" required.
Position & Rotation [dialog setup]. image in the 4on1 format on a 3543cm film or printing an
(3543 Film:810- 1824cm/8"10" image in the single format on a 2025cm film.
4on1, 2025 Film:
810-Single) * This setup is effective for all exposure menus.
No. 42 setup.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
39 2025 (Landscape) [Dialog setup] (1131) Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation Agreement
Film Character The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing a 90-rotated 8"10"/ required.
Field Position & [dialog setup]. 1824cm image on an 1824cm film in the single format.
Rotation (810,
1824-Single) See Film annotation character areas 1 and 2.
40 Film Character [Dialog setup] ( No setup available.) Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation Agreement
Field position & The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing a 3543cm/14"17" required.
rotation (User [dialog setup]. image in the single or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
Definition Rules 1)
* Setup is necessary for each MPM code. (A maximum of
8 MPM codes can be selected. A wild card cannot be used.)
* This setup data prevails over that in No. 35.

Field position & The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing a 4335cm/17"14" required.
rotation (User [dialog setup]. image in the single or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
Definition Rules 2)

Field position & The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1843cm image in required.
rotation (User [dialog setup]. the LR, 2on1 or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
Definition Rules 3)

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
Field position & The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1824cm/8"10" required.
rotation (User [dialog setup]. image in the 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
Definition Rules 4)

Field position & The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when an image overlaps the film required.
rotation (User [dialog setup]. annotation character area.
Definition Rules5)
Field position & The setup procedure is described in Details of character areas 1 and 2 when an image overlaps the film required.
rotation (User [dialog setup]. annotation character area.
Definition Rules6)
46 Image Area Move Yes : Moves to the top of the film. Specifying the image output position when printing a 1530cm, Agreement
to the Top of 3543 No : Does not move. 3535cm/14"14" or 4343cm/17"17" image in the single required.
Film format on a 3543cm film.
47 Patients Name 0 - 64 (20) Specifying the maximum patient name length in one-byte Agreement
Justify on Film characters when printing it on film. required.
* If a number larger than 20, the default, is specified, the film

annotation character area cannot possibly hold other
information items.
48 Patients Name 0 - 64 (10) Specifying the maximum kanji patient name length in two-byte Agreement
Length onFilm characters when printing it on film. required.
(Multibyte)
information items.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
49 Patients Name 0 : Left : Left-padding. Specifying whether to select right- or left-padding for printing Agreement
Length on Film 1 : Right : Right-padding. patient name on film. required.
50 Department Name 0 - 64 (20) Specifying the maximum exposure menu name length in one- Agreement
Justify on Film byte characters when printing it on film. required.

information items.
51 Menu Name 0 - 64 (16) Specifying the maximum kanji exposure menu name length in Agreement
Length on two-byte characters when printing it on film. required.
Film(Multibyte)
information items.
52 Menu Name Justify 0 : Left : Left-padding. Specifying whether to select right- or left-padding for printing Agreement
on Film 1 : Right : Right-padding. exposure menu name on film. required.
53 Department Name 0 - 64 (8) Specifying the maximum requesting department name length Agreement
Length on Film in one-byte characters when printing it on film. required.

information items.
u NOTE u
The patient name, exposure menu, requesting department, as well as the
patient ID and accession number need setups for both maximum length
displayed and right-/left-padding.
These two items should be set up according to Setup Configuration Item
SYSTEM CONFIG 5. IDT/CSL FUNCTION in Nos.15 to 18.
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CLS/IDT FUNCTION under
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
54 Department Name 0 - 64 (4) Specifying the maximum requesting department name length Agreement
Length on Film in two-byte characters when printing it on film. required.
(Multibyte)
information items.
55 Department Name 0 : Left : Left-padding. Specifying whether to select right- or left-padding for printing Agreement
Justify on Film 1 : Right : Right-padding. the requesting department name on film. required.
56 Enable Auto Edit Yes : Enables. Specifying whether or not to enable the automatic character Agreement
Function of Film No : Does not enable. format generation function for Nos. 2, 10 to 55 and 57 to 91. required.
String Format File
57 Gap between 0 - 50 (0) Specifying gap between images. Agreement
Image Edge and required.
Film Edge * Be sure to enter one-byte codes from the keyboard.
(Mammography
Format) [ 0.1mm] See Specifying the gap between mammograms.
58 Font Size of 0 : Standard : Standard. Requesting department name font size. Agreement
Requesting 1 : Large : Magnified. required.
Service
59 Format Type of 0 : None : Do not display the technologist Specifying whether and how the technologist name should be Agreement
Operators Name name. displayed. required.
1 : Ank Operator Name : Display the technologist name
with one-byte characters.
2 : Kanji Operator Name : Display the technologist name in
kanji.
60 Display Image Yes : Output to film. Specifying whether or not to output the Imager Pixel Spacing Agreement
Feature No : Do not output to film. information (distance between pixel centers) to film. required.
The film output at 10 pixels/mm is 0.10 (mm).
The film output at 20 pixels/mm is 0.05 (mm).
61 2636 Film [Dialog setup] ( 0020) Specifying the left-hand image film annotation character field Agreement
Character Field For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog position and rotation for outputting an image produced from required.
Position & Rotation setup]. the mammography menu (1824cm image) to 2636cm film in
(Left Image of 2 on 2on1 mammography format (100% magnification).
1 Mammography
Format)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
62 2636 Film Character [Dialog setup] ( 1030) Specifying the right-hand image film annotation character field Agreement
Field Position & For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog position and rotation for outputting an image produced from required.
Rotation (Right Image setup]. the mammography menu (1824cm image) to 2636cm film in
of 2 on 1 2on1 mammography format (100% magnification).
Mammography Format)
63 3535 Film [Dialog setup] ( 0010) Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation Agreement
Character Field For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character fields 1 and 2 for generating a 3535 cm/14"14" required.
Position & Rotation setup]. print onto 14"14" film in the Single format.
(Single Format)
* Valid for all exposure menu items.
64 Enable Reduce To Yes : Outputs reduced-size images to 8"10" film. Specifying whether or not to reduce a Single-format output Agreement
810 Film No : Generate outputs at a magnification of 100%. image to print it on an 8"10" film. required.
Output film determination sequence

65 2636 Film Character [Dialog setup] ( 0010) Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation Agreement
Field Position & For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog characters when printing a 10"14" life-size image on required.
Rotation (1014 Image) setup]. 2636cm film in the single format (default).
Field Position & For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog characters when printing a 14"10" (horizontal 2636cm) required.
Rotation (1410 Image) setup]. life-size image on 2636cm film in the single format (default).
Field Position & For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog characters when printing an 1824cm life-size image on required.
Rotation setup]. 2636cm film in the LR format (default).
(2636 film: 1824-LR)
Field Position & For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog characters when printing an 1824cm life-size image on required.
Rotation setup]. 2636cm film in the 2on1 format (default).
(2636 film: 1824-2no1)
69 Print Image Frame Yes : Printed with image frame. Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing Agreement
(2636 film: 1824-LR, No : Printed with no image frame. an 1824cm life-size image on 2636cm film in the LR or 2on1 required.
2no1 Format) format.
70 Reduction Rate (2636 0 : 86% Specifying a print reduction ratio when printing an 1824cm Agreement
film: 1824-LR, 2no1 1 : 100% image on 2636cm film in the LR or 2on1 format. required.
Format)
71 Print Priority in Dicom 0 : LOW Specifying priority to printout of images to be transferred to the Agreement
Print 1 : MED DICOM printer. required.
1 : HIGH
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
Field Position Rotation For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialogcharacter areas when printing a 10"12" or 2430cm image on required.
(1012, 2430-Single) setup]. 10"12" film in the single format (default).
73 2530(Landscape) Film [Dialog setup] ( 1131) Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation Agreement
Character Field For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialogcharacter areas when printing a 10"12" or 2430cm image on required.
Position Rotation setup]. 10"12" film in the single format (90 rotation available)
(1012, 2430-Single) (default).
74 Film String Format 0 : GeneralFormatOnly Specifying whether to use general-format film annotation
General-format film is used. characters for all images (as has been previously) or special
1 : MammographyFormat film annotation characters defined exclusively for
Special mammography-format film is used. mammography images.
75 Lifesize Film Character [Dialog setup] ( 0010) Specifying the position and rotation of the film annotation
Field Position & For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing a long-view image in life size
Rotation setup]. (default).
76 Overlap width(mm) of 5 to 30 ( 15) Specifying the overlap width of two films when printing a long-
the Lifesize Film view image in life size (mm).
77 Apply GSFilter On Yes Specifying whether or not to apply 1/1 pixel-density conversion
SpecialPrint Applied. for moire elimination when the special print function is
No activated.
Not applied.
78 Film Annotation 0 : top Specifying the position of film annotation characters (film
Position (12on1 Film At the top of the film. annotation character area for each film) when printing images
Format) 1 : bottom in the 12on1 format.
At the bottom of the film.
79 Print Image Frame Yes Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing
(12on1 Film Format) Printed with image frame. images in the 12on1 format.
No
Printed without image frame.
80 Film Character Field [Dialog setup] ( 0000) Specifying the position of image annotation characters (film
Position & For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog annotation character area for each image) when printing
Rotation(12on1 Film setup]. images in the 12on1 format.
Format)
* This dialog enables only determination of the display position
(a: Area0position) of film annotation character area 1. Do not
determine other items with this dialog.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
81 Reduction Rate (810, 0 : 86% Specifying whether to output 100%-size images or
2on1 Film Format) 1 : 100% 86%-reduced images as has been so previously, when printing
810 images in the 2on1 format.
* 100%-size images are printed on a 3543cm film.

82 Enable Image Frame Yes Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing
(810,100%-Size Printed with image frame. 100%-size 8"10" images in the 2on1 format.
Image 2on1 Film No
Format) Printed without image frame.
83 Film Character Field [Dialog setup] ( 0010) Specifying the position and rotation of the film annotation
Position & Rotation For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 8"10" images in the
(810,100%- Size setup]. 2on1 format.
Image 2on1 Film
Format)
Position & Rotation For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 8"14" (one half of
(814,100%- Size Image setup]. 14"17" landscape) images in the 2on1 format.
2on1 Film Format)
Position & Rotation For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 7"8" (one fourth of
(78,100%-Size Image setup]. 14"17") images in the 4on1 format.
4on1 Film Format)
Position & Rotation For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 7"10" (one half of
(710,100%-Size Image setup]. 2636cm landscape) images in the 2on1 format.
2on1 Film Format)
87 Film Character Mode 0 : DICOM Specifying film annotation characters of mammography XCON
Setting On XCON Conforms to the DICOM definitions (as has been so material information.
Material Info. previously).
1 : XCON-IF
Conforms to the XCON I/F definitions.
88 1530 ExFormat For Yes Specifying whether or not to generate image output on
1410 Film Outputs. 2636cm film in extended format.
No
Does not output.
89 1530 ExFormat For Yes Specifying whether or not to generate image output on 8"10"
108 Film Outputs. film in extended format.
No
Does not output.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)

For cluster
connection
90 Setting of minimum 0-10 (0) Specifying a length of the trailing edge to cut off of a stitched
scale to be cut off the image when outputting it in its life size [cm].
ends of Life-size Output
(cm).
91 Type of processing 0: ExistingFormat Specifying an image rotation direction when the multi-frame
multi-frame format. Existing image rotation format format is applied.
1: NewFormat
New image rotation format * The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR
Console Lite/Plus is 1: NewFormat.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Details of [dialog setup] I. To add reading scale, select None (default), and All Menu
when not adding it to all images. Select Select from MPMCode
Setup of 29. No Print Scale (User Definition Rules) when not adding reading scale to images of certain MPM codes.
Double-clicking the No. 29 Value column will open the following dialog. II. Enter the images MPM code on the keyboard or select it from
the pull-down menu.
Be sure to set up if Select from MPMcode is selected in step I.
above. Specifying using a wild card is also possible, such as
I ?0?? (? is an arbitrary one-digit alphanumeric from 0 to F.)
III. Click if data set up in I. and II. above are correct.
The system returns to the previous window and any of the
following will be displayed in the Value column.
None : To add reading scale.
All Menu : Not to add reading scale to all images.
Four-digit number : MPM code of an image not added with
reading scale.
IV. Click to cancel the setup data to be saved.
II
III IV
F0000011.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Setup of 35 to 39, 61 to 63, 65 to 68, 72, 73, 75, 80, 83 to 86. XXXX I. Specifies the film annotation character area 1 display position.
Film Character Field Position & Rotation (XX x XX Image)
II. Specifies the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film
Double-clicking the Value column of Nos. 35 to 39, 61 to 63, 65 to 68, annotation character area 1.
72, 73, 75, 80, 83 to 86 will open the following dialog.
III. Specifies the film annotation character area 2 display position.
IV. Specifies the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film
I annotation character area 2.
For details of the film annotation character area, see
Film annotation character areas 1 and 2.
II V. Click if data set up in I. to IV. above are correct.

The system returns to the previous window and a four-digit
number will be displayed in the Value column. The meaning of
such four-digit number is as follows.
III
0031
90 image rotation of film annotation character area 2
(0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated)
IV Position of film annotation character area 2
(0: Upper left, 1: Upper right, 2: Lower left, 3: Lower right)
Position of film annotation character area 1
V VI (0: Upper left, 1: Upper right, 2: Lower left, 3: Lower right)
F0000012.EPS F0000014.EPS
VI. Click to cancel the setup data to be saved.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
40 to 45. Film Character Field Position & Rotation (User Definition I. Enter on the keyboard the MPM code of the image the film
Rules) annotation character area of which is changed or select it from
Double-clicking the Value column of Nos. 40 to 45 will open the the pull-down menu.
following dialog. Specifying using a wild card is not allowed.
II. Specify the film annotation character area 1 display position.
III. Specify the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film
II annotation character area 1.
IV. Specify the film annotation character area 2 display position.
V. Specify the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film
I
III annotation character area 2.
For details of the film annotation character area, see
Film annotation character areas 1 and 2.
VI. Click if data set up in I. to V. above is correct.

IV
The system returns to the previous window and a character
string appears in the Value column to indicate the content of
the setup data.
V Definition of image MPM code

position or rotation (a maximum of 8 codes can be displayed.)
0031 : 0000 0004 0009 000C 000E 000B 0002 0003
VI VII F0000012.EPS
F0000015.EPS
VII. Click to cancel the setup data to be saved.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Film annotation character areas 1 and 2 Positional and rotational movement of the film annotation character
areas
Following is the description of film annotation character areas 1 and 2
that can be specified in Nos. 32 and 35 to 45, 61 to 63, 65 to 68, 72, 73, Specify the positional and rotational movement of the film annotation
75, 80, 83 to 86, whether to display it and the positional and rotational character areas in 35 to 45, 61 to 63, 65 to 68, 72, 73, 75, 80, 83 to 86.
movement. XXXX Film Character Field Position & Rotation (XXXXX).
If an image is printed on a 14"17" film as set by the default, the film Position 0 Position 1
annotation characters are displayed at both the upper right and left of Not rotated.
the image. Areas where those characters are displayed are the film
annotation character areas. 90 rotated
The upper-left area is area 1 and that at the upper right is area 2. (counterclockwise).
Film annotation
character area 1 One-frame film area One-frame film area
Film annotation
character area 2
Output print image Position 2 Position 3

(*Default setting)
Definition of Definition of
positional movement rotational movement
F0000009.EPS
F0000010.EPS
Whether to display the film annotation character areas

Select whether or not to display film annotation character areas 1 and/
or 2 using the function in 32. Print 3543, 2025 Film Character Field
(1417- Single/4on1, 1843-LR/2on1/4on1, 810-4on1).
0: None
Neither film annotation character area 1 nor 2 are printed on film.
1: Only area 1
Only film annotation character area 1 is printed on film.
2: Only area 2
Only film annotation character area 2 is printed on film.
3: Both (default)
Both of the film annotation character areas are printed on film.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Specifying the gap between mammograms Output film determination sequence

Note the following details when you specify the gap between When Yes is chosen for 64 Enable Reduce to 810 Film, the output
mammograms as directed in 57 Gap between Image Edge and Film film size is determined in the following sequence:
Edge (Mammography Format) [ 0.1 mm].
Film combination Determination sequence
Single format 2on1 format
14"17" 8"10" 1. When the 3543 (cm) or 3535 (cm), high pixel
density, Single format is used, the image will be
printed onto 14"17" film at a magnification of
100%.
Left-hand Right-hand 2. When a Single format other than indicated above
Image
image image is used, the image will be printed onto 8"10"
film.
3. 4on1 and 3on1 format images are printed on
14"17" films.
4. In situations other than above, images are
printed on 14"17" films in the 2636cm film
4on1 format output format.
2636cm 8"10" 1. When the Single format is used, the image will
be printed onto 8"10" film.
2. In situations other than above, the image will be
Image Image printed onto 2636cm film.
10"12" 8"10" 1. When the Single format is used, the 10"12" and
2430cm images will be printed onto 10"12"
film.
2. When a Single format other than indicated above
is used, the image will be printed onto 8"10"
film.
Image Image 3. In situations other than above, there are no
Setting range: applicable films.
0 to 50 mm 8"10" 14"14" 1. When 3535 (cm), high pixel density, Single
(variable in 0.1 mm units) format is used, the image will be printed onto
F0000047.EPS
14"14" film at a magnification of 100%.
2. When a Single format other than indicated above
is used, the image will be printed onto 8"10"
film.
3. In situations other than above, there is no
applicable film.
8"10" 1. When the Single format is used, the image will
be printed onto 8"10" film.
2. In situations other than above, there is no
applicable film.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2636cm, 3543cm/14"17", 8"10", 3535cm/14"14" and 10"12" film printout patterns [Reference]
2636cm film
4 5
4 5
4 5 4 5 4 5
2 2 6 6
2
1 1_1 3 1
3
Routine TWIN 1843 TWIN Pantomography TWIN 2on1
4 5 4 5
4 5 4 5 11 12
13 14
4 5 11 12
2
1 13 14
4 5
2 2
2
1 1 1
7 7
Pantomography 2on1 1843cm 2on1 Routine Single 1824cm/810inch Single 1014inch Single (HQ) 1410inch Single (HQ)
- Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) -

11 12 1, 1_1 : Patient information area *1 : A format that enables information
2 : Image processing parameter area (*1) specific to mammography images
4 5
3 : Image processing parameter area to be printed on film by selecting
13 14
4 : Hospital name area 1.MammographyFormat of 74
11 12 5 : Area for barcode, MPM code, etc. Film String Format in SYS
6 : Patient/image processing parameter area (*1) CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
13 14
7 : Patient/image processing parameter area
11 : Reduced patient information area
1
12 : Reduced image processing parameter area (*1)
2
13 : Patient information area
Pantomography Single Pantomography Single Pantomography Single 14 : Image processing parameter area (*1) F0000018.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2636cm film (continued)

11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
11 11
13 13
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14

14 14 12 : Reduced image processing parameter area
12 12 13, 90 : Patient information area
14, 91 : Image processing parameter area
1824cm TWIN/2on1 (100%) 710inch 2on1 (trimming) Mammography 2on1
90 91 90 91 90 91 90 91 90 91 90 91 90 91
90 91
90 91 90 91
Special format 2on1 Special format 3on1
Special format Single Special format 4on1

FR000058.EPS
3543cm film
11 12 11 12 11 12 12 11 12 11 12 - Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) -
13 14 13 14 2 : Image processing parameter area (*1)
3 : Image processing parameter area
4 : Hospital name area
5 : Area for barcode, MPM code, etc.
12 : Reduced image processing parameter area
14 : Image processing parameter area (*1)
*1 : A format that enables information specific to
mammography images to be printed on film
by selecting 1.MammographyFormat of 74
3543cm/1417inch Single (HQ) 1843cm Single (HQ) 1843cm TWIN 1843cm 2on1 Film String Format in SYS CONFIG - 4.
PRINTER.
F0000019.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3543cm film (continued)

11 12 11 12
4 5 32
31
11 12
4 5
3543cm 1843
13 14
11 12
3
810inch 1414inch
2
2
1 1 3
15
3535cm/1414inch Single (HQ) 4335cm/1714inch Single (HQ) Different images 4on1 (example) 3on1 12on1
11 12 11 12
13 14 13 14 2 : Image processing parameter area (*1)
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 3 : Image processing parameter area
4 : Hospital name area
5 : Area for barcode, MPM code, etc.
13 14 13 14
13 14 13 14 11 : Reduced patient information area
12 : Reduced image processing parameter area
11 12 11 12
14 : Image processing parameter area (*1)
13 14 13 14 15 : Patient information/image processing
parameter area (*1)
31 : Patient ID, right-and-left flipping mark and patient
name areas
32 : Hospital name, radiographer name, date of exposure,
and requesting department name areas (*2)
810inch 2on1 814inch 2on1 (trimming) 78inch 4on1 (trimming) 91 : Image processing parameter area
90 91 90 91 90 91 *1 : A format that enables information specific

to mammography images to be printed on
film by selecting 1.MammographyFormat
90 91 90 91 90 91 90 91 of 74 Film String Format in SYS
CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
*2 : Annotation character positions can be
changed alternately between top and
bottom of the film.
90 91 90 91
90 91
Special format Single Special format 2on1 Special format 3on1 Special format 4on1 F0000053.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2025cm film
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E)
21 21 21 22 4 5 4 5
6
22 22
Pantomography Single
1824cm (mammography) 1824cm (mammography) 1824cm/810inch Single, 2430cm/1012inch,

Single Single 502 1824cm/810inch, 3535cm, 3543cm,
vertical 1824cm/810inch 4343cm, 1843cm,
1014inch, Single
(F) (G) For exposure menus other than mammography, images will be delivered in the (C) format.
For right breast (DSR) (MPM code: 0317) mammographic exposure menus, images will be
delivered in the (A) format.
21 22 For other than right breast (DSR) (MPM code: 0317) mammographic exposure menus,
images will be delivered in the (B) format.
- Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) - *1 : A format that enables
4 : Hospital name area information specific to
mammography images to be
5 : Area for barcode, MPM code, etc. printed on film by selecting
21 22 6 : Patient information/image processing 1:MammographyFormat of
parameter area (*1) 74 Film String Format in
21 : Patient information area SYS CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
Pantomography Single Pantomography Single
22 : Image processing parameter area (*1) F0000021.EPS
3535cm film
11 12 - Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) - *1 : A format that enables
11 : Reduced patient information area information specific to
13 14 mammography images to be
12 : Reduced image processing parameter area (*1)
13 : Patient information area printed on film by selecting
14 : Image processing parameter area (*1) 1:MammographyFormat of
74 Film String Format in SYS
CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
3535cm/1414inch Single F0000022.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
10"12" film
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 21
22 22
1012inch 2430cm
1012inch 2430cm 2430cm 2430cm

(mammography) (mammography)
(G) (H) (I) (J) (K) (L)
4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5
4 5
2
2
1 1
6 6 6 6
810inch, vertical 810inch 1824cm, 502 810inch
810inch, vertical 810inch 1824cm, 502 810inch 1824cm 1824cm
(M) (N)
- Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) - *1 : A format that enables
21 22 1: Patient information area information specific to
2: Image processing parameter area (*1) mammography images to be
printed on film by selecting
4: Hospital name area
1:MammographyFormat of
5: Area for barcode, MPM code, etc. 74 Film String Format in
6: Patient information/image processing SYS CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
21 22 parameter area (*1)
Pantomography Single Pantomography Single 22 : Image processing parameter area (*1) F0000035.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation Character Format
2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation Table Differences between the CL and the FCR 5000 Series (2/2)
Character Format Item FCR 5000 Series CL
Film annotation To display film annotation Not dependent, different from
The tables below present precautions (differences between the CL and characters 2 characters 2, technicians the FCR 5000 Series. Each
the FCR 5000 Series) to be observed when setting up a film annotation code (GJ) display must be item can be set up for whether
character format using the LP. set up. to display or hide individually.
Table Differences between the CL and the FCR 5000 Series (1/2) Whether the FINP To use the FINP110 for Whether the FINP 110 is used
110 is available obtaining ID information, or not, the maximum number
Item FCR 5000 Series CL the Config file is used for of characters displayable can
14"14" Can be used. Cannot be used. making the maximum be specified individually for
film size number of characters the patient ID, menu name,
displayable longer for the requesting department, and
Character Standard fonts cannot be Can be changed by directly patient ID, patient name, study number. (However, if
quality/position changed. editing the FilmStrFmt.env file. menu name, requesting exceeding the preset
Character quality varies department, and study length,the portion that
depending on the font used. number. Specified numbers exceeds will be cut off.)
The character display position of characters are applied,
can also be different from that and an arbitrary value
used in the FCR 5000 Series. cannot be specified for each
Age display format The age counted in the The age counted in the item.
number of months and days number of months and days is Requesting Top of the image. Lower-left area of the image.
can be specified in their fixed as follows: department name
maximum digit number. (Age in days : Max. 30 days) display position in
(Age in months : Max. 7 the 2on1 format
months)
Film annotation Film annotation characters A function to rotate some film
Date display format The date display format is Only S40.05.15 is available. character display were used to be output as annotation characters 90 is
possible in the Japanese (S cannot be represented by position on the follows with the FCR 5000 not supported.
era a kanji character.) 2on1 format output Series.
( 40.05.15). of an image that
Film annotation Both Standard and Large Fixed to the two types : includes
character area size can be specified separately Standard and Large. pantomograph.
change for 14"17" by for the area size.
100%-size image.
Energy Either of the following three In addition to FCR 5000
subtraction/PEM options can be selected: Series selections, display of
parameter display both energy subtraction and
1) Neither of them are PEM parameters can be set
displayed, up.
2) Only energy subtraction [Currently not supported.]
is displayed,
3) PEMparameters are
displayed.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.1 Procedure for Directly Editing the FilmStrFmt File
3. Film Annotation Character Setup 3.1 Procedure for Directly Editing the
(Direct Editing of FilmStrFmt) FilmStrFmt File
This section describes the film annotation character setup procedure for For the Service Utility startup procedure, see
FMT numbers, which are indicated under 2636cm, 3543cm/ 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
14"17", 8"10", 3535cm/14"14" and 10"12" film printout patterns Utility.
[Reference] in 2.1 Setup Items Table.
Film annotation character setup is performed by directly editing the
2. Click Edit/View Film String.
contents of the FilmStrFmt file.
IMPORTANT
When directly editing the contents of the FilmStrFmt file, be sure to
select No as the configuration setting for No. 56 (Enable Auto Edit
Function of Film String Format File) in 1. Setup Necessary When
Connecting the LP.
If you directly edit the contents of the file while the setting is left ON, the
Service Utility may restore the previous contents of the FilmStrFmt file.
Therefore, when editing the FilmStrFmt file, follow the steps indicated FR000056.EPS
below. The Edit/View Film String window opens.

1. If you intend to edit the printer-related configuration settings with the
Service Utility, do it first. 3. Click .
2. Complete an editing procedure with the Service Utility (only the Notepad opens.
configuration settings related to the printer), save the results, and
then change the No. 56 setting to No. 4. Edit the file in the format described later (3.2 FilmStrFmt
File Description Format and subsequent sections).
3. Finally, edit the contents of the FilmStrFmt file.
Once the FilmStrFmt file is directly edited, you should avoid performing
5. Save the FilmStrFmt file and then close Notepad (Notepad.exe).
setup with the Service Utility. u NOTES u
After the FilmStrFmt file is edited, you should keep a record of the
applied changes within the FilmStrFmt file in the form of a comment. The FilmStrFmt file uses Unicode characters. Therefore, be sure to
use Notepad and save the edited file in Unicode format.
The backup function of the Service Utility does not back up the
FilmStrFmt file (up to version A08). Perform a manual backup/restore
procedure by, for instance, selecting the FilmStrFmt file directly and
saving it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the like.
If the application software version is upgraded together with the
FilmStrFmt file, do not restore the FilmStrFmt file that is backed up on
media or the like. Locate the new version of FilmStrFmt file that is
installed upon a software upgrade and edit it according to the backed
up file as needed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.2 FilmStrFmt File Description Format

Following is the FilmStrFmt file description format.
Example of description
Format name Area size and position
Command Command for specifying the font type
Command for specifying the font size
Command for specifying the character string

Settings for one
film annotation
character format
Command for specifying the character string
Settings for one

film annotation
character format
FR000015 2.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Following are the details of each setting. Character string specifying commands
Format name Output character string specification Command

Describes the name of the format. Do not change the description for Line spacing specification LineSpacing
the CL. Output format and attribute specification FilmStrings
REFERENCE Cautions in editing the FilmStrFmt file

The ImageSize.env file stored in the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ Following are the cautions to observe when editing the FilmStrFmt file.
Configuration folder defines which format should be used by an
output film. # at the top of a line indicates a comment line.
x_1 for the FMT number (1_2 for FMT1) is a setting for the 20pixel/ Unnecessary spaces, tabs and line changes will be disregarded.
mm image and x_M is for the mammography format. Describe commands by the use of ; between them.
u NOTE u
Area size and position
Because FilmStrFmt is a Unicode-formatted text file, a Unicode-
Specify the area size and position between parentheses to the right
formatted NotePad included in the OS is necessary for file editing.
of the format name, connecting them with each other using an equal
sign (=).
X-size, Y-size, position
Item Description
X-size Specifying the width of the film annotation character
display area (0<X-size<4280pixel)
Y-size Specifying the height of the film annotation character
display area (0<Y-size<4280pixel)
Position Specifying the position of characters in the film annotation
character display area (C: centering, R: right padding,
L: left padding)
Command
Describes the command for setting film annotation character format.
Here, command format is similar to a programming language.
These commands relate to fonts and character strings.
For details, see 3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters.
Font specifying commands

Font specification Command
Font type specification SetFontTypeFace
Font size specification SetFontSize
Font style specification SetFontStyle
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters
3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters SetFontTypeFace printout examples

Arial specified
Specifying the font type
Use the SetFontTypeFace command to specify the font type. G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5
This command will be effective from the line describing PARANASAL SINUS
SetFontTypeFace to the line that directly precedes another
FR000016.EPS
SetFontTypeFace description.
TimesNewRoman specified
u NOTE u
G G 0 0 0 0 R4R0 5
Because no default values are available for font type, make sure to
specify values for each film annotation character format. PARANAS INU
FR000017.EPS
SetFontTypeFace description format

SetFontTypeFace (font name); Specifying the font size
Use the SetFontSize command to specify the font size.
Enclose a True-Type font name between quotation marks ( ). This command will be effective from the line describing SetFontSize to
Any of the fonts that are available when Windows 2000 is installed the line that directly precedes another SetFontSize description.
can be specified.
u NOTE u
SetFontTypeFace description examples Specifying ITALIC for characters displayed in reverse video can make
Specifying MS Gothic it look like they are missing in parts. ITALIC is thus disabled for
reverse-video characters.
SetFontTypeFace(MS Gothic);
Specifying Times New Roman
SetFontTypeFace(TimesNewRoman); SetFontSize description format
SetFontSize (font size);
Specify a font size using values expressed in terms of pixels.
SetFontSize description examples

Specifying the font size to be 20 pixels
SetFontSize(20);
Specifying the font size to be 40 pixels
SetFontSize(40);
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
SetFontSize printout examples Specifying print format and attributes

Font size specified as 20 pixels Use the SetFontStyle command to specify the font style.
This command will be effective from the line describing SetFontStyle
JOHN SMITH [M] to the line that directly precedes another SetFontStyle description.
02247393 1938.04.08B
SetFontStyle description format
FR000018.EPS
SetFontStyle (font style);

Font size specified as 40 pixels
Select either of the following.
Bold : BOLD
JOHN SMITH [M] Italic : ITALIC
02247393 1938.04.08B
When selecting the two font styles at the same time, use | to delimit
them (ex.: BOLD|ITALIC).
u NOTE u
FR000019.EPS
Specifying ITALIC for characters displayed in reverse video can
make it look like they are missing in parts. ITALIC is thus disabled
for reverse-video characters.
SetFontStyle description examples

Bold specified
SetFontStyle (BOLD);
Specifying bold and italic at the same time
SetFontStyle (BOLD|ITALIC) ;
SetFontStyle printout examples

Bold specified
1234567890ABC
EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
FR000020.EPS
Bold and italic specified
1234567890ABC
EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
FR000021.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Specifying the line spacing Specifying print format and attributes

Specify line spacing with the LineSpacing command. Use the FilmStrings command to specify character strings.
LineSpacing description format FilmStrings description format

LineSpacing (line spacing); FilmStrings(format descriptor1, format descriptor2, ),(attribute
descriptor1),(attribute descriptor2) ;
Use an integer between 1 and 400 (in terms of pixels) to specify line
spacing for film annotation characters.
Format descriptor n
Specifies the format descriptor that shows the format in which
LineSpacing description examples character strings are printed out. A maximum of 512 descriptors
Specifying line spacing of 5 pixels can be specified. However, the maximum total length of all
LineSpacing(5); character strings represented by the format descriptor is 256
characters.
Specifying line spacing of 50 pixels For details, see 3.4 Format Descriptors.
LineSpacing(50);
Attribute descriptor n
LineSpacing printout examples
Specifies the attribute descriptor that shows an attribute to be
Line spacing of 5 pixels specified printed out as a character string. Basically, one attribute descriptor
is given per format descriptor. The attribute descriptor is a tag
1234567890ABC EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42] number that represents the attribute to be printed out.
It is not necessary to specify the attribute descriptor when the
G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5 format descriptor is attribute-specific.
FR000024.EPS For details, see 3.5 Attribute Descriptors.
Line spacing of 50 pixels specified
1234567890ABC EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5
FR000025.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FilmStrings description examples FilmStrings printout examples

Patient and exposure information printout
Printing out patient and exposure information
The patient and exposure information indicated below are printed JOHN SMITH [M]
out.
02247393 1998.04.08B
Patient name : Character string of variable length, up to 20 1234567890ABC
characters EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
Sex : [+M or F+]
FR000026.EPS
Patient ID : Character string of variable length, up to 15
characters Image processing parameters printout
Date of birth : YYYY.MM.DD + B
G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5
Date of examination : Character string of variable length, up to 15
L2.4S325C*1.0*1.0 SCALE: 100%
characters
Date of exposure : EXP+ YYYY.MM.DD
FR000027.EPS
Time of exposure : [+HH:MM+]
FilmStrings(,%*20s,[,%SEX2,]),(0010,0010),(0010,0040);
FilmStrings(,%*15s,,%DATE1,B),(0010,0020),(0010,0030);
FilmStrings(,%*15s),(0008,0050);
FilmStrings(EXP:,%DATE1,[,%TIME1,]),
(0008,0020),(0008,0030)
Printing out image processing parameters

The following image processing parameters are printed out.
Gradation processing : G + GA + GT + # + GC + GS
parameters
Frequency processing : R + RN + RT + RE
parameters
Latitude (L value) : L + latitude
System sensitivity (S value) : S + system sensitivity
Corrections : C + gradation correction + density
(gradation and density) correction
Image magnif./reduc. rate : SCALE: + percentage
FilmStrings( ,$IMG_PROC);
FilmStrings( ,$L,$S,$CS_SS, ,SCALE:,$MAG,%);
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.4 Format Descriptors
3.4 Format Descriptors Character string control descriptor (\)

Shown below are format descriptors that control character strings.
Described herein are the format descriptor types and content presented
in 3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters Specifying print Descriptor Meaning
format and attributes. \t Inserts tabs. Each tab is equivalent to 80 pixels.
Three format descriptor types are available. The first character of each Displays the characters that follow in reverse
format descriptor identifies the type. \r video, which will be effective until \r is
specified again.
First character Descriptor type
\ Character string control descriptor
% Character string style descriptor
$ Attribute-specific format descriptor
REFERENCE
The C language command printf format-specified method has been
adopted basically for the format descriptor that specifies the character
string print format.
However, the printf method has been expanded to make the following
items available.
Special print character formats, including characters in reverse video
Some VR-specific patterns, including date format
Information not assigned tag numbers, such as film image
magnification/reduction
Handling of a multiple number of attributes in a group (such as image
processing parameters)
Format descriptors not required by the printf method have been
deleted.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Character string style descriptor (%) [width]

This format descriptor indicates that the character string style is Shows the character string length. When * has been specified for
composed as follows. [flag], this indicates the maximum character string length. When it
has not, it indicates the fixed length.
%[flag][width][type]
Only when f has been specified for [type] the a.b style
[flag] specification will be effective, where a indicates the number of
digits (of an integer) and b the number of decimal places.
Shows the information necessary for controlling character string
length. Can be omitted. If [flag] has been specified, [width] must also In this case, a can be omitted. Omitting a will not determine the
be specified. number of digits while determining only the number of decimal
places. When f has been specified for [type], it will not be possible
Flag description Meaning to omit only b. Specifying 0 for b will cause an error.
Outputs character strings padded from the left.
This is effective only when fixed length has Example of description Example of printout
- been specified using [width]. If it has not,
%*10d 1234567890
character strings will be output padded from the
right.
[type] (d=a decimally expressed An integer of a
Shows that the character string length specified maximum of
integer ) ten numbers
by [width] consists of a maximum number of
characters. If the length of the character string [width]
to be output is longer than that specified by Character string length
* [width], it will be output as specified by [width]. [flag] (*=maximum number of characters)
If the length of the character string to be output
is shorter than that specified by [width], it will be
output as it actually is.
Example of description Example of printout
Example of description Example of printout
%*5.1f 1234.2
%*10s ABCDEFGHIJ
[type] (f=decimally expressed A maximum of
A character string five integers,
[type] (s=character string data) floating-point number) one decimally
of a maximum of
[width] ten characters [width] expressed
Character string length floating-point
[flag] (*=maximum number of characters) number
A value specified by [width] [flag] (*maximum number of
FR000031.EPS
characters) FR000032.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
[type] Special type

Shows the type of character string notation. This cannot be omitted. Annotation Attribute
Two types are available: the standard type supported by C language Note
type VR
and a special type added exclusively for film annotation characters.
Outputs various time display patterns in accordance
The standard type uses small letters to annotates character strings and with the values specified by n. This setting is valid
the special type uses large alphanumerics. Numbers cannot be used at only for information for which Attribute VR has been
the beginning of character strings. TIMEn TM set to TM. Patterns are as follows.
TIME1 : 10:51
The table below shows character strings annotation types. TIME2 : 10:51:20
In the table, attributes other than those listed in the Attribute VR TIME3 : AM 10:51
column (UN and SQ) cannot be output as film annotation characters. Outputs various age display patterns in accordance
with the values specified by n. This setting is valid
only for information on date of birth. Patterns are as
Standard type
follows.
Annotation AGE1: 25 years, 1 year and 8 months, 1 month and
Attribute VR Note DA 10 days, 13 days
type
AGEn (date of AGE2: 25Y, 1Y8M, 1M10D, 13D
OB,OW,SL,SS, Outputs binary data in decimal form. Image birth only) Output format will differ with the relevant age, as
d
UL,US data and overlay data cannot be selected. follows.
AT,OB,OW,SL, Outputs binary data in hexadecimal form. 0 years to 0 years and 1 month or under : ** days
x 0 years and 1 month up to 1 year : ** months
SS,UL,US Letters will be output in capitals.
1 to 8 years : ** years and ** months
Outputs binary data in floating-decimal- 8 years or over :** years
f FL,FD
point form.
Outputs sex display patterns in accordance with the
AE,AS,CS,DS, Outputs character string data. Character values specified by n. This setting is valid only for
s DT,IS,LO,LT, strings of a maximum length of 256 CS
SEXn information on sex. Patterns are as follows.
PN,SH,ST,UI characters can be output. (sex only)
SEX1: Male, female, (for others, 1 space)
SEX2: M, F, O (for others, 1 space)
Special type Outputs name display patterns in accordance with the
values specified by n. This setting is valid only for
Annotation information with PN specified for VR. Display patterns
Attribute VR Note
type follow.
Outputs various date display patterns in PN1: For printing kana alongside kanji (ANK
accordance with the values specified by n. characters are printed only when ideographic
Patterns are as follows. characters are used.)
DATE1 : 1998.12.13 PN2: Only for use with ideographic characters
DATE2 : 1998.DEC.13 PNn PN (Ideographic characters are printed if used.
DATEn DA DATE3 : 12.13.1998 Left blank if not used.)
DATE4 : DEC.13.1998 PN3: Only for single-byte characters (Single-byte
DATE5 : 13.12.1998 characters are printed if used. Left blank if not
DATE6 : 13.DEC.1998 used.)
DATE7 : H1.01.13 PN4: For display of multi-byte characters (Ideographic
DATE8 : 1.01.13 characters are printed if used. Single-byte
characters are printed if they are not used.
Left blank if neither are used.)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Attribute-specific format descriptor ($) Table of attribute-specific format descriptors (2/3)

The attribute-specific format descriptor is used for outputting a multiple Descriptor
Information Sample
Note
number of attributes in groups or for outputting information that has not displayed character format
been assigned tag numbers. GPR Characters will not be output
The attribute-specific format descriptor requires no attribute descriptors processing if this process is not
$GPR G
(the tag numbers shown below). identification performed.
characters
The table below presents attribute-specific format descriptors.
FNC Characters will not be output
Table of attribute-specific format descriptors (1/3) processing if this process is not
$FNC F
identification performed.
Information Sample characters
Descriptor Note
displayed character format
Image Parameters will be output
Outputs image Processing parameters for processing only when they have been
processing any processing that is not $MOD parameter * changed.
parameters subjected to in view of change
Image (G,R,O,D,U,H). processing path will not be mark
$IMG_PROC processing Parameter output will output.
For both gradation correction
parameter depend on the image
and density correction,
processing parameter Term of
$CS_SS C *1.0/1.5 parameters are output
formats described correction
converted to character
hereafter.
strings.
Gradation
FCR image Can be output by changing
$GAMMA processing G 1.0G#1.6-0.20 $FCR_ID A 001
ID the image number.
parameter
Right-and- Can be output only when
Frequency Parameters will not be output
$AP_PA1 left reversal image is reversed.
$BETA processing R 4R0.5 during multi-frequency
mark (1/2)
parameter processing (MFP).
Right-and- PA will be output when
1D-USM Parameters will not be output
$AP_PA2 left reversal AP (PA) reversed and AP when not
$1DUSM processing O 3V1.0 if this process is not
mark (2/2) reversed.
parameter performed.
Outputs the number without
DRC Parameters will not be output $IP_NUM IP number 0412657
a before it and c after it.
$DRC processing D 2A0.8 if this process is not
parameter performed. Can be output only when the
$MAG Image
67 image size requested has
MFP Parameters will not be output _RATE magnif. rate
been set.
$MFP processing M FA0.8FA0.8 if this process is not
PEM Parameters will not be output
$PEM processing P ABC1.5 if this process is not
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Table of attribute-specific format descriptors (3/3)

Information Sample
Descriptor Note
displayed character format
Image processing type
RT-01 is for image
(0019,2F40)
processing type RT.
Pair Set numbers (0021,2F30)
$FUNC
processing Image numbers in the set
_PROC ES 01 02-01 is for an
information (0021,2F40)
image processing
Pair processing information
type other than RT.
numbers (0021.2F50)
Can be output only when all
four energy subtraction
parameters are within the
range of A to T.
Energy subtraction
Energy
parameters
$ES subtraction T AGGH @
(50F1, 2F06)
information
Result of subtraction
registration
(50F1, 2F07)
Normal : Does not add @.
Abnormal : Adds @.
$L L value L 2.0
$S S value S 20000
Pixel value (0018, 1164) while
an image is read, as well as
pixel value (used for image
$IMG_PS Pixel value 0.10->0.15 processing) while it is printed
will be output. **** will be
output when no pixel value
information is available.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.5 Attribute Descriptors

Described next are the specific types and contents of the attribute
descriptors discussed in 3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters
Specifying print format and attributes.
The attribute descriptor is information used to specify several kinds of
attributes to be printed out as film annotation characters.
One attribute descriptor can be described for each format descriptor.
The attribute descriptor represents a tag number for the attribute to be
printed out.
Attribute descriptor description format

Following is the attribute descriptor description format.
(gggg,eeee)
gggg : Group number. Fixed four digits in hexadecimal form.
eeee : Element number. Fixed four digits in hexadecimal form.
Attribute descriptor description cautions

Parentheses ( ) are required when describing a tag number.
Use a comma , between attributes.
Use a comma , between a group and an element.
If the specified tag is not available, use one half-size space.
For the patients name, create a character string after delimitation
conversion.
When printing out a kanji character string, remove the ESC sequence
and then create the string.
Handle control characters within LT and ST as spaces.
For a tag for which VM is 1 or more, only the head information will be
printed out. However, information for the character string will be
printed out including the \ that represents delimitation.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Attributes that can be printed out using the CL

Tables below show attributes that can be output using the CLs DICOM
Print function.
Attributes that can be printed out using the CL and its attribute descriptors (1/4)
Film annotation Format Attribute
Attribute Annotation
characters descriptor descriptor
Hospital (institution) kanji %s (0009, 2F80)
1
name ANK FUJI HOSPITAL %s (0008, 0080)
2 IP no. The a and c are deleted. 04012657 $IP_NUM (0018, 1004)
EDR mode A, S, F , M $EDR_MODE (0019, 2F50)
3
Menu code 0900 %s (0018, 1401)
System ID A to Z
4 A 001 $FCR_ID
Image no. Decimal under 3 digits
Image proc.
$IMG_PROC
conditions
-identifying characters GA, GT,
Gradation proc. G .0G#1.6-0.20 $GAMMA
GC, GS
-identifying characters RN, RT,
Frequency proc. R 4R0.5 $BETA
RE
1D-USM identification characters
1D-USM O 3V1.0 $1DUSM
ORN, ORD, ORE
DRC identification characters
DRC D 2A0.8 $DRC
DRN, DRT, DRE
5
MFP identification characters
MFP U FA0.8FA0.8 $MFP
HRN, HRT, HRE, HDN, HDT, HDE
PEM proc. parameter characters
PEM proc. P ABC1.5 $PEM
PRN, edge, calc, PRE
GPR proc. identification
GPR proc. G $GPR
characters
FNC proc. identification
FNC proc. F $FNC
characters
Image proc. condition
* $MOD
change mark
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
kanji %s (0019, 2F32)
Exposure menu
6 CHEST
name ANK %s (0018, 1400)
GENERAL
Normalization
conditions +
correction term
Latitude identification character
Latitude L 2.0 $L
Latitude
7 System sensitivity identification
System sensitivity character S 20000 $S
System sensitivity
Correction term identification
Correction term character, gradation correction, C *1.0/1.5 $CS_SS
density correction
Department kanji %s (0009, 2F92)
8
name ANK SURGERY1 %s (0032, 1033)
Radiographer
NT %s (0019, 2F60)
code
9
Exposure stand
100kv10mAs %s (0019, 2F91)
information
10 Patient ID 1010181139 %s (0010, 0020)
kanji %s (0011, 2F10)
11 Patient name
ANK FUJI TARO %s (0010, 0010)
12 Examination no. Accession Number 1234567890ABC %s (0008, 0050)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
:

EXP: .. EXP:
ANSI short format 1998.12.13 %DATE1
ANSI long format 1998.DEC.13 %DATE2
American short format 12.13.1998 %DATE3
Date of
13
exposure American long format DEC.13.1998 %DATE4
(0008, 0020)
European short format 13.12.1998 %DATE5
European long format 13.DEC.1998 %DATE6
Japanese date format H10.12.13 %DATE7
Japanese date (kanji) format 10.12.13 %DATE8
Sex: kanji kanji [ ] or [ ] %SEX1 (0010, 0040)
14
Sex: ANK Alphabet [M] or [F] %SEX2 (0010, 0040)
Y, YM, MD, D
25 , 1 8 ,
kanji %AGE1
Age 1 10 , 13
15 25Y, 1Y8M
Alphanumerics %AGE2 (0010, 0030)
1M10D, 13D
YYYY.MM.DD 1989.12.13 %DATEn,
Date of birth
YYYY.MM.DDB 1989.12.13B %DATEn, B
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Pair proc. Proc. type, pair no., IP and IL ES01 02-01
16 Indicates the routine and serial $FUNC_PROC
Routine proc. RT-01
routine processing nos.
17 Time of exposure Hour and minute [10:51] [ ,%TIME1, ] (0008, 0030)
18 Film mark Film annotation characters1 PA %s (0019, 2F90)
:
: 100%
Magnif./reduc. $MAG, %
19
rate SCALE:,
SCALE : 100%
$MAG, %
20 Patient name (2)
Data compression : 22 :,% (0029, 2F50)
21
code CC : 22 CC:,%s (0029, 2F50)
Energy subtraction parameter
Energy table identification characters Ta,
22 T AGGH @ $ES
subtraction Tb, Tc, Td, and failure flag (only
when there is a failure)
Right-and-left $AP_PA1 or
23 R , AP (PA)
reversal mark $AP_PA2
Technologist kanji TEC: TEC: ,%7PN2 (0008, 1070)
24
name ANK TEC: FUJI TARO TEC: ,%14PN3 (0008, 1070)
25 Pixel value 0.05->0.10 $IMG_PS
Dose-area
26 1.00 dGycm2 %s,dGycm2 (0018, 115E)
product
To print out attributes other than those listed above, set the relative tag number of the attribute specified in
the Conformance Statement.
Conformance Statement
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.6 Film Annotation Character Verification Procedure
3.6 Film Annotation Character Verification 4. From the Format Number pull-down menu, choose the
name of the film annotation character format you want to
Procedure verify. Leave the other settings as they are.
With the Service Utility, you can verify the FilmStrFmt file editing results.
The procedure is described below.

For the Service Utility startup procedure, see
Utility.
2. Click Edit/View Film String.
FR000056.EPS
The Edit/View Film String window opens. FR000046.EPS
The FilmChar Setup window opens.
The Edit/View Film String window shows a film annotation
character string.
6. To verify the other film annotation character formats, repeat

steps 3. through 5.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions
4. Setting the DICOM Print Item Option Meaning Remarks
Output Conditions REQ-SRV

Requesting
department
Image Information for
The DICOM Print output condition setup data are detailed below. generation identifying the BIN
device (machine number that is used to
DEV-CODE
Item Option Meaning Remarks shipment control specify the film output
Identification key
identification destination
Film having a (Recognition
BLUE FILM Routine setting. code) (printer trays)
blue background Code)
Media type (character string:
MPM MPM code
(Media Type) Film having a information matching
CLEAR FILM transparent Exposure the information attached
background BODY-PART anatomical to image data).
region
MAGAZINE Magazine
Film output
NONE No setting
destination When the output
PROCESSOR Processor Default BIN BIN number for printing
(Film destination is FN-PS. BIN-number-
Destination) number images without
BIN_I Printer trays indicating
(Default BIN matching collation
number
8IN10IN 8"10" Number) values.
10IN12IN 10"12" 10-bit image Generates 10-bit
Checked
Film size output image output. Select Checked for a
10IN14IN 2636 cm
(Film Size ID) (10Bits Stored Generates 12-bit FujiFilm printer.
14IN14IN 14"14" Supported) Unchecked
image output.
14IN17IN 14"17"
Transfers an
Replicate SUPPORTED image size
REPLICATE Requested
Image method request tag. Select SUPPORTED
Image Size
interpolation BILINEAR Bilinear method Does not transfer for a FujiFilm printer.
(2020, 0030)
method UNSUPPORTED an image size
(Mag Type) CUBIC Cubic method Routine setting.
request tag.
NONE No interpolation
3.0 If 3.6 is set, images will
Maximum
This setting takes effect be printed at Dmax 3.6
density
only when CUBIC is 3.6 only when the MPM
Dmax
selected as the image CODE is x3xx.
interpolation method.
Image As a character string,
smoothing write the character
A character A character
method string that is defined
string string
(Smoothing under Conformance
Type) Statement for the
output destination
printer. If the output
destination is FN-PS,
leave this column blank.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
DICOM Tag Mapping Function
TagReplace.ini file format

I. Comment
; Tag setup file
When generating image outputs using the DICOM CR STORAGE II. Section name
;
(protocol name)
function, you can edit (copy, move, delete, or initialize) the tag [DICOM]
information (image information). To edit the tag information, open the ; III. Editing destination tag
setup file (TagReplace.ini) and write desired data in the file. ; IV.Command
The procedure is described below: 00080090=MOV-T-L,00092F90
00181400=CPY-T,00192F30
u NOTE u 00192f90=DEL
; V. Initial value
Do not use the TagReplace.ini file, which is used by any other 00192F30=SET,"SKULL,GENERAL"
equipment (such as the QA-WS), for the CL. Due to different file storage
format adopted, an error will result. FR000001.EPS
I. Comment
Lines beginning with a semicolon (;) are handled as a comment.
1. Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Configuration
folder. II. Section name (protocol name)
As the section name, the protocol name targeted for tag information
2. Open the TagReplace.ini file with Notepad (Notepad.exe). editing must be written within square brackets ([ ]). Only DICOM is
supported.
u NOTE u
III. Editing destination tag
By default, [DICOM] is described in the TagReplace.ini file. Do not Write the group number/element number of the editing destination tag
delete this description,otherwise the CL will not be started. information (enter a string of eight characters at all times).
IV. Command
Write a tag information editing command. See the table that is presented
3. Write desired tag information in the file in accordance with later.
the format described later.
V. Initial value
REFERENCE Write a character string in VR-compliant format to specify the initial
value for a tag information element.
As the editing target tag VR, only character strings are supported.
If a tag VR entry in the setup file is not a character string, an error
dialog box opens at CL startup.
4. Save the TagReplace.ini file in UNICODE format and then

close Notepad (Notepad.exe).
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
The following commands are available: u NOTES u

Command Description When writing the TagReplace.ini file, set data in compliance with
DICOM VR. Also, exercise care to avoid internal data inconsistency.
CPY Process Copies an element from another tag.
Even if the editing destination tag differs from the source tag in VR,
Format Editing-destination-tag=CPY[-T],editing-source-tag
the editing process is performed as far as they are both in character
-T : Performs an element copy operation after
deleting spaces from the beginning and end string form. Note, however, that even if the character string length is
of the source tag element. If, for instance, the over the limit specified by the editing destination tag VR, the tag
source tag = ABC, the command information is set as is without being checked.
copies ABC ( : space). The editing process will not be performed if the associated tag or
MOV Process Moves an element from another tag. element and initial value do not exist on the source side.
Format Editing-destination-tag=MOV[-T][-L],source-tag For the detailed information about Fujis Private tags, see DICOM
-L : Performs a move operation after setting the Conformance Statement.
source tag element length to zero.
-T : Performs an element move operation after
deleting spaces from the beginning and end
of the source tag element. If, for instance, the
source tag = ABC, the command moves
ABC ( : space).
DEL Process Deletes an element.
Format Editing-destination-tag=DEL[-L]
-L : Sets the element length of the editing
destination tag to zero.
SET Process Sets a fixed initial value for the element.
Format Editing-destination-tag=SET, initial-value
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Creating/Deleting Markers
For Windows 7
1. Select Properties from the menu.
By default, the CL allows you to use 83 different markers that are
frequently used at institutions. However, some institutions might want to
use some other markers or delete infrequently used markers from the
list.
This section explains about the procedures for creating new markers
and deleting markers.
u NOTE u
Changing filename of a marker used for automatic markers will cause
an error to result when performing an exposure using a filename-
changed marker.
For this reason, do not change filename of a marker used for automatic
markers. As the need arises to change it, be sure to delete automatic DXL040B0008.ai
markers from all the exposure menus beforehand.

The Image Properties window opens.
Creating markers 2. Select Black and white from the Colors area.
New markers can be created with Paint, which is a standard
application supplied with the OS. When creating a marker, launch Paint
and perform the following procedure.
Image format
Only the monochrome format of Windows BMP can be used.
For Windows 2000 / XP / Vista

From Paints Image menu, choose Attributes. In the Attributes
window, choose Black and white from the Colors area.
DXL040B0009.ai
FR000007.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Filename For Windows 7

The filename must consist of an alphanumeric character string and
extension (.bmp). 1. Select Properties from the menu.
When the CL-AP lists markers, they are arranged in the order
determined by their file names.
REFERENCE
For software version V7.0(B) or later, double-byte characters can be
used to describe a filename.
Minimum/maximum size
The marker size range is from 50 pixels 50 pixels to 1000 pixels
1000 pixels (which corresponds to an actual dimensional range of
0.5 mm 0.5 mm to 100 mm 100 mm). DXL040B0008.ai
From Paints Image menu, choose Attributes. In the Attributes The Image Properties window opens.
window, specify the size by entering values in the Width and
Height input fields. 2. Set the size in the Width and Height input fields.
FR000008.ai
DXL040B0010.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Actual size Marker creation example [Reference]

One BMP pixel corresponds to an actual size value of 0.1 mm. The procedure for creating a marker is described below. The procedure
To create a 25 mm marker, use Paint to create 250-pixel data. presumes that the following marker is to be created:
Example) BMP : 100 pixels 100 pixels 15mm
Actual size : 10 mm 10 mm
Marker data storage location

You can use a created marker when its file is stored in the following
folder.
8mm
123
File Name : 123.bmp
The folder can store up to 128 data. Since 83 data are initially
stored, you can additionally store up to 45 data if the initially stored
data is left undeleted. 1. Click , point to Programs and Accessories, and
C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp then click Paint.
Marker retention after an application upgrade Paint then opens.
Even if you upgrade the application, created markers are retained.
2. Perform the following procedure.
I. From the Image menu, choose Attributes.
The Attributes window then opens.
For Windows 7
I. From the menu, choose Properties.
The Image Properties window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. In the Width and Height fields, enter 150 and 80, 5. With Text tool, enter text.
respectively. Turn ON the Black and white radio button in
the Colors area. u NOTE u
Enter text in black (against a white background of BMP data).
u NOTE u In a CL-AP window, the white portion of BMP data becomes the
Be sure that Pixels is selected in the Units area. background with the text (marker) displayed in black.
For Windows 2000 / XP / Vista For Windows 2000 / XP / Vista
FR000004.EPS
Text tool Enter 123.

FR000003.EPS
For Windows 7
For Windows 7
Text Tool
Enter 123
DXL040B0012.ai
DXL040B0011.ai
4. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
6. Perform the following steps to save the created BMP data in the 7. Launch the CL-AP. Verify that 123.bmp is displayed in the
predetermined folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp). marker list.
1. Choose "C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp" 123.bmp
FR000009.EPS
FR000005.EPS
2. Enter 123.bmp. 3. Choose Monochrome Bitmap.
u NOTE u
If the following window opens, click .
DXL040B0013.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Deleting markers
Move the associated BMP data in the following folder to Recycle Bin or
another folder.
C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Using the DICOM Log Mode
3. Enter the parameter value 0, 1, or 2 as shown below.

Using the DICOM Log Mode The meanings of the modes selected by these parameters
are explained below:
The DICOM log is a record of communications with DICOM-connected 0: Records nothing.
equipment. Under normal conditions, the log files record associations 1: Records associations only (default).
only. However, you can record detailed descriptions of communications 2: Records detailed information as well.
by changing the DICOM Log Mode. This mode change is called a
DICOM Log Mode change.
The log files record the numbers of DICOM tags, the information
attached to DICOM tags, the time of communication with connected
equipment, and other relevant information.
u NOTE u
Parameter
(The symbol represents a space.)
Changing the DICOM Log Mode FR000010.EPS

For Windows 2000/XP A confirmation window opens, notifying you that the DICOM Mode
is changed.
From the menu, choose Run..., and then click
.
For Windows Vista/7
From the menu sequentially choose All

FR000011.EPS
Programs, Accessories and Run and then click

. 5. Click .
The confirmation window closes.
2. Select the DicomLogMode.exe file in the following directory:
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\DicomLogMode.exe u NOTE u
After completion of a DICOM Log Mode change and log file
verification, be sure to return the mode selection to 1.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Log file storage locations and types Previous log files
1. Open the directory (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Log) in

which the DICOM log files are stored.
2. Use a text editor (Notepad) to open the DICOM log files.

The following DICOM log files are used:
DICOMMWLSCU.log : Log of MWM ORDER function
related information
DICOMMWMPI.log : Log of MWM ID function related
information
DICOMMPPSSCU.log : Log of PPS function related
information
DicomPrint.log : Log of DICOM PRINT function
related information
DicomStorage.log : Log of DICOM STORAGE
function related information
DicomStorageCommitment.log : Log of DICOM STORAGE
COMMITMENT function related
information Log files are stored here. FR000012.EPS
DICOMQRRET.log : Log of DICOM Query/Retrieve

REFERENCE
function related information
DicomIn.log : Log of function for image input Previous log files are stored in folders named A, B, C, and so
from the FCR5000plus or for on. The log files saved directly under the Log folder are those
DICOM image input using DICOM which were generated when the application was last started. When
QR the application is started again, a new folder is created (e.g., folder
DICOM QRSRH.log : Log of DICOM QR - Query D) and the log files saved directly under the Log folder are
function related information moved to the new folder.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Details of log files

The log file shown below is used in log mode 2 (detail mode) to record
MWM-related communications.
I.
000104242002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> A-ASSOCIATE-RQ II.
III.
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> PresentationContextID -> 0x01
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> AbstractSyntax -> "1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31" IV.
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> TransferSyntax -> "1.2.840.10008.1.2"
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker R <118> A-ASSOCIATE-AC V.
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker R <118> PresentationContextID -> 0x01 Result (0x00)

VI.
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker R <118> TransferSyntax -> "1.2.840.10008.1.2"
2002/01/18 14:04:42 broker R <118> (0040,0007) 14(0xe) LO

VII.
2002/01/18 14:04:42 broker R <118> -> "CHEST, PA/LAT"
FR000014.EPS
I. Date and time of a data transmission by CL or other connected
equipment
II. CL association
III. Information about the transmitter (broker S = CL, broker R = other
connected equipment)
IV. Detailed information (transmitted by CL)
V. Connected equipment association
VI. Detailed information (transmitted by connected equipment)
VII. Tag information
REFERENCE
The data to be recorded varies with selected log mode.
Mode 1 records the logged data about associations only (only the
second and fifth lines in the above figure). Mode 2 records the entire
logged data.
Mode 0 records nothing.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Display Gradation Correction Setup
Setup procedure
Display Gradation Correction Setup With the Service Utility, perform gradation correction setup as directed
below.
The display gradation correction setup procedure is performed to
optimize the appearance of images displayed on other manufacturers 1. Start the Service Utility mode and open the gradation
viewer when they are transmitted from the CL. correction setup window (LUT Operation).
This section explains about the LUT file handling and Service Utility For the procedure for opening the setup window, see
setup procedures to be performed for gradation correction purposes. 2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function under
u NOTE u CL + Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed
Images) in OE4: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
For image display optimization, it is necessary to use a LUT file that is
created with Fujis CRT-QC gradation correction tool for use with other
manufacturers viewer. Create such a LUT file beforehand.
2. In the setup window (LUT Operation on the DICOM Setup
screen), select a LUT transmission type.
For how to create a LUT file, see FCR Diagnostic Image
Display Gradation Correction Procedure in the MONITOR QC
Service Manual. I.
II.
To use the LUT Operation function from software version V5.0(B) or III.
later, a 16bitLUT file is required.
For how to create a 16bitLUT file, see 1. LUT Bit Conversion IV.
Tool. V.
VI.
Handling the LUT file

FR050001.EPS
I. Choose this option when outgoing images are not to be

Create a LUT file with Fujis CRT-QC gradation correction tool for use subjected to gradation correction.
with other manufacturers viewer.
II. Choose this option when outgoing images are corrected on the
Copy this file to the CLs specified folder and change its name.
CL for gradation and then transmitted as DICOM-processed
Copy destination : C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut folder images.
Filename : SCP AE name+.lut (e.g., ViewerA.lut) u NOTE u
Option II. is selectable only when the processed image
u NOTE u transmission option key is installed in the CL and DICOM CR
For Siemens viewer, use the LUT file (siemens.lut) that is stored in the Storage setup is completed for processed image transmission.
following folder on the CL.
III. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (Modality LUT
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\siemens.lut module/0028,3000) is to be added to outgoing images so that
Be sure to change the filename (to SCP AE name+.lut). they are subjected to gradation correction at the connected
equipment (Kodak, etc.).
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Display Gradation Correction Setup
IV. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (VOILUT V. Enter 1 in the Value data field.
module/0028,3010) is to be added to outgoing images so that
they are subjected to gradation correction at the connected
equipment.
V. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (VOILUT
module/0028,3010) is to be added to outgoing images so that
they are subjected to gradation correction at the connected
equipment. The sending LUT used for this purpose is the one
that includes gradation processing data. This option can be
selected only for handling of 12bit processed images. FR000057.EPS
NOTE VI. Click .
When using the V. option, above, a 16bitLUT file is required. Save The screen goes back to the Registry Editor window.
a 16bitLUT file in C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut. VII. Close Registry Editor (Regedit).
For how to create a 16bitLUT file, see 1. LUT Bit Conversion VIII. Start the Service Utility mode and open the aforementioned
Tool. setup window (LUT Operation of the DICOM Setup screen).
IX. Locate in the window.
VI. Choose this option when the connected equipment used is
manufactured by Siemens. By default, this option is hidden. X. Check this option ( ).
To show this option, perform the procedure indicated in the next
step. u NOTE u
Do not check this option when the 12bit image output setting is
3. If the connected equipment used is manufactured by used.
Siemens, check ( ).
This option is hidden by default. To check this option, you must first 4. Save the setup data and then exit the Service Utility mode.
set the system to show it. The procedure is described below.
I. Exit the Service Utility mode.
II. Open Registry Editor (Regedit).
III. In the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\FujiFilm\IIP folder,
create a DWORD value named ModlutDisplay.
IV. Double-click .
The Edit DWORD Value dialog box opens.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit Conversion Tool
1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool Functions and overview

The LUT Bit Conversion Tool converts a 10bitLUT file to a 10
16bitLUT file.
This section explains the LUT Bit Conversion Tool commands and Activating this tool displays the following window (main menu
operations. This tool uses PowerTools Olectra Ver6.0 runtime module. hereinafter).
Olectra Chart
Copyright 2000 ComponentOneLLC
I
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit
Conversion Tool II
V
Operation environment III
Use a PC that meets the following requirements. VII
VI
Windows XP SP2 IV
OS
Windows 2000 SP4 VI
FR050002.EPS
Required program Specifies a 10bitLUT file targeted for conversion.

I Input File
The LUT Bit Conversion Tool consists of the following files. (Default path: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\*.lut)
Conv10bitLUT.exe (LUT conversion program) Specifies location of storage and filename of a

converted LUT file. The folder where the file specified
ConvLUTGraph.exe (Program to show graph of an LUT file after II Output File in I, above, is located, plus Result.txt are displayed
conversion.) as the default path.
Olch2x32.ocx (Component necessary for executing the LUT (Default path: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Result.txt)
conversion program.) Selects an algorithm used for data conversion.
cubic spline interpolation :
III Algorithm Bit processing implemented using the cubic spline.
B spline interpolation :
Bit conversion implemented using the B spline.
Bit number after Enters a bit number (10 16) after data conversion
IV
the converting processing.
Start of data
V Starts data conversion processing.
conversion
Graphical
VI Shows a graph of a converted LUT file.
representation
VII Exit Exits the LUT Bit Conversion Tool.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit Conversion Tool
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit 1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File
Conversion Tool
Described herein is the procedure for converting a 10bitLUT file to an
LUT file of the specified bit number.
Starting the tool
1. Start the LUT Bit Conversion Tool.
1. Execute Conv10bitLUT.exe.
Exiting the tool
1. Select Exit on the main menu window.
I
II
III
IV
FR050003.EPS
I. Specify a 10bitLUT file targeted for data conversion.

II. Specify location of storage and filename of a converted LUT file.
III. Select an algorithm used for data conversion.
IV. Enter a bit number after data conversion processing. (Enter 16
for an LUT used with V5.0(B) or later).
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File
6. Verify the graph.

3. Click .
7. Click .
The system returns to the main menu window.
When data conversion processing is complete, a window like that
shown below opens.
8. Exit the LUT Bit Conversion Tool.
FR050004.EPS
4. Click .
The system returns to the main menu window.
5. Click .
Data of an LUT file subjected to bit conversion processing is
represented by a graph.
FR050005.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens)
TagLookup.ini file format

DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens)
I. Comment
NOTE ; DICOM-Tag editing function setup
; II. Protocol type
For the CR Console Lite, the CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT FOR LITE option [DICOM]
key needs to be installed. III. MPM code tag and character
string embedding tag
[00181401,00081030]
A character string can be embedded in a tag in accordance with an IV. MPM code
input image MPM code. To do this, open the setup file (TagLookup.ini) 0301=TEST1
and describe an MPM code for character string embedding and the tag V. Character string
0302=TEST2
into which a character string is to be embedded.
The procedure is described below. FR000015.EPS
I. Comment
1. Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Configuration Lines beginning with a semicolon (;) is handled as a comment.
folder. II. Protocol type
The name of the protocol to be edited must be written within
2. With Notepad (Notepad), open the TagLookup.ini file. square brackets ([ ]). Only DICOM is supported.
III. MPM code tag and character string embedding tag
REFERENCE Describe an MPM code tag (fixed at 00181401) on the left-hand
side. Describe a character string embedding tag on the right-
By default, nothing is written in the TagLookup.ini file. hand side. Separate these two entries with a comma (,).
III. and IV. can be combined to set up two or more III. and IV.
items using different tags.
3. Write the settings in the file in compliance with the format IV. MPM code
explained later. Describe an MPM code for character string embedding. You can
describe one or more MPM codes.
4. Save the TagLookup.ini file in text format and then close V. Character string
Notepad (Notepad). Describe the character string to be embedded in the tag. Be sure
to enclose the character string in double-quotation marks ().
u NOTES u
When an image having MPM code 0301 is entered in situations where
The TagLookup.ini file uses Unicode characters. Therefore, be the settings indicated in the above example are used, an output will be
sure to use Notepad as an editor and save the edited file in generated with the character string TEST1 embedded in the 00081030
Unicode format. tag (Study Description).
The backup function of Service Utility version A08 does not back
up the TagLookup.ini file. Perform a manual backup/restore u NOTES u
procedure by, for instance, selecting the TagLookup.ini file directly
and saving it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the For the detailed information about Fuji Private tags, see DICOM
like. Conformance Statement.
Because the TagLookup.ini file is applied after the TagReplace.ini file,
settings performed by the TagLookup.ini file take effect if values have
been set up for the same tag.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure Result Log Function
4. Use either of the following procedures to revert the modified

Setup of Log Output Items of ExposureResultLog.mdb file to the CL-PCs previous
directory.
the Exposure Result Log Function
Restore the setup file.
Copy the modified ExposureResultLog.mdb file to the
To change data items to be stored in a log, edit on Microsoft Access C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Param folder.
2000 the ExposureResultLog.mdb setup file backed up using the
Service Utility function. You can change log items in the check boxes of
the EntryFlag column on the ExposureResult table. The necessary u NOTE u
procedure is described as follows. Note that if there are a lot of log items, the number of data items
Edit the ExposureResultLog.mdb setup file on a different PC. that can be stored in the log will be smaller.
1. Use Microsoft Access to open the ExposureResultLog.

mdb file.
2. Open the Exposure Result table.
3. Turn on/off check boxes in the EntryFlag column

accordingly.
To add a log item, check the relevant check box.
To delete a log item, uncheck the relevant check box.
FR000059.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Wake-on-LAN Setup

Wake-on-LAN Setup The installer starts running and the FF-WakeOnLAN Setup
window opens.
This section describes the setup procedure for the Wake on LAN
function, which automatically starts the Image Reader upon CL startup.
u NOTES u
Only the CR-IR364 can be automatically started by the Wake on LAN
function. FR000060.EPS
displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7. 3. Click .
The FF-WakeOnLAN Setup/Choose Destination Location window
opens.
Installing the Wake-on-LAN Utility
1. 4. Click .
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens. The FF-WakeOnLAN Setup/Start Copying Files window opens.
NOTE 5. Click .
The installation process starts.
Upon completion of installation, the Setup complete window
opens.
6. Click .
FR000061.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Wake-on-LAN Setup
Registering other connected equipment REFERENCE

Perform the following procedure to register other connected equipment As regards the CR-IR364, the MAC address can be obtained with
to be started automatically: the maintenance utility.
1. From the menu, choose Programs, Fuji Film,

and FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.
4. Click .
The Wake-on-LAN Utility starts up. The system returns you to the previous window.
FR000063.EPS
FR000065.EPS
2. From the Edit menu, choose Register.

The other connected equipment registration window opens. 5. To register another connected equipment, repeat steps 2.
through 4.
6. Perform the following steps to verify the automatic startup
process:
I. Put other connected equipment on standby.
I II. Select other connected equipment from the list, and then click
.
III. Click .
II IV
7. After verifying startup process for other connected
equipment, click to exit the Wake-on-LAN
III
utility.
FR000062.EPS
I. Enter MAC address (e.g., 11-AB-CD-EF-AB-CD) of other

connected equipment. Verifying the automatic startup process
II. Enter IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.10) of other connected 1. Put other connected equipment on standby and then restart
equipment. the CL.
III. Enter host name (e.g., ru0) of other connected equipment.
IV. Make sure that Enable is checked. (If you intend to register 2. Verify other connected equipment starts up the moment the
other connected equipment but do not want it to automatically
CL starts up.
start up, uncheck Enable.)
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup

GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup The main menu of the IIP Setup Tool opens automatically.
When the software is upgraded from version A10 or earlier to version NOTE
A11, all the GPR processing parameters for existing exposure menus In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
are disabled. double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
Whether a grid is used or not is automatically checked for so that the
GPR process is performed only when it is needed. Therefore, the GPR
function should be disabled for menus that will never use the grid for
making exposures, and enabled for the other menus.
Software version A11 additionally incorporates a function for performing
the above setup procedure (enabling/disabling the GPR process).
When the GPR option is newly added for use with software version A11
or later, perform the setup procedure.
To change the GPR process setup, use a menu provided by the IIP
Setup Tool, which is supplied on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2). The procedure
is described below:
FR000077.EPS

The GPR Default Parameter Setup Menu opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup
3. Enter 1 (for the Japanese version) or 2 (for a non-

Japanese version), and then press the <Enter> key.
The system sets the GPR processing parameters.
When you perform the above procedure, the following MPM code
menus are disabled (turned OFF) and the other menus are enabled
(turned ON). If the resulting setup does not meet the operating
conditions for a specific institution, manually adjust it accordingly.
Japan U.S. Other countries
Breast menu ?3?? ?3?? ?3??
Test menu ?9?? ?9?? ?9??
Treatment menu 7 ? 0B, 7 ? 1B
Pneumoconiosis
0210
menu
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup for Addition of Descriptive

Characters to Icons
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance
u NOTES u
Setup of Rules Applied for The IssuancePreset.dat file uses Unicode characters. Therefore,
Automatic Patient ID Issuance be sure to use NotePad as an a editor and save the edited file in
the Unicode format.
The backup function of Service Utility does not back up the
Rules applied when automatically issuing patient ID can be set up as IssuanceIdPreset.dat and IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat files. Perform
follows. a manual backup/restore procedure by, for instance, selecting the
Open the setup file (IssuanceIdPreset.dat) to describe elements (such IssuanceIdPreset.dat and IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file directly
as study date, auto increment function, etc.) to be included in the and saving them on media, such as FD, USB memory stick.
automatically issued patient ID. However in V8.1(B) or later, IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file is
NOTE backed up in Service Utility.
To use the screening examination order issuance function for version
V7.1(B) or later, the IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat setup file is used.
Perform necessary operations reading the description presented herein IssuanceIdPreset.dat file format
for it accordingly.
Elements Elements Elements
1. Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config folder. %SystemID(0)%%Date("YYMMDD")%%AutoInc("A",5,0,99999,1,1)%
A B A B A B
2. Use the NotePad function to open the IssuanceIdPreset.dat
file.
A : Character string component
REFERENCE B : Identifier (character string element issuance rule) FR110001.eps
The default IssuanceIdPreset.dat file includes the following

description. System ID (alphanumerics) + study date (year,
month, day) + a five-digit serial number are issued following the
IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file format
automatic issuance rules. Elements Elements Elements
For IssuanceIdPreset.dat
%SystemID(0)%%Date(YYMMDD)%%AutoInc(A,5,0,99999,1,1)% %SystemID(0)%%Date("YYMMDD")%%AutoInc("AutoIncID",5,1,99999,1,1)%
For IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat A B A B A B
%SystemID(0)%%Date(YYMMDD)%%AutoInc(AutoIncID,5,1,99999,1,1)%
A : Character string component

3. Describe the settings in the file in compliance with the B : Identifier (character string element issuance rule)
format explained below. FR190001.ai
NOTE
4. Save the IssuanceIdPreset.dat file in the text format and
close NotePad. If format of the ID issuance setup file is invalid (when the applicable
restrictions are not observed appropriately), a relevant message
appears at CL-AP startup. In such cases, correct the setup file format
as necessary. Note however that even if the format is invalid, it is
converted into fixed values internally and the CL-AP, as a result, starts
up.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Details of setting items (IssuanceIdPreset.dat)

Display item Component How to set up the identifier Setup example
System ID %SystemID(Type)% Type (numerical value) %SystemID(0)%
0 : Alphabet (A to Z)
1 : Numerics (1 to 26)
The value set up for No. 14 System Recognition ID (A to Z) of IMAGE MODALITY will
be used.
Date %Date(Format)% Format (character string) %Date(YYMMDD)%
YY : All the four digits representing the Christian Era. (2004)
yy : The lower two digits of the Christian Era. (04)
GG : Three digits with initial for the Japanese Era. (H16)
MM : A two-digit number representing the month.
DD : A two-digit number representing the day.
Time %Time(Format)% Format (character string) %Time(HHMM)%
HH : A two-digit number representing the hour. (An around-the-clock representation)
MM : A two-digit number representing the minute.
SS : A two-digit number representing the second.
Fixed character %Fix(String)% String (character string) %Fix(FUJI)%
string Enter single-byte characters.
Do not use multi-byte characters, * (one-byte character) and @ (one-byte
character).
User-defined %UFix(ID, Max)% ID (character string) %UFix(B,4)%
character string Enter an identifier for user-defined character strings. Set a value different from the
auto increment identifier. If an identifier same as to the auto increment identifier is set,
the two same values will be set up.
Max (numerical value)
Enter the maximum character string length.
* Elements for a maximum of one character string can be set up in one script.
Auto increment %AutoInc(ID, Order, Min, Max, ID (character string) : Auto increment identifier %AutoInc(A,4,0,9999,1,1)%
(serial numbers) Count, Reset)% Order (numerical value) : The number of digits. (6)
Min (numerical value) : Minimum value. (0)
Max (numerical value) : Maximum value. (999999) [When reaching the maximum
value, it will be reset to the minimum value.]
Count (numerical value) : Increment range of serial numbers. (Numerical value)
Reset (select one of the following) : Whether or not to reset the serial number at CL-AP
startup.
0 : Not to reset.
1 : Reset to Min at CL-AP startup.
2 : Reset to Min at CL-AP startup only when the specified date is different from that of
the last issuance.
* Set the value so that Max > Min.
* Components for a maximum of one character string can be set up in one script.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Details of setting items (IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat)

Display item Component How to set up the identifier Setup example
System ID %SystemID(Type)% Type (numerical value) %SystemID(0)%
0 : Alphabet (A to Z)
1 : Numerics (1 to 26)
The value set up for No. 14 System Recognition ID (A to Z) of IMAGE MODALITY will
be used.
Date %Date(Format)% Format (character string) %Date(YYMMDD)%
YY : All the four digits representing the Christian Era. (2004)
yy : The lower two digits of the Christian Era. (04)
GG : Three digits with initial for the Japanese Era. (H16)
MM : A two-digit number representing the month.
DD : A two-digit number representing the day.
Time %Time(Format)% Format (character string) %Time(HHMM)%
HH : A two-digit number representing the hour. (An around-the-clock representation)
MM : A two-digit number representing the minute.
SS : A two-digit number representing the second.
Fixed character %Fix(String)% String (character string) %Fix(FUJI)%
string Enter single-byte characters.
Do not use multi-byte characters, * (one-byte character) and @ (one-byte
character).
User-defined %UFix(ID, Max)% ID (character string) %UFix(SiteCode,64)%
character string Make sure to specify SiteCode.
It should not be the same as the registry key name determined based on the
conventional automatic ID issuance function.
Max (numerical value)
Always specify 64.
* Elements for a maximum of one user-defined character string can be set up in one script.
Auto increment %AutoInc(ID, Order, Min, Max, ID (character string) : Auto increment identifier %AutoInc(AutoIncID,5,1,99
(serial numbers) Count, Reset)% * Always specify AutoIncID. (Fixed value) 999,1,1)%
Order (numerical value) : The number of digits. (6)
* Do not determine 0 (=variable).
Min (1) : Minimum value
* Always determine 1. (Fixed value)
Max (999) : Maximum value (999)
* Always determine 999. The displayed number of digits should be in accordance
with the value determined for Order above. (Fixed value)
Count (1) : Increment range of serial numbers. (Numerical value)
* Always determine 1. (Fixed value)
Reset (1) : Whether or not to reset the serial number at CL-AP startup.
* Always determine 0 (=Not to reset). (Fixed value)
* Only one auto increment character string component can be set up in one script.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
u NOTE u Invalidated Service Utility settings

The configuration setting for character string of a patient ID must be In case the auto ID issuance function was determined to be activated,
longer than a character string issued automatically according to the following items that can be determined using the Service Utility will
17. Patient ID Length of 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under become invalidated.
Setup Configuration Item - SYSTEM CONFIG.
For details of the setting items, see 3.6 Configuration Details
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance Utility.
Service Utility settings Table Invalidated CSL/IDT FUNCTION setting items

The site identification code included in the order information can be No. Name Remarks
stored additionally in any of the DICOM tags. 18 Patient ID Padding Method Changing to any desired setting is
The setting item is as follows. disabled.
Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setting item 21 ExposureListErase Preset exposure menus must be used.
No. Name Selection Meaning 29 StudyNumberType No accession numbers are issued
automatically.
188 Mass Order Site A maximum of 49 Specifying to which tag the site
Code Mapping one-byte identification code, entered 56 EnablePatientDB If this function is activated, the patient
Tag characters. using the screening database is managed by newly added
(Blank) examination order function, is automatically issued patient ID history
to be mapped. database.
(Description example) 80 Enable Auto Menu Creation If this function is activated, no studies
0038,0500 are started with exposure menus
remaining unregistered.
83 DefaultReqService
NOTES
93 UseDistributionCodeDepartName
If format of the determined value is invalid, a relevant message 106 IssuanceIdNumber User Utility settings must be observed.
appears at CL startup, causing thus the startup to be unsuccessful. In
such cases, correct the setup file format appropriately.
If it is not determined (initial setting), the site identification code will not
be stored in the DICOM tag.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Setup of Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of Exposure Guidance

010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing

Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing Mask Processing Default Parameter Setup Menu opens.
Exposure menus applicable to auto shuttering processing have been

added with software version V3.0(B).
To use the auto shuttering processing with version V3.0(B) or later,
enable the processing for those exposure menus by using an automatic FR130002.EPS
setup tool provided with software version V3.0(B).
To use the automatic setup tool, open first IIP Setup Tool menus
incorporated in the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) and then follow the steps below. 3. Type in 1 and press the <Enter> key.
Shuttering processing parameters will then be set up.
Performing the above steps will inactivate (OFF) the auto shuttering
The IIP Setup Tool main menu will open automatically. processing for the following MPM code menus and activate (ON) the
same processing for other menus. Manually set up shuttering
NOTE processing appropriately if the automatic setup will result in settings
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, unsuitable to your customers.
Table List of MPM codes that turn auto shuttering processing OFF
Menu MPM Code
TEST Menu ?9??
RMI156 (only in Japan) 73?9
Treatment Menu (only in Japan) 7??B
BREAST, SPOT 03?1
PARANASAL SINUS 00?1
EAR 00?B
PARANASAL SINUS: C 10?2
PARANASAL SINUS: T 20?0
EAR: T 20?1
EAR-2DIV (only in Japan) 60?A
FR130001.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing

Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion
For Windows 2000/XP
Processing Select [Run...] from the menu.
LUT reverse-conversion processing needs to be set up if images to be
queried/retrieved from the DICOM server may go through FCR image
processing and LUT processing on the server side.
LUT reverse-conversion processing can be implemented by either of
the following:
Have a reverse-conversion table be ready for use on the CL so that
reverse-conversion processing can be implemented on the CL side.
Have a reverse-conversion table be ready for use on the DICOM
printer so that reverse-conversion processing can be implemented on FR140002.EPS
the printer side, based on the LUT type information transferred to the For Windows Vista/7
printer.
From the menu sequentially select All
Shown below are the two separately described setup procedures.
Programs, Accessories and Run.
NOTE The Run... window opens.
To select a desired procedure, see 3.10 Configuration Details
10. CONFIG QR under MU: Maintenance Utility.
LUT reverse-conversion processing on the CL

Creation of the LUT reverse-conversion file
Reverse-conversion processing requires the LUT reverse-conversion
F140005.ai
file. Shown below is the procedure used to create it. 2. Type in C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\CreateLUT.
exe for the execution filename and click .
NOTE
When the CL is up and running, shut the CL down while holding down A window like that shown below opens.
the <Shift> button to have the system being at ordinary Windows status.
F140001.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
3. Perform the following steps. Settings required on the CL

After the LUT file is created for reverse-conversion processing, perform
necessary settings on the CL.
I Start the Service Utility, select CONFIG QR-No2. Reverse LUT For
Processed Image, and select 2: ApplyReverse LUT.
For the CL setup procedure, see CL+DICOM Server (Image

Reprint) under OE20: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
II
F140003.EPS
LUT reverse-conversion processing on the DICOM
I. Use the absolute path to specify an input file in the [Input File] printer
box. Click of [LUT used in outputting processed image:],
Reverse-conversion processing on the printer requires setting on both
and then select an output LUT file (receiver AE name + .lut).
the printer and CL sides
II. Enter 10 for software version V6.0 (B) or earlier.
Enter 16 for software version V7.0 (B) or earlier. Settings required on the printer side
Have an LUT reverse-conversion table be ready on the DICOM printer
NOTE
side. Necessary settings are to be performed on the reverse-conversion
Do not change [Output File] and [InBit (10-16)]. table thus created.
NOTE
4. Click . For how to set up/format the table file, see the manual provided for
each printer.
The LUT reverse-conversion file is created.
A dialog opens to show that the file has been created successfully.
Settings required on the CL side

Start the Service Utility and set up the items below appropriately.
Select CONFIG QR-No2. Reverser LUT For Processed Image and
select 1: SendConfigurationInformation.
FR140004.EPS
Use Network setting to specify printer LUT type information for the AE
5. Click to close the dialog, and click [Exit]. that serves as the StudyRootRetriever service class Provider.
The tool shuts down, closing then the Create LUT for Processed
Images window. For details of the CL setup procedure, see CL+DICOM Server
(Image Reprint) under OE20: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons

010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Accession Number Data Truncation Function
TagCharDataCut.ini file format

Accession Number
; TagCharDataCut
Data Truncation Function ; [AE]
; Tag=Position, Length
I. Comment
When generating image output using the DICOM Storage function, it is ; *******************
possible to partially truncate tag information of an Accession Number II. AE name
[AEName1]
and patient ID. III. Tag
To edit tag information, open the setup file (TagCharDataCut.ini). 00080050=1,3
IV. Position to start
00100020=TAIL,1
Following is the setup procedure to perform.
[AEName2]
00080050=1,3 truncation
V. Number of characters
IMPORTANT 00080050=3,3 to be truncated
FR160001.EPS
When you are using this function, always obtain users agreement by
fully explaining details of settings you are performing. Do not use this I. Comment
function on a system where RIS and PACS are linked. Lines beginning with a semicolon(;) is handled as a comment.
II. AE name
Describe an AE name targeted for data truncation by putting it
NOTE
between brackets ([ ]). No line feed is allowed.
Tag settings are applied in order of priority: III. Tag
TagReplace.ini > TagLookup.ini > TagCharDataCut.ini > TagCharDataAdd.ini Describe a tag targeted for data truncation. Only Accession Number
and patient ID are the tags targeted for data truncation.
When the same tag has multiple settings, settings with higher priority IV. Position to start truncation
are applied. Describe a position to start data truncation. Describe a decimal
See Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each Other number for any desired position. To truncate data of a tag starting
under Accession Number Character String Adding Function. from the tail end, enter TAIL.
V. Number of characters to be truncated
Use a decimal number to describe the number of characters to be
1. truncated.
Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config folder.
NOTE
2. Use the NotePad function to open the TagCharDataCut.ini
The number of characters specified in V., above, must not be larger
file.
than that of the tag targeted for data truncation. It is neither allowed to
truncate all characters of the tag nor the number of characters larger
3. According to the format shown below, edit the file. than that of the tag. If such is specified, it is regarded as an error and
disregarded.
4. Save the TagCharDataCut.ini file in the text format and
close NotePad.exe.
The setup example above will result in the following:
Accession Number in AEName1 : Three characters are truncated
NOTE starting from the first character.
Be sure to use NotePad to edit the TagCharDataCut.ini file and Patient ID in AEName1 : One character is truncated
save the edit result in the Unicode format because the file is based starting from the tail end.
on the Unicode characters. Accession Number in AEName2 : Three characters are truncated
starting from the third character.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan]
Installation of Standard Markers

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup of Date and Time Display
Described below is the procedure used for performing necessary

Setup of Date and Time Display settings.
At CL-AP startup, perform settings necessary for displaying the current 1. Start Explorer to open C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Tools.
date and time, as follows.
2. Right-click IIPDispDateTime.exe to select Create
NOTE Shortcut.
Perform settings for date and time display after completing CL-AP
installation processing.
REFERENCE
The date and time are displayed as shown below. With the mouse
operation, the display position can be moved as desired.
FR180002.EPS
Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe is created.
3. Move Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe to C:\Documents

and Settings\Administrator\ Start Menu \Programs\Startup
(C:\Users\Administrator\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\
Windows\StartMenu\Programs\Startup for Windows Vista /
7 ).
NOTE
If startup user of the CL-AP is other than the Administrator, move
the shortcut to the startup folder of that user.
FR180001.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Change filename of Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe to 7. Make sure that the displayed date and time are correct.
DateTimeDisplayAPL.exe.
NOTE
Follow the procedure below to correct the displayed date and time.

window opens.
The Date and Time Properties window opens.
3.
FR180003.EPS
Correct the date and time appropriately, and click

5. Restart the PC. .
Within about one minute, the CL-AP starts up and the CL initial
window opens.
6. Check to see that the current date and time appear on the
window.
FR180008.EPS
FR180004.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Change the date and time display format as necessary. IV. Select the Time tab to change the Time format.
For Windows 2000 / XP / Vista REFERENCE

ss will not be reflected on the actually displayed time.
I. Select Control Panel from the menu.
II. Double-click .
III. Click .
FR180006.EPS
V. Select then the Date tab to change the Short date.
FR180005.EPS
FR180007.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows 7 9. Change the date and time display font as necessary.
I. Select Control Panel from the menu. For Windows 2000 / XP / Vista
The All Control Panel Items window opens. I. Select Control Panel from the menu.

II. Click .
The Regional and Language window opens. II. Double-click .

III. Select then the Formats tab to change the Short date and
Short time.
III. Select the Appearance tab and click .
FR180012.ai
FR180010.ai
The Advanced Appearance window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
IV. Select Menu in and a desired font in . IV. Select Menu in and a desired font in .
FR180009.ai
For Windows 7
FR180013.ai
II. Click .
III. Click .
The Window Color and Appearance window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
10. Change sizes of the date and time display font as necessary. REFERENCE
I. Select Run... ( All Programs - Accessories - Run... for In case there is no registry that is for sizes of the installed monitor,
determine the registry name and the date and time display font size,
Windows Vista/7 ) from the menu. based on the values shown in the table below.
Monitor size Monitor Monitor Registry Default font
(M) width (pixel) height (pixel) name size
II. Enter regedit and click .
FontSize
0.7 1024 768 10
1024768
FontSize
1 1280 1024 11
12801024
FontSize
2 1600 1200 12
16001200
FontSize
DCL70428.EPS
3 2048 1536 14
20481536
The Registry Editor window opens.
III. Move to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\

IIPDispDateTime.
FR180011.ai
IV. Change the FontSizeWWWWxHHHH registry values to desired

font sizes (WWWW: width of the monitor at installation of the
CL-AP and HHHH: height of the monitor at installation of the
CL-AP).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and Windows Vista / 7 Coexistent Environment [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of Characters Under the

Windows XP and Windows Vista / 7
Coexistent Environment
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
For software version V7.1(B) or later

Adding and Setting the Serial The procedure to be observed for adding a serial connector differs
Connector depending on the number of used ports of the serial connector.
NOTE
The procedure to be observed when adding a serial connector will differ
depending on the software version and the OS used. In X-CON connection if insulation protection is performed to the PC
(780DT), connect the PC and X-CON using MOXA board (CP-112UL)
For software version V7.0(B) or earlier and the OS used is Windows regardless of number of ports to be used.
2000
For software version V7.1(B) or later
When 1 port is used
REFERENCE Use the PC-standard serial port. There is no need to add a serial
connector.
The following 6 CL functions require serial connectors to be set up
appropriately.
When 2 ports are used
X-CON
Add a serial connector from the mother board.
ID Online
DAP For how to add a serial connector, see 1.2 Adding a Serial
15 touch panel Connector from the Mother Board.
Pocket id Console
UPS When 3 to 5 ports are used
Mount the MOXA board.
For how to mount the MOXA board, see 1.3 Mounting the MOXA
1. Adding a Serial Connector Board.
NOTE
For software version V7.0(B) or earlier and the OS used When the OS used is Windows XP, the PSI04A board can be used as
is Windows 2000 well.
To make use of the following functions, the PSI04A board must be
mounted.
When 6 ports are used
X-CON (Siemens Mammography X-CON is not included.)
ID Online Add a serial connector from the mother board and mount the MOXA
board.
For how to mount the PSI04A board, see 1.1 Mounting the PSI04A
Board. For how to add a serial connector, see 1.2 Adding a Serial
Connector from the Mother Board.
For functions other than the above, use PC-standard serial connectors.
For how to mount the MOXA board, see 1.3 Mounting the MOXA
When a 2-port connector is to be used, add a serial connector from the Board.
mother board.
For how to add a serial connector, see 1.2 Adding a Serial
Connector from the Mother Board.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1.1 Mounting the PSI04A Board 3. Make sure that the PSI04A board is set up as illustrated
below. Use CH0, CH1 or CH2 to select RS-422 or RS-232C.
This section describes the procedure used to mount the PSI04A board.
CH0, CH1 and CH2 may be used for the following connectors.
NOTES
First board
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the PSI04A board can not be
CH0: CH-A CH1: CH-B CH2: CH-C
used.
Make sure that the CL-AP has been installed and then mount the PSI Second board
board. CH0: CH-D CH1: CH-E CH2: CH-F
The PSI serial i/f board driver will not be recognized correctly unless
the CL-AP has been installed. When setting CH0, CH1 and CH2, confirm the interface (RS-422 or
RS-232C) between connected devices.
RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C

1. Shut down the CL and turn OFF the power to the CL-PC. RS-422 RS-422 RS-422
2. Disconnect the power cable from the CL-PC.

CH0 CH1 CH2
PSI04A
SW6 SW5
SW8 SW7
SW10 SW9
1
2
SW4
SW5~10 SW4
HARD First board
SOFT Second board
00000488.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Function Settings Remarks For GX110

Selection whether to I. Remove the CL-PC cover.
output CH0 remote This function is enabled II. When the card cage is removed, its PSI board interferes with a
power control signal (at regardless of whether CH0, CH1 cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull the
SW5
master status) as is as a and CH2 are set for RS422 or disk unit on the front of the CL-PC toward you before removing
contact signal or to RS232C
control with the register. the card cage.
Selection whether to #1 [Push] Disk unit
Setup for output Setup for output of contact
output CH1 remote
of contact signal signal as is: Outputs power
SW7
power control signal (at
as is : Hardware supply status to the no. 8 pin of
#2 [Pull]
master status) as is as a
Register control CN1 as a contact signal (same
contact signal or to ON
T
: Software as for CN2 and CN3). FR
control with the register.
Selection whether to
Register control setting: Contact
output CH2 remote #1 [Push]
signal that is output to the no. 8
power control signal (at
SW9 pin of CN1 can be changed by
master status) as is as a
changing register setting values
contact signal or to
(same as for CN2 and CN3). Cables behind the hard disk
control with the register.
CL-PC
(OptiPlex GX110)
Function Settings Remarks OE000006.EPS
Selection whether to
This function is enabled only III. Raise the lever as illustrated by the arrow.
transmit remote power
control signal (at slave
when CH0, CH1 and CH2 are IV. Remove the card cage.
SW6 set for RS422. When set for
status) from CH0 to CN4
RS232C, there will be no output
V. Mount a PSI board in an empty PCI slot.
or to handle it as an
to CN4.
interruption. V. PSI board
Selection whether to III. Lever
transmit remote power Output to CN4 Setup for output to CN4:
control signal (at slave : Hardware Outputs contact signals from PCI slot
SW8
status) from CH1 to CN4 Interruption outside to the CN4 no. 1 pin.
or to handle it as an : Software Only the IDT-IV uses CN4. IV. Card cage
interruption.
Selection whether to Setup for interruption: As contact ON
T
transmit remote power signals changes, interruptions FR
control signal (at slave will result in the hosts. The
SW10 status) from CH2 to CN4 register makes it possible to
or to handle it as an check which CH is ON or OFF.
interruption. No. 1 pin of CN4 is Open for
interruption settings.
4. Mount a PSI board in the PCI slot.

CL-PC
When the PC used is a model other than GX110 or GX150, see
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI) OE000013.EPS
under RI : Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
VI. Remount the card cage in the CL-PC. 5. Connect the power cable to the PC to start up the CL-PC.
VII. Restore the disk unit. Within about one minute after Windows has been started up, the
VIII. Reinstall the CL-PC cover. CL-AP will start up. While the CL-AP is being started up, the PSI
board driver installation window opens.
For GX150
I. Open the CL-PC cover. 6. Click [Cancel].
II. Holding the card cage handle, remove the card cage.
NOTES
III. Mount a PSI board in an empty PCI slot.
Install the AP key and then install the PSI board driver.
Handle For Windows 2000, the PSI board driver is set up automatically
after the CL-AP has started up.
II. Card cage
III. PSI board

7. While holding down the <Shift> key, select Shut Down in
the (or ) menu.
AGP slot Extension card

slot connector
ONT
FR
CL-PC
(GX150 small desktop) OE000014.EPS
IV. Remount the card cage in the CL-PC.

V. Close the CL-PC cover.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from 1. Open the PC cover.

the Mother Board For how to open the PC cover, read the Operation Manual that
comes with the PC.
This section describes the procedure on how to add a serial connector
from the mother board. 2. Connect the serial connector cable.
Add-in serial
connector cable #1
[Connect]
Add-in serial
connector
#2
[Mount]
Add-in serial
connector cable
OE180001.EPS
OE180002.EPS
Location of the serial connector: GX60
Serial connector OE180003.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Location of the serial connector: GX260 Location of the serial connector: GX280
Serial connector OE180004.EPS Serial connector OE180111.EPS
Location of the serial connector: GX270 Location of the serial connector: GX620
Serial connector Serial connector OE180112.EPS

OE180005.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 745 Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 760
Serial connector
Serial connector
OE180115.ai
OE180113.EPS
Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 780

Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 755
Serial connector OE180122.ai
Serial connector OE180114.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board 1.3.1 Setting the DIP Switch (CP-112UL only)
Described herein are the procedures used to mount the MOXA board 1. Set up the DIP switch on the board as follows.
and install the driver.
Mode S1 S2 S3
Cautions for connection RS-232 ON OFF OFF
CL requirements
NOTE
Software version required: V7.1 or later
The computer OS used is Windows XP SP2 or later, Windows Vista, Some of the contents in the operation manual attached to the board is
or Windows 7. incorrect. Set up the DIP switch according to the procedures above.
To use the MOXA board (CP-104EL/CP-114EL), the PCI Express x1
slot is required on the PC.
NOTE
A Windows 2000-installed computer cannot be used because it is not
provided with the PCI Express x1 slot that provides interface with the
MOXA board.
Connected ports (for CP-104EL/CP-114EL)

There are 4 serial ports on a MOXA board (CP-104EL/CP-114EL), of
which the 2 ports are for connection to a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant
equipment unit. (Note however that 3 ports are made available for
troubleshooting purposes.)
When connecting a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit (such
as X-CON or RIS) to the MOXA board, make sure to connect it to port 1
through 3.
NOTE
To connect a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit, do not use
port 4.
PSI board-used environment

The PSI board and the MOXA board cannot be used mixed. For this
reason, be sure to dismount the PSI board, uninstall the driver, and
install a MOXA board class driver. Establish then a connection
appropriately.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1.3.2 Installing the MOXA Board Class Driver 3. Double-click D:\Tools\ClassDriverToolForSERIAL-PORT-

(for Windows XP only) BOARD\SetClassDriver.bat in the CL-AP CD (2 of 2).
Installing the CL-AP under Windows XP environment will install the PSI The command prompt window opens.
board class driver as well. Even if the MOXA board is connected with
both the CL-AP and the PSI board class driver installed together, serial
communications established using the MOXA board will not be
activated.
To connect a MOXA board under Windows XP environment, a MOXA
board class driver needs to be installed. The procedure to be performed
is as described herein.
FR200030.ai
NOTES
It is not necessary to perform this procedure under the Windows Vista 4. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key.
environment, because a MOXA board class driver has been installed A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
at the time of CL-AP installation.
The CL-AP CD (2 of 2) used in installation must be the one in V8.1 or
later.
When using the PSI board, uninstall the driver of PSI board first.
REFERENCE
The MOXA board class driver (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ FR200031.ai
DsmpuUserModeDll.dll (2010/08/18)) uses the same filename as that

used for the PSI board class driver. (The file date is different with each 5. Press the <Enter> key.
other.)
The command prompt window closes.
1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. 6. Remove the CD from the PC.
The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens. 7. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
NOTE
proceed to step 3.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1.3.3 Mounting the MOXA Board 6. Connect the power cable to the PC to start up the CL-PC.
Within about one minute after Windows has been started up, the
1. Shut down the CL and then turn OFF the power to the CL-AP will start up. While the CL-AP is being started up, the
CL-PC. MOXA board driver installation window opens.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the CL-PC. 7. Click [Cancel].
3. Remove the CL-PC cover. REFERENCE

Install the AP key and then install the MOXA board driver.
4. Mount the MOXA board in the PCI Express x1 slot or PCI
slot.
MOXA board 8. While holding down the <Shift> key, select Shut Down in
(CP-112UL)
the menu.
MOXA board
(CP-104EL/ The system returns to the desktop screen.
CP-114EL)
PCI Express x1 slot
PCI slot
Win7Appx03005.ai
NOTE
If a PSI board is mounted on the CL-PC, remove it and then mount
the MOXA board.
REFERENCE
The illustration presented above is for Dell OptiPlex 760. The
same procedure is used for mounting Dell OptiPlex 960.
5. Reinstall the CL-PC cover.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2. Installing the Driver 3. Click [Exit Service Utility].

Service Utility mode exits and the Welcome to the Found New
Hardware Wizard window opens.
When the PSI04A board and the MOXA board are mounted, the
relevant drivers must be installed accordingly.
For how to install the PSI04A board driver, see 2.1 Installing
the PSI04A Board Driver.
For how to install the MOXA board driver, see 2.2 Installing
the MOXA Board Driver.
FR200001.ai
2.1 Installing the PSI04A Board Driver

4. Select and click
1. Turn ON the power to the PC. .
Windows goes up and running. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP
starts up. The installation finish window opens.
2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper

5. Click .
left and upper right corners of the window within a period of The desktop window opens.
3 seconds.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. 6. Right-click My Computer from the menu to
select Properties.
7. Click the Hardware tab and then

MU000031.EPS
8. Ensure that the PSI board driver has been installed

NOTE appropriately and close both the Device Manager and
If the password entry window opens, enter the login password System Properties windows.
(fieldengineer) to Service Utility mode and click .
MU000035.EPS
Service Utility mode starts up displaying then the IIP Service

Utility window. OE000PSI2.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver 3. Click [Exit Service Utility].
Service Utility mode exits and the Welcome to the Found New
2.2.1 Installing the MOXA Board Driver Hardware Wizard window opens.
(For Windows XP)
starts up.
2.
FR200001.ai
When the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper

left and upper right corners of the window within a period of
3 seconds.
4. Select Dont search. I wil choose the driver to install. and
click .
A window where how to install the necessary software is to be
selected will open.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE FR200002.ai
If the password entry window opens, enter the login password

(fieldengineer) to Service Utility mode and click . 5. Insert the CD that comes with the MOXA board into the PC.
6. Select Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]

and click .
The Please choose your search and installation options. window
then opens.
MU000035.EPS

Utility window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
7. Select Search for the best driver in these locations. and 9. Select product names and a driver that is for the OS used,
then checkmark Removable media ( ). and then click .
FR200025.ai
Product names OS
8. Click . FR200004.ai
A driver selection window opens. REFFRENCE

In case the Hardware Installation window opens, click
to proceed to the next step.
FR200005.ai
Software installation processing will start. After a while, Completing

FR200003.ai
the Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
FR200006.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
10. Click . 12. Select Install the software automatically [Recommended]

and click .
NOTE
The port number is displayed.
Upon completion of the board driver setup processing, operation
sequences then proceed to the driver setup processing of each port.
Port 0 will be detected as the new hardware and the Welcome to

the Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
FR200001.ai
11. Select Dont search. I wil choose the driver to install. and
click .
FR200007.ai
A window where how to install the necessary software is to be A driver selection window opens.
selected will open.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
13. Select the product name and a driver that is for the OS used, 14. Click .
and then click .
REFFRENCE
When setups are requested for ports 1, 2 and 3, repeat steps 11
through 14 as necessary.
Product name OS
FR200008.ai
REFFRENCE
In case the Hardware Installation window opens, click
to proceed to the next step.
FR200005.ai
Hardware installation processing will start. After a while, the

Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
FR200010.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver 3. Click [Exit Service Utility].
(For Windows VIsta) Service Utility mode exits and the Found New Hardware window
opens.
starts up.
2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper

left and upper right corners of the window within a period of FR200011.ai
3 seconds.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. 4. Click Locate and install driver software (recommended).
REFFRENCE
In case the Found New Hardware window opens, click Dont
search online to proceed to the next step.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
If the password entry window opens, enter the login password
(fieldengineer) to Service Utility mode and click . FR200012.ai
A window opens prompting you to insert the disk.
MU000035.EPS

Utility window. FR200013.ai
5. Insert the CD that comes with the MOXA board into the PC.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
REFFRENCE NOTE
In case the Windows Security window opens, click Install this Upon completion of the board driver setup processing, operation
driver software anyway to proceed to the next step. sequences then proceed to the driver setup processing of each
port.
REFFRENCE
In case the Found New Hardware window opens, click Dont
search online to proceed to the next step.
FR200014.ai
Upon completion of the driver software installation processing, a

window opens to indicate that the driver was installed successfully.
FR200016.ai
A window opens prompting you to insert the disk.
FR200015.ai
FR200017.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
8. Click . 2.2.3 Installing the MOXA Board Driver (For Windows 7)

REFFRENCE
In case the Windows Security window opens, click Install this
driver software anyway to proceed to the next step. Windows starts up.
After about one minute, the Console-AP starts running.
2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper

left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
NOTE
FR200014.ai
Upon completion of the driver software installation processing, a

window opens to indicate that the driver was installed successfully.
MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility window
opens.

The Service Utility exits and the system returns to the desktop
FR200018.ai screen.
9. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Enter devmgmt.msc in Start search column from the 6. Select Browse my computer for driver software.
menu and press the <Enter> key.
DXL08260025.ai

DXL08260027.ai
5. Right-click PCI Serial Port and select Update Driver

Software.... The Browse for driver software on your computer window opens.
7. Insert the CD that comes with MOXA board into the PC and
click .
NOTE
With MOXA board (CP-104EL/CP-114EL), use Serial Port Board
Driver V2.6 (114Y5342994A00) for Windows 7.
DXL08260028.ai
DXL08260026.ai
The How do you want to search for driver software? window The Browse For Folder window opens.
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Select the DVD drive and click . 11. Right-click MOXA communication port and select Update
Driver Software....
DXL08260029.ai
The system returns to the Browse for driver software on your

computer window.
9. Click .
Installation starts.
Upon completion of the driver software installation processing, DXL08260031.ai
a window opens to indicate that the driver was installed The How do you want to search for driver software? window
successfully. opens.
12. Select Browse my computer for driver software.
DXL08260030.ai
10. Click .
The system returns to the Device Manager window. DXL08260032.ai
The Browse for driver software on your computer window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13. Click . 2.2.4 Confirming Installation of the MOXA Board Driver
NOTE 1. Perform the following settings.
If the DVD driver is not selected, click and change the For Windows XP
reference location to DVD drive, and then click . I. Select Control Panel from the menu.

Installation starts.
Upon completion of the driver software installation processing,
a window opens to indicate that the driver was installed
successfully. II. Double-click .
III. Select the Hardware tab and click .
DXL08260033.ai
14. Click .
15. For rest of the ports, perform the same procedures in step 5.
through 14.

MT000047.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows Vista/7 For MOXA board (CP-112UL)

I. Select Control Panel from the menu. MOXA Communication Port 1 to 2 are displayed below Port (COM
and LPT).
The Control Panel (All Control Panel Items for Windows 7) MOXA CP-112UL Series (PCI Bus) is displayed below Multi-port
window opens. serial adapters.
II. Double-click (click for Windows 7) .
2. Confirm the following.
For MOXA Board (CP-104EL/CP-114EL)

MOXA Communication Port 1 to 4 are displayed below Port (COM
and LPT).
MOXA CP-104EL Series or MOXA CP-114EL Series is
displayed below Multi Port Serial Adapters.
DXL08260034.ai
FR200019.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Port and Service Utility Settings 2. Perform the following settings.

For Windows XP
To make use of the following functions with software version V7.1(B) or I. Select Control Panel from the menu.
later, port and Service Utility settings must be performed properly after
adding a serial connector. The Control Panel window opens.
X-CON (Siemens Mammography X-CON is not included.)
ID Online
II. Double-click .
The setting procedures are different with each other between the case
where the PC-standard serial connector and an add-in serial connector
are used and the case where the MOXA board is used. The System Properties window opens.

3.1 The Case Where the PC-standard
Serial Connector and an Add-in Serial
Connector are Used
1. Use the Service Utility capability to set up the port number

to be used.
For details of the individual setup items, see
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under
Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items
No. Name
44 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port
63 RIS Serial_TX Control Port
136 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port2 MT000047.EPS
178 DAP Serial_TX Control Port The Device Manager window opens.
For Windows Vista/7

window opens.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Click the symbol to the left of Ports (COM & LPT). 5. Click .
The Advance Settings for COM1 window opens.
DXL819008.ai
For other than DAP or Siemens mammography X-CON
I. Select a port number value, which is the one that is
4. Right-click the COM port the serial cable is connected to, added by 32 to the value set up in the Service Utility.
and select Properties.
Example: Select COM33 when
The Communications Port (COM1) Properties window opens. 44:Xcon Serial_TX Control Port = 1.
II
III
IV
VI DXL08260036.ai
For DAP
DXL819009.ai I. Select a port number value set up in the Service Utility.
Example: Select COM32 for
I. Select the Port Settings tab. 178:DAP Serial_TX Control Port = 32.
II. Select the same value set in CONFIG CSL/IDT
FUCTION 111:Xcon Serial_TX Baudrate.
III. Select 8.
IV. Select None.
V. Select 1.
VI. Select None.
DXL08260035.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Click .
The system returns to the Communications Port (COM1)
Properties window.
8. Click .
9. Close the Device Manager window.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3.2 The Case Where a MOXA Board is Used 1. Perform the following settings.
For Windows XP
NOTES
COM32 through COM33 port numbers are assigned on the MOXA
board. In case any of the COM32 through COM33 port number is used The Control Panel window opens.
for some other device, such COM port number needs to be changed
as required beforehand, and necessary settings must be performed
appropriately so that a COM port number same as that assigned on II. Double-click .
the MOXA board is not used double.
The maximum number of DAP connection port number is 32. Select
COM32 or less for Port Number. The System Properties window opens.
MT000047.EPS
For Windows Vista/7

window opens.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2. Right-click MOXA CP-104EL Series (PCI Bus), 4. Perform the following settings.
MOXA CP-114EL Series (PCI Bus), or
For MOXA board (CP-104EL/CP-114EL)
MOXA CP-112UL Series (PCI Bus), and select
Properties. I. Select COM33 from the Port Number pull-down
menu.
II. Place a checkmark to Auto Enumerating COM
Number.
I.
II.
DXL08260037.ai
The properties window of the MOXA opens.
3. Select the Ports Configuration tab. Select then the row for FR200022.ai
Port 1 and click . REFFRENCE

Checkmarking Auto Enumerating COM Number will assign
serially numbered COM port numbers to Port 2 and thereafter.
COM port number for Port 4 does not have to be serially
numbered.
Because a maximum of 32 connection port numbers are assigned
to DAP or Siemens mammography X-CON, it is desirable that 32
or smaller COM port number is assigned to Port 4 so that such
equipment can be connected to the Console.
DXL08260038.ai
The Port 1 window where the Port Number is to be set up will open.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For MOXA board (CP-112UL) 7. Confirm that the port number and COM port number of the
board are set as follows.
I. Select COM32 from the Port Number pull-down
menu. For MOXA board (CP-104EL/CP-114EL)
II. Place a checkmark to Auto Enumerating COM Port number COM port number
Number.
MOXA Communication Port 1 COM33
MOXA Communication Port 2 COM34
I MOXA Communication Port 3 COM35
II MOXA Communication Port 4 Arbitrary
(COM32 or smaller value is recommended.)
DXL08260018.ai
5. Click .
The system returns to the MOXA CP-112UL Series (PCI Bus)

Properties window.
6. Click .
Win7Appx03007.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For MOXA board (CP-112UL) 8. In the Service Utility, set up a port number to be used.
For details of the individual setting items, see 3.6
Port number COM port number Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under MU:
MOXA Communication Port 1 COM32 Maintenance Utility.
MOXA Communication Port 2 COM33 Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items

No. Name
44 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port
63 RIS Serial_TX Control Port
136 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port2
178 DAP Serial_TX Control Port
DXL08260039.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Setting the Exposure Index Function
NOTES
Setting the Exposure Index Function Software version V8.0 or later enables the EI and DI values to be
displayed.
When an image derived from the Image Reader is received, an index The EI value accuracy is 20%.
value, Deviation Index (DI), that represents the degree of deviation The Exposure Index function does not support the Mammography
between the Exposure Index (EI) that is proportionate to the X-ray dose exposure menus. As a result, the EI and DI values will not be
and the ideal EI value (EIt) is calculated and then displayed. calculated leaving the relevant display boxes to be blank.
The EI value and the DI value are displayed as floating windows on the The EI and DI values will be displayed only when the determined
study screen and the QA screen. functionality is RT.
With respect to a study image that has already been subjected to the
This chapter presents the description on how to display the EI and DI
study, the EI and the DI values will not be recalculated even if the ideal
values.
EI value (EIt) that is to be used as a guidepost for the exposure menu
is changed.
CAUTION
The used Image Reader must regularly be subjected to complete
calibration processing using the Image Reader QC tool, so that REFERENCE
the EI and DI values can be applied for the purpose of control of The Exposure Index is displayed on the Study screen and the QA
actual image quality. Processing screen as shown below. Its display position can be moved
Any changes in exposure menus and/or exchange of images as desired with mouse manipulation.
made with regard to a menu already subjected to exposure do
not affect the functionality to display the EI and DI values (the EI
and DI values will be displayed as commanded according to the
functionality of the originally determined exposure menu). Note,
however, that the EI and DI values will not be displayed even if an
energy subtraction menu that has already been subjected to
exposure is changed to an RT menu. To check the EI and DI
values after changing an exposure menu or exchanging images,
select a correct exposure menu and then perform study.
A long-view exposure menu terminated without undergoing any
image composition processing does not cause the EI and DI
values to be displayed, because it is considered to have been
determined a long-view exposure menu (WS) in terms of the
functionality.
FR210001.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setting the Exposure Index Function
Service Utility settings Correction coefficient parameter file

With the use of the Service Utility capability, it is possible to enable or Correction coefficient specific to each of the Image Readers (cassette
disable the Exposure Index function. type: IP VN/VI, dual-side cassette type: ST-BD, built-in type) are stored
in the ExposureIndex.prm file that is located under the following folder.
Table IMAGE MODALITY setup item
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ExposureIndex.prm
Do not change unless it is absolutely necessary to do so.
72 Enable Yes Specifying whether to enable
Exposure Enables the Exposure or disable the Exposure
Index Index function. Index function. REFERENCE
Function No The Backup/Restore function that the Service Utility capability offers is
Disables the Exposure
available for the ExposureIndex.prm file.
Index function.
Saving and Outputting Exposure Index

For Software V8.0
The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags
(Private).
EI value : (0007,F330) VR name : IS
DI value : (0007,F331) VR name : DS
EIt value : (0007,F332) VR name : IS
The EI value, DI value, and EIt value cannot be output externally.
For Software V8.1 or later

The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags
(Standard).
EI value : (0018,1411) VR name : DS
DI value : (0018,1413) VR name : DS
EIt value : (0018,1412) VR name : DS
The EI value, DI value, and EIt value can be output in the following
service classes (including media storage).
DICOM Standard CR Storage (image processed)
DICOM Private CR Storage (standardized)
DICOM Unstandarlized CR Storage (before standardized)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Accession Number Character String Adding Function
Accession Number Character String

Adding Function
When the image is output from DICOM STORAGE, an optional
character string (hospital ID etc.) can be added before or after the tag
information of Accession Number and patient ID.
To edit the tag information, open the setup file (TagCharDataAdd.ini).
Following is the setup procedure.
IMPORTANT
When you are using this function, always obtain users agreement by
fully explaining details of settings you are performing. Do not use this
function on a system where RIS and PACS are linked.
NOTE
Tag settings are applied in order of priority:
TagReplace.ini > TagLookup.ini > TagCharDataCut.ini > TagCharDataAdd.ini
When the same tag has multiple settings, settings with higher priority
are applied.
See Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each
Other.
1. Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config folder.
2. Use the NotePad function to open the TagCharDataAdd.ini file.
3. According to the format shown below, edit the file.
4. Save the TagCharDataAdd.ini file in the text format and

close NotePad.exe.
NOTE
Be sure to use NotePad to edit the TagCharDataAdd.ini file and
save the edit result in the Unicode format because the file is based
on the Unicode characters.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
TagCharDataAdd.ini file format NOTE

The maximum length in each tag is fixed.
; TagCharDataAdd
Accession Number : 16 characters
; [AE]
I. Comment Patient ID : 64 characters
; Tag=Position, Length
If the number of characters for each tag after adding a character string
; ******************* is greater than the maximum number of characters, the character string
will not be added. Therefore, configure the number of characters in
[AEName1] II. AE name
each tag so that the numbers are less than the maximum values.
00100020=FRONT,FujiHospital1 Also, the number of characters for Accession Number and patient ID
00080050=TAIL,FujiH1
(section 15 and 17 of CSL/IDT FUNCTION) must be set within the
values with the number of added characters subtracted from the
[AEName2] maximum number of characters.
III. Tag
00100020=FRONT,FujiHospital2
IV. Adding position When Accession Number is 9876543210 and patient ID is 0123456789,
V. Character string the following results will be as follows with this setting example.
to be added Accession Number of AEName1 : 9876543210FujiH1
Patient ID of AEName1 : FujiHospital10123456789
00100020=FRONT,FujiHospital2 Patient ID of AEName2 : FujiHospital20123456789
FR220003.ai
I. Comment
Lines beginning with a semicolon(;) is handled as a comment.
II. AE name
Describe an AE name to which a character string is to be added by
putting it between square brackets ([ ]). No line feed is allowed.
III. Tag
Describe the tags to which a character string is to be added. The only
tags to which a character string can be added are Accession Number
and patient ID.
IV. Adding position
Describe the position where a character string is to be added. To add
a character string at the beginning, input FRONT, and then input
TAIL to add a character string at the end.
V. Character string to be added
Describe by single-byte characters except @ and *.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each Other Result
Indicates the example of setting when the following files are applied to a The .ini files will be applied as follows according to the priority
tag. sequence of TagReplace.ini > TagLookup.ini > TagCharDataCut.ini
> TagCharDataAdd.ini.
TagReplace.ini file (DICOM Tag Mapping Function)
TagCharDataCut.ini file (Accession Number Data Truncation Function) (xxxx, yyyy) = (01234567)
TagCharDataAdd.ini file (Accession Number Adding Character String
Function) TagReplace.ini
Configuration Replacing tags

Copy (xxxx, yyyy) to (aaaa, bbbb) by DICOM Tag Mapping Function
(TagReplace.ini). (aaaa, bbbb) = (01234567)
Delete the first four characters of (aaaa, bbbb) by Data Truncation
Function (TagCharDataCut.ini). TagCharDataCut.ini
Add FUJI at the end of (aaaa, bbbb) by Character String Adding
Function (TagCharDataAdd.ini). Deleting character strings
Set (xxxx, yyyy) to (01234567). (aaaa, bbbb) = (4567)
TagCharDataAdd.ini
Adding character strings

(aaaa, bbbb) = (4567FUJI)
FR220004.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
SP: Service Parts
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual SP-I
SP: Service Parts
Control Sheet

12/10/2000 00 Revision (FM2950) Pages I, II, 1, 6, 8, 10, 13, 15, 16
04/10/2001 01 Previous Chapter C Error Information/Service Parts All pages
divided and modified (FM2951)
05/30/2001 02 Revision (FM3027) I, II, 3, 4
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, 4
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) I, II, 4-6
03/01/2003 07 Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) I, II, 4
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) I, II, 1, 35
11/12/2004 12 Support provided to NEC PC and corrections IIV, 68
(FM4450)
07/30/2005 14 Support provided to NEC PC (RAID I, II, 37
specifications) and corrections (FM4543)
05/09/2008 18 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) I, II, 36
11/30/52009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, II, 3, 4, 6
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual SP-II
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual SP-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual SP-IV
1.1 How to Use Service Parts List
1. Service Parts List REF. NO.

A number for indicating each part in the Service Parts Exploded
Views.
PART NUMBER
RANK A code number that is unique to each part. The rightmost letter of the
Parts handling ID symbols used to identify the parts requiring special code number has the following meaning.
operation For hardware
The ID symbols are assigned to applicable parts. Parts without the R The letter denotes the version number of a part. If parts have
mark are replaced and handled in a regular manner. different version numbers, they are upward-compatible.
Symbol Description For software
R Repairable parts The letter denotes the software specifications.
Q, T Symbol for use other than in Japan
PART NAME
Export regulation mark This represents the general name of a part.
This + mark is assigned to the parts subject to Export regulations.
Parts without the + mark are not subject to Export regulations.
QTY.
Symbol Description QTY. represents the quantity of parts used in a unit or assembly.
+ Parts subject to Export regulations
Fault rankings used for estimating the recommended stock quality REMARKS
All parts are assigned a symbol letter from A to E. Unique name of a part or its relevant information or note is described
in this column.
Symbol Description
A
Consumable parts or parts that will be replaced at short SERIAL NUMBER
intervals The units may contain different parts depending on their shipment
Parts that may become faulty accidentally and have a control number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment control
B
relatively high failure rate number to which the parts are applicable. If this column is blank, the
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to parts are applicable to all the relevant units.
C
have a high failure rate
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to
D
become faulty
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis or parts that may
E
be needed in case of faults such as man-induced damage
RANK column description

The symbols for Fault Ranking, Parts Handling, and Export
regulation are assigned in order named. Thus, one to three letters
are put in the RANK column.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual SP-1
Recommended quantities of spare parts

It is recommended as a rough guide to hold in stock a specified
quantity of parts according to the rank (A to E) assigned to the parts.
Parts to be replaced at periodic intervals must be held in stock
separately.
Adjust the quantity of parts stock depending on the number of
working units (N) as prescribed below.
Q: Quantity used in a single system
N = 1
Rank A = 1 + Q 0.3
Rank C = 1 + Q 0.05
Rank D = 1 + Q 0.02
2 N 10
Rank A = 2 + N Q 0.3
Rank C = 2 + N Q 0.05
Rank D = 1 + N Q 0.02
11 N 300
Rank A = 3 + N Q 0.3
Rank C = 3 + N Q 0.05
Rank D = 2 + N Q 0.02
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)

39
7
41
8
40 15
E
1723
BorE
O NT
FR 58
LP 24
61 16
AUSB
2532
4
2
4451,60
RIS 1
34
5
B 2 Isolator
5457
6 5 C
5 CL-PC
10 B
AUSB
3 SIEMENS X-CON
39
12 42, 70
D 5 33
35
AUSB
AUSB 37
62 AUSB
11,13,52,53 14
36
C
38 43, 71
59 D 9
AUSB
00000055 EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
64, 72
63
65, 66, 73
68, 69
67
DXL51001.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RANK REF. PRAT UMBER PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NUMBER
E 1 114Y5342001 Software 1 Main unit software
E 2.1 340N0205 Knob 2 For LCD stand
E 2.2 340N0227 Knob 2 For LCD stand (black)
E 3.1 357N1405 Table 1 For LCD stand
E 3.2 357N1455 Table 1 For LCD stand (black)
E 4.1 357N1406 Table 1 For LCD stand
E 4.2 357N1456 Table 1 For LCD stand (black)
D 5 367N0021 Rubber foot 4 For LCD stand
E 6 401N0811 Retaining plate 1 For LCD stand
E 7 357N1428A Table 1 For wall-mounting LCD
E 8 357N1429A Table 1 For wall-mounting LCD
D 9.1 813Y0142A/B Power supply 1 CR-IR346CL Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
D 9.2 813Y0145C Power supply 1 CR-IR348CL Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
CR 10.1 849N0067A Monitor display 1 LCD (9415TD15/G2) Function repair
CR 10.2 849Y0094/B Monitor display 1 LCD (9415TD15/H2 or 9416 TD15/H2-1) Function repair
CR 10.3 849Y0095 Monitor display 1 LCD (L350P-TS (black)) Function repair
CR 10.4 849Y0099 Monitor display 1 LCD (L351P-TS (black)) Function repair
CR 10.5 849Y0103 Monitor display 1 LCD (L362T) Function repair
CR 10.6 849Y100027B Monitor display 1 LCD (L560T-C) Function repair
CR 10.7 849Y100004 Monitor display 1 LCD (3M monochrome) Function repair
CR 10.8 849Y100057 Monitor display 1 LCD (3M color) Function repair
CR 10.9 849Y100048 Monitor display 1 LCD (2M color) Function repair
CR 10.10 849Y100066 Monitor display 1 LCD (2M monochrome) Function repair
D 11 852Y0082 Reading unit 1 MCR-JIS
D 12.1 852N0023A Reading unit 1 BCR DENSO HC36TU-K
Optoelectronics
D 12.2 852N0026A Reading unit 1 BCR
OPT-6125-USB
D 12.3 852N0032 Reading unit 1 BCR Symbol LS1908T
D 12.4 852N100003 Reading unit 1 BCR Metrologic MS3780
D 13 852Y0083 Reading unit 1 MCR-ISO
E 14 357N1408 Table 1 For wall-mounting MCR
CR 15 113Y1405B PEI01A 1 E-i/f serial board
CR 16 113Y1502A/B PSI04A 1 Serial i/f board
E 17 136Y5869A FCR i/f cable 1 5m
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
E 24 136Y5868A Conversion cable 1 1.2m
E 25 136Y5757A Cable 1 CL - RIS OP-09/VH-05 RIS terminal 3m (D-sub 9pin)
E 29 136Y5761A Cable 1 CL - RIS/X-ray OP-09/VH-01 3m for RIS terminal/X-ray equipment connction (D-sub 25pin)
E 33 357S0024 Rack 1 For the BCR
E 34 347N1785 Bracket 1 Spacer (exclusively for 9416TD15/H2-F)
E 35 136Y8551 Cable 1 Hospital-grade (only for units used in Japan), 136Y8550+fastener
E 36 136Y8546 Cable 1 Hospital-grade option (only for units used in Japan)
E 37 357N1528 Rack 1 For the BCR (exclusively for Symbol LS1908T)
D 38 898Y1008 Ferrite kit 1
E 39 405N3111 Name plate 2 For the Japanese version only
D 40 125N0299 Battery 1 PDA lithium battery (only for units used in Japan)
C 41.1 136S1245 Cable 1 Extension serial connector cable (only for units used in Japan)
Extension serial connector cable (only for units used in Japan)
C 41.2 136Y9400 Cable 1
For Dell OptiPlex GX280 SMT/SDT
Extension serial connector cable + decorative laminate (only for units used in Japan)
C 41.3 136Y101344 Cable 1
For Dell OptiPlex GX620 MT, 745 MT, 755 MT
D 42 852N0036C Reading unit 1 BCR (model: BH2104-FF1) Symbol LS2208T
E 43 357N1611 Rack 1 For the BCR (exclusively for BH2104-FF)
D 44 113Y1873 Memory board 1 For GX60/260
D 45 113Y1876 Memory board 1 For GX270 (SDT/SMT) TS256MDL2075
D 46 113Y1878 Memory board 1 For GX280 (SDT/SMT) TS256MDL5075/5076
D 47 113Y1882A Memory board 1 For WS370
D 48 113Y1881 Memory board 1 For WS360
D 49 113Y1935 Memory board 1 For WS330/340
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
D 52 852N0039/A Reading unit 1 MCR-JIS KT-900U-IR-2004
D 53 852N0040/A Reading unit 1 MCR-ISO KT-960U-IR-2001
E 54 136Y100276A Cable 1 Isolator to X-CON 3m (only for units used other than in Japan) CR-IR 348
E 58 138S0460 Ferrite core 1 For USB mouse
CR-IR 348 (for units
DR 59.1 850Y0132 Memory 1 DVD-RAM drive (Panasonics LF-M766JD external type)
used in Japan)
DR 59.2 850Y0145 Memory 1 DVD-RAM drive (Panasonics LF-M860JD external type)
used in Japan)
D 59.3 850Y100026A Memory 1 DVD-RAM drive (BUFFALOs DVSM-XL20U2 external type)
used in Japan)
D 59.4 850Y100039 Memory 1 DVD-RAM drive (BUFFALOs DVSM-XL20U2 external type)
used in Japan)
D 59.5 850Y100050 Memory 1 DVD-RAM drive (BUFFALOs DV3D-20U2 external type)
used in Japan)
D 60 113Y100249 Memory board 1 Used in common to 755/745/GX620/GX280 T8512MOL380
Symbol
D 61 888S0002A Cradle 1 (Only for units used in Japan)
CRD8800-100SIMR
Analog video cable for touch panel (FlexScan Moniter Cable V55)
E 62 136N100049 Cable 1
(only for units used in Japan)
C 63 113Y1971E Video board 1 Video board for DUAL monitor / 3M monochrome (RealVisionSMD5-PCI)
CR 64 113Y100435/A Video board 1 Video board for DUAL monitor / 2M/3M color/monochrome (ATI FireGL V3600)
C 65 113Y100464 PC board 1 Serial port add-in board (RS232C) MOXA CP-104EL
C 66 113Y100465 PC board 1 Serial port add-in board (RS232C/RS422) (For Shimadzu HLZ100 X-CON ) MOXA CP-114EL
D 67 136Y102172 Cable 1 Relay adapter
D 68 136Y102171 Cable 1 Serial conversion cable (RS232C)
D 69 136Y102364 Cable 1 Serial conversion cable (RS422)
Datalogic Gryphon
D 70 852N100014 Reading unit 1 BCR
GD4130
D 71 357N100769 Rack 1 For the BCR (exclusively for Datalogic Gryphon GD4130)
Video board for DUAL monitor / 2M/3M color/monochrome
D 72 113Y100609 Video board 1
(ATI FirePro V3800) (for Windows 7)
MOXA CP-112UL-I-
C 73 113Y100610 PC board 1 Serial port add-in board (PCI)
DB9
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable

only for overseas users)
12 A
11
8
13
3
C
C B
17 5,6
16 B
7
1 10
14
19
A 18
4 15
20
00000056.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)
DQ 1 850N0013 HDD 1
CQ 2 125N0137 Power supply 1
CQ 3 113Y1838 PC board 1 Motherboard
DQ 4.1 102N0085 IC 1 DIMM-DDR-512-NECC
DQ 4.2 102N0097 IC 1 512MB memory extension
DQ 5 102N0087 IC 1 Pentium4 2.8GHz
DQ 6 102N0086 IC 1 Celeron 2GHz
D 7 119N0011 Fan 1 CPU fan
D 8 119N0012 Fan 1 Housing fan
D 9 852N0035 CD-ROM drive 1
D 10 850N0014 FDD 1
E 11 128N0078 Mouse 1 PS/2 mouse
E 12 128N0077 Keyboard 1 Model 104 keyboard
D 13.1 128N0080 Power supply SW 1 Power supply SW assembly
D 13.2 128N0081 LED/SW cable 1 (RAID specification)
HDD signal cable
E 14 136N0455 Cable 1
* This is a special cable, which cannot be substituted by any other cable.
E 15 136N0456 Cable 1 CD-ROM unit signal cable
E 16 136N0457 Cable 1 FDD unit signal cable
E 17 136N0458 Cable 1 Speaker cable
E 18 350N3135 Cover 1 Front bezel
CQ 19 113Y1856 PC board 1 RAID board (RAID specification)
DQ 20 850N0015 HDD 1 (RAID specification)
NOTE
When you are asking for replacing a part free of charge, use the error
analysis tool (TeDoLi) to attach error log of a part that caused an error
to occur.
For details of the device test procedures, see 5.1.2 Device Test
Procedures under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
For details of the error log save procedures, see 5.1.3 Log Save
Procedure under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)
H
B
D 15
24
A C 14
3
10
A
G 11
1
16 2
E
FDD
H
8 F 13 19
20
B
G C
9 F
HDD
DVD 18
21
4 17
12
22 E D
7
23
00000057.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RANK REF. PART PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL

NUMBER NUMBER
C 1.1 113Y100405 Board assembly 1 HP 437793-001 SPS-BD SYS SFF PC : dc7800
C 1.2 113Y100660 Board assembly 1 HP 462432-001 SPS-BD SYS EAGLELAKE SFF MARS PC : dc7900
C 1.3 113Y100661 Board assembly 1 HP 536884-001 SPS-BD SYS EAGLELAKE SFF MARS DDR3 PC : 8000Elite
D 2.1 102N100020 IC (CPU) 1 HP 457656-001 SPS-PROC Pentium E2180 PC : dc7800
D 2.2 102N100029 IC (CPU) 1 HP 465216-001 SPS-PROC uP Pentium E2200 PC : dc7900
D 2.3 102N100030 IC (CPU) 1 HP 503382-001 E5200 PC : dc7900
D 2.4 102N100031 IC (CPU) 1 HP 516900-001 E5300 PC : dc7900
D 2.5 102N100032 IC (CPU) 1 HP 586743-001 SPS-PROC Pentium E5400-VT PC : 8000Elite
D 3.1 102N100021 IC (memory) 1 HP 418951-001 SPS-MEM DIMM 1GB PC-2-6400 PC : dc7800, dc7900
D 3.2 102N100034 IC (memory) 1 HP 576109-001 SPS-DIMM 1GB PC3-10600 PC : 8000Elite
D 4.1 850N100009 Memory (HDD) 1 HP 449978-001 SPS-DRV HD 80GB PC : dc7800, dc7900
D 4.2 850N100018 Memory (HDD) 1 HP 504336-001 SPS-DRV 160GB PC : 8000Elite
C 5.1 125N100039 Power supply 1 HP 437797-001 SPS-P/S BL PFC 240W PC : dc7800
C 5.2 125N100054 Power supply 1 HP 460888-001 SPS-PSU 240W PC : dc7900
C 5.3 125N100055 Power supply 1 HP 508151-001 SPS-PSU 240W PC : 8000Elite
E 6.1 379N100043 Radiator (heat sink) 1 HP 453053-001 SPS-FANSINK GNRC PC : dc7800
E 6.2 379N100063 Radiator (heat sink) 1 HP 490813-001 SPS-HEATSINK GENERIC PC : dc7900
E 6.3 379N100064 Radiator (heat sink) 1 HP 581354-001 SPS-Heat sink PC : 8000Elite
Electric fan
D 7.1 119N100033 1 HP 451144-001 SPS-FAN ASSY D7 PC : dc7800
(housing fan)
Electric fan
D 7.2 119N100051 1 HP 499199-001 SPS-FAN ASSY SYS D7 PC : dc7900
(housing fan)
Electric fan
D 7.3 119N100052 1 HP 581352-001 SPS-ASSY CHASSIS FAN 09 PC : 8000Elite
(housing fan)
D 8 850N100010 Memory (FDD) 1 HP 431452-001 SPS-DRV DSKT W/BEZEL&M3-SCREWS CBT PC : dc7800, dc7900
Memory
D 9.1 850N100011 1 HP 419496-001 SPS-DRV DVDROM SATA 16X PC : dc7800, dc7900
(DVD-ROM)
Memory
D 9.2 850N100019 1 HP 581599-001 SPS-DVD-ROM 16X SATA JB DTO PC : 8000Elite
(DVD-ROM)
E 10.1 128N100040 Switch (mouse) 1 HP 537748-001 SPS-MOUSE SCROLL CARBONITE PC : dc7800
E 10.2 128N100058 Switch (mouse) 1 HP 537749-001 SPS-Mouse USB Optical Jack Black PC : dc7900,8000Elite
E 11.1 128N100041 Keyboard 1 HP 537745-291 SPS-KYBD PS/2 BASIC VISTA-JP PC : dc7800
E 11.2 128N100060 Keyboard 1 HP 537746-291 SPS-HP USB KYBD JB JP PC : dc7900,8000Elite
E 12.1 136N100052 Cable (front I/O) 1 HP 451143-001 SPS-CA ASSY FRONT IO D7 PC : dc7800
E 12.2 136N100165 Cable (front I/O) 1 HP 460895-001 SPS-CA ASSY FRONT IO 165/150mm PC : dc7900
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
RANK REF. PART PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL

NUMBER NUMBER
E 12.3 136N100166 Cable (front I/O) 1 HP 581351-001 SPS-CA ASSY FRONT I/O PC : 8000Elite
E 13 136N100053 Cable (serial port) 1 HP 453052-001 SPS-CA ASSY SER PORT PC : dc7800
Cable PC : dc7800, dc7900,
E 14 136N100054 1 HP 391739-001
(SATA for HDD) 8000Elite
Cable PC : dc7800, dc7900,
E 15 136N100182 1 HP 391738-001
(SATA for DVD) 8000Elite
E 16.1 136N100055 Cable (FDD) 1 HP 454246-001 SPS-CA ASSY DATA FLPY PC : dc7800
E 16.2 136N100167 Cable (FDD) 1 HP 499200-001 SPS-CA ASSY DATA FLPY PC : dc7900
PC : dc7800, dc7900,
E 17 136N100056 Cable (AC) 1 HP 292657-191 SPS CORD AC POWER-JP
8000Elite
E 18.1 369N100112 Duct (fan duct) 1 HP 451145-001 SPS-DUCT FAN PC : dc7800
E 18.2 369N100138 Duct (fan duct) 1 HP 460892-001 SPS-DUCT FAN CATS-HOUNDS PC : dc7900
E 18.3 369N100139 Duct (fan duct) 1 HP 583652-001 SPS-DUCT FAN 09 PC : 8000Elite
Cover
E 19.1 350N101276 1 HP 451140-001 SPS-BACKWALL ASSY LOW PROFILE D7 PC : dc7800
(housing rear cover)
Cover
E 19.2 350N102042 1 HP 497736-001 SPS-ASSY BACKWALL LP EAGLE LAKE PC : dc7900
(housing rear cover)
E 20.1 107N100003 Solenoid 1 HP 451149-001 SPS-SOLENOID LOCK ASSY PC : dc7800, dc7900
E 20.2 107N100004 Solenoid 1 HP 586752-001 SPS-ASSY SOLENOID LOCK PC : 8000Elite
PC : dc7800, dc7900,
E 21 121N100002 Speaker 1 HP 394779-001 SPS-SPKR 40X28.5mm 4ohm 2W
8000Elite
Switch (power
D 22.1 128N100042 1 HP 435261-001 SPS-ACCESS PANEL ASSY D7 PC : dc7800
switch assembly)
Switch (power
D 22.2 128N100061 1 HP 460896-001 SPS-ASSY ACCESS PANEL CATS-HOUNDS PC : dc7900
switch assembly)
E 23.1 350N101277 Cover (front bezel) 1 HP 451148-001 SPS-FRONT BEZEL ASSY D7 PC : dc7800, dc7900
E 23.2 350N102106 Cover (front bezel) 1 HP 581353-001 SPS-ASSY FRONT BEZEL PC : 8000Elite
E 24.1 357N100471 Table 1 HP 451150-001 SPS-TOWER STANDASSY D7 PC : dc7800, dc7900
E 24.2 357N100834 Table 1 HP SPS-ASSY CHASSIS STAND 09 PC : 8000Elite
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual I
Control Sheet
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual II
1. Preventive Maintenance Items
1. Preventive Maintenance Items Table of preventive maintenance items

(Recommended cycle of preventive maintenance: Annual)
While the CL is being used, maintenance of the items listed in the table Work items
Required Replacement
Remarks
on the right should be performed periodically, observing the Warnings time part
and Cautions shown below. 2. Checking for a Fatal Error
2.1 Confirming the Event Log
WARNING 3. Safety
To avoid electrical shock, turn off the power to the equipment, 3.1 Service Voltage
before performing maintenance work. 3.2 Power Plug
4. Hardware Cleaning
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning
WARNING/CAUTION
4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning
Observe Warnings/Cautions described in the Safety Precautions
4.3 LCD Cleaning
section.
4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning
5. Executing the Error Analysis
CAUTION Checking the Memory and
5.1
When performing maintenance work of the inside of the PC, the Hard Disk
user is required to wear a wrist strap unfailingly to secure proper 6. Functional Checks
grounding. Confirmation of Image Input to
6.1
Otherwise, electronic parts mounted on the boards may be Storage onto HDD
damaged due to static electricity discharged by the user. 6.2 Image Output to Film [option]
6.3 Image Transfer
7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of Date and Time
Backup of Setup Files and Log
7.1
Files
7.2 Verification of Date and Time
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1 Confirming the Event Log
2. Checking for a Fatal Error 3. Safety

2.1 Confirming the Event Log 3.1 Service Voltage
View the OS event log (application) to check for any fatal error Verify the service voltage that is available within the institution.
recording.
For the procedure for viewing the event log, see 2. Using the
Event Viewer under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
3.2 Power Plug
WARNING
When making resistance measurements, be sure that the power
plug is disconnected from an outlet.
Measure the resistance values of the power cable.
Terminals Between L and N Between L and M Between N and E

Resistance value 100 k or higher
<For European and <For U.K. and

<For Japan> <For U.S.>
other countries> other countries>
E
E E
E
L L N N
N N L
L
DCL61002.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning
4. Hardware Cleaning 4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning
1. With a vacuum cleaner, remove dust that is accumulated

4.1 PC Internal Cleaning between keyboard keys.
Cooling fans (power supply fan, CPU fan, etc.) are mounted in the PC
to dissipate generated heat through air convection. 2. Rotate the ring on the bottom of the mouse
If dust is heavily accumulated in the neighborhood of a cooling fan or a counterclockwise, and then take the ball out.
vent in the PC housing, the effect of the cooling fan may decrease,
thereby adversely affecting the operation of the PC. It is therefore 3. With a soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the ball clean.
necessary to clean the inside of the PC on a periodic basis.
4. With an air blower, carefully blow dust away from the mouse
Preparations case into which the ball is to be placed.
Disconnect all cables from the PC main body.
5. Place the ball back in the mouse case.
Cleaning
1. With a brush attached to a vacuum cleaner, carefully
vacuum-clean the slots and other openings in the rear of the
PC.
2. Open the PC cover.
3. With an air blower, clean the heat sink and circuit board
section.
4. Close the PC cover.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.3 LCD Cleaning
4.3 LCD Cleaning 4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning
1. With a Cleaner Torch, remove dust from the LCD. 1. Reconnect all disconnected cables.
2. If there is any stubborn dirt on the LCD panel surface, wipe 2. Turn ON the power to both monitor and PC.
it clean with a cloth (e.g., gauze) well wrung out in water. Windows starts up. In about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.
CAUTION
3. Within three seconds after the initial window opens, click
If you vigorously scrub the LCD panel surface, the liquid crystal the upper left corner and then the upper right corner of the
surface may become damaged. Therefore, do not apply any undue window.
force to the LCD panel surface when you wipe it clean. If the LCD
panel surface is heavily soiled and cannot be cleaned with a The Enter Password window opens.
moistened cloth, clean it with the monitor cleaner kit. The monitor
cleaner kit is of a chemical type. Therefore, if the monitor cleaner 4. Click Cancel to close the window.
kit is repeatedly used for cleaning purposes, the LCD panel
surface will be adversely affected. When using the monitor cleaner 5. Open the optical drive (CD, DVD/CD-RW drive) tray.
kit, read its operation manual and exercise utmost care.
6. Clean the optical drive with a dedicated lens cleaner.
NOTE For details of the procedure, see manuals supplied with the
dedicated lens cleaner kit.
Do not use dehydrated ethanol for cleaning purposes because it
adversely affects the LCDs surface film.
7. Close the optical drive.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk
5. Executing the Error Analysis 6. Functional Checks

5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk 6.1 Confirmation of Image Input to
Storage onto HDD
See the below to check the memory and hard disk.
4.1 Checking the Memory under MT: Machine Troubleshooting 1. Read an image and check to see that it is stored without fail.
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk under MT: Machine
Troubleshooting
6.2 Image Output to Film

See the following to perform the specified procedure.
3. Verifying the Connection in CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L
(DICOM Print) under OE5: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment
6.3 Image Transfer

See the following to perform the specified procedure.
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment in
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) under OE3:
Connecting the CL to Other Equipment
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files
7. Backup of Setup Files and

Verification of Date and Time
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files
See one of the following to perform the specified procedure.
4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup under
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus
and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files under
and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
4.8.7 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup under
and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
7.2 Verification of Date and Time

See the following to verify date and time of the PC and Pocket id
Console.
4.1.2 OS Setups under IN-B: Installation Connection to Two
or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/
368/370/371/372
2.4.1 Setting Date and Time in CL+POCKET id Console (Portable
Exposure Function) under OE18: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A: Installation Connection to One

XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual IN-AI
IN-A: Installation Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
Control Sheet

12/10/2000 00 Revision (FM2950) Pages I, II, i, ii, 25, 810, 12, 13,
15, 1724, 2628, 3035, 3742,
4650, 5254, A1-14, A2-1, A3-1,
A3-3, A4-1, A4-2, A4-7, A5-24,
A6-13, A7-1, A7-3, A7-4, A8-18,
A9-14, A10-14
12/10/2000 00 Changes in pagination (FM2950) Pages 67, 11, 14, 16, 25, 29, 36,
4345, 51, 55, 56
04/10/2001 01 Previous Chapter A Installation
modified (FM2951) All pages
05/30/2001 02 Revision for software version A02 I, II, IN-A150, Appx IN2-3,
Appx IN3-1Appx IN7-4
08/30/2001 03 Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) I, II, 1, 3, 6, 12-16, 18-20, 22, 24,
28, 29, 31, 35, 36, 43, 45,
App IN1-1, App IN2-2, App IN3-1,
App IN4-2, 3, 6, App IN5-3, 4, 6,
App IN6-14, App IN7-16,
App IN8-14, App IN9-1, 2
08/30/2001 03 Changes in pagination (FM3125) 23, App IN1-2, 3
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, III, IV, 2, 4, 7, 19, 2230, 35,
36, 41, 42, App IN1-1, App IN2-13,
App IN3-1, App IN4-2, App IN5-13,
6, App IN8-16, App IN9-3, 4
03/20/2002 04 Changes in pagination (FM3297) 20, 3134, 3740, 4348,
App IN1-2
30, 34, 48
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) I, II, 2, 3, 16, 17, 28, 30, 34, 35, 47
03/01/2003 07 Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) I, II, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 21, 29, 31, 32,
3437
08/20/2003 08 Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) I, II, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 22, 3033, 35
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) I, II, 2, 18, 21, 35
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual IN-AII
IN-A: Installation Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
Control Sheet
51, 52
05/09/2008 18 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) I, III, 1, 14, 32, 35
43
39, 41, 42, 4452
11/30/2009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, III, 25, 27
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) I, III, 25, 27
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual IN-AIII
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual IN-AIV
1.1 Dimensions and Weight
1. CL Installation Conditions 1.3 Places of Installation

Environmental conditions
This section states the PC (controller: DELL OptiPlex GX150)
installation conditions. Avoid installing the machine at the following places:
Places where the temperature changes drastically
u NOTE u Places near heaters or other heat sources
Listed below are the abbreviations adopted in this chapter. Places where the machine is likely to be wet or submerged
Places where the machine is likely to come into contact with any
Application : AP corrosive gas
Local printer : LP Dusty or dirty places
CR-IR346CL : CL Places where the machine is subjected to constant vibration or shock
CR-IR346RU : RU Places where the machine is subjected to excessive vibration or
CL configuration data : CL-Config shock
RU configuration data : RU-Config Places exposed to direct sunlight
Also, be sure that the monitor is not installed at the following places:
For the dimensions and weights of the monitor and peripherals, see the
respective manuals that are supplied with them. Places where the monitor is surrounded, such as in a rack case
Places whether the display surface is exposed to direct sunlight
Places near a transformer, another monitor, a power line, or
a 0.02 Gauss or more of AC magnetic field
1.1 Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (width height depth) 1.4 Power Requirements
390 108 431 (mm)
Power voltage/capacity Remarks
Weight 100 VAC / approx. 0.11 kVA Supplied from a 100 VAC wall outlet
Approx. 9.5 kg Phase : Single phase
Power frequency : 50/60 Hz
Grounding : Ground resistance: 100 or less
1.2 Temperature and Humidity
Condition Temperature Humidity 1.5 Network Cable
Operating 10C to 35C 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)
Non-operating -40C to 65C 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing) Use an IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual IN-A1
2. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility NOTE

This section explains about the procedures for starting/exiting the mode starts without opening this window.
Service Utility, which is used as a service utility tool during CL
installation.
REFERENCE
Startup procedure If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a
3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following
The procedure for starting the Service Utility varies depending on
steps to start the Service Utility.
whether the CL-PC power is ON or OFF.
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down.
When the PC power is OFF
2. Click while holding down the <Shift> key.
3. From the menu, sequentially choose Programs,
Windows 2000 starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP
starts.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left
u NOTE u and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
Be sure to turn ON the power to the LCD first and then to the PC,
otherwise the touch panel may not operate correctly.
3. Enter fieldengineer and click .
2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper The Service Utility starts. The IIP Service Utility window opens.
left and upper right corners within a few seconds.
00000404.EPS
MU000032.EPS
MU000035.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
When the PC power is ON REFERENCE
If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a
1. Clicking Shut Down in the (or ) 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following
menu while the CL-AP is running will display the exit
window. Click while holding down the <Shift>
key.
2. From the menu, sequentially choose Programs, Fuji Film, and FCR.
Fuji Film, and FCR. 4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left
and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
The CL-AP starts in about one minute.
3. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper 4. Enter fieldengineer and click .
left and upper right corners within a few seconds.
MU000032.EPS
00000404.EPS
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Exit procedure
1. Click [Exit Service Utility] on the IIP Service Utility window.
IN000117.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3. Installation Procedure Overview
3. Installation Procedure Overview 1. Check the supplied component items,

install the CL accessories, and make
4. CL Hardware Setup
cable connections to the RU and LP.

IMPORTANT
Be sure that the following equipment is completely installed and set up. 2. Set up the software related to the CL 5. Software Setup
and RU. The major procedures are
CR-IR346RU indicated below:
See Chapters 1 to 8 of Installation of the RU Service Make preparations for CL-AP startup
Manual. (e.g., driver, option key, and AP key
Other equipment (LP, FN-PS551, HI-C655, RIS, etc.) installation).
See the installation instructions set forth in the respective Set up the software for RU operations
service manuals. (e.g., RU-AP installation).
Set up the CL system information
(e.g., hospital name).
Perform CL-Config setup that is
IMPORTANT needed for the connection of the other
Have on hand a CD-R disk that stores the CLs AP key equipment (HI-C655, QA-WS, etc.).
(114Y5342002A), which is distributed for use in servicing.
Use the AP key of version A00 or later. 3. Verify the connection between the CL 6. Checkout Procedures
and RU as well as the connections to
the other equipment. Also, generate
film printouts to check for an improper
format, unevenness on printed films,
sensitivity, density and abnormal
output characters.
4. Back up the CL and RU setup files. 7. Setup File Backup and

Also, check the RU error mode, and RU Error Log Verification/
delete an error log after completion Deletion
of the check.
5. Complete the installation procedures See Chapter 10 and

for the CL and RU. beyond in Installation
of the RU Service Manual.
00056004.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking
4. CL Hardware Setup 4.1 Unloading and Unpacking

Remove the following items from the packing box.
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking PC (controller)
Monitor
Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
4.2 Checking the Component Items
Others (options, etc.)
4.3 Installing the Accessories and ... Install the monitor, PC boards, CAUTIONS
Optional Items insulating transformer (only for
When unloading, transferring, and unpacking the machine,
units used in Japan), keyboard,
observe the following precautions:
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to and mouse.
the RU Do not subject the machine to vibration or shock.
If the machine is unduly vibrated or shocked while it is unloaded or
transferred, it may become damaged or defective.
4.5 Making a Cable Connection to ... Do not perform this procedure if the Avoid moisture condensation inside the machine.
the LP LP is not used. If the machine is subjected to a drastic temperature change when it is
transferred or unpacked, moisture condensation may occur inside the
4.6 Connecting to the Other ... Do not perform this procedure if machine. If you turn ON the machine while moisture is condensed on
Equipment other equipment (HI-C, QA-WS, its inner surface, the machine may become defective. To avoid such a
RIS, etc.) is not used. problem, be sure to allow the machine to stand at a room temperature
for a period of 1 hour or longer and then turn ON the power.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.2 Checking the Component Items Monitor box

(Product code : IR 346 DISPLAY LCD (15" monitor with the touch panel)
Check that the following component items are fully supplied. or IR 346 DISPLAY CRT 17 IN (17" CRT monitor))
Monitor
PC box Monitor cable
(Product code : IR 346 CL A-B) Serial cable (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
Touch panel driver CD (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
PC
Power cable
Keyboard
Mouse For details on the component items, see the documentation
Power cable supplied with the monitor.
CL-AP (CD-ROM)
When a Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 is used, see
XG-1 Standard Key Software (CD-ROM) manuals provided with the SL-IC300 to check the component
For details of the component items, see the documentation parts.
supplied with the PC0. When an LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, see manuals provided
with the SL-IC200 to check the component parts.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Others (separately packed items, options, etc.) Description

Product
Qty. Remarks*2
abbreviation
Product
Description Qty. Remarks*1
abbreviation Grid Pattern Removal
CL GPR 1 O
CL insulation power processing key CD
IR 346
box kit (only for units 1
INSULATION BOX
used in Japan)
Barcode reader 1
IR 346 BARCODE O
(with a rack) each
Local print key CD E-i/f IR 346 LOCAL 1
V, O
board (PEI01A) PRINT each
IR 346 MCR JIS 1 O
(JIS)
IR 346 DICOM
DICOM print key CD 1 V, O
PRINT
IR 346 MCR ISO 1 O
IR 346 DMS (ISO)
FINP input/output key
NET- WORK 1 V, O
CD
IN-OUT
Magnetic card reader IR 346 MCR
1 O
DICOM CR STORAGE wall-mounting kit BRACKET
IR 346 DICOM
(standard/private) 1 V, O
CR STORAGE
key CD
Serial interface board IDT-4 IF BD FOR
1 O
(PSI04A) PCI
LCD display stand*2 IR 346 LCD STAND 1 O
Cable for direct printer ODF/PS IF
1 O
connection CABLE nM*1
LCD display wall- IR 346 LCD
1 O
mounting bracket BRACKET
E-i/f conversion cable MF-PS667/DMS
1 O
(1.2 m) IF CBL
MFP key CD IR 346 MFP 1 O
*1 n: Cable length
Processed-image IR 346 DICOM IM *2 O: Option
1 O
output key CD PROCESSED
*1 V: Variation; O: Option
*2 Not required if the monitor type used is EIZO L350P-TS.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
4.3 Installing the Accessories and

Optional Items
Connect the boards (options), insulating transformer (only for units used
in Japan), keyboard, mouse and monitor to the PC as illustrated below:
Serial cable attached Monitor power cable

to the monitor* Insulating transformer
power cable
Monitor To power
Insulating source
Monitor port transformer
Power source (only for Japan) To medical
Serial port grounding
terminal
Additional protective
PC grounding conductor
power cable PSI board (option)
Back of GX60 RIS, etc.

To LP
1 2
Mouse
PEI board (option)
Keyboard To IR
Remote power control box
(only when an IR is connected)
* Only when the 15" monitor with the touch panel is used. IN000001.EPS
u NOTE u
Use the first serial port of the two that are provided on the PC.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.3.1 PC Boards When connecting printers other than those mentioned on the left
side
To attach optional boards, observe the procedures described herein. DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; 3 and 4: ON
PEI board (optional) DPSW2 1 to 8: ON
PSI board (optional) DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF
For how to verify setup of and attach the PSI board, see SW0 2 and 3 short-circuited.
1. Hardware Setup, under CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online) in SW2 and SW5 1 and 2 short-circuited.
OE7: Connection between CL and Other Equipment. SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed.
1. Check that the switches on the PEI board are properly set. ON DPSW3
If their settings are incorrect, correct them accordingly.
SW0
u NOTE u 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
When no remote signal is to be sent to the printer, turn OFF all the OFF
DPSW1 switches. ON DPSW2 ON DPSW1
When connecting the CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FL-IM3543N/ SW3 SW5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4

FL-IM3543MN 1 2 1 2
OFF OFF
DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; SW0 2 and 3 SW2 SW4
3 and 4: ON short-circuited. 1 2 1 2
DPSW2 1 and 2: OFF; SW2 and SW5 1 and 2
3 to 8: ON short-circuited. PEI01A board
DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed.
ON DPSW3
SW0
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON DPSW2 ON DPSW1 00000007.EPS
SW3 SW5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
OFF OFF
1 2 1 2
SW2 SW4
1 2 1 2
PEI01A board
00000251.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2. Mount a PEI board in a PCI slot.

u NOTE u
The procedure presented below applies when the PC used is
GX60.
When the PC used is a model other than GX60, see

Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI) under
RI : Reinstalling the Software.
I. Open the CL-PC cover.

III. Mount a PEI board in the lower PCI slot.
Handle
PCI slot
II. Card cage
III. PEI board

slot connector
ONT
FR
CL-PC (GX60)
IN000022.EPS
IV. Mount the card cage on the CL-PC.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required 4.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable
only for units used in Japan)
Procedures followed by equipment used abroad
u NOTE u
1. Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC.
Ensure that the power cables connected to the insulating transformer
For details on the connection procedures, see the
are for the CL and monitor only. documentation supplied with the PC.
CAUTION
2. Connect the power cable between the insulating For a PC provided with the source voltage changeover switch
transformer and power source. (between 115 and 230 VAC), set the PC source voltage
according to the voltage supplied to the institution concerned
3. Turn ON the insulating transformer. and then connect the power cable to the power source.
2. Connect the power cable to the power source.

ON
OFF Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan

(3) Power ON
Insulating transformer (2) Power cable documentation supplied with the PC.
2. Connect the power cable to the insulating transformer.

To power
source 3. Use the long bracket to secure that the power cable is not
disconnected accidentally from the insulating transformer.
Insulating transformer
(1) Two connector covers 00000301.EPS
Secure the long bracket using

the two connector cover
retaining screws. 00000383.EPS
REFERENCE
To secure cables, eight brackets (four each of long and short ones)
are attached to the insulating transformer.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.3.4 Monitor 1. Connect the monitor cable and serial cable to the PC.
For details on cable connections, see the documentation
The following monitors can be connected. supplied with the monitor.
The connection procedure varies with the monitor type.
15" monitor with the touch panel Procedures followed by equipment used abroad
17" CRT monitor
u NOTE u
Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300
Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable between
For the connection procedure of the Super Resolution LCD
Monitor SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
PC and monitor.
If the power cable is connected before serial cable connection, the
LCD Monitor SL-IC200 touch panel driver may not be installed.
For the connection procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200,
see manuals provided with the SL-IC200. 2. Connect the power cable between the monitor and power
source.
For the 15" monitor with the touch panel
The work procedures will differ depending on the installation method Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
adopted of the monitor. u NOTE u
Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable
REFERENCE
between PC and monitor.
If the monitor type used is EIZOs L350/351P-TS, it is stable enough If the power cable is connected before serial cable connection, the
even without optional rack for actual operations. Thus, it is not touch panel driver may not be installed.
necessary now for you to mount optional rack.
2. Connect the monitor power cable to the insulating
Installation method 1 transformer.
To continue to use the monitor rack, perform step 1. thereafter. 3. Use the short bracket to secure that the power cable is not
Installation method 2
To replace the monitor with a wall-mounting type monitor, replace
first the bracket with a wall-mounting type (option). Perform then
step 1. thereafter.
When using the wall-mounting bracket, see
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket
[Option] to replace the monitor rack.
Secure the short bracket using
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
For the 17" CRT monitor

1. Connect the monitor cable between the PC and monitor.

2. Connect the power cable between the monitor and power
source.
Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
2. Connect the monitor power cable to the insulating

transformer.
3. Use the short bracket to secure that the power cable is not
Secure the short bracket using
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU 4.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP
Connect a network cable between the RU and CL. When using an E-i/f LP, connect an E-i/f cable between the LP and CL.
For the stand-alone type (independent type) RU operation LP CL

Connect a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (cross) cable between the RU
PEI board
and CL.
E-i/f cable
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 00000035.EPS
cable (cross)
LP CL RU
00000027.EPS
For the network type RU operation

With 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX (straight) cables, connect the RU to
the CL via a hub.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (straight) cable (straight)
CL HUB RU
Other connected hosts

10BASE-T (FN-PS, QA-WS, etc.)
cable (straight)
00000028.EPS
u NOTES u
Even if the CL and RU will eventually be incorporated into the network
of a hospital for operation, connect the CL and RU while they are
independent of the network (not incorporated into the hospitals
network).
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and RU network
connectors.
The cable type applicable to this equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
REFERENCE
The RU cable connector is located on the lower-left on the rear of the
RU main unit.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment

Connect the following equipment to the CL.
HI-C654/HI-C655/QA-WS/ODF (FINP connection)

See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP: Image Input/Output) in OE2: Connecting the CL to
Other Equipment.
HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW/Synapse server (DICOM connection)

See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/
FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in OE3: Connecting the CL
to Other Equipment.
Other manufacturers equipment (DICOM CR Storage connection)

See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+Other (DICOM CR
Storage: transfer of processed images) in OE4: Connecting
DRYPIX, FM-DP L (DICOM Print)

See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/
FM-DP L (DICOM Print) in OE5: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5. Software Setup 5.1 CL-AP Startup

The following procedures must be performed for CL-AP startup:
5.1 CL-AP Startup ... Make preparations for CL-AP startup OS startup
(e.g., touch panel driver, option key, OS setups
and AP key reinstallation). Touch panel driver installation
5.2 CL Setup for RU Option key installation
... Perform setup for RU operations
Connection (e.g., RU M-Utility installation, RU-AP AP key reinstallation
installation, and RU-Config setup). CL-AP startup verification
5.3 Setup with Service Utility ... Perform CL system information setup u NOTES u
(system information and IDT Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same
functionality), LP setup, and film as those displayed by Windows XP.
annotation character setup. When setting procedures to be performed are different between
Replace menu database for Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow the procedure specific to the
equipment used abroad. used OS to perform necessary settings.
5.4 Procedures for Changing the .. This procedure is to be performed as
CL and RU IP Addresses needed. REFERENCE
The following OS setup and software installation steps are completed at
5.5 Procedures for Changing ... This procedure is to be performed as factory prior to shipment:
the CL Host Name needed. CL setup steps
CL IP address (172.16.1.20)
5.6 CL Setup for Connection Subnet mask (255.255.0.0)
to Other Equipment CL host name (CLxxxxxxxx, CRxxxxxxxx, CPxxxxxxxx: eight lowest
digits of a manufacturers serial number in the xxxxxxxx position)
Administrator password setup (fcr-iip)
5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic ... This procedure is to be performed as Display setup (screen saver, screen resolution, etc.)
Card Reader Connection needed. MS-IME setup (only for units used in Japan)
CL-AP (MSDE and SQL included) installation
XG-1 Standard Key Software installation
AP key installation
Image database initialization
RU setup steps
FTP server configuration and setup
RU information registration for CL-Config (host name, IP address,
and connected equipment information)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5.1.1 OS Startup 5.1.2 OS Setups

u NOTE u Perform the following OS-related setups.
Be sure to turn ON the power to the LCD first and then to the PC, Setting the date, time and time zone.
otherwise the touch panel may not operate correctly. Defining the character to be used as a decimal point [applicable only
to part of the area where the English software is used.]
1. Turn ON the PC power. Setting the date, time, and time zone
The following error display opens 10 seconds after CL-AP startup.
1. Perform settings as follows.
For Windows 2000
Double-click .
For Windows XP
00000421.EPS
IMPORTANT Select from the menu.
The above error display opens because an output system The Control Panel window opens.
(print or image transfer) option key has not been installed/set
up when the equipment was newly installed.
2. Double-click .
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the
Use of Output Options under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
The Date/Time Properties window opens.
2. Click .
The error display opens again in about 20 seconds.
00000216.EPS
3. Click .

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Verify the date and time. 5.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation
If the date and time indicated are incorrect, correct them accordingly [Skip this procedure if the 15" monitor with a
and then click . touch panel is provided.]
When the 15" monitor with the touch panel is going to be used, it is
necessary to install the touch panel driver and adjust the touch panel.
Installing the driver

1. Insert the driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
To install the touch panel driver using the FD or employ the
L362T monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel
Driver.
For the previous-version CD-ROM

When the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, a window like
that shown below opens automatically. Click Install MonitorMouse
00000115.EPS
for Windows 2000.
4. Click .
5. Verify the time zone setting.
If the setting is wrong, correct it and then click .
IN000105.EPS
For the new-version CD-ROM

When the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, a window like
that shown below opens automatically. Click Install Drive For This
00000117.EPS
Computer. Click then Install Serial Driver on another window that
6. Click . opens.
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point

Select . (period) as the character to be sued as a decimal point.
If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you
This setup is applicable only to part of the area where the English
software is used.
For details of the setup procedure, see Defining the character
to be used as a decimal point in 2.1.3 Setting the OS under
RI: Reinstalling the Software. IN000106.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
After a while, the Elo MonitorMouse for Windows 2000 Setup 5. Click .
window opens.
In about one minute, a window opens to indicate the completion of
installation.
IN000104.EPS
2. Click .
The license agreement window opens.
00000418.EPS
00000412.EPS
6. Click .
3. Click .
The Updating System Settings window opens.
The port selection window opens.
7. Remove the CD-ROM from the PCs drive.
8. Click .
The PC restarts. The touch panel adjustment window will then
opens automatically.
u NOTE u
00000413.EPS
Start adjusting the touch panel as soon as the window below has
opened, otherwise it will close with the touch panel left unadjusted.
u NOTE u
An error will occur if the serial cable of the LCD display provided
with a touch panel is connected to serial port No. 2.
4. Click .
The Digital Signature Not Found window opens in several
seconds.
00000422.EPS
00000415.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
Adjusting the touch panel 2. Touch the mark gently with your finger.
u NOTE u
The mark moves to the upper right of the window.
The following window may suddenly open during the touch panel
adjustment process. It does not indicate any touch panel adjustment
problem. 3. Gently touch the mark again with your finger.
The Check Video Alignment window opens.
Click to close the window and then continue with the
touch panel adjustment process.
00000316.EPS
00000321.EPS
4. Click .
u NOTE u
1. With your finger, gently touch the mark at the upper left Click within a period of 30 seconds. Failure to click
of the window. within a 30-second period invalidates the previous
adjustments made.
Mark
The Elo TouchSystems Setup window opens.
5. Deselect ( ) and then
click .
u NOTE u
If a window opens to prompt FD insertion, click .
To set up other functions (e.g. for silencing the alarm sound)

00000227.EPS of the touch panel, see the documentation for the touch panel
driver.
The mark moves to the lower right of the window. (A beep
will sound.)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
Adjusting the contrast and brightness 5.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input
Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows. Prompt When Exiting the Suspend Mode
Model 9416TD15/H2 the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may
Contrast : 127 inadvertently press the Suspend button on the keyboard, perform the
(Press the Menu switch on the right-hand side of following procedure as needed.
the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.)
Brightness : 255 1. From the menu, point to Settings, and then click
(Press the or button on the right-hand side of Control Panel.
the monitor while the Main Menu is not displayed
(For Windows XP, select Control Panel from the
on the screen.)
menu.)
Model 9416TD15/H2-1 The Control Panel opens.
Contrast : 65%
the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.) 2. Double-click .
Brightness : 100%
(Press the or button on the right-hand side of The Power Options Properties window opens.
on the screen.)
3. Click the Advanced tab (Advance tab for Windows XP).
Model L350P-TS
Contrast : 80%
IN000110.EPS
Brightness : 80%
(Press the Enter switch on the front of the monitor 4. Uncheck
( ).
Adjustment>, then <Contrast Brightness>.)
Model L351P-TS
Contrast : 90%
Brightness : 90%
(Press the Enter switch on the front of the monitor
Model L362T
Brightness : 90% IN000109.EPS

You are returned to the desktop screen.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5.1.5 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons Function Product Abbreviation Description

[applicable only in Japan] IR346 LOCAL PRINT LP (local printer) connection
Print output
To have the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons be displayed on the CL-AP IR346 DICOM PRINT DICOM Print function
main window, those icons must be installed properly ahead of time. DICOM-based image transmission
For how to install the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons, see FR15 functions available (Also include a
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [applicable only in Japan] function to transmit
under FR: Function-specific Reference. unstandardized images to the
QA-WS.)
IR346 DICOM
CR STORAGE
Options installed are as follows.
5.1.6 Option Key Installation
CR Storage SCU (Standard)
The following option keys are available. Install necessary option keys CR Storage SCU (Private)
(Private Unstandardized CR
in compliance with the CL installation specifications. Storage is included in Private.)
Image
IMPORTANT Functions available for processed-
input/output
image transmission with DICOM
IR346 DICOM
Either the image input/output function or print output option key must be
IM PROCESSED
installed. The option installed is as follows.
Processed image generation
If it is not installed, an error display (error code: 50001) will be indicated
during CL-AP startup, resulting thus in disabling the CL-AP to be started Function for image transfer (input/
up. output) with FINP
Moreover, when the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE or IR346 DICOM IR346 DMS NET-
PRINT option key has been installed, be sure to perform configuration WORK Options installed are as follows.
settings that result from Storage or DICOM Print. (This is because an IN-OUT FINP output
error would occur if only optional key is installed.) FINP input (Supports only the
reprint function.)
The 50001 error display will be indicated if an output system (for print or IR346 MFP MFP image processing
image output) option key has not been installed/set up properly. Image
processing Grid Pattern Removal processing
CL GPR
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During function
the Use of Output Options under MT: Machine
Troubleshooting. REFERENCE
Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD-ROM for each
product.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.1 CL-AP Startup
The installation procedure is described below. 5.1.7 AP Key Installation

For the option key uninstallation procedure, see Appendix A u NOTE u
Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the Software. Install the AP key after all option keys have been installed.
This is because once an option key has been installed, the AP key is
1. Insert an option key CD into the CD-ROM drive. invalidated requiring thus the AP key to be reinstalled.
The installation start window automatically opens in several
seconds.
REFERENCE
2. Click . The CL is designed so that the CL-AP can be started up when registry
information is generated to define the encryption key.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation. The associated registry information is generated when the AP key is
installed.
The indication varies
with the option key
for installation.
Install the AP key as follows:
1. Insert the AP key CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2. Click .
00000416.EPS
3. Click .
u NOTE u 00000419.EPS
Depending on the option for installation, the installation start

window will be displayed some times. Perform steps 2. and 3. as
well.
3. Click .
4. Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive. 4. Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
5. To install other option key, change the CD and repeat steps
2 through 4.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection
5.1.8 CL Startup Verification 5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection

Verify the normal startup of the CL. The CL is shipped from factory without installing the RU-AP (the RU is
installed with the RU-AP). It is thus necessary to install the RU-AP in
1. From the menu, select Programs, Fuji Film, and the CL. To operate the RU, the RU-AP data, etc. must have been
installed in the CL.
then FCR.
For installation of the RU-AP, the use of the RU M-Utility is required.
The CL opening window appears on the display. After about one The RU M-Utility is a utility (also referred to as the FCR TOOL) that
minute, the CL-AP starts up. implements RU-AP installation, Configuration backup and other
functions. Since also the RU M-Utility is not installed in the CL prior to
shipment, it needs to be installed upon equipment installation.
u NOTE u
When the OS used is Windows XP, be sure to use RU software
When the OS used is Windows Vista, be sure to use RU software
00000195.EPS
When the OS used is Windows 7, be sure to use RU software version
u NOTE u
A14 or later.
If the above window does not open or an error display appears,
note the displayed error code and the applicable remedy, and then
make necessary corrections to achieve AP startup. REFERENCE
See 1. Error Code Table in MT: Machine Troubleshooting. The RU-AP and RU M-Utility are included in the CD provided with the
RU.
2. Click in the menu.
The exit window opens.
3. Hold down the <Shift> key and click .
The CL-AP exits and the system returns to the desktop screen.
REFERENCE
To shut down the CL-AP only, click [Shut Down] and then [OK]
while holding down the [Shift] key.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility 4. Click .

u NOTES u After the completion of installation, the FCR TOOL Setup/
Completing the... window opens.
The RU M-Utility installation procedure is described herein on the
assumption that the RU application CD-ROM version A07 or later is
used for the RU M-Utility (PC-MUTL hereinafter) that is to be installed
as follows. A different installation procedure will be required if a version
earlier than that mentioned above is used. 00000188.EPS
Make sure to start the procedure below with the CL-AP quit
accordingly. 5. Click .
The system returns to the CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE
1. Have on hand the CD that is supplied with the RU. TOOLS window.
Insert this CD into the CD-ROM drive.
After a while, the following window opens.
00000322.EPS
6. Click .
The CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY main menu window
opens.
Main menu window
(the display differs depending on the software version used.)
00000214.EPS
2. Click .
The RU M-Utility installation start window opens.
00000185.EPS
3. Click .
The FCR TOOL Setup/Read to Install... window opens. 00000215.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.2.2 Installing the RU-AP 2. Click .

Verify the network connection between the CL and RU, and then install
the RU AP in the CLs FTP server. The process for checking the connection to the RU starts.
u NOTE u 3. Verify the network connection to the RU.

When the OS used is Windows XP, be sure to use RU software The connection is normal if the following message appears four times.
version A09 or later. Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
When the OS used is Windows Vista, be sure to use RU software
version A13 or later. REFERENCE
When the OS used is Windows 7, be sure to use RU software version Values for time<10ms and TTL=128 in the message above vary
A14 or later. depending on the network status. Connection remains normal even
though such values vary.
Verifying the network connection between the CL and RU REFERENCE

u NOTES u If the connection to the RU cannot be verified, it is conceivable that
Make sure that the RU power cable is connected to the breaker and the following causes may exist:
the breaker is turned ON. Improper cable connections Check the cable connections
Exit all running APs (particularly Explorer) other than the RU M-Utility. again.
RU or CL network board problem Restart the system.
Other
1. From the main menu, perform the following checks.
If you still cannot verify the connection, you can restore the network
I connection by initializing RU memory to forcibly return the IP
address stored in the RU main unit to the default.
II For details of the procedure to restore the network

connection to the CL by initializing memory, see
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be
Performed upon RU Memory Initialization under
00000610.EPS
I. Check that the RU host name (ru0) is entered.

II. Check that the RU IP address (172.16.1.10) is entered. 4. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the command
prompt window.
u NOTES u
Never change the IP address.
The host name entered here serves as the actual RU host name
(it is written in the FLASH ROM as the RU host name).
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Installing the RU-AP 4. Complete the following setup steps:

Main menu window u NOTE u
The data set up as follows will be written on the RU-Config file and
then installed in the RU together with the RU-AP.
For the procedure used when changing the setup data
after installation, see Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config.
I
II
III
IV
00000502.EPS
1. Click INSTALL on the main menu.

The Insert the CD-ROM into a drive window opens.
2. Since the CD carrying the RU-AP is already inserted into the

CD-ROM drive, just click .
The RU-AP version selection window opens.
3. Select the RU-AP version from the list, and then click
VI
.
IN000063.EPS
I. Verify that the entry is 172.16.1.10.

II. Verify that the entry is 172.16.1.20.
III. Verify that the entry is 172.16.1.20.
List IV. Verify that the entry is 255.255.0.0.
00000190.EPS
The READER UNIT SETTING window opens. V. Change setup data listed in the table on the right as necessary.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Configuration Setup VI. Select OFF.

Default Remarks
Setup Item Range
REFERENCE
ROUTER IP IP address Route address
0.0.0.0 The AUTO UPDATE function will automatically have the RU
ADDR setup range (Do not change the setup.)
download RU data from the FTP server if there is a discrepancy
SECURE between CL FTP server data and RU FLASH ROM data.
IP address IP address available for the
TELNET HOST 0.0.0.0
setup range TELNET.
IP ADDR See 5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
SECURE in MD: Machine Description.
TELNET IP address Range of the IP address
0.0.0.0
NETWORK setup range available for the TELNET.
ADDR
5. Click .
Machine serial ID code of the
EQUIPMENT
AZ A RU. RU-AP installation will start. (It completes within a few minutes.)
CODE
(This code is printed on film.)
Specifies the erasure mode CAUTION
range. (Applicable only for RU-AP version A07 or later.)
ERASE 1 ERASE 1: Primary erasure can
RANGE OF The RU panel will be illuminated during the RU-AP installation
ERASE 1, ERASE 1 be selected.
ERASE MODE
ERASE 2 ERASE 1, ERASE 2: process. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the
Both primary and secondary reset switch at this time, otherwise the RU CPU board can be
erasures can be selected. damaged.
ERASE MODE 0 to 999
060 Erase mode timeout setting.
TIMEOUT (sec)
u NOTE u
Setup needed if no barcode
IP ERASE TYPE Do not operate the CL-AP and RU M-Utility while RU-AP
5, 6 reader is used.
(FOR NO 6 installation is being performed.
6 5, 6 : Types V and VI mixed.
BARCODE)
6 : Type VI
Sets alarm ON/OFF when
ALARM
(CASSETTE
ON
ON
cassette is inserted. 6. After completion of RU-AP installation, click
OFF ON : Alarm sounds.
SET) when Completed is displayed on the window.
OFF : Alarm does not sound
Sets alarm ON/OFF when You are then returned to the main menu.
ALARM ON erasure processing is selected.
ON
(MODE SWITCH) OFF ON : Alarm sounds. 7. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the window.
The system returns to the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS
Selects X-ray over-exposure IP
window.
LOG & warning method.
WARNING OF MESSAGE LOG & LOG & MESSAGE: Warning by
OVERXRAY LOG MESSAGE log and message.
NONE LOG : Warning by log.
NONE : No warning issued.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.3 Setup with Service Utility
8. Click .
Use the Service Utility to set up the following items:
CL system information
IDT functionality
9. Remove the CD from the drive.
LP information (required only when an LP is connected)
u NOTE u Menu database replacement (required only for equipment used
(Applicable only for RU-AP version A06 or earlier.) abroad)
If the RU-AP version installed is A06 or earlier, be sure to start the
CL-AP to have the FTP server RU data be downloaded to the RU 5.3.1 Starting the Service Utility
FLASH ROM.
1. Click and then sequentially choose Programs,
u NOTE u Fuji Film, and FCR.
For connection of the CR-IR355RU/356/357, be sure to install the The CL-AP starts up.
RU PC-TOOL. See the CR-IR355RU/356/357 Service Manual for
how to install it.
2. Within a few seconds after the initial window opens,
the window.
MU000031.EPS
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
REFERENCE 5.3.2 CL System Information Setup

If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a Complete setup concerning CL system information and IDT functionality
3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following as directed in this section.
Setting the system information
1. From the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup
3. From the menu, sequentially choose Programs, Configuration Item].
Fuji Film, and FCR.
00000500.EPS
2. Click the sign within in the Setup

Configuration Item window.
00000404.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3. Click . u NOTE u
The CL system information setup items appear. Use System Common Date Format to specify the date format.
If you change the date format, the following items of information
Items for CL system setup are changed to match the newly selected format.
Date output on film
Format for birth date input
Date displayed by CL-AP
Other date indications
Make a hospital name entry (one-byte characters) by double-

clicking for .
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name Strings to enter a hospital name string
of one-byte characters for use in the CL system.
The default hospital name is FUJI FILM HOSPITAL. Change
this entry to a hospital name string of one-byte characters as
defined by a specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 60 characters.
00000132.EPS
Set the IP size unit system (inch or metric) for

4. Enter setup data as directed below.
.
Make a date format selection by double-clicking
u NOTE u
for .
Set the IP size unit system (inch or metric) that the RU can
0: Japanese date (S62.10.07) [Default] handle.
1: ANSI long date (1987.OCT.07)
2: ANSI short date (1987.10.07)
3: American long date (OCT.07.1987)
4: American short date (10.07.1987)
5: European long date (07.OCT.1987)
6: European short date (07.10.1987)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Use to specify the language to be Setting the IDT functionality

used. 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click
0: Japanese 10: Korean .
1: English 11: Chinese Simplified
2: German 12: Chinese Traditional The IDT function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the
3: French 13: Portuguese window.
4: Spanish 14: Polish
IDT function setup items
5: Italian 15: Hungarian
6: Swedish 16: Czech
7: Finnish 17: Russian
8: Danish 18: Slovene
9: Norwegian
u NOTE u
Do not select 18: Slovene because software version V7.0 (B)
Double-click for
to enter a hospital name

(consisting of two-byte characters).
00000160.EPS
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name in Two-Byte Characters to enter a hospital 2. Edit the IDT functionality setup as needed.
name string of two-byte characters for use in the CL system.
The default hospital name is . Change this entry For details on individual setup items, see 3.6 Configuration
Details-5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance
to a hospital name string of two-byte characters as defined by a
Utility.
specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 15 two-byte characters.
3. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
5. Change the other items of system information as needed.
saved.
Item number Description
2 Confirmation window display for examination list deletion 4. Click .
3 Setup of a process to be performed after an
abnormality occurrence The system saves the setup data.
6 2in1 format with no masking
14 System ID
15 Password use for user utility access
For details on individual setup items, see 3.4 Configuration
Details-1. IMAGE MODALITY under MU: Maintenance Utility.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.3.3 Setting the LP Information 5. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
When the LP is connected to the CL, perform the Registering the LP A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
procedure below. saved.
Registering the LP 6. Click .

1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click The system saves the setup data.
.
A list of registered equipment appears in the right-hand area of the Changing the LP system information
window. If the following printer use is intended, change the LP system
information.
When the following old-type printers are used.

CR-LP414N/IM2636N, FL-IM3543N/FL-IM3543MN
When the cable connecting the printer to the CL exceeds 60 m in

00000407.EPS
length.
2. Click . When the film sort function is to be used.
The FTP CONNECTION window opens. 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click
.
3. Perform the following setup steps.
The LP configuration setup items appear in the right-hand area of
the window.
Click the downward arrow mark in the
field and select the function (PRINT) 2. Change the LP system information.
of the connected device. For details on individual setup items, see 1. Setup Necessary
When Connecting the LP under Print Output Function in
Click the downward arrow mark in the FR1: Function-specific Reference.
field and specify the device 3. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
(LOCAL). A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
REFERENCE saved.
If the LP option key is not installed, you cannot choose LOCAL.

4. Click .

4. Click .
You are returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Setting the film annotation character format 5.3.4 Optimizing the Monitor Display
Use the following procedures to change the image information output Set the LUT file as follows to optimize the image display of the monitor
on film, film annotation character format and presence/absence of that is being used.
image frame.
REFERENCE
1. Click [LUT] on the IIP Service Utility window.
The film annotation character format printed as set by the default is

basically the same as that printed by the FCR 5000 series.
Differences observed between the CL and FCR 5000 series with
regard to film output are described in 2.2 Precautions of the Film
Annotation Character Format under Print Output Function in
00000501.EPS
1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click

.
the window.
2. Set the film annotation character format.

For details on the setup procedure and setup items, see
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation
Character Format, under Print Output Function in

saved.
4. Click .
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2. Select the name of the display monitor that is actually being Settings are thus completed, and the system returns to the IIP
Service Utility window.
used and click .
u NOTE u
To use a nanao L351P (model L351P-TS) with the CL software A08
Select the connected or earlier install the LUT file on the FD provided with the LCD
display monitor type. monitor.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\lut folder (overwrite the lut.txt file).
5.3.5 Exiting the Service Utility

1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose
Close (C) on the Config (F) menu.
IN000129.EPS

(model TPS9415TD15/G2) 2. Click .
(model TPS9416TD15/H2)
(model TPS 9416TD15/H2-1)
PRESTO! (B/W) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300
(monochrome)
PRESTO! (Color) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300
(color)
(model L350P-TS)
(model L351P-TS)
nanao L362T : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
(model L362T)
Linear LUT : Linear (linear gradation) LUT
nanao Radiforce : LCD monitor SL-IC300
GS310-CLG (monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce R31 : LCD monitor SL-IC300 (color monitor)
nanao L560T-C : EIZO 17" LCD monitor with a touch panel
(model L560T-C)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.3.6 Changing the Menu Database (for non-Japanese 3. Enter 2 to use the DICOM MG Storage function (a digital
versions only) mammography option), and 1 for other than that. Press
then the <Enter> key.
To change an exposure menu or image processing parameter, the A menu list of languages that can be installed opens.
menu database must be replaced following individual procedures.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the fact that exposure menu settings will revert to the
default if a menu database is replaced.
1. Insert the CL-AP CD into the CD-ROM drive.

RI0000428.EPS
NOTE
IN000116.EPS
00000301.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4. Enter the item number of a language you wish to install and 5. Perform the following settings.
When Japanese was selected as the language to be installed:
u NOTE u When you selected Standard and Japanese as the language
When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at to be installed at step 3 above, a window like that shown below
step 3 above, a window like that shown below opens. Skip step 5 opens. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key.
and proceed to step 6.
When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be installed:
IN0000954.EPS
IN0000957.EPS
A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected: Noise Control processing) parameters is selected.
IN0000955.EPS IN0000955.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
When a language other than Japanese was selected: 7. Enter 0 and then press the <Enter> key.
When you selected Standard and a language other than The IIP Setup Tool exits, returning you to the desktop screen.
Japanese as the language to be installed at step 3 above, a
window like that shown below opens. Enter an item number that
is for the connected equipment and press the <Enter> key.
8. Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
IN0000956.EPS

When English (U.S.) was selected for the language to be
installed:
IN0000957.EPS
IN0000955.EPS
6. Select an FNC parameter and press the <Enter> key.

u NOTE u
When the RU used is CR-IR 363, select 5 Use FNC, High-
luminance film illuminator, Use 20line/mm image.
The message Menu Database installation completed. appears

completing thus changing the menu database.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5.4 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses
5.4 Procedures for Changing the CL and 5.6 CL Setup for Connection to Other
RU IP Addresses Equipment
This section explains about the procedures for changing the IP This section explains about the software setup procedures to be
addresses for the CL and RU. The IP addresses need to be changed in performed when connecting the following equipment to the CL.
the following cases.
HI-C654/HI-C655/QA-WS/ODF (FINP connection)
Case 1: When changing the CL/RU network configuration from the See 2. Software Setup, under CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
stand-alone type to the network type. (FINP : Image Input/Output) in OE2: Connecting the CL to
Case 2: When the CL and RU IP addresses need to be changed for Other Equipment.
hospital network management purposes.
HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW/Synapse server (DICOM connection)
To change the IP address, see Appendix 5 Procedures for
See 2. Software Setup, under CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/
Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses.
FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in OE3: Connecting the CL
to Other Equipment.
5.5 Procedures for Changing Other manufacturers equipment (DICOM CR Storage connection)
the CL Host Name See 2. Software Setup, under CL+Other (DICOM CR
Storage: transfer of processed images) in OE4: Connecting
Procedures observed when the CL host name is changed follow.
See Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name under
RI: Reinstalling the Software. See 2. Software Setup, under DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM
Print) in OE5: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader

Connection
When using the barcode reader or magnetic card reader, perform the
following connection and setup.
Barcode reader connection and setup

For details on the connection, see Appendix 3 Connecting
the Barcode Reader [Option].
Magnetic card reader connection and setup

For details on the connection, see Appendix 4 Setting Up the
Magnetic Card [Option].
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
6.1 Checking the Connection between the CL and RU
6. Checkout Procedures 6.1 Checking the Connection between the

CL and RU
6.1 Checking the Connection 1. Turn ON the RU power. If it is already ON, you do not have to
between the CL and RU do anything here.
6.2 Checking the Connection between

the CL and Other Equipment
6.3 Checking the Output Image ... For output image verification,
check for an improper format,
image irregularities, and an
incorrect film annotation
character format.
ON
00000210.EPS

Fuji Film, and FCR.
The CL-AP starts up in about one minute.
After a while, the RU initialization process begins.
The CL-AP window shows a message to indicate that the RU is
being initialized.
u NOTE u
This message will not appear if the RU has been started up
before the CL-AP.
An RU initialization message is displayed.

00000198.EPS
When the RU initialization process ends, the CL-AP window reads

Reading Unit:.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
6.1 Checking the Connection between the CL and RU
3. From the CL user window (Registration), set patient data RU panel
and exposure menu, and then click .
For details on the patient data input procedure, see the CL

Operation Manual, FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL. (Illuminated) Cassette insertion lamp
Both the CL-AP window lamp and the RU panels cassette
insertion lamp go on.
CL window
00000207.EPS
4. Set a cassette in the cassette setting unit.

When a certain period of time elapses after the start of an IP read
process, the read image appears on the CL monitor.
Reading Unit:
Reading Unit:
(Illuminated)
00000209.EPS
Read image
00000200.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
6.2 Checking the Connection between the CL and Other Equipment
6.2 Checking the Connection between the 6.3 Checking the Output Image
CL and Other Equipment
Run the following checks on the output image.
Check the connection to the following equipment. Format check
Irregularity, sensitivity and density checks
HI-C654/HI-C655/QA-WS/ODF (FINP connection) Film annotation character format
See 3. Connection Checkout, under CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP : Image Input/Output) in OE2: Connecting the CL to Preparations
Other Equipment.
1. Have on the hand the IP to be used. Subject this IP to
HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW/Synapse server (DICOM connection) primary erasure.
See 3. Connection Checkout, under CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/ For details on the primary erasure procedure, see
FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in OE3: Connecting the CL 2.4 Performing the Image Erasure Process Only (Primary
to Other Equipment. Erasure), in the RU Operation Manual.
Other manufacturers equipment (DICOM CR Storage connection) u NOTES u

See 3. Connection Checkout, under CL+Other (DICOM CR Check the output image with all IP sizes that are used in the hospital.
Storage: transfer of processed images) in Use the Type VI IPs.
OE4: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment. Make sure that no important image data (e.g., patient images) is
exposed on the IPs to be checked.
See 3. Verifying the Connection, under CL+FN-PS551/ 2. Expose the IP to 1 mR of radiation.
DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print) in OE5: Connecting the CL
to Other Equipment. REFERENCE
If the IPs cannot exactly be exposed to 1 mR of radiation, use the
following IP exposure conditions as a guide. Note, however, that
the following conditions are used as a guide for standard IP setup.
Distance : 1.8 m
Voltage : 80 kV
Current : 50 mA
Time : 0.013 sec
3. Select Sensitivity from Test as the exposure menu.
4. Set a cassette in the cassette setting unit.

The image is read and transferred to the CL.
5. Click at the upper right corner of the CL window.
The image printout process starts.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
6.3 Checking the Output Image
Checking the format Checking irregularities

1. Check that the white clear portion of the resulting output 1. Check that the output film and the image displayed on the
film does not exceed 2 mm in width (when an 100% image CL monitor are both free from peculiar irregularities.
output is generated). If any abnormality is found, see Troubleshooting of the RU
Service Manual.
Measure
Image frame
2. Check that the system sensitivity value and film density
value displayed on the output film are approximately 200
and 1.2, respectively.
If any abnormality is found, see "Troubleshooting" of the RU
Service Manual.
White clear portion
00000212.EPS
u NOTE u
If the image is not generated at a magnification setting of 100%,
calculate as follows to check the white clear portion.
reduction ratio*
2 mm
100
* The reduction ratio is printed at the bottom of a film output image.
If any abnormality is encountered, see Troubleshooting of

the RU Service Manual.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
6.3 Checking the Output Image
Checking the film annotation character format Exiting the CL-AP

1. Check to see that the film annotation character format
information entered from the CL is properly printed out onto 1. Click or .
the film.
A menu opens.
Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise abnormal
character printings.
REFERENCE
The example in the figure below represents a printout that would be The CL-AP exits returning you to the desktop screen.
generated when the default film annotation character format is used REFERENCE
(image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN).
When the default settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) If you click [Shut Down] without holding down the <Shift> key, both
are printed out. the CL-AP and Windows shut down.
(1) Hospital name (institution name)
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
(12) IP number
(2) EDR mode + menu code
(3) System ID + image number
(4) Patient ID
(13) Image processing conditions (5) Patient name (10) Film mark
(7) Gender
(8) Age or birth date
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
SKULL, GENERAL Surgi
L 4.0 S200C 1.2 1.0AP 0000000001 MARY ADAMS [F] 23
1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE:50% RT-04
01
(8) Requesting department (9) Group process information

(19) Technologist's (14) Exposure menu name (11) Reduction ratio
code (17) Exposure time
(16) Image reversal mark (6) Exposure date
(15) Normalization conditions + corrections 00000034.EPS
If any abnormality is found, see Print Output Function in

Function-Specific Reference Guide.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File
7. Setup File Backup and RU 7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File

Error Log Verification/Deletion 1. Insert an FD into the FDD.
This section explains about the procedures for backing up the CL and 2. Start the Service Utility and then click [Configuration
RU setup files and verifying/deleting the RU error log. Restore/Backup] (the second item from the top).
When making backups, have the following items on hand. The Configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
Four DOS-V formatted FDs
(one for the RU and three for the CL) 3. Click [.....] in the [Configuration Backup] area.
u NOTES u
Never turn OFF the CL or RU power during a backup process. If the

power turns OFF, the machine may fail to start up.

as those displayed by Windows XP.
7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File
7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File 00000417.EPS
A window opens, prompting you to select a storage directory.

7.3 Verifying and Deleting the RU Error Log
4. Click the downward arrow mark for
, and then choose
5. Click .
You are then returned to the Configuration Restore/Backup
window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File
6. Click . 7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File

The setup file backup process begins. In about one minute, a This section explains about the procedure for making an FD backup by
message appears prompting you to replace the FD. saving the RU machine-specific data onto an FD after the completion of
setup.
7. Insert the second FD into the FDD.
u NOTE u
In about one minute, a message appears prompting you to change
the FD. The machine is supplied with an FD that stores machine shipment
control data. Do not use this FD for making a backup. This FD contains
data that can only be measured at factory. If such data is lost, it cannot
8. Insert the third FD into the FD drive. be restored at site.
u NOTES u
No message appears to indicate the end of the backup process. 1. Insert an FD into the CL-PCs FDD.
During the backup process, the mouse cursor changes to the
mark. You may understand that the backup process is completed
2. Start the RU M-Utility by performing the steps indicated
below.
when the mark changes back to the mouse cursor.
The mark does not appear unless the mouse cursor is
positioned in the Configuration Restore/Backup window.
Before removing the FD, verify that the FDD access lamp is
extinguished.
9. Remove the FD from the FDD.
10. Click .
IV. Click.

II. Click.
The RU M-Utility starts.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File
3. From [LIST OF EXISTING RU], select a target RU for backup.
4. From the [BACKUP (RU HD FD or HD FD)] area, back

up the following data.
CONFIGURATION
SCN ALL DATA
CONFIGURATION data backup example
I. Click.
II. Select.
III. Click.
00000220.EPS
REFERENCE
During SCN ALL DATA backup processing, the RU produces a
beep sound.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
7.3 Verifying and Deleting the RU Error Log
7.3 Verifying and Deleting the RU Error Log 2. After selecting an error log as directed below, verify it.
REFERENCE
7.3.1 Verifying the RU Error Log
If the error log does not exist, the following message appears:
1. From the main menu of the RU M-Utility, perform the steps THE LOG IS EMPTY.
indicated below. RESULT:OK
C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
0. QUIT
1. LOG
2. VERSION
3. TEST
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
I. Click. 5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
> 1
C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe I. Type in 1 and then press
0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG
the <ENTER> key.
RU [ru0] login : cr-ir346
2. TRACE LOGS
Password :
LOG > 1
II. Type in cr-ir346 and II. Type in 1 and then press
-> mutl 0. QUIT
then press the <ENTER> key. the <ENTER> key.
1. DISPLAY
0. QUIT 2. SAVE TO FTP-SERV
1. LOG III. Type in cr-ir346 and 3. CLEAR
2. VERSION then press the <ENTER> key. LOG > ELG > 1
3. TEST III.Type in 1 and the n press
4. ELECTORICAL UTILITY 0. QUIT
1. ALL the <ENTER> key.
5. SCANNER UTILITY IV. Type in mutl and
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 2. SUMMARY
then press the <ENTER> key. LOG > ELG > DSP > 1
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY IV.Type in 1 and then press
8. BACKUP MEMORY 0. QUIT
9. HV OFF
the <ENTER> key.
1. FATAL
> 00000211.EPS 2. WARNING
3. BOTH
u NOTE u LOG > ELG > DSP > ALL > 3
V. Type in 3 and then
Be quick to operate II. and III. above. The operation will be ***ERROR LOG ALL***
press the <ENTER> key.
canceled if the <Enter> key is not pressed in a certain period of CODE DATE
time. 11311.2000.01.01
If canceled, repeat step II. thereafter. 0. END (DEFAULT=0) : VI. Verify the error log.
00000221.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
7.4 Turning OFF the CL and RU
7.3.2 Deleting the RU Error Log 7.4 Turning OFF the CL and RU
1. Start the RU M-Utility. Delete the error log as directed below. 1. Shut down the CL system.
C:\WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
2. Turn OFF the RU power.
0. QUIT
1. LOG
2. VERSION
3. TEST
4. ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
> 1
0. QUIT
I. Type in 1 and then press the <Enter> key.
1. ERROR LOG
2. TRACE LOGS
LOG > 1
0. QUIT II. Type in 1 and then press the <Enter> key. OFF
1. DISPLAY 00000224.EPS
2. SAVE TO FIP-SERV
3. CLEAR u NOTE u
LOG > ELG> 3
Continue to perform the procedures set forth in Chapter 10, Final
III. Type in 3 and then press Installation, in Installation of the RU Service Manual.
the <Enter> key. 00000222.EPS
2. Exit the M-Utility.

C:\WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
ARE YOU SURE? II. Click.
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : 1
RESULT : OK I. Type in "1" and then
->
00000223.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or

More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-BI
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
Control Sheet

3150
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) IIV, 5, 12, 13, 16, 19, 20, 23,
2628, 3234, 38, 4048
1721, 23, 24, 40
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) IIV, 5, 13, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25, 26,
28, 38, 48
11/30/2002 06 Changes in pagination (FM3499) 20, 23, 24, 27, 29-37, 3947
35, 36, 45, 46
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) I, II, 2, 3, 5, 6, 13, 16, 18, 19, 23,
24, 27, 37
07/30/2005 14 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, II, 2, 14, 16, 20, 21, 29, 36, 42,
50, 51, 55, 57
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I, II, 17, 9, 10, 1216, 1930, 41,
48, 5158
07/30/2006 16 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, II, 14, 15, 21, 23, 24, 2932, 40,
41, 59, 62
60, 61
07/20/2007 17 Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) I, II, 111, 13, 14, 1621, 2433,
3638, 40, 4244, 46, 4850, 52,
54, 5766
47, 51, 53, 55, 56
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-BII
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
Control Sheet
05/09/2008 18 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) IIV, 19, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 2022,
2528, 3034, 3739, 41, 4345,
47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 5862, 6468
50, 52, 54, 56, 57, 63
10/31/2008 19 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) IIII, 17, 10, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17,
2026, 28, 3034, 3739, 41,
4345, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 5862,
6467
3840, 56, 58, 70
5969, 71, 72
56
12/10/2010 22 Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817) I, III, 9, 28, 34, 40
58, 70
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-BIII
BLANK PAGE
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-BIV
For the PC (controller: DELL Optiplex GX150) installation
conditions required, see 1. CL Installation Conditions under
IN-A: Installation - One RU Connection.
Dimensions and weight
Temperature and humidity
Environmental conditions
Power supply conditions
u NOTE u
Listed below are the abbreviations adopted in this chapter.
Application : AP
Local printer : LP
CR-IR348CL : CL
CR-IR346RU : RU (XG-1 RU)
5000plus : IR (5000plus series)
CR-IR 356 : 356
CR-IR 357 : 357
*1
CR-IR 359 : 359
CR-IR 362 : 362
CR-IR 363 : 363
CR-IR 364 : 364
CR-IR 366 : 366
CR-IR 367 : 367
CR-IR 368 : 368
*1
CR-IR 370 : 370
*1
CR-IR 371 : 371
*1
CR-IR 372 : 372
CL configuration data : CL-Config
*1 : CR-IR 359, CR-IR 370, CR-IR 371 and CR-IR 372 are the
equipment models available only other than in Japan.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-B1
2. Installation Workflow
Presented below is the procedure used for installing the CL-AP.
Follow the flowchart to install the CL-AP.
u NOTE u
XG-1 RU : XG-1 RU
356 : CR-IR 356
357 : CR-IR 357
359 : CR-IR 359
362 : CR-IR 362
363 : CR-IR 363
364 : CR-IR 364
366 : CR-IR 366
367 : CR-IR 367
368 : CR-IR 368
370 : CR-IR 370
371 : CR-IR 371
372 : CR-IR 372
IMPORTANT
Have on hand a CD that stores the CLs AP key (114Y5342002A),
which is distributed for use in servicing.
Be sure to use the AP key of version A00.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Presented below is the CL-AP installation workflow. Check work items

required for each equipment unit so that the CL-AP can be properly
installed.
XG-1 5000P 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
3. CL Hardware Setup
3.3.1 PC Boards
Insulating Transformer (procedures required only
3.3.2
for units used in Japan)
3.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable
3.3.4 Monitor
3.3.5 Remote Power Control Box
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment
3.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP
3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core
4. CL Software Setup
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.1 OS Startup
4.1.2 OS Setups
Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this
4.1.3 procedure if the 15 monitor with a touch panel is
provided.]
Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt
4.1.4
When Exiting the Suspend Mode
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to
4.1.5
Icons [applicable only in Japan]
4.1.7 AP Key Installation
4.1.8 CL Startup Verification
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility
4.2.1 Starting the Service Utility
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
XG-1 5000P 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
4.2.2 CL System Information Setup
4.2.3 Optimizing the Monitor Display
4.2.4 Changing the Menu Database
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP Connection
4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other Equipment
4.5 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection
Connection
4.6.1 Starting CL Service Utility
4.6.2 Setups Necessary for the CL
4.6.3 Setups Necessary for the IR
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID Information
IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information Sharing
4.6.5
Function) Setup
4.6.6 Saving Configuration
Selector Setup (applicable only when a built-in
4.6.7
device is connected)
Settings for Transfer of Image Processing
4.6.8
Parameters (only for A02 and A03)
4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup
4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection
4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility
4.7.2 Installing the RU M-Utility
4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit)
4.7.4 Installing the RU-AP (for 2nd and 3rd units)
4.7.5 Changing the CL IP Address
Setting Up IDT CONNECTION
4.7.6
(patient information sharing function)
4.7.7 Setting the Selector
Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or More
4.7.8
CLs
Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup
4.7.9
Files
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
XG-1 5000P 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection
IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing
4.8.3
function) Setup
4.8.4 Selector Setup
Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or More
4.8.5
CLs
4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup
4.8.8 Wake-on-LAN Setup
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3. CL Hardware Setup 3.1 Unloading and Unpacking

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
3.1 Unloading and Unpacking 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Remove the following items from the packing box.

3.2 Checking the Component Items PC (controller)
Monitor
Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
Others (options, etc.)
CAUTIONS
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment When unloading, transferring, and unpacking the machine,
observe the following precautions:
Do not subject the machine to vibration or shock.
3.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP If the machine is unduly vibrated or shocked while it is unloaded or
transferred, it may become damaged or defective.
Avoid moisture condensation inside the machine.
3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core If the machine is subjected to a drastic temperature change when it is
transferred or unpacked, moisture condensation may occur inside the
machine. If you turn ON the machine while moisture is condensed on
its inner surface, the machine may become defective. To avoid such a
problem, be sure to allow the machine to stand at a room temperature
for a period of 1 hour or longer and then turn ON the power.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.2 Checking the Component Items Others (separately packed items, options, etc.)
Description Product Code Qty. Remarks*
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 CL insulation power
IR 346
box kit (only for units 1
INSULATION BOX
used in Japan)
Check that the following component items are fully supplied.
Local print key CD E-i/f IR 346 LOCAL 1
V, O
PC box board (PEI01A) PRINT each
(Product code : IR 348 CL A B ) IR 346 DICOM

DICOM print key CD 1 V, O
PC PRINT
Keyboard FINP input/output key IR 346 DMS NET-
Mouse 1 V, O
CD WORK IN-OUT
Power cable DICOM CR STORAGE
CL-AP (One or two CDs) IR 346 DICOM
(standard/private) 1 V, O
CR STORAGE
Standard Key Software (CD) key CD
For details of the component items, see the documentation
supplied with the PC. LCD display stand IR 346 LCD STAND 1 O
Monitor box LCD display wall- IR 346 LCD

1 O
(Product code : IR 346 DISPLAY LCD (15" monitor with the touch panel) mounting bracket BRACKET
or CL DISPLAY CRT 17 IN A (17" CRT monitor))
Monitor MFP key CD IR 346 MFP 1 O
Monitor cable
Serial cable (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel) MFP key CD IR 348 MFP 1 O
USB cable (only for the 17" monitor with the touch panel)
Touch panel driver CD or FD (only for the monitor with the touch
Detail QA key CD IR 346 DELUX-QA 1 O
panel)
Power cable Processed-image IR 346 DICOM IM
1 O
For details on the component items, see the documentation output key CD PROCESSED
supplied with the monitor.
Patient information
When a Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 or an Ikegami 1k IR 346 ID ONLINE 1 O
online key CD
landscape monitor is used, see the respective manual to check
the component items. DICOM worklist (MWM) CL DICOM ORDER
1 O
key CD MWM
When an LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, see the respective manual
to check the component items. * V: Variation; O: Option
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Description Product Code Qty. Remarks* Description Product Code Qty. Remarks*
DICOM worklist (MWM) CL LUT-
CL DICOM ID LUT adjustment key O, V8.1 or
key CD 1 O ADJUSTMENT
MWM CD for connection to earlier
(patient information only) FOR LITE 1
other competing PACs
DX CL LUT-ADJ O, V8.2 or
DICOM PPS key CD CL DICOM MPPS 1 O (for Lite Standard key)
FOR LITE later
CL ANNOTATION O, V8.1 or
DICOM Commitment CL DICOM FOR LITE earlier
1 O
Push key CD COMMITMENT Annotation key CD 1
DX CL ANNOTATION O, V8.2 or
Shadow-masking CD CL SHUTTER- FOR LITE later
1 O
key PROC
Grid Pattern Removal
Energy subtraction CL GPR 1 O
CL ES 1 O processing key CD
processing key CD
Image Reader QC FCR QC TEST
Ordering key CD CL ORDER 1 O
1 O function key CD SOFT
(serial connection) ONLINE
DICOM Media Storage CL DICOM MEDIA
Ordering key CD CL ORDER 1 O
1 O key CD STORAGE B
(F-RIS) ONLINE FOR TST
DICOM image query/
CL DICOM QR 1 O
PEM image processing retrieval key CD
CL PEM 1 O
key CD
RETAKE ANALYSIS CL RETAKE
1 O
key CD ANALYSIS
X-CON control key CL X ONLINE 1 O
POCKET id Console CL SOFT FOR
1 O
Image composition key CL IM key CD POCKET ID CL
1 O
CD COMPOSITION
FCR QC TEST
Mammo QC key CD 1 O
QA batch processing CL TILE-IM QA SOFT M
1 O
key CD FOR PLUS
CL USB STORAGE
Digital Mammography Image data reading key FOR 358
CL DICOM 1 O
key CD (image processing 1 O CD CL USB
MAMMO S
parameters not provided.) STORAGE A
Digital Mammography key CL DICOM PDI
CL DICOM PDI key CD 1 O
CD (image processing 1 O STORAGE
MAMMO P
parameters provided.) Precise Enlargement
CR PRECISE
CL IM-MAGNIFY O, V8.1 or image display function 1 O
ENLARGEMENT
Image magnification FOR LITE earlier key CD
key CD (for Lite 1 QA ROI Measurement CR QA ROI
Standard key) DX CL IM-MAGNIFY O, V8.2 or 1 O
function key CD MEASUREMENT
FOR LITE later
* O : Option Ordering key CD DX CL SYNAPSE
1 O
(Synapse RIS) RIS CONNECT
* O : Option
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Description Product Code Qty. Remarks*2 Description Product Code Qty. Remarks*2
Barcode reader CL VIDEO BD FOR

2M/3M color/
(with a rack)
IR 346 BARCODE 1 O 2MCG3MC*1
monochrome video board 1 O
AMD FireGL V3600 VIDEO BD V3600
Magnetic card reader IR 346 MCR JIS 1 O 2M/3M color/
monochrome video board
VIDEO BD V3800 1 O
Magnetic card reader AMD FirePro V3800
(including a Ferrite IR 346 MCR JIS F 1 O (for Windows 7)
core)
3M monochrome video CL VIDEO BD FOR
1 O
Magnetic card reader board SL-IC300
IR 346 MCR ISO 1 O
(ISO)
Board for serial
Magnetic card reader capacity enhancement
(ISO, including a Ferrite IR 346 MCR ISO F 1 O (MOXA CP-104EL/ SERIAL PORT BD 1 O
core) RS-232C, for PCI
Express x1)
Magnetic card reader IR 346 MCR
1 O Board for serial
wall-mounting kit BRACKET
capacity enhancement
SERIAL PORT BD
(MOXA CP-114EL/ 1 O
RS-422
Serial interface board IDT-4 IF BD FOR RS-232C or RS-422,
1 O
(PSI04A) PCI for PCI Express x1)
Board for serial
Cable for direct printer ODF/PS IF CABLE capacity enhancement
1 O SERIAL PORT BS 1 O
connection nM*1 (MOXA CP-112UL-I-DB9,
for PCI)
RS232C cable for RS-232C X-CON
IDT3/4 ONLINE
connection to other
9S-CBL nM*1 connection kit XCON CONNECT
1 O
manufacturers RIS 1 O Serial conversion cable KIT
IDT3/4 ONLINE
terminal or X-ray
25P-CBL nM*1 relay adapter
apparatus
RS-422 X-CON
E-i/f conversion cable MF-PS 667/DMSIF connection kit XCON CONNECT
1 O 1 O
(1.2 m) CBL Serial conversion cable KIT RS-422
relay adapter
Ferrite core kit IR 346 *1 : 3M monochrome not included

1 O *2 O : Option
(one smalll core) FERRITE KIT
*1 n : Cable length
*2 O : Option
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3.3 Installing the Accessories and Serial cable attached Monitor power cable Insulating transformer
power cable
Optional Items to the monitor*
To power
Connect the following accessories and optional items to the PC, as Monitor source
Insulating
illustrated below. Monitor port Power transformer
source
PC boards (option) Serial port (only for Japan)
Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan) USB port To medical
Keyboard and mouse Additional protective grounding
Monitor PC grounding conductor terminal
Remote power control box (only when the 5000 plus series is power cable PSI board (option)
connected)
Back of GX60 RIS, etc.
Follow the workflow presented below.
To LP
3.3.1 PC Boards
1 2
3.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required USB cable PEI board

only for units used in Japan) attached to Mouse (option)
the monitor*2 To IR
Keyboard Remote power
control box
3.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable (only when the IP is connected)
* 1: Only when the 15" monitor with the touch panel is used.
* 2: Only when the 17 monitor with the touch panel is used. IN000010.EPS
3.3.4 Monitor
u NOTE u
Of the two serial ports provided on the PC, be sure to use the No.1
3.3.5 Remote Power Control Box serial port ( ).
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.3.1 PC Boards When connecting the CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FL-IM3543N/

FL-IM3543MN
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; SW0 2 and 3
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 3 and 4: ON short-circuited.
DPSW2 1 and 2: OFF; SW2 and SW5 1 and 2
To attach optional boards, observe the procedures described herein. 3 to 8: ON short-circuited.
PEI board (optional) DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed.
PSI board (optional)
ON DPSW3
For how to verify setup of and attach the PSI board, see
1. Hardware Setup, under CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online) in SW0
OE7: Connection between CL and Other Equipment. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON DPSW2 ON DPSW1
1. Check that the switches on the PEI board are properly set.
SW3 SW5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
u NOTE u OFF OFF
1 2 1 2
When no remote signal is to be sent to the printer, turn OFF all the SW2 SW4
DPSW1 switches. 1 2 1 2
PEI01A board
00000251.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
When connecting printers other than those mentioned on the 2. Mount a PEI board in a PCI slot.
left side
DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; 3 and 4: ON u NOTE u
DPSW2 1 to 8: ON The procedure below applies when the PC used is GX60.
DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF
SW0 2 and 3 short-circuited. When the PC used is a model other than GX60, see
SW2 and SW5 1 and 2 short-circuited. Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed. under RI : Reinstalling the Software.

ON DPSW3
SW0 III. Mount a PEI board in the lower PCI slot.
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF Handle
ON DPSW2 ON DPSW1
3. Card cage
SW3 SW5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
OFF OFF
1 2 1 2 4. PEI board
SW2 SW4
1 2 1 2
PEI01A board
AGP slot Expansion card

slot connector
00000007.EPS
ONT
FR
CL-PC (GX60)
IN000009.EPS

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required 3.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable
only for units used in Japan)
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
u NOTE u 1. Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC.
Ensure that the power cables connected to the insulating transformer For details on the connection procedures, see the
are for the CL and monitor only. documentation supplied with the PC.
CAUTION
For a PC provided with the source voltage changeover switch
1. Remove the two connector covers from the insulating
(between 115 and 230 VAC), set the PC source voltage
transformer. according to the voltage supplied to the institution concerned
and then connect the power cable to the power source.
2. Connect the power cable between the insulating transformer
and power source.
2. Connect the power cable to the power source.
3. Turn ON the insulating transformer. Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
ON documentation supplied with the PC.
OFF 2. Connect the power cable to the insulating transformer.
3. Use the long bracket to secure that the power cable is not
(3) Power ON disconnected accidentally from the insulating transformer.
Insulating transformer (2) Power cable
To power
source
Secure the long bracket using

REFERENCE
(1) Two connector covers 00000301.EPS
To secure cables, eight brackets (four each of long and short ones)
are attached to the insulating transformer.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.3.4 Monitor 1. Connect the monitor cable and serial cable or USB cable to
the PC.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
For details on cable connections, see the documentation
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 supplied with the monitor.
The following monitors can be connected. Procedures followed by equipment used abroad
Note that the connection procedure varies with the monitor type.
15" monitor with the touch panel
u NOTE u
17" monitor with the touch panel Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable between
17" CRT monitor PC and monitor.
Ikegami 1K landscape monitor If the power cable is connected before serial cable connection, the
Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 touch panel driver may not be installed.
For the connection procedure of the Super Resolution LCD
Monitor SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300. 2. Connect the power cable between the monitor and power
source.
LCD Monitor SL-IC200
For the connection procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200, see Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
u NOTE u
For the monitor with the touch panel Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable between
PC and monitor.
The work procedures will differ depending on the installation method
If the power cable is connected before serial cable connection, the
adopted of the monitor.
touch panel driver may not be installed.
REFERENCE
If the monitor type used is EIZOs L350/351P-TS, it is stable enough 2. Connect the monitor power cable to the insulating
even without optional rack for actual operations. Thus, it is not transformer.
necessary now for you to mount optional rack.
Installation method 1 (for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
To continue to use the monitor rack, perform step 1. thereafter.
Installation method 2 (for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
To replace the monitor with a wall-mounting type monitor, replace
first the bracket with a wall-mounting type (option). Perform then
step 1. thereafter.
When using the wall-mounting bracket, see
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket Insulating transformer
[Option] to replace the monitor rack. Secure the short bracket using the two
connector cover retaining screws. 00000384.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
For the 17" CRT monitor For the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor
1. Connect the monitor cable between the PC and monitor. 1. Use a monitor cable to connect the monitor to the PC.

2. Connect the power cable between the monitor and power
source.
Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan

2. Connect the power cable between the PC and insulating
transformer.
disconnected accidentally from the insulating transformer. IN000108.EPS
Procedure followed by equipment used abroad

2. Use a power cable to connect the power source to the
monitor.
Secure the short bracket using the two
connector cover retaining screws. 00000384.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment
3.3.5 Remote Power Control Box 3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 Equipment
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
1. Use a USB cable to connect the CL to the remote power
control box. Use a network cable to connect the CL to other equipment.
When using a HUB, use a straight cable, and when directly connecting
2. Use an optional remote power control cable to connect the the CL to the IR without HUB, use a cross cable.
remote power control box to the IR.
For connection using a straight cable
u NOTE u
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
To use the following remote power control cable for the master cable (straight) cable (straight)
IDT741, a conversion cable is required.
Other Connected
IDT-IV-to-FCR5000 connect signal cable REM CBL *M FOR IDT CL HUB Equipment
MAIN D IN000011.EPS
For connection using a cross cable

Remote power
control box 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (cross)
Other Connected
CL Equipment
IN000012.EPS
USB cable
u NOTES u
To CL-PC USB Be sure to use an STP shield-type cable for connection to the IR.
connector Even if the CL and IR will eventually be incorporated into the network
FG terminal
Conversion cable [required only when of a hospital for operation, connect the CL and IR while they are
[as required] a conversion cable independent of the network (not incorporated into the hospitals
is used.] network).
Remote power Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and IR network
control cable IR remote switch connectors.
connector The cable type applicable to this equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
IN000014.EPS
compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher (when a HUB is used).
3. To connect another IR, use an RU2 connector.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP
3.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP 3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
When using an E-i/f LP, connect an E-i/f cable between the LP and CL. When a magnetic card reader is connected to the CL, mount a Ferrite
core on the USB cable.
LP CL
PEI board
E-i/f cable 00000035.EPS Rear of the CL
Network
Ferrite core (small) cable
Card reader
RU
20-40mm
Power cable
Ferrite core
00000036.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP connection
4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other Equipment

Connection

Connection
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1 CL-AP Startup u NOTE u

Start up the CL-AP following the workflow below: as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7.
4.1.1 OS Startup Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7, follow the
4.1.2 OS Setups REFERENCE

The following CL-PC setups and software installation steps are
completed at factory prior to shipment:
4.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation CL IP address (172.16.1.20)
Subnet mask (255.255.0.0)
CL host name (CRxxxxxxxx: 8 lowest digits of a manufacturers
serial number in the xxxxxxxx position)
4.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Administrator password setup (fcr-iip)
Prompt When Exiting the Suspend Mode Display setup (screen saver, screen resolution, etc.)
MS-IME setup (only for units used in Japan)
CL-AP (MSDE and SQL included) installation
4.1.5 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Standard Key Software installation
Icons [applicable only in Japan] AP key installation
Image database initialization
4.1.7 AP Key Installation
4.1.8 CL Startup Verification
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.1 OS Startup The following error display opens 10 seconds after CL-AP startup.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
u NOTE u
Be sure to turn ON the power to the LCD first and then to the PC,
otherwise the touch panel may not operate correctly.

NOTE 00000421.EPS
A window like that shown below opens in case the date and time IMPORTANT
displayed on the PC are older than those when it was started last
time. The above error display opens because an output system (print or
Click [OK] on the window that opens, and set correct date and time image transfer) option key has not been installed/set up when the
on the Date/Time Properties window. equipment was newly installed.
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed
During the Use of Output Options under, MT: Machine
Troubleshooting.
2. Click .
CLP401002.EPS
The error display opens again in about 20 seconds.

If this window opens, the PC battery is possible to be dead. Use
the procedure below to check.
1. Set the current date/time.
2. Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power cable 00000216.EPS
from the outlet.

3. After a few minutes, re-connect the power cable and turn the 3. Click .
power to the PC ON again.
4. Check to see that the set date/time are correct. If the date/time
values revert back to those before settings, have the battery be
changed.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.2 OS Setups 3. Verify the date and time.

If the date and time indicated are incorrect, correct them accordingly
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 and then click .
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Perform the following OS-related setups.

Setting the date, time and time zone.
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point [applicable only
to part of the area where the English software is used.]
Setting the date, time, and time zone

1. Make setting as follows.
For Windows 2000
00000115.EPS
Double-click on the desktop. 4. Click .
The My Computer window opens. 5. Verify the time zone setting.

If the setting is wrong, correct it and then click .
Double-click .
For Windows XP
00000117.EPS
Select from the menu. 6. Click .

The Control Panel window opens. The system returns to the desktop screen.
For Windows Vista/7 7. Close the Control Panel window.
Select Control Panel from the menu. Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
Select . (period) as the character to be sued as a decimal point.
The Control Panel ("All Control Panel Items" for Windows 7) If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you
window opens.
This setup is applicable only to part of the area where the English
2. Double-click (click for Windows 7) . software is used.
For details of the setup procedure, see Defining the character
to be used as a decimal point in 2.1.3 Setting the OS under
The Date/Time Properties window opens. RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this procedure After a while, the Elo MonitorMouse for Windows 2000 Setup
if the 15 monitor with a touch panel is provided.] window opens.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
When the monitor with the touch panel is going to be used, it is

necessary to install the touch panel driver and adjust the touch panel. IN000107.EPS
Installing the driver

2. Click .
The license agreement window opens.
1. Insert the driver CD-ROM into the PC.
To install the touch panel driver using the FD or employ the
L362T or L560T-C monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the
Touch Panel Driver.
00000412.EPS
For the previous-version CD-ROM
When the CD-ROM is inserted into the PC, a window like that shown 3. Click .
below opens automatically. Click Install MonitorMouse for Windows The port selection window opens.
2000.
IN000102.EPS
For the new-version CD-ROM

When the CD-ROM is inserted into the PC, a window like that shown
below opens automatically. Click Install Drive For This Computer. 00000413.EPS
Click then Install Serial Driver on another window that opens. u NOTE u
An error will occur if the serial cable of the LCD display provided
with a touch panel is connected to serial port No. 2.
4. Click .
seconds.
IN000103.EPS
00000415.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
5. Click . Adjusting the touch panel

For how to adjust the touch panel when using the L362T or L560T-C
In about one minute, a window opens to indicate the completion of monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel Driver.
installation.
u NOTE u
problem.

00000418.EPS
6. Click .
7. Remove the CD-ROM from the PC.

00000321.EPS
8. Click . 1. With your finger, gently touch the mark at the upper left
The PC restarts. The touch panel adjustment window will then of the window.
opens automatically. Mark
u NOTE u
00000422.EPS
00000227.EPS
The mark moves to the lower right of the window. (A beep will
sound.)
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
2. Touch the mark gently with your finger. Adjusting the contrast and brightness
Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows.
The mark moves to the upper right of the window.
Model 9416TD15/H2
Contrast : 127
3. Gently touch the mark again with your finger. (Press the Menu switch on the right-hand side of
The Check Video Alignment window opens.
Brightness : 255
on the screen.)
Model 9416TD15/H2-1
Contrast : 65%
00000316.EPS
Brightness : 100%
4. Click . the monitor while the Main Menu is not displayed
on the screen.)
u NOTE u Model L350P-TS
Click within a period of 30 seconds. Failure to click Contrast : 80%
within a 30-second period invalidates the previous Brightness : 80%
(Press the Enter switch on the front of the monitor
adjustments made.
The Elo TouchSystems Setup window opens.
Model L351P-TS
5. Deselect ( ) and then Contrast : 90%
Brightness : 90%
click . (Press the Enter switch on the front of the monitor
The system returns to the desktop screen. Adjustment>, then <Contrast Brightness>.)
u NOTE u Model L362T
If a window opens to prompt FD insertion, click . Contrast : Default (not determined)
Brightness : 90%
To set up other functions (e.g. for silencing the alarm sound) of Model L560T-C
the touch panel, see the documentation for the touch panel driver.
Brightness : 100%
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input 4. Uncheck ( ).

Prompt When Exiting the Suspend Mode
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
following procedure as needed.
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows Vista or Windows 7, nothing is needed IN000109.EPS
to perform at this step.

1. From the menu, point to Settings, and then click
Control Panel. (For Windows XP, select Control Panel
from the menu.)
2. Double-click .
The Power Options Properties window opens.
IN000110.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.5 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to

Icons [applicable only in Japan]
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons displayed

on the CL-AP main window, install the descriptive characters
appropriately.
For the descriptive character installation procedure, see FR10
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [applicable
only in Japan] under FR: Function-specific Reference.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.6 Option Key Installation Function Product Code Description

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
CL DICOM MAMMO S function (Image processing
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 parameters will not be provided.)
The following option keys are available. Install necessary option keys CL DICOM MAMMO P function (image processing
in compliance with the CL installation specifications. parameters will be provided.)*1
Image input/
IMPORTANT output CL DICOM MEDIA Removable Media Image
STORAGE B Storage function
Either the image input/output function or print output option key must be
Function for study query/image
installed. If it is not installed, an error display (error code: 50001) will be CL DICOM QR
retrieve to/from filing devices.
indicated during CL-AP startup, resulting thus in disabling the CL-AP to be
started up. Moreover, when the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE and CL DICOM PDI Function that writes exposed
IR346 DICOM PRINT option keys have been installed, be sure to STORAGE images onto a CD-R.
perform configuration settings as well. Image Function assuring that an image
CL DICOM
The 50001 error display will be indicated if an output system (for print or storage has surely been stored in the
COMMITMENT
image output) option key has not been installed/set up properly. assurance archiver unit.*2
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the IR346 DELUX-QA QA function addition*3, *4
Use of Output Options under MT: Machine Troubleshooting. QA function CL TILE-IM QA FOR
QA batch processing
PLUS
Function Product Code Description IR346 MFP

MFP image processing
Print IR346 LOCAL PRINT LP (local printer) connection IR348 MFP
output IR346 DICOM PRINT DICOM Print function CL SHUTTER-PROC Shuttering processing
DICOM-based image transmission CL PEM PEM image processing
functions available (Also include a function Image
to transmit unstandardized images to the CL IM COMPOSITION Image composition
processing
IR346 DICOM CR QA-WS.) Options installed are as follows. CL IM-MAGNIFY FOR Image magnification (for Lite
STORAGE CR Storage SCU (Standard) LITE Standard key)
CR Storage SCU (Private) (Private
Unstandardized CR Storage is included LUT adjustment for connection
CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT
in Private.) to other competing PACS (for
FOR LITE
Image Lite Standard key)
Functions available for processed- image
input/ *1 To use this option, the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key must have
transmission with DICOM Options installed
output IR346 DICOM IM
are as follows. been installed.
PROCESSED
CR Storage SCU (Standard) *2 To use this option, the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key
Processed image generation must have been installed.
Function for image transfer (input/output) *3 When IR346 DELUX-QA is installed, all the QA functions are made
with FINP Options installed are as follows. available.
IR346 DMS NET-
FINP output If it is not installed, only a limited number of QA functions available.
WORK IN-OUT
FINP input (Supports only the reprint *4 No option key is required because this function is available as a
function.)
standard on the DR Console Plus.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
Function Product Code Description The installation procedure is described below.

CL ANNOTATION
Annotation function For the option key uninstallation procedure, see
FOR LITE
FCR QC TEST SOFT Mammo QC function Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the
Image
M (Applicable only in Japan) Software.
processing
CL GPR Grid Pattern Removal processing function
FCR QC TEST SOFT Image Reader QC function
1. Insert an option key CD into the PC.
CL ID ONLINE ID Online function The installation start window automatically opens in several
seconds.
CL DICOM ORDER MWM DICOM worklist function
Acquisition DICOM worklist function (acquiring NOTE
CL DICOM ID MWM
of patient only patient information)
information CL DICOM MPPS In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
DICOM PPS function*1
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
DX CL SYNAPSE RIS
Ordering function (Synapse RIS)
CONNECT
Energy Energy subtraction function 2. Click .
subtraction CL ES Make sure to install this function
processing when XU-D1 is connected. A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
X-ray controller CL X ONLINE X-CON control function The indication varies
CL SOFT FOR with the option key for installation.
P-Console Portable exposure function
POCKET ID CL
Reading of CL USB STORAGE Function to read image data stored
image data FOR 358 into USB memory from CR-IR 358CL.
Reading of Function to read image data stored
image data into USB memory from CR-IR 358CL /
CL USB STORAGE A
(FCR-MB FCR-MB 201 Console. Multiple kinds
201 Console) of security software are supported.
Precise Function to present displayed images 00000416.EPS
CR PRECISE
enlargement and their additional information on a
ENLARGEMENT
image display capacity-enhanced monitor. 3. Click .
Function to display, based on the ROI
determined on an image, width and The system returns to the desktop screen.
QA ROI CR QA ROI
height of the ROI, as well as its mean
measurement MEASUREMENT
pixel value, median pixel value, u NOTE u
standard deviation and area. Depending on the option for installation, the installation start
CL RETAKE Function for storage/calculation of window will be displayed some times. Perform steps 2. and 3. as
Other
ANALYSIS exposure/mis-exposure image information. well.
*1 This option can be used only by combining it with CL DICOM
ORDER MWM or CL DICOM ID MWM. 4. Remove the CD from the PC.
REFERENCE
5. To install other optional keys, replace the CD and repeat
Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD for each product. steps 2. to 4. above.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.7 AP Key Installation 4.1.8 CL Startup Verification

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Verify the normal startup of the CL.

u NOTE u After the completion of startup verification, exit the AP.
Install the AP key after all optional keys have been installed accordingly.
This is because once an optional key is installed, the AP key becomes 1. From the menu, select Programs, Fuji Film, and
invalidated requiring thus the AP key to be reinstalled.
then FCR.
The CL opening window appears on the display. After about two
REFERENCE minutes, the CL-AP starts up.
The CL is designed so that the CL-AP can be started up when registry Version A software
information is generated to define the encryption key.
The associated registry information is generated when the AP key is
installed.

NOTE
IN000025.EPS
Version B software
2. Click .
IN000127.EPS
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.1 CL-AP Startup
u NOTE u
If the above window does not open or an error display appears,
note the displayed error code and the applicable remedy, and then
make necessary corrections to achieve AP startup.
See 1. Error Code Table in MT: Machine
Troubleshooting.
2. Click in the (or )
menu.
The exit window opens.
REFERENCE
To shut down both the CL-AP and Windows, click [OK] without
pressing the <Shift> key.
To shut down the CL-AP only, click [OK] while holding down the
<Shift> key.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility The password entry window opens.
Follow the workflow below to perform settings for the CL using the
Service Utility.

MU000035.EPS
4.2.2 CL System Information Setup NOTE

4.2.3 Optimizing the Monitor Display
4.2.4 Changing the Menu Database REFERENCE

(for non-Japanese versions only)
If you cannot complete step 2 from the initial window within a
steps to start the Service Utility:
4.2.1 Starting the Service Utility 1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down from the (or
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 ) menu.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372

1. Click and then sequentially choose Programs,
Fuji Film, and FCR. Fuji Film, and FCR.
The CL-AP starts up. 4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left
MU000031.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.2.2 CL System Information Setup 4. Enter setup data as directed below.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 Make a date format selection by double-clicking
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 for .
Complete setup concerning CL system information and IDT functionality 0: Japanese date (S62.10.07) [Default]
as directed in this section. 1: ANSI long date (1987.OCT.07)
2: ANSI short date (1987.10.07)
Setting the system information 3: American long date (OCT.07.1987)
4: American short date (10.07.1987)
1. From the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup 5: European long date (07.OCT.1987)
Configuration Item]. 6: European short date (07.10.1987)
The Setup Configuration Item window opens. u NOTE u

Use System Common Date Format to specify the date format.
2. Click the sign within in the Setup If you change the date format, the following items of information
Configuration Item window. are changed to match the newly selected format.
Date output on film
3. Click . Format for birth date input
Date displayed by CL-AP
The CL system information setup items appear. Other date indications
Items for CL system setup
Make a hospital name entry (one-byte characters) by double-
clicking for .
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name Strings to enter a hospital name string
of one-byte characters for use in the CL system.
The default hospital name is FUJI FILM HOSPITAL. Change
this entry to a hospital name string of one-byte characters as
defined by a specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 60 characters.
Set the IP size unit system (inch or metric) for

.
u NOTE u
00000132.EPS
Select this key to specify whether to display 3543cm (14"17")
and 3535cm (14"14") images in the inch or metric system.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Use to specify the language to be Setting the IDT functionality

used. 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click
0: Japanese 11: Chinese Simplified .
1: English 12: Chinese Traditional
2: German 13: Portuguese The IDT function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the
3: French 14: Polish window.
4: Spanish 15: Hungarian
5: Italian 16: Czech IDT/Console function setup items
6: Swedish 17: Russian
7: Finnish 18: Slovene
8: Danish 19: Turkish
9: Norwegian 21: Greek
10: Korean 22: Romanian
u NOTE u
Do not select 18: Slovene because software version V7.0 (B)
Double-click for
to enter a hospital name

(consisting of two-byte characters). 00000160.EPS
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name in Two-Byte Characters to enter a 2. Edit the IDT functionality setup as needed.
hospital name string of two-byte characters for use in the CL For details of the setup items, see 3.6 Configuration Details
system. 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance Utility.
The default hospital name is . Change this entry
to a hospital name string of two-byte characters as defined by a 3. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 15 two-byte characters. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
For connection to an RU (XG-1 RU) or 356/357/359/36X/37X,
make sure that the setting for is 4. Click .
. If not, set it so. The system saves the setup data.
5. Change the other items of system information as needed.

For details of other setup items, see 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY under MU: Maintenance
Utility.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.2.3 Optimizing the Monitor Display TPS 9415 TD15 : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 TPS 9416 TD15 : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 (model TPS9416TD15/H2)
Set the LUT file as follows to optimize the image display of the monitor (model TPS 9416TD15/H2-1)
that is being used. PRESTO! (B/W) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor
SL-IC300 (monochrome)
1. Click [LUT] on the "IIP Service Utility" window. PRESTO! (Color) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor
SL-IC300 (color)
nanao L350P : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with
a touch panel (model L350P-TS)
nanao L351P : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with
a touch panel (model L351P-TS)
nanao L362T : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with
a touch panel (model L362T)
IN000115.EPS Linear LUT : Linear (straight line gradation) LUT
nanao Radiforce GS310-CLG : LCD monitor SL-IC300
2. Select the name of the display monitor that is actually being (monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce R31 : LCD monitor SL-IC300 (color monitor)
used and click . nanao L568M : 17 color LCD monitor (model L568)
nanao L560T-C : EIZOx 17 LCD monitor with
a touch panel (model L560T-C)
Select the connected nanao Radiforce G22-CL : LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor)
display monitor type. nanao Radiforce GS220 : LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce GS210-ECN : LCD monitor (3M monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce RX320 : LCD monitor (3M color monitor)
You are returned to the IIP Service Utility window.
u NOTE u
To use a nanao L351P (model L351P-TS) with the CL software A08
or earlier install the LUT file on the FD provided with the LCD
monitor.
IN000129.EPS C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\lut folder (overwrite the lut.txt file).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
4.2.4 Changing the Menu Database 3. Enter 2 to use the DICOM MG Storage function (a digital
mammography option), and 1 for other than that. Press
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 then the <Enter> key.
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
A menu list of languages that can be installed opens.
To change an exposure menu or image processing parameter, the
menu database must be replaced following individual procedures.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the fact that exposure menu settings will revert to the
default if a menu database is replaced.
For V7.0 or earlier

1. Insert the CL-AP CD into the PC.
RI0000428.EPS
NOTE
IN000116.EPS

00000301.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Enter the item number of a language you wish to install and 5. Perform the following settings.
u NOTE u When you selected Standard and Japanese as the language
When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at to be installed at step 3 above, a window like that shown below
step 3 above, a window like that shown below opens. Skip step 5 opens. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key.
When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be installed:
IN0000954.EPS
IN0000957.EPS
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected: Noise Control processing) parameters is selected.
IN0000955.EPS IN0000955.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
When a language other than Japanese was selected: 7. Enter 0 and then press the <Enter> key.
When you selected Standard and a language other than The IIP Setup Tool exits, returning you to the desktop screen.
window like that shown below opens. Enter an item number that
IN0000956.EPS

When English (U.S.) was selected for the language to be
installed:
IN0000957.EPS
IN0000955.EPS

u NOTE u
The message Menu Database installation completed. appears

completing thus changing the menu database.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
For V7.1 or later 3. Enter 2 to use the DICOM MG Storage function (a digital
mammography option), and 1 for other than that. Press
1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. then the <Enter> key.
The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens. A menu list of languages that can be installed opens.
NOTE
double-click the execution file (Setup: bat) in the CD.
IN000116.EPS

A window like that shown below opens. RI0000428.EPS
4. Enter the item number of a language you wish to install and

u NOTE u
When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at
00000301.EPS step 3 above, a window like that shown below opens. Skip step 5
RI0000472.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Perform the following settings. 6. Enter the number for a desired image processing parameter
(for film/for monitor) and press the <Enter> key.
When you selected Standard and Japanese as the language A window opens asking whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible
to be installed at step 3 above, a window like that shown below Noise control processing) parameter.
opens. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key. When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be
installed
RI0000471.ai
A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible IN0000957.EPS
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected as
the language to be installed
RI0000472.ai
When a language other than Japanese was selected:

When you selected Standard and a language other than
window like that shown below opens. Enter an item number that IN0000955.EPS

u NOTE u
IN0000956.EPS
A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible The message Menu Database installation completed. appears
Noise Control processing) parameters is selected. completing thus changing the menu database.

The IIP Setup Tool exits, returning you to the desktop screen.
RI0000472.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP Connection
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP 4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other

Connection Equipment
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Set the configuration used when connecting an LP to the CL. Perform necessary settings for connecting the equipment shown in the
See 2. Software Setup in CL + Local Printer (E-i/f Connection) table below to the CL.
under OE1: Connecting the CL to Other Connected Equipment.
Connected equipment Function Ref.
Local Printer E-i/f Connection OE1
HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F FINP: Image Input/Output OE2
HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW DICOM CR Storage OE3
DICOM CR Storage :
Other makers equipment OE4
Transfer of Processed Images
FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DPL DICOM Print OE5
FN-PS551 or 5000 Series FINP : Print Output OE6
RIS/IDC4 ID Online OE7
RIS DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS OE8
DICOM Storage Commitment
Archiver OE9
Push
QA-WS Transfer of ES Images OE10
X-Ray Controller Serial Connection OE12
Two or more CLs Cluster Connection OE15
DICOM MG Storage :
Other makers equipment Transfer of Digital OE16
Mammograms
Removable Media Storage DICOM Media Storage OE17
POCKET id Console Portable exposure function OE18
Web Query function OE19
Synapse Server
Ordering OE26
DICOM Server Image reprint function OE20
PDI CD-R write function OE22
DAP Dose-area product meter OE23
Precise enlargement function OE24
QA ROI measurement function OE25
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
4.5 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection

Connection
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
When using the barcode reader or magnetic card reader, perform the
following connection and setup.
Barcode reader connection and setup

For details on the connection, see Appendix 3 Connecting
the Barcode Reader [Option].
Magnetic card reader connection and setup

For details on the connection, see Appendix 4 Setting Up the
Magnetic Card [Option].
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.6 Configuration Settings for IR (5000plus series) Connection
4.6 Configuration Settings for IR 4.6.1 Starting CL Service Utility

(5000plus series) Connection XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Explained below are the CL setup procedures to be followed when
transferring images from the IR to the CL.
1. Start up the CL Service Utility mode.
4.6.1 Starting CL Service Utility See 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility under

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
4.6.3 Setups Necessary for the IR
1. Click the Setup Configuration Item button.
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID

Information
4.6.5 IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information

Sharing Function) Setup
00000404.EPS

4.6.6 Saving Configuration
2. Click .
4.6.7 Selector Setup (applicable only when a built-in

4.6.8 Settings for Transfer of Image Processing

Parameters (only for A02 and A03)
IN000056.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Click .
5. Make the following settings on the Application Entity List
window.
The [New Node] window opens.
II
IN000039.EPS
4. Select of the Add Node box and click (for CP-104EL/

CP-114EL)
.
The Application Entity List window opens.
IN000040.EPS
I. Enter the CL Application Entity Name (DICOM_IIP).

II. Enter the CL Port Number (21760).
6. Click .
REFERENCE
DICOM_IIP and 21760 are the 5000 series defaults values set
when it is shipped from factory.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7. Make the following settings on the DICOMSetup window. 4.6.3 Setups Necessary for the IR
VI VII XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
I 1. Click on the
II Setup Configuration Item window.
III
2. Click .
The New Node window opens.
IV
V IN000042.EPS
IN000041.EPS 3. Enter the IR host name (fcr5501-n ) in the

I. Select PrivateUnstandardizedCRStorage. field and the IR IP address
II. Select SCP.
III. Select JPEG Lossless. (172.116.0.2) in the field,
IV. Select ST&HQ. Select SH when the 5000MA is connected.
respectively.
V. Select HQ/SH.
VI. To handle two-byte characters, check here. u NOTE u
VII. Select OTHER. The default host name for each IR is as follows:
5000/5000R/5000MA/ : fcr5000-n
8. Click . 5501/5501D/5502D/XU-D1 : fcr5501-n
You are returned to the Application Entity List window.

4. Select in the Add Node box and click .
9. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
5. Enter DICOM_IR for the IR Application Entity Name. 7. Makes the following settings on the DICOMSetup window.
V
I
II
III
IV
IN000044.EPS
I. Select PrivateUnstandardizedCRStorage.
II. Select SCU.
IN000081.EPS III.
Select JPEG Lossless.
IV. Select a destination for film output.
u NOTE u Select IIP when connecting an LP to the CL and FCR5000
The default Application Entity Name for each IR is DICOM_IR. when connecting an LP to the IR.
V. Select BUILTIN or CASSETTE.
5000/5000R/5000MA : CASSETTE
5501/5501D/XU-D1/5520D : BUILTIN
6. Click .
u NOTES u
When the XU-D1 is connected, do not select FCR5000 in the
FilmOutput box because the XU-D1 does not support LP output.
When IIP has been selected for IV, with an LP connected also to
the 5000 plus, make configuration settings (EQUIP file) for the
5000 plus PRINT function set to Local_R.
8. Click .
9. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID Information 4. Makes the following settings on the FINP Setup window.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
I
u NOTE u
These setups can be omitted for the cassette-type IR. When omitted,
FINP110 will interacts between IR and CL.
II
1. Click
(host name of other connected equipment) on
the Setup Configuration Item window.
2. Click .
The [New Node] window opens.
3. Make sure that has been selected in the Add
Node box. Click .

IN000046.EPS
I. Select .
II. Select BUILTIN or CASSETTE.
5000/5000R/5000MA : CASSETTE
5501/5501D/5502D/XU-D1 : BUILTIN
5. Click .
IN000045.EPS
The FINP Setup window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.6.5 IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information Sharing 4.6.6 Saving Configuration

Function) Setup
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
When two or more CLs are connected in the same system, make
1. Select Save from the Config (F) menu of the Setup
settings so that the patient information can be shared by all CLs
connected.
For the procedure used for patient information sharing function
setup, see 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup
under MU: Maintenance Utility.
IN000047.EPS
The Close Configuration window opens.
IN000048.EPS
2. Click .
The setup data will be saved.
3. Select Close from the Config (F) menu.

You are returned to the Service Utility mode window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.6.7 Selector Setup (applicable only when a built-in 2. Make the following selector settings.
I
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 II
To connect a built-in device to the CL, register it to the selector. When

connecting a cassette device, it needs not be registered because it has III
been registered as the default.
u NOTE u IV
Two built-in devices and eight at maximum of each of 5000plus
cassette-type devices can be connected respectively to the CL. V
1. Click the Selector Setting button on the Service Utility VI

window.
VII
IN000050.EPS
I. Select an unregistered Selector tab.

As the default, a cassette device is registered to the Selector1
tab.
II. Set the Technique Code paying attention not to set the same
code with other selectors.
III. Select a device to be added to the selector (use the host name
for selection).
IV. Choose a Reader Type.
5501 Velocity Upright
5502 Velocity Table/Universal
IN000049.EPS To revert to Cassette, choose a blank from the pull-down
The Selector Setting window opens. V. Enter a maximum of five one-byte characters in the selector button.
VI. This entry field appears when 5501 or 5502 is chosen as Reader
Type.
550x under SYSTEM CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION, choose
Yes if you wish that the exposure mode (Auto IP Shelter mode) be
notified automatically to the built-in type equipment (predetermined
to the selector) and No to manually notifying it of the exposure
mode.
VII. To restore the initially selected status when the CL was started,
from the selector that is now being edited, turn the radio button ON.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. If no cassette device (including CR-IR346RU) is connected, Version B software

delete as follows the cassette device registered to the
selector as the default.
1. Select the Selector1 tab.
2. Change the Technique Code to -1.
4. Click .
5. Click the Exit Service Utility button.

The Service Utility mode will exit and you are returned to the
desktop screen.
REFERENCE
The window shown below represents an example of user display
where one each of cassette device and built-in device have been
set in the selector.
Version A software
Selector IN000130.EPS
Selector IN000051.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.6.8 Settings for Transfer of Image Processing Setups necessary for the IR
Parameters (only for A02 and A03) Set the CPU90E board information as follows.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
1. Click on the
Setup Configuration Item window.
Use the procedure described below to perform network settings
necessary for transferring image processing parameters from the CL to
the IR.
With software versions A02 and A03, image processing parameters are
handled via the CPU90E board. For this reason, be sure to connect a
network cable to the CPU90E board.
With CL software version A04 or later, image processing parameters are
handled via the CPU90F board making it unnecessary to perform
settings at this step.
REFERENCE
Image processing parameter transfer refers to a user utility function that
is responsible for matching the CL image processing parameters with
those for the IR. With this function, you can overwrite the IR image IN000038.EPS
processing parameter data with the CL image processing parameter
data.
2. Click .

Setups necessary for the CL
NETWORK CONFIG THIS HOST (IIP) settings have already been
made in 4.6.2.
IN000042.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Enter the CPU90E board host name in 7. Make the following settings on the DICOMSetup window.
and the IP address (e.g.: IV
172.16.0.1) of the IR CPU90E board in

. I
II
u NOTE u
III
The default CPU90E board host name for each IR is as follows.
5000: fcr5000 5000R: fcr5000 5000MA: fcr5000
5501: fcr5501 XU-D1: fcr55es 5502D: fcr5501
IN000054.EPS
4. Select in the Add Node box and click . I. Select PrivateUnstandardizedCRStorage.

II. Select SCU.
III. Select JPEG Lossless.
5. Enter the Application Entity Name of the CPU90E board IV. Select BUILTIN or CASSETE.
side. 5000/5000R/5000MA : CASSETE
5501/5501D/5502D/XU-D1 : BUILTIN
8. Click .
9. Click .
IN000053.EPS
6. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Saving configuration and exiting the Service Utility mode 4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup
1. Select Save from the Config (F) menu of the Setup XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
Configuration Item window. 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Connection verification
Connection between CL and IR
Connection to other equipment units
Output image (by causing the printer to generate a film output)
Setup file backup

Back up the CL setup file.
IN000047.EPS
See 7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File under
The Close Configuration window opens. 7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion
in IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
u NOTE u
If you intend to connect the RU or CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X in a later
procedure, do not back up the CL setup file at this stage.
IN000048.EPS
2. Click .

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection For RU connection setup, perform the following steps:
This section shows how to set up the CL that serves as the RU master 4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility
IIP to transfer images to the CL.
For installation of a single CL, follow the procedure described herein to
perform necessary settings for a CL that is to be used as the RU master 4.7.2 Installing the RU M-Utility
IIP. When two or more CLs are to be installed, perform settings for a CL
that will serve as the RU master IIP, and then perform 4.7.8 Settings
Necessary for Connection of Two or More CLs for the 2nd CL or later.
4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit)
The subsequent explanations are given on the presumption that three
RUs are connected to one CL.
CL IP address: 172.16.1.20 4.7.4 Installing the RU-AP (for 2nd and 3rd units)
(RU master IIP) (to be changed to 172.16.1.21 CL*1
later)
TCP/IP
RU RU RU 4.7.6 Setting Up IDT CONNECTION

(1st unit) (2nd unit) (3rd unit) (patient information sharing function)
Host name: RU1 Host name: RU2 Host name: RU3
IP address: 172.16.1.1 IP address: 172.16.1.2 IP address 172.16.1.3
*1 CL that does not serve as the RU master IIP (to be added in section 4.7.8). 4.7.7 Setting the Selector
IN000069.EPS
REFERENCE
You must perform an extremely complicated procedure to set up the CL More CLs
as the RU master IIP for the connection of multiple RUs. It is therefore
recommended that you read the function descriptions in the following
reference sections in advance:
4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup
See 5. Relationship between RU and CL, and 6. RU-CL N:N Files
Connection Function Overview under MD: Machine
Description.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

4. Click .
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372 The New Node window opens.
Register the network information and equipment information

(CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) about the three RUs with the CLs
Service Utility.
Registering the network information

IN000042.EPS
See 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility under
5. In the field, enter the host name of
the first RU (RU1). In the field,

enter the IP address (172.16.1.1).
00000404.EPS
6. Choose in the [Add Node] area and then click
2. Click [Setup Configuration Item]. .

3. Click and then click
The [FRUP setup] window opens.
.
IN000082.EPS
7. Check in the [Attribute] area ( ).

IN000071.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
8. In the field, enter RU1.

2. Click .
REFERENCE
The [Connecting Equipment] window opens.
The character string entered need not be the same as the host
name.
3. Register the equipment information as directed below:
9. Click . I
The network information registration is completed for the first RU.
II
10. Register the network information about the second and third
RUs by performing steps 3. through 9. III
Network information about the second RU

IV
Host name : RU2
IP address : 172.16.1.2
Button Caption : RU2 IN000072.EPS
Network information about the third RU I. Choose READER. III. Choose RU2.
Host name : RU3 II. Choose RU1. IV. Choose RU3.
IP address : 172.16.1.3
Button Caption : RU3 u NOTE u
Do not register 5000plus series equipment for Connecting
Registering the equipment information Equipment.
(CONNECTING EQUIPMENT)
1. In the [Setup Configuration Item] window, click
. 4. Click .
The equipment information registration is now completed.

The system returns you to the [Setup Configuration Item] window.
IN000083.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Saving the configuration data and exiting the Service 4.7.2 Installing the RU M-Utility
Utility
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
1. From the [Config (F)] menu in the [Setup Configuration Item] 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
window, choose [Save].
u NOTES u
The RU M-Utility installation procedure is described herein on the
assumption that the RU application CD version A07 or later is used for
the RU M-Utility (PC-MUTL hereinafter) that is to be installed as
follows. A different installation procedure will be required if a version
earlier than that mentioned above is used.
When the OS used is Windows XP, use RU software of A09 or later.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, use RU software of A13 or later.
When the OS used is Windows 7, use RU software of A14 or later.
IN000047.EPS
Make sure to start the procedure below with the CL-AP quit accordingly.
A window opens, asking whether you want to save the
configuration data. 1. Have on hand the CD that is supplied with the RU. Insert this
CD into the PC.
After a while, the following window opens:
IN000048.EPS
2. Click .
The system saves your setup data entries.
3. From the [Config (F)] menu, choose [Close].

The system returns you to the Service Utility window.
4.
00000214.EPS
Exit the Service Utility.
2. Click .
The RU M-Utility installation start window opens.
00000185.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Click .
6. Click .
The [FCR TOOL Setup/Ready to Install...] window opens.
The [CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY] main menu window
opens.
00000187.EPS Main menu window

(the display differs depending on the software version used.)
4. Click .
When the installation terminates, the [FCR TOOL Setup/
Completing the ...] window opens.
00000188.EPS
5. Click .
The system returns you to the [CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE
TOOLS] window.
00000215.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit) 2. With the main menu, conduct the following check:
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 I

362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
II
Install the RU-AP for the first RU as directed below:
Verifying the network connection

between the CL and RU 00000426.EPS
I. Enter the RU host name (RU1).

Installing the RU-AP II. Check that 172.16.1.10 is entered.
u NOTES u
Verifying the network connection between the CL and RU Since the host name entry made in step I. above becomes the formal
RU host name, be sure to enter a correct host name here.
Before installing the RU-AP, check that the CL and RU are network- Do not change RU IP ADDR to a setting other than 172.16.1.10.
connected. The RU is factory preset to an IP address of 172.16.1.10.
For the RU host name change procedure, see
u NOTES u Appendix 8 Changing the RU Host Name.
When the OS used is Windows XP, use RU software of A09 or later.

When the OS used is Windows Vista, use RU software of A13 or later.
When the OS used is Windows 7, use RU software of A14 or later.
Make sure that the power cables of all the three RUs are connected to
the circuit breaker.
Perform the procedure below with the CL-AP shut down accordingly.
Exit all APs (particularly Windows Explorer) other than the RU M-Utility.
1. Turn ON only the first RU. Leave the second and third RUs
OFF.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Click . Installing the RU-AP

Install the RU-AP on the first RU as directed below:
The system beings to check for the connection to the RU.
Main menu window
4. Verify the network connection to the RU.
The connection is normal if the following message appears four times:
Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
REFERENCE
The time<10ms and TTL=128 portions of the above message
vary with the network status. Even when their values vary, the
connection is normal as far as the message appears four times.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify the network connection. If you install the RU-AP
without completing the proper network verification procedure, an
error occurs when the RU restarts.
REFERENCE
If the connection to the RU cannot be verified, check whether the 00000502.EPS
following causes exist: 1. In the main menu window, click [INSTALL].

Cable connection Check again. The [Insert the CD-ROM into a drive] window opens.
RU or CL network board Restart.
2. Since the CD containing the RU-AP is already inserted into
Other
the CD-ROM drive, just click .
If you still cannot verify the connection, initialize the RU memory so
as to return the IP address recorded in the RU main unit to the The RU-AP version selection window opens.
default value, and reestablish the network connection.
3. Select an RU-AP version (A05 or later) from the list and then
For details on the procedure for initializing the memory
click .
to reestablish the network connection to the CL, see
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be
Performed upon RU Memory Initialization under
5. Click at the upper right corner of the command prompt

window.
List 00000190.EPS
The [READER UNIT SETTING] window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4. Perform the following setup steps: IV. Enter the subnet mask (255.255.0.0 in the above setup example).
u NOTE u V. If necessary, change the settings indicated in the table below:
The data set up as follows will be written on the RU-Config file and Configuration Setup
Default Remarks
then installed in the RU together with the RU-AP. Setup Item Range
For the procedure used when changing the setup data ROUTER IP IP address Route address
0.0.0.0
after installation, see Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config. ADDR setup range (Do not change the setup.)
SECURE
IP address IP address available for the
TELNET HOST 0.0.0.0
setup range TELNET.
I IP ADDR
SECURE
II TELNET IP address Range of the IP address
0.0.0.0
III NETWORK setup range available for the TELNET.
ADDR
IV EQUIPMENT Machine serial ID code of the RU.
AZ A
CODE (This code is printed on film.)
Specifies the erasure mode range.
V ERASE 1: Primary erasure can
ERASE 1
RANGE OF be selected.
ERASE 1, ERASE 1
ERASE MODE ERASE 1, ERASE 2:
ERASE 2
Both primary and secondary
erasures can be selected.
ERASE MODE 0 to 999
060 Erase mode timeout setting.
TIMEOUT (sec)
Setup needed if no barcode
IP ERASE TYPE reader is used.
5, 6
(FOR NO 6
6 5, 6 : Types V and VI mixed.
BARCODE)
6 : Type VI
ALARM cassette is inserted.
ON
(CASSETTE ON
VI OFF ON : Alarm sounds.
SET)
ALARM erasure processing is selected.
ON
(MODE ON
IN000063.EPS
SWITCH)
I. Enter the formal IP address of the first RU (172.16.1.1 in the OFF : Alarm does not sound.
above setup example). Selects X-ray over-exposure IP
II. Enter the IP address of the CL (172.16.1.21 in the above setup LOG & warning method.
example). Because the installation procedure hereafter can be WARNING OF MESSAGE LOG & LOG & MESSAGE: Warning by
simplified, enter 172.16.1.21 (changed IP address), instead of OVERXRAY LOG MESSAGE log and message.
172.16.1.20. NONE LOG : Warning by log.
III. Enter the same IP address as CL IP ADDR (172.16.1.21). NONE : No warning issued.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
VI. Select OFF. 4.7.4 Installing the RU-AP (for 2nd and 3rd units)
REFERENCE XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
The AUTO UPDATE function will automatically have the RU 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
download RU data from the FTP server if there is a discrepancy
between CL FTP server data and RU FLASH ROM data. For the second RU, install the RU-AP as directed below. For the third
See 5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE RU, perform the same installation procedure as for the second unit.
in MD: Machine Description.
1. Check to see that the first RU has been turned OFF and then
turn ON the second RU.
5. Click . Leave the third RU OFF.
RU-AP installation will start. (It completes within a few minutes.)
2. In the same manner as for the first RU, verify the network
connection to the second RU.
CAUTION
(Applicable only for RU-AP version A07 or later.)
The RU panel will be illuminated during the RU-AP installation
process. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the
reset switch at this time, otherwise the RU CPU board can be
damaged.
u NOTE u
* For the third RU, enter "RU3" in the RU NAME box.
Do not operate the CL-AP and RU-UTILITY while RU-AP
installation is being performed. 00000611.EPS
REFERENCE
The second RU is factory preset to the same IP address
6. . (172.16.1.10) as for the first RU. Use this IP address for verification
purposes.
7. Turn OFF the power to the first RU. 3. In the main menu window, click [INSTALL]. Install the RU-AP
on the second RU in the same manner as for the first RU.
CAUTION
(Applicable only for RU-AP version A07 or later.)
The RU panel will be illuminated during the RU-AP installation
process. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset
switch at this time, otherwise the RU CPU board can be damaged.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
REFERENCE 4.7.5 Changing the CL IP Address

In the [READER UNIT SETTING] window, perform setup for the second
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
RU as indicated below. (Enter data I through IV as shown below. Edit
data V as needed. For box VI, select OFF.) 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
READER UNIT SETTING window

Change the CL main units IP address from 172.16.1.20 to 172.16.1.21.
I For the change procedure, see Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP
Address.
II
III u NOTE u
When changing the IP address, pay due attention to the netmask
IV
settings. You might have to change the netmask size depending on the
IP address to be set up.
V
4.7.6 Setting Up IDT CONNECTION (patient
information sharing function)
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Set up IDT CONNECTION in the Service Utility mode.

u NOTE u
Be sure to set up IDT CONNECTION even if only one CL is connected
in the same system, otherwise images will not be transferred from the
RU to the CL, resulting thus in an error occurrence (error code: 31418).
VI
For the IDT CONNECTION setup procedure, see 3.13 Patient
Information Sharing Function Setup under MU: Maintenance
IN000075.EPS
Utility.
4. Install the RU-AP on the third RU in the same manner as for 4.7.7 Setting the Selector
the second RU.
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
5. Exit the RU M-Utility mode. 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
u NOTE u If the selector has been set to OFF with respect to the RU, perform
(Applicable only for RU-AP version A06 or earlier.) setup so as to permit cassette equipment use.
If the RU-AP version installed is A06 or earlier, be sure to start the CL-AP For the selector setup procedure, see 12. Setting the Selectors
to have the FTP server RU data de downloaded to the RU FLASH ROM. Selector Setting in MU: Maintenance Utility.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.7.8 Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or 4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files
More CLs
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Connection checkout
Perform patient information sharing setup for the second and Connection between CL and RU
subsequent CLs. Connection to other equipment units
For details on the patient information sharing setup procedure, Output image (by causing the printer to generate a film output)
see 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup in
MU: Maintenance Utility. Setup file backup
CL setup file
u NOTES u RU setup file (RU master IIP only)
Perform patient information sharing setup for the CL serving as the RU RU error log checkout and deletion (RU master IIP only)
master IIP (first CL) and the CLs not serving as the RU master IIP For details of each item, see 6. Checkout Procedures and
(second and subsequent CLs). If setup is not completed for both types 7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion
of CLs, images cannot be transferred from the RUs. under IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
In situations where two or more CLs are connected, the second and
subsequent CLs are entitled to receive images from the RUs simply u NOTE u
when you complete patient information sharing setup for them. If you intend to connect the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X in a later
procedure, do not back up the CL setup file at this stage. However,
Patient information sharing setup the RU setup file must be backed up at this stage.
Transfer to CL where
the associated
First CL ID is registered. Second CL
(RU master IIP) (not a RU master IIP)
TCP/IP Image
RU RU RU Installed
IN000080.EPS
Even when two or more of the installed CLs serve as RU master IIPs,
be sure that patient information sharing setup is completed with
respect to each other. The reason is that a certain such CL may
receive images from RUs that it does not manage.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X 4.8.1 Changing the CL IP Address

Connection XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
This section describes the CL setup procedures for image transfer from
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X to CL. The setup steps to be performed are
outlined below: When installing the CL at an IP address setting other than 172.16.1.20,
change the CLs IP address by performing the procedure specified
below:
See Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP Address.
4.8.2 Performing Setup with the Service Utility u NOTE u

When changing the IP address, pay attention to the netmask setting.
It may be necessary to change the netmask size depending on the IP
address to be set.
4.8.3 IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing
function) Setup

4.8.4 Selector Setup XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
4.8.5 Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or With the CL Service Utility, register the network information and
More CLs equipment information (CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) about the
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup Registering the network information

See 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in
4.8.7 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup MU: Maintenance Utility.

00000404.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Click and then . 6. Choose in the [Add Node] area and then click
The FRUP Setup window opens.
IN000071.EPS
IN000082.EPS
4. Click .
7. In the Attribute area, check as directed below ( ).
For CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/368 :
For CR-IR364/366/367/370/371/372 :
8. In the field, enter RU11.
REFERENCE
IN000042.EPS The above entry need not always be the same as the host name.
5. In the field, enter the host name of

9. Click .
the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
Network information registration is completed.
In the field, enter the IP address
(172.16.1.11). 10. If you connect more than one unit, repeat steps 3. through 9.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Registering the equipment information (CONNECTING u NOTE u

EQUIPMENT) Do not register a 5000 plus series equipment for the Connecting
Equipment.
1. In the Setup Configuration Item window, click
.
4. Click .
Equipment information registration is now completed.

The system returns you to the Setup Configuration Item window.
Saving the configuration information

1. From the Config (F) menu in the Setup Configuration
Item window, choose Save.
IN000083.EPS
2. Click .
The Connecting Equipment window opens.

IN000047.EPS
3. Register the equipment information as directed below: A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
II
III IN000048.EPS
2.
IN000072.EPS
Click .
I. Choose READER.
II. Select the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37Xs host name (e.g., RU11). The system saves the setup data.
III. If you connect two or more units of the CR-
IR356/357/359/36X/37X, select their host names from the
Equipment #2 and subsequent fields.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.8.3 IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing 4.8.4 Selector Setup

function) Setup
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
When connecting the CR-IR364/366/367/370/371 to the CL, register it
With the Service Utility, perform IDT CONNECTION setup. with the selector. When connecting the CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/368,
you do not have to perform a registration procedure because it has
been factory registered prior to shipment.
u NOTE u
Be sure to perform IDT CONNECTION setup even if the system 1. In the Service Utility window, click the Selector Setting
contains only one CL. If you do not perform IDT CONNECTION setup, button.
an error (error code: 31418) occurs because the RU does not transfer
images to the CL.
For the IDT CONNECTION setup procedure, see 3.13 Patient

Information Sharing Function Setup in MU: Maintenance Utility.
IN000049.EPS
The Selector Setting window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2. Perform selector setup as directed below: VII. To restore the initially selected status when the CL was started,
from the selector that is now being edited, turn the radio button ON.
I
3. If the CL does not process cassettes of cassette-type
equipment, such as XG-1 RU, CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/368,
II
or 5000 plus
(if you do not intend to perform the IP registration
procedure), complete the following steps:
III
1. Choose the Selector 1 tab.
2. Change the Technique Code to -1.
IV
V
4. Click .
The system returns you to the Service Utility window.

VI
5. If you connect another unit of the CR-IR364/366/367/370/371/
VII 372, repeat steps 2. through 4.
IN000050.EPS
6. Click the Exit Service Utility button.
I. Choose a Selector tab for which no equipment is registered.
For the Selector 1 tab, cassette-type equipment is registered by The Service Utility exists, returning you to the desktop screen.
default.
II. Set a Technique Code that is not the same as for the other
selectors.
III. Set the equipment to be added to the currently chosen selector
(by selecting a host name).
IV. Choose a Reader Type.
5501 Velocity Upright
5502 Velocity Table/Universal
To revert to Cassette, choose a blank from the pull-down
V. Enter a maximum of five one-byte characters in the selector button.
VI. This entry field appears when 5501 or 5502 is chosen as Reader
Type.
550x under SYSTEM CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION, choose
Yes if you wish that the exposure mode (Auto IP Shelter mode) be
notified automatically to the built-in type equipment (predetermined
to the selector) and No to manually notifying it of the exposure
mode.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.8.5 Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or 4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup

More CLs
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Perform patient information sharing setup for the second and Network setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X main unit
subsequent CLs. From the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X operation panel, set the following
For details on the patient information sharing setup procedure, items of information:
see 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup in RU IP Address : CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X main unit IP
MU: Maintenance Utility. address.
FTP-Serv. IP Address : FTP server IP address. The CLs IP address
u NOTES u should basically be set.
Perform patient information sharing setup for the CL serving as the RU Netmask Address : Netmask.
master IIP (first CL) and the CLs not serving as the RU master IIP Gateway IP Address : Gateways IP address. To be set as needed.
(second and subsequent CLs). If setup is not completed for both types
of CLs, images cannot be transferred from the RUs. For the setup procedure, see IN: Installation of the
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service Manuals, as required.
In situations where two or more CLs are connected, the second and
subsequent CLs are entitled to receive images from the RUs simply
when you complete patient information sharing setup for them.
Patient information sharing setup
Transfer to CL where
the associated
First CL ID is registered. Second CL
(RU master IIP) (not a RU master IIP)
TCP/IP Image
RU RU RU Installed
IN000080.EPS
Even when two or more of the installed CLs serve as RU master IIPs,
be sure that patient information sharing setup is completed with
respect to each other. The reason is that a certain such CL may
receive images from RUs that it does not manage.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Installing the RU PC-TOOL Setting up the RU PC-TOOL

Install the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37Xs RU PC-TOOL on the CL PC. With the RU PC-TOOL, perform the application installation and
configuration setup procedures for the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
NOTE
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows Vista, use the Windows Vista-
compliant RU application. When the OS used is Windows Vista, use the Windows Vista-
When the OS used is Windows 7, use the Windows 7-compliant RU compliant RU application.
application. When the OS used is Windows 7, use the Windows 7-compliant RU
application.
For the installation procedure, see IN: Installation of the
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service Manuals, as required. For the installation and configuration setup procedures, see
IN: Installation of the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service
REFERENCE Manuals, as required.
The RU PC-TOOL (shown below) is the utility software for

CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X maintenance. Use this software after
installing it on the CL PC.
RU-PC TOOL main menu
IN000123.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
Connection verification
Connection between the CL and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X
Output image (by causing the printer to generate a film output)
See IN: Installation of the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service
Manuals, as required.
Verify the connection to other equipment.
See OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
Setup file backup

See 7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File under 7. Setup File
Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion in
IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.

XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359
362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
To let the Image Reader (CR-IR356/357/359/364/366/367/370/371/372

only) automatically start upon CL startup, perform the Wake-on-LAN
setup procedure.
See FR8: Wake-on-LAN Setup.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-C: Installation Connection to 9000

Series Equipment
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-CI
IN-C: Installation Connection to 9000 Series Equipment
Control Sheet
11/12/2004 12 Revision for software V1.0(C) (FM4450) All pages
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-CII
1. CL Installation Conditions [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-C1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR348CL Service Manual IN-C2
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx IN-I
Control Sheet
07/20/2002 05 Revision for software version A08 (FM3428) I-IV, 3-1, 3-3, 4-2, 4-3, 7-1, 7-6
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) I-IV, 3-3, 3-4, 5-1, 5-6
03/01/2003 07 Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) I, II, 4-49, 5-4, 6, 7-6, 9-1
08/20/2003 08 Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) I, II, 3-1, 4-2
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) I, II, 1-1, 1-46, 4-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-6,
6-4, 7-6, 8-3
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) I, II, 1-4, 1-6, 2-1, 3-1, 4-2, 5-1,
5-68, 8-1, 9-1, 9-2
07/30/2004 11 Changes in pagination (FM4254) 2-24, 5-25
07/30/2005 14 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, II, 5-7, 9-2
07/20/2007 17 Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) I, II, 4-10, 5-1, 5-4
10/31/2008 19 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) I-IV, 1-1, 68, 5-4, 5, 10-18
11/30/2009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, II, 1-6, 812, 2-1, 3-1, 4-2, 5-1, 6,
7, 8-1, 9-14, 10-5, 7, 8, 10
11/30/2009 20 Changes in pagination (FM5622) 5-8, 10-6, 9
03/31/2010 21 Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) I, II, 1-1, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 2-1, 3-1, 3, 4,
4-13, 6, 10, 5-1, 2, 7-1, 68, 8-1, 2,
5, 7, 8, 10-1, 35, 7, 11-140
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) I, II, 1-811, 1316, 2-1, 3-1, 4-2,
5-1, 7, 8-1, 9-1, 2, 10-1, 48, 1012
11-1, 2, 47, 3442, 44, 4648
08/31/2011 23 Changes in pagination (FM5893) 1-12, 10-9, 11-833, 43, 45
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx IN-II
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx IN-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx IN-IV
Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel Driver
Appendix 1 Installing the Touch When using the CD-ROM (previous version)
The window shown below opens when the CD-ROM is inserted
Panel Driver into the PC.
Click .
This appendix shows the touch panel driver installation and adjustment
procedures to be performed when using a monitor with the touch panel.
When using an L362T monitor for the touch panel, see
Installing the driver (for L362T) and Adjusting the touch
panel (for L362T) to perform necessary procedures.
When using an L560T-C monitor for the touch panel, see IN000084.EPS
Installing the driver (for L560T-C) and Adjusting the touch
panel (for L560T-C) to perform necessary procedures. When using the CD-ROM (new version)
When you insert the CD-ROM into the PC, the following window
Installing the driver automatically opens. Click Install Driver for This Computer. When
the next window opens, click Install Serial Driver.
u NOTE u
Be sure to install the Windows 2000 driver.
1. Insert the driver media (FD or CD) into the PC.
2. Start up an installation file.

When using the FD
Start up as follows.
III. Specify the file name.
IN000095.EPS
The Elo MonitorMouse for Windows 2000 Setup window

opens in several seconds.
IV. Click here.

00000411.EPS
II. Click here.
I. Click here. 00000226.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual Appx IN1-1
The license agreement window opens. In about one minute, a window opens to indicate the completion of
installation.
00000412.EPS
4. Click .
The port selection window opens.
00000418.EPS
7. Click .
8. Remove the medium from the PCs drive.
00000413.EPS u NOTE u
If the employed medium is an FD, be sure to remove it from its
u NOTE u
drive. If it is left in the drive, the OS does not start up.
Select the same COM port number as that of the serial port
connected to the PC.
9. Click .
5. Click . The PC restarts and then automatically opens the touch panel
adjustment window.
seconds. u NOTE u
00000415.EPS
00000422.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Adjusting the touch panel 3. Gently touch the mark again with your finger.
u NOTE u The Check Video Alignment window opens.
problem.

00000316.EPS
4. Click .
u NOTE u
Click within a period of 30 seconds. Failure to click

00000321.EPS
within a 30-second period invalidates the previous
adjustments made.
1. With your finger, gently touch the mark at the upper left
area of the window. The Elo TouchSystems Setup window opens.
The mark moves to the lower right area of the window. 5. Deselect ( ) and then
(A beep will sound.)
click .
2. Touch the mark gently with your finger. The system returns to the desktop screen.
u NOTE u
The mark moves to the upper right area of the window.
If a window opens to prompt for FD insertion, click .
To set up other functions (e.g. for silencing the alarm sound) of

the touch panel, see the documentation for the touch panel driver.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Installing the driver (for L362T) 4. Click .

u NOTE u The 3M Software License Agreement window opens.
Be sure to install the Windows 2000/XP driver.
1. Insert the driver installation CD-ROM into the PC.

IN000303.EPS
5. Select and then click

.
A window opens to select a connector type.
IN000299.EPS
6. Select [Serial (Defa)] and click .

2. Click [Install Software].
IN000304.EPS
The Default Calibration Type window opens.
7.
IN000300.EPS
Select [2-point calibration (recommended for most touch)]
3. Click [TouchWare for Windows (95, 98, Me, NT 4, 2000, XP)]. and click .
IN000301.EPS
IN000305.EPS
The Welcome window opens.

The Serial Installation Type window opens.
IN000302.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
8. Select [Express Install (Default settings)] and click Adjusting the touch panel (for L362T)
.
1. Double-click .
The TouchWare Properties window opens.
IN000306.EPS
The Setup complete window opens.
2. Click .
IN000307.EPS
A window opens asking you to adjust the position to be touched

9. Uncheck ( ) and on the window.
click .
3. Keep touching the mark at the lower left corner of the
The Touch Screen Calibration Needed window opens.
window for a few seconds.
10. Click . At the completion of adjusting the touching position, the
mark will appear.
4. Keep touching the mark at the upper right corner of
the window for a few seconds.

At the completion of adjusting the touching position, the
mark will appear and the Calibration Complete
window displayed.
IN000308.EPS

5. Click .
11. Remove the driver installation CD-ROM from the CD-ROM
drive. The system returns to the TouchWare Properties window.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
6. Select the Touch Settings tab. Installing the driver (for L560T-C)
For Windows 2000/XP
The EIZO Touch Panel Disk Setup window opens.
IN000310.EPS
I.
IN000319.ai
2. Click Install Touch Ware on the window that opens.
II.
IN000311.EPS
I. Touch to set the Touch Mode to [Click on touch].

IN000320.ai
II. Touch to set the Touch Sound to [System beep on

The Welcome window opens.
touchdown].
8. Touch to shut down the TouchWare Properties

window. IN000321.ai
To set up other touch-panel-related functions, such as silencing 3. Click .

the click sound, see the manual supplied with the touch panel
driver. The 3M Software License Agreement window opens.
IN000322.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Select and then click . The Setup complete window opens.
A window opens to select a connector type.
5. Select USB and click .
IN000324.ai
7. Uncheck ( ) and click

.
The Touch Screen Calibration Needed window opens.
8. Click in the box.
IN000323.ai
A window opens to select an installation type.
6. Select [Express Install (Default settings)] and click

.
IN000325.ai
9. Remove the driver installation CD-ROM from the PC.

IN000328.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
For Windows Vista/7 3. Select the Drivers tab and then select the touch panel
driver in accordance with the usage environment.
DCL70424.ai
The Touch Panel Driver (Windows Vista) (Touch Panel Driver

(Windows 7) for Windows 7) window opens.
DCL70411.ai
2. Click Execute Launcher.exe.

DCL70414.ai
NOTE
If the AutoPlay window does not open automatically at step 1 4. Click Install.
above, double-click the execution file (Launcher.exe) in the CD. A confirmation window opens.
The EIZO Touch Panel Disk Setup window opens.
DCL70413.ai
DCL70425.ai
5. Click .
DCL70426.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
6. Click . 9. Select Custom and click .

The 3M Software License Agreement window opens.
7. Select Accept-Installation will continue. and click

.
DCL70430.ai
The Select Components window opens.

For Windows Vista
DCL70428.ai
I. On the window that opens, select Controller Support and
A window like that shown below opens. checkmark only EX II USB Touch Screen Support.
DCL70429.ai
8. Click .
INApp01001.ai
The Setup Type window opens.

NOTE
Move the scroll bar up and down to check to see that only EX II
USB Touch Screen Support is checkmarked.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows 7 11. Perform the following settings.

I. On the window that opens, select Controller Support and For Windows Vista
checkmark only EX USB Support.
I. Click .
The Start Copying Files window opens.
II. Make sure that only EX II USB Touch Screen Support is

displayed for the Controller Support option and then click [Next].
INApp01002.ai
NOTE
Move the scroll bar up and down to check to see that only EX USB
Support is checkmarked.
DCL70431.ai
After completion of the installation processing, the Setup

Complete window opens.
DCL70432.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
I. Click . The system returns to the Touch Panel Driver (Windows Vista)
The Select the type of driver to install window opens. (Touch Panel Driver (Windows 7) for Windows 7) window.
II. Select Legacy mouse uses older ~ and then click [Next]. 13. Click to close the window.
14. Click [Exit] to exit the EIZO Touch Panel Disk Setup
window.
15. Remove the driver installation CD-ROM from the PC.

INApp01003.ai
The Start Copying Files window opens.
III. Make sure the Current Setting window is displayed the same
as the following and then click [Next].
INApp01004.ai
After completion of the installation processing, the Setup

Complete window opens.
INApp01005.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Adjusting the touch panel (for L560T-C) 6. Keep touching the mark at the upper right corner of
For Windows 2000/XP the window for a few seconds.
At the completion of calibrating the touching position, the
1. Double-click . mark will appear and the Calibration Complete window displayed.
The TouchWare Properties window opens. 7. Click .
The system returns to the TouchWare Properties window.

IN000326.EPS
2. Click .
A window opens asking you to adjust the position to be touched IN000327.ai
on the window.
3. Touch the mark at the lower left corner of the
window.
I.
mark will appear.
4. Keep touching the mark at the lower left corner of

the window for a few seconds. II.
mark will appear. IN000316.EPS
5. Touch the mark at the upper right corner of the I. Select in the Touch Mode box.
window.
II. Select in the Touch Sound box.
mark will appear. 10. Touch to shut down the TouchWare Properties
window.
To set up other touch-panel-related functions, such as silencing
the click sound, see the manual supplied with the touch panel
driver.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For Windows Vista/7

6. Click .
NOTE
The system returns to the MT7 Software Control Panel window.
Check to see that a USB cable is used to make connection between the
PC and a touch panel, and then start working on the necessary task.
1. Double-click .
DCL70420.EPS
The MT7 Software Control Panel window opens.

DCL70419.ai
2. Click .
I.
A window opens asking you to adjust the position to be touched
on the window.
II.
3. Keep touching the mark at the lower left corner of the
window for a few seconds.
DCL70421.EPS
4. Keep touching the mark at the upper right corner of the I. Touch to set the Touch Mode to [Click on touch].
window for a few seconds. II. Touch some times the button that is in the Touch Sound field until
5. Keep touching the mark at the upper left corner of the the key is activated, so that the touch sound is
window for a few seconds. set to [System beep on touchdown].

At the completion of adjusting the touching position, the following
appears at the center of the window. 9. Touch to shut down the MT7 Software Control
Panel window.
To set up other touch-panel-related functions, such as
silencing the click sound, see the manual supplied with the
touch panel driver.
DCL70434.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config
Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config 1. Start the RU M-Utility as directed below:

u NOTES u
Verify that Explorer or other application is not running. If any
applications are running, exit them.
Before proceeding to perform the procedure set forth below, exit the
CL-AP.
RU M-Utility is used for RU-Config setup. However, the setup
procedure varies with the employed RU M-Utility version. When the
employed version is 1.2 or later (when RU M-Utility is installed from
IV. Click.
RU application CD version A07 or later), you only have to perform
steps 1. through 6.
However, if the employed RU M-Utility version is 1.1 or earlier (when
RU M-Utility is installed from RU application CD version A06 or
earlier), you have to perform all steps. II. Click.
When the OS used is Windows XP, the RU M-Utility must be of version
1.4 or later and the RU software, A09 or later.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the RU M-Utility must be of I. Click. 00000219.EPS
version 1.4 or later and the RU software, A13 or later.

When the OS used is Windows 7, the RU M-Utility must be of version Main menu window
1.4 or later and the RU software, A14 or later. (the display differs depending on the software version used.)

as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7.
00000215.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2. From the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name

of the RU whose configuration file is to be set.
RU host name
00000434.EPS
The text color of the EDIT CONFIGURATION button changes

from gray to black.
3. Click .
The READER UNIT SETTING window opens.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
4. See the table entitled RU configuration setting list and No.

Configuration Setup
Default Remarks
change the RU-Config settings. Setup Item Range
Subnet mask
IV NET MASK specification 255.255.0.0 Subnet mask
I range
ROUTER IP IP address Route address
II V 0.0.0.0
ADDR setup range (Do not change the setup.)
III SECURE
TELNET IP address IP address available for the
VI 0.0.0.0
IV HOST IP setup range TELNET
ADDR
V SECURE
TELNET IP address Range of the IP address
VII 0.0.0.0
VI NETWORK setup range available for the TELNET
ADDR
VII EQUIPMENT Machine serial ID code of the
VIII AZ A
CODE RU. (This code is printed on film.)
VIII Specifies the erasure mode range.
ERASE 1: Primary erasure can
IX RANGE OF ERASE 1
be selected.
IX ERASE ERASE 1, ERASE 1
ERASE 1, ERASE 2:
X MODE ERASE 2
Both primary and secondary
erasures can be selected.
XI
ERASE MODE 0 to 999
X 060 Erase mode timeout setting
TIMEOUT (sec)
XII
IP ERASE Setup needed if no barcode
XIII TYPE 5, 6 reader is used.
XI 6
(FOR NO 6 5, 6 : Types V and VI mixed.
XIV BARCODE) 6 : Type VI
XV ALARM
ON cassette is inserted.
XII (CASSETTE ON
SET)
IN000086.EPS OFF : Alarm does not sound
Table RU configuration setting list ALARM
ON erasure processing is selected.
Configuration Setup XIII (MODE ON
No. Default Remarks OFF ON : Alarm sounds.
Setup Item Range SWITCH)
IP address set up Selects X-ray over-exposure IP
IP address
I RU IP ADDR when the RU-AP IP address of the RU. LOG & warning method.
setup range
is installed. WARNING OF MESSAGE LOG & LOG & MESSAGE: Warning by
XIV
IP address set up OVER-XRAY LOG MESSAGE log and message.
IP address NONE LOG : Warning by log.
II CL IP ADDR when the RU-AP IP address of the HOST (CL).
setup range NONE : No warning issued.
is installed.
IP address that Have the RU automatically
is set up during AUTO download RU data from the FTP
FTP-SERV Subnet mask ON
III RU-AP FTP server IP address XV UPDATE ON server if there is a discrepancy
IP ADDR setup range OFF
installation will (A07 or later) between CL FTP server data
be the default. and RU FLASH ROM data.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CL
5. Click .
RU-Config installation will start.
CAUTION
(Applicable only for RU M-Utility version 1.2 or later.) A message appears to indicate that
the RU-Config is being updated.
Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset switch while 00000433.EPS
the RU panel is illuminated for the RU-Config installation process,
because the RUs CPU board can be damaged. The RU-Config update process ends.
6. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the window.

The system returns to the desktop screen. The RU system restarts, making the updated RU-Config settings
effective.
Perform steps hereinafter only when the RU M-Utility version used is 1.1 After several seconds, the Console Warning window opens.
or earlier.

Fuji Film, and then FCR.
8. Start the RU (by turning the power ON). 31117 or 31118 can eventually be displayed.
00000601.EPS
After a while, all the LEDs on the RU panel come on, and the CL
monitor shows a message to indicate that the RU-Config is being u NOTE u
updated.
Do nothing and wait for a while.
The Console Warning window will disappear.
CAUTION
Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset switch while The RU initialization message appears. The RU becomes
the RU panel is illuminated, because the RUs CPU board can be available in about one minute.
damaged.
RU
All the LEDs on the RU panel come on. 00000196.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Reader [Option]
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode 2. Performing Setup for IP

Reader [Option] Barcode Use
Just connecting the barcode reader to the PC will set up the driver
This appendix explains about the procedures for connecting and setting
automatically making thus it available.
up the barcode reader.
u NOTE u
1. Connecting the Barcode Because the driver is not set up automatically for Windows XP, Windows
Reader to the CL Vista or Windows 7, you have to do it manually.
For how to install the driver, see 4.6 Changing the Barcode
Connect a barcode reader to the USB port on the back of the PC. When Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software under
the PC is used placing it horizontally, connect the barcode reader to the MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
bottom port for back connection.
Cable
3. Setup for Type B ID Online
USB port Operations
Just connecting the barcode reader to the PC will set up the driver
CL Barcode reader automatically making thus it available.
00000037.EPS
u NOTES u
After the barcode reader has been connected to the CL, be sure to
restart the OS. Although a window opens immediately after reader
connection to indicate that driver software installation has been
completed, you cannot immediately use the reader because it is not
recognized by the CL-AP yet.
Because the CL system barcode reader sound needs to be produced
only when a barcode is read successfully, it has been designed so that
the PC itself produces a sound. For this reason, the sound produced
by the barcode reader, not only when a barcode is read successfully
but also when it is read unsuccessfully, is disabled for machines when
they are shipped from factory. When it is necessary that the barcode
reader produces a sound for some reason, make the setup accordingly
by reading the barcode described in the section below.
The barcode reader driver is then automatically set to make the

barcode reader operative.
010-054-23E
06.30.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN3-3
<Silencing the buzzer> <Sounding the buzzer>

Setup started Setup started
Sounding the Sounding the
buzzer three times buzzer three times
All default settings (*) All default settings (*)
U.S. English (101 series) U.S. English (101 series)
Transferring a/b/c/d
Transferring a/b/c/d
Transfer permitted
Transfer permitted
4. DENSO Barcode Reader
Continuous reading mode

Continuous reading mode
Setup completed
Buzzer disabled
Setup completed Sounding the
buzzer three times
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Sounding the
010-054-21E
buzzer three times
5. OPTOELECTRONICS Barcode Reader
<Silencing the buzzer>

<Sounding the buzzer>
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic 1. Installing the Wall-Mounting

Card [Option] Bracket
When installing the wall-mounting bracket for use with the reader,
u NOTE u perform the following steps.
When using a JIS type reader, use a JIS type magnetic card.
When using an ISO type reader, use an ISO type magnetic card. IMPORTANT
When installing the wall-mounting bracket, ensure that the concrete
The magnetic card reader (hereinafter abbreviated as the reader) strength of the wall is not less than 210 kgf/cm2. If the concrete strength
connection and setup procedures are described herein. is inadequate, the required amount of mounting strength will not be
Two types of readers can be connected to the CL: JIS type and ISO obtained. Be sure to check the concrete strength in advance.
type. The choice between these two types depends on the users
operating environment.
JIS type ISO type
1. Determine the mounting position of the wall-mounting
bracket. Mark the center of each of the two wall-mounting
Direction bracket mounting holes for anchor nut installation.
of magnetic
card insertion u NOTE u
Be sure that the employed anchor nuts conform to the wall
Lamp Lamp conditions (use the supplied anchor nuts).
(left-hand side) (right-hand side)
Reading surface 42mm
Reading surface
Wall-mounting
00000029.EPS
bracket
Anchor nut holes

162mm
00000225.EPS
2. Drill holes (7.5 mm in diameter and 25 mm in depth) at the

marked positions and drive two anchor nuts into the holes.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Install the wall-mounting bracket as directed below:

2. Connecting the CL to the Reader
I. With two screws, attach the wall-mounting bracket to the bottom
surface of the reader. Connect the reader to the USB port on the back of the PC.
II. With the anchor nuts and their screws, fasten the wall-mounting
bracket to the wall. 1. Use the cable supplied with the reader to connect the USB
port that is on the back of the CL to the reader. When the PC
is used placing it horizontally, connect the reader to the top
port for back connection.
Wall-mounting bracket
Reader Dedicated cable
Ferrite core supplied with the
reader
USB port
I. Two screws II. Secure with
anchor nuts and
anchor nut screws. CL
Reader
00000030.EPS
The reader driver will be set up automatically, becoming thus

ready for use.
u NOTES u
After the reader has been connected to the CL, be sure to restart
00000031.EPS
Wall
the OS. Although a window opens immediately after reader
connection to indicate that driver software installation has been
completed, you cannot immediately use the reader because it is
not recognized by the CL-AP yet.
Because the driver is not set up automatically for Windows XP,
Windows Vista or Windows 7, you have to do it manually.
For how to install the driver, see 4.6 Changing the
Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver
Software under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Setting the Reader and For detailed format descriptions, see 5. ID Card Data Format
[Reference].
Magnetic Card REFERENCE
Perform the following procedures to set the reader type and magnetic Even if Yes is set for , a magnetic card in
card type.
Fuji format can be used (recognized by the system code).
Setting the reader type

1. Start the Service Utility mode of the CL. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
For details on the startup procedure, see 1. Starting/Exiting saved.
the Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
3. Click .
2. Click in the Service Utility window.
3. Click the sign within . The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window.
4. Click .
5. Click .
The IDT functionality and magnetic card setup items appear in the
right-hand area of the window.
5. With , set the reader type.

When using a hospital card (in a hospitals unique format)
Setting the magnetic card type 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, change the
When using a magnetic card reader in Fuji format setting to Yes.
1. From , select a magnetic card type. 2. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
ISO magnetic card JIS magnetic card A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
0: FUJI [default] 0: FUJI [default]
6: FJ51 1: FJ01
2: FJ02
3. Click .
3: FJ03 The system saves the setup data.
4: FJ04
5: FJ05 4. From the Config (F) menu, choose Close.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
REFERENCE
5. Click .
This setting is to cope with the problem of cancellation of significant
The Magnetic Card Format window opens. digits occurring when reading a hospital card, which causes the
relevant patient information to be different from the original.
This setting checks the Data Length and Header String of a
hospital card, causing thus an error to be indicated in the event of a
problem of cancellation of signification digits, which consequently
prevents a data mis-reading error to occur. Note that when both the
Data Length and Header String boxes are blank, this setting will
not be performed.
7. To add a new item, click .
REFERENCE
When changing an item setting, select an item and then click
To delete an existing setup item, select it and then click
The Data Type window opens.
00000431.EPS
6. Determine Data Length, Header String and Header

Offset values in accordance with the magnetic card data
format adopted at the hospital.
For data format details, see 5. ID Card Data Format
[Reference].
Data Length : The length of the overall data registered on the
magnetic card.
Header String : The header character string of the data.
Header Offset : The header character string start position.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
8. In accordance with the magnetic card data format used in III. Enter the Card Offset, Data Length , and Destination (storage
the hospital, set Data Type, Format, Card Offset, Data offset) settings.
Length, and Destination.
Card Offset
Specify the data start position on the card.
Setup must be performed with the position next to STX (the
I character F when the FUJI card is used) regarded as 0.
Do not select the SI/SO or Kanji IN/OUT code portion as the
start position.
II
Data Length
Enter the number of characters existing before the card offset
position to specify the length of the data to be read.
Ensure that the data length does not include the SI/SO or Kanji
IN/OUT code portion.
III For kanji data, use an even number to specify the data length.
u NOTE u
Be sure that the patient ID number, examination number, and
accession number data lengths do not exceed the effective number
of digits specified for the SYSTEM CONFIG CSL/IDT
00000432.EPS FUNCTION examination number character string length, patient
For detailed data format descriptions, see Section 5. ID Card ID character string length, and accession number character string
Data Format [Reference]. length. If such a limit is exceeded, an error occurs.
Also, note that the padding process is performed as defined by
I. Click the downward arrow mark to select a Data Type
CSL/IDT FUNCTION of SYSTEM CONFIG when the effective
setting. number of digits is not reached.
II. Click the downward arrow mark to select a Format setting.
u NOTE u REFFERENCE
The data length cannot be specified for the following data types.
Selectable only when Patient Sex, Patient Birth Date, or Year
or Month of Patient Birth Date is selected as a Data Type setting. Patient Birthday Date (Day)
Patient Birthday Date (Month)
Patient Birthday Date (Year)
Patient Birthday Date
Patient Sex
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Destination (storage offset)

Specify the location at which the read data is to be stored.
4. Hospital Card Data Format
If, for instance, a setting of 2 is entered, the third character and
Setup Example [Reference]
thereafter will be stored.
A setting of 0 should normally be used. This section explains about the setup procedure to be performed when
using the magnetic card reader to load the following JIS-format-defined
hospital card data into the CL.
9. Click . As a patient ID number (10-digit), a 5-digit number consisting of the
third to seventh digits is used.
The system returns to the Magnetic Card Format window.
If the entered settings are incorrect, an error message appears. Hospital card information and detailed format descriptions
If an error message appears, repeat steps 7-I and beyond.
Patient name (16-digit 1-byte code katakana)
The hospital card
10. To add any other item, repeat steps 6. through 8. Sex (1-digit) records the items of
Patient ID number (10-digit) information shown
Birth date (4-digit year/2-digit month/2-digit at left in descending
11. Click . day of the month) order.
Alphanumeric department name (10-digit)
The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window. Kanji name (7-digit 2-byte code kanji)
Detailed format description
12. Click . Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 29 30
S S
The system returns to the desktop screen. S O O
Content
Patient name Sex Patient ID number
T
(1-byte code katakana, 16-digit) (1-digit) (10-digit)
X S S
I I
Digit 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 47 48 49 50
Birth date
Content
Alphanumeric
Day of department name (10-digit)
Month
Year (4-digit) the month
(2-digit)
(2-digit)
(The symbol is a period.)
Digit 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
E E L
Content
S Undefined
S $ B Kanji name (14-digit) T R
I (2-digit)
C X C
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Setup procedure 4. With , clear all the current settings.

1. Start the CL service utility and then click [Magnetic Card Current settings
Setting] [Card Format].
The Magnetic Card Format window opens.
00000468.EPS
5. Click and perform Patient Name setup as
00000467.EPS
indicated in the window shown below:
2. Since the hospital card is JIS-formatted, verify that 0: JIS
is entered in the field.

If the entry is not 0: JIS, change it to the JIS format.
See 3. Setting the Reader and Magnetic Card.
3. Make sure that the Data Length and Header String

boxes are blank and 0 is set to the Header Offset box.
To check the card reading data, the Data Length is set to 70 in this
example.
00000469.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
u NOTES u
7. Click and perform Patient ID number setup
When performing patient name setup for 1-byte code katakana
(Japanese language version), choose Patient Name (SBCS). as indicated in the window shown below:
Choosing Patient Name (SBCS) automatically adds the SI/SO
code to both ends of data.
Since the code next to STX is regarded as 0 for counting
purposes, enter 1 in the Card Offset field.
6. Click and perform Sex setup as indicated in

the window shown below:
00000271.EPS
00000470.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
u NOTE u 8. Set the remaining items in accordance with the following

Since the third to seventh digits of a hospital card patient ID table:
number are to be loaded, pay due attention to the Card Offset, Card Data
Data Length, and Destination settings. Date Type Format Destination
Offset Length
Birth date/ Patient Birthday
Card Offset 2000 29 4 0*
year (4) Date (Year)
Since the patient ID number data begins with the 21st digit and
does not use the two highest digits, enter 21. Birth date/ Patient Birthday
10 34 2 5*
month (2) Date (Month)
Data Length Birth date/
Since five digits are to be used, enter 5. Patient Birthday
day of the 37 2* 8*
Date (Date)
month (2)
Destination
Since data loading begins with the third digit of the patient ID Alphanumeric
Requesting
area, enter 2. department 39 10 0
Service (SBCS)
name (10)
Card 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Kanji name Patient Name
Offset 53 14 0
(14) (SBCS)
Digit 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Settings marked * cannot be changed.
Sex 1 1 5 2 4 4 9 3 5 1 Birth The resultant settings are shown below:
Content
date/
(1- year
digit) Patient ID number (10-digit) (4-digit)
Not used Data to be Not used

loaded into CL FT100309.EPS
00000607.EPS
9. In the Magnetic Card Format window, click .
You are then returned to the IIP Service Utility window.

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
5. ID Card Data Format [Reference] Extended Format (FJ01)

To use Kanji characters for the patient name, use the Extended Format.
Its system code is FJ01.
Two types of data formats are available for the ID card: JIS-II type and
JIS-I type (ISO). The system codes are defined as follows depending on Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24 25 26 27
how the area of Extended Specification is used.
JIS-II type : FUJI, FJ01, FJ02, FJ03, FJ04, FJ05 S S
S O O
JIS-I type (ISO) : FUJI, FJ51 Content T
System code
(FJ01)

Patient name
(20 digits)

X S S
I I
JIS-II Type
Fuji Standard Format (FUJI)
Digit 28 29 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
It is FUJIFILMs standard format, whose system code is FUJI. Since
undefined regions cannot be used, they must be filled with space (20H). Birth date
Note that kanji characters cannot be used for patient names. Number
Sex
Content Male/Female
(10 digits)
Year Month Day (M) (F)
Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24 25 26 27
S S ( denotes a period.)
S O O
System code Patient name
Content T
(FUJI) (20 digits) Digit 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 69 70 71 72
X S S
I I
E E L
Distribution code S Name in Kanji
Content S $ B T R
(4 lower digits) I (14 digits)
C X C
Digit 28 29 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Birth date
Sex
Number
Content Male/Female
(10 digits)
( denotes a period.)
Digit 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 69 70 71 72
E L
Undefined (22 digits)
Content T R
(space: 20H)
X C
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Extended Format (FJ02) Extended Format (FJ03)

To use the department name in alphanumeric characters and distribution To use the test number and alphanumeric department name, use the
code, use the Extended Format. Its system code is FJ02. Extended Format. Its system code is FJ03.
Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24 25 26 27 Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24 25 26 27
S S S S
S O O S O O
System code Patient name System code Patient name
Content T Content T
(FJ02) (20 digits) (FJ03) (20 digits)
X S S X S S
I I I I
Digit 28 29 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Digit 28 29 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Birth date Birth date

Sex Sex
Number Number
Content Male/Female Content Male/Female
(10 digits) (10 digits)
Year Month Day (M) (F) Year Month Day (M) (F)
( denotes a period.) ( denotes a period.)
Digit 49 50 55 56 57 58 63 64 65 69 70 71 72 Digit 49 50 55 56 57 58 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
Alphanumeric L
E L E
department Distribution code Undefined Alphanumeric department Undefined R
Content T R Content Examination number (10 digits) T
name (8 digits) (6 digits) name (8 digits) (4 digits) C
X C X
(8 digits)
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Extended Format (FJ04) Extended Format (FJ05)

To use the department name in alphanumeric characters and distribution To use the test number and alphanumeric department name, use the
code, use the Extended Format. Its system code is FJ04. Extended Format. Its system code is FJ05.
Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24 25 26 27 Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24 25 26 27
S S S S
S O O S O O
System code Patient name System code Patient name
Content T Content T
(FJ04) (20 digits) (FJ05) (20 digits)
X S S X S S
I I I I
Digit 28 29 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Digit 28 29 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Birth date Birth date

Sex Sex
Number Number
Content Male/Female Content Male/Female
(10 digits) (10 digits)
Year Month Day (M) (F) Year Month Day (M) (F)
( denotes a period.) ( denotes a period.)
Digit 49 50 55 56 57 58 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Digit 50 51 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 69 70 71 72
S
E L O E E L
Distribution code Examination number Undefined Alphanumeric department Department name in Kanji
Content T R Content S $ B B T R
(8 digits) (10 digits) (4 digits) name (8 digits) (8 digits)
X C S C X C
I
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
JIS-I Type (ISO) Extended Format (FJ51)

In the ISO specification format, to use the alphanumeric department
Fuji Standard (ISO) Format name, distribution code, test number, use the Extended Format. Its
A standard-specification card that is not particularly specified should system code is FJ51.
comply with this format. This format is supported by all FCR systems.
Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 25 26 27 28
Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 25 26 27 28
Space
Space
System code Patient name
S Content T
(FJ51) (20 digits)
Space
Space
System code Patient name X
Content T F
(FUJI) (20 digits)
X
Digit 29 30 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Digit 28 29 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Birth date
Birth date Sex
Number
Sex Content Male/Female
Number (10 digits)
Content Male/Female Year Month Day (M) (F)
(10 digits)
Digit 50 51 56 57 58 59 64 65 66 67 74 75 76 77 78 79
Digit 50 51 52 76 77 78 79
Alphanumeric department E L
Distribution code Examination number Space
E L Content name T R
Undefined (8 digits) (10 digits) (2 digits)
Content T R (8 digits) X C
(28 digits)
X C
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Data Definition Patient Name

For JIS
u NOTES u This indicates a patient name by not greater than 20 Roman
characters or Katakana graphic characters, excluding @ and *.
Exercise care not to confuse the JIS and ISO cards, since they To switch between alphabet and Katakana modes, use SI/SO code.
contain different character codes.
Any SI/SO code of not greater than 20 characters of the patient name
Undefined regions in the recorded information must be filled with is substituted by space code (20H) and handled as part of the
space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H) if: 20-character patient name.
Some of the information to be recorded into the ID card cannot be
entered; and For ISO
The number of characters actually entered is smaller than the This indicates a patient name by not greater than 20 Roman
number of characters specified in this specification. characters or Roman special characters, excluding @ and *.
For Roman special characters, set MAG CARD of the IDT
STX: Start Code management information to 1, and set Roman special character
This code indicates the start of text that has been written. codes and characters used in Setting Character Code for Reading
ISO Card.
System Code: Identification Code
Number: Patient Number
Four-character code that identifies whether the ID card is for FCR use
or not. This indicates a patient number for identifying the patient by graphic
characters in alphabetic mode, excluding @ and *.
Identification code Format type If the patient number falls short of ten digits, enter characters from the
FUJI Standard format right-most location, and fill the rest with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO:
00H).
FU** (*: numeral) Extension format
Other Hospital individual format 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
1 2 3 4 5
SI/SO: Extended Code
u NOTE u Space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H)
This code exists only in JIS.
SI and SO are used in pair as a special character to extend graphic

characters.
From SI to next SO: Graphic characters for alphabets
From SO to next SI: Graphic characters for Katakana
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Birth Date: Patient Birth Date

This indicates the patients birth date in the dominical year.
Year : Four digits from 0 to 9.
Month : Two digits from 0 to 9.
Day : Two digits from 0 to 9.
If the number of digits for the birth date falls short of its effective number
of digits, enter numbers from the right-most location, and fill the rest
with zero (JIS: 30H/ISO: 10H).
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 9 9 3 0 3 3 1
Fill 0.
Year Month Day
u NOTE u
in the 42nd and 45th digits denotes a period (JIS:2EH/ISO:0EH).
Sex: Patient Sex

The sex of a patient is denoted by one alphabetic character.
Male : M
Female : F
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Distribution Code (8 digits)

The distribution code is used to set a destination of image data transfer.
If the distribution code falls short of eight digits, enter characters from
the right-most location, and fill the rest with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO:
00H).
Correspondence between the transfer destination and distribution code
value may be set arbitrarily by the user.
When this code is not used, fill it with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H).
1 2 3 4 5
Space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H)
Examination Number (10 digits)

The examination number represents the data transferred mainly from
the hospital information system to identify the distinction between
examinations conducted. If the examination number falls short of ten
digits, enter characters from the right-most location, and fill the rest with
space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H).
This code is not used for control purposes.
When this code is not used, fill it with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H).
1 2 0 4 5
Space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H)
ETX: End Code

This code indicates the end of text.
LRC: LRC Code

LRC denotes a horizontal redundancy code for a horizontal parity check
bit of information characters recorded.
Horizontal parity check is performed from the start code to the end
code.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appendix 5 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses
Appendix 5 Procedures for 2. Changing the Software Settings

Changing the CL and Change the IP addresses for the CL and RU as summarized herein:
RU IP Addresses RU IP address : 172.16.1.10 200.150.100.50
CL IP address : 172.16.1.20 200.150.100.10
This appendix explains about the procedures for changing the CL and To perform necessary procedures, observe the workflow below:
RU IP addresses.
The IP addresses need to be changed in the following cases:
Changing the RU-Config
Case 1: When changing the CL/RU network configuration from the
stand-alone type to the network type
Case 2: When the CL and RU IP addresses need to be changed for Changing a setting from the CLs Service Utility
hospital network management purposes
Changing the CL-PC IP address
u NOTE u
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same Verifying the connection after IP address
as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7. changes
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7, follow the Changing the IDT CONNECTING configuration
1. Incorporating into the Network

In compliance with the hospital network specifications, connect the CL
and RU network cables to the hospitals network.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Changing the RU-Config 2. Start the RU M-Utility as directed below:

u NOTE u
u NOTES u
AP such as the Explorer should have not been started. If already
Before proceeding to perform the procedure set forth below, exit the started, shut it down.
CL-AP.
RU M-Utility is used for RU-Config setup. However, the setup
procedure varies with the employed RU M-Utility version. When the III. Specify the file.
employed version is 1.2 or later (when RU M-Utility is installed from
RU application CD version A07 or later), you only have to perform
steps 1. through 7.
However, if the employed RU M-Utility version is 1.1 or earlier (when
RU M-Utility is installed from RU application CD version A06 or
earlier), you have to perform all steps.
1. Turn ON the RU power.

IV. Click.
II. Click.

ON
00000210.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. From the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name

of the RU whose configuration file is to be set. 6. Click .
RU host name RU-Config installation will start.

CAUTION
(Applicable only for RU M-Utility version 1.2 or later.)
Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset switch while
the RU panel is illuminated for the RU-Config installation process,
because the RUs CPU board can be damaged.
00000434.EPS 7. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the window.
The text color of the EDIT CONFIGURATION button changes The system returns to the desktop screen.
from gray to black.
Perform steps hereinafter (up to step 12.) only when the RU M-Utility
4. Click . version used is 1.1 or earlier.
The READER UNIT SETTING window opens. 8. From the menu, sequentially choose Programs,
I CAUTION
Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset switch while
II the RU panel is illuminated, because the RUs CPU board can be
damaged.
III
The RU-Config file in the RU FLASH ROM will be updated.
IV
(The RU LED lights and a beep sounds.)
00000429.EPS
The CL monitor displays a message indicating that the RU-Config
file is being updated.
I. Enter a new RU IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.50).
II. Enter a new CL IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.10).
III. Enter the FTP server IP address that is the same as that for the
CL (e.g., 200.150.100.10).
IV. Enter a net mask. A message appears to indicate that
the RU-Config file is being updated.
00000270.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)

Changing a setting from the CLs Service Utility
The error window opens in a few seconds. 1. Click and then sequentially choose Programs,
Fuji Film, and FCR.
The CL-AP starts up.
2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,

the window.
31117 or 31118 can eventually be displayed.
00000601.EPS Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
10. Click .
11. Click (or ). MU000031.EPS

A menu opens.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3. Enter fieldengineer and click . 6. Click the sign within and then
select .
The Service Utility starts. The IIP Service Utility window opens. The HostName window opens in the right-hand area of the
window.
REFERENCE
If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 7. Enter a new RU IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.50) in the
field.
1. To exit the AP, hold down the <Shift> key and choose Shut
Down on the (or ) menu.

8. Click
2. From the Start menu, sequentially choose Programs,
FUJIFILM, and FCR. 9. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
4. Click [Setup Configuration Item]. 10. Click .


00000159.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Changing the CL-PC IP address 4. Click .

For Windows 2000/XP The Local Area Connection Properties window opens.
1. Make settings as follows.
For Windows 2000 5. Choose and then click
.
Double-click
on the desktop.
6. Choose .
Double-click
. 7. Perform the following setup steps:
I
For Windows XP
Select
from the menu. II 00000430.EPS
I. Enter a new CL IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.10).

II. Enter a subnet mask.
8. Click .
2. Double-click .
window.
The Network and Dial-up connection window opens.
9. Click .
3. Double-click .
REFERENCE
When a window appears prompting you to restart the system, click
The Local Area Connection window opens. [Yes].
Once the OS has started, the CL-AP will start up automatically.
REFERENCE
On Windows 2000/XP, the Local Area Connection icon may not
appear on the display if your PC is not connected to other
equipment (RU) with a network cable.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For Windows Vista/7 6. Choose .

The Control Panel (All Control Panel Items for Windows 7) I
window opens.
2. Double-click (click for Windows 7) . II 00000430.ai

The Network and Sharing Center window opens. II. Enter a subnet mask.
3. Click [View status] ([Local Area Connection] for Windows 7). 8. Click .
window.
9. Click .
10. Click .
AWS80302.ai
11. Close the Network and Sharing Centerwindow.
REFERENCE
4. Click . When a window appears prompting you to restart the system, click
[Yes].
The Local Area Connection Properties window opens. Once the OS has started, the CL-AP will start up automatically.

.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Verifying the connection after IP address changes 2. From the CL user window (Registration), set patient data
1. Click and exposure menu, and then click .

and then sequentially choose Programs,
Fuji Film, and FCR. Both the CL-AP window lamp and the RU panels cassette
The CL-AP starts up in about one minute. insertion lamp go on.
The RU initialization message appears on the CL monitor. The RU

becomes available in about two minutes.
3. Set the cassette in the RUs cassette setting unit and make
sure that images are transferred to the CL.
Version A software
REFERENCE
Be sure not to incorrectly enter an IP address for NETWORK
CONFIG ALL OTHER NODES ru0 settings, otherwise an
image transfer error will be indicated.
4. Click at the upper right corner of the window.
IN000025.EPS
5. Click (or ).
Version B software A menu opens.
Changing the IDT CONNECTING configuration

IN000128.EPS
Change the CL IP address that is set up in the IDT CONNECTING
REFERENCE configuration.
If the RU initialization message does not appear on the CLs See 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup under
monitor, restart both the CL and RU. MU: Maintenance Utility.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor Rack [Option]
Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor 3. Put the monitor face down as shown. Remove the mounting
screws from rack A.
Rack [Option] u NOTE u
Check for foreign matter beneath the monitor surface. Observe this
Use the following procedure when replacing the rack for the touch-
precaution to avoid damaging the monitor.
panel-attached 15" monitor with the optional rack.
Note that the procedure for rack replacement differs depending on the
monitor type (model).
4. Disconnect the connector cable from the PC board.
For TPS9415TD15 u NOTE u
Remove rack A while exercising care not to pull on the connector
1. Position the monitor as shown below. Remove cover 1 from cable. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage to the
rack A. PC board.
2. Remove cover 2.
5. Remove rack A.
(3) Four double-sems screws [Remove]
Monitor (5) Rack A [Remove]
(2) Cover 2 [Remove] Monitor
(4) Connector cable

[Disconnect from PC board]
Rack A
CAUTION
(1) Cover 1 [Remove] Do not pull on the
00000017.EPS
connector cable.
00000018.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
6. Attach rack B to the monitor. For TPS9416TD15

Four screws that have been (6) Rack B [Attach] 1. Position the monitor as shown below and remove cover 1.
attached to rack A.
u NOTE u
Putting a screwdriver in the clearance of cover 1 (position A) will
enable you to remove it easily.
Monitor
A
1. Cover 1 [Remove]
Monitor
00000019.EPS
IN000058.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2. Put the monitor face down as shown. Remove the mounting 5. Connect the power cable, serial cable and monitor cable to
screws from rack A. the monitor.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Check for foreign matter beneath the monitor surface. Observe this Be sure to connect the cables and then attach rack B.
6. Attach the spacer and rack B to the monitor (fasten the

3. Disconnect the connector cable from the PC board. spacer together with rack B).
u NOTE u Four BR screws
Remove rack A while exercising care not to pull on the connector (6) Rack B [Attach]
cable. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage to the
PC board.
4. Remove rack A.
(2) Four double-sems
screws [Remove]
(4) Rack A [Remove]
(6) Spacer
Monitor
(3) Connector cable

CAUTION
Do not pull on
the connector cable. Monitor
IN000059.EPS
IN000060.EPS
7. Connect the monitor cable and serial cable to the PC.

For details of cable connection, see the Service Manual that
comes with the monitor.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
For L350P-TS, L351P-TS, L362T (reference) 3. Put the monitor face down as shown below and attach rack B.
1. Remove the rack.
Rack B
[Attach]
Monitor
Monitor
Rack
[Remove]
IN000312.EPS
2. Connect the power cable, serial cable and monitor cable to

the monitor.
IN000313.EPS
u NOTE u
Be sure to connect cables properly before attaching rack B. 4. Connect the monitor cable and serial cable to the PC.
For details of used cables, see the manual supplied with the
monitor.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket [Option]
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall- Attaching anchor nuts

Mounting Bracket [Option] IMPORTANT
Ensure that the concrete strength of the wall on which the wall-mounting
The attachment procedure to be observed differs as follows depending bracket is to be mounted is not less than 210 kgf/cm2.
on the monitor type (model). If the concrete strength is inadequate, the required amount of mounting
strength will not be obtained. Be sure to check the concrete strength in
Attaching anchor nuts advance.
1. Determine the wall-mounting bracket attaching position.

Mark the center of each of the four wall-mounting bracket
Attaching the bracket attaching holes for anchor nut installation.
Attaching the bracket Attaching the bracket
(for L350P, L351P,
(for TPS9415TD15) (for TPS9416TD15)
L362T and L560T-C) u NOTE u
Be sure that the employed anchor nuts conform to the wall
conditions (use the supplied anchor nuts).
70mm 70mm
190mm
00000021.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Drill holes (7.5 mm in diameter and 25 mm in depth) at the Attaching the bracket (for TPS9415TD15)
marked positions and drive four anchor nuts into the holes.
1. Position the monitor as shown below. Remove cover 1 from
3. Loosely attach four screws (BR M420) to the anchor nuts. rack A.
4. Hook the wall-mounting bracket on the loosely retained 2. Remove cover 2.

screws and then tighten those screws.
(3) Screw
[Loosely attach]
(4) [Fully tighten]
(2) Anchor nut [Drive] (BR M420) Monitor
(2) Cover 2 [Remove]

7.5mm
0
25 + 2 mm
00000020.EPS
Rack A
(1) Cover 1 [Remove]
00000267.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
3. Put the monitor face down as shown. Remove the mounting 6. Attach the bracket to the bottom of the monitor.
screws from rack A.
u NOTE u
Check for foreign matter beneath the monitor surface. Observe this
precaution to avoid damaging the monitor. Monitor
4. Disconnect the connector cable from the PC board.

u NOTE u
Remove rack while exercising care not to pull on the connector
cable. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage to the Bracket [Attach]
PC board.
5. Remove the rack.

(3) Four double-sems screws [Remove]
(5) Rack [Remove]

00000022.EPS
Monitor
(4) Connector cable

[Remove from PC board]
CAUTION
Do not pull on the
connector cable.
00000268.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
7. Mount the monitor on the wall-mounting bracket. Attaching the bracket (for TPS9416TD15)
1. Position the monitor as shown below and remove cover 1.
u NOTE u
Monitor [Mount]
Putting a screwdriver in the clearance of cover 1 (position A) will
enable you to remove it easily.
Monitor
A
1. Cover 1 [Remove]
00000023.EPS
IN000058.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2. Put the monitor face down as shown. Remove the mounting 5. Connect the power cable, serial cable and monitor cable to
screws from rack A. the monitor.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Check for foreign matter beneath the monitor surface. Observe this Be sure to connect the cables and then attach rack B.
6. Attach the spacer and bracket to the monitor (fasten the

3. Disconnect the connector cable from the PC board. spacer together with the bracket).
u NOTE u
Remove rack A while exercising care not to pull on the connector
cable. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage to the
PC board. Monitor
4. Remove rack A.
(2) Four double-sems (6) Spacer
screws [Remove]
(4) Rack A [Remove]
(6) Bracket
[Attach]
Monitor
IN000090.EPS
(3) Connector cable

CAUTION
Do not pull on the
connector cable.
IN000091.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
7. Mount the monitor on the wall-mounting bracket. Attaching the bracket (for L350P, L351P, L362T and L560T-C)
1. Position the monitor as shown below and remove the rack.
(7) Monitor [Mount] Attach then the bracket to the monitor.
u NOTE u
Screw holes of the bracket to be used are different from monitor
Wall-mounting bracket size to monitor size.
Depending on the monitor size, properly select screw holes for the
used bracket.
Monitor
Bracket [Attach]
IN000089.EPS
Rack [Remove]
IN000111.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Mount the monitor on the wall-mounting bracket.
Monitor [Mount]
Wall-mounting
bracket
IN000112.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix 8 Changing the RU Host Name
Appendix 8 Changing the RU 1. When Version 1.1 or Earlier Is Used

Host Name The RU host name cannot be changed with a tool such as the RU M-
Utility. For this reason, change it accordingly by reinstalling the RU-AP.
RU M-Utility is used to change the RUs host name. However, the u NOTES u
change procedure varies with the employed RU M-Utility version. When
the employed version is 1.1 or earlier (when RU M-Utility is installed Before performing the procedures described herein, be sure to take

from RU application CD version A06 or earlier), perform the procedure note of all the registered RU configuration information, particularly IP
set forth under 1. When Version 1.1 or Earlier Is Used. When the address and sub-net mask, for the following reason.
employed RU M-Utility version is 1.2 or later, perform the procedure set When reinstalling the RU-AP, it is necessary to uninstall the RU-AP
forth under 2. When Version 1.2 or Later Is Used. that has been installed. While this processing is being performed, the
RU configuration data is deleted (only data stored in the FTP server is
The use of RU M-Utility version 1.2 or later makes it easier to effect a deleted).
host name change. It is therefore recommended that you upgrade RU
M-Utility if RU application CD version A07 or later is available. When the OS used is Windows XP, the RU M-Utility must be of version

NOTE When the OS used is Windows Vista, the RU M-Utility must be of

version 1.4 or later and the RU software, A13 or later.
as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7. When the OS used is Windows 7, the RU M-Utility must be of version

REFERENCE Change the host name according to the flow below.

To upgrade RU M-Utility, first uninstall it and then install its new version. Uninstalling the RU-AP
For the RU M-Utility uninstallation procedure, see
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs in RI: Reinstalling the Installing the RU-AP
Software. (changing the host name)
For the RU M-Utility installation procedure, see
5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility in IN-A: Installation Changing the CL Service
Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR 355RU/356/357. Utility settings
Uninstalling the RU-AP

See 3. RU-AP in Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under
u NOTE u
Note that, even if two or more RUs have been registered to the RU
M-Utility, just a single operation uninstalls all those RUs registered.
In such a case, all those RUs must be set up anew. Thus, you have to
surely jot down information on each of those RUs.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Installing the RU-AP (changing the host name) 5. Verify network connection to the RU.
If the following message appears four times, connection to
u NOTE u the RU has been established accordingly.
Make sure to exit all applications, particularly the Explorer or CL-AP. Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
REFERENCE
1. Insert into the PC the RU-CD supplied with the RU. Values time<10ms and TTL=128 appearing in the message
After a while, the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS window above can be different depending on the network status. Even if
opens. different values appear in it, network connection has been
established normally.
2. Click [START].
The RU M-Utility main menu appears. u NOTE u
Before proceeding to steps hereafter, make sure that there are no
problems with the network connection. An error will occur when
starting up the CL if you proceed to steps hereafter without
establishing network connection properly.
00000414.EPS
6. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the command

3. Enter the RU host name to be changed and the RU IP address.
prompt window.
I You are returned to the main menu.
7. Click [INSTALL] in the main menu.

II
The Insert the CD-ROM into a drive window opens.
8. Click .
00000426.EPS A window prompting you to select the RU-AP version opens.
I. Enter the RU host name (host name you wish to change).
II. Enter the RU IP address (IP address taken note of before starting
the procedure).
9. Select the RU-AP version from the list and click .
u NOTE u
The host name entered at step I. above will be taken as the RUs
correct host name. Be sure to enter the correct host name at this
step.
4. Click . List 00000190.EPS
Connection to the RU will then be verified. The READER UNIT SETTING window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10. Set up configuration information items that have been taken The CL-AP starts up in about one minute.
note of before starting the procedure. The RU-Config file in the RU FLASH ROM will be updated.
(The RU LED lights and a beep sounds.)
The CL monitor displays a message indicating that the RU-Config
file is being updated.
A message appears to indicate that

the RU-Config file is being updated.
00000270.EPS
IN000093.EPS
11. Click . 15. Click on the CL monitor.
The error window opens in a few seconds.

After the completion of RU-AP installation, Completed will appear
on the screen.
12. Click .
13. Click the mark at the upper right corner of the window. 31117 or 31118 can be displayed
depending on the case. 00000601.EPS
The system returns to the desktop window.

16. Click .
CAUTION
17. Click (or ).
Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset switch while A menu opens.
the RU panel is illuminated, because the RUs CPU board can be
damaged.
This completes to change the RU host name.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Changing the CL Service Utility settings

1. Start the Service Utility and then click [Setup Configuration
Item].
2. Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, click

the mark to the left of , and then
click the mark to the left of .
3. Choose (the RUs previously selected host name).
4. Change the entry in the upper right

corner of the window to a new RU host name (RU1).
5. Click .
6. From the tree in the left-hand area of the window, choose

, and then set the RU under
READER Function in the right-hand area of the window to
RU1 (new host name).
7. Click .

saved.
9. Click .
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2. When Version 1.2 or Later Is Used The RU M-Utility main menu opens.
Main menu window

u NOTES u
Verify that Explorer or other application is not running. If any
applications are running, exit them.
Before proceeding to perform the procedure set forth below, exit the
CL-AP.
Perform the steps in the following workflow:
Changing the RU host name
Changing the CL Service Utility settings
Changing the RU host name

1. Perform the following steps to start RU M-Utility. 00000612.EPS

2. In the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name of
the RU whose configuration file is to be set up.
RU host name
IV. Click.
00000613.EPS
The EDIT CONFIGURATION button text color changes from gray

to black.
3. Click .
II. Click.
A window opens to prompt for a host name change.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Enter a new host name in the "NEW RU NAME" field. Changing the CL Service Utility settings
1. Start the Service Utility and then click [Setup Configuration
Item].
00000614.EPS
2. Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, click
the mark to the left of , and then
click the mark to the left of .
5. Click .
3. Choose (the RUs previously selected host name).
The RU host name is then changed.
CAUTION 4. Change the entry in the upper right

The RU panel will be illuminated while the RU host name is being corner of the window to a new RU host name (RU1).
changed. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset
switch during such a change process because the RUs CPU board
can be damaged. 5. Click .
6. From the tree in the left-hand area of the window, choose

6. Click in the upper right corner of the window.
, and then set the RU under
READER Function in the right-hand area of the window to
RU1 (new host name).
7. Click .

saved.
9. Click .
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP Address
Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP

Address 3. Double-click .
To connect a multiple number of CLs within the same network, the CL The Local Area Connection window opens.
IP address must be changed from the default setup value (172.16.1.20)
to another. REFERENCE
In addition, the sub-net mask must also be changed from the default On Windows 2000/XP, the Local Area Connection icon may not
setup value (255.255.0.0) to another, for which the procedures appear on the display if your PC is not connected to other
described below should be followed. equipment (RU) with a network cable.
u NOTE u
as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7.
4. Click .
For Windows 2000/XP
1. Make settings as follows.
For Windows 2000 .

Double-click
on the desktop.
6. Select .
7. Change the IP address and sub-net mask.
Double-click
.
I
For Windows XP
Select
from the menu.
II IN000094.EPS

I. IP address
II. Sub-net mask
2. Double-click .
The Network and Dial-up connection window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Click . For Windows Vista/7

You are returned to the Local Area Connection Properties 1. Select Control Panel from the menu.
window.
window opens.
9. Click .
REFERENCE 2. Double-click (click for Windows 7) .

[Yes]. Once the OS has started, the CL-AP will start up The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
automatically.
3. Click [View status] ([Local Area Connection] for Windows 7).
10. Re-set the IDT CONNECTING configuration.
See 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup under
This completes to change the CL IP address and sub-net mask.
AWS80302.ai
4. Click .

.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
6. Choose .

I
II 00000430 ai

II. Enter a subnet mask.
8. Click .
The system returns to the Local Area Connection Properties
window.
9. Click .
10. Click .
11. Close the Network and Sharing Centerwindow.

REFERENCE
[Yes].
Once the OS has started, the CL-AP will start up automatically.
12. Perform resettings for the IDT CONNECTING function .

See 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup under
This completes the procedure necessary for changing the CL IP
address and subnet mask.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appendix 10 Connecting a High-resolution Monitor
Appendix 10 Connecting a High- 2. Installing a High-resolution

resolution Monitor Monitor Driver (When a
16001200 or 20481536
Described herein is the procedure used to connect a high-resolution
monitor to the PC and perform necessary window settings so that the Resolution Monitor is Used)
CL-AP is set up appropriately.
NOTE For the MATROX Millennium video board
When a 16001200 monitor is used for the CR console Plus with
Windows Vista or Windows 7, "1. Mounting a High-resolution Monitor Windows will start up. Within about one minute, the CL-AP will
Board (When a 16001200 or 20481536 Resolution Monitor is Used)" also start up displaying then the CL initial window.
and "2. Installing a High-resolution Monitor Driver (When a 16001200 2. Within three seconds after the CL initial window opens, click
or 20481536 Resolution Monitor is Used)" are not required. Proceed the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
to "3. Changing to a High-resolution Monitor (12801024, 16001200 or
20481536 monitor)". The password entry window opens.
3. Changing to a High-resolution Monitor (12801024, 16001200
or 20481536 monitor)
1. Mounting a High-resolution MU000035.EPS
Monitor Board (When a NOTE

16001200 or 20481536 or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility
Resolution Monitor is Used) mode starts without opening this window.

1. Following instructions set forth in the Operation Manual that
comes with the high-resolution monitor, mount a high- The Service Utility mode starts and then the Service Utility
resolution monitor board on the PC. window opens.
NOTE 4. Click Exit Service Utility at the lower right corner of the
Do not dismount the board assembled at shipment from factory. window.
The Service Utility exits and the Found New Hardware Wizard
For details on how to mount the board, see the relevant window opens.
Operation Manual.
2. Connect monitor cable (DVI cable) and power cable to the
high-resolution monitor.
3. Connect the power cable from the monitor to the power
supply.
DCL70411.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Click [Cancel]. 8. Select Disable from the menu that opens at the right-click
of Silicon Motion LynxEM+.
6. Right-click My Computer from the menu. Select
then [Manage] from the menu that opens.
DCL70414.EPS
DCL70415.EPS
DCL70412.EPS
9. Click .
7. Select Device Manager and double-click Display
adapters in the right pane that opens on the window.
DCL70416.EPS
10. Click .
NOTE
If no confirmation window opens disabling the PC to be restarted,
do it from the menu.
DCL70413.EPS
After the PC is restarted, Windows will start up. Within about one
minute, the CL-AP will also start up displaying then the CL initial
window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
11. Within three seconds after the CL initial window opens, click 14. Select No, not this time and click .
the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
The Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility DCL70417.EPS
15. Insert into the PC the driver media supplied with the
monitor.
16. Select Install from a list or specific location and click
The Service Utility mode starts and then the IIP Service Utility
window opens. .
13. Click Exit Service Utility at the lower right corner of the
window.
The Service Utility exits and the Found New Hardware Wizard
window opens.
DCL70430.EPS
A search and installation option window opens.
DCL70418.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
17. Select Search for the best driver in these locations and 21. Remove the driver media.
checkmark Search removable media ( ).
22. Click .
DCL70421.EPS
DCL70419.EPS
A driver selection window opens. The PC restarts.
19. Select a driver whose location is winxp and click .

For the VREngine/SMD5, FireGL V3600, FirePro V3800
video boards
For detals, see "4. Installing and Setting the Video Driver"
under "Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Monitor".
DCL70420.EPS
The Hardware Installation window opens.
20. Click .
Installation processing will start. After a while, a window opens to

indicate completion of installation processing.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Changing to a High-resolution
Monitor (12801024,
16001200 or 20481536 DCL70422.EPS
monitor) 3. Select the high-resolution monitor icon (3 in the display

sample below) and checkmark Extend my Windows
desktop onto this monitor ( ).
For Windows 2000/XP/Vista
For Windows 2000/XP

Right-click any position on the desktop and select
Properties from the menu that opens.
For Windows Vista

Choose Personalization from the right-click menu on
the desktop.
Click the Display Settings.
DCL70423.EPS
4. Checkmark Use this device as the primary monitor ( ).
DCL70424.EPS
MT000015.ai
2. Select the Settings tab.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Select the default monitor icon (1 in the display sample For Windows 7
below) and remove checkmark from Extend my Windows
desktop onto this monitor ( ). 1. Select Screen Resolution from the right-click menu on the
desktop.
DXL08240035.ai
2. Select "Extend these displays" for "Multiple displays", and

click .
DCL70425.EPS
6. Click .
The Monitor Settings window opens.
DCL70426.EPS
INApp10001.ai
The Display Setttins window opens.

7. Click .
NOTE
Click [Yes] quickly within 15 seconds, otherwise the system
returns to the previous window.
When a monitor with the touch panel is used, change the window
settings as appropriate, and perform touch panel calibration.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
NOTE
When a monitor with the touch panel is used, change the window
settings as appropriate, and perform touch panel calibration.
INApp10003.ai
The system returns to the Screen Resolution window.
NOTE
returns to the previous status.
4. Select the high resolution monitor for "Display", and

checkmark "Make this my main display".
INApp10002.ai
NOTE
When a main display has been already set, the message "This is
currently your main display." is displayed and the check box is not
displayed.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Reinstalling the Application and 4. If the Registry Editor includes any of the following keys,
delete it (delete all values included in the relevant key).
Performing Necessary Settings HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIP\PatientDB
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIP\ShowItem
1. Remove the CL-AP.
For details on how to remove the application, see 1. CL-AP
under Appendix A Uninstalling the APs in
2. Start up Explorer. If any of the following files or folders

exists, remove it.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config.bak\MWMConfig.mdb
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config.bak\MediaListDB.mdb
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\Bmp (Delete the entire folder.)
For Windows 2000/XP
Select Run from the menu.

Input regedit and click .
DCL70427.EPS
5. Install the CL-AP.

DCL70428.EPS For details on how to install the application, see 5.1 Installing
the CL-AP under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
For Windows Vista/7 6. Start up the Service Utility.

For details on how to start up the Service Utility, see
Press the button. 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility under
The start menu opens.
Enter regedit in and

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Click [LUT]. 10. On the window that opens, click the mark to the left of
.
11. Click .
Setup data of the CL system information is displayed in the pane
right of the window.
DCL70429.EPS
The Monitor List window opens.
8. Select a type of the monitor to be connected and click

.
00000248.EPS
12. Perform setting according to the

connected monitor,
SL-IC200 : 255
SL-IC300 : 207
13. From the Config menu, choose Save.
DCL804001.EPS
The Setup Configuration Item window opens. saved.
14. Click .
15. From the Config menu, choose Close.

00000091.EPS The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window.
16. Exit the Service Utility.

17. Restart the PC and check to see that the CL-AP starts up
properly.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Monitor
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Configuration example
Monitor 1st monitor

2nd monitor
Setting procedures are described to add a second monitor (hereinafter

called 2nd monitor) and display an image read by CL and its overlay
item on the 2nd monitor.
The existent monitor (hereinafter called 1st monitor) is used as a
regular exposure console.
NOTES OE240001.ai
The monitors listed below are supported as the 2nd monitors.

2M monitor (color) : RX211/RX220 Overall operation flow
2M monitor (monochrome) : GS220
3M monitor (color) : RX320 Connect the video board to the CL 1. Uninstalling the
3M monitor (monochrome) : GS310 and then connect 2nd monitor. Video Driver
It is not necessary to mount the video board when a 2M color/2M

monochrome monitor is to be used with the PC (the CR Console Plus
with Windows Vista or Windows 7) standardly equipped with the DVI Connect the video board. 2. Connecting the
connector. Video Board
Install the monitor. 3. Installing the

REFERENCE Monitor
Use PC's DVI connector when a 2M color/2M monochrome monitor is
to be used for the 2nd monitor with the PC (the CR Console Plus with Install the video driver and set the monitor. 4. Installing and
Windows Vista or Windows 7) standardly equipped with the DVI Setting the Video
connector. Driver
Prior to setup Procedure to be performed if necessary

CL requirements When changing the 2nd monitor.
CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. 5. Changing and Setting the 2nd Monitor
Software version required: V7.1 (B) or later
The PC memory is 2GB or more. (If not sufficient, expand it as
appropriate.)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1. Uninstalling the Video Driver 2. Select the currently used video driver and click
([Uninstall] when the OS used is Windows Vista/7).
If the installed video driver (PCs standard driver is excluded) is old,
uninstall it before performing necessary processing.
NOTE
Uninstallation of the video driver is not necessary when the PC is
provided with DVI connectors as the standard items and the 1st monitor
and the 2nd monitor use 0.7M or 1M and 2M (color/monochrome),
respectively.

For Windows XP
Select Control Panel Add or Remove Programs from the
OE240002.ai
menu.
Video driver uninstallation thus completes.
The Add or Remove Programs window opens.
For Windows Vista/7 3. Perform the following settings.
Select Control Panel Programs and Features from the
For Windows XP
menu.
Right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties from
The Programs and Features window opens. the menu that opens.
Click the Hard Ware tab.
Click [Device Manager].
For Windows Vista/7

Click and select [Device Manager].
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Right-click the display adapter to be uninstalled and select

Uninstall.
AWS823046.ai
5. Close the Device Manager window and the Control

Panel window.
6. Turn the PC power OFF.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Connecting the Video Board 3. Remove the video board already connected to the PC.
NOTES
The video board to be connected differs for each monitor and/or OS. Video board
Monitor OS
1st Monitor 2nd Monitor Windows Windows Windows
Resolution Resolution XP Vista 7
2M Color / VGA + DVI VGA + DVI
FireGL V3600
Monochrome port is used. port is used.
0.7/1M Color
3M Color /
FireGL V3600 FireGL V3600 FirePro V3800
Monochrome
2M Color /
FireGL V3600 FireGL V3600 FirePro V3800
2M Monochrome AWS827033.ai
Monochrome 3M Color /
Monochrome
FireGL V3600 FireGL V3600 FirePro V3800 4. Connect the FireGL V3600, VREngine/SMD5, or FirePro
3M Color / V3800 board to the card slot.
3M Color FireGL V3600 FireGL V3600 FirePro V3800
Monochrome
NOTE
3M 3M Color /
FireGL V3600 FireGL V3600 FirePro V3800 Connect the video board correctly as illustrated below. The board
Monochrome Monochrome
connection location differs depending on the video board type.
Connect the VREngine/SMD5 board on a PC where the PCI If the ATI FirePro V3800 is used for Dell Optiplex 780MT, replace
Express x16 slot is not provided. the bracket to the one that supports full-height.
Use the VGA + DVI port that is mounted on the PC as a standard
item, when the PC is provided with DVI connectors as the standard
items and the 1st monitor and the 2nd monitor use 0.7M or 1M and 2M
(color/monochrome), respectively. In this case, connection of video
board is unnecessary.
VGA + DVI port used under Windows Vista may disable adjustment
of the screen position to be saved appropriately. To have the screen
position be saved appropriately, use the FireGL V3600 board.
1. Disconnect the VGA cable or DVI cable from the 1st monitor.
2. Remove the PC cover. For VREngine/SMD5

For FireGL V3600
and FirePro V3800 AWS827034.ai
5. Release the card retention latch, and fasten the video board.
6. Reinstall the PC cover.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Installing the Monitor When the cable of the 1st monitor is the VGA cable or when the OS
is Windows XP and the video board "VREngine/SMD5" is to be used
Installing the LCD panel (2nd monitor) I. Connect the VGA cable to the VGA connector on the
motherboard.
1. Take the LCD panel (2nd monitor) out of its carton and VGA cable Connect to the VGA cable
install it in a place of use.
NOTES
Place the LCD panel on a level surface.
Place the LCD panel in landscape orientation. After installing the
monitor driver, place the monitor in portrait orientation if necessary
to do so.
Connecting the DVI cable and power cable 1st monitor Back of the PC OE240056.ai
NOTES
For V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1)
Use a rating-conformant power cable.
When installing this equipment under the patient environment, connect I. Connect the DVI cable to the left-side connector, viewing from
the power cable to an insulation transformer. the back of the PC.
See the connection diagram presented in 3.3 Installing the
Accessories and Optional Items under IN-B: Installation
Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/
362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372.
1. Connect the VGA cable (or the DVI cable) of 1st monitor and
the power cable. DVI cable
NOTES 1st monitor Back of the PC AWS823037.ai
Do not connect 2nd monitor at this step. For connecting method of the DVI cable and power cable, see
The connecter to be connected to differs depending on the cable the LCD panel operation manual.
type of the 1st monitor, version of the driver CD to be used, and
OS. Perform the operations for each case.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1) or

for V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0
I. Connect the DVI cable to the right-side connector, viewing from

the back of the PC.
DVI cable
1st monitor Back of the PC AWS823036.ai
For connecting method of the DVI cable and power cable, see
the LCD panel operation manual.
When the OS is Windows 7 and the video board "FirePro V3800" is

to be used
I. Connect the DVI cable to the right-side DVI connector, viewing

from the back of the PC.
Connect to the
DVI cable DVI Port
(right-side)
1st monitor Back of the PC

DXL08240001.ai
For connecting method of the DVI cable and power cable, see
the LCD panel operation manual.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Installing and Setting the 4.1 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for

Video Driver Windows XP
NOTE 4.1.1 Installing the video driver

Screen settings can not be performed properly if the monitor cable is
disconnected during the setting process. When connecting the monitor NOTE
cable, be sure to fasten it firmly with screws.
Make sure to use a Ver10.0.0N1 (as marked on the CD label) driver,
which is to be used under Windows XP, and do not use a Ver3.2.7N2
Procedures used for installation and setting of the monitor driver are driver that is for Windows Vista.
different depending on the OS and the type of connected video board.
Carefully check the OS and the type of connected video board to
perform correct procedure.
When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows XP Windows starts up.
See 4.1 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows XP. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows XP 2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper
See 4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows XP. left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows Vista
See 4.3 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows Vista.
When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows Vista

See 4.4 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows Vista.
When Using a FireGL V3800 for Windows 7 MU000031.EPS
See 4.5 When Using a FireGL V3800 for Windows 7.

NOTE
When No Video Boards Are Added When the following window is displayed, enter the login password
See 4.6 When No Video Boards Are Added.
MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility starts, and then the IIP Service Utility window
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Click [Exit Service Utility]. 8. Select 2 and then click .

4. Insert the driver installation CD for VREngine/SMD5 into

the PC.
The InstallShield Wizard window opens.
OE240006.ai
The Monitor selection window opens.

OE240003.ai

5. Click .
The window related to the License Agreement displays. I.
II.
OE240004.ai
6. Click . OE240007.ai
I. For 1st monitor, select the currently determined resolution.

The following window opens. II. For 2nd monitor, make proper selections from the table below, in
accordance with setup orientation, resolution and display color of
the monitor to be connected.
Setup orientation Resolution Display color Selection item

Color 2M Pixel Color Monitor (Landscape)
2M
OE240005.ai Monochrome 2M Pixel Grayscale Monitor (Landscape)
Landscape 3M Pixel Color Monitor
Color
(24bit Color, Landscape, ...)
7. Click . 3M
3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor
Monochrome
8/10bit(Landscape)
The Number of monitors window opens.
Color 2M Pixel Color Monitor (Portrait)
2M
Monochrome 2M Pixel Grayscale Monitor (Portrait)
Portrait 3M Pixel Color Monitor
Color
3M (24bit Color, Portrait, ...)
Monochrome 3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor 8/10bit (Portrait)
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

The Start Copying Files window opens. After completion of the installation processing, the InstallShield
Wizard Complete window opens.
OE240011.ai
OE240008.ai

11. Click . .
The Hardware Installation window opens.
16. Viewed from the back of the PC, connect the 1st monitor DVI
cable to the right-side connector and the 2nd monitor DVI
cable to the left-side connector.
NOTES
Leave the VGA cable remaining connected to the 1st monitor.
Depending on the PC model used (GX280, WS360 or WS370),
the mother board is mounted in right-and-left reversal, requiring
thus the video board be installed inversely top side down. When
the PC used is either of GX280, WS360 or WS370, connect the
1st monitor DVI cable to the left-side connector and the 2nd
OE240009.ai
monitor DVI cable to the right-side connector, when viewed from
the back of the PC.
12. Click . DVI cable
OE240010.ai
1st monitor 2nd monitor Back of the PC

AWS823038.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.1.2 Setting the monitor 3. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper
1. When placing 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, perform
the following settings on it. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
For a 2M color monitor

I. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
II. Press the <> key to open the initial setting window.
III. Select Basic... and then Rotation to determine settings as
shown in the table below.
Monitor setup orientation MU000031.EPS
Landscape Portrait NOTE

2M color Invalid Invalid
IV. Press Return and Menu Off to shut down the initial setting (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click .
window.
V. Touch (Power button) to turn OFF the monitor power.
VI. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
VII. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window
does not open.
For a 2M monochrome/3M color/3M monochrome monitor MU000035.EPS
I. While touching Mode on the 2nd monitor control panel,

press (Power button).
II. After the Signal Selection menu opens, check the
opens.
determined settings. Make correction as necessary and then
press the Enter key <>.
III. When the Orientation menu opens, make settings as shown 4. Click [Exit Service Utility].
in the table below.
NOTE
Monitor setup orientation
Perform the following steps when the taskbar is displayed on the
Landscape Portrait
2nd monitor side.
2M monochrome Portrait (soft) Portrait (soft)
1. Right-click the taskbar, and remove the check mark from the
Portrait (soft)/ Portrait (hard)/ Lock the Taskbar.
3M color
Single Link Dual Link
2. Drag the taskbar to the bottom of 1st monitor.
3M monochrome Portrait (soft) Portrait (hard) 3. Right-click the taskbar, and enter a checkmark for Lock the
Taskbar.
IV. Press the Enter key <>
2. Turn the PC power ON. The system returns to the desktop screen.
Windows starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Select Properties from the right-click menu on the 8. Perform setting for 2nd monitor.
desktop.
7. Perform necessary settings for 1st monitor.

I.
I.
II.
II.
III.
IV.
OE240013.ai
I. Select 2nd monitor.

OE240012.ai
II. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor check box.
I. Select 1st monitor.
II. Check to see that the 1st monitor resolution is properly
determined.
9. Click .
III. Put a checkmark in the Use this device as the primary monitor
check box. 10. Select 2nd monitor and then click .
IV. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor check box.
11. Select the VREngine/MD Series tab.
NOTE
If the 1st monitor resolution determined is not correct, make 12. From the Monitor pull-down menu, select either of the
corrections as follows.
following and then click .
I. Click Advanced Settings....
II. Select the Adapters tab and click List All Modes.... Landscape : [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor 8/10bit(Landscape)]
III. Select the correct 1st monitor resolution. Portrait : [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor 8/10bit(Portrait)]
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
NOTE 16. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose

To use another monitor of different resolution, select the one Properties from the menu that opens.
carefully by seeing setting values presented in the table at step 9 in The Display Properties window opens.
Installing the video driver above.
13. Restart the PC. 18. Select 2nd monitor and then click .
Windows starts up.
After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running. 19. Select the VREngine/MD Series tab.
14. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper 20. From the Color/Palette pull-down menu, select 24-bit
left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. color-conversion grayscale and click [OK].
21. Restart the PC.
Windows starts up.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS

opens.

The system returns to the desktop screen. MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

Return to the desktop screen.
24. Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose

Properties from the pop-up menu.

26. From the Color quality pull-down menu, select Highest (32
bit) and click .
27. Move the monitor icon so that the actually determined

monitor setup orientation is selected.
28. Select a monitor icon displayed being connected to the VGA

cable and remove checkmark of the Extend my Windows
desktop onto the monitor check box.
The monitor icon turns inactive.
29. Click .
NOTE
In case the Monitor Settings window opens, click [Yes].
30. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, turn it vertically.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows XP 3. Click [Exit Service Utility].
The system returns to the desktop screen opening then a window
4.2.1 Installing the video driver indicating that new hardware was found.
NOTES 4. Click [Cancel].

Be sure to use Nanaos driver CD (as marked with AMD/ATI FireGL/
FireMV (Version: 8.523.1) on the CD label) that is to be used under 5. Insert the driver installation CD for FireGL V3600 into the
Windows XP. PC.
Do not use the V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0 driver CD that The Fire MV 2250 CD window opens.
is to be used under Windows Vista.
V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1) (114Y5085705A00) can
be used under either one of Windows XP and Windows Vista. 6. Perform the following procedure.
For driver CD [AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1)]
1. Turn ON the PC power. I. Click InstallDrivers.
Windows starts up.

After about 1 minute, the CL starts running.

OE240014.ai
The window related to the Welcome to the InstallShield

Wizard for ATI Software displays.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
OE240015.ai

MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1)] 7. Click .

I. Click Install Software.
The window related to the License Agreement displays.
OE240016.ai
AWS823006.ai
8. Click .
II. Select Install Drivers.
The Select Components windows opens.
9. Click in the Express: Recommended box.
AWS823007.ai
III. Select Windows XP.
OE240017.ai
Installation processing completes in a few seconds and a window

like that shown below opens.
INApp11001.ai
The window related to the Welcome to the InstallShield

Wizard for ATI Software displays.
OE240052.ai
OE240015.ai
.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.2.2 Setting the monitor VI. Holding down the <> key, press the (Power button).
VII. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window
1. When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1) does not open.
is used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the left-side For a 2M monochrome/3M color/3M monochrome monitor
connector (in the case the 1st monitor cable is a DVI cable), I. While touching Mode on the 2nd monitor control panel, press
and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the right-side connector, (Power button).
both viewed from the back of the PC. II. After the Signal Selection menu opens, check the determined
settings. Make correction as necessary and press the Enter key
NOTE <>.
When driver CD AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1) is III. When the Orientation menu opens, make settings as shown in
used, do not connect the 2nd monitor at this step. the table below.

DVI cable
Landscape Portrait
3M color Portrait (soft)/Single Link Portrait (hard)/Dual Link
3M monochrome Portrait (soft) Portrait (hard)
IV. Press the Enter key <>.
For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1)]

DVI cable I. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
INApp11002.ai

the following settings on it.
For driver CD [AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1)]
DXL824006.ai
For a 2M color monitor Screen Manager displays.

II. Press the <> key to open the initial setting window. II. Press the <> key.
III. Select Basic... and then Rotation to determine settings as III. Make sure that Basic is selected and press the <> key.
shown in the table below. IV. Make sure that Rotation is selected and press the <> key.
V. Use the [] key to select Active and press the <> key.
Monitor setup orientation VI. Select Menu Off to shut down the initial setting window.
Landscape Portrait VII. Touch (Power button) to turn OFF the monitor power.
2M color Invalid Invalid VIII. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
IX. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window
IV. Press Return and Menu Off to shut down the initial setting does not open.
window.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For a 2M monochrome monitor III. Select Portrait (HW) in the Orientation menu and press the
I. While touching Mode on the 2nd monitor control panel, press Enter key <>.
(Power button).
Mode
AWS827014.ai
DXL824008.ai
For a 3M monochrome monitor
I. While touching Mode on the 2nd monitor control panel, press
II. Select Color 8bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the (Power button).
Enter key <>.
III. Select Portrait (HW) in the Orientation menu and press the
Enter key <>. Mode
DXL824008.ai
AWS827014.ai
II. Select 8/10bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
For a 3M color monitor III. Select Portrait (SW) in the Orientation menu and press the
(Power button).
Mode
AWS823056.ai
DXL824008.ai
II. Select Dual Link in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>. 3. Turn ON the PC power.
AWS827013.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper 6. When driver CD AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1)
left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. is used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the right-side
connector (in the case the 1st monitor cable is a DVI cable),
and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the left-side connector, as
illustrated below.
NOTE
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1) is
used, proceed to the next step because the monitors have already
MU000031.EPS
been connected.
NOTE DVI cable

MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility window 1st monitor 2nd monitor Back of the PC
opens. AWS823038.ai
5. Click [Exit Service Utility]. 7. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose
Properties from menu that opens.
NOTE
Perform the following steps when the taskbar is displayed on the
2nd monitor side.
Lock the Taskbar.
2. Drag the taskbar to the bottom of 1st monitor.
3. Right-click the taskbar, and enter a checkmark for Lock the
Taskbar.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
9. Perform setting for 1st monitor. 10. Perform setting for 2nd monitor.
I. I.
II. II.
III.
IV. III.
OE240019.ai OE240020.ai
I. Select 1st monitor. I. Select 2nd monitor.

II. Check to see that the 1st monitor resolution is properly II. Check to see that the 2nd monitor resolution is properly
determined. determined.
III. Put a checkmark in the Use this device as the primary monitor III. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
check box. monitor check box.
IV. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor check box. 11. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
12. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, return to the REFERENCE

desktop and then perform the following settings. If you double-click the ATI icon in the task tray to open
I. When a 2M color monitor is used, right-click the ATI icon in the CATALYST Control Center, you can see what was determined.
task tray at the lower right of the window, and then sequentially
select 2. ATI FireGL V3600, Rotate display and Right
(90cw).
OE240053.ai
OE240021.ai
REFERENCE
Depending on the monitor model used, Left (90 ccw) is
appropriate.
II. Turn the monitor vertically.

NOTE
In case a window like that shown below opens while necessary
settings are being processed, click and proceed to the
next step.
OE240018.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.3 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for 3. Click [Exit Service Utility].

Windows Vista The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.3.1 Installing the video driver 4. Insert the driver installation CD for VREngine/SMD5 into
the PC.
NOTE
Make sure to use a Ver3.2.7N2 (as marked on the CD label) driver, 5. Open Windows Explorer and double-click Setup
which is to be used under Windows Vista, and do not use a InstallShield.exe in the CD.
Ver10.0.0N1 driver that is for Windows XP. The InstallShield Wizard window opens.

Windows starts up.
2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper AWS823001.ai

Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. 6. Click .
The window related to the License Agreement displays.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE AWS823002.ai

MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Click . NOTE
MU000035.EPS
AWS823003.ai
opens.

8. Click .
NOTE
Installation processing starts. Perform the following steps when the taskbar is displayed on the
After installation completed, the InstallShield Wizard Complete 2nd monitor side.
window opens.
Lock the Taskbar.
9. Select and then click 2. Drag the taskbar to the bottom of 1st monitor.
3. Right-click the taskbar, and enter a checkmark for Lock the
. Taskbar.
The PC restarts.
After restart, the CL-AP starts running. The system returns to the desktop screen and then the Monitor
selection window opens.
MU000031.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
A window opens to indicate that the installation processing was

successfully completed.
I. 16. Select and then click
II. 17. Turn the PC power OFF.

18. Viewed from the back of the PC, connect the 1st monitor DVI
OE240022.ai
cable to the right-side connector (in the case the 1st monitor
cable is a DVI cable), and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the
I. For 1st monitor, select the currently determined resolution.
left-side connector.
II. For 2nd monitor, select either of the following, in accordance with
the monitor setup orientation. DVI cable
Landscape : [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor Type-2(Landscape)]
Portrait : [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor Type-2 (Portrait)]
13. Click .
The Confirmation of setting window opens.

OE240023.ai AWS823038.ai
14. Click .
OE240024.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.3.2 Setting the monitor 3. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper
the following settings on it. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.

(Power button).
II. After the Signal Selection menu opens, check the determined
settings. Make corrections as necessary and press the Enter key
<>.
III. When the Orientation menu opens, make settings as shown in MU000031.EPS
the table below.
NOTE
Landscape Portrait When the following window is displayed, enter the login password
3M monochrome Portrait (soft) Portrait (hard) (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click .

MU000035.EPS
opens.


desktop.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Perform settings for 1st monitor.

II. Put a checkmark to This is my main monitor.
III. Put a checkmark to Extend the desktop onto this monitor.
IV. Check to see that the 1st monitor resolution is properly
determined. I.
I. II.
III.
IV.
II. AWS823005.ai
III.
NOTE
IV. If the 2nd monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make
I. Click Advanced Settings.
AWS823004.ai
II. Select the Adapters tab and click List All Modes....
III. Select the correct 2nd monitor resolution.
NOTE
If the 1st monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make
II. Select the Adapters tab and click List All Modes.... 10. Click .
III. Select the correct 1st monitor resolution.
NOTE
8. Perform settings for 2nd monitor. In case the Display Settings window opens at this step, click [Yes].
II. Put a checkmark to Extend the desktop onto this monitor. 11. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, turn it vertically.
III. Determine the Colors to be Highest (32 bit).
IV. Change the Resolution to 1536 2048.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.4 When Using a FireGL V3600 for 3. Click [Exit Service Utility].
Windows Vista The system returns to the desktop screen.
NOTES 4. Insert the driver installation CD FireGL V3600 into the PC.
Be sure to use Nanaos driver CD (as marked with V3600 Video
Driver CD for Vista V1.0 on the CD label) that is to be used under 5. Open Windows Explorer and double-click Autorun.exe.
Windows Vista. The ATI Catalyst Software window opens.
Do not use the AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1) driver CD
that is to be used under Windows XP. 6. Select Install Software.
V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1) (114Y5085705A00) can
be used under either one of Windows XP and Windows Vista.
4.4.1 Installing the video driver

Windows starts up. AWS823006.ai
2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper 7. Select Install Drivers.
AWS823007.ai
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Select Windows VISTA. II. Click .
AWS823012.ai
AWS823008.ai
For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1)]

The FireGL Drivers window opens.
I. Click .
AWS823009.ai
9. Click .
DXL824011.ai
The FireGL Drivers: Installation Folder window opens. II. Click .
DXL824012.ai
AWS823010.ai
11. Click .
10. Perform the following settings on it. The PC restarts.
For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0)] After restart, the End User License Agreement window opens.
I. Click .
AWS823013.ai
AWS823011.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
12. Click [Accept]. The Service Utility starts, and then the IIP Service Utility window
opens.
NOTE
NOTES
When a message saying Specify folder to install to. appears, click
[Yes]. Perform the following steps if the Service Utility is not starting.
1. Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Delete>.
After installation completed, ATI Catalyst@ Install Manager The Windows Security window opens.
window opens.
2. Click [Task Manager].
The Windows Task Manager window opens.
3. Select the Processes tab.
4. Right-click on the IIPMAIN.exe, and select End Process
AWS823014.ai
Tree.
13. Click .
The PC restarts.
After restart, the CL-AP starts running.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE AWS823047.ai

5. Click [End process tree].
opens.

MU000035.EPS Return to the desktop screen.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

17. When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0 is to
be used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the right-side
connector (in the case the 1st monitor cable is a DVI cable),
and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the left-side connector,
both viewed from the back of the PC.
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version 8.593.1)
is to be used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the left-
side connector (in the case the 1st monitor cable is a DVI
cable), and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the right-side
connector, both viewed from the back of the PC.
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0 is
to be used
DVI cable
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version 8.593.1) is

to be used
DVI cable
DVI cable
INApp11003.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.4.2 Setting the monitor For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1)]
1. When placing 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, perform I. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
the following settings on it.
For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0]
II. Press the <> key to open the initial setting window.
III. Select Basic... and then Rotation to determine settings as
shown in the table below.
DXL824006.ai
Screen Manager displays.

II. Press the <> key.
Landscape Portrait
III. Make sure that Basic is selected and press the <> key.
2M color Invalid Invalid IV. Make sure that Rotation is selected and press the <> key.
IV. Press Return and Menu Off to shut down the initial setting VI. Select Menu Off to shut down the initial setting window.
window.
VII. Touch (Power button) to turn OFF the monitor power.
VIII. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
VI. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
IX. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window
VII. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window does not open.
does not open.
For a 2M monochrome monitor
For a 2M monochrome/3M color monitor
(Power button).
(Power button).
II. After the Signal Selection menu opens, check the determined
settings. Make correction as necessary and press the Enter key Mode
<>.
III. When the Orientation menu opens, make settings as shown in
the table below.

DXL824008.ai
Landscape Portrait II. Select Color 8bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
3M color Portrait (soft)/Single Link Portrait (hard)/Dual Link
Enter key <>.
AWS827014.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
For a 3M color monitor III. Select Portrait (SW) in the Orientation menu and press the
(Power button).
Mode
AWS823056.ai
DXL824008.ai
II. Select Dual Link in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>. 2. Turn ON the PC power.

AWS827013.ai
Enter key <>.
MU000031.EPS
AWS827014.ai
NOTE
For a 3M monochrome monitor When the following window is displayed, enter the login password
(Power button). (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click .
Mode
MU000035.EPS
DXL824008.ai
II. Select 8/10bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility window
Enter key <>. opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Click [Exit Service Utility]. 7. Perform settings for 1st monitor.

NOTE
Perform the following procedures when the taskbar is displayed on
the 2nd monitor side.
Lock the Taskbar.
2. Drag the taskbar to the bottom of 1st monitor. I.
3. Right-click the taskbar, and enter a check mark for Lock the
Taskbar.

II.
III.
desktop. IV.
6. Select Display Settings. OE240054.ai
The Display Settings window opens. I. Select 1st monitor.

II. Put a checkmark to This is my main monitor.
III. Put a checkmark to Extend the desltop onto this monitor.
determined.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Perform settings for 2nd monitor. 11. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, perform the
following settings.
I. When a 2M color monitor is used, right-click the ATI icon in the
task tray at the lower right of the window, and then sequentially
select 2. ATI FireGL V3600, Rotate display and Right
(90cw)..
I. REFERENCE
Depending on the monitor model used, Left (90 ccw) is
appropriate.
II. Turn the monitor vertically.

II.
III.
OE240055.ai

II. Put a checkmark to Extend the desktop onto this monitor.
III. Check to see that the 2nd monitor resolution is properly
determined.

10. Click .
NOTE
In case the Display Settings window opens at this step, click [Yes].
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.5 When Using a FireGL V3800 for For a 3M monitor (Monochrome: GS310)
I. Select 8/10bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Windows 7 Enter key <>.
II. Select Portrait (SW) in the Orientation menu and press the
Setting the 2nd Monitor Enter key <>.
1. Touch (Power button) while touching [Mode] on the 2nd

monitor control panel.
Mode
AWS823056.ai
AWS823065.ai
3. Have the 2nd monitor be placed horizontally (portrait
orientation).

For a 3M monitor (Color: RX320)
I. Select Dual Link in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
AWV32141.ai
AWS827013.ai
II. Select Portrait (HW) in the Orientation menu and press the
Enter key <>.
AWS827014.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.5.1 Installing the Video Driver 5. Open Windows Explorer and double-click Autorun.exe.

Windows starts up.
After about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.

NOTE
DXL08240025.ai
The Main menu window opens.
MU000035.EPS 6. Click Software Install.
opens.

DXL08240026.ai
The Install Sortware window opens.

4. Insert the V3800 Video Driver CD for Windows 7
Ver.8.743.3.2 CD into the PC.
7. Click Install CATALYST.
NOTE
Be sure to use the driver (V3800 Video Driver CD for Windows 7
Ver.8.743.3.2) that comes with the video board.
DXL08240027.ai
The ATI - Catalyst Install Manager window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
8. Select English and then click . 10. Select Express and then click .
DXL08240030.ai
The End User License Agreement window opens.
DXL08240028.ai
The Select Installation Operation window opens.
9. Click (Install).
DXL08240031.ai
11. Click .
The Specify folder to install to window opens.
DXL08240032.ai
DXL08240029.ai
The Installer Welcome window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
12. Click . 15. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper
The Analyzing System window opens and the installation starts.
After the installation is completed, the Finished window opens. NOTE
MU000035.EPS
DXL08240033.ai
opens.
13. Click .
A window prompting you to restart the PC opens. 16. Click [Exit Service Utility].

DXL08240034.ai
14. Click .
The PC restarts.
After the PC is restarted, the CL-AP starts up.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.5.2 Setting the Monitor 3. Turn OFF the PC power.
1. Select Screen Resolution from the right-click menu on the 4. Connect the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the left-side connector
desktop. (DisplayPort connector), viewing from the back of the PC.
DVI cable
Conversion cable Connect to the
DisplayPort
(left-side)
DXL08240035.ai
The Screen Resolution window opens. DXL08240014.ai
2. Confirm that 1280 1024 is selected and click 5. Turn ON the PC power.
. Windows starts up.
After about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.

NOTE
DXL08240036.ai
NOTE MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Click [Exit Service Utility]. 11. Select Desktop & Display from the Graphics.
8. Double-click in the task tray at bottom right of the

window.
The Catalyst Control Center - Basic window opens.
DXL824015.ai
DXL08240037.ai
9. Select Advanced and then click . The Desktop & Display window opens.
12. Click of the 2nd monitor and select Properties....
DXL824016.ai
The Catalyst Control Center Notification window opens.
10. Check Don't display this message again and click

. DXL08240038.ai
The Desktop Properties window opens.
DXL824017.ai
The CATALYST Control Center window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
13. Perform the following settings and click .
II
III
IV
Win7-Appx02_3002.ai
I. Select the connected 2nd monitor model.

II. Set Desktop area: in accordance with the connected 2nd monitor.
3M monitor (monochrome/collar) : 1536 2048
III.
Set Refresh rate: in accordance with the connected 2nd monitor.
2M monitor/3M monitor : 60 Hz
IV. Set Rotation: to Portrait.
NOTE
If the window opens to confirm whether or not to enable the window
settings, click Yes within a period of 15 seconds.
The system returns to the window to select the monitor.
14. As needed, move the monitor icons in a way that they are
going to be the same as the actual installation condition of
the monitors.
15. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.6 When No Video Boards Are Added III. Make sure that Basic is selected and press the <> key.
IV. Make sure that Rotation is selected and press the <> key.
4.6.1 Connecting the monitor VI. Select Menu Off to shut down the initial setting window.
VII. Touch (Power button) to turn OFF the monitor power.
1. Connect both the 1st and 2nd monitors to the PC. VIII. Holding down the <> key, press (Power button).
Connect the 1st monitor VGA cable to the VGA connector on the IX. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window
back of the PC. does not open.
Connect the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the DVI connector on the
back of the PC. For a 2M monochrome monitor
NOTE (Power button).
Place the 2nd monitor horizontally.
Mode
VGA cable
DVI cable
DXL824008.ai
II. Select Color 8bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
Enter key <>.

DXL824005.ai
AWS827014.ai
2. Perform the following settings on 2nd monitor. 3. Have the 2nd monitor be placed horizontally.
DXL824007.ai
DXL824006.ai
Screen Manager displays.

II. Press the <> key.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.6.2 Setting the monitor 6. Perform settings for 1st monitor.

1. Turn ON the PC power. II. Put a checkmark to This is my main monitor.
Windows starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running. III. Put a checkmark to Extend the desktop onto this monitor.
determined.
I.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE II.
III.
(fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click . IV.
AWS823004.ai
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
If the 1st monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make
The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility window I. Click Advanced Settings.
opens. II. Select the Adapters tab and click List All Modes....
III. Select the correct 1st monitor resolution.
Return to the desktop screen.

desktop.

010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
7. Perform settings for 2nd monitor.

II. Put a checkmark to Extend the desktop onto this monitor.
III. Determine the Colors to be Highest (32 bit).
IV. Change the Resolution to 1200 1600.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
AWS823005.ai
NOTE
If the 2nd monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make
II. Select the Adapters tab and click List All Modes....
III. Select the correct 2nd monitor resolution.

9. Click .
NOTE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4.7 Adjusting Width and Height on the 2nd 2. Drag the monitor icon of the 2nd monitor and adjust the
position of 2nd monitor.
Monitor (Common to VREngine/SMD5,
FireGL V3600 and FirePro V3800)
To change the width and height to be displayed on a different monitor,
when the mouse pointer or the like was moved from the 1st monitor to
the 2nd monitor as desired by the user, perform the following settings.

For Windows XP
I. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose Properties
from the menu that opens.
The Display Properties window opens
For Windows Vista

I. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose
Personalization from the menu that opens.
AWS823016.ai
II. Select Display Settings.

For Windows 7
I. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose Screen
Resolution from the menu that opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Changing and Setting the 2nd 5.2 Settings Necessary for the 2nd
Monitor Monitor to Recognize the Linking
Application
5.1 Changing the 2nd Monitor CAUTION
Described herein is the procedure used to change the 2nd monitor. When the 2nd monitor was changed, it is necessary to have the
changed 2nd monitor recognize the linking application.
1. Uninstall the currently used driver for video board. Perform this recognition processing with respect to all the
installed linking applications.
For details, see 1. Uninstalling the Video Driver.
2. Change the video board. 1. Insert the linking application installation CD into the PC.
For details, see 2. Connecting the Video Board.
The main window opens.
3. Change the monitor.

For details, see 3. Installing the Monitor. 2. Click .
4. Perform installation and setting for video driver. The Select information window opens.
For details, see 4. Installing and Setting the Video Driver.
3. Select the type of connected 2nd monitor and click
.
DXL824023.ai
The system returns to the main window.
4. Click .
6. Restart the PC.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
BLANK PAGE
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893

OE consists of the following:
OE1 CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection) OE15 CL+CL (Cluster Connection)
OE2 CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F (FINP: Image Input/Output) OE16 CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer)
OE3 CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) OE17 CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)
OE4 CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed Images) OE18 CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function)
OE5 CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print) OE19 CL+Synapse Server (Web Query)
OE6 CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output) OE20 CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint)
OE7 CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online) OE21 CL+T-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
OE8 CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS) OE22 CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)
OE9 CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push) OE23 CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter)
OE10 CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images) OE24 Precise Enlargement Function
OE11 CL+F-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan] OE25 QA ROI Measurement
OE12 CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection) OE26 CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)
OE13 CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection) [Applicable only in Japan]
OE14 CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient Record System
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual OE-I
Control Sheet

12/10/2000 00 Revision (FM2950) I, II, i, ii, B1-110, B2-115,
B3-116
12/10/2000 00 Changes in pagination (FM2950) B2-16
04/10/2001 01 Previous Chapter B Connecting the CL to All pages
Other Equipment modified (OE13) and new
release (OE47) (FM2951)
05/30/2001 02 Revision for software version A02 (FM3027) I, II, 1-1, 1-48, 13, 2-29, 11, 12,
1416, 3-218, 4-218, 5-114, 16,
17, 6-19, 1114, 7-1, 2, 415,
8-110-17
08/30/2001 03 Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) I, II, 1-1, 9, 10, 2-3, 14, 15, 17, 18,
3-3, 16, 17, 4-3, 16, 17, 5-1, 2, 6,
11, 12, 14, 16, 6-14, 6, 8, 1113,
7-812, 8-1, 14, 10-13, 14, 11-1, 2,
12-112
03/20/2002 04 Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) I, II, 2-9, 10, 3-1, 2, 8, 10, 11, 4-1,
10, 11, 5-1, 68, 1012, 6-1, 8-1, 4,
10, 1315, 18
03/20/2002 04 Changes in pagination (FM3297) 8-2, 16, 17, 9-10, 11
07/20/2002 05 Revision for software version A08 (FM3428) IIV, 1-1, 3-9, 11, 12, 4-9, 11, 5-11,
8-2, 3, 1316, 18, 9-10, 14-1, 2
07/20/2002 05 Changes in pagination (FM3428) 3-13, 8-1, 17, 19, 20, 9-11,12
11/30/2002 06 Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) I, II, 3-11, 14, 4-11, 12, 14, 15-124,
16-116
03/01/2003 07 Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) I, II, 1-4, 7, 8, 2-59, 3-1, 510, 12,
15, 4-512, 15, 5-412, 14, 6-59,
7-3, 4, 711, 8-512, 17, 9-610,
10-516, 12-3, 7, 13-3, 7, 8,
16-510, 13
03/01/2003 07 Changes in pagination (FM3634) 1-9, 3-14, 4-14, 5-13, 10-17, 18,
13-4
08/20/2003 08 Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) I, II, 1-9, 2-12, 3-13, 15, 4-13, 15,
5-13, 6-11, 7-9, 11, 8-7, 9, 13,
1519, 12-7, 13-8, 15-12, 13, 16-12
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual OE-II
Control Sheet
12/10/2003 09 Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) I, III, 1-8, 1-12, 2-6, 15, 3-6, 17, 4-6,
17, 5-5, 11, 14, 15, 6-6, 13, 7-5, 7, 9,
10, 12, 1416, 18, 8-16, 21, 9-11,
10-17, 12-4, 9, 13-5, 7, 11, 14-1, 2,
15-5, 6, 9, 22, 16-14
12/10/2003 09 Changes in pagination (FM4158) 1-13, 14, 7-11, 13, 17, 12-1012
07/30/2004 11 Revision for software version B00 (FM4254) I, III, 1-7, 3-11, 15, 4-11, 15, 5-14,
7-7, 8-19, 9-5, 10-12, 14, 16, 12-1,
610, 13-7, 14, 14-1, 15-1015, 28,
16-10, 14, 17-112, 18-1, 2,
19-110
07/30/2004 11 Changes in pagination (FM4254) 1-811, 7-818, 12-1114, 13-813,
15-1627
07/30/2005 14 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) IIII, 1-1, 14, 2-16, 3-14, 15, 18,
4-4, 14, 15, 18, 5-3, 8, 14, 17, 6-2,
4, 14, 7-2, 18, 8-5, 1821, 24, 9-12,
10-16, 18, 11-1, 12-2, 9, 10, 13,
13-1, 9, 12, 13, 15-5, 27, 16-1214,
16, 17-12, 19-1, 37, 10, 20-122
07/30/2005 14 Changes in pagination (FM4543) 8-2123, 19-8, 9
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I, III, 21-14
07/30/2006 16 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, III, 3-8, 10, 4-8, 10, 12-1, 2, 5, 6,
913, 16, 18-126, 19-1, 38, 12
07/20/2007 17 Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) I, III, 1-8, 13, 2-5, 3-5, 11, 12, 15,
4-5, 11, 12, 15, 5-4, 16, 6-5, 7-3, 4,
8, 8-16, 18, 20, 10-12, 14, 16, 11-1,
12-3, 6, 10, 13-14, 16-911, 14,
17-4, 8, 9, 18-4, 19-3, 20-19, 20
07/20/2007 17 Changes in pagination (FM5201) 3-13, 14, 16, 4-13, 14, 16, 10-15
05/09/2008 18 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) I, III, 2-3, 3-3, 4-3, 5-2, 6-3, 7-5, 11,
13, 8-3, 4, 13, 16, 9-3, 10-3, 12-10,
15-2, 16-2, 17-1, 7, 8, 18-1, 4, 19-2,
7, 20-3, 22-112
10/31/2008 19 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) I, III, 1-1, 8, 2-1, 5, 6, 3-1, 2, 5, 6,
4-1, 46, 5-1, 4, 5, 13, 6-1, 5, 6,
7-1, 8, 8-1, 2, 9-1, 6, 12-10, 15-1,
17-1, 4, 11, 22-57, 11, 12, 23-112
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual OE-III
Control Sheet
11/30/2009 20 Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) I, IV, 1-1, 2-4, 5, 3-4, 5, 8, 12, 4-4, 5,
8, 11, 14, 5-1, 3, 4, 7, 12, 6-4, 5,
7-2, 58, 20, 8-1, 4, 5, 9-4, 5, 10-4,
5, 12-2, 58, 18 15-3, 4, 1518,
16-4, 7, 9, 13, 17-1, 35, 11, 18-1,
5, 9, 17, 24, 28, 20-4 19-57, 20-1,
4, 5, 7, 22-1, 36, 8, 9, 14, 23-8,
24-146
11/30/2009 20 Changes in pagination (FM5622) 7-919, 12-3, 4, 1017, 15-514,
1932, 18-68, 1016, 1823,
2527, 19-812, 22-7, 8, 1013
03/31/2010 21 Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) I, IV, 1-7, 14, 2-4, 5, 16, 3-4, 5, 18,
4-4, 5, 18, 5-3, 4, 17, 6-4, 5, 14,
7-112, 16, 8-4, 5, 15, 24, 9-4, 5,
12, 10-4, 5, 18, 12-19, 11, 12,
15-23, 24, 31, 16-4, 16, 17-13, 5,
7, 912, 18-2, 3, 5, 6, 14, 24,
19-35, 12, 20-4, 5, 21, 22-3, 4, 11,
12, 14, 23-2, 6, 11, 24-122,
25-116
03/31/2010 21 Changes in pagination (FM5670) 7-1315, 12-10, 13, 14, 18-4, 713,
1523
12/10/2010 22 Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817) I, IV, 3-12, 4-12, 8-2123, 12-11,
16-11, 17-9, 26-116
12/10/2010 22 Changes in pagination (FM5817) 1-15, 16, 3-19, 20, 4-1320,
5-19, 20, 6-15, 16, 8-2428,
10-19, 20, 11-3, 4, 12-15, 16,
13-3, 4, 14-3, 4, 16-10, 17-1016,
20-23, 24, 21-3, 4, 22-15, 16,
24-23, 24,
08/31/2011 23 Revision for software V8.3(B) (FM5893) I, IV, 1-1, 8-24, 15-4, 1518,
17-14, 12, 15, 16, 19-7, 24-1, 25-1,
26-1, 3, 5, 6
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual OE-IV
CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)
Printer requirements
CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection) The printer main unit setup procedure must have been completed.
The connections to the following models are supported.
The setup procedures set forth below are used for printing images onto CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N (A05 or later)
E-i/f-connected printers from the CR-IR346/348CL.
FL-IM3543N/FL-IM3543MN (A06 or later)
NOTES CR-LP415/FL-IM2636II (A06 or later)
CR-LP416/FL-IM3543II (A06 or later)
The CR-IR 346/348CL and the Local Print are abbreviated CR-LP417/CR-LP418/FL-IM D/FL-IM DM (A10 or later)
hereafter CL and LP, respectively.
When the OS used is Windows Vista or Windows 7, this function is not CR-DP T (C08 or later)
supported. CR-DP 3543T (C03 or later)
CR-DP L (B00 or later)
Before setup NOTES
CL requirements The CR-LP414, FL-IM3543, and FL-IM3543M are not supported.

The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Even when the printer prints images onto the CR-DP T or
CR-DP3543T, the print process is performed so that the printer
Software version required : A00 or later. resolution is 10 lines/mm. As is the case with the FCR5000 Series, the
The LP option key (IR 346 LOCAL PRINT) is required. printer enlarges the print image to 7/6 the original size.
The CR-DP L printers support printout generation at a resolution of
REFERENCE 20 lines/mm.
If the PEI board is not mounted when the LP option key is installed, the
CL-AP does not run.
For details, see 3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving
Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation
Failure under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual OE1-1
CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)
Overall work flow

Install the PEI board and connect the 1. Hardware Setup
CL to the LP with an E-i/f cable.
Install the LP option key and reinstall 2. Software Setup

the AP key. Register the LP. Set up the
LP system information and film
annotation character format as necessary.
Use the LP to generate images on film 3. Verifying the

and verify output characters. Connection
Make an LP configuration backup of the 4. Backing Up the

CL setup file. Setup File
00056009.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1.1 Installing the PEI Board
1. Hardware Setup 3. Verify that the switches on the PEI board are properly set.
For the CL and printer, the following hardware setup procedures must NOTE
be completed: When no remote signal is to be sent to the printer, turn OFF all the
DPSW1 switches.
1.1 Installing the PEI Board Installing the PEI board on
the CL-PCs PCI bus slot
When connecting the CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FL-IM3543N/
1.2 Connecting the Cable Connecting the E-i/f cable FL-IM3543MN
between the CL and printer
DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; 3 and 4: ON
DPSW2 1 and 2: OFF; 3 to 8: ON
DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF
1.1 Installing the PEI Board SW0 2 and 3 short-circuited.
SW2 and SW5 1 and 2 short-circuited.
SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed.
NOTE
Before installing the PEI board, make sure that the CL-AP is installed. ON DPSW3
The PEI01A driver is properly recognized only when the CL-AP is SW0
installed. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON DPSW2 ON DPSW1
1. Shut down the CL and then turn OFF the CL-PC power.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
2. Disconnect the power cable from the CL-PC. SW3 SW5
OFF OFF
1 2 1 2
SW2 SW4
1 2 1 2
PEI01A board
00000251.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1.1 Installing the PEI Board
Settings for models other than those listed above For GX110
DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; 3 and 4: ON I. Remove the CL-PC cover.
DPSW2 1 to 8: ON II. When the card cage is removed, its PC board interferes with a
DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull the
SW0 2 and 3 short-circuited. disk unit on the front of the CL-PC toward you before removing
the card cage.
SW2 and SW5 1 and 2 short-circuited.
SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed. #1 [Push] Disk unit
ON DPSW3 #2 [Pull]
SW0 T
ON
FR
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON DPSW2 ON DPSW1 #1 [Push]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
SW3 SW5 Cables behind the hard disk
OFF OFF
1 2 1 2 CL-PC
SW2 SW4 (OptiPlex GX110) OE000006.EPS
1 2 1 2
III. Raise the lever as illustrated by the arrow.
PEI01A board IV. Remove the card cage.
V. Mount a PEI board in a PCI slot within the card cage.
V. PEI01A board
III. Lever
PCI slot
00000007.EPS
IV. Card cage
4. Mount a PEI board in a PCI slot.
T
ON
When the PC used is a model other than GX110 or GX150, FR
see Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
under RI : Reinstalling the Software.
CL-PC
OE000007.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1.2 Connecting the Cable
VI. Mount the card cage in the CL-PC. 1.2 Connecting the Cable
VII. Restore the disk unit.
VIII. Reinstall the CL-PC cover. With the E-i/f cable that is supplied with the CL, connect the CL to the
printer.
For GX150 PEI board
CL Printer
III. Mount a PEI board in an empty PCI slot. E-i/f cable
00000015.EPS
Remove
II. Card cage
III. PEI board

slot connector
ONT
FR
CL-PC
(GX150) OE000001.EPS

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.1 CL Software Setup
2. Software Setup 2.1 CL Software Setup

2.1.1 Installing the LP Option Key
This section describes the procedures used for setup of CL and printer
software. To use the LP, the IR346 LOCAL PRINT option key is needed.
Set up grayed-out items as required. All other items must be set up.
Install the LP option key

1. Insert the optional key CD into the PC.
2.1 CL software setup
2.1.1 Installing the LP Option Key reinstall the AP key. Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key Register the printers.
Set up the LP system 2. Click .
information and film
2.1.4 Registering the Printer for annotation character A window opens to indicate the completion of LP option key
Automatic Image Printout format as necessary. installation.
When a Study is Completed
2.1.5 Setting the System Information
for CL/LP Connection
2.1.6 Setting the Film Annotation
Character Format
00000241.EPS
2.2 Printer Main Unit Setup 3. Click .

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key 6. Select and click
If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. .
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall The installation finish window opens.
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
7. Click .
The desktop window opens.
8. Right-click My Computer from the menu to
2. Click . select Properties.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation. The System Properties window opens.
9. Click the Hardware tab and then .
00000419.EPS
10. Ensure that the PEI board driver has been installed
appropriately and close both the Device Manager and
3. Click . System Properties windows.
NOTE
For Windows XP, perform steps 5 through 10 to install the PEI board
driver.
5. Restart the CL.

After restarting the CL, the Found New Hardware Wizard window
opens.
10000002.EPS
10000001.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility REFERENCE

1. Turn ON the CL power. 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following
Windows 2000/XP starts up and then the CL-AP starts running in steps to start the Service Utility:
about one minute.
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down on the (or
REFERENCE
If the AP or Windows 2000/XP is already running, start the Service ) menu.
Utility as directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
2. Click [OK] while holding down the <Shift> key on the shutdown
window.
2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, 3. From the Start menu, sequentially choose Programs,
sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of Fuji Film, and FCR.
the window. 4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left
window opens.
MU000031.EPS
MU000035.EPS OE000025.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2.1.4 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image 2. Click .

Printout When a Study is Completed A list of registered equipment appears in the right-hand area of the
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT window.
Described herein is the procedure used for registering the printer for
automatic image printout when a study is completed.
For a printer that outputs prints only through the QA operation, no
registration is required at this step.
1. From the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup 00000081.EPS
Configuration Item].
3. Click .
The FTP CONNECTION window opens.

field and select the function (PRINT)

of the connected device.
Click the downward arrow mark in
the field and select the device

00000131.EPS (LOCAL).
The Setup Configuration Item window opens. NOTE
If the LP option key is not installed, you cannot choose LOCAL.
5. Click .
00000404.EPS You are returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.

saved.
7. Click .
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
2.1.5 Setting the System Information for CL/LP 2.1.6 Setting the Film Annotation Character Format
Connection
Perform the following film annotation character format setup procedure,
If the following printer use is intended, change the LP system for instance, to specify the image information to be printed out onto film,
information. the annotation character format, and the use of an image-frame.
When an old-type printer is to be used REFERENCE

CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N, FL-IM3543N/FL-IM3543MN
The default film annotation character format for print output is basically
When the cable connecting the printer to the CL exceeds 60m the same as for printouts generated by the FCR 5000 Series.
When the film sort function is to be used
Film output differences between the CL and the 5000 Series
are stated in 2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation
1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click the
Character Format under Print Output Function in
sign for . FR1: Function-specific Reference.

2. Click .
The LP configuration setup items appear in the right-hand area of 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click the sign
the window. within .
3. Enter the following settings as needed: 2. Click .

NOTE The LP configuration setup items appear in the right-hand area of
the window.
Setup items 1 through 9 refer to the LP-related system information.
Items 10 thereafter are for the film annotation character format.
For details on individual setup items, see 1. Setup Necessary For details on the setup procedure, see 2. Setup Necessary
When Connecting the LP, under Print Output Function in When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format, under
FR1: Function-specific Reference. Print Output Function in FR1: Function-specific
Reference.
saved. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
5. Click .
5. Click .
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
2.2 Printer Main Unit Setup
2.1.7 Exiting the Service Utility 2.2 Printer Main Unit Setup
Set up the printer main unit software to ensure that images fed from the
CL can be printed out.
Close on the Config (F) menu.
When other connected equipment is the FM-DPL, FM-DP3543 or
FM-DP2636, see System Settings in Installation (IN) and
Chapter C under Setting to Work.
For other printers, see the Service Manual that comes with each
The system returns to the desktop screen. printer.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verifying the Connection Version B software
This section describes the procedures for printing images onto the
printer from the CL for film annotation character format verification
purposes.
OE000099.EPS
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation
Character Format
1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs,

The CL opening window appears on the display.
After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation If any abnormality is found, see Print Output Function
under FR1: Function-specific Reference.
Character Format
1. Print out a read image.
For details on the print output procedure, see
FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL in the CL Operation Manual.
2. Check whether the film annotation character format

information entered from the CL is properly printed out onto
the film. Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise
abnormal character printings.
REFERENCE
The example in the figure below represents a printout that would be
generated when the default film annotation character format is used
(image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN). When the
default settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) are printed
out.
(12) IP number
(4) Patient ID
(7) Gender
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP 0000000001 MARY ADAMS [F] 23
1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE:50% RT-04
01

(14) Exposure menu name (17) Exposure time(11) Reduction ratio
(15) Normalization conditions + corrections
(19) Technologists code 00000034.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
4. Backing Up the Setup File

Make a backup of the CL setup file.
For making a backup, have the following item on hand:
Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like)
For details on the backup procedure, see 5. Restoring/Backing

Up the Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup under
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F (FINP: Image Input/Output)
Connection/setup example
CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP: Image Input/Output) HOST name : FCR-CSL*
IP address : 172.16.1.20*
This chapter describes the setup procedures for image input/output
using the FINP between the CR-IR346/348CL and other connected
equipment. LP CL
Reprint
NOTE
Image output
The CR-IR346/348CL and the HI-C655/HI-C654/QA-WS/OD-F614/624 TCP/IP
are abbreviated hereafter CL and other connected equipment, FRUP Image input
respectively. (reprint) Connected
RU equipment B
(e.g.: HI-C655)
Prior to setup
CL requirements
HOST name : hic_a*
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
IP address : 172.16.1.30*
Software version required: A00 or later
Device attribute : HD_FILE*
The FINP image input/output option key (IR346 DMS NET-WORK
IN-OUT) is necessary. Protocol ID : 110*
Other connected equipment Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need be
changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
The main units of other connected equipment must have been set up 00000435.EPS
accordingly.
Following are the equipment connectable to the CL and the protocol
software versions available.
Equipment FINP100 FINP110 Software Version

HI-C654 A13 or later
HI-C655 A07 or later
QA-WS A03 or later
OD-F614 A11/Z02 or later
OD-F624 A11/Z02 or later
CR-IR346CL A00 or later
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F (FINP: Image Input/Output)
Overall operation flow

Use a network cable to connect the 1. Hardware Setup
CL to other connected equipment.
Make setups for inputting/outputting 2. Software Setup

images using the FINP.
Install the option key and reinstall the
AP key. Make then the following setup.
Setup of information (device
attributes, data compression type,
etc.) on other connected equipment
Make the following setups as required.
Setup for changing the image data
compression type depending on
the MPM code
Setup for automatic image distribution
Setup for CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT (OD attributes only)
Make sure that images can be output 3.Connection

from the CL to other connected Checkout
equipment and images can be input
from other connected equipment.
Back up the configuration file. 4. Setup File Backup
00000075.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to other equipment via network as illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
RU CL Other connected
equipment
00000051.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL
and other connected equipment.
The cable type applicable to this equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup 2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key

Installation
Follow the procedures below to set up software for the CL and other
connected equipment. To input/output images using the FINP, the IR346 DMS NET-WORK
Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other IN-OUT option key is needed.
items.
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
Installation NOTE
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.3 Service Utility Startup 2. Click .

2.4 Setups Required for Outputting Images to
Other Connected Equipment
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected
Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES) Tasks done on
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data the CL
Compression Type Depending on the
MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION
TYPE) 00000085.EPS
2.4.3 Setup for Automatic Image Distribution 3. Click .

(DISTRBUTION CODE)
2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT The installation start window opens again.
4. Click .
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other
Connected Equipment
5. Click .
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown The system return to the desktop screen.
2.7 Software Setup on Other Connected Tasks done 6. Remove the CD from the PC.
Equipment on other
connected REFERENCE
equipment The installation start window opens twice because the two kinds of
keys, for image input and output, are stored on the FINP image input/
output option key CD.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.3 Service Utility Startup
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.3 Service Utility Startup

If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. 1. Turn ON the CL power.
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall In about one minute after Windows is started up, the CL-AP
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below. launches itself.
REFERENCE
If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens. mode as directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
NOTE
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, 2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of
the window.
2. Click .
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
MU000035.EPS

NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Setups Required for Outputting Images to Other Connected Equipment
REFERENCE 2.4 Setups Required for Outputting

If you cannot complete step 2. above from the initial window within Images to Other Connected Equipment
a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the
following steps to start the Service Utility mode. Described herein are the setup procedures to be observed when
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down on the (or outputting images to other connected equipment.
) menu. Connection example

window. LP CL
Fuji Film, and FCR. Reprint
and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Image output
TCP/IP
FRUP Image input
3. Enter fieldengineer and click . (reprint) Other connected
RU equipment B
The Service Utility mode starts. The IIP Service Utility window (e.g.: HI-C655)
opens.
00000079.EPS
OE000028.EPS

The Setup Cofiguration Item window opens.
00000077.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Setup overview 2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected

Service Utility Setup Configuration Item window Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES)
1. Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the IIP Service Utility
window.
I
II
III
00000054.EPS
Setup of information on other connected equipment (I on the window 00000131.EPS

display)
Host name and IP address of other connected equipment
Selection of protocol used (FINP) by other connected equipment
Setup of the protocol ID (FINP100/110) of other connected equipment
Setup of attribute of other connected equipment
Setups for handling HQ images and image compression type
Setup for automatic image distribution (II on the window display) 00000404.EPS
This setup is needed for automatically transferring images sent by the
RU.
2. Click the mark of the field.
Setup for changing the image data compression type depending on the
MPM code (III on the window display) 3. Select and click .
Perform this setup only when transferring images by changing the data
compression type depending on the MPM code. The New Node window opens.
NOTE
To enable this setup, the field must have been 00000436.EPS
activated before setting the image data compression type (ALL OTHER
NODES).
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
4. Enter the host name (e.g.: hic_a) of other connected 8. Set information of other connected equipment as follows.
equipment in .
I
5. Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.30) of other connected
equipment in .
II
6. Make sure that is selected in the column.
7. Click .
III
IV
VI
00000437.EPS
I. Select the protocol ID (e.g.: ) supported by

other connected equipment.
For the protocol ID that each equipment unit supports,
see Prior to setup.
II. Select the device attribute (e.g.: ) of other connected

equipment.
Select PRINT for the IR system.
Select HD_FILE for the HI-C/QA-WS system.
Select OD_FILE for the ODF system.
Select OTHER for the CL.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
III. Select if other connected equipment can receive Device attribute Protocol ID
HQ images and if it can receive mammographic images
as well.
IV. Select if other connected equipment can transfer
HQ images.
V. Select the image data compression type used for image transfer.
Select when transferring images by
changing the data compression type depending on the MPM
code.
NOTE
The archiver (ODF and LF-C1) also has the same image
compression ratio setting as indicated in step V.
Note that the setting selected here (at the CL) takes effect and not
the the setting selected for the ODF or LF-C1.
VI. To transfer annotation-embedded images, select .

Select to transfer images not embedded with annotation.
9. Click .
The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window. Handling of Image data Annotation transfer
HQ images compression type 00000269.EPS
REFERENCES
Items just have been set up will appear on the right-side area of 10. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
the Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be
changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
.
11. Click .
If the key is pressed, currently selected items are
deleted. The system saves the setup data.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data 2. Click .

Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code
(FINP COMPRESSION TYPE) The FINP Compression Type window opens.
Perform the following settings only when is 3. Set I and II on the display as follows.
selected for the image data compression type in ALL OTHER NODES.
1. Select of the Setup

Configuration Item window. I
A list showing the data compression type for each MPM code will
be displayed on the right-side area of the window.
II
List showing the data compression
type for each MPM code ALL MENU (Default)
00000440.EPS
I. Select the exposure menu name.

REFERENCE
The MPM code that is for the exposure menu selected will be
displayed in the MPM Code column. Using the User Utility, the
user thus can view which MPM code is for the exposure menu
selected.
II. Select the image data compression type.
4. Click .
Settings for data compression ratio for each MPM code The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window.
00000439.EPS
The MPM code set as above and the image data compression
NOTE type for the code will appear on the right side of this window.
ALL MENU (Default) provides a compression ratio setting that 5. To set image data compression types for other MPM codes,
applies to all MPM codes. repeat steps 2. to 4.
FINP COMPRESSION TYPE first determines a compression ratio
for all MPM codes and then determines the compression ratio for 6. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
each MPM code. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
The compression ratio settings for individual MPM codes take saved.
precedence. If there are no settings for individual MPM codes, the
ALL MENU (Default) setting applies. 7. Click .
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4.3 Setup for Automatic Image Distribution 3. Make settings as follows.

(DISTRIBUTION CODE) Enter an 8-digit distribution code, for example 12345678, in
For an automatic image distribution to equipment of HD_FILE attribute, the field.
set up DISTRIBUTION CODE.
Click the downward arrow of the
NOTE
to select the host name
For an automatic image distribution processing, be sure to change to
Yes ahead of time the setting (item 3 of SYSTEM CONFIG of the equipment the image data is to be transferred to
5.CSL/IDT FUNCTION) under Enable Distribution Code Setup of the (e.g.: hic_a).
Service Utility function.
4. Click .
For an automatic distribution to equipment of OD_FILE attribute,
perform the procedure described in 2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window.
EQUIPMENT.
5. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
1. Click of the Setup Configuration A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
Item window. saved.
A list showing the destination equipment for automatic image
distribution will be displayed on the right-side area of the window. 6. Click .
00000410.EPS
2. Click .
The Distribution Code window opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT 3. Make the following settings.

To automatically transfer images to the ODF, set up CONNECTING Click the downward arrow within
EQUIPMENT as directed below.
and select function (OD_FILE) of the connected equipment.
1. Click on the Setup NOTE

Configuration Item window. With software version A00, HD_FILE can be selected in the
Function box. However, even though HD_FILE has been
A list of registered equipment units appears on the right side of the selected, no images will be transferred to equipment of HD_FILE
window.
attribute automatically. It is thus necessary to make setup for
DISTRIBUTION CODE if you wish to transfer images of HD_FILE
attribute automatically.
2.4.3 Setup for Automatic Image Distribution
(DISTRIBUTION CODE)
OE000002.EPS
Click the downward arrow within
2. Click . and select equipment (ODF

host name).
The CONNECTING EQUIPMENT window opens.
4. Click .

A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data.
6. Click .
The setup data will then be saved.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other Connected Equipment
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other NOTES

[only when other connected equipment is the CL]
Connected Equipment
If a multiple number of CLs are network-connected, it is designed
No particular settings are required on the CL. that the system omits some of setups for those CLs by copying the
setup file (NetConfiguration.mdb) of one CL onto another CL
REFERENCE connected via the same network.
Images input from other connected equipment are stored directly on the
CL print queue. Note that in the list displayed with the All or Today CL-B
tab on the CL user window, you cannot check images input from other
connected equipment. TCP/IP
Print queue Copying
LP CL CL-A CL-C
Reprint Copyng
00000078.EPS
Image output NetConfig.mdb

TCP/IP
To input/output FINP images between among CLs, you would
FRUP Image input better for the reason said above to perform setups for image data
(reprint) Other connected input using the FINP, procedures for which are explained as
RU equipment B follows.
(e.g.: HI-C655) 1. Select NETWORK CONFIG - THIS HOST (IIP) on the Setup
00000080.EPS
Configuration Item window and click [NEW].
2. The New Node window appears. Click [OK]. The FINP Setup
window opens.
3. Set up the same content as for other connected equipment
(e.g.: NETWORK CONFIG - ALL OTHER NODES - CL-A
- FINP settings for the CL-B in Service Utility mode, shown in
the connection diagram above).
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown 2.7 Software Setup on Other Connected

Equipment
1. Select Close from the Config (F) menu of the Setup
Configuration Item window. Set up the following items so that other connected equipment can
The system return to the IIP Service Utility window. receive images from the CL.
CL host name setup
2. Click [Exit Service Utility]. CL IP address setup
The system return to the desktop screen. For host name and IP address setup procedures, see the relative
Service Manuals.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout 3.2 Image Input/output Checkout

Output checkout
After the CL-AP is started up, make sure that images can be transferred
from the CL to other connected equipment. Transfer images from the CL to other connected equipment.
3.1 CL-AP Startup 1. Select an image for checkout, then transfer it to other
connected equipment.
3.2 Image Input/output Checkout For details of the procedures for the checkout transfer, see
the CL Operation Manual.
2. Make sure that the image has actually been transferred to

3.1 CL-AP Startup other connected equipment.
For details of the procedures for checking transferred images,
1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs, see the operation manual attached to each equipment.
Input checkout
The CL opening window opens.
In about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens. Transfer images from other connected equipment to the CL.
Version A software
1. Transfer an image from other connected equipment to the
CL.
For details of the procedures for checking transferred images,
see the operation manual attached to each equipment.
2. Make sure that the names of the images transferred from

other connected equipment appear on the CL print queue
list.
To display the print queue list, click the Queue tab on the
CL user window.
OE000017.EPS
Version B software 3. Make sure that the LP, if connected, outputs the image thus
transferred properly.
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
4. Setup File Backup

Have the following item ready for use for this purpose:

MU:Maintenance Utility.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage)
Prior to setup
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM
CL requirements
CR Storage) The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
Presented below are the procedures used for transferring images from Option keys are needed.
the CL-IR346/348CL to the HI-C655 (or QA-WS or FCR VIEW) using
the DICOM CR Storage feature. Key Name Functions Supported
Also described are the setup procedures for transferring pre- IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE key CR Storage SCU Standard
standardized images to the QA-WS. CR Storage SCU Private
(Includes Private Unstandardized
NOTE CR Storage.)
The CR-IR346/348CL and the HI-C655 (or QA-WS or FCR VIEW) Requirements of other connected equipment
are abbreviated hereafter CL and other connected equipment, Other connected equipment must have been set up accordingly.
respectively.
When other connected equipment is the HI-C655
The CL supports the following DICOM CR Storage functions, overview Software version required: A07 or later
of which is shown below. DICOM Storage option key (Standard/Private)
CR Storage SCU (10bit) When other connected equipment is the QA-WS

An image transfer function using the DICOM. Software version required: A04 or later
DICOM Storage option key (Standard/Private)
CR Storage SCU Private (10bit) (Private Unstandardized CR
Storage) When other connected equipment is the FCR VIEW
An image transfer function using the DICOM, which makes it Software version required: V4.0 or later
possible to add FUJIs own private information to images for transfer. DICOM Storage option key (Standard/Private)
Private Unstandardized CR Storage is a function that enables Yokogawa server
transfer of images (12bit) not subjected to standardization
processing using the DICOM. This function is available only with Synapse server
JPEG Lossless.
This function can be used when, for example, the QA-WS that is
capable of receiving images not subjected to standardization
processing is connected to the CL.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage)
Connection/setup example Overall operation flow

Setup example of Use a network cable to connect the 1. Hardware Setup
other connected equipment
HOST name : HIC655a*
IP address : 172.16.1.30*
AE name (Provider) : HIC655a-SCP* Make setups for inputting/outputting 2. Software Setup
Port number : 5001* images via DICOM.
Service Class : Private CR Storage* Install the option key and reinstall the
AP key. Make then the following
Transfer Syntax : JPEG Lossless setups.
Setup of information (AE name,
device attribute, Service Class, etc.)
Other connected on this equipment
equipment
(HI-C655 or QA-WS)
Registration of information (AE name,
device attribute, port number, Service
Class, handling of HQ images, etc.)
TCP/IP on other connected equipment
FRUP DICOM CR Storage Make the following setups as required.
Setup for automatic image distribution
code
RU Setup for UID issuance
CL
Setup for name elements
EQUIPMENT (OD attribute only)
CL setup example
HOST name : fcr-csl*
IP address : 172.16.1.20* Make sure that images can be 3. Connection
AE name (User) : CL-SCU* transferred from the CL to other Checkout
Service Class : Private CR Storage*
Transfer Syntax : JPEG Lossless*
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need be
00000401.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to other connected equipment via network as illustrated
below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
equipment
00000003.EPS
NOTES
The cable type applicable to this equipment (CL/HI-C655 or QA-WS)
is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)

2.1.1 Installation of DICOM CR Storage Option Key
Set up software for the CL and other connected equipment.
Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other To activate the DICOM CR Storage function, the IR346 DICOM CR
items. STORAGE option key is needed.

2.1.1 Installation of DICOM CR Storage
1. Insert the option key CD into the PC.
Option Key Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation NOTE
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage
Function
Tasks done on
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other
Connected Equipment for the DICOM the CL 2. Click .
CR Storage Function A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image
Distribution
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance
2.1.9 Changes in Name Elements
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown
00000085.EPS
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Tasks done

Equipment on other 3. Click .
connected The installation start window opens again.
equipment
4. Click same as in steps 2 and 3, then click
.
The system return to the desktop screen.
REFERENCE
The installation start window opens twice because the two kinds of
keys, Standard and Private are stored on the DICOM CR Storage
option key CD.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.1.3 Service Utility Startup

REFERENCE
If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens. mode as directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
NOTE
the window.
2. Click .
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
4.
MU000035.EPS
Remove the CD from the PC.

NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
REFERENCE 2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the

If you cannot complete step 2. above from the initial window within DICOM CR Storage Function
a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the
following steps to start the Service Utility mode. Make settings for the following information items of this equipment.
Host name and IP address of this equipment
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down on the (or AE name (Application Entity Name) of this equipment
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, device attribute (Attribute)
) menu. Other (timeout settings, etc.)
window. 1. Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the IIP Service Utility
3. From the Start menu, sequentially choose Programs, window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
The Service Utility mode starts. The IIP Service Utility window
opens.
00000131.EPS
00000403.EPS
00000404.EPS
3. Select and click .
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4. Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are displayed. 6. Enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL-SCU)
in the field.
CL host name
NOTE
CL IP address There is no need to set the port number in .
When selecting SCU as the Role, the set port number will be
00000441.EPS disregarded even if it is set.
NOTE
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is 7. Click .
connected to a network.
5. Select DICOM and click .
Select DICOM. 00000405.EPS
The Application Entity List window opens. 00000443.EPS
00000442.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
8. Click downward arrow in the 10. Click downward arrow in the
field to select Service field to select the

Class (e.g.: Private CR Storage). Transfer Syntax (e.g.: JPEG Lossless).
CR Image Storage Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected)
Private CR Storage Service Class ImplictVR ExplictVR JPEG
Private Unstandardized CR Storage LittleEndian LittleEndian Lossless
Verification
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage

REFERENCES
Private Unstandardized
If a Service Class that includes Private CR Storage is selected, CR Storage

items that need not be set will be hidden on the DICOM Setup
window. Verification
Verification is the Service Class used to verify connection
between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, 11. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value
Verification must be selected.
as necessary.
For details of verification of connection, see 7. Verifying
the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify REFERENCES
Connection in MU: Maintenance Utility.
To transfer large-capacity image data such as mammograms,
check the time required to transfer those images using the
DICOMStorage.log function, and then determine in the
9. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for [Timeout1: ] box a time long enough to perform image transfer
the Role. processing.
REFERENCES It is not necessary to check .
Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 9.
If SCU is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on
above is the SCU.
the DICOM Setup window.
For DICOM SCU settings on this equipment (THIS HOST (IIP)),
two or more Service Class settings (e.g., CR Image Storage,
Private CR Storage, and other) can be selected for a single 12. Click downward arrow in the
Application Entity. Moreover, two or more Transfer Syntax settings field to select OTHER for the device attribute.
(e.g., JPEGLossless, ImplicitVRLittleEndian, and other) can be
selected for a single Service Class. NOTE
To set the SCU AE on the CL, select OTHER for the device
attribute for the time being.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
13. Click . 2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected

Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function
The system returns to the Application Entity List window.
Register the following information items of other connected equipment.
14. Click .
AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of other
connected equipment
The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window.
REFERENCE Setups for gradation correction
Other (usage of two-byte characters, settings for data conversion
Items just have been set up will appear on the right-side area of
the Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be from HQ to standard image, etc.)
changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click
. 1. Select of the Setup Configuration
Item window and click .
deleted.

AE name of this equipment 2. Make the following settings.

Enter the Host name (e.g.: HCI655a) in the
field.
Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.30) in the
field.
Select DICOM.

00000406.EPS Select DICOM. 00000405.EPS

saved.
16. Click .
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
The Application Entity List window opens for setup of information The DICOMSetup window opens.
on other connected equipment.
00000443.EPS
6. Click downward arrow of the
field and select Service

Class (e.g.: Private CR Storage).
00000444.EPS
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
4. Make the following settings. Private Unstandardized CR Storage
Verification
Enter the AE name of other connected equipment (e.g.: HCI655a-
NOTE
SCP) in the field.
Do not select two or more Service Class settings for a single
Application Entity (e.g., CR Image Storage and Private CR
NOTES
Storage). Further, do not select two or more Transfer Syntax
Never fail to enter the SCP AE name. settings for a single Service Class (e.g., JPEG Lossless and
Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly. Implicit VR Little Endian).
Even if you select two or more settings, only the first one takes
effect.
Enter the Port number of other connected equipment (e.g.: 5001)
REFERENCES
in the field.
If Private CR Storage is selected, items that need not be set will
be hidden on the DICOM Setup window.
between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection,
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
7. Because the AE of other connected equipment is the 10. To transfer processed images to other connected
Provider, make sure that (SCP) is selected for the equipment, select ( ) within the
Role.
field.
8. Click downward arrow in the
NOTE
field to select Transfer
If the IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED option key has not been
Syntax (e.g.: JPEG Lossless). installed, the Image Processing function will be disregarded even
Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected) though PROC is selected (the result will be as if NONE has
Service Class been selected).
ImplictVR ExplictVR JPEG
LittleEndian LittleEndian Lossless
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
11. If you have selected at step 10. above, click
CR Storage
downward arrow of as required to change the
Verification
setup value.
NOTE 10 : Select when generating 10bit processed image output.
Be sure to select the same Transfer Syntax as that selected for this 12 : Select when generating 12bit processed image output.
equipment.
NOTE
The value set up in Bit Stored is allowed to change only when
9. Change the following settings as required. either CR Image Storage or MG Image Storage For Presentation
is selected for Service Class and PROC is selected for Image
Processing.
Setting of
ST : Select if other connected equipment cannot receive

HQ images.
ST & HQ : Select if other connected equipment can receive HQ
images.
ST & HQ & SH : Select if the other connected equipment can
receive 20 lines/mm mammographic images as
well.
Setting of
ST : Select when transferring standard images only.

HQ/SH : Select when transferring HQ or 20 lines/mm
mammographic images.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
12. Make setups for gradation correction as required. 15. Click downward arrow in the
NOTE field to select device attribute of other connected equipment
This setup item is displayed only when the competing brand (HD_FILE for HI-C655 or QA-WS and OD_FILE for ODF).
PACS LUT adjustment function key (one of the Plus Standard Key
functions) is installed.
16. Set up the following, as necessary.
OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : S
elect when setting the minimum pixel value to
white and the maximum pixel value to black.
MONOCHROME2 : S
black and the maximum pixel value to white.
OE030001.EPS NOTE
NOTE Photometric Interpretation can be selected only when the following
Setups are possible for gradation correction only when CR Image settings are performed.
Storage or Private CR Storage is selected for the Service Class. Abstract Syntax : CR Image Storage
Note that setups are not possible when Private Unstandardized Role : SCP
CR Storage is selected. LUT Operation : Unable to apply LUT Operation or
Apply LUT correction process to the image
For setup details, see Display Gradation Correction Setup Image Processing : PROC
13. Change the following setting as required. 17. Click .
18. Click .
Yes : To transfer annotation-embedded images.
No : To transfer images not embedded with annotation.
14. To handle two-byte characters, check the box A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
( to ).
20. Click .
REFERENCE
needs not be checked. Even if checked, it will be The system saves the setup data.
disregarded.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution 3. Make the following settings.

For an automatic image distribution to equipment of HD_FILE attribute, Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in
set up DISTRIBUTION CODE. .
NOTE Click downward arrow of

Yes ahead of time the setting (item 3 of SYSTEM CONFIG to select equipments
5.CSL/IDT FUNCTION) under Enable Distribution Code Setup of the host or AE name (HIC655a-SCP as in the Setup example).
4. Click .
EQUIPMENT.
1. Click of the Setup Configuration

Item window.
saved.
A list of destination equipment for automatic image distribution
appears on the right-side area of the window.
6. Click .
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT

To automatically transfer images to the ODF, set up CONNECTING
00000410.EPS EQUIPNET as directed below.
2. Click . 1. Click on the Setup

The Distribution Code window opens. A list of registered equipment units appears on the right side of the
window.
OE000003.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)

2. Click .
Use the procedure below if the UID issuance method needs to be
The CONNECTING EQUIPMENT window opens. changed depending on the specifications of other connected equipment
which the image is transferred to.
3. Make the following settings. For default settings, see Table: List of UID settings.
1. Click the mark of of the Setup
and select function (OD_FILE) of the connected equipment. Configuration Item window.
NOTE
With software version A00, HD_FILE can be selected in the
2. Click .
Function box. However, even though HD_FILE has been The content of the setup items for the CL system information
selected, no images will be transferred to equipment of HD_FILE appears on the right-side area of the window.
and select equipment (ODF

host name).
4. Click . 00000408.EPS

6. Click .
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
3. Make configuration settings as follows for UID issuance. No Name Selection Meaning
Table List of UID settings (IMAGE MODALITY) 39 UID YES Whether or not to issue a
Issuance Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
No. Name Selection Meaning about a NO Instance UID when
9 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a function Does not issue a new UID. shuttering processing or
after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP (except Image energy subtraction
ID Information NO Instance UID when any ID Processing) to processing condition is
Does not issue a new UID. information is modified on change to the modified on the CL.
the CL. image
themselves
10 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a
after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP 45 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a
Normalized NO Instance UID when image after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
Parameter Does not issue a new UID. normalization conditions are Trimming NO Instance UID when trimming
modified on the CL. Parameter Does not issue a new UID. information is modified.

after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP 46 UID Inssuance YES Whether or not to issue a
Image NO Instance UID when image after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
Processing Does not issue a new UID. processing conditions are FNC NO Instance UID when a FNC
Parameter modified on the CL. Parameter Does not issue a new UID. parameter is modified.
12 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to output an

Before Issues a new UID. SOP Instance UID as the : Default setting
Sending NO UID of a processed CR
Processed
Data
Does not issue a new UID. image when outputting
processed images from the
CL. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
13 DICOM Series 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 Setup of Series Instance UID
Generation Series - 1 image issuance logic.
Logic Issues a number so that it
has multiple series for one See 5. Click .
study and only one image for 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE The system saves the setup data.
one series.
0: 1 Study - N series MODALITY under
and 1 Series - M image MU: Maintenance
Issues a number so that it Utility.
has multiple series for one
study and multiple images for
one series.
0: 1 Study - 1 series and 1
Series - N image
Issues a number so that it
has only one series for one
one series.
: Default setting
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment
2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements 2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected
See 3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection Equipment
Set up DICOM CR Storage in accordance with the software
specifications of other connected equipment so that it can receive
images from the CL.
For the HI-C655
1. Select Close from the Config (F) menu. See 5.3.1 Setup Using hic655a under Installation of the
The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window. HI-C655 Service Manual when other connected equipment is
the HI-C655.
For the QA-WS
See 5.3.1 Settings on QA-WS under Installation of the QA-
WS Service Manual.
Other devices
See DICOM-related descriptions included in the manual of
each device.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout 3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected

Equipment
After the CL-AP is started, makes sure that images can be transferred
from the CL to other connected equipment. Transfer images accumulated in the CL to other connected equipment.
3.1 CL-AP Startup 1. Select an image for transfer, then transfer it to other
3.2 Image Transfer to Other For details of the image transfer procedures, see the CL
Connected Equipment Operation Manual.

3.1 CL-AP Startup For details of the transferred image checking procedures, see
the operation manual attached to each equipment.
Fuji Film and FCR.
In about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)

Have the following item ready for use for file backup:

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed Images)
CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer
Setup example of
of Processed Images) other connected equipment
HOST name : Other01*
Described herein is the procedure for transferring processed images IP address : 172.16.1.30*
(Standard Image) from the CR-IR346/348CL to other connected AE name (Provider) : Other01-SCP*
equipment using the DICOM CR Storage Standard function. Port number : 5001*
Service Class : CR Image Storage
NOTE
Transfer Syntax : Implicit VR Little Endian*
The CR-IR346/348CL and the image transmission equipment are
abbreviated hereafter CL and other connected equipment,
respectively.
Other connected
equipment
(Other maker's equipment)
Prior to setup
TCP/IP
CL requirements
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. FRUP DICOM CR Storage (Standard)
Option keys are needed. RU
CL
Key Name Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED key Generation of CR Storage SCU
Standard processed images CL setup example
Requirements of other connected equipment HOST name : fcr-csl*
Other connected equipment must have been set up accordingly. IP address : 172.16.1.20*
The DICOM CR Storage (SCP) Service Class must be supported. AE name (User) : CL-SCU*
Service Class : CR Image Storage
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need be

00000401.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed Images)

Make setups for inputting/outputting 2. Software Setup

images via DICOM.
Install the option key and reinstall
the AP key. Make then the following
setups.
Setup of information (AE name,
device attribute, Service Class,
etc.) on this equipment
Registration of information (AE
name, device attribute, port
number, Service Class, handling of
HQ images, etc.) on other
connected equipment
Setup for automatic image
distribution code
EQUIPMENT (OD attribute only)
Setup for UID issuance
Setup for name elements
Make sure that images can be 3. Connection

transferred from the CL to other Checkout

Back up the configuration file.
00000451.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
equipment
00000044.EPS
NOTES
The cable type applicable to this CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)

2.1.1 Installing the Processed Image Transmission
Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other
Option Key
items. To activate the processed image transmission function, the IR346
DICOM IM PROCESSED option key is needed.
2.1.1 Installing the Processed Image
Transmission Option Key
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility NOTE
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment
for the DICOM CR Storage Function In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
Connected Equipment for the DICOM Tasks done on
CR Storage Function the CL
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image 2. Click .
Distribution (DISTRIBUTION CODE) A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT
2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Tasks done 00000046.EPS
Equipment on other
connected
equipment 3. Click .
The installation start window opens again.
4. Click same as in steps 2 and 3, then click

.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key 2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility

Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall Windows starts up and then the CL-AP starts running in about one
minute.
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
REFERENCE
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility as
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens. directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
NOTE
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, 2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of
the window.
2. Click .
MU000031.EPS

00000419.EPS
3. Click .
MU000035.EPS

NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a DICOM CR Storage Function
steps to start the Service Utility. Make settings for the following information items of this equipment.
) menu.
Other (timeout settings, etc.)
3. From the Start menu, sequentially choose Programs, window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
window opens.
00000049.EPS
00000048.EPS
00000091.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4. Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are 6. Enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL-SCU)
displayed.
in the field.
CL host name NOTE
There is no need to set the port number in .

CL IP address
disregarded even if it is set.
00000092.EPS
NOTE
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is 7. Click .
The Application Entity List window opens. 00000443.EPS
00000094.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
8. Click downward arrow in the 10. Click downward arrow in the
field to select Service field to select the

Class (e.g.: CR Image Storage). Transfer Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian).
REFERENCES Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected)
If CR Image Storage is selected, items that need not be set will Service Class ImplictVR ExplictVR JPEG
be hidden on the DICOM Setup window. LittleEndian LittleEndian Lossless
Verification is the Service Class used to verify connection CR Image Storage
between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, Verification
the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify 11. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value
Connection in MU: Maintenance Utility. as necessary.
REFERENCES
9. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for the To transfer large-capacity image data such as mammograms,
Role. check the time required to transfer those images using the
REFERENCES [Timeout1: ] box a time long enough to perform image transfer
If SCU is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on processing.
the DICOM Setup window. It is not necessary to check .
For DICOM SCU settings on this equipment (THIS HOST (IIP)), Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 9.
two or more Service Class settings (e.g., CR Image Storage, above is the SCU.
Private CR Storage, and other) can be selected for a single
Application Entity. Moreover, two or more Transfer Syntax settings
(e.g., JPEGLossless, ImplicitVRLittleEndian, and other) can be
selected for a single Service Class.
field to select OTHER for the device attribute.
NOTE
13. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function
REFERENCES Host name and IP address of other connected equipment
Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of other
Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be connected equipment
changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, device attribute (Attribute)
Setups for gradation correction
.
from HQ to standard image, etc.)
If the key is clicked, currently selected items are

deleted. 1. Select of the Setup Configuration
AE name of this equipment

Enter the Host name (e.g.: Other01) in the
field.
field.
Select DICOM.
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device attribute (Attribute) 00000096.EPS

saved.
16. Click .
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
The Application Entity List window opens for setup of information The DICOMSetup window opens.
on other connected equipment.
00000443.EPS
6. Click the downward arrow mark in the
field and select the

CR Image Storage function.
00000098.EPS
NOTE
4. Make the following settings. Do not select two or more Service Class settings for a single
Enter the AE name of other connected equipment Application Entity (e.g., CR Image Storage and Private CR
Storage). Further, do not select two or more Transfer Syntax
(e.g.: Other01-SCP) in the settings for a single Service Class (e.g., JPEG Lossless and
Implicit VR Little Endian).
field. Even if you select two or more settings, only the first one takes
NOTES effect.
Never fail to enter the SCP AE name. REFERENCES

Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly.
If CR Image Storage is selected, items that need not be set will
be hidden on the DICOM Setup window.
Enter the Port number of other connected equipment (e.g.: 5001) Verification is the Service Class used to verify connection
in the field.
7. Because the AE of other connected equipment is the

Provider, make sure that (SCP) is selected for the
Role.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
8. Click downward arrow in the 10. To transfer processed images to other connected
equipment, select ( ) within the
field to select Transfer
Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian). field.
Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected)

Service Class ImplictVR ExplictVR JPEG 11. If you have selected at step 10. above, click
CR Image Storage downward arrow of as required to change the
Verification
setup value.
NOTE 10 : Select when generating 10bit processed image output.
Be sure to select the same Transfer Syntax as that selected for this 12 : Select when generating 12bit processed image output.
equipment.
NOTE
9. Change the following settings as required. either CR Image Storage or MG Image Storage For Presentation
is selected for Service Class and PROC is selected for Image
Processing.
Setting of
ST : Select if other connected equipment cannot receive 12. To handle two-byte characters, check the box
HQ images. ( to ).
images. REFERENCE
ST & HQ & SH : Select if the other connected equipment can
receive 20 lines/mm mammographic images as needs not be checked. Even if checked, it will be
well. disregarded.
Setting of
ST : Select when transferring standard images only. field to select device attribute of other connected equipment
HQ/SH : Select when transferring HQ or 20 lines/mm (HD_FILE).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
14. Make setups for gradation correction as required. 16. Set up the following, as necessary.
NOTE
This setup item is displayed only when the competing brand
PACS LUT adjustment function key (one of the Plus Standard Key
functions) is installed.
OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : S
MONOCHROME2 : S
NOTE
Photometric Interpretation can be selected only when the following
settings are performed.
OE030001.EPS Abstract Syntax : CR Image Storage
For setup details, see Display Gradation Correction Setup under Role : SCP
FR5: Function-specific Reference. LUT Operation : Unable to apply LUT Operation or
15. Change the following setting as required. Image Processing : PROC
17. Click .
Yes : To transfer annotation-embedded images. The system returns to the Application Entity List window.
18. Click .

saved.
20. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution 3. Make the following settings.

(DISTRIBUTION CODE) Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in
For an automatic image distribution to equipment of HD_FILE attribute, .
set up DISTRIBUTION CODE.
Click downward arrow of
NOTE
to select equipments
Yes ahead of time the setting (item 3 of SYSTEM CONFIG host or AE name (e.g.: Other01-SCP).
5.CSL/IDT FUNCTION) under Enable Distribution Code Setup of the
4. Click .
EQUIPMENT.
1. Click of the Setup Configuration A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
Item window. saved.
A list of destination equipment for automatic image distribution

appears on the right-side area of the window. 6. Click .
00000247.EPS
2. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT 3. Make the following settings.

To automatically transfer images to the ODF, set up CONNECTING Click the downward arrow within
EQUIPNET as directed below.
1. Click on the Setup NOTE

Configuration Item window. With software version A00, HD_FILE can be selected in the
A list of registered equipment units appears on the right side of the Function box. However, even though HD_FILE has been
window. selected, no images will be transferred to equipment of HD_FILE
(DISTRIBUTION CODE)
OE000004.EPS
2. Click . and select equipment (ODF AE

name).
4. Click .

6. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

Use the procedure below if the UID issuance method needs to be
changed depending on the specifications of other connected equipment
For default settings, see Table: List of UID settings.
1. Click the mark of of the Setup

2. Click .
The content of the setup items for the CL system information
00000248.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3. Make configuration settings as follows for UID issuance. No Name Selection Meaning
Table List of UID settings (IMAGE MODALITY) 39 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a
about a Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
No Name Selection Meaning function NO Instance UID when
9 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a (except Image Does not issue a new UID. shuttering processing or
after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP Processing) to energy subtraction
ID Information NO Instance UID when any ID change to the processing condition is
Does not issue a new UID. information is modified on image modified on the CL.
the CL. themselves
10 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a 45 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a
after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
Normalized NO Instance UID when image Trimming NO Instance UID when trimming
Parameter Does not issue a new UID. normalization conditions are Parameter Does not issue a new UID. information is modified.
modified on the CL.
46 UID Inssuance YES Whether or not to issue a
11 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP FNC NO Instance UID when a FNC
Image NO Instance UID when image Parameter Does not issue a new UID. parameter is modified.
Processing Does not issue a new UID. processing conditions are
Parameter modified on the CL. : Default setting
12 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to output an
Before Issues a new UID. SOP Instance UID as the 4. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
Sending NO UID of a processed CR
Processed Does not issue a new UID. image when outputting
saved.
Data processed images from the
CL.
13 DICOM Series 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 Setup of Series Instance UID 5. Click .
Logic Issues a number so that it The system saves the setup data.
has multiple series for one See 3.4 Configuration
study and only one image for Details 1. IMAGE
one series. MODALITY under
0: 1 Study - N series MU: Maintenance
and 1 Series - M image Utility.
one series.
Series - N image
one series.
: Default setting
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements 2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected
See 3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection Equipment
under MU: Maintenance U tility.
Set up DICOM CR Storage in accordance with the software
specifications of other connected equipment so that it can receive
images from the CL.


010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.1 CL-AP Startup

Equipment
3.2 Image Transfer to Other For details of the image transfer procedures, see the CL
Connected Equipment Operation Manual.

3.1 CL-AP Startup
For details of the transferred image checking procedures, see
Fuji Film and FCR.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817


010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print)
CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L
Other connected equipment
(DICOM Print) HOST name : FN-PS551 *
IP address : 172.16.0.41 *
Described below are setup procedures used for printing images onto AE name (Provider) : Printer1*
the FN-PS551, DRYPIX or FM-DP L from the CR-IR346/348CL using Port number : 104*
the DICOM Print function.
Service Class : Basic Grayscale Print
NOTE Transfer Syntax : Implict VR Little Endian
The CR-IR346/348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL. The FN- E-i/f

PS551 and DRYPIX or FM-DP L are abbreviated other connected Other
equipment. connected Printer*
equipment (FM-DPL, etc.)
Before setup * Only when the other

connected equipment
CL requirements TCP/IP is the FN-PS551.
Software version required: A00 or later. FRUP DICOM Print
The option key is required.
RU
CL
IR346 DICOM Print key Basic Grayscale Print (SCU)
Requirements of other connected equipment CL setup example
FN-PS551 HOST name : fcr-csl*

Other connected equipment must have been set up accordingly. IP address : 172.16.1.20*
Software version required: A04 or later. AE name (User) : CL-SCU*
Service Class : Basic Grayscale Print
DRYPIX Transfer Syntax : Implicit VR Little Endian*
Other connected equipment main unit must have been set up
accordingly. Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which
Software version required : A00 or later. need to be changed depending on the equipment or
network environment. 00000395.EPS
FM-DP L
Other connected equipment main unit must have been set up
REFERENCE
accordingly.
Software version required: B03 or later. The default DRYPIX user AE name is FCR-CSL.
A network board (LAN90A) is required.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
Overall operation flow 1. Hardware Setup

CL to other connected equipment. If Connect the CL to other connected equipment via network as illustrated
other connected equipment is the below.
FN-PS551, use an E-i/f cable to
connect it to the printer. FN-PS551
10BASE-T/
Make setups for printing images onto 2. Software Setup 100BASE-TX Cable
other connected equipment using the
TCP/IP
DICOM Print function.
RU CL FN-PS551 Printer
setups.
Setup of information (AE name, E-i/f Cable
device attribute, Service Class, etc.) 00000396.EPS
on this equipment
Setup of information (AE name, DRYPIX or FM-DP L
device attribute, port number, 10BASE-T/
Service Class, DICOM Print output 100BASE-TX Cable
conditions, handling of HQ images,
etc.) on other connected equipment TCP/IP
Registration of a printer for RU CL DRY PIX/
automatic image printout after the FM-DPL
completion of a study OE000005.EPS
Setup for film annotation character

output format NOTES
Setup for name components Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL
Make sure that images can be The cable type applicable to these equipment models (CR-IR346CL,
3. Verifying the
FN-PS5551, DRYPIX and FM-DP L) is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant
transferred from the CL to other Connection
UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
connected equipment and printed
correctly from it.
Back up the configuration file. 4. Backing Up the

Setup File
00000486.EPS
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)

2.1.1 Installation of the DICOM Print Option Key
Set up the items in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other items. To activate the DICOM Print function on other connected equipment,
the IR346 DICOM PRINT option key is needed.
2.1.1 Installation of the DICOM Print Option 1. Insert the optional key CD into the PC.
Key
Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup NOTE
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
Equipment for the DICOM Print double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
Function
Connected Equipment for the DICOM Tasks done on 2. Click .
Print Function the CL
2.1.6 Registration of Printer That A window opens to indicate the completion of option key
Automatically Outputs Print Films installation.
Upon Completion of checkout
2.1.7 Film Annotation Character Format
Setup
2.1.8 Changes in Name Elements
2.1.9 Setup for Film Sorting Function
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown 00000085.EPS
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Tasks done 3. Click .

Equipment on other
connected The system returns to the desktop screen.
equipment
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.1.3 Service Utility Startup

Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00) to reinstall the AP Windows starts up and then the CL-AP starts running in about one
key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below. minute.
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. REFERENCE

After a while, the installation start window automatically opens. If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility as
directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
NOTE
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. 2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
the window.
2. Click .
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS The password entry window opens.
3. Click .

MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a DICOM Print Function
steps to start the Service Utility: Makes settings for the following information items of this equipment.
) menu. Other (timeout settings, etc.)
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
window opens.
00000131.EPS
00000397.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4. Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are 6. Enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL-SCU)
displayed.
in the field.
CL host name
REFERENCE
When the connected equipment is DRYPIX or FM-DP L, enter
CL IP address FCR-CSL. As the AE name of the connected equipment (SCU),
FCR-CSL has been set for DRYPIX and FM-DP L.
00000441.EPS
NOTE
NOTE
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is There is no need to set the port number in .
connected to a network. When selecting SCU as the Role, the set port number will be
00000442.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
7. Click .
10. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value
as necessary.
(Determine 300 when connecting the CL to DRYPIX-series
equipment.)
REFERENCE
It is not necessary to check .
above is the SCU.
00000443.EPS
field to select OTHER for the device attribute.
NOTE
field to select Service To set the SCU AE on the CL, always select OTHER for the
device attribute.
Class (e.g.: Basic Grayscale Print).
REFERENCE
Verification is the Service Class used to verify connection 12. Click .
Verification must be selected. The system returns to the Application Entity List window.
the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify
Connection under MU: Maintenance Utility.
9. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for the

Role.
REFERENCE
the DICOM Setup window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Equipment for the DICOM Print Function
REFERENCES Host name and IP address of other connected equipment
Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of other
Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be connected equipment
changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, device attribute (Attribute)
Settings for DICOM Print output conditions
.
Register the necessary information items according to the flow shown
deleted.
below.
Note that the setup procedure when the FM-DPL is connected will differ
AE name of this equipment from that used for other devices.
Host name and IP address of other

connected equipment
AE name (Application Entity Name) and ......A

port number of other connected equipment
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and ......B

device attribute
Settings for DICOM Print output conditions ......C
Other (usage of two-byte characters,

settings for data conversion from HQ to ......D
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device attribute (Attribute) 00000399.EPS
standard image, etc.)

When the FM-DPL is connected, repeat step
A through D so that the 20pix image AE name
saved.
is registered.
15. Click .
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Host name and IP address of other connected 3. Click .

equipment
The Application Entity List window opens for setup of information
1. Select of the Setup Configuration on other connected equipment.
Enter the Host name (e.g.: FN-PS551) in the

field.
field.
Select DICOM.
00000444.EPS
REFERENCE
Set as follows when the DRYPIX or FM-DP L is connected.
Host name: fujiprinter (default)
IP address: 172.16.1.30 (default)
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of 2. Click .

1. Make the following settings on the Application Entity List
window.
Enter the AE name of other connected equipment (e.g.: Printer1)
in the field.
NOTE
Enter the Port number of other connected equipment (e.g.: 104) 00000443.EPS
in the field.
REFERENCE
Set as follows when the DRYPIX or FM-DPL is connected.
DRYPIX
Application Entity Name : DRYPIX (default)
Port number : 17238 (default)
FM-DPL
Application Entity Name : FM-DP L (for 10pix images)*
Note
FM-DP LD (for 20pix images)* Note

Port number : 17238 (for both 10pix and 20pix
images)* Note
(* Note) Because these setting values are not the FM-DP L
defaults, be sure to set them in accordance with the
FM-DP L values.
To output 10pixels/mm and 20pixels/mm images mixed,
make settings for an Application Entity Name available
for 10pixels images.
When doing so, be sure to check SH.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device Settings for DICOM Print output conditions
attribute 1. Make necessary settings for the following DICOM Print
output conditions.
1. Click downward arrow of the Set them as shown in the table below if the other connected
equipment is the FN-PS551, DRYPIX or FM-DP L.
Class (e.g.: Basic Grayscale Print).
REFERENCE
For details of connection checkout, see 7. Verifying the
Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify
2. Because the AE of the FN-PS551 is the Provider, make sure

that (SCP) is selected for the Role.
DICOM Print output conditions

OE000036.EPS
field to select PRINT for the device attribute. Media Type BLUE FILM (Default)
Film Destination PROCESSOR (Default)
Mag Type CUBIC (Default* 2)
Smoothing Type Blank (Default)
Recognition Coed NONE (Default)
Default Bin Number 1 (Default)
Film Size ID (Change as needed.)* 1
Requested Image Size SUPPORTED (Default)
Dmax 3.0 (Default)
10 Bits Stored Supported Use check mark. (Default)
* 1 Set this item in accordance with the film size available on the
printer.
* 2 For software version A00, BILINEAR is the default.
For details of settings for the DICOM Print output conditions,
see 4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions under
Print Output Function of FR1: Function-specific
Reference.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Other (usage of two-byte characters, settings for data 2.1.6 Registration of Printer That Automatically
conversion from HQ to standard image, etc.) Outputs Print Films Upon Completion of
Checkout CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
1. Check ( to ) of Acceptable Density if other
Use this procedure to register a printer that automatically outputs print
connected equipment can receive mammographic images films upon completion of checkout.
(20pixel/mm) as well.
A printer that outputs print films only via the QA operation needs not to
NOTES be registered here.
To enable transfer of 20pixel/mm images, an Application Entity for
output of 20pixel/mm images needs be set up in other connected 1. From the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup
equipment such as FM-DP L. Configuration Item].
When the connected equipment is FM-DP L, perform setup on the
image output channel so that 20pixel/mm images can be
transferred.
2. To handle two-byte characters, check the box

( to ).
REFERENCE
needs not be checked. Even if checked, it
will be disregarded.
00000131.EPS

3. Click .
4. Click .

00000404.EPS

saved.
6. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2. Click . 2.1.7 Film Annotation Character Format Setup

A list of registered equipment appears in the right-hand area of the Perform the following film annotation character format setup procedure,
window. for instance, to specify the image information to be printed out onto film,
the annotation character format, and the use of an image-frame.
REFERENCE
The default film annotation character format for print output is basically
the same as for printouts generated by the FCR 5000 Series.
00000081.EPS Film output differences between the CL and the 5000 Series
are stated in 2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation
Character Format under Print Output Function in
3. Click . FR1: Function-specific Reference.

1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, click the
4. Perform the following setup steps: sign within the field.
2. Click .
of the connected device. the window.
field and select the AE name
For details on the setup procedure, see 2. Setup Necessary
(e.g.: Printer1) of the FN-PS551. When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format, under
Print Output Function in FR1: Function-specific
Reference.
5. Click .

6. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save. saved.

saved. 5. Click .

7. Click .
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2.2 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment
2.1.8 Changes in Name Elements 2.2 Software Setup for Other Connected
When the DICOM is connected, change patient name elements as Equipment
necessary.
Set up the DICOM Print function as follows so that other connected
See 3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection in equipment can receive images coming from the CL.
FN-PS551
See 7. Service Utility in the Maintenance section of the
2.1.9 Setup for Film Sorting Function FN-PS551 Service Manual.
Film sorting conditions must be set up for the printer that supports the
film sorting function. DRYPIX
See 8.1 Network Connection (DICOM) in IN: Installation of
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function under
the DRYPIX Service Manual.
FM-DP L
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown See 8. Checking the Network (DICOM) Connection in the
Installation section of the FM-DP L Service Manual.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
3. Verifying the Connection 3.1 Starting the CL-AP
This section describes the procedures for printing images onto the 1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs,
printer from the CL for film annotation character format verification Fuji Film, and then FCR.
purposes.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
Version A software
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation
Character Format
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation If any abnormality is found, see Print Output Function
Character Format
When the FM-DP L is connected, print both 10pix- and 20pix-
images.
For details on the print output procedure, see FCR XG-1
CR-IR346CL in the CL Operation Manual.
2. Check whether the film annotation character format

information entered from the CL is properly printed out onto
the film. Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise
abnormal character printings.
REFERENCE
The example in the figure below represents a printout that would be
(image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN). When the default
settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) are printed out.
(12) IP number
(4) Patient ID
(7) Gender
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP 0000000001 MARY ADAMS [F] 23
1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE:50% RT-04
01

(14) Exposure menu name (11) Reduction ratio
(17) Exposure time
(15) Normalization conditions + corrections
(19) Technologist's code 00000034.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)


010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output)
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series
(FINP: Print Output) HOST name : FCR-CSL*
IP address : 172.16.1.20*
This chapter presents the procedure for printing images using the FINP
via the FN-PS551 or 5000 series.
CL
IMPORTANT
Print output
When using the FINP, the film character format specified will be printed
Image transfer
out in accordance with the film format file defined in the FN-PS551 or TCP/IP
5000 series. Have the film character format be set up on the FN-PS551
or 5000 series. FRUP
Note that a film character format set up on the CL will not be enabled. Other
RU connected LP
equipment
NOTE
The CR-IR346/348CL and FN-PS 551 or 5000 series are HOST name : FN-PS551*
abbreviated hereafter simply CL and other connected equipment, IP address : 172.16.1.30*
respectively.
Device attribute : PRINT*
Protocol ID : 110*
Prior to setup Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need be
CL requirements changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
00000252.EPS

The FINP image input/output option key (IR346 DMS NET-WORK
IN-OUT) is necessary.
FN-PS551 requirements
The FN-PS551 main unit must have been set up accordingly.
Software version required: A04 or later.
5000 series requirements

The 5000 series main unit must have been set up accordingly.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output)

CL to other connected equipment and
an E-i/f cable to connect it to a printer.
Make setups for transferring images 2. Software Setup

to other connected equipment.
setups.
Setup for other connected equipment
(device attributes, data compression
type, etc.)
Perform the following as required.
Setup for changing the image
compression type depending on the
MPM code.
Registration of printer used for
automatic image printout when a
study is completed.
Transfer images from the CL to other 3. Connection

connected equipment to make sure that Checkout
films can be printed from the printer.
Back up the configuration file. 4. Backing up the

Setup File
00000255.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Cable
TCP/IP
Other
RU CL connected Printer
equipment
E-i/f Cable
00000253.EPS
NOTES
The cable type applicable to these equipment models (CR-IR346CL
and FN-PS5551) is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of
category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup 2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key

Installation
Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other To transfer images to other connected equipment using the FINP, the
items. IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT option key is needed.
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key 1. Insert the option key CD into the PC.
Installation Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
NOTE
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2. Click .
2.4 Printout Setup
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other
Connected Equipment (ALL OTHER Tasks done
NODES) on the CL
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data
Compression Type Depending on the
MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION
TYPE)
00000085.EPS
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image

Printout When a Study is Completed 3. Click .
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT The installation start window opens again.
4. Click .
2.7 Software Setup for Other Connected Tasks done 5. Click .

Equipment on other The system return to the desktop screen.
CL host name and IP address settings connected
Basic printout settings equipment 6. Remove the CD from the PC.
Film character format settings REFERENCE
keys, for image input and output, are stored on the FINP image input/
output option key CD.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.3 Service Utility Startup

1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. REFERENCE

After a while, the installation start window automatically opens. If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility
mode as directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
NOTE
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. 2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
the window.
2. Click .
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS The password entry window opens.
3. Click .
4. Remove the CD from the PC. MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Printout Setup
REFERENCE 2.4 Printout Setup

If you cannot complete step 2. above from the initial window within
a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the Set up the printout function as follows for other connected equipment.
following steps to start the Service Utility mode.
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down on the (or Setup overview
Service Utility Setup Configuration Item window
) menu.
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR. I

II
The Service Utility mode starts. The IIP Service Utility window
opens.
00000054.EPS
Setup of information on other connected equipment (I on the window

display)
OE000034.EPS
Selection of protocol used (FINP) by other connected equipment
4. Click [Setup Configuration Item]. Setup of the protocol ID (FINP100/110) of other connected
The Setup Cofiguration Item window opens. equipment
Setup of attribute of other connected equipment
Setups for handling HQ images and image compression type
Setup for changing the image data compression type depending on

the MPM code (II on the window display)
Perform this setup only when transferring images by changing the
data compression type depending on the MPM code.
NOTE
To enable this setup, the field must have
been activated before setting the image data compression type (ALL
OTHER NODES).
00000077.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2.4 Printout Setup
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected 4. Enter the host name (e.g.: FN-PS551) of other connected
Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES)
equipment in .
window. 5. Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.30) of other connected
equipment in .
6. Make sure that is selected in the

column.
7. Click .
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
00000436.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4 Printout Setup
8. Set information of other connected equipment as follows. III. Select if other connected equipment can receive
HQ images.
Select if it can receive mammographic images as well.
I
IV. Select when transferring HQ images to other
V. Select the image data compression type used for transferring
images to other connected equipment.
II
Select when transferring images by
changing the data compression type depending on the MPM
code.
See 2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data
III Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code (FINP
COMPRESSION TYPE).
VI. To transfer annotation-embedded images, select .
IV Select to transfer images not embedded with annotation.
VI
00000437.EPS
I. Select the protocol ID ( ) that other connected

equipment supports.
II. Select the device attribute ( ) for other connected
equipment.
REFERENCE
Select PRINT for the 5000 series and FN-PS551.
Select HD_FILE for the HI-C/QA-WS system.
Select OD_FILE for the ODF system.
Select OTHER for the CL.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4 Printout Setup
9. Click . 10. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.

The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window. saved.
REFERENCES
11. Click .
Items just have been set up will appear on the right-side area of
the Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be The system saves the setup data.
.

deleted.
Device attribute Protocol ID
Handling of HQ images
Image data compression type Annotation transfer
00000438.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4 Printout Setup
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data 3. Set I. and II. on the display as follows.
Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code
(FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)
Perform the following settings only when is
I
selected for the image data compression type in ALL OTHER NODES.
1. Select of the Setup Configuration II

Item window.
A list showing the data compression type for each MPM code will
be displayed on the right-side area of the window. 00000440.EPS
List showing the data compression type for each MPM code I. Select the exposure menu name.
REFERENCE
The MPM code that is for the exposure menu selected will be
displayed in the MPM Code column. Using the User Utility, the
user thus can view which MPM code is for the exposure menu
selected.
II. Select the image data compression type.
4. Click .

The MPM code set as above and the image data compression
00000439.EPS
type for the code will appear on the right side of this window.
5. To set image data compression types for other MPM codes,

2. Click . repeat steps 2. to 4.
The FINP Compression Type window opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout When a Study is Completed CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic 4. Click .

Image Printout When a Study is
Completed CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
Described herein is the procedure used for registering the printer for 5. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
automatic image printout when a study is completed. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
For a printer that outputs prints only through the QA operation, no saved.
registration is required at this step.
6. Click .
1. Click on the Setup
Configuration Item window. The system saves the setup data.
A list of registered equipment appears in the right-hand area of the

window.
00000081.EPS
2. Click .

of the connected device.
field and select the host name

(e.g.: FN-PS551) of other connected equipment.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown 2.7 Software Setup for Other Connected
Equipment
Configuration Item window. Make the following settings on other connected equipment.
The system return to the IIP Service Utility window.
FN-PS 551
2. Click [Exit Service Utility]. CL host name and IP address settings
Basic printout settings
The system return to the desktop screen. Film character format settings
See 7. Service Utility in the Maintenance section of the FN-PS551
Service Manual.
5000 series
EQUIPMENT (EQUIP file) settings
HOST ADDRESS (HOST file) settings
Film annotation character format (PRINT file) settings
See MU: Maintenance Utility of the 5000 series Service Manuals.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout 3.2 Printout Checkout

Transfer images from the CL to other connected equipment to make
After the CL-AP has been started up, make sure that images can be sure that films can be printed from the printer.
transferred from the CL to the FN-PS551.
3.1 CL-AP Startup

For details on the print output procedure, see FCR XG-1
CR-IR346CL in the CL Operation Manual.
3.2 Printout Checkout
2. Make sure that the output queue of other connected
equipment displays images transferred from the CL.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. When prints are output to the printer, make sure that those
printouts are as per the film character format that has been
1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs, set up on other connected equipment.
Fuji Film and FCR.
Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise abnormal
In about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens. character printings.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)


010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online)

CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online)
For the RIS, add a serial connector 1. Hardware Setup
Presented herein is the procedure used for setup of the ID Online and use a serial cable to connect the
function that acquires patient information from the RIS. CL to the RIS.
For the IDC4, use a network cable to
connect the CL to the IDC4.
NOTES
The connection system will differ with each other for RIS and IDC4.
The CR-IR346/348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL. Install the patient information online 2. CL Software Setup
option key, reinstall the AP key and
make setups for the patient
information online configuration file.
Before setup
CL requirements Make sure that the patient information 3. Verifying the
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. can be received from the RIS or IDC4 Connection
Software version required: A00 or later. and the ID Online function works
properly.
The patient information online option key (IR346 ID ONLINE) is
needed.
Back up the patient information online 4. Backing Up the
function configuration file. Setup File
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector [Only when using the serial i/f]
1. Hardware Setup 1.1 Adding a Serial Connector

[Only when using the serial i/f]
Set up hardware as follows for the CL and RIS.
When using the serial i/f, add a serial connector as appropriate.
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector Add a serial connector to the For details on how to add a serial connector, see 1. Adding a
[Only when using the CL-PC (only when using the Serial Connector in FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial
serial i/f] serial i/f). Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.
1.2 Connecting the Cable RIS:

Use a dedicated serial cable to
connect the CL to the RIS.
IDC4:
Use a network cable to connect
the CL to the RIS.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

RIS (serial i/f cable)
Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
When the MOXA board is mounted, use a dedicated serial cable, a
relay adapter and a conversion cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
Serial connector
CL RIS
Dedicated serial cable/dedicated serial cable +

relay adapter + conversion cable 00000492.EPS
IDC4
Use a network cable to connect the CL to the IDC4.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Cable
TCP/IP
CL IDC4
OE000008.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connectors.
The cable type applicable to this CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation
2. CL Software Setup 2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key

Installation
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key To use the ID Online function, the IR346 ID ONLINE option key is
Installation needed.

Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.3 Driver Installation NOTE

2.5 Port and Sevice Utility Setup 2. Click .

A window opens to indicate the completion of option key
installation.
2.6 Configuration Setup
2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection
2.6.2 Configuration Setup for IDC4 Connection
00000241.EPS
3. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.3 Driver Installation

If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. When using the PSI04A board and the MOXA board, install the relevant
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall driver.
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below. For details of the driver installation procedure, see 2. Installing
the Driver in FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. under FR: Function-specific Reference.
NOTE
2. Click .
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Service Utility Startup REFERENCE

1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs, 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down on the (or
The CL-AP will start up.
) menu.
sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of 2. Click [OK] while holding down the <Shift> key on the shutdown
the window. window.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner. Fuji Film, and FCR.

MU000031.EPS
window opens.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) 00000403.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup 2.6 Configuration Setup

When the PSI04A board is not to be used with software version V7.1 (B) Set up the following configuration items for the ID Online function.
or later, the port and Service Utility setup must be performed accordingly Setting items will differ with each other for the RIS and IDC-IV.
after adding a serial connector.
RIS 2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection
For details of the port and Service Utility setup procedure, see IDC4 2.6.2 Configuration Setup for IDC4 Connection
3. Port and Service Utility Settings in FR20 Adding and Setting
the Serial Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.
Configuration Item Remarks RIS IDC4
CP850(DOSLatin1)/
31 Code set used
CP1252(WINLatin1)
Serial port No. of the CH to be inserted into the
32
number PSI board connector
33 i/f format Short/Long format
34 Various timeout
No changes are required for settings.
35 values
ID No./Reception No./Accession No.
Search key
36 (only when TypeB or Type-IDC4 is set
type
for the i/f type.)
37 i/f type TypeA/TypeB/Type-IDC4
IDC4 host
38 idc4 (default)
name
IDC4 IP
39 172.16.1.1 (default)
address
IDC4 port
40 13001 (default)
number
: Essential : As required
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection 2. Click .
1. Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the IIP Service Utility A list of IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand
area of the window.
window.
IDT/Console function setup items
00000131.EPS

OE000038.EPS
3. Select for a Latin font code set

to be used for ID online connection.
00000404.EPS
For details of the code set, see Detailed explanations in
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under
4. In accordance with the PSI board CH No., set up a serial port

number for .
5. To use extended format for the i/f format, change setting for
to 1.Long.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6. Select i/f type for . 7. When Type-B has been selected in step 6. above, select
for the search key type used.
REFERENCE
Type-A : Used when transferring ID information from the RIS (no u NOTE u
queries will be made by the CL). For the Latin font, either DOS Latin1 or WIN Latin1 code set will be
Type-B : Used when making queries by the CL with the search used.
key to acquire ID information that corresponds to the For the code set used, follow the settings in step 3.
search key from the RIS.
CL user window (Registration) : Version A software REFERENCE
0 : ID# ID No. only
1 : ID#&RECEPT# ID No. and Reception No.
2 : ID#&EXAM# ID No. and Accession No.
3 : ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM# ID No., Reception No., Accession No.
CL user window (Registration) : Version A software
If "Type-B" is selected, the search key entry box appears.

If "Type-A" is selected, the entry box does not appear.
00000493.EPS
CL user window (Registration) : Version B software
Search key
(This window represents an example when
3:ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM# has been selected.)
00000494.EPS
If "Type-B" is selected, appears on the right of the

search key entry box.
If "Type-A" is selected, the entry box does not appear.
00000122.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL user window (Registration) : Version B software 2.6.2 Configuration Setup IDC4 Connection
1. On the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup
Search key
00000131.EPS
00000120.EPS

saved.
9. Click . 00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Click . 6. With , select a key type for search

The IDT/console function setup items appear in the right-hand (search key).
area of the window.
NOTE
For the Latin font, either DOS Latin1 or WIN Latin1 code set will be
used.
For the code set used, follow the settings in step 3.
REFERENCE
0 : ID# ID No. only
1 : ID#&RECEPT# ID No. and Reception No.
2 : ID#&EXAM# ID No. and Accession No.
3 : ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM# ID No., Reception No., Accession No.
CL user window (Registration) : Version A software
OE000038.EPS
3. With , select a Latin font code

set for ID online connection.
For detailed code set descriptions, see Detailed
explanations in 3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT
FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance Utility.
4. When using an extended format as the interface format,

Search key
change the setting to 1. Long. (This window represents an example when
5. Change the setting to .
00000494.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL user window (Registration) : Version B software 2.7 Service Utility Shutdown

2. Click Exit Service Utility.

Search key
00000120.EPS
7. In the field, enter the IDC4 host

name.
8. In the field, enter the IDC4 IP

address.
9. In the field, enter the IDC4

port number.

saved.
11. Click .
The system saves the entered setup data.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Verifying the Connection Version B software
Receive patient information from the RIS to verify the CL connection.
3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout

Type-A setup checkout procedure OE000099.EPS
Type-B/Type-IDC4 setup checkout

procedure

Version A software
OE000017.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.2 Patient Information Reception Version B software
Checkout
Shown below are the procedures used for connection checkout of
Type-A, Type-B and Type-IDC4 interface setups.
Type-A setup checkout procedure

1. Enter patient information on the RIS.
Patient information transferred
The patient information entered will be transferred to the CL from the RIS OE000101.EPS
automatically.
2. Check to see that the patient information items appear on

the CL study registration display.
Version A software
Patient information transferred

from the RIS 00000496.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Type-B/Type-IDC4 setup checkout procedure 2. If patient information that is for the search key entered is
detected on the RIS or IDC4, it will appear on the CL study
1. Enter the search key on the CL study registration display registration display.
Version A software
and click (or ).
Version A software
Patient information
transferred from
the RIS
Select the search key type and enter the search key.
00000497.EPS
Version B software
Select the
search key type.
Enter the
search key. OE000010.EPS
Version B software
00000121.EPS
Target patient information will be searched for on the RIS or IDC4.
Patient information
transferred from the RIS OE000102.EPS
NOTE
If the target patient information is not found on the RIS or IDC4, a
message will appear to indicate that no such information has been
registered to the RIS.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)


010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)
Connection/setup examples
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS) The following connection/setup examples are used in this chapter to
describe the setup procedure.
This chapter describes the DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS setup
procedures. RIS setup example
MWM RIS_A* /172.16.1.80*............................. HOST name/IP address

Abbreviation of the Modality Worklist Management function, which RIS_SCP* /5010*............................... AE name/Port number
enables the CL to receive via networks patient information or
exposure menu registered to the RIS and view it on the study Modality Worklist Management.... Service Class (for MWM)
reception window. SCP.......................................... Role
Performed Procedure Step.......... Service Class (for PPS)
The CL offers two kinds of MWM: MWM(ORDER) that receives both
SCP.......................................... Role
patient information and exposure menu and MWM (ID) that receives
only patient information.
PPS RIS
Abbreviation of the Performed Procedure Step function, which is
responsible for sending patient's actual measurement values
determined on the CL back to the RIS. DICOM MWM
TCP/IP
Basically, the PPS function is used combined with MWM. Note
however that the RIS does not support the PPS function depending
DICOM PPS
on the model. For this reason, the CL offers the MWM and PPS
functions individually.
RU CL
NOTE
TheCR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL.
CL setup example
Prior to setup fcr-csl* /172.16.1.20*............................... HOST name/IP address

CL requirements CL-SCU*/Port number
(setup not required**)......................... AE name/Port number
Software version required: A02 or later. Modality Worklist MFIND............... Service Class (for MWM)
The following option keys are needed. SCU.......................................... Role
Key Name Functions Supported Modality Performed Procedure Step.. Service Class (for PPS)
a. CL DICOM ORDER MWM key* Modality Worklist Management SCU.......................................... Role
(patient information and exposure
menu) * Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment
b. CL DICOM ID MWM key* Modality Worklist Management or network environment.
(only patient information) ** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the
c. CL DICOM PPS key Performed Procedure Step Role is SCU. 00000520.EPS
* Variation
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)
Overall operation flow MWM/PPS configuration setting information [reference]

When performing DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS setup, you might have
Use a network cable to connect the 1. Hardware Stup to perform configuration setup procedures (IMAGE MODALITY and
CL to the RIS. CSL/IDT FUNCTION) in addition to a normal DICOM connection setup
procedure depending on the specifications for the RIS to be connected.
Details are given below.
Make setups for the DICOM MWM or 2. Software Setup For detailed setup procedure, see 2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration
DICOM PPS function. Setup.
Optional key installation
AP key reinstallation When the employed RIS does not support the PPS (or makes the
DICOM MWM settings PPS inoperative)
DICOM PPS settings
Select No for IMAGE MODALITY No. 18 (Display Performed
Make the following setups as required. Procedure on Worklist Tab). There are no operational problems even
DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS if No is selected when the employed RIS supports the PPS.
configuration settings
Name element settings When the PPS function is not used, the information about the end of
Setups for exposure menu/study study cannot be returned to the RIS. This causes the system to send
menu mapping data about patients who have gone through a study process back to
the RIS. For this reason, such data is displayed unavoidably. This
configuration setting is used to avoid this situation. When No is
Verify DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS 3. Verifying the selected as the configuration setting, the data about patients who
operations. Connection have gone through a study process will be deleted from the CL
worklist.
Back up the configuration file. 4. Backing Up When the employed RIS is manufactured by T company
the Setup File When Ts RIS is used, consult with the hospital administrator to
determine whether or not to enable the following configuration
settings.
Setting the method of inquiring at the RIS

The CL acquires patient information in accordance with a trigger
signal from the RIS.
Setting the compliance with the JJ1017 guideline in Japan
The following three items of information will be displayed within
the exposure menu information sequence.
First information item : Exposure technique (Plain, Contrast,
etc.)
Second information item : Exposure region (Head, Chest, etc.)
Third information item : Direction of exposure (Frontal,
Lateral, etc.)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
When the employed RIS is capable of inquiring about radiation

condition information 1. Hardware Setup
When RIS is capable of inquiring about radiation condition
information, additional MWM inquiry items can be set. These items Connect the CL to the RIS via networks as illustrated below.
should be enabled or disabled in accordance with actual operations
at the hospital. 10BASE-T/
The following additional items can be set. 100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
Exposure dose sequence
Radiation mode
X-ray generator tube voltage [kV] to be used RU CL RIS
X-ray tube current [A]
X-ray exposure time [ms] 00000522.EPS
Label on the filter placed in the X-ray beam

X-ray absorption filter material NOTES
When the employed RIS is capable of acquiring exposure status Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connectors.
information through a private tag The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
When the RIS is capable of acquiring exposure status information compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
through a private tag, additional PPS items can be set. These items
should be enabled or disabled in accordance with actual operations
at the hospital.
The following additional items can be set.
Exposure status sequence
Number of split exposures
Exposure status
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup 2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option

Key Installation
Set up software for the CL as follows.
REFERENCE
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option You may install both the MWM (ORDER) option key and the MWM (ID)
Key Installation option key.
Local patient information database, which cannot be used if only the
MWM (ORDER) option key is installed, becomes available when both
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation are installed.
Compulsory tasks
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function
2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the 1. Insert the DICOM MWM option key CD into the PC.
DICOM MWM Function Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information
2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for
NOTE
MWM In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function
2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the
DICOM PPS Function
Tasks done only 2. Click .
when the PPS
2.4.2 Registration of RIS Information function is used. A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with
PPS 3. Click .
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
Tasks done as
necessary. 4. Remove the CD from the PC.
2.6 Changing Name Elements
Tasks done only 5. When using the DICOM PPS function, insert the optional
when handling DICOM PPS key CD to install it following the procedure
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu described in steps 2. to 4. above.
ordering information
Mapping
with the MWM
function.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function
If an option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Set up CL and RIS information for the DICOM MWM function.
Described below is the procedure to be followed to reinstall the AP key
using the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later).
2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM MWM
Function
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens. The items listed below must be set up following the procedure described
herein using NETWORK CONFIG and THIS HOST (IIP) of Service
NOTE Utility mode.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, CLs AE name (Application Entity Name)
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. Service Class and Role, Device Attribute (OTHER)
Other (timeout setting)
2. Click . 1. Start Service Utility mode and click [Setup Configuration

Item] window.
For how to start Service Utility mode, see 1. Starting/Exiting
the Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Click the mark of the field. The Application Entity List window opens.
4. Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are

displayed.
CL host name
CL IP address
00000441.EPS
NOTE 00000442.EPS
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is

connected to a network. 6. Enter the AE name (e.g. CL-SCU) that is the SCU for the CL
in the field.

NOTE
There is no need to set the Port number in the
(Port number) field.
When selecting SCU as the Role, the Port number will be
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
7. Click . 11. Click downward arrow in the
The DICOMSetup window opens. field to select OTHER for the device attribute.
NOTE
12. Click .
The system return to the Application Entity List window.
00000533.EPS 13. Click

8. Click downward arrow in the The system returns to the Setup Configuration window.
REFERENCE
field to select Service
Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the
Class (Modality Worklist MFIND). Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be
REFERENCE changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click
Verification is the Service Class used to verify connection .
CLs AE name
Verification must have been set.
the Connection to Other Connected Equipment - Verify
9. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for

the Role.

as necessary.
REFERENCE Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax

and device attribute (Attribute) 00000538.EPS
You need not to check .
If the key is clicked, currently selected items will
Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 9,
above is the SCU. be deleted.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information 3. Click .

The items listed below must be registered following the procedure
described herein using NETWORK CONFIG and ALL OTHER The Application Entity List window opens for setup of RIS
information.
NODES of Service Utility mode.
RIS host name and IP address
RIS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number
Service Class, Role and device attribute (OTHER)
Other (usage of two-byte characters, etc.)
1. Select of the Setup Configuration

2. Makes the following settings.
Enter the Host name (e.g. RIS_A) in the field.
Enter the IP address (e.g. 172.16.1.80) in the

field. 00000444.EPS
Select DICOM.
Enter the RIS AE name (e.g. RIS_SCP) in the
field.
Select DICOM. 00000405.EPS NOTES

Never fail to enter the SCP AE name.
Enter the RIS Port number (e.g. 5010) in the

field.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
5. Click . 2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for MWM
The DICOMSetup window opens. 1. Click of the Setup

A list of connecting equipment units appears on the right-side area
of the window.
00000081.EPS
00000533.EPS
6 . Click downward arrow in the field

2. Click .
to select Service Class (Modality Worklist MFIND).
The Connecting Equipment window opens.
7. Because the RIS AE is the Provider, make sure that
(SCP) is selected for the Role. 3. Make the following settings.
8. To handle two-byte characters, check the box Click downward arrow in the field
( ). to select function (MWM) of the connecting equipment.
Click downward arrow in the field
REFERENCE
to select AE name (e.g. RIS_SCP).
needs not be set. Even if set, it will be
disregarded. 4. Click .
9. Click downward arrow in the The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window.
field to select OTHER for the device attribute of other
connected equipment. 5. Use the Config (F) menu to save the setup data.
10. Click .
11. Click .
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function 2. Select

(CLs AE name).
Set up CL and RIS information for the DICOM PPS function.
NOTE
Do not perform settings for the DICOM PPS function if the optional
DICOM PPS key has not been installed. Otherwise, an error (30151 or
20110) will occur.
2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM PPS Function

Following are the items to be set according to the procedure described
herein. Use Service Utility NETWORK CONFIG THIS HOST (IIP)
for setup purposes.
00000539.EPS
CLs AE name and device attribute [Already set in 2.3]
Service Class and Role The right-hand side of the window will change to the DICOMSetup
Other (timeout setting) window.

window. 3. Click .
00000533.EPS
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
4. Click downward arrow in the 2.4.2 Registration of RIS Information

Following are the items to be set according to the procedure described
herein. Use Service Utility NETWORK CONFIG ALL OTHER
Class (Modality Performed Procedure Step). NODES for setup purposes.
REFERENCE RIS host name and IP address [Already set in 2.3]
Verification is the Service Class used to verify connection RIS AE name, port number and device attribute [Already set in 2.3]
between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, Service Class and Role
Verification must have been set. Other (usage of two-byte characters)
the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify 1. Select
Connection under MU: Maintenance Utility. (RIS host name) (RIS
AE name) in the Setup Configuration Item window.
5. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for

the Role.
REFERENCE
When setting up SCU, items in the DICOMSetup window that
need not be set will be hidden.

( ) as necessary.
REFERENCE
You need not to check .
Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 5, 00000540.EPS
above is the SCU. The right-hand side of the window will change to the DICOMSetup
window.
7. Click .
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with PPS

2. Click .

A list of registered equipment appears in the right-side area of the
window.
00000081.EPS
00000533.EPS
2. Click .
The Connection Equipment window opens.
Class (Modality Performed Procedure Step). 3. Perform the following setup steps.

4. Make sure that (SCP) has been selected for the Role and select the function (PPS) of the connected device.
because the RIS AE is the Provider. Click downward arrow in the
5. To handle two-byte characters, check . field and select the AE name

(e.g.: RIS_SCP).
REFERENCE
You need not to set . 4. Click .
Even if set, it will be disregarded.
6. Click . 5. Use the Config (F) menu to save the setup data.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup 3. Choose , then .

Setups items related with the IDT functions appear on the right-
Perform the following configuration setup procedures, which are related hand side of the window.
to the MWM or PPS.
General settings for MWM/PPS 4. Make the following configuration settings.
Setting the method of inquiring at the RIS
Item
Setting the additional MWM inquiry items number
Configuration name Description
Setting the compliance with the JJ1017 guideline in Japan
Setting the additional PPS items to be returned to the RIS Examination No. Length
15 (Character string length
Setup of timing for transmission of PPS study termination notice of the examination no.) These items are used to change the
Embedding the exposure information into a PPS standard tag character string length in accordance
Exposure result editing setup Patient ID Length with RIS settings.
17 (Character string length
Setting the MWM Code Meaning as a menu name of the patient ID.)
Setting the reissue of StudyInstanceUID for a study retrieved by MWM
Requesting Dept Name
Field Setup
2.5.1 General Settings for MWM/PPS (Setups for the menu This item selects Sbcs or Dbcs in
22
contents to be displayed accordance with RIS settings.
in the Requesting
1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose Department field.)
, then .
The display shows the setup items about CL system information. 5. Use the Config (F) menu to save the edited data.
2. Make the following configuration settings.

Item
number
SOP Class UID to be returned to the
SOP Class UID for PPS
PPS when the OD_FILE attribute
16 When No
output destination is not registered at
FILE Attribute Output
the CL.
Value to be set for the protocol name of
17 Protocol Name for PPS
the PPS.
This item is used to specify whether
the CL worklist should display
completed studies. Even if the MWM
Display Performed sends information about completed
18 Procedure on Worklist studies, they will not be displayed when
Tab No is selected as the setting.
Select No when the PPS function

cannot be used.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.5.2 Setting the Method of Inquiring at the RIS Setup procedure

Function overview 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose
There are the following three methods of making patient information , then .
inquiries at the RIS. The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
Trigger signal from the RIS
Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 1
Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 2
2. With configuration item No. 66, select an inquiry method,
and then set RIS information for items No. 64 and 65.
Trigger signal from the RIS Item
number
When the CL receives a trigger signal from the RIS, the CL makes
inquires at the RIS to acquire patient information. An automatic RIS trigger reception port number for
transition occurs to switch from the worklist tab window to the study MWM use.
64 MWM RIS Trigger Port
start window only when one piece of study information is acquired. Enter a numerical value in accordance
with the RIS trigger reception port.
NOTES MWM RIS Trigger RIS trigger reception timeout value
65
Timeout (sec) for MWM use.
Trigger signal setup is to be performed only when the connection to
T companys equipment is established. Study start method for MWM use.
Select a method in accordance with the
When two or more pieces of study information are received at a RIS specifications and actual hospital
time, the display does not automatically switch to the study start operations.
window but the study information remains within the worklist tab.
The RIS trigger signal is accepted only when the CLs worklist tab 0: Manual (default)
is selected. If the RIS transmits the trigger signal while a tab other MWM Execute Study Update procedure to be performed
66
than the worklist tab is selected, a timeout occurs at the RIS. Type at the CL.
1: Trigger
RIS trigger signal.
Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 1 2: Auto
Update procedure to be performed
A procedure is performed at the CL to acquire information that is at the CL (automatic window
registered at the RIS. Inquiries can be automatically made at fixed transition).
intervals (user-selectable).
Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 2 3. Use the Config (F) menu to save the edited data.
A procedure is performed at the CL to acquire information that is
registered at the RIS. Inquiries can be automatically made at fixed
intervals (user-selectable). An automatic transition occurs to switch
from the worklist tab window to the study start window only when
one piece of study information is acquired.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.5.3 Setting Additional MWM Inquiry Items 2.5.4 Setting the Compliance with the JJ1017 Guideline
Function overview Function overview

As MWM inquiry items, the following information about radiation When JJ1017 compliance setup is performed, the following three items
conditions can be added. When the PPS is supported, the same of information are used within the exposure menu information sequence
information as listed below will be returned to the RIS. to decide on the exposure menu.
Description DICOM Tag Meaning First information item : Exposure technique (Plain, Contrast, etc.)
Second information item : Exposure region (Head, Chest, etc.)
Exposure Dose Sequence 0040,030E Exposure dose sequence.
Third information item : Direction of exposure (Frontal, Lateral, etc.)
>Radiation Mode 0018,115A Radiation mode.
X-ray generator tube voltage NOTE
>KVp 0018,0060
[kV] to be used.
Setup is to be performed only for the connection to the equipment
>X-ray Tube Current in A 0018,8151 X-ray tube current [A]. manufactured by T company.
>Exposure Time 0018,1150 X-ray exposure time [ms].
Label on the filter placed in the REFERENCE
>Filter Type 0018,1160
X-ray beam. At the CL, three values of the codes [(0040,0008)>(0008,0100)] fed
>Filter Material 0018,7050 X-ray absorption filter material. from the RIS are sequentially concatenated and used as an extended
menu code. If, for instance, three menus are fed, a total of nine codes
exist. Sets of three items of information are sequentially concatenated,
Setup procedure beginning with the leading one, and used as an extended menu code.

, then . Setup procedure
The display shows the setup items about CL system information. 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose
, then .
2. Select Yes for the following configuration setting.
The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
Item Configuration
number name
Description
2. Select 1: JJ1017 for the following configuration setting.
The configuration function for this inquiry
Item Configuration
item is disabled. This inquiry item will be Description
number name
MWM Request validated when you add it as one of the
67 Exposure inquiries (listed in the table of Function Exposure menu code system for MWM use.
Dose Status Overview above) to be addressed to the This item is used to specify the setting in
RIS by exercising 14. Setting the DICOM MWM Exposure
accordance with the RIS specifications.
MWM C-FIND Tags. 68 Menu Code
Treatment 0: Normal (default)
1: JJ1017
3. Use the Configuration menu to save the edited data. 2: JJ1017 (Ver3)
3. Use the Config (F) menu to save the edited data.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned to the RIS 2.5.6 Setup of Timing for Transmission of PPS Study
Termination Notice
Function overview
The information about exposure status can be added as the PPS Function overview
information to be returned to the RIS. Choose one of the following three options to determine the time at
A private tag is used to return the information. which the PPS study termination notice should be transmitted to the
RIS:
Description DICOM Tag Meaning
Completed : When the study is terminated after receipt of all
Exposure Status
0019,XXA0 Exposure status sequence. images.
Sequence
Subscribe : When the study is terminated after the completion of
>Division Count >0019,XX71 Number of split exposures. IP registration or when the study is terminated in
Exposure status situations where setup is completed so as to delete
>Exposure Status >0019,XXA1 (NORMAL: Normal exposure; unregistered menus.
MIS: Improperly exposed image). DownloadPDA : At the termination of transmitting the study to the
Exposure kind
POCKET id Console.
>Exposure Kind >0019,XXA2 (NORMAL: Normal; ADD: Additional; The study completion sequence includes the beginning of the next
AGAIN: Reexposure). study in which a magnetic card or the like is used.
Distance Source to Distance between
>0018,1110
Detector X-ray source and detector. Setup procedure
Setup procedure 1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose

, then .
, then . The display shows on its right-hand side the setup items about the
IDT function.
The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
2. Select 1: Status Only or 2: Status + Other Results for the 2. Select 0: Complete, 1: Subscribe, or 2: DownloadPDA
following configuration setting. for the following configuration setting.
Item Configuration Item Configuration
Description Description
number name number name
Specifying whether the PPS should use a private Specifying the time at which the PPS study
tag to return the information about exposure sta- termination notice (N-SET) should be
tus (improperly exposed image, reexposure, etc.). transmitted to the RIS.
PPS PPS N-SET
0: No (default) 92
Exposure Timming
76 Does not return exposure status information. 0: Complete [default]
Status 1: Status Only 1: Subscribe
Sequence Returns only exposure status information. 2: DownloadPDA
2: Status + Other Results
Returns exposure status information along with
other results values. 3. Use the Config (F) menu to save the edited data.

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.5.7 Embedding the Exposure Information into a 2.5.8 Exposure Result Editing Setup
PPS Standard Tag
Function overview
Function overview The exposure results to be returned to the RIS are edited from the study
This function is exercised at the time of PPS study termination window at the PPS. The following information items can be edited:
notification to map image-incidental information (divided exposure
count, exposure status, and exposure kind) with a PPS standard tag Discription PPS Tag Item Setup target
and transmit it to the RIS. Technologist For each
Operators Name 0040,0340>0008,1070
information study
NOTE
Radiation
Although 2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned to the For each
Distace Source to source-to-
RIS states that a private tag is used to return the information to the 0019,xxA0>0018,1110 menu
Detector (SID) detector
(image)
RIS, the captioned function maps the exposure information with a distance (SID)
standard tag and returns it to the RIS. Billing Supplies Contrast media
For each
and Devices 0040,0324 consumption
study
Sequence information
Setup procedure
For each
1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose Number of Films 0040,0321>2100,0017
Number of
films
menu
, then . (image)
The display shows on its righr-hand side the setup items about the For each
IDT function. Film SIze ID 0040,0321>2010,0050 Film size menu
(image)
2. Perform the following configuration settings accordingly. Radiation Dose For each
0040,030E X-ray dose
Sequence X-ray shot
Item Configuration
Description Performed Performed
number name For each
Procedure Step 0040,0254 procedure step
Setting the tag for mapping exposure study
Description description
information (divided exposure count,
PPS Exposure exposure status, and exposure kind). For each
90 Protocol Name 0040,0340>0018,1030 Protocol name
Status Mapping Tag 0040, 0260 > 0008, 0104 [default] study
If this field is left blank, the mapping
operation does not take place.
Specifying the exposure information to be
mapped.
0: None (default).Does not perform the
PPS Exposure mapping operation.
91 Status 1: Div+Status+KindDivided exposure count,
Mapping Kind exposure status, and exposure kind (all).
2: DivDivided exposure count only.
3: Status+KindExposure status and
exposure kind only.

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Setup procedure 2.5.9 Setting the MWM Code Meaning as a Menu

Name
, then . Function overview
The display shows on its right-hand side the setup items about the The [0040,0100]>[0040,0008]>[0008,0104] Code Meaning acquired
IDT function. from the RIS as the information about a response from the RIS
(C-FIND-RSP) will be handled as an exposure menu name. The names
received from the RIS will be used as the following menu names:
2. Perform the following configuration settings accordingly.
Image-level menu names for various study lists
Item Configuration Menu names for the study/QA window
Description
number name Menu names to be displayed on the Image Reader panel
Specifying from the exposure information Menu names indicated on an output film
editing dialog box whether the information Menu names for a filing device/image display device (output device)
about contrast media consumption should
PPS Edit Billing For details on DICOM MWM C-FIND tag setup, see 14. Setting the
87 be editable.
Supplies DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting in
Yes : Editable. MU: Maintenance Utility.
No [default] : Noneditable.
Specifying whether or not to open the Setup procedure
exposure information editing dialog box at
88
PPS Edit Exposure
the PPS for purposes other than
radiographer information editing.
Result , then .
Yes : Opens. The display shows on its right-hand side the setup items about the
No [default] : Does not open. IDT function.
3. Use the Config (F) menu to save the edited data. 2. Select Yes for the following configuration setting.
Item Configuration
Description
number name
Handling the code meaning acquired as
the information about a response from the
RIS as an exposure menu name.
MWM Menu Name
89
Mapping Yes : Handles as an exposure
menu name.
No [default] : Does not handle as an
exposure menu name.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
2.5.10 Settings for Regenerating StudyInstanceUID for Procedure used for performing configuration settings for
a Study Acquired Using the MWM Function generation of UID (applicable as necessary)
Function overview 1. Click the mark in the field on the

The StudyInstanceUID acquired via MWM was not allowed to modify so Setup Configuration Item window.
far, which now became possible to be modified from version V3.0(B).
Modification is possible if Yes is specified for setup item No. 134 of
CSL/IDT FUNCTION. Patient information and the like changed following 2. Click .
the configuration settings for the UID generation will consequently Setup item information for the CL system information appears at
modify SOPInstanceUID and StudyInstanceUID at the same time. the right side of the window.
Setup procedure
Procedure used for performing configuration settings for
regeneration of StudyInstanceUID acquired using MWM
1. Select and then

on the Setup Configuration Item window.
Setup items for the IDT function appear at the right side of the
window.
2. Select Yes for the configuration setting below. 00000408.EPS
Item Configuration
Description
number name
Specifying whether or not to permit the
MWM StudyInstanceUID to be
MWM
regenerated.
134 StudyInstanceUID
Regeneration
Yes : Permitted.
No : Not permitted (default)
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
3. Perform the following configuration settings that relate with No Name Selection Meaning
the UID generation. 39 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a
Table UID-related setup items (IMAGE MODALITY) about a Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
function NO Instance UID when
No Name Selection Meaning (except Image Does not issue a new UID. shuttering processing or
Processing) to energy subtraction
change to the processing condition is
after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP
image modified on the CL.
ID Information NO Instance UID when any ID
themselves
Does not issue a new UID. information is modified on
the CL. 45 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a
Trimming NO Instance UID when trimming
Parameter Does not issue a new UID. information is modified.
Normalized NO Instance UID when image
Parameter Does not issue a new UID. normalization conditions are
modified on the CL. 46 UID Inssuance YES Whether or not to issue a
11 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue a FNC NO Instance UID when a FNC
after Modifying Issues a new UID. new image UID or SOP Parameter Does not issue a new UID. parameter is modified.
Image NO Instance UID when image
Processing Does not issue a new UID. processing conditions are : Default setting
Parameter modified on the CL.
12 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to output an 4. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
Before Issues a new UID. SOP Instance UID as the UID A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
Sending NO of a processed CR image saved.
Processed Does not issue a new UID. when outputting processed
Data images from the CL.
13 DICOM Series 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 Setup of Series Instance UID 5. Click .
Logic Issues a number so that it The setup data is saved accordingly.
has multiple series for one See 3.4 Configuration
study and only one image for Details 1. IMAGE
one series. MODALITY under
0: 1 Study - N series MU: Maintenance
and 1 Series - M image Utility.
one series.
Series - N image
one series.
: Default setting
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
2.5.11 Setting the Compliance with JJ1017 V3 Setup procedure
NOTES 1. Select on
This function cannot be used with portable radiographic function (CL the Setup Configuration Item window.
SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL) (optional). The IDT function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the
If the exposure menu is added/edited on CL for a study supporting window.
JJ1017 V3, JJ1017 V3 will not be applied to the study.
An exposure menu received from RIS is displayed on CL by combining 2. Make the following configuration settings.
the code which is defined in JJ1017 V3. If a different menu name
has been set for the menu code from User Utility, the contents to be No Name Selection Meaning
displayed will be different. 68 MWM 0:Normal Exposure menu code system
Up to 28 characters of menu name can be displayed on CL after being Exposure 1:JJ1017 for MWM use.
combined. Be careful when using menus with long codes. Menu Code 2:JJ1017(Ver3) Make an appropriate
If a normal menu or a menu for JJ1017 V3 is edited in User Utility, the Treatment selection in accordance with
menu will be registered as a normal exposure menu when the first and the RIS specifications.
last half of the extended menu code are left blank. 89 MWM Menu YES Specifying whether the Code
If JJ1017 V3 is set, the study which can be received from RIS will be Name Handles as an exposure Meaning (0040,0100>
only the menu supporting JJ1017 V3. Mapping menu name. 0040,0008>0008,0104)
The mapping database will be backed up/restored in V8.0 HF0004 or NO acquired as the information
later; so make sure to do it in V8.0 HF0004 or later when backing up/ Does not handle as an about a response from the
restoring the menu database from User Utility. exposure menu name. RIS should be handled as an
If the menu database is replaced from CL-AP CD (2 of 2), manually exposure menu name.
copy the mapping database (MWMMenuCodeMapping.mdb) from : Default setting
CL-AP CD (2 of 2) and paste it to C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
MWMStudyList. 3. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
When upgrading from V8.0 HF0004 to V8.1, back up/restore the
mapping DB manually because the mapping DB is not taken over.
saved.
It will be taken over when upgrading from V8.1 or later.
4. Click .
Function overview
If the setting for JJ1017 V3 is performed, the following functions can be The system saves the setup data.
added.
16 characters can be set in each of first half and last part as an 5. From the Config (F) menu, choose Close.
extended menu code. The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window.
The normal exposure menu can be used with the exposure menu for
JJ1017 V3.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6. Click [DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting].

The DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag & Mapping Setting window
opens.

ID Flag Description DICOM MWL Tag VR TagSetting1
12 >>Code Valu >>(0080, 0100) SH 007F260 00080100
8. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.6 Changing Name Elements
2.6 Changing Name Elements The following examples describe the procedures for mapping the
exposure menu or study menu defined by the RIS.
See 3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection
Exposure menu
Ensure that the ordering information defined by the DICOM tag
((0040,0008)>(0008,0100)) of the RIS agrees with the extended
menu code of CL exposure menu.
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu
Mapping
Tag mapping
When transmitting order information to the CL for MWM purposes, it is
necessary to standardize the exposure and study menu tag information
for the RIS and CL. Ensure that this code agrees with the RIS
ordering information (tag information). OE000056.EPS
More specifically, you must complete the following steps.
Verify the DICOM tag number that contains RIS ordering information. If the menu defined by the RIS is not registered in the CL, create a
new exposure menu and then enter the RIS ordering information
Ensure that the RIS ordering information and CL exposure menu/
study menu agree in extended menu codes (this can be related to the exposure menu into the CL extended menu code field.
accomplished by rewriting the menu codes as needed with the CLs
user utility).
REFERENCE
The CL performs exposure menu mapping in accordance with a tag
number (0040,0008)>(0008,0100) transmitted from the RIS. Study
menu mapping is performed when no exposure menu tag number is Enter the RIS ordering information
transmitted from the RIS. (tag information) in this field. OE000058.EPS
The study menu mapping tag numbers transmitted from the RIS vary
from one RIS manufacturer to another. Therefore, Service Utility must REFERENCE
be used to set such tag numbers for the CL. If the section 68 in 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION is set to 2: JJ1017
Service Utilitys initial setting is (0040,0100)>(0040,0007). (Ver3), the first and last half part of the extended menu code can
For most of the RIS manufacturers in Japan, the initial setting be set.
(0040,0100)>(0040,0007) can be used as is. For most of RIS
manufacturers other than in Japan, however, the initial setting needs to
be changed.
For details on setup, see under Tag mapping configuration

setup.
OE080002.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping
Study menu Tag mapping configuration setup

Since no study menu is registered in the CL, create a new study Set the following configuration data (IMAGE MODALITY) as needed:
menu and then enter the RIS ordering information related to the
study menu. Item Configuration
Description
number name
DICOM-defined tag numbers to be mapped
Tag Mapped on onto a study menu.
23 Study Menu at
MWM Use The default setups are 0040, 0100>0040,
0007.
Specifying whether or not to perform study
menu/exposure menu mapping.
Perform Mapping If No is selected, only the patient
24 to Exposure Menu information will be used to initiate a study
at MWM Use process.
The default setup is to perform mapping.
Enter the RIS ordering information Specifying whether or not to open a
(tag information) in this field. OE000057.EPS Display Dialog warning window when mapping is not
When Failed in successfully performed for a CL study
25
Mapping to Menu menu or exposure menu.
at MWM Use
REFERENCE The default is to open a warning window.
The actual tag information (indicating whether mapping is properly
completed) exchanged between the RIS and CL can be confirmed by
viewing the log files that are generated when the DICOM Log Mode is
enabled.
For details on the DICOM Log Mode, see FR4: Using the
DICOM Log Mode under FR: Function-specific Reference.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3. Verifying the Connection 3.2 Verifying MWM

Check to see that the patient information registered to the RIS appears
After the CL-AP has been started up, verify MWM and PPS operations. in the MWM worklist.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP Patient information registered to the RIS appears here.
3.2 Verifying MWM
3.3 Verifying PPS

Fuji Film and FCR.
Version A software
OE000015.EPS
3.3 Verifying PPS

Make sure that the patient information of the study completed has been
sent back to the RIS.
OE000016.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

To make a backup, have the following item on hand.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push) This chapter describes the setup procedure using the connection/setup
examples shown below.
This chapter describes the setup procedure for the Storage Commitment
Push function on images to be transferred using DICOM CR Storage Archiver setup example
(Standard).
Scommit* /172.16.1.90*...................... HOST name/IP address
The DICOM Commitment Push function is to assure that images Scommit_SCP* /5020*................... AE name/Port number
transferred have been stored in the archiver.
CR Image Storage..................... Service Class
Images stored in the CL will not be deleted before a message comes SCP....................................... Role
from the archiver indicating that it has stored them accordingly. ImplicitVRLittleEndian*.......... Transfer Syntax
SC AE Name*....................... SCommit_SCP
NOTE Storage Commitment Push....... Service Class
The CR-IR346/348CL will be abbreviated hereinafter simply CL. SCP....................................... Role
Prior to setup Archiver

CL requirements
DICOM Commitment Push
The CL main unit must have been set up. TCP/IP
Software version required: A01 or later.
Install the option key below. DICOM CR Storage (Standard)
RU CL
IR346 DICOM COMMITMENT key CR Storage SCU Standard
Storage Commitment Push
CL setup example
fcr-csl* /172.16.1.20*............................... HOST name/IP address

CL-SCU*/Port number
(setup not required**)....................... AE name/Port number
CR Image Storage......................... Service Class
SCU.......................................... Role
ImplicitVRLittleEndian*.................. Transfer Syntax
SC AE Name*........................... Scommit_SCP
Storage Commitment Push........... Service Class
SCU.......................................... Role
* Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment or
network environment.
** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the Role is SCU.
00000523.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)

Use a network cable to connect the CL 1. Hardware Setup
to the QA-WS.
After installing the DICOM CR 2. Software Setup

Storage option, DICOM Commitment
Push option and the AP key, make the
following setups.
DICOM CR Storage (OD_FILE

attribute)
Information of this equipment for
the Commitment Push function
Registration of archiver information
for the Commitment Push function
Registration of SC AE Name
Make sure that the Commitment Push 3. Verifying the

function is activated. Function
Back up the configuration file. 4. Backing Up

the Setup File
00000541.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to the archiver via networks, as illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
RU CL Archiver
00000524.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connectors.
The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys
2. Software Setup 2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage

Option Keys
Set up the CL software by performing the following steps:
NOTE
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys Before installing the DICOM Commitment Push option key, install the
DICOM CR Storage option keys.
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push

Option Key 1. Insert the option key CD into the PC.
After several seconds, the installation start window automatically
opens.
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key
NOTE
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the

Commitment Push Function 2. Click .
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the
Commitment Push Function
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name
00000085.EPS
3. Click .
4. In the same manner as indicated in steps 2 and 3, click

and then click .

REFERENCE
The DICOM CR Storage option key CD stores two keys (Standard
and Private). That is why the installation start window opens twice.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment 2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key

Push Option Key
After option key installation, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
1. Insert the option key CD into the PC. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A, Version A00 or later) to reinstall
the AP key. The procedure is described below:
After several seconds, the installation start window automatically
opens.
NOTE After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. NOTE
2. Click .
2. Click .
3. Click .
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup 2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment
for the Commitment Push Function
NOTE
Before using Storage Commitment Push, complete DICOM CR Storage The following information items are to be set up by performing the
setup for the archiver. procedure described in this section. This setup is performed in relation
to the application entity on this equipment that is defined as directed in
2.4.
For details on DICOM CR Storage setup, see 2.1.4 Setup of
Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Service Class, Role, and Transfer Syntax
Function, and subsequent sections under CL + HI-C655/QA-WS/ Other (timeout setting, etc.)
FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment (OE3). 1. On the Setup Configuration Item window, sequentially
choose , ,
and (DICOM CR Storage AE name).
00000543.EPS
The DICOM Setup window opens within the right-hand area of

the current window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the Commitment Push Function
7. With the Config (F) menu, save the entered setup data.
2. Click (positioned slightly below the center of
REFERENCE
the window).
The DICOMSetup window opens. Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be
.
AE name of this equipment
00000533.EPS
3. Click the downward arrow mark for the

Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax
Class (StorageCommitmentPush). and device attribute (Attribute) 00000545.EPS
4. Since the AE for User is to be set, choose as the If the key is clicked, currently selected items will be
Role.
deleted.
5. Adjust the setting (timeout value for the

intervals between DICOM messages) as needed.
REFERENCE
You do not have to check .
Even if it is checked, it will be disregarded even if SCU is chosen
as the Role in step 4 above.
6. Click .
You are then returned to the "Setup Configuration Item" window.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information 2. Sequentially choose ,

for the Commitment Push Function , (archivers host name),
and (AE name for DICOM CR
The following information items are to be set up by performing the
procedure described in this section. This setup is performed in relation Storage).
to the archivers application entity that is defined as directed in 2.4.
Service Class, Role, and Transfer Syntax
Other (2-byte character handling, setting for conversion from HQ
images to standard images, etc.)
1. On the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup

00000544.EPS
The DICOM Setup window appears within the right-hand area of

the current window.
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function
3. Click (positioned slightly below the center of 8. Click .
the window). You are then returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.
9. With the Config (F) menu, save the entered setup data.
00000533.EPS
4. Click the downward arrow mark ( ) for the

Class (StorageCommitmentPush).
5. Since the AE of the connected equipment is Provider,

verify that is chosen as the Role.
6. When handling 2-byte characters, check

( ).
7. Enter an appropriate value in the field.

Association control varies with the entered value as
summarized below:
When value 0 is entered:
Uses an association other than that transmitted from the CL to wait
for the connected equipments response.
When a value other than 0 is entered:
Uses the association transmitted from the CL to wait for the
connected equipments response before the entered time elapses.
After the entered time has elapsed, however, another association is
used to wait for the connected equipments response.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name 2. From the list in the lower right corner of the window, select
CR Image Storage for the Service Class and then click
Perform the following procedure to register DICOM CR Storage (OD .
attribute) as the target of Commitment Push.
1. On the Setup Configuration Item window, sequentially

choose , ,
(archivers host name), and
(AE name of DICOM CR Storage).
00000548.EPS
3. Click the downward arrow mark ( ) for the

of Commitment Push for the archiver
(e.g.: Scommit_SCP).
00000544.EPS
The DICOM Setup window opens within the right-hand area of

the current window. 4. Click .
You are then returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.
5. Use the Config (F) menu to save the entered setup data.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
3. Verifying the Function 3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver

Perform the following steps to transfer an image stored in the CL to the
Perform the following steps to start the CL-AP to verify Commitment archiver and verify that the Commitment Push function properly works.
Push function:

1. Select the image to be transferred, and then transfer it to the
archiver.
3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver 2. Check whether the CL displays a message to indicate the
image has been stored in the archiver device.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP Also, perform a deletion procedure in relation to an image
that is not transferred to the archiver to verify that the image
remains undeleted.
1. From the menu, choose Programs, Fuji Film
and FCR. For detailed descriptions of the image transfer and image
deletion procedures, see the CL Operation Manual.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)

For backup, furnish the following items:
For details of the backup procedure, see 5. Restoring/Backing Up

the Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup under
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images)
Prior to setup
CL+QA-WS
CL requirements
(Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images) The CL main unit must have been set up being incorporated into
the 5000 plus (CR-IR348CL) system.
Described herein is the procedure used when transferring energy Software version required: A02 or later
subtraction (ES hereinafter) images to the QA-WS. Install the following option keys.
To transfer ES images, the two Application Entities, one for the transfer Key Name Functions Supported
of raw data (unstandardized images) and the other for the transfer of
standardized images, must be set up. IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE Key CR Storage SCU Standard
CR Storage SCU Standard
(includes Private
NOTE Unstandardized CR Storage.)
ES images can be transferred only via DICOM, and not via FINP. CL ES ES image processing function
QA-WS requirements
NOTE
Software version required : A04 or later
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereinafter simply CL. Install the DICOM Storage option key. (Standard/Private)
REFERENCE
The ES image consists of the following four types.
Low-pressure image (L image)
High-pressure image (H image)
Bone image (B image)
Soft tissue image (S image)
The low-pressure and high-pressure images are raw data
(unstandardized images).
The bone and soft tissue images are standardized images generated
from low-pressure and high-pressure images.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images)
Connection/setup examples Overall operation flow

The following connection/setup examples are used in this chapter to
describe the setup procedure. Use a network cable to connect the CL 1. Hardware Setup
to the QA-WS.
QA-WS setup example
QAWS* /172.16.1.100*........................... HOST name/IP address
QAWS_10_SCP* /5030*................... AE name/Port number Make the following setups for 2. Software Setup
Private CR Storage....................... Service Class (for B/S images) transferring ES images via DICOM.
SCP.......................................... Role Option key installation
JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax AP key reinstallation
QAWS_11_SCP* /5040*.................... AE name/Port number AE setup of this equipment for the
Private Unstandardized CR Storage... Service Class (for L/H images) transfer of B/S images
SCP.......................................... Role AE setup of this equipment for the
JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax transfer of L/H images
QAWS_10_SCP....................... Substitute AE Name QA-WS AE registration for the transfer
of B/S images
QA-WS AE registration for the transfer
QA-WS of L/H images
Make the following setups as needed.

TCP/IP Type of the image to be transferred
(system configuration setting)
Transfer of ES images Automatic image distribution code
B/S images: Transferred with DICOM Name elements
CR-IR348RU CL Private CR Storage.
L/H images: Transferred with Private
Unstandardized CR Storage.
CL setup examples Make sure that ES images can be 3. Verifying the
transferred from the CL to the QA-WS. Function
fcr-csl* /172.16.1.20*............................... HOST name/IP address
CL_10_SCU*/Port number
Private CR Storage....................... Service Class (for B/S images) Back up the configuration file. 4. Backing Up the
SCU.......................................... Role Setup File
JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax 00000531.EPS
CL_11_SCU*/Port number
Private Unstandardized CR Storage.... Service Class (for L/H images)
SCU.......................................... Role
JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax
* Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment or
network environment.
** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the Role is SCU.
00000527.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to the QA-WS via networks, as illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
CR-IR348RU CL QA-WS
00000528.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and QA-WS network
connectors.
The cable type applicable to the CL and QA-WS is the IEC950/
UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)

Set up software for the CL and QA-WS as follows.
Grayed-out items are those to be set up as necessary. Set up all other The option key of the following two types is installed according to the
items. procedure presented below.
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE (Standard/Private)
CL ES (ES image processing function)
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation
1. Insert the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key into the
2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment PC.
2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information Tasks done on
the CL Within a few seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be
Transferred NOTE
2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image
Distribution Function In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
2.1.7 Changing Name Elements
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup Tasks done on 2. Click .

the QA-WS.
A window opens to indicate the completion of the installation
processing.
3. Click .

REFERENCE
keys, Standard and Private, are stored on the IR346 DICOM CR
STORAGE option key CD.
5. Repeat steps 2. and 3. above to install the CL ES option key.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment

If the option keys are installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. For the transfer of B/S and L/H images, set up information of this
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 ) to reinstall the AP equipment using Service Utility NETWORK CONFIG and THIS HOST
key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below. (IIP).
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. Setup for the transfer of B/S images
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens. The procedure explained herein involves setups of the following items.
AE name of this equipment for the transfer of B/S images (Application
NOTE Entity Name)
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, Service Class, Role and device attribute (OTHER)
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. Other (timeout setting, etc.)
1. Start up the Service Utility mode and click [Setup

2. Click . Configuration Item].
For how to start up the Service Utility mode, see
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility under
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation. MU: Maintenance Utility.
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Click the sign within . 5. Select DICOM and click .
4. Check to see that the CL host name and IP address are

displayed. Select DICOM. 00000405.EPS

CL host name
CL IP address
00000441.EPS
NOTE
Unless the CL is network-connected, the IP address will not be
displayed correctly.
00000442.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
6. For the transfer of B/S images, enter the AE name that is the 9. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for
SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL_10_SCU) in the
the Role.
field.
REFERENCE
NOTE If SCU is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on
the DICOMSetup window.
You need not to set (Port number).
Even if SCU is selected for the Role, it will be disregarded.
10. Click the downward arrow in the

7. Click .
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless).
The DICOMSetup window opens. NOTE
For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer
Syntax will be supported.
11. Set (DICOM inter-message timeout

value) as necessary.
REFERENCE
00000533.EPS
needs not be checked.
Even if checked, it will be disregarded. (It is effective only when
SCP is specified for the Role.)
field and select the Service

Class (Private CR Storage).
REFERENCE
the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
12. Click the downward arrow in the Setup for the transfer of L/H images
The procedure explained herein involves setups of the following items.
field to select the device attribute
AE name of this equipment for the transfer of L/H images (Application
(OTHER). Entity Name)
Service Class, Role and device attribute (OTHER)
Other (timeout setting, etc.)
13. Click .
You are returned to the Application Entity List window. 1. Select on the Setup Configuration Item window
and click .
14. Click .
REFERENCE
Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be
.
AE name of this equipment 00000535.EPS

OE000093.EPS
If the key is clicked, currently selected items will be

deleted. 00000442.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2. For the transfer of L/H images, enter the AE name that is the 6. Click the downward arrow in the
SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL_11_SCU) in the
field. field and select the
NOTE
NOTE
You need not to set (Port number). For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer
Even if SCU is selected for the Role, it will be disregarded. Syntax is supported.
3. Click . 7. Set (DICOM inter-message timeout

value) as necessary.
REFERENCE
needs not be checked. Even if set, it will be
disregarded. (It is effective only when SCP is specified for the
Role.)
field to select the device attribute

00000533.EPS
(OTHER).
9. Click .
field and select the Service
Class (Private Unstandardized CR Storage).
5. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for 10. Click .
the Role. You are returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.
REFERENCE
the DICOMSetup window.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information 3. Click .

Follow the procedure described herein to register QA-WS information
that is used for the transfer of both B/S and L/H images. The Application Entity List window opens.
Register QA-WS information using NETWORK CONFIG and ALL
OTHER NODES in the Service Utility mode.
Setup for the transfer of B/S images

The procedure explained herein is used to set up the following items.
QA-WS Host name and IP address
QA-WS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number for the
transfer of B/S images
Service Class, Role, device attribute (HD_FILE)
Other (handling of two-byte characters, setting for conversion from
HQ image to standard image, etc.)
1. Select on the Setup Configuration
The New Node window opens. 00000444.EPS
2. Make the following settings. 4. Make the following settings.

Enter the Host name (e.g.: QAWS) in the Enter the QA-WS AE name (e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP) in the
field. field.
field. NOTES
Select DICOM.
Enter the QA-WS Port number (e.g.: 5030) in the

field.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
5. Click .
9. Change the following settings as required.

Setting of
ST: Select if the QA-WS cannot receive HQ images.

ST & HQ: Select if the QA-WS can receive HQ images.
SH: Do not select because this is for mammographic
images.
Setting of
00000533.EPS
ST: Select when transferring standard images only.
ST & HQ: Select when transferring both standard and HQ
6. Click the downward arrow of the images.
and select the Service

10. Select in the field.
Class (Private CR Storage).
7. Check to see that (SCP) has been selected for the

Role because the QA-WS AE is Provider.
8. Click the downward arrow of the

NOTE
For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer
Syntax is supported.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
11. Set gradation correction as required. 12. Change the following setting as required.
NOTE

This setting item is displayed only when the LUT adjustment
function key (one of the functions included in the Plus Standard
Key) has been installed for competing PACS. Yes : To transfer annotation-embedded images.

( to ).
REFERENCE

Even if checked, it will be disregarded.
OE030001.EPS
NOTE
Gradation corrections can be set up only when CR Image Storage
or Private CR Storage has been selected for the Service Class,
and cannot be set up if Private Unstandardized CR Storage has field and select the QA-WS device
been selected for it. attribute (HD_FILE).
For setup details, see Display Gradation Correction Setup

under FR5 : Function-specific Reference.
15. Click .
16. Click .
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Setup for the transfer of L/H images 2. Make the following settings.
The procedure explained herein is used to set up the following items. Enter the QA-WS AE name (e.g.: QAWS_11_SCP) in the
QA-WS Host name and IP address [already set as per the procedure field.
described above]
QA-WS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number for the NOTES
transfer of L/H images
Service Class, Role, device attribute (HD_FILE) Never fail to enter the SCP AE name.
Other (handling of two-byte characters, setting for conversion from Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly.
HQ image to standard image, etc.)
Enter the QA-WS Port number (e.g.: 5040) in the
1. Sequentially select ,
field.
, (QA-WS Host name) and
on the Setup Configuration Item window and
3. Click .
then click .
00000533.EPS
and select the Service

Class (Private Unstandardized CR Storage).
00000444.EPS 5. Check to see that (SCP) has been selected for the
Role because the QA-WS AE is Provider.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
6. Click the downward arrow of the 10. To handle two-byte characters, check the box
( to ).
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless). REFERENCE
NOTE needs not be checked.
For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer Even if checked, it will be disregarded.
Syntax is supported.

field and select the QA-WS device
attribute (HD_FILE).
(e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP) used for the transfer of B/S images.
8. Change the following settings as required.

12. Click .

Setting of
13. Click .
ST: Select if the QA-WS cannot receive HQ images.
ST & HQ: Select if the QA-WS can receive HQ images.
SH: Do not select because this is for mammographic
images.
Setting of
ST: Select when transferring standard images only.

ST & HQ: Select when transferring both standard and HQ
images.
9. Change the following setting as required.

010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be Transferred 2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image Distribution Function
1. Click [Setup Configuration Item] on the IIP Service Utility To automatically transfer images coming from the CR-IR348RU, set the
window. automatic image distribution function.
NOTE
To enable the automatic image distribution function, set Enable
Distribution Code Setup (SYSTEM CONFIG and then item No. 3 of
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION) in Service Utility to Yes.
1. Click on the Setup Configuration

Item window.
A list of devices to which images are distributed will appear on the
right-hand side on the window.
OE000021.EPS
2. Select and then

on the Setup Configuration Item window.
3. Double-click
00000410.EPS
of
2. Click .
to select the combination of
types of images to be transferred to the QA-WS.
REFERENCE 3. Make the following settings.
The following combinations are available. Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in the
0.L,H,B,S: L/H/B/S images field.

1.L,B,S: L/B/S images
2.L,S: L/S images Click the downward arrow in the
3.L,B: L/B images
4.L,H: L/H images
equipment AE name (e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP).
4. When a setup item is changed, save it using the [Config (F)] 4. Click to save the setup data.
menu.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup
2.1.7 Changing Name Elements 2.2 QA-WS Software Setup

3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection under
Set up DICOM CR Storage so that the QA-WS can receive images
coming from the CL.
See the Maintenance section of the QA-WS Service Manual.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Verifying the Function 3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS

Transfer ES images that have been read on the 5501ES to the QA-WS.
Start up the CL-AP and then make sure that images can be transferred
from the CL to the QA-WS.
1. Register exposure menus for ES images and perform image
reading on the FCR5501ES.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
2. Select images transferred from the FCR5501ES and send

3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS thus selected images to the QA-WS.
For details of the procedure used for transferring images to
the QA-WS, see FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL of the CL Operation
3.1 CL-AP Startup Manual.
1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs, 3. Make sure on the QA-WS side that images have been
transferred correctly.
Fuji Film and FCR.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)

Have the following ready to use for backup.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+F-RIS (Ordering) [Applicabl only in Japan]
CL+F-RIS (Ordering)
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)
n Overall operation flow

CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)
Add a serial connecter and connect 1. Hardware Setup
Described below is the procedure used for CL+X-Ray Controller the CL to the X-CON with a dedicated
(X-CON hereinafter) connection. serial cable.
Prior to setup Install the X-CON control function 2. Software Setup

CL requirements option key, reinstall the AP key and set
up configuration for the X-CON control
function.
The X-CON control function option key (CL X ONLINE) is required.
Check if the CL is serially connected to 3. Verifying the
X-CON for other than mammography use the X-CON correctly and can exchange Connection/Data
The connected host main unit must have been set up accordingly. data with the X-CON. Exchange
X-CON supported by the CL are as follows:

Maker Product Name Back up the configuration file. 4. Backing Up the
Toshiba Setup FIle
Shimadzu
Hitachi
Philips
Siemens
X-CON for mammography use

X-CON supported by the CL are as follows:
Maker Product Name
Toshiba MGU-100D
Planmed Sophie / Sophie mobile / Sophie MaxView ready
/ Sophie with MaxView / Sophie Classic /
Sophie Classic mobile / Sophie Classic
MaxView ready / Sophie Classic with MaxView
Siemens MAMMOMAT 3000 Nova V4.4 (no dose
calculation function provided) / MAMMOMAT
3000 Nova V4.5 (dose calculation function
provided; recommended version)
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector
1. Hardware Setup 1.1 Adding a Serial Connector

Add a serial connector as required.
NOTE
For the procedure on how to add a serial connector, see
When using a Siemens mammography X-CON, perform hardware 1. Adding a Serial Connector in FR20 Adding and Setting the
setups as directed in 1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens mammography Serial Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.
X-CON].
For details of the hardware setups, see 1.3 Hardware Setup [for
Siemens mammography X-CON].
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector ... Add a serial connector to the

CL-PC.
1.2 Connecting the Cable Connect the CL to the X-CON

with a dedicated serial cable.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.2 Connecting the Cable 1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens

mammography X-CON]
Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the X-CON.
When the MOXA board is mounted, use a dedicated serial cable, a Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the X-CON.
relay adapter and a conversion cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
COM port
Serial Connecter
CL X-CON
CL X-CON
Dedicated serial cable/dedicated serial cable + Dedicated serial cable

OE000048.EPS
relay adapter + conversion cable
OE000043.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key
2. Software Setup 2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function

Option Key
2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function To use the X-CON, the CL X ONLINE option key is needed.
Option Key
1. Insert the option key CD into the PC.
2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key After a while, the installation start window opens.
NOTE
2.3 Installing the Driver In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
2.4 Setting the Port and Service Utility
2. Click .
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports

[for Siemens mammography X-CON]
00000085.EPS
3. Click .
The syetem then returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key 2.3 Installing the Driver

If an option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. When using the PSI04A board and the MOXA board, install the relevant
Described below is the procedure to be followed to reinstall the AP key driver.
using the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later).
For details of the driver installation procedure, see 2. Installing
the Driver in FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. under FR: Function-specific Reference.
After a while, the installation start window opens.
NOTE
2.4 Setting the Port and the Service Utility
When the PSI04A board is not to be used with software version V7.1 (B)
2. Click . or later, the port and Service Utility setup must be performed accordingly
after adding a serial connector.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation. For details of the port and Service Utility setup procedure, see
3. Port and Service Utility Settings in FR20 Adding and Setting
the Serial Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
The system then returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON 3. Click .

The IDT/Console function setup items will be displayed on the
Set up the following X-CON-related configuration items. right-hand side of the window.
1. Start the Service Utility mode. IDT/Console function setup items

For how to start the Service Utility mode, see
OE000038.EPS
00000131.EPS
The [Setup Configuration Item] window opens.
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Set up the following X-CON-related configuration items.
X-CON for other than X-CON for

Item Configuration Item Remarks
mammography use mammography use
42 Timeout value Setup not required to change.
43 Image display caption Default: XCON
Number of CH to be inserted into
44 PSI board serial port number
the PSI board connector
Operating condition
45 Default: Receives. *1
reception setting
Exposure condition
46 Default: Not to transmit. *2
transmission setting
47 Minimum tube voltage Default: 28kV
48 Maximum tube voltage Default: 110kV
49 Minimum tube current Default: 9mA
50 Maximum tube current Default: 400mA
51 Minimum irradiation time Default: 10msec
52 Maximum irradiation time Default: 5400msec
107 Whether mAs value is recalculated or not at PPS
108 X-CON model
109 Whether interlock command is sent or not
111 X-CON serial transfer rate Default : 4800bits
112 Timeout value
113 Timeout value
117 Handling of dose value of Value 1 Only X-CON for mammography use.
118 Handling of dose value of Value 2 Only X-CON for mammography use.
Setting for output when there are no actual
120
X-CON result values
136 X-CON control serial port number Default: 0
142 X-CON serial transfer parity setting Default: 2
: Essential : Changed as required.
*1 : Be sure to set Yes (reception possible) for an X-CON for mammography use.
*2 : Be sure to set No (transmission not possible) for an X-CON for mammography use.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
NOTE 5. Click PRINETR and set up the following Printer-related

When the mammography X-CON used is made by Toshiba, Planmed or configuration items.
Siemens, the following configuration items must be set up as shown in the
No. Config item Meaning
table below.
33 Print Film Char Specifying whether to output film
No. Config item Toshiba Planmed Siemens (*1) 2/Examination annotation characters 2 (exposure unit
Number information) or Accession number.
Xcon Serial_TX To be set in the To be set in the 0 : Film char 2 [default]
44 0
Control Port range of 1 to 3. range of 1 to 3. Outputs film annotation characters 2
Xcon Format Select Select Select (exposure unit information).
108 1 : Accession Number [default of the CR
Type 4: Mammo1. 5: Mammo2. 6: Mammo3.
Console Lite/Plus]
Xcon Interlock Outputs the Accession number.
109 Command Yes Yes No (Default)
Transfer 74 Film String Format Specifying whether to use ordinary film
annotation characters for all images (as
Xcon Serial_TX has been so previously) or film annotation
111 2:4800 (Default) 3:9600. 3:9600.
Baudrate characters that indicate mammography-
Xcon No- specific information for mammography
112 Response 100 20 (Default) 20 (Default) images.
Timeout 0 : GeneralFormatOnly [default]
Uses ordinary film annotation
Xcon Data characters.
113 Reception 100 20 (Default) 20 (Default) 1 : MammographyFormat
Timeout Uses mammography film annotation
Xcon 1:Entrance Dose 1:Entrance Dose 1:Entrance Dose characters.
117
DoseValue1 (Default) (Default) (Default) 87 Film Character Mode Specifying film annotation characters on
Xcon 2:Dose Product 2:Dose Product 2:Dose Product Setting On XCON mammography X-CON material
118 Material Info.
DoseValue2 (Default) (Default) (Default) information.
0 : DICOM
Xcon Serial_TX
136 0 (Default) 0 (Default) 1 (Serial Port No.) Conforms to DICOM definitions (as has
Control Prot2
been so previously).
Xcon Serial_Tx 1 : X-CON-IF [default]
142 2:even (Default) 2:even (Default) 0:none
Parity Conforms to X-CON IF definitions.
*1: For connection of the CL to the Siemens equipment, be sure to use a

special cable provided with an isolator. 6. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
A window opens, prompting you to confirm the
setup data to be saved.
7. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports [for Siemens mammography X-CON]
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports 5. Perform the following settings on the Communications Port
(COM2) Properties window.
[for Siemens mammography X-CON]
I
When using a Siemens mammography X-CON, the COM ports must be
set up accordingly.
I
1. Right-click My Computer from the menu to select II
Property.
III
IV
2. Click the Hardware tab and then . V
The Device Manager window opens. VI
3. Click the mark to the left of Ports (COM & LPT) on the
Device Manager window.
OE000050.EPS
I. Select the Port Settings tab.

II. Select 9600.
III. Select 8.
OE000049.EPS IV. Select None.
V. Select 1.
4. Right-click the COM port that is connected to the serial VI. Select None.
cable and select Property.
The Communications Port (COM2) Properties window then 6. Click .
opens.
NOTE
Be sure to right-click a port of the same number as to the COM port
7. Click .
specified with the CL Config settings (CONFIG - SYSTEM The system returns to the System Properties window.
CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION - No 136 Xcon Serial_TX
Control Port2 of IIP Service Utility - Setup Configuration Item). 8. Click .
The system then returns to the desktop.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection
3. Verifying the Connection/Data 3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection

Exchange 1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs,
Fuji Film and FCR.
After starting up the CL-AP, check if the CL is serially connected to the
X-CON correctly and can exchange data with the X-CON. The CL opening window opens.
3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection Version A software
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
2. Confirm the following displays.

Version A software
When the CL is serially connected to the XCON normally, XCON
displayed on the window will be highlighted in white on the purple
background.
If serial connection between the CL and the XCON is not
recognized for any reason, XCON will not be highlighted
remaining thus in white on the gray background.
Version B software
Make sure that no error message box opens at the right top of the
window (or X-CON Offline is displayed in the box).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange NOTES

For software version V7.1 or earlier
Check to see that data can be exchanged with the X-CON as per To check if data is exchanged properly during exposures using
configuration settings (CSL/IDT FUNCTION). a cassette, shot X-rays with targeted exposure menus selected
accordingly (after each X-ray shot, a mark appears to show that the actual
If 45. Xcon Performed Info. Reception in Configuration CSL/IDT
FUNCTION is enabled: exposure result data was received), and then register the IP barcode.
When X-CONs actual values, including tube voltage, tube current For software version V8.0
and irradiation time, are received, a mark confirming the reception is When your Image Reader is a cassette type machine, make sure
displayed at the right top of the exposure menu on the window. to register the IP after completing the exposure processing.
After receiving the actual exposure result data, a mark lights
Reception confirmation mark
up at the moment when the IP is registered. Proceeding to the
next exposure process without registering the IP will cause it
to be considered as a split exposure, and disabling the correct
OE000052.EPS
exposure parameters to be displayed.
To have a study be suspended, ensure that IP registration has
After the completion of exposures, X-CONs actual values, including
been performed with respect to all the exposure menus already
tube voltage, tube current and irradiation time, will be transferred to
RIS or the like via the CL (the values can be verified also on film). subjected to exposure, otherwise information on X-ray exposure
parameters will be cancelled.
If 46. Xcon Exposure Info. Transfer in Configuration CSL/IDT For software version V8.1 or later
FUNCTION is enabled:
The status of the reception confirmation mark when the actual
Setup items of the exposure menu, such as tube voltage, tube exposure result information is received from XCON is shown below.
current and irradiation time, will be reflected on the X-CON during
exposures. Status of reception
User operation Remarks
confirmation mark
Before exposure None
After the exposure, Blinking Not connected to any menus.
the actual exposure (on the current menu)
result information is
received from XCON
Select an exposure Blinking Not connected to any menus so
menu arbitrarily (on the selected menu) the reception confirmation mark is
lighted up on the selected menu.
Confirm the IP Lighting The information of actual exposure
for the arbitrary (on the menu that result data is connected to the
exposure menu IP is registered) menu for which IP is registered.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

Have the following ready to use for backup.
For detailed backup procedures, see "5. Restoring/Backing Up the

Configuration File - Configuration Restore/Backup" under
"MU: Maintenance Utility".
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]
5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]

UD150B/B-10 KXO-80F
DHF-155H (S) SUPER 50 CP Polydros50S
HLZ110 (Tomography) KXO-50F
Communication I/F RS232C UD150B: RS232C HLZ110: RS422 RS232C RS232C RS232C
spec. 4800BPS 4800BPS 4800BPS 4800BPS 4800BPS
Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Start: 1bit Data: 8bits
Common for Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit
semi-duplex and D-sub25p male straight UD150B: D-sub25p male cross D-sub25p male cross (the D-sub25p male cross D-sub25p male cross
start/stop system. (provided by the maker) (provided by Fuji) same cable as the makers (provided by Fuji) (provided by Fuji)
According to HLZ110: D-sub25p male cross will be provided by Fuji)
JIS X-5002. (provided by the maker)
CL X-ray exposure conditions CL X-ray exposure conditions CL X-ray exposure CL X-ray exposure CL X-ray exposure conditions
setup kVmAms setup kVmAms conditions setup conditions setup setup kVmAms
X-ray exposure conditions X-ray exposure conditions APR code Mode selection code X-ray exposure conditions actual
Function actual CL exposure results actual CL exposure results X-ray exposure conditions X-ray exposure conditions CL exposure results kVmAms
kVmAms kVmAms actual CL exposure actual CL exposure KXO 50F is only for X-ray
results kVmAms results kVmAms exposure conditions setup CL
X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. (Select X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. (Select X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. Fixed at 0. CL X-ray is not effective.
according to the technique.) according to the technique.) (Select according to the Manually selected by the Only X-ray CL is effective.
Techniques 1 to 8 Techniques 1 to 5 (8 at max.) technique.) controller. 00: BUCKY1 01: BUCKY2
1: General exposure 2: Bucky - 1 1: Spot 2: Bucky - 1 02: GEN1/BKY3
X-ray tube/ 3: Bucky - 2 4: AUX1 3: Bucky - 2 4: General Techniques 1 to 9 Reserved 03: GEN2
technique code 5: Tomography 6: Spot 5: Tomography exposure 04: TOMO WO.APR
7: Continuous 8: AUX2 05: TOMO WITH APR
exposure 06: MAMMO 07: SPOT
08: SPOT-ATR 09: ANGIO
10: ANGIO WITH KVR
Exposure/ Without perspective flag: Fixed at 0.
perspective flag
Film-related code Invalid 00000000
11: DHF-155H 01: UD150B
Maker/model code 10: CR-250 00: HLZ110 30 40 20
(Perspective/tomography)
Tube voltage (kV) 20150 20150 20150
Irradiation time 18000 18000 Invalid 0 Invalid 0 39999
(ms) X-ray actual CL result is X-ray actual CL result is
effective. effective. 101000
Tube current (mA) 10630,1250 101000 20, 50, 100, 160, 200, 250: Small focus
320, 400, 500, 640, 800: Large focus
1 to 64, techniques
ID code 0 1 to 16 or 1 to 32 17 0
(512 programs in total)
mAs mode: 5 to 8000
Reserved 1 If mAs mode is not used (normal): 0 0 0 0 0
Focus size specified0: Small Focus size specified0: Small
Reserved 2 focus 1000: Large focus focus 1000: Large focus 0 0 0
Film sensitivity 2: Standard 0: Standard 0: Standard
Detection field 14 14 14 0 0
Film density 3: 0 standard 4: 0 standard 4: 0 standard
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection)

010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient Record System [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic
Patient Record System
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CL+CL (Cluster Connection)
Connection/setup examples
CL+CL (Cluster Connection)
CL2 setup example
The procedure for cluster-connecting two or more units of the Host name : fcr-csl2*
CR-IR348CL is described below. IP address : 172.16.1.30*
NOTE
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter CL.
CL2
RU2
Before setup
FRUP
CL requirements TCP/IP
FRUP
The CLs to be cluster-connected must be found on the network and
capable of transferring images. RU1
CL1
CL1 setup example

Host name : fcr-csl1*
IP address : 172.16.1.20*
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to be

changed depending on the employed equipment and network
environment. 00000200.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup

Connect the CLs with network cables. 1. Hardware
Setup Ensure that the CLs are network-connected as indicated below.
10Base-T/
To permit study information sharing, perform the 2. Software 100Base-TX cable
following procedures for all CLs to be cluster- Setup
connected. TCP/IP
Verifying the host name
Initializing the output queue and image database
Equalizing the configuration settings RU1 CL1 CL2 RU2
Equalizing the menu/environment/table settings
Performing setup for drive sharing 00000202.EPS
Performing NetBEUI setup

Performing study information sharing setup NOTES
Defining the share range
Backing up/restoring the share settings Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connector.
The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
Perform the following procedures as needed for compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
individual CLs.
Performing integrated output processing setup
Performing centralized patient information
management setup
Performing study list setup
Verifying that the CLs can share study information 3. Connection

Verification
Backing up the configuration data 4. Setup File

Backup
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2. Software Setup 2.1 Software Setup for All CLs

To permit study information sharing, use Windows, Service Utility, and
Perform the following CL software setup procedure. User Utility to complete various setup procedures at the CLs to be
cluster-connected.
2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name
2.1.2 Initializing the Output Queue and Image 2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name
Database
To permit the CLs to share study information, ensure that their host
2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings
names do not exceed ten characters in length. (By the default, the CL
2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table host name consists of no more than ten characters.)
Settings Tasks done on
all CLs Verify the CL host name as directed below.
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing
2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup For Windows 2000/XP
2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing
Setup 1. From the menu, choose Settings, Control Panel
2.1.8 Defining the Share Range
and then System.
2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs 2. Choose the Network Identification tab to verify that the
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Full computer name consists of no more than ten
Processing Setup Tasks done on characters (excluding the period at the end).
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient individual CLs
Information Management Setup
2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup
00000270.EPS
If the host name exceeds ten characters in length, change it so that

it consists of not more than ten characters.
For details on how to change the CL host name, see
Appendix B - Changing the CL Host Name in
3. Click .
The System Properties window closes.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For Windows Vista/7 2.1.2 Initializing the Output Queue and Image
Database
To establish a cluster connection, it is necessary to restore the output
The Control Panel ("All Control Panel Items" for Windows 7) queue and image database of each CLs to their default states.
window opens.
Initialize the output queue and image database as directed below.
1. Start Service Utility. In the IIP Service Utility window, click

2. Double-click (click for Windows 7) . [DataBase Utility].
3. Click .
4. Select the Computer Name tab and check to see that the
Full Computer Name is described at a maximum of 10
characters (a period at the tail end is not included).
00000615.EPS
2. Click Clear Output Queue.
OE000100.ai
When the host name is described with 10 or more characters,

change it accordingly so that it is within the 10 characters.
For how to change the CL host name, see Appendix B
Changing the CL Host Name under RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
00000616.EPS
5. Click .
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
The Command Prompt window opens to display the following 2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings
message.
For study information sharing, it is necessary that all the CLs agree with
each other in some Service Utility configuration settings.
Perform the following steps to check the relevant configuration settings
00000271.EPS and equalize them as needed.
3. Press the <Enter> key. 1. With Service Utility, check the configuration settings.
The output queue will then be initialized. For the configuration settings that need to be equalized, see
the sections indicated below.
4. Click [ImageDB Initialization]. 3.4 Confi guration Details - 1. IMAGE MODALITY,
3.5 Configuration Details - 3. QA FUNCTION and
3.6 Configuration Details - 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
in the MU: Maintenance Utility
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP and
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Character
Format of FR1 Print Output Function in FR: Function-specific
Reference
Locate the setup item list in the above reference sections, note the
column for cluster connection, and ensure that the CL agrees with
the other CLs in items marked Agreement required.
Items specified to be set up uniquely must be done so unfailingly.
00000617.EPS
The Command Prompt window opens to display the following 2. When all the relevant settings are equalized to achieve
message. agreement, click Exit Service Utility in the IIP Service
Utility window.
IIP Service Utility exits.
00000271.EPS

The image database will then be initialized.
6. Click .
You are then returned to the IIP Service Utility window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/

Table Settings
2. From the (or ) menu, choose
User Utility
For study information sharing, it is necessary that all the CLs agree with
each other in some menu, environment, and table settings that can be The Main Menu window opens.
accessed from User Utility.
Perform the following steps to check the relevant User Utility settings
and equalize them as needed.
Starting User Utility 00000090.EPS
1. From the menu, choose Programs, Fuji Film

and then FCR.
After about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Equalizing the menu settings

1. Click .
The Menu Setup window opens.
2. Confirm the following settings and edit them as needed to

achieve agreement with the other CLs.
Image processing parameters
Exposure menu parameters
The X-ray control parameter setting, which is one of the exposure
menu parameters, can be edited independently for all CLs.
(The reason is that the X-ray control parameter setting needs to vary
with the employed Image Reader model.)
When the CLs do not agree in X-ray control parameter setting, the
setting for the CL with which exposure menus are registered takes
effect. Even if an exposure is suspended at a CL at which registration
is completed and later made at another CL, the setting prevailing at
the time of registration takes effect.
The extended menu code and MPM code must basically be in
agreement.
If the CLs do not agree in extended menu code or MPM code, their
operations differ depending on the procedure performed and menu
code difference.
To give an example, the table on the next page shows the relationship
between the operations at CL-B and the exposure menu registrations
at CL-A.
3. Click .
The Main Menu window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Relationship between operations at CL-B and exposure menu registrations at CL-A

Operation
No. Function When CL-B has MPM code When CL-B has neithe MPM code
but not extended menu code nor extended menu code
1 Starting a study after its move to CL-B The study cannot be started unless there is an extended code for the Same as left.
Unexposed menu, and the following messages appear.
Failed in acquiring image information
Failed in reading an exposure menu
The process can be resumed by registering a menu or changing the
exposure menu.
As regards the Image entered menu, a study can be started even when
the extended code is unavailable.
2 Moving an image within a study after its If the extended menu code for the image source and destination are not Same as left.
move to CL-B registered in the menu datafase of a specific CL, it is reported to the user
and no image changeover takes place.
3 Changing the exposure menu after a study When a study can be started, a menu change can be applied (Unexposed Same as left.
is moved to CL-B menu).
4 Exposure menu for QA within a study after The menu change dialog box opens with no menu selected (although the Same as left.
its move to CL-B currently set menu should be selected).
The sequence to be followed after dialog box opening remains unchanged.
5 Changing the exposure menu parameters Changes are possible. Same as left.
for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
6 Changing the image processing conditions Changes are possible. Same as left.
for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
7 Shuttering processing and marking for QA Processing is possible. Same as left.
within a study after its move to CL-B
8 Changing the exposure menu for intensive The menu change dialog box opens with no menu selected (although the Same as left.
QA from CL-B currently set menu should be selected).
The sequence to be followed after dialog box opening remains unchanged.
9 Changing the exposure menu parameters Changes are possible. Same as left.
for intensive QA from CL-B
10 Changing the image processing condition Changes are possible. Same as left.
parameters for intensive QA from CL-B
11 Image changeover for intensive QA from If the extended menu code for the image source and destination are not Same as left.
CL-B available, it is reported to the user and no image changeover takes place.
12 Integrated output processing from CL-B Output is possible. If the MPM code is not available,
different image processing result is
obtained because the output is
generated according to the default value.
For details on User Utility, see the Operation Manual.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Equalizing the environment settings (distribution settings)
1. Click .
The Property setting window opens.
2. Choose the tab.
The Distribution Setting window opens.

Item
Item Necessity for agreement Symptom caused by disagreement
no.
1 Auto distribution setting The setting can be defined variously The setting for the CL that has entered images takes
for all CLs. effect (see *1).
2 PRINT Attribute The setting can be defined variously The Print properties set for the CL that has entered
for all CLs. images will be employed (see *2).
3 FILE Attribute Agreement is required. If there is a disagreement, different distribution servers
may be used even when the same study is handled.
4 Energy-Subtraction Agreement is required. The number of images varies with the processing CL.
Exposure Output Image
5 Output stitched image Agreement is required. The number of images varies with the processing CL.
6 Setting for reduction ratio Agreement is required. The film varies with the output CL.
for an output on 8"10" film
*1 When a study is moved in the middle of an exposure process from CL 1 which is set for image distribution after QA (Print Attribute
setting. printer A) to CL 2 which is set for image distribution during reading (Print Attribute setting. printer B), the resulting operation is
as indicated below.
Menu status at startup Image distribution timing Symptom caused by disagreement

Image input is completed. After completion of exposure The output is delivered to the destination CLs Print
and QA at CL 2. Attribute setting (printer A).
The image is not entered yet and At the time of image input. The output is delivered to the destination CLs Print
is to be entered after the move. Attribute setting (printer B).
The menu is registered after the At the time of image input. The output is delivered to the destination CLs Print
move. Attribute setting (printer B).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4. Click . Equalizing the table settings

1. Click .
The Table Setting window opens.

Item Necessity for Symptom caused by

Item
no. agreement disagreement
1 Technologist Agreement is The information about a

Information Setting required. technologist may be improperly
displayed or output.
2 Requesting Agreement is The information about a
Department required. requesting department may be
Information Setting improperly displayed or output.
3 Film Mark Setting The setting can
be defined
variously for all
CLs.
3. Click .
Exiting User Utility and AP

1. Click .
User Utility exits.
2. On the (or ) menu, click Exit

System.
The Exit window opens.

The AP exits and the desktop screen appears.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing 7. Click .

For study information sharing, perform the following drive C sharing The Select Users, Computers, or Groups window opens.
setup procedure at each CL.
For Windows 2000

1. Open Windows Explorer.
00000609.EPS
2. Right-click drive C and then choose Sharing.

The Local Disk (C:) Properties window opens. 8. Choose Administrators, click , and then click
.
REFERENCE
Although Administrators and Administrator are both selectable,
be sure to choose Administrators.
00000606.EPS
3. Choose the Sharing tab and then click .
The New Share window opens.
4. In the Share Name field, enter C.

00000610.EPS
The Permissions for C window opens.

5. Click .
00000611.EPS
00000608.EPS
9. Choose Administrators and then check Full Control for
Permissions ( ).
6. Choose Everyone and then click .
10. Repeatedly click until the Local Disk (C:)
Everyone is then deleted. Properties window appears.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
11. Choose the Security tab. 15. Choose Administrators and then check Full Control for
Permissions ( )
Everyone is then removed.
16. Click to close the Local Disk (C:) Properties
window.
13. Click . The entered setup data is then saved.
The Select Users Computers, or Groups window opens. REFERENCE

When the sharing setup procedure for drive C is completed, the
14. Choose Administrators, click , and then click icon for drive C looks like the figure below.
REFERENCE
00000610.EPS
00000611.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For Windows XP 4. Right-click drive C and then choose Sharing and

Security....
The Local Disk (C:) Properties window opens.
2. Select Folder Options... from Tools.
The Folder Option window opens.
00000XXX.EPS
5. Click .
The New Share window opens.
00000XXX.EPS
6. In the Share Name field, enter C.
3. Select the View tab, and remove the checkmark from Use
simple file sharing (Recommended) ( ).
Click .
00000XXX.EPS
7. Click .
00000XXX.EPS
00000XXX.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
8. Choose Everyone and then click . 12. Select Administrators and click repeatedly
Everyone is then deleted. until the Permissions for C window appears.
9. Click .
The Select Users or Groups window opens.
00000XXX .EPS
REFERENCE
00000XXX.EPS
10. Click .
The Common Queries window opens.
11. Click . 00000XXX.EPS
00000XXX .EPS 00000XXX.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
13. Choose Administrators and then check Full Control for For Windows Vista/7
Allow ( ).
14. Click repeatedly until the Local Disk(C:)
2. Select Folder Options... from the Tools menu.
Proterties window appears.
The Folder Options window opens.
15. Choose the Security tab.
REFERENCE
When Administrators is not displayed, repeat steps 9. to 12.
OE150001.ai
17. Choose Administrators and then check Full Control for 3. Select the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use
Allow ( ) Sharing Wizard (Recommended) ( ). Then click
.
window.
The entered setup data is then saved.
REFERENCE
icon for drive C looks like the figure below.
OE150002.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
4. Right-click drive C and select the Sharing tab (Share 8. Select Everyone and click .
with Advanced Sharing for Windows 7).
The Local Disk (C:) Properties window opens.
9. Click [Add].
The Select Users or Groups window opens.
OE150003.ai
5. Click Advanced Sharing.

The Advanced Sharing window opens.
6. Put a checkmark to Share this folder ( ) and

enter C in the Share name field. OE150006.ai
10. Click .
The Common Queries window opens.
11. Click .
OE150004.ai
7. Click [Permissions...].
OE150007.ai
OE150005.ai
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
12. Select Administrators and click repeatedly 16. Perform the following settings.
until the Permissions for C window opens. For Windows Vista
I. Select Everyone if there is and then click .

OE150008.ai
For Windows 7
REFERENCE I. If Everyone exists, click [Edit...] to open the Permissions for
Although Administrators and Administrator are both selectable, OS (C:) window, and then select Everyone and click
be sure to select Administrators here. .
REFERENCE
If Administrators is not displayed, repeat steps 9 through 12.
OE150009.ai
The Permissions for C window opens. 17. Select Administrators and then check Full Control for
Allow ( ).

OE150010.ai
window.
13. Select Administrators and put a checkmark to Allow in REFERENCE
the Full Control field ( ).
icon for drive C looks like the figure below.
14. Click repeatedly until Local Disk (C:)
Properties window opens.
15. Select the Security tab.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup 3. Click .

NOTE The Select Network Component Type window opens.
If Windows2000 SP3 or later is used under Windows XP, Windows Vista
or Windows 7, the NetBEUI setup is not required.
To reduce the time required for file access between cluster-connected

CLs, perform the following NetBEUI setup procedure at each CL.
1. From the menu, choose Settings, Network and

Dial-up Connections and then Local Area Connection 00000602.EPS
Status.
The Local Area Connection Status window opens. 4. Choose Protocol and then click .
The Select Network Protocol window opens.
00000600.EPS
2. Click . 00000603.EPS
00000601.EPS
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Choose [NetBEUI Protocol] and then click .

NetBEUI Protocol is then added.
00000604.EPS
6. Uncheck [NetBEUI Protocol] ( ).
00000605.EPS
7. Click .
8. Restart the CL.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing Setup 3. In the Study Sharing Configuration window, set [Study
Sharing] to YES.
To permit study information sharing, perform the following study
information sharing setup procedure at each CL.

[Setup Study Sharing].
00000614.EPS
4. Click .
00000612.EPS
The SetCluster window opens.
2. Click [Setup Configuration].
00000613.EPS
The Study Sharing Configuration window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.1.8 Defining the Share Range 2. Click [Host Sharing].

To define the study information share range, perform the following
procedure to register the host name of the CLs that share the study
information.
IMPORTANT
When you register the host name of the CLs that share the study
information, use only one CL. To the other study information sharing
CLs, copy the registered data from the CL at which the host name
registration procedure is completed (by backing up the data and
restoring it). 00000618.EPS
Do not change the registered host name individually at the CLs. The HostSharing window opens.
If the host name is registered or its registration is changed at the CLs
on an individual basis, the images related to shared study information
may not be displayed.

00000619.EPS
3. Click .
The Host window opens.
00000612.EPS

00000620.EPS
4. Make entries in the [Hostname] and [Location] fields and

then click .
Hostname : Host name (computer name) of a CL that shares

study information.
Location : Name (any name will do) of the location at which the
above CL is installed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
The entered host name and installation location name are then 2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings
displayed.
For cluster-connected CLs, the same sharing setup data about a
registered host name must be used. Therefore, copy the registered host
name data to the other CLs to be cluster-connected.
For the copy operation, use the sharing setup backup/restore function.
The procedure is indicated below.
IMPORTANT
00000621.EPS
Be sure to perform sharing setup at only one CL. Copy the resulting
setup data to the other CLs. If you register a host name individually at
5. If two or more CLs share the study information, repeat steps each CL, images may not be displayed.
3. and 4. as needed.
REFERENCE
6. In the HostSharing window, click .
Within the CL, the host name registered for sharing setup is managed
The entered setup data is then saved, and the SetCluster with a unique ID. This ID varies with the order of registration.
window opens.
7. Click .
00000111.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Backing up the sharing setup data 4. While the Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup
Back up on storage media the sharing setup file of a CL for which the
window is open, enter the media drive directory pathname
study information share setting was performed. For this operation, have (e.g., a:\) in the [Configuration Backup] area, and then click
the following ready for use. .
1. Insert the media into the PC.

00000042.EPS
Sharing setup data files and are then saved in the
media.
5. Click .
00000612.EPS
6. Click .
3. Click [Backup/Restore].
00000043.EPS
The Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup window opens. 00000111.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Restoring the sharing setup data 4. While the Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup
Restore the sharing setup data file, backed up on media in previous
window is open, enter the media drive directory pathname
steps, to other cluster-connected CLs. (e.g., a:\) in the [Configuration Restore] area, and then click
.
1. Insert the media into the PC created in Backing up the
sharing setup data.

00000041.EPS
The sharing setup data is then restored.
5. Click .
00000612.EPS
6. Click .
The SetCluster window opens. The IIP Service Utility window opens.
3. Click [Backup/Restore]. 7. Click [Exit Service Utility].
00000043.EPS
00000111.EPS
The Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs 3. While the Study Sharing Configuration window is open,
set [OutputProcess] to Centered.
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Processing Setup
To permit a specific CL to exercise centralized management of output to
a printer or other device, define the output processing CL by performing
the following procedure.

[Setup Study Sharing]. 00000622.EPS
4. Click .
The OutputMasterList window opens.
5. In the OutputMasterList, check the host name for the

output processing CL, and then click .
00000612.EPS
2. Click [Setup Configuration].
00000623.EPS
NOTE
The OutputMasterList shows the host names that are registered
as directed in 2.1.8 Defining the Share Range.
00000613.EPS
The Study Sharing Configuration window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
6. From the OutputMaster pull-down menu, choose the host 10. Click [Exit Service Utility].
name of the output processing CL.
00000111.EPS
00000624.EPS
NOTE
The OutputMaster pull-down menu shows only the host names
that are checked in step 5.
7. To deliver output to the local printer for the output

processing CL, check [Use LOCAL Printer] ( ).
8. Click .
The entered setup data is then saved, and the SetCluster

window opens.
9. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient Information 3. While the Study Sharing Configuration window is open,
Management Setup set [PatientMaster] to YES.
To permit a specific CL to manage patient information in a centralized

manner, define the patient database centralized management CL by
performing the following procedure.

00000625.EPS
4. From the Master pull-down menu, choose the host name

for the CL to be designated as the patient database
centralized management CL.
00000612.EPS
2. Click [Setup Configuration]. 00000626.EPS
NOTE
The Master pull-down menu shows the host names that are
registered as directed in 2.1.8 Defining the Share Range.
5. Click .
The entered setup data is then saved, and the SetCluster

window opens.
00000613.EPS
6. Click .
The Study Sharing Configuration window opens. The IIP Service Utility window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7. Click [Exit Service Utility]. 2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup

To change the items of study information to be displayed within a study
list, perform a display item setup procedure from the Study List Setup
window at an individual CL.
For details on how to set the items to be displayed within a study
list, see CL Operation Manual.
NOTE
If the Maximum Display Count for a study list is set to limitless, a
considerable amount of time may be required for study information
00000111.EPS operation.
The reason is that the number of study information items to be
IIP Service Utility exits. displayed within a study list may increase when multiple CLs share the
study information.
It is also well to remember that study information of your interest may
not appear if you reduce the maximum display count setting. In such an
instance, you can display the study information of your interest by
executing the search/sort/filtering command from the study list window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.1 Study Registration
3. Connection Verification 3.1 Study Registration

Register a study at one of the cluster-connected CLs.
Register a study at one of the cluster-connected CLs and then read an
image from an Image Reader. Verify that another cluster-connected CL
can display the information about the registered study and the 1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs,
associated image.
Fuji Film and FCR.
3.1 Study Registration The CL opening window opens.
TCP/IP In about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens.
Version A software
RU1 CL1 CL2 RU2
3.2 Image Reading 3.3 Study Information and

Image Display
00000627.EPS
NOTE
OE000017.EPS
Before performing the verification procedures, start all the cluster-
connected CLs. If any CL is not operating, the study information Version B software
possessed by that unit cannot be shared.
OE000099.EPS
2. From the registration window, register study information.

For details on how to register study information, see CL
Operation Manual.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.2 Image Reading
3.2 Image Reading 3.3 Study Information and Image Display

At the CL with which a study is registered, read an image from the RU. Verify that the study information registered by performing the
aforementioned procedure and the associated image can be displayed
1. Perform an image read process in relation to the registered at a CL other than the CL that has performed the registration and image
study information. read processes.
For details on how to read an image, see CL Operation
Manual. 1. Start the CL-AP at another CL.
2. Verify that the image is saved in the CL and can be displayed 2. Verify that the Study List window shows the study
accordingly. information registered by performing the aforementioned
procedure.
For details on how to display an image, see CL Operation
Manual. For details on how to verify the study information from the
Study List window, see CL Operation Manual.
3. Select the study information to verify that the associated

image appears on the display.
For details on the image display procedure, see
CL Operation Manual.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Back up the CL setup files.
When using a cluster connection, it is necessary to back up the cluster
connection setup file as well as the normal setup files.
For backup, have the following items ready for use.
For details on the normal setup file backup procedure, see

5. Restoring/Backing Up the Confiuration File Configuration
Restore/Backup in MU: Maintenance Utility.
For details on the cluster connection setup file backup procedure,

see 2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer)
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital
Setup example of other connected equipment
Mammogram Transfer) HOST name : Mammo-View
IP address : 172.16.1.35*
Described herein is the procedure for transferring digital mammography AE name (Provider) : MammoView01-SCP*
images from the CR-IR348CL to other makers equipment using the Port number : 5001*
DICOM MG Storage function.
Service Class : MG Image Storage For Presentation
NOTE (Image processing parameters not provided.)
The CR-IR348CL and the equipment to which images are transferred
are abbreviated hereafter CL and other connected equipment,
respectively.
Other connected
equipment
(Other maker's equipment)
Prior to setup
CL requirements TCP/IP
Data transfer DICOM MG Storage
Option keys are needed.
5000MA plus, etc.
CL
CL DICOM MAMMO S key MG Storage SCU
(Image processing parameters not
provided.) CL setup example
CL DICOM MAMMO P key MG Storage SCU HOST name : fcr-csl*
(Image processing parameters IP address : 172.16.1.20*
provided.) AE name (User) : CL-mammo-SCU*
Service Class : MG Image Storage For Presentation
NOTE (Image processing parameters not provided.)
To install an option that provides image processing parameters, another Transfer Syntax : Implicit VR Little Endian*
option that does not provide image processing parameters must have
been installed. Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need be
00001600.EPS
Requirements of other connected equipment

Other connected equipment must have been set up accordingly.
The DICOM MG Storage (SCP) Service Class must be supported.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup

CL to other connected equipment. Connect the CL to other connected equipment via network as illustrated
below.
10BASE-T/
Make setups for inputting/outputting 2. CL Software Setup 100BASE-TX cable
digital mammography images via
DICOM. TCP/IP
setups. RU CL Other connected
equipment
Setup on the CL (AE name, device
attribute, Service Class, etc.). 00000044.EPS
Registration of AE name, device

attribute, port number, Service Class, NOTES
handling of HQ images, etc. on other
connected equipment. Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL
Make the following setups as required. and other connected equipment.
Setup for automatic image distribution The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
code. compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
EQUIPMENT (OD attribute only).
Setup for UID issuance.
Setup for name elements.
Make sure that images can be 3. Connection

transferred from the CL to other Checkout
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu
2. CL Software Setup 2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography

Exposure Menu
Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other Replace the exposure menu and exposure menu parameters with the
items. DICOM MG Storage equivalents.
See 5.2 Replacing the Menu Database in RI: Reinstalling the
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Software.
Exposure Menu
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram

Transmissioin Option Keys
2.3 Reinstalling the AP key
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage

Function
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected

Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution

Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE)
2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method
2.9 Changing the Name Elements
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmission Option Keys
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram 2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key

Transmission Option Keys
If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
For DICOM MG Storage transmission of digital mammograms, it is Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall
necessary to install the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key and CL the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
DICOM MAMMO P option key.
However, if you do not attach image processing parameters to the 1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
images to be transmitted, install only the CL DICOM MAMMO S option After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
key.
NOTE
1. Insert the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key CD into the PC. In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
After several seconds, the installation start window automatically double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
opens.
NOTE
2. Click .
2. Click .
A dialog box opens to indicate that the installation process is
completed.
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
00000046.EPS
3. Click .
5. To install the CL DICOM MAMMO P option key as well,

change the CD and then repeat step 2. through 4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG 4. Select and click .

Storage Function
Make settings for the following items of the CL side.
Host name and IP address of the CL
5. Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are
displayed.
AE name (Application Entity Name) of the CL
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device attribute (Attribute)
Other (timeout settings, etc.) CL host name
1. Start Service Utility.

For the Service Utility startup procedure, see CL IP address
Utility. 00000092.EPS
2. Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the IIP Service Utility NOTE

window. The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is
00000599.EPS
00000091.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
6. Select DICOM and click . 8. Click .
Select "DICOM". 00000093.EPS
00000443.EPS
field to select MG Image

Storage For Presentation.
NOTE
To attach image processing parameters, select MG Image Storage
For Processing.
REFERENCES
If MG Image Storage For Presentation is selected, items that
00000094.EPS
need not be set will be hidden on the DICOM Setup window.
7. Enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL- between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection,
mammo-SCU) in the field.
For details of verification of connection, see 7. Verifying the
NOTE Connection in MU: Maintenance Utility.
There is no need to set the port number in .

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
10. To set up the AE that is the User, select (SCU) for the 13. Click downward arrow in the
Role.
field to select the device attribute (OTHER).
REFERENCE
NOTE
the DICOM Setup window. To attach image processing parameters, select MG Image Storage
For DICOM SCU settings on this equipment (THIS HOST (IIP)), For Processing.
two or more Service Class settings (e.g., CR Image Storage,
DICOM Print, and other) can be selected for a single Application
Entity. Moreover, two or more Transfer Syntax settings (e.g., 14. Click .
JPEGLossless, ImplicitVRLittleEndian, and other) can be selected
for a single Service Class. The system returns to the Application Entity List window.
11. Click downward arrow in the 15. Click .
field to select the The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window.
Transfer Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian). REFERENCES

Service Class ImplictVR ExplictVR JPEG changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click
MG Image Storage .
For Presentation

MG Image Storage If the key is clicked, currently selected items are
For Processing

deleted.
Verification
12. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value 16. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
as necessary. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
REFERENCES
To transfer large-capacity image data such as mammograms,
check the time required to transfer those images using the 17. Click .
[Timeout1: ] box a time long enough to perform image transfer The system saves the setup data.
processing.
It is not necessary to check .
above is the SCU.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected 3. Click .

Equipment for DICOM MG Storage
The Application Entity List window opens for setup of information
Function on other connected equipment.
Register the following items of other connected equipment.

AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of other
connected equipment
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, and device attribute (Attribute)
Setups for gradation correction
1. Select of the Setup Configuration

2.
00000098.EPS
Make the following settings.
Enter the Host name (e.g.: Mammo-View) in the 4. Make the following settings.
field. Enter the AE name of other connected equipment
(e.g.: MammoView01-SCP) in the
field. field.
Select DICOM.
NOTES
Enter the Port number of other connected equipment

Select "DICOM". 00000097.EPS
(e.g.: 5001) in the field.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
5. Click . 8. Click downward arrow in the

The DICOMSetup window opens. field to select Transfer
Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian).
Service Class ImplictVR ExplictVR JPEG
MG Image Storage
For Presentation

MG Image Storage
For Processing

00000443.EPS
Verification
6. Click the downward arrow mark in the
NOTES
field and select the MG Be sure to select the same Transfer Syntax as that selected for
Image Storage For Presentation function. this equipment.
For image transfer addressed to the image diagnosis server,
NOTE
select MG Image Storage For Processing.
To attach image processing parameters, select MG Image Storage
For Processing.
Do not select two or more Service Class settings for a single 9. Change the following settings as required.
Application Entity (e.g., MG Image Storage For Presentation and
MG Image Storage For Processing). Further, do not select two or
more Transfer Syntax settings for a single Service Class (e.g., Setting of
JPEG Lossless and Implicit VR Little Endian).
Even if you select two or more settings, only the first one takes ST : Select if other connected equipment cannot receive
effect. HQ images.
REFERENCES images.
If MG Image Storage For Presentation is selected, items that ST & HQ & SH : Select if the other connected equipment can
need not be set will be hidden on the DICOM Setup window. receive 20 lines/mm mammographic images as
well.
Verification must be selected. Setting of
7. Because the AE of other connected equipment is the ST : Select when transferring standard images only.
Provider, make sure that (SCP) is selected for the HQ/SH : Select when transferring HQ or 20 lines/mm
Role.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
10. To attach image processing parameters to images to be 13. To handle two-byte characters, check the box
transfered, select ( ) within the ( to ).
field. REFERENCE
NOTE Even if checked, it will be disregarded.
Yes cannot be selected when MG Image Storage For
Presentation is specified for Abstract Syntax. This setup item is
grayed out. 14. Click downward arrow of the
field and select device attribute of other connected
equipment (HD_FILE).
11. To transfer processed images to other connected
equipment, select ( ) within the 15. Make setups for gradation correction as required.
field. NOTE
This setup item is displayed only when the competing brand PACS
LUT adjustment function key (one of the Plus Standard Key
12. If you have selected at step 11. above, click functions) is installed.
setup value.
10 : Select when generating 10bit processed image output.
NOTE
either CR Image Storage or MG Image Storage For Presentation OE030001.EPS
is selected for Service Class and PROC is selected for Image For setup details, see Display Gradation Correction Setup
Processing. under FR5: Function-specific Reference.
16. Change the following setting as required.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
17. Set up the following, as necessary. 19. Click .
REFERENCES
OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : S
elect when the minimum value of pixel value is changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click
set to white and the maximum value of pixel value .
is set to black.
MONOCHROME2 : S
elect when the minimum value of pixel value is
set to black and the maximum value of pixel value
is set to white. deleted.
NOTE
Photometric Interpretation can be selected only when the following 20. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
settings are set.
Abstract Syntax : MG Image Storage For Presentation saved.
Role : SCP
LUT Operation : Unable to apply LUT Operation or 21. Click .
Image Processing : PROC The system saves the setup data.
18. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE)
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image 3. Make the following settings.

Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in
CODE) .
For an automatic image distribution to equipment of HD_FILE attribute, Click downward arrow of
set up DISTRIBUTION CODE as follows.
to select equipments
NOTE
host or AE name (e.g.: MammoView01-SCP).
Yes ahead of time the setting (item 3 of SYSTEM CONFIG
5.CSL/IDT FUNCTION) under Enable Distribution Code Setup of the 4. Click .
Service Utility.
For an automatic distribution to equipment of OD_FILE attribute, 5. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
perform the procedure described in 2.7 Setting up CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
1. Click of the Setup Configuration
Item window. 6. Click .
A list of destination equipment for automatic image distribution The system saves the setup data.
00000247.EPS
2. Click .
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT 2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method
To automatically transfer images to the ODF, set up CONNECTING Use the procedure below if the UID issuance method needs to be
EQUIPMENT as directed below. changed depending on the specifications of other connected equipment
1. Click on the Setup For default settings, see Table: List of UID settings.
A list of registered equipment units appears on the right side of the 1. Click the mark of of the Setup
window. Configuration Item window.
2. Click .
The content of the setup items for the CL system information
OE000004.EPS
2. Click .

Click the downward arrow within 00000248.EPS
and select equipment (ODF AE name).
4. Click .

6. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.9 Changing the Name Elements
3. Make UID issuance settings as follows.

Table List of UID setting (IMAGE MODALITY)
No. Name Selection Meaning No. Name Selection Meaning
9 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue 39 UID YES Whether or not to issue
after Modifying Issues a new UID. a new image UID or Issuance about Issues a new UID. a new image UID or
ID Information NO SOP Instance UID when a function NO SOP Instance UID when
Does not issue a new UID. any ID information is (except Image Does not issue a new UID. shuttering processing or
modified on the CL. Processing) to energy subtraction
change to the processing condition is
10 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue
image modified on the CL.
after Modifying Issues a new UID. a new image UID or
themselves
Normalized NO SOP Instance UID when
Parameter Does not issue a new UID. image normalization 45 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue
conditions are modified after Modifying Issues a new UID. a new image UID or
on the CL. Trimming NO SOP Instance UID when
Parameter Does not issue a new UID. trimming information is
11 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to issue
modified.
after Modifying Issues a new UID. a new image UID or
Image NO SOP Instance UID when 46 UID Inssuance YES Whether or not to issue
Processing Does not issue a new UID. image processing after Modifying Issues a new UID. a new image UID or
Parameter conditions are modified FNC Parameter NO SOP Instance UID when
on the CL. Does not issue a new UID. a FNC parameter is
modified.
12 UID Issuance YES Whether or not to output
Before Sending Issues a new UID. an SOP Instance UID as : Default setting
Processed Data NO the UID of a processed
Does not issue a new UID. CR image when 4. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
outputting processed
images from the CL. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
13 DICOM Series 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 Setup of Series Instance
Generation Series - 1 image UID issuance logic.
Logic Issues a number so that it has
See 5. Click .
multiple series for one study and
only one image for one series. 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE The system saves the setup data.
0: 1 Study - N series and 1
Series - M image MODALITY under
Issues a number so that it has MU: Maintenance
Utility.
multiple series for one study and
multiple images for one series. 2.9 Changing the Name Elements
Series - N image See 3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection
Issues a number so that it has under MU: Maintenance Utility.
only one series for one study and
multiple images for one series.
: Default setting
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
3.1 CL-AP Startup

Equipment
For details of the image transfer procedures, see the "CL
3.2 Image Transfer to Other
Operation Manual".
Connected Equipment
3.1 CL-AP Startup
For details of the transferred image checking procedures, see
Fuji Film and FCR.
In about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)


010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)
IMPORTANT
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage) Installation of the CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B key will enable
you to use the two kinds of functions said above, (A) and (B). Use
This chapter describes the setting procedure used for storage of images these two functions as appropriate in accordance with the
from the CR-IR348CL to the storage media, using the DICOM Media equipments usage environment.
Storage service. (A) To use the DVD media (or USB memory stick) only on the CL,
NOTES select Private Unstandardized CR Storage.
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL. (B) To write images onto the DVD media (or USB memory stick)
With software version V8.0 or later, images can be stored in a USB on the CL and read those images on other makers DICOM
memory stick using the DICOM Media Storage function. server, select CR Image Storage or MG Image Storage for
Presentation.
Prior to setup (A) Image writing
CL requirements
Image reading
Software version required: V2.0 (B) or later Removable media
The option key is required. CL (DVD/USB memory)
CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B key DICOM Media Storage (B) Only image writing
CR Storage (A)
CR Image Storage (B)
Removable media
MG Image Storage for CL
Presentation (B) (DVD/USB memory)
NOTE DVD
To store digital mammograms, the mammography option key is required.
LF-C1
For details of digital mammogram settings, see OE16 CL+Other Other makers Removable media
(DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer). DICOM server (DVD)
Image
REFERENCE reading
Image reading
The setting procedures are the same as the ones with the option key
"CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B" when the option key is "CL USB * A USB memory stick can be used
STORAGE FOR 358" or "CL USB STORAGE A". with software version V8.0 or later. OE170021.EPS
USB memory requirements (V8.0 or later) Removable media requirements

USB2.0 is supported. In Japan, use the specified DVD-RAM drive.
Dedicated drive and software need not to be installed. For other than in Japan, use locally procured removable media and
The capacity is 2GB or more. storage media.
Writing and reading necessary data are proved to be possible.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)
Connection/setup example Overall operation flow

TCP/IP Use a USB cable to connect the CL to 1. Hardware Setup
Private Unstandardized removable media.
Data transmission CR Storage
XG-1 RU, etc. Removable media Use removable media to perform 2. CL Software Setup
CL settings necessary for storage of
(DVD or USB memory)
images using DICOM.
Start to install the removable media
CL setup example driver and the option key, reinstall the
AE name (Provider) : MEDIA * AP key and then perform the following
settings.
Removable media (DVD)
Registration of removable media
drive recognized by the CL : F:\ *
information (including AE name, drive
Service Class : Private UnstandardizedCRStorage *
name, handling of high-density
Transfer Syntax : JPEG Lossless * images, etc.)
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT settings
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to be
changed depending on the equipment environment. OE170011.EPS
Check to see that images can be 3. Connection

stored from the CL to removable Checkout
media.
Make backup copies of configuration 4. Setup File Backup

files.
Procedure to be performed if necessary

When setting multiple paths to the USB memory security software
5.1 Setting Multiple USB Memory Security Soft Paths
When replacing the icon of the Media Storage with the old icon
5.2 Replace with Old Icons
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup 2. CL Software Setup

Connect the CL to removable media, as illustrated below. NOTE
TCP/IP This manual uses Windows 2000 screens, whose contents are the
same as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7.
Removable media Set up CL software as follows.

RU CL
(DVD/USB memory)
USB cable/USB port 2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver
OE170000.EPS
NOTE 2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key

To use a DVD in Japan, connect the specified DVD-RAM drive.
To use a DVD outside Japan, make connections appropriately following 2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key
the Operation Manual supplied with the locally procured removable
media.
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on
the DICOM Media Storage Function
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIMENT Settings
2.6 Configuration Settings
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver
2.1 Installation of the Removable Media

Driver
Install the removable media driver as follows.
NOTE
When the OS installed is Windows Vista or Windows 7, the writing
software supplied as a standard of the OS is used. For this reason, no
driver needs to be installed.
For users other than in Japan

Install the DLA driver according to the Operation Manual supplied with
locally procured removable media.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage 2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key

Option Key
If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
To store an image using the DICOM Media Storage function, the CL Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall
DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B option key is required. the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is described below.
1. Insert the option key CD into the PC. 1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically. After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE NOTE
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2. Click .
OE170005.EPS
2. Click .
00000419.EPS
A window then opens to show that option key installation
processing has been completed successfully. A window opens to indicate the completion of reinstallation.
The system returns to the desktop screen. The system returns to the desktop screen.
4. Remove the CD from the PC. 4. Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information 5. Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are
displayed.
on the DICOM Media Storage Function
Described below is the procedure used to set up following removable
CL host name
media information items.
Removable media name and drive name
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Device Attribute CL IP address
Other (timeout value, etc.)
1. Startup Service Utility. 00000092.EPS
For how to start up Service Utility, see 1. Starting/Exiting the NOTE

Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
The IP address will not be displayed correctly unless the CL is
2. Click [Setup Configuration Item]. connected to a network.
6. Select MEDIA and click .
Select MEDIA. OE170006.EPS
00000599.EPS The Application Entity List window opens.

00000091.EPS
3. Click of the field.
4. Select and click . OE170008.EPS
The New Node window then opens.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
7. Make the following settings. 9. Click downward arrow in the

Enter the removable media name (e.g.: MEDIA) in
field and select Private
.
Unstandardized CRStorage or CR Image Storage.
Enter the removable media drive name (e.g.: F:\) in
Private Unstandardized : For reading images on the CL.
. CRStorage Select this item when reading the DVD
media (or USB memory) only on the
CL.
8. Click . CR Image Storage : For reading images on other makers
DICOM server.
The MEDIASetup window opens. MG Image Storage for Select either of these two items when
Presentation reading the DVD media (or USB
memory) on other makers DICOM
server.
See Prior to setup for selection details.
field to select
JPEGLossless.
OE170013.EPS
NOTE Service Class ImplicitVR ExplicitVR JPEG
The following items have been selected automatically on the LittleEndian LittleEndian Lossless
MEDIASetup window that opens. CR Image Storage
Role : SCP Private Unstandardized
Attribute : OD_FILE CRStorage

MG Image Storage for
Presentation

OE170014.EPS
( to ).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
12. Make the following settings. NOTE

The value set up in Bit Stored is allowed to change only in the
following cases:
I When CR Image Storage is selected for the Service Class and
PROC is selected for the Image Processing.
When MG Image Storage for Presentation is selected for the
Service Class.
II
15. Perform settings for gradation correction processing as

OE170009.EPS
required.
I. Select ST & HQ & SH
II. Select HQ/SH NOTE
These setup items are displayed only when the LUT adjustment
13. Make the following settings as necessary. function key for competing PACS is installed (one of functions
enabled by the Plus Standard Key).
NONE : Selected when storing an image not subjected to image

processing.
PROC : Selected when storing an already processed image.
NOTE
PROC can be set up only when CR Image Storage has been
selected for the Service Class, which is disabled when Private
Unstandardized CRStorage or MG Image Storage for OE030001.EPS
Presentation is selected.
NOTES
The gradation correction setting is enabled only when CR Image
14. If you have selected at step 13. above, click Storage or MG Image Storage for Presentation is selected for
the Service Class, and is disabled when Private Unstandardized
CRStorage is selected.
Do not select Using Modality LUT module for using image for MG
Image Storage for Presentation. Even if it is selected, no
setup value. operation will be activated.
12 : Select when generating 12bit processed image output. For details of this setting, see Display Gradation Correction
Setup under FR5: Function-specific Reference.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
16. Make the following settings as required. 19. Click .
REFERENCES
OE170012.EPS
Data that has just been set up is displayed on the right-side of the
Yes : Selected for annotation-embedded storage.
Setup Configuration Item window that opens. You can change
No : Selected for storage not embedded with annotation. the display item as needed. Every time you have changed it,
make sure to click .
17. Set up the following, as necessary.
Clicking will delete the currently selected setup item.
20. Select Save from the Config menu.

A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : S
saved.
MONOCHROME2 : S
21. Click .
NOTE The system saves the setup data.

Photometric Interpretation can be selected only when the following
settings are performed.
Abstract Syntax : CR Image Storage or
MG Image Storage for Presentation
Role : SCP
LUT Operation : Unable to apply LUT Operation or
Image Processing : PROC
18. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings

To record images on removable media, make settings for
CONNECTING EQIUPMENT appropriately.

A list of registered equipment units appears on the right-side of the
window.
OE170019.EPS
2. Click .

to select function (OD_FILE) of the connected equipment.
to select name (e.g.: MEDIA) of the removable media.
4. Click .

saved.
6. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.6 Configuration Settings
2.6 Configuration Settings 3. Click .

Setup items for the IDT/Console function appear on the right-side
Follow the procedure below to set up config items for the DICOM Media of the window.
Storage function. Setup items for the IDT/Console function
1. Start Service Utility.

For how to start Service Utility, see 1. Starting/Exiting the
Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
OE000038.EPS
4. Perform settings for the DICOM Media Storage function.

Item Config name Description
Setting whether or not to mount media
(DVD or USB memory) automatically at CL
Media Auto
114 startup.
Mount
00000131.EPS Select Yes (to mount media automatically)
or No (not to mount media automatically).
: Set it up as required.

saved.
00000404.EPS 6. Click .
The setup data is then saved.
7. Select Close from the Config menu.

The system returns to the IIP Service Utility.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout 3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media

Use removable media to save images stored in the CL onto the storage
Start running the CL-AP and then make sure that images can be saved media.
from the CL to the removable media.
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage Media
3.1 CL-AP Startup
Format the storage media on which images are to be saved.
NOTES
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage In case a USB memory stick is used for the storage media, this
Media procedure needs not to be performed. Connect the USB memory to
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage the PC and then proceed to 3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable
Media Media.
3.2.2 Recognizing the For how to format storage media, procedures to be performed are
Removable Media different depending on whether it is to be performed in Japan or
3.2.3 Image Storage outside Japan.
For users other than in Japan

NOTE Format the storage media according to the Operation Manual supplied
This manual uses Windows 2000 screens, whose contents are the with locally procured removable media.
same as those displayed by Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7.
3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media
Have the CL-AP recognize removable media that stores images, as
follows.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
1. Click ( for software version V8.3(B) or
Fuji Film and then FCR. later) and then on the CL media window.
The CL opening window appears.
The CL-AP reception window then opens in about two minutes. A window opens prompting you to set up the volume label name.
2. Make sure that the Media tab has been selected.
OE170002.EPS
OE170020.EPS 2. Change the volume label name as necessary and click

.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media
3.2.3 Image Storage

Described below is the procedure used to store images onto image
storage.
1. Select an image to be stored and save it on the image

storage media accordingly.
For details of how to store images on the image storage
media, see the Operation Manual supplied with the removable
media.
2. Check to see that the image has been stored on the image
storage media properly.
For details of how to check images stored on the image
storage media, see the Operation Manual supplied with the
removable media.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

Back up CL setup files appropriately.
Have the following item ready for use for backup processing.

the Configuration FileConfiguration Restore/Backup under
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5.1 Setting Multiple USB Memory Security Soft Paths
5. Other Settings 3. Enter the USB Memory Security Soft Path and then click
.
5.1 Setting Multiple USB Memory Security

Soft Paths
If the option key is "CL USB STORAGE A", multiple USB memory
security soft paths can be set. Described herein are the procedures for
setting multiple USB memory security soft paths.

OE170046.ai
Fuji Film and then FCR.

The CL opening window appears. NOTES
The CL-AP reception window then opens in about two minutes.
The maximum number of characters can be input is 256.
If setting multiple paths, make sure to input a , to separate them.
2. Press for approximately 5 seconds. To support multiple security software, typing errors in the paths
will be ignored. Be careful not to enter the wrong paths.
NOTE
By default, the icon is displayed at the upper right corner of the
screen as shown below. Note that the icon is different from the one
for Media Storage.
OE170045.ai
The USB Memory Security Soft Path window appears.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5.2 Replace with Old Icons
5.2 Replace with Old Icons 4. Enter the resolution of the installed CL-AP and then press
the <Enter> key.
The new icon of media storage will be displayed by installing the
software version V8.3 (B).
Described herein are the procedures for replacing the icon of media
storage with the old icon according to each inistitute's request.

NOTE
If the "IIP Setup Tool" main menu automatically opens, press the OE170048.ai
<Enter> key after inputting "0" and exits the window. The following window opens.
For Windows 2000/XP
I. Select Run from the menu.
For Windows Vista/7

I. Select All Programs - Accessories - Run from the
menu.

OE170049.ai
3. Input "D:toolsChangeBitmapChange_BMP.bat" and then

click .
Returns to the Change Icon Tool window.
6. Press the <Enter> key after inputting 0.

The Change Icon Tool window exits.
The Change Icon Tool window appears.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function)

CL+POCKET id Console
(Portable Exposure Function) Unpack and charge the POCKET id
Console. Also, add a serial connector
1. Hardware Setup
as required.
This chapter describes how to configure a setup procedure to transmit/
receive study reception information between the CR-IR348CL and the
POCKET id Console (PDA) and perform portable exposure. Using the POCKET id Console, 2. CL Software Setup
configure a setup to transmit/receive
NOTES study reception information between
the CL and the POCKET id Console.
The CR-IR348CL is hereafter referred to as CL. In the first place, connect the CL with
When the OS used is Windows Vista, this function is not supported. the POCKET id Console, install the
option key, and reinstall the AP key.
Then do the following setup tasks.
Prior to setup Setting up the POCKET id Console
Making device ID registration
CL requirements
Installing and setting up the POCKET
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. id Console application
Portable exposure function option key (CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID
CL) is required. Make sure that study reception 3. Connection
information can be transmitted/ Verification
Requirements of the POCKET id Console received between the CL and the
Used model : PPT8846-R3BZ00WW manufactured by Symbol POCKET id Console.
Technology
(Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket
PC) Back up the configuration file. 4. Setup File Backup
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console
1. Hardware Setup REFERENCE

With the help of the cradles LED, you can tell when the battery
becomes fully charged. The battery is fully charged when the LED
With respect to the CL and the POCKET id Console, perform the changes from red to green.
following hardware setup.
When the battery is used for the very first time, it takes about 24
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the Take the POCKET id hours for the backup battery to become fully charged. Therefore,
POCKET id Console Console out of its box and do not disengage the main battery before 24 hours have passed.
set it in its cradle for
charging.
3. When full charging is completed, turn off the POCKET id
1.2 Adding the Serial Connector Connect the add-in serial Console.
(*1) connector cable to the PCs
mother board.
4. By following the directions provided by the wizard that
*1 : The addition of the serial connector is required only when there is opens, perform a setup (calibration).
only one serial connector on the rear panel of a PC (such as the
GX60, GX260, GX270 or the like) and this connector is already
being used for the touch panel.
1.2 Adding the Serial Connector

1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET
id Console If there is only one serial connector mounted on the rear panel of a PC
(such as the GX60, GX260, GX270 or the like) and this connector is
already being occupied by the touch panel, one additional serial
Take the POCKET id Console out of its box, set up the cradle, and put connector is required to be mounted for use with the POCKET id
the POCKET id Console in the cradle to charge its battery. Console.
Make initial settings and the like on the side of the POCKET id Console
in order to get it ready for use. For the procedure on how to add a serial connector, see
1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board in
For details of the procedure, see the POCKET id Console (PPT8846) FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector under
Operation Manual. FR: Function-specific Reference.
1. Connect the cradle for the POCKET id Console into a wall

outlet. (It is not necessary to make a connection with the
PC.)
2. Attach the main battery to the POCKET id Console and

insert the POCKET id Console into the cradle.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console
2. CL Software Setup 2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id

Console
NOTE In order to make it possible for the CL and the POCKET id Console
This chapter uses Windows 2000 windows, whose contents are the communicate with each other, it is necessary to install software for this
same as those displayed by Windows XP. purpose (Microsoft ActiveSync3.7) on the CL side.
The procedure for installing Microsoft ActiveSync3.7 is described below.
In this chapter, perform the software setup procedure on the CL and the
POCKET id Console as follows. 1. Insert the Microsoft ActiveSync3.7 installer CD that came
with the POCKET id Console into the PC.
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id
Console 2. Double-click the MSASYNC.EXE file that is in the following
directory.
<Drive where the CD-ROM is inserted>\ENGLISH\MSASYNC.EXE
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key
The installer starts and the Set Up Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7
window opens.
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
2.5 Registering the Device ID OE180101.EPS
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id 3. Click .

Console Application
The Select Installation Folder window opens.
OE180077.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Click . A connection verification process starts. After successful connection

has been verified, the New Partnership window opens.
The Get Connected window opens.
OE180080.EPS
OE180078.EPS
5. Directly connect the serial cable of the cradle for the

10. Click the Guest partnership radio button to enable it, and
POCKET id Console to the serial connector (COM port) on then click .
the PC.
NOTE
Do not place the POCKET id Console into the cradle yet.
6. Turn ON the power to the POCKET id Console.
7. Insert the power to the POCKET id Console into the cradle.
8. Click on the Get Connected window.
OE180081.EPS
OE180078.EPS
The Microsoft ActiveSync (Connected) window opens.
The Windows Security Alert window opens.
OE180079.EPS
9. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
11. Make sure that Guest and Connected are being

displayed.
Check to see these are being shown.

OE180082.EPS
12. Click at the upper right corner of the window.

The Microsoft ActiveSync (Connected) window closes.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key 2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key
In order to make it possible to perform portable exposure using the Once the option key has been installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
POCKET id Console, the CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL option key is Use the AP key installation CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00) to
required. reinstall the AP key. The installation procedure is described below.
1. Insert the option key CD into the PC. 1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically. After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE NOTE
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2. Click .
OE180016.EPS
2. Click .

processing has been completed successfully.
3. Click .
OE180017.EPS
processing has been completed successfully.
3. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console 3. Tap on downward arrow next to the
field, and select the time zone appropriate to the use
This section describes settings that need to be made on the POCKET id
Console side. environment.
2.4.1 Setting Date and Time 4. By tapping on the or arrow next to the
1. From the menu of the POCKET id Console, select field, set the current time of day.
Setting, and then tap on the tab.

5. Tap on downward arrow next to the
field.
The calendar window opens.
OE180085.EPS
6. Repeatedly tap on the or button as required to select

todays date.
OE180083.EPS
7. Tap on at the upper right corner of the window.

2. Double-click .
A dialog opens to confirm if you are sure to save the setup data.
The Clock window opens.
OE180086.EPS
8. Tap on .
OE180084.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4.2 Setting the Device ID 3. Tap on the Device ID tab.
1. From the menu of the POCKET id Console, select

"Setting", and then tap on the tab.
OE180088.EPS
The System tab window opens.

The Device ID tab window opens.
4. Tap on .
A data entry panel like that shown below opens.
OE180083.EPS
2. Double-tap on .
The About window opens. OE180089.EPS
5. Tap on the field to place the

cursor in the field, and then enter the device ID (e.g. FF001)
using the data entry panel.
NOTES
If two or more POCKET id Consoles are introduced at a given
institution, unique device IDs should be assigned to them.
For information, a single CL can handle up to three POCKET id
Consoles.
Characters that may be used are uppercase A to Z, lowercase a
OE180087.EPS
to z, numbers 0 to 9 and the underscore character (_).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6. Tap on . 2.4.3 Setting Screen Properties
The data entry panel closes. Backlight setting
7. Tap on at the upper right corner of the window. 1. From the menu of the POCKET id Console, select
Setting, and then tap on the tab.
OE180083.EPS
2. Double-tap on .
The Backlight window opens.
OE180090.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Checkmark ( ).
4. Tap on the External Power tab.
OE180091.EPS
The External Power tab window opens.
5. Checkmark ( ).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Brightness setting 3. Tap on the Brightness tab.

Setting, and then tap on the tab. OE180093.EPS
The Brightness tab window opens.

4. Check to make sure that is being selected in

the field.
REFERENCE
If the user wants, for example, to prolong battery life, it is possible
to conserve battery consumption by changing the Brightness level
setting. However, since the window becomes difficult to see (with
reduced brightness), it is necessary for you to have the user
understand this fact.
OE180083.EPS
2. Double-tap on .
The Symbol Settings window opens.
OE180092.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.4.4 Setting the Connection Speed

ActiveSync.
The ActiveSync tab window opens.
OE180106.EPS
4. Tap on .
The PC Synchronization Option window opens.
OE180094.EPS
2. Tap on .
3. Tap on and select [Option].
OE180107.EPS
OE180095.EPS
The Option window opens. 5. Select .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.5 Registering the Device ID
2.5 Registering the Device ID 4. Enter in the field the device ID that
This section describes the procedure used for registering the POCKET
id Console device ID on the CL side. you have set on the POCKET id Console side (e.g. FF001).
1. Start up the Service Utility. 5. Click .

For details of Service Utility mode startup, see 1. Starting/
Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance Utility. REFERENCE
The main menu opens. If two or more POCKET id Consoles are used at the same
institution (a maximum of 3 consoles for one CL), repeat steps 4
and 5 for the number of POCKET id Consoles to be used in the
2. Click . institution.

6. Click .
7. Click on the
P-Console Setting window.
OE180045.EPS
8. Click .
3. Click .
The system then returns to the desktop.
The PDA DeviceID Registration window opens.
OE180046.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET 4. Enter 13 and press the <Enter> key.
id Console Application The Select PDA Type window opens.
2.6.1 Installing the POCKET id Console Application

1. Place the POCKET id Console into the cradle.
OE180100.EPS
2. Make sure that the icon being shown at the bottom right
of the CL desktop turns (green). The installer opens, and the installation start window opens.
OE180102.EPS
OE180075.EPS
3. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. 6. Click .

The installation process starts. As the installation process
NOTE completes, the installation complete window opens.
OE180103.EPS
7. Click .
The system returns to the IIP Setup Tool main menu.


OE180049.EPS
REFERENCE
The IIP Setup Tool is a utility tool for performing CL-AP installation
and the like. This tool is contained on the CD that came with the CL
as a standard (Product name: Application software, Part No.:
114Y5342001A).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
10. Soft-reset the POCKET id Console.

REFERENCE
While holding down either of the right and left scan trigger buttons
on the POCKET id Console, press the Enter key and the Function
key at the same time, and then release these keys.
Scan trigger
Function key
( button)
Enter key
( button)
Scan trigger
OE180110.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.6.2 Setting Up the POCKET id Console Service 4. Double-click .

Utility
The S_UTL window opens.
Programs.
The Programs window opens.
OE180098.EPS
5. Tap on .
OE180096.EPS
2. Double-click . 6. Tap on at the upper right corner of the window.
The S_UTL window closes.

3. Open the My Device Program Files Fuji Film
P-Console System folder in this order.
The contents in the folder are listed.
OE180097.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.6.3 Setting Configuration Items for the POCKET id 3. Under , click .

Console Configuration setup items concerning the POCKET id Console are
listed on the right side of the window.
Set configuration items related to the POCKET id Console in the
following procedure.
1. Start up the Service Utility on the CL side.

Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance Utility.
Configuration items for the POCKET id

Console are listed. OE180074.EPS
4. Set the following configuration items concerning the

POCKET id Console.
No. Config name Meaning
Warning threshold for low remaining battery
power (for the first-time warning)
1 BatteryWarning1
Default : Warning issued when only 30/100 of
the battery power is remaining.
OE180072.EPS
Warning threshold for a low remaining battery
The Setup Configuration Item window opens. power (for the second-time warning)
2 BatteryWarning2
Default : Warning issued when only 20/100 of
the battery power is remaining.
Setting of the folder in which the study
3 StudyFilePath information file is to be stored.
Default : \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Job
Setting of the folder path where the window
OE180073.EPS
customization setting file and display item
4 CustomFilePath setting file are to be stored.
Default : \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\
Custom
Whether or not to display the login input
5 LoginFlag window at startup time.
Default : No
: Default setting : May be changed as required.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
NOTE 2.6.4 Starting the POCKET id Console Application

If you have set LoginFlag to ON, set the item no. 37 Enable and Transferring the Configuration File
Security Function under SYSTEM CONFIG - IMAGE
MODALITY to Yes and define the technologist name and 1. From the menu of the POCKET id Console, select
password in the User Utility, and then transfer the technologist Programs.
information to the POCKET id Console.
The Programs window opens.

A dialog opens to confirm if you are sure to save the setup data.
6. Click .
The setup data is saved.

REFERENCE OE180096.EPS
Do not close the Service Utility and leave it up and running.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Click .
2. Double-click .
NOTE
A transfer of the configuration file should be done with the POCKET
id Console up and running.
The startup window opens, and then the "Study list" window of the
POCKET id Console application opens.
OE180045.EPS
5. Click .
A dialog to confirm the execution of the file transfer opens.
OE180061.EPS
OE180059.EPS
6. Click .
3. Start the Service Utility on the CL side. Data transfer to the POCKET id Console starts.
Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance Utility. When the transfer completes, a message appears informing you
of the completion.
OE180062.EPS
7. Click in the message dialog appearing on the

CL display.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
8. Click on the
P-Console Setting window.
9. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Connection Verification 3.2 Transferring Study Reception

Information from the CL to the
After starting the CL-AP, verify that study reception information can be POCKET id Console
transmitted/received properly between the CL and the POCKET id
Console. 1. On the reception window of the CL-AP, register study
information.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP For the procedure for registering study information, see the
CL Operation Manual.
3.2 Transferring Study Reception

Information from the CL to the
2. Select the Local WL tab.
POCKET id Console
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading

a Barcode
3.4 Receiving Study Reception

Information Transmitted from the
POCKET id Console to the CL
and Checking the Result

OE180104.EPS
1. From the menu, select Program Fuji Film

FCR. 3. On the CLs Local WL window, select the row of a patient
whose information you want to transfer to the POCKET id
The CL opening window opens. Console.
In about 2 minutes, the reception window of the CL-AP opens.
4. Click and then .
The study reception information is transferred to the POCKET id

Console.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode
5. Make sure that study reception information of the patient 3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a
that was selected on the CLs Local WL window has been
successfully transferred to the POCKET id Console.
Barcode
1. On the Study list window of the POCKET id Console, tap
on the tab.
2. Select the patient whose information you have transferred

from the CL, and tap on .
The Start study window opens.
OE180108.EPS
OE180109.EPS
3. Aim the scan window of the POCKET id Console at the IPs

barcode.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted from the POCKET id Console to the CL and Checking the Result
4. Press either of the scan triggers located on the right and left 3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information
sides of the POCKET id Console. When doing so, make sure
that red scan beam focuses on the entire barcode.
Transmitted from the POCKET id Console
to the CL and Checking the Result
Scan window 1. On the reception window of the CL-AP, select the Local
WL tab.
Scan trigger
Scan trigger
OE180066.EPS
When a barcode is read, the green scan LED lights up and a beep
sounds.
OE180104.EPS
2. On the Local WL window of the CL-AP, select the row for

the patient whose information has been transferred to the
POCKET id Console.
3. Click and then .
The CL now receives study reception information transmitted from

the POCKET id Console.
4. Make sure that the study reception information of the patient
that you selected on the CLs Local WL window is received
from the POCKET id Consol, and the IP number has been
registered.
REFERENCE
If you see an IP number in the IP # column in the lower right
portion of the window, it means that barcode reading using the
POCKET id Console and data reception from the POCKET id
Console have been successfully performed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Back up CL setup files appropriately.
Have the following item ready for use for backup processing.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query)

CL+Synapse Server (Web Query)
This chapter describes the setup procedure required when using the CL and the Synapse.
Synapse server Web Query function from the CL.
Perform the following setups. 2. CL Software Setup

Prior to setup Uninstallation of the CL-AP
CL requirements Uninstallation of NetMeeting
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. (for Windows XP only)
Installation of the Synapse Client
software
Microsoft Internet Explorer: Version 5.5 or later (6.0SP1 or later is Installation of the CL-AP
recommended.)
Installation of the Synapse Web
Query application
NOTE Setup of system environment
variables
To use the Synapse server Web Query function, the CL Microsoft Web Query-related config settings
Internet Explorer version must be 5.5 or later. Setup of the User Utility
Synapse server
The CL user account (Administrator) must be registered beforehand Use the Web Query function to retrieve 3. Connection
using the Synapse servers Administrator Tool. Specify Referring images on the Synapse server. Checkout
Physician as the User Group for registration.
Make backup copies of Web Query 4. Setup File Backup

function related configuration files.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Network-connect the CL and the Synapse server to each other, as
illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
Synapse
CL
server
OE000062.EPS
NOTES
and Synapse server.
The cable type applicable to the CL and the Synapse server is the
IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP
2. CL Software Setup 2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP

1. Uninstall the CL-AP.
2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP NOTES
Be sure to use the CL-AP CD.
2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting (for Windows XP only) Skip this step when software version V8.0 (B) or later is used.
For how to uninstall the CL-AP, see Uninstalling the CL-

2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software AP in Appendix D Upgrading the AP under RI: Reinstalling
the Software.

2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application (for Windows XP only)
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables 1. Select Run from the menu.

2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings
2. Type in conf.exe in and click .
2.8 Setting the User Utility
The NetMeeting window opens.
3. Select Rem ote Desktop Sharing... from the Tools menu.
OE190013.EPS
The Remote Desktop Sharing Settings window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software
4. Uncheck .( ) 2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software

Install the Synapse Client software on the CL as follows.
Installation of the Synapse Client software
Security setup for Microsoft Internet Explorer
OE190014.EPS
For the installation procedure and other settings of the Synapse
Client software, see the Synapse Operation Manual.
5. Click .
NOTE
The system returns to the NetMeeting window.
To use the Synapse server Web Query function, the CL Microsoft
Internet Explorer version must be 5.5 or later (6.0SP1 or later is
6. Check to see that the NetMeeting Remote Desktop Sharing
recommended.).
icon ( ) has disappeared from the taskbar at the lower
right of the window.
REFERENCE
7. Select Exit from the Call menu. When installing the Synapse Client software, Microsoft Internet Explorer
is used to download files and the like. If no Microsoft Internet Explorer
windows are displayed but the internet connection wizard is displayed,
make the following settings.
For the first window : Connection via LAN
For the second window : Connection via LAN
For the third window : No proxy settings are required. (Remove
all checkmarks.)
For the fourth window : Do not set up mail account.
OE190015.EPS
NetMeeting shuts down and the system returns to the desktop.

8. Restart the PC to make sure that NetMeeting is not up and
running and also that the PC operates normally. 1. Install the CL-AP.
For how to install the CL-AP, see Installing the CL-AP in
Appendix D Upgrading the AP under RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
NOTE
Skip this step when software version V8.0 (B) or later is used.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query 4. Enter 0 and press the <Enter> key.
Application The system then returns to the desktop.
1. Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. 5. Remove the CD from the PC.
NOTE
OE190016.EPS

A window like that shown below will open.
OE190017.EPS

The SYNAPSE-WebQuery Application Install was Completed
message displays and the system returns to the IIP Setup Tool
main menu.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables For Windows XP
From the menu, select Settings and then

Control Panel.
For Windows 2000 The Control Panel opens.
From the menu, select Settings and then

Control Panel. Double-click .
Double-click .
Click the Advanced tab and then .
OE190002.EPS
OE190001.EPS
The Environment Variables window opens.
The Environment Variables window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables
For Windows Vista/7 2. Select a variable, Path, from the System variables field
Select Control Panel from the menu. and click .
The "Control Panel" ("All Control Panel Items" for Windows 7)

opens.
Double-click (click for Windows 7) .
Click .
OE190003.EPS
The Edit System Variable window opens.

3. Type in the following text in one-byte characters,
immediately after the already entered variable value
(...\BINN), as illustrated below.
;C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System
OE190004.EPS
4. Click .
The system returns to the Environment Variables window.
5. Click .
OE190018.ai
6. Click .
The screen returns to the desktop.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration 3. Click the symbol at the left of on the
Settings Setup Configuration Item window.
4. Click .
1. Start up the Service Utility.
A list of configuration option setup items appears in the right-hand
For how to start up the Service Utility function, see area of the window.
MU: Maintenance Utility. Configuration option setup items
OE190005.EPS
5. Double-click of and select [Yes].
6. Click .
00000131.EPS A list of IDT/Console function setup items appears in the right-
hand area of the window.
00000404.EPS
OE000038.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.8 Setting the User Utility
7. Double-click of 2.8 Setting the User Utility

and enter the Synapse server host name With the use of the User Utilitys screen display customization function
(e.g.: synapse_server). (exposure parameter shortcut), add screen display icon for the Web
Query function.
NOTE
For details of the setup procedure, see the CR Console Operation
When an IP address was used to install the Synapse Client, the IP Manual.
address must be input at this step.
Screen display customization function window
(exposure parameter shortcut)
8. Double-click of and
enter the most-significant directory path targeted for search
by the Synapse server. Change this as required.
REFERENCE
%20 of ALL%20Patients stands for a one-byte space.

10. Click .
OE190006.EPS

Screen display sample


The screen returns to the desktop.
Web Query
function icon
OE190007.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout 3.2 Web Query Checkout

1. Register patient ID and exposure menu on the CLs study
Use the Web Query function to search images handled by the Synapse reception window.
server.
NOTE
3.1 CL-AP Startup
Data is searched for on the Synapse server based on the patient
ID, which requires the user to enter a patient ID that actually exists
3.2 Web Query Checkout on the Synapse server.
2. Display the study window.
3.1 CL-AP Startup

1. From the menu, select Programs, Fuji Film and
then FCR.
OE000099.EPS
OE190008.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.2 Web Query Checkout
6. Ensure that the Synapse Client screen appears on the Image

3. Click . browse window.
Synapse Client screen
After a while, the Connect to synapse window opens.
OE190011.EPS
OE190009.EPS
4. Enter the Synapse servers user name (e.g.: synapseae) and

password (e.g.: synapseae) and click .
REFERENCE
If a domain is required to log onto the Synapse server, enter a

domain name in the Domain box.
Mark the Remember my password checkbox as necessary.

When network authentication successfully confirms the user

identity, the Security Warning window opens.
OE190010.EPS
5. Click .
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7. Click a list item (Ec01v4.0e, Dicom... for the Patient Name

on the window above) to display a patient image.
NOTE Back up the CL setup files.
When the Web Query function is used, there may be cases where Have the following item ready for use for file backup:
a patient image is not displayed though the list appears at step 6.
above. Make always sure that the patient image is displayed Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like)
appropriately.
OE190012.EPS
8. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint)
(1) Connection/setup example (DICOM Query/Retrieve)
This chapter describes the setup procedure necessary to search for/ Set up the DICOM/Query/Retrieve function following the example
acquire images stored in the DICOM server, from the CL using the below.
DICOM Query/Retrieve function. This chapter also describes the
procedure for the setup of service classes required for the acquisition of CL setup example
searched images. HOST name :fcr-csl*
In addition, this chapter explains about the setup procedure used for the IP address :172.16.1.20*
printout of acquired images from the CL to the DICOM printer using the AE name (User) :CL- SCU-QR*
DICOM Print function.
Service Class :Study Root Query
NOTE Study Root Retrieve
Transfer Syntax : ImplicitVRLittleEndian
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereinafter simply as CL.
An equipment unit targeted for image search/acquisition (DICOM
server) and that targeted for image printout (DICOM printer) are
abbreviated herein as other connected equipment. CL (This equipment)
DICOM CR Storage
Prior to setup TCP/IP
CL requirements DICOM Query/Retrieve

The CL main unit (including DICOM Print/DICOM Storage) must have
been set up accordingly. DICOM Server
Software version required: V3.0(B) or later (Other connected
The option key is required. equipment)
Key Name Functions Supported Setup example of other

connected equipment
CL DICOM QR key DICOM Query/Retrieve
HOST name : D-Server*
Requirements of other connected equipment IP address : 172.16.1.40*
The main unit of other connected equipment must have been set up AE name (Provider) : ServerDicom*
accordingly.
Port number : 12040*
DICOM server Service Class : Study Root Query
SYNAPSE and other manufacturers DICOM servers should be Study Root Retrieve
connectable. Connection requirements must be checked for in advance. Transfer Syntax : ImplicitVRLittleEndian
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to

be changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
015039.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
(2) Connection/setup example (CR Image Storage) REFERENCE

Set up the CR Image Storage function following the example below. When inputting an image from other connected equipment, if it has
Items other than those grayed out in the illustration below should be undergone image processing and LUT processing, whether to
newly set up here. automatically perform LUT reverse-conversion processing or perform
reverse-conversion processing on the printer side can be selected on
NOTE this equipment. To perform LUT reverse-conversion processing on the
Searched images will be input actually by using the CR Image Storage CL, the reverse-conversion LUT file (ReverseLut.lut) that is stored in the
or Private CR Storage service class. directory shown below will be used on this equipment. However, replace
this file for another if you wish to use a different LUT.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\ReverseLut.lut
CL setup example
HOST name : fcr-csl*
IP address : 172.16.1.20*
AE name (Provider) : CL- SCP*
Port number : 12408*
Service Class : CR Image Storage*
Transfer Syntax : JPEGLossLess*
CL (This equipment)
DICOM CR Storage
TCP/IP
DICOM Query/Retrieve
DICOM server
(Other connected
equipment)
Setup example of
HOST name : D-Server*
IP address : 172.16.1.40*
AE name (User) : ServerDicom*
Service Class : CR Image Storage*
Transfer Syntax : JPEGLossLess*
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to

be changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
015061.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup

CL to other equipment. Connect the CL to other equipment via network, as illustrated below.
FN-PS551
Perform the following setups that 2. Software Setup E-i/f cable
enable image reprint using DICOM.
Start to install the option key, and 10BASE-T/
Printer FN-PS551
reinstall the AP key. Perform then 100BASE-TX cable
the following. TCP/IP
Setup of information on this
equipment (AE name, host name,
IP address, device attributes, Other connected
Service Class, and other) CL equipment
Registration of information on other
connected equipment (AE name, 00000044.EPS
device attributes, host name, IP

address, port number, Service DRYPIX/FM-DPL
Class, handling of high-density
images, and other) DRYPIX/ 10BASE-T/
Setup of CONNECTING FM-DPL 100BASE-TX cable
EQUIPMENT TCP/IP
Setup of CONFIG QR
Other connected
Make sure that the CL can search CL equipment
3. Verification
for/retrieve images from the DICOM 00000044.EPS
server and also that it can print

retrieved images to the DICOM NOTES
printer.
Make backup copies of configuration 4. Setup File Backup The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950-
files. compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)

2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition Option
Key
2.1 CL Software Setup The CL DICOM QR option key must be installed as follows so that you
2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition can search for/acquire images.
Option Key
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key 1. Insert the option key CD into the PC.
2.1.3 Setting the Information on This
In a few seconds, the installation start widow opens automatically.
Equipment for Image Search/
Acquisition NOTE
2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other
Connected Equipment for Image In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
Tasks done double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
Search/Acquisition on the CL
2.1.5 Setting the Information on This
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage
Function 2. Click .
2.1.6 Registering the Information on Other A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
Connected Equipment for the DICOM
CR Storage Function
2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Task done 00000046.EPS

Equipment on other
connected
equipment 3. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key 2.1.3 Setting the Information on This Equipment for
Image Search/Acquisition
Whenever the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall Set up the following information items on this equipment.
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is described below.
Host name and IP address
AE name (Application Entity Name)
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. Service Class, Role, Attribute
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically. Other (timeout value setting, etc.)
NOTE
The IIP Service Utility main menu opens.
See 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility under
2. Click . 2. Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the IIP Service Utility

main menu.
00000419.EPS
3. Click .
4. Remove the CD from the PC. 015015.EPS
015016.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Click the mark of the . 7. Enter the AE name (e.g.: CL-SCU-QR) that is the SCU for
the CL in the field.
NOTES
5. Check to see that the CL host name and IP address are A maximum of 16 one-byte characters can be entered.
displayed.
REFERENCE
CL host name You need not to set up the port number in .

fcr-csl
CL IP address
8. Click
1 72 16 1 20
.
015017.EPS
NOTES
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is
network-connected.
Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node box.
6. Click .

015023.EPS
9. Click (downward arrow) in the
field to select the Service

Class (Study Root Query).
015018.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
10. Select (SCU) for the Role because this equipment is 13. Click .
a user of the DICOM service class.
REFERENCES
If the Service Class and Role are selected, contents of Transfer
Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The Transfer
Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed
at OTHER.
SCU is the abbreviation of Service Class User.

as necessary. 015023.EPS
REFERENCE
It is not necessary to place a checkmark to . It will be
disregarded even if placed. field to select the Service
Class (Study Root Retrieve).
12. Click . 15. Select (SCU) for the Role because this equipment is
The system returns to the Application Entity List window. a user of the DICOM service class.
NOTE
Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at
OTHER.

as necessary.
REFERENCE
015018.EPS
It is not necessary to place a checkmark to . It will be

disregarded even if placed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
17. Click . 2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other

Connected Equipment for Image Search/
The system returns to the Application Entity List window. Acquisition
Register the following information items on other connected equipment.
18. Click . Host name and IP address
AE name (Application Entity Name ), port number
Service Class, Role, Attribute
Other (settings for the supported search key and default target for
acquisition, etc.)
1. Click the mark in on the Setup

The ALL OTHER NODES list opens.

When other connected equipment (D-Server, for example) has
015063.eps already been properly registered:

saved.
20. Click .
Already-registered other
connected equipment
(e.g.: D-Server)
015064.EPS
I. On the Setup Configuration Item window, sequentially select

, , (host
name of the DICOM server that stores images), and
then (AE name of the DICOM server).
II. Click (slightly below the center of the window).
The DICOMSetup window opens. Skip steps 3. through 5. and
continue with the processing from step 6.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
If other connected equipment is unregistered:

3. Click .
Unregistered other connected

equipment (e.g.: D-Server)
015065.EPS
I. Select and click .

015005.EPS
II. Perform the following settings on the New Node window.
Enter the host name (e.g.: D-Server) in . 4. Perform the following settings.
Enter the AE name (ServerDicom, for example) of other connected
Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.40) in .
equipment in .
NOTE
Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node field. NOTES
Enter SynapseDicomSCP if the connected DICOM server is
III. Continue with the processing from step 3. SYNAPSE.
A maximum of 16 one-byte characters can be entered.
Enter the port number of other connected equipment (12040, for

example) in .
NOTE
Enter 104 if other connected equipment is SYNAPSE.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
5. Click .
NOTE
Set any from 1 to 8 if 1: SendConfigurationInformation is specified
The DICOMSetup window opens. for No.2 in 10. CONFIG QR of the SYSTEM CONFIG, and set
NONE for other cases.
11. Click .

If other connected equipment is unregistered, the system returns
to the Application Entity List. Click
015023.EPS
field to select the Service

Class (Study Root Retrieve).
7. Select (SCP) for the Role because other connected

equipment is a provider of the service class.
NOTE
015066.eps
Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at 12. Click .
OTHER.
8. To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to

( ).

as necessary.
10. Set up as necessary.

015023.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
13. Click (downward arrow) in the 17. Click .
field to select the Service The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window.
Class (Study Root Query).
14. Select (SCP) for the Role because other connected

equipment is a provider of the DICOM service class.
NOTES
If the Service Class of Study Root Query is selected, contents of
Transfer Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The
Transfer Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute
is fixed at QUERY.
SCP is the abbreviation of Service Class Provider. 015073.eps
15. To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to 18. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
( ). A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
saved.
REFERENCE
It is not necessary to place a checkmark to . It will 19. Click .
be disregarded even if placed.
16. Select the AE name of other connected equipment that is

the default destination for retrieval.
015049.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
2.1.5 Setting the Information on This Equipment for 3. Click .

the DICOM CR Storage Function
Set up the following information items on this equipment.
AE name (Application Entity Name), port number
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Attribute
Other (settings of timeout value, etc.)
1. Select on the Setup Configuration Item

window and click .
2. Check to see that the host name and IP address of the CL

are displayed.
015005.EPS
CL host name
fcr-csl 4. Perform the following settings.
CL IP address Enter the AE name that is the SCP for the CL

1 72 16 1 20
(e.g.: CL-SCP) in the field.
015004.EPS
NOTES NOTES
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the Set up an AE name that is different from the AE name (for the
CR-IR348CL is network-connected. FCR5000plus or DVD) of other SCP.
Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node box. Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly.
A maximum of 16 one-byte characters can be entered.
Enter the port number of this equipment (e.g.: 12408) in the

field.
NOTE
Set up a port number paying attention not to specify the same port
number of other SCP (for the FCR5000plus or DVD). The port
number used for DVD is fixed at 104.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
5. Click . REFERENCE
SCP is the abbreviation of Service Class Provider.
field to select the

Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless, for example).
Transfer Syntax Supported (Selectable)

015006.EPS
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage

6. Click (downward arrow) in the MGImageStorageForPresentation
MGImageStorageForProcessing
field to select the Service Verification
Class (e.g.: CR Image Storage). NOTE
CR Image Storage
When setting up ImplicitVRLittleEndian, an image reception error
Private CR Storage
may result. For the purpose of image storage, use ExplicitVRLittle-
MGImageStorageForPresentation
Endian or JPEGLossless.
NOTE
Set up MGImageStorageForPresentation or MGImageStorageFor-
9. To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to
Processing only when an option has been installed. ( ).
REFERENCE 10. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value ( )

Verification included in the pull-down menu is the Service Class as necessary.
used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For
verifying connection, Verification must be selected accordingly.
For details of connection verification, see 7. Verifying the 11. Click (downward arrow) in the
field to select the device attribute (HD_FILE).
Connection in MU: Maintenance Utility.
12. Click .
7. Select (SCP) for the Role because the CR-IR348CL is
a provider of the DICOM service class.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
13. Click . 2. Click (slightly below the center of the

The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window. window).
015010.EPS
015008.EPS

A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be field to select the Service
saved.
Class (e.g.: CR Image Storage).
15. Click . CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
The system saves the setup data. MGImageStorageForPresentation
NOTE
2.1.6 Registering the Information on Other
Set up MGImageStorageForPresentation or MGImageStorageFor-
Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR Processing only when an option has been installed.
Storage Function
Set up the following information items on other connected equipment. REFERENCE
Host name and IP address Verification included in the pull-down menu is the Service Class
AE name (Application Entity Name) used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For
verifying connection, Verification must be selected accordingly.
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Attribute
For details of connection verification, see 7. Verifying the
1. On the Setup Configuration Item window, sequentially Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify
select , , Connection in MU: Maintenance Utility.
(host name of the DICOM server that stores
images), and then (AE name of
the DICOM server).
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
4. Select (SCU) for the Role because other connected 7. Click .

equipment is a user of the DICOM service class.
REFERENCE
SCU is the abbreviation of Service Class User.
field to select the

Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless, for example).
Transfer Syntax Supported (Selectable)

015011.eps
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage

MGImageStorageForPresentation 8. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
Verification saved.
NOTE
9. Click .
Be sure to set up the same Transfer Syntax as that set up on the
Provider side (SCP).
REFERENCES
You need not to place a checkmark to .
It is not necessary to perform setting for . It will
be disregarded even if set up.

field to select device attribute (OTHER) for other connected
equipment.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT 2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR

To search for images based on the DICOM Query protocol, perform To enable reprint of images acquired using the DICOM Query/Retrieve
settings of the AE name for the server targeted for inquiry using the function, Service Utility settings are necessary.
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT function. For the default settings, see the Table CONFIG QR-related setup data.
Configuration Item window. 1. Click the mark in on the Setup
Registered equipment units are listed on the right side of the
window.
2. Click .
Setup information on the CL is displayed on the right side on the
window.
OE000004.EPS
2. Click .
Click (downward arrow) in the 20000001.EPS
field to select function (QUERY) of other connected equipment.

Click (downward arrow) in the
field to select equipment (AE name of the server targeted for
inquiry).
4. Click .

saved.
6. Click .
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
3. Perform CONFIG QR-related configuration settings as

follows.
Table CONFIG QR-related setup data
No Name Selection Meaning
1 Retrieved 0 : Normal Specifying image confirmation finish mode.
Image Viewer Normal finish (finishing after clicking the finish button)
Finish Mode 1 : Finish After Reprint
Finishes after generating reprint.
2 Reverse LUT 0 : None Specifying whether or not to perform LUT
For Processed No reverse-conversion processing is performed. reverse-conversion processing when a
Image 1 : SendConfigurationInformation processed image is retrieved.
Reverse-conversion processing is performed on the
printer side after LUT type information is sent to the See 3.4 Configuration Details
printer. 1. IMAGE MODALITY under
2 : ApplyReverseLUT MU: Maintenance Utility.
Reverse-conversion processing is performed at the
output process.
3 The Patient * : (1) family Specifying which element(s) of a patient name
Format *^* : (2) family, given is to be matched with the search conditions.
For Search *^*^* : (3) family, given, middle
Condition *^*^*^* : (4) family, given, middle, prefix * A patient name consists of the following five
*^*^*^*^* : (5) family, given, middle, prefix, suffix elements.
*=* : (1) Multi-byte support to (1) above. This setup item is to determine which of those
*^*=*^* : (2) Multi-byte support to (2) above. five elements are to be matched with the
*^*^*=*^*^* : (3) Multi-byte support to (3) above. search conditions.
*^*^*^*=*^*^*^* : (4) Multi-byte support to (4) above. family, given, middle, prefix, suffix
*^*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*^* : (5) Multi-byte support to (5) above. * * appearing in the selective alternatives at
left represents one of the patient name
elements.
^shows delimitation between the elements,
and =shows that multi-byte characters can
be typed in.
: Default setting

saved.
5. Click .
The system saves the setup date.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
2.1.9 Exiting the Service Utility 2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected
Equipment
Set up DICOM Query/Retrieve in accordance with the software
The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window. specification of other connected equipment so that other connected
equipment is available for image data search/acquisition from the CL.
The system returns to the desktop screen. DICOM server
See descriptions related to DICOM Query/Retrieve included in
the manuals of the individual equipment.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
3. Verification 3.1 Starting the CL-AP
After starting up the CL-AP, make sure that images on the DICOM 1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs,
server can be searched for/acquired appropriately. Also make sure that Fuji Film and then FCR.
acquired images can be output from the CL to the specified printer.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP The CL-AP reception window opens in about two minutes.
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images

from the DICOM Server
3.3 Checking Film Output Images
OE000099.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the REFERENCE

DICOM Server The example in the figure below represents a printout that would be
Search for/acquire images stored in the DICOM server and print those (image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN). When the default
images to the DICOM printer as follows. settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) are printed out.
1. Specify search conditions to search for/acquire images from
the DICOM server. FUJIFILM HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000A020
(12) IP number
For details of the procedure used to search for/acquire (2) EDR mode + menu code
images, see the CL Operation Manual.
2. Check to see that the specified image was transferred to

this equipment.
For details of the procedure used to check the transferred
image, see the CL Operation Manual.
(4) Patient ID
3.3 Checking Film Output Images (13) Image processing conditions (5) Patient name (10) Film mark
(7) Gender
1. Generate a printout of the transferred image.
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5
SKULL, GENERAL
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP
Surgi
0000000001 MARY ADAMS
R->L
[F] 23
G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE:50% RT-04

For details of how to generate printouts, see the CR Console 01

Operation Manual.
(14) Exposure menu name (17) Exposure time(11) Reduction ratio
2. Make sure that the specified image has been transferred (15) Normalization conditions + corrections
(19) Technologist's code
properly and output with the same patient and study OE000032.EPS
information.
For any problem that may occur, see Print Output Function in
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)

Have the following item be ready for use.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+T-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+T-RIS (Ordering)
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)

CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)
Connect a CD-RW drive to the CL. 1. Hardware Setup
Described herein is the setup procedure necessary to use the PDI
function for saving study information and image data already output to
the CL, onto the storage media (CD-R). Perform the following PDI-related 2. Software Setup
REFERENCE setups.
Application installation
A dedicated Viewer is stored on the storage media created using the
Option key installation
PDI function. This Viewer enables you to view image data on a general-
AP key reinstallation
purpose PC.
Configuration item settings
Institution information settings
Prior to setup
CL requirements Write study information using the PDI 3. Verification
function and verify if appropriately.
The PDI option key (CL DICOM PDI STORAGE) is required.
Make backup copies of configuration files. 4. Setup File Backup
NOTES
The DICOM Media Storage function cannot be used on the CL where
the PDI function is installed.
For a clustered-connection system where study information can be
used in a shared manner, only study information and image data
stored on this CL equipment can be recorded onto the storage media
(CD-R) by means of the PDI function. When any study information
stored on other connected equipment is selected, an attempt to store
such information onto a CD-R will automatically be restricted, following
PDI wizard instructions, only to that stored on this CL equipment.
Requirements of recommended CD-RW drive

In Japan, use only the specified CD-RW drive.
Other than in Japan, use a drive built in the CL.
Requirements to add the PDI function under Windows XP

To newly add the PDI function under Windows XP, upgrade the software
version to V7.1(B) so that such function can be installed appropriately.
For details of the software version upgrade procedure, see
Appendix D Upgrading the AP under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect a CD-RW drive to the CL, as illustrated below.
TCP/IP
RU CL CD-RW drive
USB cable OE210000.EPS
NOTE
Do not install the driver supplied with the CD-RW drive.
Other than in Japan, use a drive built in the CL.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
2.1 Installing the PDI Application
2. Software Setup 2.1 Installing the PDI Application

NOTE
2.1 Installing the PDI Application When the DICOM Media Storage function is used, configuration settings
and option key must be removed properly.
2.2 Installing the Option Key
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key The IIP Setup Tool main menu opens automatically.
NOTE
2.4 Starting the Service Utility
2.5 Setting the Configuration Items
2.6 Exiting the Service Utility
2.7 Editing the Institution Information
OE220001.EPS
2. Type in 50 and pres the <Enter> key.

A menu opens to show listing of languages that can be installed.
OE220002.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Select a desired language and press the <Enter> key. 2.2 Installing the Option Key
Installation processing will start. After completion of the installation
processing, the system soon returns to the IIP Setup Tool main 1. Insert the PDI Option Key CD into the PC.
menu window.
In a few seconds, the installation start window opens automatically.
4. Type in 0 and press the <Enter> key. NOTE
The system returns to the desktop. In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
OE220003.EPS

OE220021.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Select the type of an installed OS and then press the 5. Click .

<Enter> key.
Installation processing will start. After completion of the installation
A window like that shown below opens. processing, a window like that shown below opens.
OE220005.EPS
NOTE
OE220022.ai
When the OS installed is Windows XP, a window like that shown
below opens.
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows Vista, a window like that shown
below opens.
OE220004.EPS
OE220023.ai
Proceed straight to step 5.

Click [Complete] to restart the PC.
4. Select a locale and press the <Enter> key.

8. Restart the PC.
OE220004.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key 2.4 Starting the Service Utility

If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. 1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs,
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342001A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below. Fuji Film, and then FCR.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically. 2. Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,
NOTE the window.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, Click the upper left and then the upper right corner.
2. Click .
A window opens to indicate completion of the reinstallation MU000031.EPS

processing.
3. Click .

MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
REFERENCE 2.5 Setting the Configuration Items

3-second period allowing the AP to have started up unintentionally, Perform settings for the PDI-related configuration items, as follows.
perform the following steps to start the Service Utility.
1. To shut down the AP, select Shut Down on the menu.
1. Click [Setup Configuration Item] on the IIP Service Utility
window.
window.
3. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select Programs, Fuji
Film, and FCR.
window opens.
OE210004.EPS
OE210003.EPS
OE210005.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2. Click on the window that opens.

The IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand No. Name Selection Meaning
area of the window. 171 PDI Transfer 0 : Explicit VR Little Specifying a DICOM
IDT/Console function setup items Syntax Endian contents transfer syntax
1 : Jpeg Lossless
* Select 0:Explicit VR
Little Endian if
complied with IHE.
4. Select [Save] from the Config menu.

saved.
5. Click .
The setup data is saved accordingly.

OE210006.EPS
3. Perform settings for the following PDI-related configuration

items.
167 PDI Drive Example: E Specifying drive letter of
Letter a connected CD-RW
drive.
168 PDI Use A maximum of 64 single- Specifying SoftcopyLUT
CrtLut byte characters applied to a processed
C:\Program Files\ image.
FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\
PDI.lut * Perform the necessary
setting adding
extension .lut.
169 PDI Image 0 : ST Specifying pixel density
Density 1 : HQ of a stored image.
170 PDI Use Yes Specifying whether or
Multibyte Included. not to include multi-byte
No information in the
Not included. DICOM contents.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.6 Exiting the Service Utility 2.7 Editing the Institution Information
1. Select [Close] from the Config menu on the Setup This section describes the procedure when editing the README.txt file
Configuration Item window. created and stored onto a CD-R using the PDI function, following
information specific to the institution.

1. Select Run from the menu.

2. Enter C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\PDIMaster\README.txt
and click .
OE220006.EPS
The README.txt file opens.
I.
II.
OE220007.EPS
I. Edit details of 2. Facility at which the disk was created following

the institution-specific information.
II. Edit details of 3. Application with which the disk was created
following the CL software version.
4. Store edited data accordingly and close the README.txt file.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Fuji Film, and FCR.
3.2 Writing study information using the In about 2 minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
PDI function
3.3 Verifying the created CD-R
OE000099.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function
3.2 Writing Study Information Using 3. Check to see that the selected study information is
the PDI Function displayed properly and click .
1. Select the Delivered tab.
OE220008.EPS
2. Select study information you want to write onto CD-R and

click .
OE220009.EPS
A window opens prompting you to insert a CD-R.
4. Set a blank CD-R into the PC.
OE220010.EPS
The PDI Wizard window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R
5. Click . 3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R

Use the procedure below to verify the data written onto the CD-R
created as directed in 3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI
Function, above, by inserting it into a PC other than the CL.
1. Set the CD-R created by using the PDI function into the PC
other than the CL.
2. Start up Explorer and select drive D.

Contents of the CD-R will be displayed.
3. Double-click INDEX.HTM.
OE220011.EPS
When data writing is complete, a window like that shown below

opens.
OE220012.EPS
OE220013.EPS
6. Click . The Portable Data for Image window opens.
7. 4. Click [View Image] on the window that opens.

Remove the CD-R from the PC.
OE220014.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R
The File Download window opens. 8. Check to see that the specified image data is displayed
correctly on the Viewer window.
OE220015.EPS
5. Click .
The Download complete window opens.
OE220018.EPS
9. Click .
OE220016.EPS
The system returns to the Portable Data for Image window.

6. Click .
The FUJIFILM DICOM MEDIA Viewer window opens.
7. Select a patients name and click .
OE220017.EPS
The Viewer window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
10. Click [About this disk]. 4. Setup File Backup

Make a backup copy of the CL setup file.
To make a backup copy, have the following item on hand.
OE220019.EPS
The README.TXT window opens.
OE220020.EPS
11. Check to see that what is displayed on the README.TXT

window is as edited in 2.7 Editing the Institution
Information.
12. Click to close the README.TXT window.
13. Remove the CD-R from the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter)

CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter)
Connect a DAP to the CL. 1. Hardware Setup
This chapter describes the procedure used to perform settings
necessary for acquisition of X-ray radiation information (dose-area
product information) when an X-ray image is taken, with a dose-area Perform DAP-related settings. 2. Software Setup
product meter (hereinafter referred simply to as the DAP) connected
properly to the CL. Configuration item settings
The X-ray radiation information (dose-area product information) thus
acquired is displayed in the study information list window on the study
execution screen. Verify CL connection to the DAP and 3. Verification
reception of dose-area product
Prior to setup information.
CL requirements
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Make backup copies of configuration files. 4. Setup File Backup
Connected DAP
For direct connection
Connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC directly to a serial port of the PC.
For indirect connection
Connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC and an X-CON to a conversion box
(Livingstons CR BOX) and then connect the conversion box to the
PSI04A board on the CL.
For the CR-IR371/372, connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC to an X-CON
and then connect the X-CON to the PSI04A board on the CL.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup For indirect connection

When a conversion box is used
Connect a DAP to the CL, as illustrated below. Serial connecter
Dedicated serial cable
For direct connection TCP/IP
When no X-CON is connected
TCP/IP X-CON
Conversion
RU CL box
DAP
RU CL Display DAP OE230003.ai
Unit
For details on the X-CON setting procedure, see OE12: CL+X-
Ray Controller (Serial Connection) under OE: Connecting the
Dedicated serial cable OE230001.ai
CL to Other Equipment.
When a DAP and an X-CON are connected When a CR-IR371/372 is connected

Serial connecter Serial connecter
Dedicated serial cable Dedicated serial cable
TCP/IP TCP/IP
X-CON
RU CL
RU CL X-CON DAP
Display DAP
Unit
OE230004.ai
OE230002.ai
For details on the X-CON setting procedure, see OE12: CL+X-
For details on the X-CON setting procedure, see OE12: CL+X- Ray Controller (Serial Connection) under OE: Connecting the
Ray Controller (Serial Connection) under OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
CL to Other Equipment.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Software Setup 2.1 Starting the Service Utility

2.1 Starting the Service Utility Fuji Film, and then FCR.
the window.
Click the upper left and then the upper right corner.
MU000031.EPS
MU000035.EPS
REFERENCE
If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 3-second
period allowing the AP to have started up unintentionally, perform the
following steps to start the Service Utility.
1. To shut down the AP, select Shut Down on the menu.
window.
3. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select Programs, Fuji Film,
and FCR.
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
window opens.
OE210003.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
2.2 Setting the Configuration Items 4. Click .

The IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand
Perform settings for the DAP-related configuration items, as follows. area of the window.
1. Click [Setup Configuration Item] on the IIP Service Utility
window.
OE210004.EPS OE210006.EPS
OE210005.EPS
2. Click on the window that opens.

The configuration option setup items appear in the right-hand area
of the window.
3. Select Yes for the following configuration setting.
No. Name Meaning

13 Enable Connecting Specifying whether or not to connect CL
DAP Directly directly to a DAP.
Yes
Connect directly to a DAP.
No [default]
Not to connect directly to a DAP.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
5. Perform settings for the following DAP-related configuration 6. Select [Save] from the Config menu.
items. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
For direct connection saved.
177 DAP Serial_ 0:none Specifying a DAP serial 7. Click .
TX Parity 1:odd transfer parity.
2:even The setup data is saved accordingly.
178 DAP Serial_ 0 to 32 Specifying a DAP serial
TX Control ( 0) transfer control port
por number.
(0: Not used.)
179 DAP 3 Specifying a DAP
Message message transfer trial
Trial Count count.
180 DAP A Specifying a DAP
Address address character while
a DAP is connected.
(Specify a capital
alphanumeric.)
181 Wait Time 1 to 30 Specifying a time to wait
for ( 1) (in seconds) until a
Response. response is received
From DAP after a related command
was transferred to the
DAP.
182 Dap Status A maximum of 5 one- Specifying a caption
Display byte characters used to indicate a
Strings ( DAP) related status while a
DAP is connected.
For indirect connection

For details on indirect connection, see 2.5 Setting
Configuration for the X-CON in OE12: CL+X-Ray Controller
(Serial Connection) under OE: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
NOTE
Select 0: Old for No. 108 Xcon Format Type.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

1. Select [Close] from the Config menu on the Setup
2. Click [Exit Service Utility] on the window that opens.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Verify connection to a DAP, as follows. 1. From the menu, sequentially select Programs,
The CL opening window will open.
The CL-AP reception window opens in about two minutes.
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area

Product Information
OE230005.ai
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP

For whether a DAP is connected to the CL or not, look into the error
message box at the upper-right corner of the window.
When in online status
No error message box opens or no DAP Offline icon

appears in the box that opens.
When in offline status
The DAP Offline icon appears in the box.

OE230006.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area

Product Information
1. Register any study menu, and then perform exposure to
read an image.
NOTE
When a cassette is used to perform exposure, IP registration is
needed after a study menu was registered.
2. Check the X-ray dose value shown on the display unit.
3. On the CLs study execution screen, display the study

information list window to check the following values.
Total dose-area product of a study
Image-area dose product
Exposure time (for each image)
4. Display the CLs study reception screen.
5. Make sure that the data appearing on the display unit is

reset appropriately.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area Product Information
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area 2. For each of the image information items included in the
received study, check the following values.
Product Information
Image-area dose product
Exposure time (for each image)
3.4.1 When DICOM PPS Connection is Enabled For details on the DICOM Storage function setup procedure,
see OE3: CL+HI-C655/QA-WS (DICOM CR Storage) and
1. On the RIS system, select a study for which the reception of OE4: CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed
dose-area product information was definitely confirmed. Images) under OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
NOTE
Select the study that was checked for in 3.3 Verifying Reception of 3.4.3 When DICOM Print Connection is Enabled
Dose-area Product Information above.
1. Output a study for which the reception of dose-area product
information was definitely confirmed to a DICOM Printer
2. With regard to the received study, check the following of the device.
actual measurement values.
NOTE
Total dose-area product of a study
Image-area dose product Select the study that was checked for in 3.3 Verifying Reception of
Exposure time (for each image) Dose-area Product Information above.
For details on the DICOM PPS function setup procedure, see
OE8: CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS) under
OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment. 2. Make sure that dose-area product information (for each
image) is printed on the output film.
NOTE
3.4.2 When DICOM Storage Connection is Enabled
As a standard function, no dose-area product information is printed
on output film. Edit the FilmStrFm.env file so that necessary
1. Transfer a study for which the reception of dose-area
settings are performed to print dose-area product information on
product information was definitely confirmed to a DICOM
output film properly.
Storage device.
For how to edit the FilmStrFm.env file, see FR1: Print Output
NOTE Function under FR: Function-specific Reference.
Select the study that was checked for in 3.3 Verifying Reception of
Dose-area Product Information above.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)

Have the following item be ready for use.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Precise Enlargement Function

Precise Enlargement Function
Install the Precise enlargement 1. Software Setup
Setting procedure to display the display image read by CL and its software, make settings for the firewall,
overlay item on the 2nd monitor are described. The existent monitor and install the option key and reinstall
(hereinafter called 1st monitor) is used as a regular exposure console. the AP key, and then perform the
following settings.
Setting the OS
Prior to setup Setting the User Utility of Precise
CL requirements enlargement software
CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Setting the Service Utility of Precise
enlargement software
Precise enlargement function option key (CR PRECISE
ENLARGEMENT) is required. Confirm that the image is displayed 2. Confirming the
The OS used on the PC is Windows XP SP2 or later, Windows Vista or on the 2nd monitor. Settings
Windows 7.
The PC memory is 2GB or more. (If not sufficient, expand it as
appropriate.) Back up the settings. 3. Backup/Restore
The 2nd monitor has been connected.
For the detailed 2nd monitor connection procedure, see
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Monitor under Appx IN: Procedure to be performed if necessary
Installation Appendix. When restoring the setting files related to Precise enlargement
function.
NOTE
3. Backup/Restore
This function is not supported on the PC models listed below, because When image display to the 2nd monitor is set to OFF.
memory expansion is not possible on them.
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function
OptiPlex GX50, 60, 150, 260, 270
When turning ON again the 2nd monitor.
5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1. Software Setup
1. Software Setup
Set up the CL software following the flow chart below.
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
1.2 Setting the Firewall
1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Option Key
1.5 Setting the System

1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility
1.5.3 Setting the User Utility
1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement 3. Click [Exit Service Utility].

Function Software The system returns to the desktop screen.
1.1.1 For Software V7.1 4. Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD
(114Y5342318A00) into the PC.
NOTE
Perform steps 1. through 11. when the OS used is Windows XP SP2 or
earlier. NOTE
Performing steps 1. through 11. is not necessary when the OS used is
Windows XP SP3 or Windows Vista. Proceed straight to step 12. Double-click directly the execution file (Setup.exe) in the CD when
the window does not display automatically.
Windows starts up. 5. Click [Windows Installer 3.1 Redistributable(v2)].

OE240027.ai
MU000031.EPS
REFERENCE
NOTE Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click
When the following window is displayed, enter the login password No and proceed to Step 12.

MU000035.EPS
OE240025.ai
opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The License Agreement window opens.
NOTE
When a window like that shown below opens after
is clicked at step above, click on the window that

opens to proceed to the next step.
OE240026.ai
7. Select , click .
OE240029.ai
After installation completed, the following window opens.
OE240030.ai
OE240028.ai
9. Click .
OE240031.ai
10. Click .
11. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
12. Turn ON the PC power. 16. Click [Visual C++ 2008 SP1 Redistributable Package].
Windows starts up.
OE240032.ai
REFERENCE
MU000031.EPS
Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click

NOTE No and proceed to Step 19.
OE240033.ai

MU000035.EPS
opens.

OE240034.ai
15. Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD 17. Click .

(114Y5342318A00) into the PC. After installation completed, the following window opens.
NOTE
Double-click directly the execution file (Setup.exe) in the CD when
OE240035.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

The system returns to the Install Echo application screen After installation completed, the following window opens.
window.
21. Click .
19. Click [.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1].
22. Click [Echo Application].
OE240036.ai
REFERENCE
No and proceed to Step 22.
OE240039.ai
The Welcome to the Echo Setup Wizard window opens.
OE240038.ai
The following window opens. OE240040.ai
23. Click .
The Select information window opens.
OE240037.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
24. Make the following settings. 26. Click .
NOTE
Perform reinstallation from the step 8 after restarting PC when
[.NET Framework 3.5] is not installed message displayed.
I. After installation completed, the Windows Security Alert window

opens.
II.
OE240041.ai
27. Click [Unblock].
I. Select a language.
NOTE
Select the same language as you selected at the SYSTEM
CONFIG - 7. Language Setup for Screen Message in the Service
Utility.
II. Select the type of added monitor (2nd monitor) for image
confirmation.
OE240043.ai
REFERENCE
After installation completed, the monitor type can be changed by 28. Click .
clicking [Change Monitor] in the Install Echo application screen
window. The system returns to the Install Echo application screen
window.
25. Click . 29. Click [Exit].

The Confirm Installation window opens. The system returns to the desktop screen.
OE240042.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.1.2 For Software V8.0 or Later 4. Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD
(114Y5342318A01) into the PC.
The Install Precise enlargement function screen window opens.
Windows starts up.
After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running. NOTE
2. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper the window does not display automatically.
5. Click [Precise enlargement function].
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
AWS823070.ai
REFERENCE
OK and proceed to Step 6.
MU000035.EPS
opens.

The system returns to the desktop screen. or
AWS825002.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The Welcome to the Precise enlargement function Setup Wizard II. Select the type of added monitor (2nd monitor) for image
window opens. confirmation.
REFERENCE
After installation completed, the monitor type can be changed by
clicking [Change Monitor] in the Install Echo application screen
window.
8. Click .
AWS823069.ai
AWS823067.ai
6. Click .
9. Click .
The Please select information to setup window opens.
I
II
AWS825004.ai
AWS823068.ai
NOTE 10. Click .
Select the same language as you selected at the SYSTEM The system returns to the Install Precise enlargement function
CONFIG - 7. Language Setup for Screen Message in the Service screen window.
Utility.
11. Click [Exit].
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1. Open the explorer and double-click the FirewallSetting.bat

directly below the Precise enlargement function installation
CD.
OE240044.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement 1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key

Function Option Key
Be sure to reinstall the AP key when you installed the option key. Use
the AP key CD to reinstall the AP key. Installation procedures are shown
1. Open the explorer and double-click the OptionCooper_ below.
Echo.exe directly below the Precise enlargement function
installation CD. 1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
The installation start window opens. After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE
Double-click directly the execution file (Filename extension : exe) in
the CD when the window does not display automatically.
2. Click
OE240045.ai
2. Click . The window to express the completion of installation opens.
The window to express the completion of installation opens. 3. Click .

OE240046.ai
3. Click .
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.5 Setting the System 3. Select Echo and make the following settings according to
the request from the institution.
NOTE
The Precise enlargement function has the dedicated Service Utility I.
and User Utility. II.
Note that Service Utility and User Utility for CL are different from those III.
of the Precise enlargement function.
IV.
OE240047.ai
1.5.1 Setting the OS No. Item Name Option Remarks

Make settings so that the taskbar is not displayed at the time of starting Font Name of MS UI Gothic Select the display font
the User Utility for Precise enlargement function. Overlay Microsoft Sans Serif type for overlay item that
I is displayed on the
image confirmation
1. Press <Windows> key and right-click on the displayed window.
taskbar, then select Properties.
Image Density Highest density Select the image density
The Taskbar and [Start] Menu Properties window opens. used to display Standard density to display. HQ image
II
displayed as STD image
if Standard is selected.
2. Remove the check mark from the Keep the taskbar on top
of other windows. Zoom ratio for 10 Zoom/reduction ratio for
III a click (%) (5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, image Zoom/image
40, 50) reduction (%)
Maximum 500 Maximum zoom ratio for
IV
zoom ratio (%) (200, 300, 400, 500) image magnification (%)
1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility : Settings for factory shipment
1. Input C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\ 4. Click .

ServiceUtility.exe into the Start Searching (Run... for
The Service Utility window closes.
Windows XP) column in the menu and press
<Enter> key. 5. Restart the PC.
The Service Utility window for the linking application opens.
6. Confirm that the 2nd monitor starts up with gray background
2. Select System and make sure that Allow switch app by when opening window for CL displayed.
menu is set to [No].
NOTE
When [No] is not set for Allow switch app by menu, be sure to set
[No].
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.5.3 Setting the User Utility No. Item Name Option Remarks
Display size of Full-scale display Select the initial display
NOTE
Initial Image at all the time. settings optionally when
The User Utility for Precise enlargement function should be started Use Fit in Window displayed CL image on
while CL-AP is running. function only to the the image confirmation
I images larger than window.
the image display
area.
1. Right-click on the 2nd monitor screen and select the User Fit in Window at
Utility while the patient information input window for CL-AP all the time.
is displayed. Loupe area Small Loupe area size
II
size (small, medium, large)
Magnification 300 Zoom ratio for displayed
III ratio of Loupe (200, 300, 400, 500) images in the Loupe
(%) area.
Center point of Position of mouse Determines the center
scaling cursor coordinate of
Center of display magnification reduction
IV
area processing in image
magnification/reduction
mode.
Overlay Item Refer to
V Setting 1.5.4 Setting the
AWS823031.ai
Overlay Item
The User Utility window for Precise enlargement function opens. Version Displays the version of
VI information Precise enlargement
2. Make the following settings according to the request for the function
institution.
3. Click .
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
OE240048.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item III. Display items for overlay item
Set the display items for overlay item in the four corners of
display area (top left, top right, bottom left, bottom right) on the
1. Click on the User Utility 2nd monitor.
window for Precise enlargement function. The displayable overlay item is shown below.
The Additional Information Settings window opens. Overlay item Patient ID, Patient's Name, Kanji Patient's Name, Sex,
for patient Patient's Bitrth Date, Patient's Age
2. Make the following settings. Order Accession Number, Acquisition Date, Acquisition Time
I. II. infomation
Overlay item Menu Name, S/L, Pixel Spacing, kVp, X-ray Tube
for image Current, Exposure Time, Exposure, Dose Area Product,
Target/Filter, Grid, Focus, Thickness, Comp Force,
Angle, AEC, VCS+VMCS, AGD, ESE, Laterality, Patient
Orientation, GA/GS
Display Magnification Ratio
attribute
infomation
III. Maximum of 10 items for each display area can be set.
Be able to set a overlay item can be see to display only in one corner.
User can edit the Prefix optionally for the overlay item item list. The
(item name) : is set for the factory default setting. If the item name
does not need to be displayed, leave the Prefix blank, and only item
value will be displayed.
The Suffix in the overlay item list cannot be edited.
To change the display position of an item, cancel the setting for the
item once; and then, make the setting for the item again.
OE240049.ai
Setting method
I. Font size
Set the font size of overlay item. Select either 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 1. Select the items to be displayed from the right-side of
14, 16, 18, 20, 22 (default), 24, 26, 28, 36, or 48. overlay item lists.
II. Font color
Set the display font colors of overlay item. Select either Gray
(default), Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow. 2. Select the position (Top-left, Top-right, Bottom-left, Bottom-
right) to be displayed from the left-side of display area.
3. Click .
Item name is displayed in the selected position.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Method for cancelling the settings

1. Select the items to be hidden from the left-side display area.
2. Click .
Item name is deleted from the selected position.
REFERENCE
Overlay items set as the factory default settings are shown below.
Cancel unnecessary setting items.
Top-left Top-right
Patient ID Accession Number
Patients Name Acquisition Date
Patients Sex Acquisition Time
Patients Birth Date Menu Name
Patients Age Laterality
Patient Orientation (Row/Column)
VCS+VMCS
Bottom-left Bottom-right
Pixel Spacing X-ray Tube Current
Magnification Ratio Exposure Time
S/L kVp
GA/GS Exposure
Target/Filter
Grid
Focus
AEC
ESE
Image Area Dose Product
NOTE
Cancel the Focus item.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.2 Confirming the Image Display
2. Confirming the Settings 2.2 Confirming the Image Display

1. Start the QA processing function on read images.
Start up the CL-AP and confirm displayed images.
2.1 Starting the CL-AP 2. Confirm that the images are displayed on the 2nd monitor,
and also that information set in 1.5.4 Setting the Overlay
Item is displayed correctly.
2.2 Confirming Image Display

1. From the menu, sequentially select All Programs,
Fuji Film and FCR.
OE000099.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
3. Backup/Restore 3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
The procedures to back up/restore the setting values for the Precise 3.2.1 Backup
enlargement function are described.
1. Select the menu and then click User Utility.
3.1 For Software V7.1 The User Utility main menu window opens.
2. Click [Ascent View].

Backup
The Ascent View window opens.
1. Open Windows Explorer, and back up the Config folder in
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper to the media. 3. Click the [Backup].
Restore
1. Open Windows Explorer on the PC to be restored, and
overwrite the backed up Config folder to the Config folder in
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper.
AWS825011.ai
4. Insert the media for backup into the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. Select the targeted backup drive/folder and click [OK]. After backup completed, the following window opens.
AWS825013.ai
6. Click [OK].

AWS825010.ai
CAUTION
When the [Copy File] window opens, do not select [Copy, but keep
both files].
AWS825014.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.2.2 Restore 5. Select the drive/folder in which the backup data is stored,
and then click [OK].
CAUTION
Data cannot be restored If the version of the installed software and
the version of software at the time of creating data to be restored
are different with each other.
See the version information of backup data (Version.xml) to
restore, and confirm that the versions are the same before
restoring.
The User Utility main menu window opens.

AWS825010.ai
After restoring processing is completed, the following window

The Ascent View window opens. opens.
3. Click [Restore].
AWS825016.ai
6. Click [OK].
AWS825012.ai
The Folder Selection window opens. 7. Remove the media from the PC.
4. Insert the media for backup into the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function
4. Disabling the Precise 4. Confirm that no error is displayed.

When an error occurred, perform steps 1 through 3 again,
Enlargement Function and correct the specified error appropriately. (In the window
below, it is indicated that " corresponding to the 29th
Perform the following procedure when turning the Precise enlargement character on the 4th line is illegal. To be more specific, there
function OFF and using only the CL in the case such as the 2nd monitor is no " that is paired with the other.)
becoming defective.
1. Input the following in the Start Searching column (Run...

for Windows XP) from the menu and press the
<Enter> key.
notepad C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in Note Pad.
AWS823066.ai
2. Correct the following parts and save.

Before correction 5. Restart the PC.
<ExecutableFile> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Echo.
exe</ExecutableFile> 6. Confirm that the Precise enlargement function does not
After correction (Add Managed=False) start up.
<ExecutableFile Managed=False> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
Cooper\System\Echo.exe</ExecutableFile>

<Enter> key.
explorer C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in the browser.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function
5. Enabling the Precise

Enlargement Function
Perform the following procedure when turning the Precise enlargement
function ON after it was turned OFF following the procedure directed in
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function.

<Enter> key.
notepad C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in Note Pad.
2. Correct the following parts and save.

Before correction
<ExecutableFile Managed="False"> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
Cooper\System\Echo.exe</ExecutableFile>
After correction (Delete Managed=False)
<ExecutableFile> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Echo.
exe</ExecutableFile>

<Enter> key.
explorer C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in browser.
4. Confirm that no error is displayed.
5. Restart the PC.
6. Confirm that the Precise enlargement function starts up.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
QA ROI Measurement

QA ROI Measurement
Install the QA ROI Measurement 1. Software Setup
Described herein are the procedures to use the QA ROI Measurement software, set up the firewall, install the
function to set up an ROI on an image displayed on the CL and to option key and reinstall the AP key.
display width and height of the displayed ROI, as well as the average Perform then the following.
pixel value, median pixel value, standard deviation and area. Setup of the Service Utility for the QA
ROI Measurement software
Settings necessary for the
Prior to setup discontinued monitor
CL requirements
CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Create an exposure menu used for 2. Creating an
Software version required: V8.0 or later the QA ROI Measurement. Exposure Menu for QA
ROI option key (CR QA ROI MEASUREMENT) is requiredey. ROI Measurement
The OS used on the PC is Windows XP SP2 or later, Windows Vista or
Windows 7. Confirm that the QA ROI information 3. Confirming the
is displayed properly. Settings
Back up the settings. 4. Backup/Restore
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software
1. Software Setup 1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement

Software
Set up the CL software following the flow chart shown below.
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software The PC starts up.

1.5.1 Setting the Service Utility
1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued MU000031.EPS
Monitor
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
opens.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4. Insert the QA ROI Measurement Softeware installation CD The Welcome to the QA ROI Measurement Setup Wizard
(114Y5342319A00) into the PC. window opens.
The Install QA ROI Measurement screen window opens.
NOTE
5. Click [QA ROI Measurement].
AWS824019.ai
6. Click .
AWS824020.ai
The Please select information to setup window opens.
NOTE
No and proceed to step 6.
or
AWS825002.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7. Make the following settings on the window that opens. 9. Click .
I
II
AWS825004.ai
AWS824022.ai
NOTE
Select the same language as that you selected at SYSTEM
CONFIG 7. Language Setup for Screen Message in the
10. Click .
Service Utility.
The system returns to the Install QA ROI Measurement screen
window.
II. Select the type of Primary monitor (1st monitor) for image
confirmation.
11. Click [Exit].
REFERENCE
After installation is completed, the monitor type can be changed by
clicking [Change Monitor] in the Install QA ROI Measurement
screen window.
8. Click .
AWS824023.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.2 Setting the Firewall 1.3 Installing the Option Key
1. Open Explorer and double-click FirewallSetting_Roi.bat 1. Open Explorer and double-click OptionCooper_Roi.exe
directly below the QA ROI Measurement software installation directly below the QA ROI Measurement software installation
CD. CD.
After completion of the installation processing, the Press any key The installation start window opens.
to continue. window opens.
AWS823040.ai
AWS824021.ai

2. Click .
3. Click .
The system returns to desktop screen.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key 1.5 Setting the System

Be sure to reinstall the AP key when you installed the option key. Use NOTE
below. The QA ROI Measurement function has the dedicated Service Utility
and User Utility.
Note that Service Utility and User Utility for CL are different from those
1. Insert the AP key CD into the PC. of the QA ROI Measurement software.
NOTE 1.5.1 Setting the Service Utility

Double-click directly the execution file (Filename extension : exe) in
the CD when the window does not display automatically. 1. Input C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\
ServiceUtility.exe into the Start Searching column in the
menu and press the <Enter> key.
2. Click . The Service Utility window for the linking application opens.
The window to express the completion of installation opens. 2. Select ROI and then select [HQ Preferred] from the Image
Type pull-down menu that opens.
3. Click .
3. Click .
The Service Utility window closes.
4. Restart the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued Monitor 3. Copy the ENV file used by the CL-AP, as checked for at step 1.
above.
When a discontinued monitor is used, there may be cases where the
measurement results become illegal because of improperly determined NOTE
monitor information.
Determine monitor information properly observing the procedure Pay due attention not to move or delete the ENV file from the C:\
described below. Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut folder.
NOTE
4. Paste the copied ENV file on to the C:\Program Files\
Monitor models other than those shown in the table below require FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor folder.
settings specific to discontinued monitors.
Resolution Monochrome/Color Monitor Model 5. Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor\

MonitorDef.xml folder.
1024768 Color FlexScan L362T
12801024 Color Flex Scan L560T-C
6. Use the Notepad capability to add monitor information
16001200 Monochrome RadiForce GS220 checked for at step 1. above to the monitor setup file,
20481536 Color RadiForce RX320 MonitorDef.xml.
20481536 Monochrome RadiForce GS310 I. Copy the <Monitor Name=.. (omitted) ../> line and paste it on to
the last line of the file.
II. Correct the following portion of the pasted line to what was
1. Check the used monitor for the following items. checked for at step 1.
<Monitor Name = (monitor name checked for at step 1.)
Monitor name PixelPitch = (pixel pitch checked for at step 1.) LutFileName =
Pixel pitch (unit: mm) C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor\(ENV filename
ENV filename used by the CL-AP checked for at step 1.)/>
NOTES
7. Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\
The Monitor name is to be used as the filename or folder name Manager folder.
at subsequent steps. Therefore, assign a simple name that can
be used as a filename.
Example: NANAO_L560T-C
When the ENV filename for a certain monitor is unknown, use the
file below to confirm it.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut\lut.txt
2. Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut folder.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.5 System Settings
8. Copy the entire monitor name folder of the same 12. Use the Notepad capability to add the monitor name
resolutions and paste it on to the same folder. checked for at step 1. above to the system setup file,
SystemConfig.xml.
NOTE
Correct the 3 lines of <Config Id=2 Name=Primary
The table below shows folders of the monitor name folder of the Monitor .. (omitted) .. </Config> starting from the 6th line
same resolutions.
to what was checked for at step 1.
Copy and paste a folder of the resolution same as that of the
monitor to be set up (regardless of whether it is monochrome or <ValueType="string" MinExclusiveValue="0"
color). MaxExclusiveValue="50" Enum="NANAO_RX211,NANAO_
L362T,NANAO_L560T-C,NANAO_GS220,NANAO_
Monitor Name Folder Resolution Monochrome/Color RX320,NANAO_GS310, (monitor name checked for at
NANAO_L362T 1024x768 Color step1.)> (monitor name checked for at step 1.)</Value>
NANAO_L560T-C 1280x1024 Color
NANAO_GS220 1600x1200 Monochrome 13. Restart the PC.
NANAO_RX320 2048x1536 Color
NANAO_GS310 2048x1536 Monochrome
Example: To use a 2M monitor as the 1st monitor, copy the

NANAO_GS220 folder.
9. Change the name of the pasted folder to the monitor name

checked for at step 1.
10. Repeat steps 7. through 9. for the C:\Program Files\

FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Roi folder.
NOTE
Though folder names are the same as for C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Manager and C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
Cooper\Screen\Roi, the files that consist of each folder are
different with each other. Therefore, be sure to copy the monitor
name folder of the same resolutions that is included in the
respective folder.
11. Move the operation sequence to the C:\Program Files\

FujiFilm\Cooper\Config folder.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for 5. Perform the following settings.
QA ROI Measurement
For the QA ROI Measurement purposes, it is recommended to perform I
exposure using the dedicated exposure menu. Procedures to create the
exposure menu for QA ROI Measurement are shown below.
NOTE
The saving function for QA ROI Measurement is not supported.
1. Select All Programs Fuji Film FCR from the AWS824012.ai
I. ANK Exposure Menu Name : QA ROI Measurement

menu.
The CL opening window opens. 6. Perform the following settings in the Exposure parameter 1
In about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens. tab.
2. Select the menu and then select User Utility.
3. Click [Menu Setup].

The Menu Setup window opens.
4. Select MAX4.0 MAMMOGRAPHY from the Exposure/

Study Menu and then click [New].
II
AWS824013.ai
I. Select Fix.
II. Set S value up to 120.
AWS824011.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement
7. Select the DX Parameter tab, and then make settings 9. Select the QC/TEST tab, and then drag the QA ROI
according to the operation for the institution. Measurement menu, created from Exposure/Study Menu,
to the non-setup button.
REFERENCES
Patient Orientation, Anatomic Region and View Code are the
items that must be entered essentially.
AWS824015.ai
10. Click [OK].

The system returns to the User Utility main menu window.
11. Click [Terminate].

AWS824014.ai
8. Click [OK].
The system returns to the Menu Setup window.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Confirming the Settings 3.2 Confirming Image Display
Start up the CL-AP and confirm displayed images. 1. Select the menu, and then select User Utility.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP The User Utility main menu window opens.
2. Select [Customizing the screen display] [QA Palette].

3.2 Confirming Image Display
The QA palette customization window opens.
3. Select ROI Measurement from the Function List, and

3.1 Starting the CL-AP paste it to the optional display region.
1. From the menu, sequentially select All Programs,

Fuji Film and FCR.
OE000099.EPS
AWS824016.ai
4. Click .
The system returns to the User Utility main menu window.
5. Click [Terminate].
The system returns to the CL-AP registration window.
6. Perform exposure using an exposure menu created in

2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3.2 Confirm Image Display
7. Perform the QA processing. 9. Confirm that the QA ROI Measurement window is opened.
8. Click anywhere in the study execution QA window or select

any study already subjected to study processing, and then
click .
AWS824018.ai
AWS824017.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.1 Backup
4. Backup/Restore 5. Select the targeted backup drive/folder and click [OK].
Described herein are the procedures to back up/restore the setting

values for the QA ROI Measurement function.
4.1 Backup
2. Click [Ascent View]. AWS825010.ai
The Ascent View window opens.

CAUTION
3. Click the [Backup]. When the [Copy File] window opens, do not select [Copy, but keep
both files].
AWS825011.ai
4. Insert media for backup, such as FD, USB memory stick or

the like, into the PC.
AWS825014.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.1 Backup
After backup processing is completed, the following window

opens.
AWS825013.ai
6. Click [OK].
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.2 Restore
4.2 Restore 5. Select the drive/folder in which the backup data is stored,
and then click [OK].
CAUTION
Data cannot be restored if the version of the installed software and
the version of software at the time of creating data to be restored
are different with each other.
See the version information of backup data (Version.xml) to
restore, and confirm that the versions are the same before
restoring.

AWS825010.ai

After restoring processing is completed, the following window
The Ascent View window opens. opens.
3. Click [Restore].
AWS825016.ai
6. Click [OK].
AWS825012.ai
The Folder Selection window opens. 7. Remove the media from the PC.
4. Insert media in which the backup data is stored into the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)
Prior to setup
CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)
CL requirements
Describes the setup procedures for the ordering function for acquiring CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
the patient information and exposure menu from Synapse RIS. Software version required: V8.1 (B) or later
Synapse RIS option key (DX CL SYNAPSE RIS CONNECT) is
NOTES required.
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL. RETAKE ANALYSIS option key (CL RETAKE ANALYSIS) is required.
This option cannot be used with the following options. PC satisfies the following specifications.
(These options will be automatically turned OFF when the Synapse RIS Windows XP
option key is installed.) OS Windows Vista
Function Option key Windows 7
DICOM PPS function CL DICOM MPPS Memory More than 2GB
DICOM worklist function CL DICOM ORDER MWM Better than Intel Core2Duo 1.8GHz
CPU
DICOM worklist function (CPU with more than two core memories and more than 1.8GHz)
CL DICOM ID MWM
(acquiring only patient information)
ID Online function IR 346 ID ONLINE
Study reception information
CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL
transfer/reception function Use a network cable to connect the CL 1. Hardware Setup
and the Synapse RIS server.
When the user authentication function for CL is used, make sure that
the service engineer synchronizes the user authentication information
for CL and Synapse RIS at the time of installation. Perform the following settings related 2. Software Setup
When the image is specified as mis-exposure from QA after the study to Synapse RIS.
is finished, the information of mis-exposure will not be sent to Synapse
Option key installation
RIS. AP key reinstallation
When the StudyInstanceUID is assigned from the Synapse RIS, Shared folder creation and settings
confirm that the StudyInstanceUID is not being assigned redundantly Configuration item settings
from the Synapse RIS before installing the Synapse RIS options.
Perform the startup verification of 3. Verification

Synapse RIS window.
Make backup copies of configuration 4. Setup File Backup

files.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Network-connect the CL and the Synapse RIS server to each other, as
illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
Synapse RIS
CL
server
OE260016.ai
NOTES
and Synapse RIS server.
The cable type applicable to the CL and the Synapse RIS server is the
IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2. Software Setup 2.1 Installing the Option Key

The option keys to install indicated in these procedures are the following
two types.
2.1 Installing the Option Key DX CL SYNAPSE RIS CONNECT
CL RETAKE ANALYSIS
1. Insert the DX CL SYNAPSE RIS CONNECT Option Key CD
into the PC.
2.3 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder In a few seconds, the installation start widow opens automatically.
Windows XP
Windows Vista/7

OE260001.ai
u NOTE u
2. Click .
OE260002.ai
3. Click .
5. Install the CL RETAKE ANALYSIS option key by performing

the step 1 through 4.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
Be sure to reinstall the AP key when you installed the option key. Use
below.

u NOTE u
2. Click .
The window to express the completion of installation opens.
3. Click .
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.3 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder
2.3 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder 2.3.1 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in
Windows XP
The procedures of creating and setting the shared folders for connecting
with Synapse RIS in Windows XP are different from those in Windows
Vista. Perform the settings according to the following procedures for
1. Right-click My Computer from the menu, and
each. then select Explorer.

The explorer starts up.
u NOTE u
The folder names of the shared folder of No.97 Recept Computer
Info File Share Folder under 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION and the shared
2. Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the OrderingReportShare
folder.
folder of No.307 Simplified Ordering Report Share Folder can be
specified arbitrarily at any locations where CL and Synapse can
access. 3. Right-click OrderingReportShare folder and then choose
The shared folder for No.307 Simplified Report Share Folder is not Sharing and Security.
created by default setting so create the folder manually.
The OrderingReportShare Properties window opens.
If the location or name of the shared folder is changed from the default
setting, also change the setting in Service Utility.
4. Select ( ) and click .
REFERENCE
This section mainly deals with the examples of creating the
OrderingReportShare folder and the ReceptShare folder at the
default setting location and setting up the sharing options.
For Windows XP
See 2.3.1 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in Windows
XP.
For Windows Vista/7

See 2.3.2 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in Windows
Vista/7.
OE260017.ai
The Permissions for OrderingReportShare window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Select Everyone and place checkmarks to all the 2.3.2 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in
checkboxes in the Allow column ( ). Windows Vista/7
1. Select Computer from the menu.
The Computer window opens.
2. Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the OrderingReportShare

folder.
3. Right-click OrderingReportShare folder and select

Share... (Share... Advanced Sharing for Windows 7).
OE260018.ai The OrderingReportShare Properties window opens.
6. Click .
4. Click .
The system returns to the OrderingReportShare Properties window.
7. Click .
The OrderingReportShare Properties window closes.
8. Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the ReceptShare folder.
9. For ReceptShare folder, perform the same procedures as

step 3 through 7.
OE260010.ai
10. Shut down Explorer. The Advanced Sharing window opens.
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
5. Place a checkmark to ( ) and 8. Click .

click . The system returns to the OrderingReportShare Properties window.
9. Close the OrderingReportShare Properties window.
10. Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the ReceptShare folder.
11. For ReceptShare folder, perform the same procedures as

step 3 through 9.
12. Close the explorer.

OE260011.ai
The Permissions for OrderingReportShare window opens.
6. Select Everyone and place checkmarks to all the

checkboxes in the Allow column ( ).
OE260012.ai
7. Click .
The system returns to the Advanced Sharing window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.4 Setting the Configuration Items 4. Click .

A list of IMAGE MODALITY setup items appears in the right-hand
Set the configuration items of Synapse RIS and Retake Analysis related
area of the window.
to the ordering function (connecting with Synapse RIS).

For the Service Utility startup procedure, see 1. Starting/
Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance Utility.
2. Click [SetupConfigurationItem].
00000248.EPS
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5. Set the following configuration items. No. Name Selection Meaning
No. Name Selection Meaning 51 Use Reject Yes Specifying whether to

Comment Enables the entry. enable or disable entry of
34 Enable Yes Specifying whether or not comment on mis-exposed
Statistical Enables the exposure result to output an exposure No
images.
Info. Output data file output function. result data file. Disables the entry.
* Select Yes when using
No Exposure result data : the Retake Analysis
Disables the exposure result Patient ID, patient function.
data file output function. name, study date, study
time, anatomical region,
: Default setting, * : Note
exposure menu, etc.
* Select Yes when using 6. Click .
the Retake Analysis A list of QA FUNCTION setup items appears in the right-hand area
function. of the window.
* The default setting at
QA FUNCTION setup items
shipment from factory of
the CR Console MINI is
Yes.
37 Enable Yes Specifying whether
Security Uses the user authentication or not to use the user
Function function. authentication function.
No
Does not use the user
authentication function.
38 Link User Yes Specifying whether the
Account to Displays the login user name technologist name field OE260013.ai
Operator's in the technologist name field. should display the name

Name of a user who logs in with
No
the user authentication
Does not display the login user
function.
name in the technologist name
field.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
7. Set the following configuration items. 9. Set the following configuration items.
20 Alert MSG 0 : Connect with RIS Specifying a message 16 Examination 0 : P
ad with space to the head Specifying the Accession
Type When RIS connection type to be displayed when No. Padding ( 1234567) No. padding method.
Patient (hospital layer) changing the patient Method Right-padded with spaces to
* This function also
Information information. the head.
1 : Without RIS specifies right/left
will be
Non-RIS connection 1 : P
ad with zero to the head justification of character
Modified
(general practitioner layer) (0001234567) strings printed on film.
Right-padded with zeros to * When using Synapse
2 : Non-Display
the head. RIS, select either 0 :
Not displayed.
Pad with space to the
: Default setting, * : Note 2 : P
ad with space to the tail
head or 2 : Pad with
(1234567 )
space to the tail.
Left-padded with spaces to
8. Click . the tail.
A list of IDT/Console function setup items appears in the right- 3 : P

ad with zero to the tail
hand area of the window. (1234567000)
Setup items for the IDT/Console function Left-padded with zeros to the tail.
18 Patient ID 0 : P
ad with space to the head Specifying the patient ID
Padding ( 1234567) padding method.
Method Right-padded with spaces to
* This function also
the head.
specifies right/left
1 : P
ad with zero to the head justification of character
(0001234567) strings printed on film.
Right-padded with zeros to * When using Synapse
the head. RIS, select either 0 :
Pad with space to the
2 : P
ad with space to the tail
head or 2 : Pad with
(1234567 )
space to the tail.
Left-padded with spaces to
OE000038.EPS
the tail.
3 : P
ad with zero to the tail
(1234567000)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

95 Recept 0 : Standard Computer type for 100 Recept C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ Specifying a folder in which
Computer FujiFilm Standard connection of a receipt Computer Info Data\Reserved an information file where
Type computer. File Temporal an error occurred is to be
1 : SANYO
Folder backed up when a receipt
Sanyo * To use Synapse RIS,
select 0: Standard.
2 : TOSHIBA 131 Enable Yes Specifying whether or not
Toshiba MultipleStudy Permitted. to permit multiple studies
3 : FUJITSU to start at the same time.
No
Fujitsu Not permitted.
97 Recept C:\User\IIP\ReceptShare\ Specifying a folder in 197 Alert MSG Yes Specifying whether or not
Computer which the shared When Patient Displays the message when the to display the message
Info File information file is to Information patient information is changed. when the patient
Share Folder be saved when a receipt will be information is changed at
computer is connected. No
Modified the time of connecting to
Dose not display the message
98 Recept 1 to 300 ( 5) Specifying a time interval at SynapseRIS Synapse RIS.
when the patient information is
Computer Info which the polling process
changed.
File Polling is to be performed to the
Interval ([sec]) shared information file. 307 Simplified C:\Usr\IIP\ Specifying the directory
Ordering OrderingReportShare\ to share files of the actual
* Interval from 1 through Report Share result information when
4 can be set when Folder connecting to Synapse
Synapse RIS is RIS.
connected. Set the
308 Synapse RIS http://localhost:8080 Specifying the URL to
interval longer than 5
URL access the Synapse RIS.
when a receipt computer
is connected. : Default setting, * : Note
99 Recept 0 : XMLOnly Specifying a file type to be
Computer Only XML is used. handled as an information
Info File Type file when a receipt
1 : CSVOnly
Only CSV is used.
* To use Synapse RIS,
2 : Both
select 0: XMLOnly.
Both XML and CSV are used.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
10. Click . 12. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
A list of CONFIG OPTION setup items appears in the right-hand A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be
area of the window. saved.
Setup items for the CONFIG OPTION function
13. Click .

OE260014.ai
15. Click [ExitServiceUtility].

11. Set the following configuration items. The system returns to the Desktop screen.
7 Enable Yes Specifying whether or
Retake Enables the Retake Analysis not to enable the Retake
Analysis function. Analysis function.
Function
No *T o enable this option, use
Disables the Retake Analysis the log storage function
function. offered by the User Utility
to collect necessary logs
beforehand.
*T o enable this option,
specify Yes also for
Nos. 34 and 51 of IMAGE
MODALITY setup items.
* Use the LOG SHARE
setup function to register
the host name and
IP address of the CL
targeted for calculation
of Retake Analysis.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
3. Verification
3. Verification
Perform the startup verification of the Synapse RIS window.
1. From the menu, sequentially select All programs,

FujiFilm and FCR.
After about two minutes, the Synapse RIS window of CL-AP
opens.
2. Confirm that the URL set in the Service Utility is displayed

correctly on the Synapse RIS window.
OE260019.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

To make a backup, have the following item on hand.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual PC-I
Control Sheet

11/12/2004 12 Revision for software V1.0(C) and corrections I, II, 15
(FM4450)
11/30/2005 15 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) IIV, 1, 2, 9, 12
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR346CL Service Manual PC-II
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual PC-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual PC-IV
CR-IR346CL Performance Checklist Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
CR-IR346CL Performance Checklist CL startup verification

CL setup for connection with other equipment
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
Connection to One XG-1 RU or IP adress : ( )
CR-IR355RU/356/357 Subnet mask
Host name
: (
: (
)
)
Default gateway : ( )
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps performed and Registered AE title Pass Fail
settings determined during installation of the CR-IR346CL in accordance
with the instructions of the CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual. This Printer : ( )
checklist is not intended to replace the installation workflow described in Storage (server) : ( )
the service manual but to be followed concurrently. Check system Storage (viewer) : ( )
connections and output images not only during installation but also after
3. Checkout Procedures
servicing to ensure correct operation of the system prior to its delivery
to the customer. 6. Checkout Procedures under IN-A: Installation
Checking the connection between CL and RU Pass Fail
Installation information Checking the connection between CL and other equipment
Pass Fail
Equipment S/N : Software Ver. : X-CON connection (maker/model )
Site Name : Installed by : Checking output images Pass Fail
Site Number : Signature :
Printer
Room Name : Date of Installation/Servicing :
Storage (server)
Storage (viewer)
Checklist 4. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion
1. CL Hardware Setup 7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion
under IN-A: Installation
4. CL Hardware Setup under IN-A: Installation
Making backup copies of setup files Pass Fail
Checking the items supplied Pass Fail
Equipment main unit Accessories 5. Overall Test Pass Fail
2. Software Setup 6. Storing final Output Films at the Customer Site as
the Records of the Performance Verification Done
5. Software Setup under IN-A: Installation
Setting/checking the PC system date and time Pass Fail
Installing the option key Pass Fail
DICOM PRINT LOCAL PRINT
DICOM CR STORAGE DICOM IM PROCESSED
DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT
DICOM COMMITMENT
X-ONLINE(X-CON)
MFP
GPR
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual PC-1
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist Connection to two or more RUs, 5000plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist Connection

MFP
SHUTTER-PROC

PEM
IM COMPOSITION

GPR
FCR QC
to two or more RUs, 5000plus and CR-IR356/357/ IM-MAGNIFY(Lite) LUT-ADJUST(Lite) ANNOTATION(Lite)
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
DICOM Q/R RetakeAnalysis PDI
USB STORAGE A
PRECISE ENLARGEMENT ROI Synapse RIS
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps performed and
settings determined during installation of the CR-IR348CL in accordance CL startup verification Pass Fail
with the instructions of the CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual. This CL setup for connection with other equipment Pass Fail
checklist is not intended to replace the installation workflow described in IP adress : ( )
the service manual but to be followed concurrently. Check system Subnet mask : ( )
connections and output images not only during installation but also after Host name : ( )
servicing to ensure correct operation of the system prior to its delivery Default gateway : ( )
to the customer. Registered AE title Pass Fail
Printer : ( )
Installation information Storage (server) : ( )
Equipment S/N : Software Ver. : Storage (viewer) : ( )
Site Name : Installed by : MWM / MPPS : ( )
Site Number : Signature : 3. Checkout Procedures
Room Name : Date of Installation/Servicing :
6. Checkout Procedures under IN-A: Installation
CheckList Checking the connection between CL and RU Pass Fail

Checking the connection between CL and other equipment
1. CL Hardware Setup Pass Fail
3. CL Hardware Setup under IN-B: Installation X-CON connection (maker/model )
MWM connection (maker/model )
Checking the items supplied Pass Fail
PPS connection (maker/model )
Equipment main unit Accessories DAP connection (maker/model )
2. CL Software Setup Checking output images Pass Fail
4. CL Software Setup under IN-B: Installation Printer
Setting/checking the PC system date and time Pass Fail Storage (server)
Installing the option key Pass Fail Storage (viewer)
DICOM PRINT LOCAL PRINT 4. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion
DICOM CR STORAGE DICOM IM PROCESSED 7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion
DICOM MAMMO S DICOM MAMMO P under IN-A: Installation
DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT DICOM DVD STORAGE Making backup copies of setup files Pass Fail
DICOM COMMITMENT
5. Overall Test Pass Fail
DICOM ORDER MWM DICOM ID MWM DICOM MPPS
ID ONLINE X-ONLINE(X-CON) 6. Storing final Output Films at the Customer Site as
DELUX-QA(Lite) TILE-IM QA ES the Records of the Performance Verification Done
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist 9000 Series Connection
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist

9000 Series Connection
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL/348CL Config List
CR-IR346CL/348CL Config List Check No. Name Setup Value

28 Dicom Storage Output Connection Number
29 Image Number Generation Logic
1. IMAGE MODALITY 30 Display Pixel Size
32 Kind of Print Image (Image Combining Process)
Check No. Name Setup Value
33 Kind of Tansfer Image (Image Combining
1 System Common Date Format Process)
2 Alert MSG Display When Deleting Image 34 Enable Statistical Info.Output
3 Activate Error Recovery Retrial 35 Modality of Mammography Image
4 Institute/Site Name Strings 36 Administrator Password
5 IP Size by inch or Metric 37 Enable Security Function
6 Two Independent Mask Sizes Applicable to 38 Link User Account to Operators Name
Left and Right Images
39 UID Issuance about a function (except Image
7 Language Setup for Screen Message Processing) to change to the image
8 Institute/Site Name in Two-Byte Characters themselves
9 UID Issuance after Modifying ID Information 40 Rotate the 2nd Stitching Image
10 UID Issuance after Modifying Normalized 41 Rotate the 3rd Stitching Image
Parameter 42 Enable Stitching Edge Adjustment
11 UID Issuance after Modifying Image 43 Cut IP Edge for Stitching
Processing Parameter
44 Use Series Identification From F-RIS
12 UID Issuance Before Sending Processed Data
45 UID Issuance after Modifying Trimming
13 DICOM Series Generation Logic Parameter
14 System Recognition ID (A to Z) 46 UID Issuance after Modifying FNC Parameter
15 User Utility Password Required or Not 47 Quantity which paints inside the recognition
16 SOP Class UID for PPS When No FILE result of the chest wall [x0.01mm]
Attribute Output 48 Apply GS Filter To 8 x 10 / 1824 Image
17 Protocol Name for PPS 49 Kind of the image used for the displaying
18 Display Performed Procedure on Worklist Tab 50 Portable Finish Mode
19 Kind of Output Image (Energy Subtraction) 51 Use Reject Comment
20 Send 3 on 1 Format to External Device 52 Time Until Auto Log Off
21 Connection Between Reader and Console 53 Horizontal UMB Processing for VELOCITY &
22 Long Type Character Format PRELIO
23 Tag Mapped on Study Menu at MWM Use 55 Gradients(x10) of LUT used for Preview Image
24 Perform Mapping to Exposure Menu at MWM 56 Use Password Security
Use 57 Password for PAS Security
25 Display Dialog When Failed in Mapping to 67 Use Service Utility Password
Menu at MWM Use
72 Enable Exposure Index Function
26 Use Study InstanceUID from RIS
85 RSPC FileCopy Path
27 StudyInstanceUID Generation Logic
010-054-23E
08.31.2011 FM5893
2. FINP SETUP 4. PRINTER

Check No. Name Setup Value Check No. Name Setup Value
1 Justify Patient ID When Converting in FUJI 1 Pixel Clock Rate Changeover
Protocols 2 Enable Magnify Print
2 Justify Patient Name When Converting in 3 [Indent] Film Sorting Info.Setup
FUJI Protocols 4 [Indent] Menu Name Start Position on Film
3 Justify Menu Name When Converting in FUJI 5 [Indent] Unique ID for Film Sorting Condition
Protocols 6 Printer Interface Type (Old/New)
4 Justify Examination Number When Converting 7 Film Size Available in Printer
in FUJI Protocols 8 Film Base Color (Blue/Clear)
5 Justify Department Name When Converting in 9 Printer Buffer Size
FUJI Protocols
10 Black Margin Setup o n Film Edge
11 Trimming Range [mm]
12 Trimming Range for Mammography [mm]
3. QA FUNCTION 13 Print Barcode
14 Print EDR Mode
Check No. Name Setup Value 15 Print Image Process Condition
16 Print L, S, CS, SS Condition
1 Enable Image Proc. Pram Update Flag
17 Print Shot Time
2 Enable E-mail Button
18 Print Set Process
3 Use Dialog for Choosing Folder to Save Jpeg Image
19 Print Engineer ID
4 Destination Path of JPEG File
20 Print Menu Name
5 Filename Format of JPEG Information
21 Print Compression Rate
6 JPEG Image Processing Use CrtLut
22 Print Energy-Subtraction Parameter
7 Alert MSG Display When Output
Print Image Frame (3543film:1417, 1414,
8 Display Save Button 23 1843/3535film:1414/2636film:1014/
9 Alert MSG Display When Save 2025film:810, 1824 Single Format)
10 Alert MSG Display When Image Changed Print Image Frame (3543 film:1843 LR/2on1
11 Enable Dicom File Storage 24
Format)LR/2on1 Format)
12 Tranfer Syntax Used When Using Dicom File Storage Print Image Frame (3543 film:1417, 1843, 8
13 Save Multibyte Code When Using Dicom File Storage 25
10 4on1 Format)
14 Save Annotation Information When Using Print Image Frame (3543 film:Energy-
Dicom File Storage 26
Substraction 3on1 Format)
15 DCM File Image Processing Use CrtLut Print Image Frame (2636 film:1824, 2430/
16 Change Modality When Using Dicom File 27 2025 film:1824 Single Mammography
Storage (MG -> CR) Format)
17 Enable Change ImageDate and ImageTime Print Image Frame (2636 film:1824 2on1
28
18 Image File Type For Magnify Display 100% Mammography Format)
19 ProcessingPemForMagnify 29 No Print Scale (User Definition Rules)
20 Alert MSG Type When Patient Information will 30 Representation of Age
be Modified 31 Print Reverse Mark
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Print Film Character Field (1417-S/4on1, Gap between Image Edge and Film Edge
57
1843-LR/2on1/4on1, 810-4on1, 1414-S, (Mammography Format) [0.1mm]
32
1014-S, 1824-LR/2on1, 810/1824-S 58 Font Size of Requesting Service
Format) 59 Format Type of Operators Name
33 Print Film Char 2/Examination number 60 Display Image Feature
Size Selection of 3543, 3535, 2636, 2025 Film 2636 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
34 61
Character(Single Format) (Left Image of 2on1 Mammography Format)
3543 Film Character Field Position & Rotation 2636 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
35 62
(1417 Image) (Right Image of 2on1 Mammography Format)
3543 Film Character Field Position & Rotation 3535 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
36 63
(1714 Image) (Single Format)
3543 Film Character Field Position & Rotation 64 Enable Reduce To 810 Film
37
(1843 Image) 2636 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
3543,2025 Film Character Field Position & 65
(1014 Image)
38 Rotation (3543 Film:810-4on1, 2025 Film: 2636 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
810-Single) 66
(1410 Image)
2025 (Landscape)Film Character Field 2636 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
39 67
Position & Rotation (810,1824-Single) (2636 film:1824-LR)
Film Character Field position & rotation 2636 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
40 68
(User Definition Rules1) (2636 film:1824-2on1)
Film Character Field position & rotation Print Image Frame (2636 film:1824-LR, 2on1
41 69
(User Definition Rules2) Format)
Film Character Field position & rotation Reduction Rate (2636 film:1824-LR, 2on1
42 70
(User Definition Rules3) Format)
Film Character Field position & rotation 71 Print Priority in Dicom Print
43
(User Definition Rules4) 2530 Film Character Field Position Rotation
Film Character Field position & rotation 72
44 (1012, 2430-Single)
(User Definition Rules5) 2530(Landscape)Film Character Field Position
Film Character Field position & rotation 73
45 Rotation (1012, 2430-Single)
(User Definition Rules6) 74 Film String Format
46 Image Area Move to the Top of 3543 Film Lifesize Film Character Field Position &
47 Patients Name Length on Film 75
Rotation
48 Patients Name Length on Film (Multibyte) 76 Overlap width(mm) of the Lifesize Film
49 Patients Name Justify on Film 77 Apply GSFilter On SpecialPrint
50 Menu Name Length on Film 78 Film Annotation Position (12on1 Film Format)
51 Menu Name Length on Film (Multibyte) 79 Print Image Frame (12on1 Film Format)
52 Menu Name Justify on Film Film Character Field Position & Rotation
53 Department Name Length on Film 80
(12on1 Film Format)
54 Department Name Length on Film (Multibyte) 81 Reduction Rate (810,2on1 Film Format)
55 Department Name Justify on Film Enable Image Frame (810,100%-Size Image
Enable Auto Edit Function of Film String 82
56 2on1Film Format)
Format File Film Character Field Position & Rotation
83
(810,100%-Size Image 2on1 Film Format)
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Check No. Name Setup Value 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION

Film Character Field Position & Rotation
84
(814,100%-Size Image 2on1 Film Format) Check No. Name Setup Value
Film Character Field Position & Rotation
85 1 AutoMenuSelect
(78,100%-Size Image 4on1 Film Format)
Film Character Field Position & Rotation 2 Default Menu Code for Unregistrated Image
86
(710,100%-Size Image 2on1 Film Format) 3 Enable Distribution Code
Film Character Mode Setting On XCON 4 Enable Film String
87
Material Info.
5 Enable Function Setup
88 1530 ExFormat For 1410 Film
89 1530 ExFormat For 108 Film 6 Enable Pantomography Processing
Setting of minimum scale to be cut off the 7 Enable Performance Data (RIS)
90
ends of Life-size Output (cm). 8 Enable Automatic Selector Switching
91 Type of processing multi-frame format. 9 Enable Requesting Dept. Name Field
10 Enable Technologist Name Field
11 Image Rotation/Reversal Range
12 EDR Mode Setup
13 Image Data Filing Mode Setup
14 Function Setup
15 Examination No. Length
16 Examination No. Padding Method
17 Patient ID Length
18 Patient ID Padding Method
19 Reception No. Length
20 Reception No.Padding Method
21 Exposure List Erasure Setup
22 Requesting Dept. Name Field Setup
23 Technicians Name Filed Setup
24 Min.Set Number
25 Max.Set Number
26 MCR Customized Card
27 MCR Card Type (JIS/ISO)
28 MCR Card Format Setup
29 Study Number Issuance Logic Setup
30 Technicians Code Length
31 ID Online Acquisition Info. Code Setup
32 ID Online Serial Port No.
33 ID Online Interface Format
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
34 ID Online/Offline Switching Timeout 61 Replace All IP Size When Receive Size Change
35 ID Online Requesting Timeout Request from Builtin
36 ID Online Search Key 62 RIS Status Display String
37 ID Online Type 63 RIS Serial-TX Control Port
38 Host Name of RIS Server (Type-IDC4) 64 MWM RIS Trigger Port
39 Ip Address of RIS Server (Type-IDC4) 65 MWM RIS Trigger Timeout
40 Port Number for RIS Server (Type-IDC4) 66 MWM Execute Study Type
41 RIS Type Setup 67 MWM Request Exposure Does Status
42 Wait Time for Performed Exposure Info. from 68 MWM Exposure Menu Code Treatment
Xcon 69 Recept Computer Hostname
43 Xcon Status Display Strings 70 Recept Computer IP Address
44 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port 71 Recept Computer Port Number
45 Xcon Performed Info. Reception 72 Recept Computer Patient Info. Format
46 Xcon Exposure Info.Transfer 73 Recept Computer Request Timeout
47 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum KVP 74 Search Order of Patient Info.
[kV]) 75 Patient ID# is Unique
48 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum KVP 76 PPS Exposure Status Sequence
[kV])
77 IME Mode for Kana Patients Name
49 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum X-ray
Tube Current [mA]) 78 IME Mode for Kanji Patients Name
50 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum 79 RIS Type Setup (NEC)
X-ray Tube Current [mA]) 80 Enable Auto Menu Creation
51 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum 81 Enable Continuous Barcode Read
Exposure Time [msec]) 82 Seletion Type of Requesting Service
52 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum 83 Default Requesting Service
Exposure Time [msec]) 84 Barcode Type for Search on List
53 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum 85 Default Value for Underfined Pixel Density
Reserve 1)
86 Image Ajust Mode
54 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum
Reserve 1) 87 PPS Edit Billing Supplies
55 Distribution Code for FCR5000 SeriesConnection 88 PPS Edit Exposure Result
56 Enable Patient Info.DB Function 89 MWM Menu Name Mapping
57 Max. Number of Patient Info. 90 PPS Exposure Status Mapping Tag
58 Patients Name Format 91 PPS Exposure Status Mapping Kind
59 Enable Customaize Function of Study List and 92 PPS N-SET Timming
Patient Info.ListDB Function 93 Use Distribution Code Depart Name
60 IP Info. Request Timeout (Reader:CSL=N:N) 94 Film Size Setup
95 Recept Computer Type
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
96 Kanji Patients Name Auto Convert 135 Enable Swap Image In Order
97 Recept Computer Info File Share Folder 136 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port2
98 Recept Computer Info File Polling Interval ([sec]) 137 Exposure Guidance URL
99 Recept Computer Info File Type 138 FUJITSU Recept Computer Receiving Port Number
100 Recept Computer Info File Temporal Folder 139 FUJITSU Recept Computer Receiving Timeout
101 Enable Study Reservation (Easy Operation Only) 140 Enable IP Use Count List
102 Use Space Padding ID (Easy Operation Only) 141 Enable IP Use Count Reset
105 Do Next Study At Study Screen With End Button 142 Xcon Serial_TX Parity
Click 143 TOSHIBA-RIS IpAddress
106 Automatic Issuance Patient ID 144 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectPortForRIS
107 Enable mAs Value Recalculation 145 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectPortForIIP
108 Xcon Format Type 146 TOSHIBA-RIS RisDefaultURL
109 Xcon Interlock Command Transfer 147 TOSHIBA-RIS TemporaryFolder
111 Xcon Serial_TX Baudrate 148 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureStartMsgTimeOut
112 Xcon No-Response Timeout 149 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureStartMsgRetryCount
113 Xcon Data Reception Timeout 150 TOSHIBA-RIS PatListDisplayMsgTimeOut
114 Media Auto Mount 151 TOSHIBA-RIS PatListDisplayMsgRetryCount
115 Synapse Host for Web Query 152 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureEndMsgTimeOut
116 Web Query Root Path 153 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureEndMsgRetryCount
117 Xcon DoseValue1 154 TOSHIBA-RIS ApplicationEndMsgTimeOut
118 Xcon DoseValue2 155 TOSHIBA-RIS ApplicationEndMsgRetryCount
119 Enable Velocity Sensitivity Button 156 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectionWatchMsgTimeOut
120 Xcon No-Data Default Output 157 TOSHIBA-RIS ExternalInputMsgTimeOut
122 External Character Conversion 158 TOSHIBA-RIS ExternalInputMsgRetryCount
123 MWM Not Received Condition Delete Study 159 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectionWatchMsgRetryCount
124 Enable Clear View for Mammography 160 TOSHIBA-RIS IFFilesPreservationPeriod
125 Clear View Mode: Offset GS (100) 161 TOSHIBA-RIS ResultType
126 Clear View Mode: Offset GA (10) 162 TOSHIBA-RIS RISInitializeStartMsgTimeOut
127 Clear View Mode: Offset DRE (10) 163 Enable Auto IP Shelter for 550x
128 Clear View Mode: Fix DRT 165 Enable Auto Maker
129 Clear View Mode: Offset MDE (10) 167 PDI Drive Letter
130 Clear View Mode: Fix MDT 168 PDI Use CrtLut
131 Enable MultipleStudy 169 PDI Image Density
132 Enable SpecialPrint 170 PDI Use Multibyte
133 Use 12on1 Film Print in MediaList 171 PDI Transfer Syntax
134 MWM StudyInstanceUID Regeneration
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Check No. Name Setup Value 7. CONFIG OPTION

177 DAP Serial_TX Parity
178 DAP Serial_TX Control port Check No. Name Setup Value
179 DAP Message Trial Count 2 Enable Timming Function
180 DAP Address 3 Enable Reader QC Function
181 Wait Time for Response From DAP
4 Enable Display Previous Study Function
182 DAP Status Display Strings
5 Enable Synapse WebQuery
185 Enable Display Reverse Marker
186 Reverse Marker Position [%] (X\Y) 6 Enable S/L Value Restriction Function
187 Reverse Marker Color (Fore Color-Back Color) 7 Enable RetakeAnalysis Function
188 Mass Order Site Code Mapping Tag 8 Enable MammoImage Alignment Function
197 Alert MSG When 9 Enable 12on1 Film Print Function
Patient Information will be Modified SynapseRIS
10 Enable Exposure Guidance
198 Grid Data Sort Order
199 Overwrite of the Patient Info 12 Enable MammoQC Function
307 Simplified Ordering Report Share Folder 13 Enable Connecting DAP Directly
308 Synapse RIS URL
8. CONFIG QC
1 Visible QCRecord Delete Button
2 Destination Path of QC Record File
3 Country
4 Visible QCRecord Delete Button
5 Destination Path of QC Record File
6 Select CSV Output Folder
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
9. CONFIG PDA
1 BatteryWarning1
2 BatteryWarning2
3 StudyFilePath
4 CustomFilePath
5 LoginFlag
6 PDAShare Interval
10. CONFIG QR
1 Retrieved Image Viewer Finish Mode
2 Reverse LUT For Processed Image
3 The Patient Format For Search Condition
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL/348CL System Configuration List
CR-IR346CL/348CL System Configuration List

Equipment Host Name IP adress Function AE name Port No. Service Class Transfer Syntax
CL (This
CR Console
equipment)
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
5000DICOM
5000DICOM
5000DICOM
DICOM PRINT
DICOM PRINT
DICOM PRINT
DICOM Storage
DICOM Storage
DICOM Storage
DICOM MWM
DICOM PPS
FINP
Local Print
CL IDT CONNECTING
CL IDT CONNECTING
CL IDT CONNECTING

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Ir - 346-348CL - 23e Win 7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir - 346-348CL - 23e Win 7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FCR XG-1/CR CL

Document No. 010-054-23E

Precautions in Using the Service Manual

The equipment should only be used by persons having recognized qualifications

Incorrect operation, or failure of the user to maintain the equipment in accordance

FCR is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.

Copyright 2000-2011 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted

Important Notice Concerning this Manual

Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual) MD: Machine Description....................................... 2

MT: Machine Troubleshooting........................... 3

Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility........... 42 MU: Maintenance Utility......................................... 8

Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:................................ 47 SP: Service Parts........................................................ 12

IN-A: Installation Connection to

Appx IN: Installation Appendix.................... 19

PC: Performance Check......................................... 35

MD: Machine Description

1. System Configuration....................................................... 1 2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF................................................ 28

MT: Machine Troubleshooting

3. Information Useful for Error Recovery............................ 11 5.2 Service Parts Replacement........................................... 57

4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)....................................... 24 5.2.9 Memory.............................................................. 63

Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table

RI: Reinstalling the Software

1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC).................................... 1 4.1 For Windows 2000/XP.................................................. 128

MU: Maintenance Utility

1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility.................................. 1 7. Verifying the Connection to

6. Retrieving EDR Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data...... 70

15. Setting the POCKET id Console

FR: Function-specific Reference

Print Output Function................................................... 1-1 Display Gradation Correction Setup....................... 5-1

3. Film Annotation Character Setup

Setup of Rules Applied for

Using the DICOM Log Mode....................................... 4-1 Setup of Exposure Guidance

3. Port and Service Utility Settings................................... 20-23

1. Adding a Serial Connector............................................ 20-1 Accession Number Character String Adding

SP: Service Parts

1. Service Parts List.............................................................. 1

PM: Preventive Maintenance

1. Preventive Maintenance Items......................................... 1

2. Checking for a Fatal Error................................................ 2

5. Executing the Error Analysis........................................... 5

7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of

IN-A: Installation Connection to One XG-1

6. Checkout Procedures....................................................... A41

7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log

IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and

4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit)............................ B58

IN-C: Installation Connection to

Appx IN: Installation Appendix

Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Appendix 5 Procedures for Changing

1. Incorporating into the Network...................... Appx IN5-1

Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor

1. Connecting the Barcode Reader to

1. Installing the Wall-Mounting Bracket............ Appx IN4-1 Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP

Appendix 10 Connecting 4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600

OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment

1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 1-3 1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 2-3

4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 2-16

CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage:

1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 3-3 1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 4-3

2. Software Setup............................................................... 3-4 2. Software Setup............................................................... 4-4

3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 3-17 3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 4-18

4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 4-19